Ï ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÓÌÏÓ ÃÉÁ ÏËÏÕÓ

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ

ÓÇÌÅÉÙÌÁ ÅÊÄÏÔÇ
Ôï áíÜ ÷åßñáò ðåñéïäéêü ãåííÞèçêå áðü ìßá äéôôÞ áíÜãêç ðïõ ðïéêéëïôñüðùò ðñïÝâáëå
åðéôáêôéêÜ ìðñïóôÜ ìáò ôá ôåëåõôáßá ÷ñüíéá.
ÊáôÜ ðñþôïí áðü ôï åðáíáëáìâáíüìåíï áßôçìá (Ýììåóï Þ Üìåóï) ðïëëþí áíèñþðùí
ðïõ ðñïóáíáôïëßæïíôáé óôçí ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÁíáæÞôçóç øÜ÷íïíôáò åðéìüíùò íá áíåýñïõí ìéá ÄÉ­ÃËÙÓ­ÓÏ­(ÅË­ËÇ­ÍÏ­ÁíÃËÉ­ÊÏ)­
âáèýôåñç åðéóêüðçóç êáé ìéá ïõóéáóôéêüôåñç ôåêìçñéùìÝíç ãñáðôÞ áðÜíôçóç - áíôßëçøç ÔÑÉ­ÌÇ­ÍÉÁÉÏ­
óôá ÌõóôÞñéá ôçò Äçìéïõñãßáò êáé ôïõ åáõôïý ôïõò óýìöùíá ðÜíôá ìå ôçí äéäáóêáëßá ôçò ÖÉ­ËÏ­ÓÏ­ÖÉ­ÊÏ­-­ÌÅ­ÔÁ­ÖÕ­ÓÉ­ÊÏ­
Åëåýèåñçò ÂéùìáôéêÞò ÌåôáöõóéêÞò - ÖéëïóïöéêÞò ÓêÝøçò. ÐÅ­ÑÉÏ­ÄÉ­ÊÏ
ÊáôÜ äåýôåñïí ç ðáñï÷Þ ìéáò ðñþôçò ÓõíïëéêÞò Ðáñïõóßáóçò ôïõ ôåñÜóôéïõ óõããñáöé- Å­ÔÏÓ­1ïí,­ÊÁ­ËÏ­ÊÁÉ­ÑÉ­2001,­
êïý (ðëÝïí ôùí 75 åóùôåñéêþí óõããñáììÜôùí) êáé ðñáêôéêïý ¸ñãïõ ôïõ óýã÷ñïíïõ Ìåôá- Á­ÑÉÈ­ÌÏÓ­ÔÅÕ×ÏÕÓ:­1,­
öõóéêïý Öéëüóïöïõ êáé Ðíåõìáôéêïý ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ (1913-1993). ÔÉ­ÌÇ:­1600­ÄÑ×.­EURO­4,7
Ðéï óõãêåêñéìÝíá ôï ðáñüí ðåñéïäéêü, ôï "ÍÝï Ïìáêïåßï", ðåñéëáìâÜíåé óôï ðñþôï ìÝñïò ÅÊÄÏÓÅÉÓ:
ôïõ ôåý÷ïõò ôïõ óçìáíôéêÜ Üñèñá ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò - ÌåôáöõóéêÞò ÐáíåðéóôÞìçò þóôå íá Ï­ÌÁ­ÊÏ­ÅÉÏ­ÔÑÉ­ÊÁ­ËÙÍ­(&­ÈÅÓ­ÓÁ­ËÏ­ÍÉ­ÊÇÓ)
êáôáôïðéóôåß óå âÜèïò ï êÜèå åíäéáöåñüìåíïò ãéá ôéò Áðüøåéò üëùí ôùí áëçèéíÜ ÐíåõìáôéêÜ ÌÅ­ÔÁ­ÖÕ­ÓÉ­ÊÅÓ­Å­ÑÅÕ­ÍÅÓ,­
ÃÉÏ­ÃÊÁ,­ÓÉÁ­ÔÓÏÕ
ÌåãÜëùí êáé éäßùò ôïõ óýã÷ñïíïõ ¸ëëçíá Åóùôåñéêïý Öéëüóïöïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ,
ÅÊ­ÄÏ­ÓÅÉÓ­-­ÐÙ­ËÇ­ÓÅÉÓ­ÂÉ­ÂËÉÙÍ­
ï ïðïßïò Ý÷åé áöÞóåé ìíçìåéþäåéò, áíáëõôéêÝò, ðñùôüãíùñåò êáé âáèýôáôåò ÅóùôåñéêÝò &­ÐÅ­ÑÉÏ­ÄÉ­ÊÙÍ
ÐáñáêáôáèÞêåò (ðñïöïñéêÝò êáé ãñáðôÝò) ãéá ðëåéÜäá ìåôáöõóéêþí æçôçìÜôùí. ÊÅ­ÖÁË­ËÇ­ÍÉÁÓ­21
Óôï äåýôåñï ìÝñïò ôïõ ðåñéÝ÷åé ìéá ðëÞñç Ýã÷ñùìç öùôïãñáöéêÞ áðåéêüíéóç üëùí ôùí (ÐÑÙ­ÇÍ­Á´­ÐÁ­ÑÏ­ÄÏÓ­ÖËÅ­ÃÉÏÕ­ÔÅÑ­ÌÁ)
åîùöýëëùí ôïõ óõíüëïõ ôùí âéâëßùí ôïõ ðíåõìáôéêïý ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ 42100­ÔÑÉ­ÊÁ­ËÁ­(ÅË­ËÁ­ÄÁ)
Á.Ö.Ì.:­045357881,­ÄÏÕ­ÔÑÉ­ÊÁ­ËÙÍ
ðïõ Ý÷ïõí Ýùò ôþñá åêäïèåß óõíïäåõüìåíç áðü áíôéðñïóùðåõôéêÝò ðåñéëÞøåéò ìå ôá Ôçë.:­0431­-­75505,­031­-­410497,­093­-­2418994
áíÜëïãá ðåñéå÷üìåíá ãéá ôï êáèÝíá áðü ôá Ýñãá ôïõ êáèþò êáé ôá äýï âéâëßá êáé ó÷åôéêÝò
ÅÊÄÏÔÇÓ - ÄÉÅÕÈÕÍÔÇÓ:
ìåëÝôåò ôïõ ìáèçôÞ ôïõ Çëßá Ë. ÊáôóéÜìðá.
Ç­ËÉÁÓ­Ë.­ÊÁ­ÔÓÉÁ­ÌÐÁÓ
Åðßóçò ðáñïõóéÜæïíôáé ïé Ó÷ïëÝò (Ïìáêïåßá) ôùí ìáèçôþí ôïõ Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ ðïõ
óõíå÷ßæïõí áðñüóêïðôá ôï ¸ñãï Ôïõ êáèþò êáé ôï óýíïëï ôùí äñáóôçñéïôÞôùí ðïõ ÕÐÅÕÈÕÍÏÓ ÓÕÍÔÁÎÇÓ:
Ç­ËÉÁÓ­Ë.­ÊÁ­ÔÓÉÁ­ÌÐÁÓ
áíáðôýóóïõí.
Ôï ðáñüí ðåñéïäéêü ïíïìÜóôçêå "ÍÝï Ïìáêïåßï" åéò áíÜìíçóç ôïõ äéìçíéáßïõ ðåñéïäéêïý ÕÐÅÕÈÕÍÇ ÕËÇÓ:
"Ïìáêïåßï" ðïõ åðß óåéñÜ 8 åôþí (1977 - 1985) åîÝäéäå ðáëáéüôåñá ï ðíåõìáôéêüò ÄÜóêáëïò ÓÏ­ÖÉÁ­ÊÁ­ÔÓÉÁ­ÌÐÁ
Í. Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò, ôùí íåïðõèáãüñåéùí Öéëïóïöéêþí Ó÷ïëþí ðïõ ßäñõóå óôçí ÅëëÜäá ISSN:­1109-1223.
(Ïìáêïåßá Áèçíþí, Ëáìßáò êáé ÔñéêÜëùí) êáé ôïõ Ðõèáãüñá ðïõ ðñùôïðáñïõóßáóå ôçí Èåñ­ìÜ­ ðá­ñá­êá­ëïý­íôáé­ ü­óïé­ èÝ­ëïõí­ íá­ ÷ñç­óé­ìï­ðïéÞ­-
ëÝîç Ïìáêïåßï. óïõí­ìÝ­ñç­ôïõ­ðá­ñü­íôïò­äß­ãëùó­óïõ­ðå­ñéï­äé­êïý­íá­Ýñ­÷ï­-
Åäþ ïöåßëïõìå íá óçìåéþóïõìå üôé åðåéäÞ ç Ýêäïóç ôïõ ðåñéïäéêïý áêïëïõèåß ôçí êáèáñÞ íôáé­óå­å­ðá­öÞ­ìå­ôïí­åê­äï­ôé­êü­ïß­êï­(Ï­ìá­êï­åß­ï­Ôñé­êÜ­ëùí)
êáé­ôïí­õ­ðåý­èõ­íï­áõ­ôïý­Ç­ëß­á­Ë.­Êá­ôóéÜ­ìðá­êá­èþò­å­ðß­óçò
ÌåôáöõóéêÞ ÃñáììÞ, áðïññßðôïíôáò êÜèå äéáöçìéóôéêÞ êáôá÷þñéóç, óôçñßæåôáé ãéá ôá Ýîïäá íá­á­íá­ãñÜ­öïõí­ôï­ðå­ñéï­äé­êü­êáé­ôá­Ýñ­ãá­ôïõ­Íé­êï­ëÜ­ïõ­Á.
ÝêäïóÞò ôïõ áðïêëåéóôéêÜ êáé ìüíïí óôïí "ñïìáíôéóìü" ôçò áãïñÜò ôïõ ðåñéïäéêïý áðü Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ­áð'­ü­ðïõ­åê­ðï­ñåý­å­ôáé­ü­ëç­ç­ðá­ñïõ­óéá­æü­ìå­íç
Å­óù­ôå­ñé­êÞ­ Ãíþ­óç,­ þ­óôå­ íá­ ìðï­ñïýí­ ïé­ åí­äéá­öå­ñü­ìå­íïé
êÜèå åíäéáöåñüìåíï ãéá ôçí áíåýñåóç ôïõ "Üëáôïò ôçò æùÞò". íá­å­íç­ìå­ñù­èïýí­ðëÞ­ñùò­á­ðü­ôçí­áñ­÷é­êÞ­Ðç­ãÞ.
Ôï ðñþôï ìáò ôåý÷ïò åßíáé áíáãíùñéóôéêü ôïõ åíäéáöÝñïíôüò óáò ãéá ôçí ÌåôáöõóéêÞ ¼óïé èá åðéèõìïýóáí ôï Ýñãï ôïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. Ìáñ-
ÁëÞèåéá êáé áöïñÜ ðñùôßóôùò ôçí ðáñïõóßáóç ôïõ ðïëõó÷éäïýò êáé ðïëõäéÜóôáôïõ ãéùñÞ íá ìåôáöñáóôåß êáé íá åêäïèåß óôá áããëéêÜ Þ óå
ïðïéáäÞðïôå Üëëç ãëþóóá ðáñáêáëïýíôáé íá åðéêïéíù-
ðñïöïñéêïý êáé ãñáðôïý Ýñãïõ ôïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ åíþ ðáñÜëëçëá ðëáéóéþíåôáé íÞóïõí ìå ôïí õðåýèõíï ôïõ ðåñéïäéêïý Çëßá ÊáôóéÜìðá
êáé áðü óåéñÜ åíäéáöåñüíôùí åóùôåñéêþí Üñèñùí. ãéá íá ôïõò öÝñåé óå åðáöÞ ìå ôïõò êëçñïíüìïõò ôïõ
êáé íá óõíåííïçèïýí áðåõèåßáò ìáæß ôïõò ãéá ôï èÝìá
Âõèïìåôñþíôáò ôï åíäéáöÝñïí óáò ðïõ èá ðñïêýøåé áðü ôçí æÞôçóç ôïõ ðñþôïõ áõôïý áõôü.
ðåñéïäéêïý åðéöõëáóóüìáóôå óôï ìÝëëïí íá óáò ðáñÜó÷ïõìå ìéá ôáêôéêÞ ïõóéáóôéêÞ
ÌåôáöõóéêÞ ÅíçìÝñùóç óå ðëçèþñá êáßñéùí åóùôåñéêþí èåìÜôùí, áñêåß íá ìáò äþóåôå ôçí Ç ÉÓÔÏÓÅËÉÄÁ ÌÁÓ (SITE)
http://www.omakoio.gr
åõêáéñßá ãé' áõôü ðñïâÜëëïíôÜò ôï åöüóïí âÝâáéá åêôéìÜôå üôé áîßæåé ôïí êüðï. ÔÁ E-MAIL ÌÁÓ:
ÈåùñÞèçêå óêüðéìï üëá ôá êåßìåíá ðïõ ðåñéëáìâÜíïíôáé óôï ðáñüí ðñþôï ôåý÷ïò ìáò omakoio@omakoio.gr Þ omakoio@aias.gr
íá ìåôáöñáóôïýí êáé íá ðáñïõóéáóôïýí ôáõôü÷ñïíá êáé óôçí áããëéêÞ ãëþóóá ãéá ôïõò Ôï­ðá­ñüí­ðå­ñéï­äé­êü­åê­äü­èç­êå­óå­2000­á­íôß­ôõ­ðá
ïìïãåíåßò ðïõ äåí êáôÝ÷ïõí êáëÜ ôçí ÅëëçíéêÞ ãëþóóá êáèþò êáé ãéá ôçí åíçìÝñùóç êÜèå Ç­ìå­ôÜ­öñá­óÞ­ôïõ­á­ðü­ôá­Åë­ëç­íé­êÜ­óôá­Áã­ãëé­êÜ­Ý­ãé­íå
áëëüãëùóóïõ ãéá ôçí ýðáñîç ôïõ ôåñÜóôéïõ êáé óðÜíéïõ áõôïý õðåñâáôéêïý - õðåñïýóéïõ á­ðü­ôçí­ê.­Å­ëÝ­íç­Êáë­êÜ­íç­(ôïõ­óõë­ëü­ãïõ­Åë­ëÞ­íùí­ìå­ôá­-
öñá­óôþí).
¸ñãïõ. Ãéá­ï­ðïéá­äÞ­ðï­ôå­å­ðé­êïé­íù­íß­á­ìá­æß­ìáò,­ãéá­óõí­äñï­ìÝò
Ôï ðáñüí ôåý÷ïò ãéá ëüãïõò ðïõ ó÷åôßæïíôáé ìå ôçí áíáãêáßá ðáñïõóßáóç åíüò óõíïëéêïý óôï­ðå­ñéï­äé­êü,­ãéá­ðá­ñáã­ãå­ëß­åò­âé­âëß­ùí­ôïõ­Íé­êï­ëÜ­ïõ­Á.
ìåôáöõóéêïý Ýñãïõ áñéèìåß ðåñß ôéò 100 óåëßäåò. Ôõ÷üí åðüìåíá èá ðåñéïñßæïíôáé óôïí Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ­êáé­äé­êþí­ìáò­êáé­ãéá­êÜ­èå­åß­äïõò­ðëç­ñï­öï­ñß­á
Þ­äéåõ­êñß­íé­óç­ìðï­ñåß­ôå­íá­á­ðåõ­èý­íå­óôå­óôçí­ðá­ñá­êÜ­ôù
áñéèìü ôùí óåëßäùí ôïõò. äéåý­èõí­óç:
Ãéá ïðïéáäÞðïôå ðáñáããåëßá âéâëßùí, ðëçñïöïñßá Þ äéåõêñßíéóç ìðïñåßôå íá åðéêïéíùíåßôå
Ïìáêïåßá ÔñéêÜëùí êáé Èåóóáëïíßêçò
ìáæß ìáò óôá áíáãñáöüìåíá äßðëá óôïé÷åßá ìáò, ôçëåöùíéêÜ Þ ìÝóù e-mail.
Çëßáò Ë. ÊáôóéÜìðáò
Êåöáëëçíßáò 21, 42100 Ôñßêáëá (ÅëëÜäá)
Çëßáò Ë. ÊáôóéÜìðáò Ôçë.: 0431 - 75505, 031 - 410497, 093 - 2418994
http://www.omakoio.gr
omakoio@omakoio.gr Þ omakoio@aias.gr
THE ESOTERISM FOR EVERYBODY

NEW OMAKOIO

NOTE OF THE PUBLISHER

The magazine you hold was born by a twofold need that appeared in front of us in various
A­BILINGUAL­(GREEK-ENGLISH)­ ways, the recent years.
QUARTERLY First, from the repeated request (indirect or direct) of many people who are orientated to
PHILOSOPHICAL­-­METAPHYSICAL the Esoteric Search, seeking insistently to find a deeper inspection and a more substantial
MAGAZINE proved written answer-apprehension to the Mysteries of the Creation and of themselves,
1ST­YEAR,­SUMMER­2001,­ according always to the teaching of the Free Experiencing Metaphysical Philosophic
ISSUE­No:­1,­ Thought.
PRICE:­1600­DRS.,­EURO­4,7 Second, the provision of a first Total Presentation of the immense writing (more than 75
OMAKOIO­OF­TRIKALA­&­OF­THESSALONIKI esoteric writings) and practical Work of modern Metaphysical Philosopher and Spiritual
EDITIONS Master Nikolaos A. Margioris (1913-1993).
METAPHYSICAL­SEARCHES,­ Particularly, this magazine, the "New Omakoio" contains in the first part of its issue some
YOGA­AND­SIATSU important articles of the Esoteric-Metaphysical Omniscience, so that everyone interested
EDITIONS­-­SALES­OF­BOOKS­
may be informed thoroughly about the points of view of all the really Spiritually Great and
AND­OF­MAGAZINES
21­KEFALLINIAS­STREET­ especially of the modern Greek Esoteric Philosopher Nikolaos A. Margioris, who has left
(FORMERLY­A’­PARODOS­FLEGHIOU­TERMA) some monumental analytical, unfamiliar and deepest Esoteric Deposits (oral and written), for
42100­TRIKALA,­GREECE plenty of metaphysical matters.
TAXATION­REGESTER­NUMBER: In its second part it contains a full colored photographic depiction of all the covers of the
045357881,­(E.S.T.)
Ôel.­Number:­0431­-­75505,­031­-­410497,­
total books of spiritual Master Nikolaos A. Margioris that have been published until now,
093­-­2418994 accompanied by representative summaries with the analogous contents for each work of his,
PUBLISHER - DIRECTOR:
as well as his two books and some relative essays of his student Ilias L. Katsiampas.
ILIAS­L.­KATSIAMPAS Also, the Schools (Omakoia) of Margiori's students appear, who continue unobstructed-
ly His Work, as well as the total of the activities that they develop.
RESPONSIBLE OF EDITING:
The present magazine was named "New Omakoio", to the memory of the bimestrial mag-
ILIAS­L.­KATSIAMPAS
azine "Omakoio" that for a series of 8 years (1977-1985) spiritual Master N. A. Margioris edit-
RESPONSIBLE OF MATTER:
ed, of the neopythagorean Philosophical Schools that he founded in Greece (Omakoeia of
SOFIA­KATSIAMPA
Athens, Lamia and Trikala) and of Pythagoras who first presented the word Omakoio.
ISSN:­1109-1223. Here, we must note that as the edition of the magazine follows the clear Metaphysical Line,
All­those­who­want­to­use­some­parts­of­the­present rejecting every advertising register, it depends for the expenses of its issue, exclusively on
bilingual­magazine­are­requested­to­come­in­touch­with­the the "romanticism" of the purchase of the magazine by everyone interested in the discovery
publishing­company­(Omakoio­of­Trikala)­and­its­responsi-
ble­Ilias­L.­Katsiampas,­as­well­as­to­write­the­magazine­and of the "life salt".
the­work­of­Nikolaos­A.­Margioris,­from­which­all­the­pre- Our first issue is reconnoitering of your interest about the Metaphysical Truth and con-
sented­Esoteric­Knowledge­comes,­so­that­those­who­are cerns firstly the presentation of the multifarious and multidimensional oral and written work
interested­be­able­to­be­informed­completely­by­the­initial
Source. of Nikolaos A. Margioris, while at the same time, it is framed also by a series of interesting
All those who would like that the work of Nikolaos A. esoteric articles.
Margioris be translated and published into English or
into any other language, are requested to communicate By sounding your interest that will result from the demand of this first magazine, we reserve
with the responsible of the magazine, Ilias Katsiampas, to the future, to provide you a regular substantial Metaphysical Advising about many serious
in order that he may bring him in touch with his heirs and esoteric matters, provided that you give us the opportunity for it, promoting it, if you judge
that they come to an understanding directly with them
about this subject. that is worth it.
It was considered as purposeful that all the texts comprised in this first issue of ours, be
OUR SITE
http://www.omakoio.gr translated and presented at the same time, in English, for the homogenous who do not speak
OUR E-MAILS: Greek well, as well as for the advising of everyone speaking a foreign language for the exis-
omakoio@omakoio.gr or omakoio@aias.gr
tence of this immense and rare transcendent - super-substantial Work.
The­present­magazine­was­published­in­2000­copies. The present issue for some reasons relating to the necessary presentation of a total meta-
Its­translation­from­Greek­into­English­was­made­by­Mrs. physical Work, counts almost 100 pages. Any happening next issues will be limited to the
Helen­Kalkani­(member­of­the­union­of­Greek­translators).
For­ any­ contact­ with­ us,­ for­ the­ subscriptions­ in­ the number of their pages.
magazine,­for­the­orders­of­Nikolaos­A.­Margioris'­books For any order of books, any information or clarification, you may contact us to our data writ-
and­ of­ ours­ and­ for­ any­ information­ or­ clarification,­ you
may­apply­to­the­following­address:
ten beside, by telephone or by e-mail.

Omakoio of Trikala and of Thessaloniki Ilias L. Katsiampas

Ilias L. Katsiampas
21 Kefallinias street, 42100 Trikala, Greece
Tel. No. 0431 - 75505, 031 - 410497, 093 - 2418994
http://www.omakoio.gr
omakoio@omakoio.gr or omakoio@aias.gr
 ÐÁÑÁÊËÇÓÇ
Ðáñáêáëïýíôáé üóïé ôõ÷üí åß÷áí ôçí ôý÷ç íá
ãíùñßóïõí Üìåóá Þ Ýììåóá ôïí ÄÜóêáëï Íéêüëáï­Á.
ÌáñãéùñÞ áðü ôá ðñþôá ôïõ ÷ñüíéá óôçí ÅëëÜäá Þ
íùñßôåñá üôáí æïýóå óôçí ÁëåîÜíäñåéá ôçò Áéãýðôïõ
Þ êáé óôçí Éíäßá êáé èåùñïýí üôé Ý÷ïõí êÜðïéá
ðñüóèåôç ìáñôõñßá Þ ðåñéóóüôåñá óôïé÷åßá ãéá ôï
ðñüóùðï êáé ôï Ýñãï ôïõ íá Ýñèïõí óå åðáöÞ ìáæß
ìáò êáé åÜí èÝëïõí íá ìáò ôá ãíùóôïðïéÞóïõí, þóôå
ôï íÝï Âéïãñáöéêü Óçìåßùìá ðïõ åôïéìÜæåôáé áðü ôïí
õðåýèõíï ôùí Ïìáêïåßùí ÔñéêÜëùí êáé Èåóóáëïíßêçò
íá Ý÷åé ìéá ìåãáëýôåñç ëåðôïìÝñåéá óôçí áíÜëõóç
ôùí ãåãïíüôùí ôçò æùÞò êáé ôçò äñÜóçò ôïõ êáè' üëç
ôçí äéáäñïìÞ ôçò æùÞò Ôïõ ðïõ èá áðåéêïíßæåé
ðëçñÝóôåñá ôï âßï êáé ôï Ýñãï Ôïõ.
ÅÕ×ÁÑÉÓÔÉÅÓ
Åðéèõìþ íá åõ÷áñéóôÞóù èåñìÜ üëïõò üóïé
âïÞèçóáí ãéá ôçí Ýêäïóç êáé ðñïþèçóç ôïõ
ðåñéïäéêïý êáé éäéáßôåñá ôïõò ËáìðñéíÞ­êáé Óðýñï
Ðïëõæþç, ôïõò óõíåñãÜôåò ìïõ ôùí Ïìáêïåßùí
Áèçíþí­êáé Ëáìßáò,­ÓìÜñù­ÊïóìÜïãëïõ­êáé ÄçìÞôñç
ÔóáðÜñá­áíôßóôïé÷á, êáèþò åðßóçò êáé üëïõò ôïõò
õðåýèõíïõò êáé ôá ìÝëç ôùí õðïëïßðùí Ïìáêïåßùí
(Êþóôá­êáé Ìáñßá­ÄéìåëÞ,­ÃéÜííç­Óãïýñï­êáé Óïýëá
ÐïõëéÜóç­êáé­Ðçíåëüðç­ÊáêëÝá) ãéá ôçí áìÝñéóôç
óôÞñéîÞ ôïõò óôçí ðáñïýóá ðñïóðÜèåéÜ ìáò. Åðßóçò
ôçí óýæõãü ìïõ Óïößá, ôçí ÂÜíá­ÊáôóéÜìðá êáé ôçí
ÃêÝëõ­Äñüóïõ ãéá ôçí ðïëýôéìç âïÞèåéÜ ôïõò.
Ï Åêäüôçò
ÓÇÌÅÉÙÓÇ
Ïöåßëïõìå íá åðéóçìÜíïõìå üôé êáôáâÜëáìå êÜèå
äõíáôÞ ðñïóðÜèåéá ãéá íá ìåôáäïèåß ç ðáñáäïèåßóá
ÅóùôåñéêÞ Ãíþóç ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ­ Á.
ÌáñãéùñÞ áðü ôçí åëëçíéêÞ óôçí áããëéêÞ ãëþóóá,
äéüôé èåùñïýìå óçìáßíïõóá áíÜãêç íá åíçìåñùèåß ï
êÜèå Üíèñùðïò ãéá ôçí ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÁëÞèåéá ôçò ÆùÞò
êáé ôùí Ìõóôçñßùí ôçò Äçìéïõñãßáò.
Ëüãù ôçò äõóêïëéþí ðïõ åìðåñéÝ÷ïõí ïé
ìåôáöõóéêÝò Ýííïéåò ðñïóðáèÞóáìå óôï ìÝôñï ôïõ
äõíáôïý íá áðïöýãïõìå áôÝëåéåò Þ ëÜèç óôï
ìåôáöñáóìÝíï êåßìåíï áëëÜ äåí ìðïñïýìå íá
áðïêëåßóïõìå ôçí ýðáñîÞ ôïõò. Ãé' áõôü æçôïýìå ôçí
êáôáíüçóç ôïõ áíáãíþóôç êáé ðéóôåýïõìå áêñÜäáíôá
üôé ðÝñáí ôùí åðéìÝñïõò áâëåøéþí Þ áôåëåéþí ðïõ
åíäå÷üìåíá íá õðÜñ÷ïõí óôï ìåôáöñáóìÝíï êåßìåíï
ç ïõóßá ôïõ ðåñéå÷ïìÝíïõ ôùí Üñèñùí èá ôïí
áðïæçìéþóåé êáé èá ôïí îåäéøÜóåé åóùôåñéêÜ åíþ üëá
ôá õðüëïéðá ìÝñç èá ôïí êáôáôïðßóïõí åéò âÜèïò ãéá
Ýíá áìéãÝò, ðçãáßï êáé õðåñâáôéêü ¸ñãï äßäïíôÜò ôïõ
ðïëëáðëÝò êáé ðñáêôéêÝò åóùôåñéêÝò äéåîüäïõò óôçí
óýã÷ñïíç ðñáãìáôéêüôçôá.
REQUEST
Those who happened to have the luck to know
directly or indirectly Master Nikolaos­A.­Margioris,
since his first years in Greece or earlier, when he was
living in Alexandria of Egypt or also in India, and who
consider that they have some additional evidence or
more elements about his person and his work, are
requested to come in touch with us and if they wish
to make them known to us, so that the new
Biographical Note that is prepared by the responsi-
ble of the Omakoia of Trikala and of Thessaloniki,
may have a greater detail in the analysis of the facts
of his life and his action, during the whole trip of His
life that will depict fully His life and His work.
THANKS
I wish to thank warmly all those who helped to
the edition of this magazine and especially
Lambrini­and Spiros­Polizois, my cooperators of
the Omakoios­ of Athens­ and of Lamia,­ Smaro
Kosmaoglou­and Dimitris­Tsaparas respectively,
as well as all the responsible of the rest Omakoios
(Kostas­ Dimelis,­ Giannis­ Sgouros­ and Soula
Pouliasi­and Pinelopi­Kaklea) for their undivided
support to our present effort. Also, my wife Sofia,
Vana­Katsiampa and Gely­Drossou for their valu-
able help.
The publisher
NOTE
We have to point out that we struggled as much
as possible in order that the delivered Esoteric
Knowledge of Master Nikolaos­ A.­ Margioris may
be transmitted from the Greek into English lan-
guage, because we consider as significant the need
that everybody be informed about the Esoteric Truth
of Life and of the Mysteries of the Creation.
Due to the difficulties that the metaphysical
meanings contain, we tried as much as possible,
to avoid any imperfections or wrongs in the trans-
lated text, but we cannot exclude their existence.
For this reason, we ask for the reader's sympathy
and we believe that moreover the partial oversights
or imperfections that eventually exist in the trans-
lated text, the substance of the articles content will
compensate and will quench his thirsty internally,
while all the rest will inform him thoroughly about
an unmingled, spontaneous and transcendent
Work, by giving him multiple theoretical and prac-
tical esoteric outlets to the current reality.
 Ç ëÝîç Ïìáêïåßï åßíáé óýíèåôç åê ôïõ ïìïý (ìáæß) áêïýìå. Áêïýìå ëïéðüí ìéá õøçëÞ Åóù-
ôåñéêÞ - ÐíåõìáôéêÞ Äéäáóêáëßá (ïì áêïýåéí, áêïýìå ôï ÏÌ, ôïí ÔÝëåéï ¹÷ï).
Ôï Ïìáêïåßï ãéá ðñþôç öïñÜ éäñýèçêå áðü ôïí Ðõèáãüñá óôá ìÝóá ôïõ 6ïõ ð.×. áéþíá óôïí
Êñüôùíá ôçò êÜôù Éôáëßáò êáé áðïôÝëåóå ôï ðñþôï áëçèéíü ó÷ïëåéü ìáæéêÞò ìýçóçò óôçí Åîù-
ôåñéêÞ êáé éäßùò óôçí ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÁëÞèåéá ãéá ôçí åðï÷Þ ôïõ áëëÜ êáé ãåíéêüôåñá ãéá ôçí éóôïñß-
á ôçò áñ÷áßáò ÅëëÜäáò, åíþ ðáñÜëëçëá ó÷çìÜôéóå ôéò êáôÜëëçëåò ðñïûðïèÝóåéò ãéá ôçí óÜñ-
êùóç ôïõ Èåßïõ Ëüãïõ, ôïõ Éçóïý ×ñéóôïý óôç Ãç ìáò.
Ìå ôï ßäéï üíïìá (Ïìáêïåßï

Ç Ýííïéá Áèçíþí) ßäñõóå ôï äéêü ôïõ Åê-

ðáéäåõôÞñéï 2500 ÷ñüíéá ìåôÜ
ï ¸ëëçíáò Ðíåõìáôéêüò ÄÜ-
óêáëïò Íéêüëáïò Á. Ìáñãéù-

ôçò ëÝîçò ñÞò (1913-1993) óôçí ÁèÞíá ôï

1976 (óõíÝãñáøå ðëÝïí ôùí 75
Áðïêáëõðôéêþí Åóùôåñéêþí
¸ñãùí êáé Üöçóå ôåñÜóôéåò êáé

Ïìáêïåßï äéá÷ñïíéêÝò ÐáñáêáôáèÞêåò

ðñïò ìåëÝôç êáé áîéïðïßçóç) êáé
áêïëïýèùò óôçí Ëáìßá (1991)

Þ Ïìáêüúï
êáé óôá Ôñßêáëá (1992).
Ôï ðáñüí ðåñéïäéêü (êáé ç á-
íÜëïãç éóôïóåëßäá ìáò óôï
ºíôåñíåô, http://www.o-
makoio.gr) äçìéïõñãÞèçêå êáé åðéìåëÞèçêå áðü ôï Ïìáêïåßï ÔñéêÜëùí (õðåýèõíïò Çëßáò Êá-
ôóéÜìðáò) ôï ïðïßï óõíå÷ßæåé áðñüóêïðôá ôçí äéäáóêáëßá ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý, ôùí ÓõóôçìÜôùí
ôçò Ãéüãêá êáé ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò êáé ðÝñáí áõôþí ôùí äñáóôçñéïôÞôùí ôïõ Ý÷åé åê-
äþóåé êáé 2 ìåôáöõóéêÜ âéâëßá: "Áðü ôï óôüìá ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ óôï áõôß ôïõ ìáèçôÞ, ìå åìðåñé-
óôáôùìÝíï ãëùóóÜñéï ÓáíóêñéôéêÞò 400 ëÝîåùí ãéá ôïõò óðïõäáóôÝò ôçò Ãéüãêá", õðÜñ÷åé óå
ìïñöÞ èåñìïêïëëçìÝíçò ìåëÝôçò êáé óôá áããëéêÜ êáé "Ç ÁðïêÜëõøç ôïõ ÉùÜííç åîçãçìÝíç
áðü ôïí ÄÜóêáëï Íéêüëáï Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ õðü ôçí åðéìÝëåéá êáé ôïõò åêôåíåßò áíáëõôéêïýò ó÷ï-
ëéáóìïýò ôïõ ìáèçôÞ ôïõ Çëßá Ë. ÊáôóéÜìðá" ðïõ åßíáé äßãëùóóç Ýêäïóç óôá åëëçíéêÜ êáé óôá
áããëéêÜ, åíþ åôïéìÜæåé áêüìá 4 Ýñãá: "Ôá ÓõóôÞìáôá ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò", "Äéáëïãé-
óìüò êáé Ìõóôéêéóìüò, ÑÜôæá êáé Êïõíôáëßíç Ãéüãêá, èåùñßá êáé ðñÜîç", "ÐëçñÝóôáôï êáé áíá-
ëõôéêüôáôï Ëåîéêü - Ïäçãüò Ìåôáöõóéêþí Åííïéþí" êáé "Åã÷åéñßäéï - Ïäçãüò ãéá õðïøÞöéïõò
ÅêðáéäåõôÝò ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý âÜóåé ôùí Ðáñáêáôáèçêþí ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. Ìáñãéù-
ñÞ" (ìüíï ãéá ôá ìÝëç ôùí Ïìáêïåßùí). Áêüìá åîÝäùóå óå ìïñöÞ èåñìïêïëëçìÝíùí ìåëåôþí
ôá Åãêáßíéá ôùí Ïìáêïåßùí ÔñéêÜëùí êáé Ëáìßáò êáèþò êáé ôçí ÅïñôÞ áðü ôá 10 ÷ñüíéá áðü
ôçí ßäñõóç ôïõ Ïìáêïåßïõ Áèçíþí ðïõ Ýãéíå óôï îåíïäï÷åßï ÌåãÜëç Âñåôáíßá óôçí ÁèÞíá ôï
1987 áðü ôïí ÄÜóêáëï Íéêüëáï Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ.
ÁõôÞ ôçí óôéãìÞ åßíáé óå ðëÞñç ëåéôïõñãßá ôá Ïìáêïåßá ðïõ áíáãñÜöïõìå ðáñáêÜôù ôá ï-
ðïßá ßäñõóå åí æùÞ ï ÄÜóêáëïò Íéêüëáïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò: Ïìáêïåßï Áèçíþí, Ïìáêïåßï Ëáìß-
áò êáé Ïìáêïåßï ÔñéêÜëùí.
ÌåñéêÜ ÷ñüíéá ìåôÜ ôçí ìåôÜóôáóç ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ éäñýèçêáí êáé íÝá Ïìáêïåßá ðïõ õðÜãï-
íôáé áíÜëïãá óå Ýíá áðü ôá ðáñáðÜíù ôñßá ðñùôïúäñõèÝíôá Ïìáêïåßá.
Ôï Ïìáêïåßï Áèçíþí (õðåýèõíç ÓìÜñù ÊïóìÜïãëïõ) Ý÷åé ó÷çìáôßóåé íÝá Ïìáêïåßá óôçí
ÊÝñêõñá (Ïìáêïåßï ÊÝñêõñáò) ìå õðåýèõíïõò ôïõò Óïýëá ÐïõëéÜóç êáé ÃéÜííç Óãïýñï, óôïí
ÐåéñáéÜ (Ïìáêïåßï ÐåéñáéÜ) ìå õðåýèõíïõò ôïõò Êþóôá êáé Ìáñßá ÄéìåëÞ êáé óôçí Ñüäï (Ï-
ìáêïåßï Ñüäïõ) ìå õðåýèõíç ôçí Ðçíåëüðç ÊáêëÝá.
Ôï Ïìáêïåßï Ëáìßáò (õðåýèõíïé ÄçìÞôñçò êáé Êïýëá ÔóáðÜñá) Ý÷åé ó÷çìáôßóåé Ýíá åîßóïõ
áõôïäýíáìï êáé áõôÜñêåò Ïìáêïåßï óôçí ÊáëëéèÝá Áèçíþí (Ïìáêïåßï ÊáëëéèÝáò).
Ôï Ïìáêïåßï ÔñéêÜëùí (õðåýèõíïò Çëßáò Ë. ÊáôóéÜìðáò) äçìéïýñãçóå Ýíá äåýôåñï áìéãÝò
êáé ðëÞñåò äñáóôçñéïôÞôùí Ïìáêïåßï óôçí Èåóóáëïíßêç (Ïìáêïåßï Èåóóáëïíßêçò) åíþ ðá-
ñÜëëçëá åêðñüóùðïé ôïõ Ïìáêïåßïõ ÔñéêÜëùí ëåéôïõñãïýí Ó÷ïëÝò - ÐáñáñôÞìáôá óå äýï óç-
ìåßá óôçí Êáñäßôóá.
ÌåìïíùìÝíåò äñáóôçñéüôçôåò óôá ðëáßóéá ìéêñþí åóùôåñéêþí ïìÜäùí áíáðôýóóïíôáé êáé á-
ðü áñêåôïýò áêüìç ìáèçôÝò ôïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ óå äéÜöïñá óçìåßá ôçò ÅëëÜäïò. Åí-
äåéêôéêÜ áíáöÝñïõìå ôçí ÊïìïôçíÞ üðïõ äñáóôçñéïðïéåßôáé ìáèÞôñéá ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ êáé ôï Ëïõ-
ôñÜêé Êïñéíèßáò õðü ôçí Íßêç Öïýöá.
Ãéá ðåñéóóüôåñåò ðëçñïöïñßåò êïéôÜîôå ôï êåöÜëáéï ðïõ áíáöÝñåôáé óôéò Ó÷ïëÝò - Ïìáêïåß-
á ðïõ ëåéôïõñãïýí óôçí ÅëëÜäá.
 The word Omakoio is composite, from the words omou (together) and akoume (we lis-
ten). So, we listen to a high Esoteric - Spiritual Teaching (om - akouin, we listen to the OM,
that is to the Perfect Sound).
Omakoio was founded for the first time by Pythagoras, in the middle of th 6th century,
in Crotonas of South Italy and constituted the first real school of a collective initiation in
the Exoteric and mainly in the Esoteric Truth for its times but also, in general for the his-
tory of ancient Greece, while at the same time, it formed the proper presuppositions for the
incarnation of the Divine
Word, of Jesus Christ on our
Earth.
Under the same name (O-
makoio of Athens) Nikolaos A.
The meaning
Margioris, the Greek Spiritual
Master (1913-1993), founded
his own institute in Athens in
1976 (he wrote more than 75
of the word
Revealing Esoteric Works and
he left immense and time-ho-
noured heritages to be studied
Omakoeio
or Omakoio
and to be made worthy), and
then in Lamia (1991) and in
Trikala (1992).
The present magazine (and
our corresponding site at the Internet, http://www.omakoio.gr) was created and attended
by the Omakoio of Trikala. (responsible: Ilias Katsiampas) that continues unhinderedly
teaching the Esoterism, the Systems of Yoga and the Esoteric Therapeutics and besides these
activities, it has published 2 metaphysical books ("From the Master's mouth to the student's
ear, with a thorough glossary of Sanscrit, 400 words for the students of Yoga", which is al-
so disposed in English, and "Ioanni's Apocalypse", explained by Master Nikolaos A. Mar-
gioris, under the attendance and the extensive commentations of his student Ilias L. Katsi-
ampas, a bilingual edition, in Greek and in English). Ilias L. Katsiampas is also preparing
4 more books: "The Systems ot the Esoteric Therapeutics", "Meditation and Mysticism, Ra-
ja and Kundalini Yoga, Theory and Practice" and "A full and most analytical Dictionary-
Guide of the Metaphysical Meanings" and a Manual-Guide for the candidate Instructors of
the Esoterism, on the basis of Master Nikolaos A. Margiori's Deposits (only for the mem-
bers of the Omakoia). He still published in a form of soldered essays the Inauguration of
the Omakoia of Trikala and of Lamia, as well as the Feast from the 10 years from the foun-
dation of the Omakoio of Athens, that took place at Great Britain hotel, in Athens, in 1987,
by Master Nikolaos A. Margioris.
This moment, in full function are the Omakoia which we cite below and which Master
Nikolaos A. Margioris founded: Omakoio of Athens, Omakoio of Lamia, and Omakoio of
Trikala.
After the Master's metastasis, some new Omakoia were also founded, that belong ac-
cordingly to one of the above three first-founded Omakoia.
The Omakoio of Athens (responsible Smaro Kosmaoglou), has formed some new O-
makoia im Corfu (Omakoio of Corfu), the responsible of which are Soula Pouliassi and Jogn
Sgouros, in Piraeus (Omakoio of Piraeus), with responsible Kostas and Maria Dimeli and
in Rhodes (Omakoio of Rhodes), the responsible of which is Pinelopi Kaklea.
The Omakoio of Lamia (responsible Dimitris and Koula Tsapara) has formed an equal-
ly self-powered and self-sufficient Omakoio in Kallithea of Athens (Omakoio of Kallithea).
The Omakoio of Trikala (responsible Ilias L. Katsiampas) has created a second pure and
full of activities Omakoio in Thessaloniki (Omakoio of Thessaloniki) while, at the same
time, some representatives of the Omakoio of Trikala function some Schools-Branches at
two other places in Karditsa.
Some single activities within the limits of little esoteric groups are developed also by e-
nough students of Nikolaos A. Margioris, in different places of Greece. Suggestively we
mention Komotini where a student of the Master is activated, and Loutraki of Korinthia, un-
der Niki Foufa.
For more information, look at the chapter that refers to the Schools-Omakoia operating
in Greece.
 Ç åöáñìïãÞ ôùí Ðíåõìáôéêþí
Áîéþí óôçí óýã÷ñïíç êïéíùíßá
The application of the Spiritual Values in the modern society

¼ W
ôáí ìéëÜìå ãéá ÐíåõìáôéêÝò Áîßåò áóöáëþò åííïïýìå üëá åêåßíá ôá When we talk about the Spiritual Values we certainly mean all
äéá÷ñïíéêÜ Ðáíáíèñþðéíá ÉäáíéêÜ ðïõ ðáñÝìåéíáí áíáëëïßùôá êá- those diachronic and Overhuman Ideals that remained unchanged
ôÜ ôçí äéÜñêåéá ôùí áéþíùí, êáé áðïôÝëåóáí, áðïôåëïýí êáé èá á- in the course of the ages, and composed, compose and will com-
ðïôåëïýí ôïí óôáèåñü ðüëï Ýëîçò êáé ôïí ìüíéìï öÜñï ðñïóáíá- pose the constant attraction pole and the permanent lighthouse
ôïëéóìïý, åëðßäáò êáé ðáñáäåéãìáôéóìïý ãéá ôï óýíïëï ôçò áíèñùðüôçôáò, áë- of orientation, hope and exemplification for the whole humanity, but also for
ëÜ êáé ãéá êÜèå Üíèñùðï îå÷ùñéóôÜ. every man, individually.
ÁõôÜ áêñéâþò ôá ðíåõìáôéêÜ ðñüôõðá ìáò ôá ðáñÝäùóáí "Üíèñùðïé" ìå ãñá- Precisely, these spiritual standards were given us by certain "men" who
íéôÝíéåò ÈåëÞóåéò êáé áóôåßñåõôç ðíåõìáôéêÞ Äýíáìç, Ãíþóç êáé ÁãÜðç, áð' ü- had a granitic will, an inexhaustible spiritual Power, Knowledge and Love,
ëåò ôéò êáôåõèýíóåéò ôïõ ðëáíÞôç ìáò ìå ðñùôïðüñï ôï Åëëçíéêü Ðíåýìá êáé from all the directions of our planet. Their pioneer was the Greek Spirit and
ìå ÄáóêÜëïõò ÔéôÜíåò ôïõ Ðíåýìáôïò üðùò ï Éç óïýò ×ñéóôüò, ï ÅñìÞò ï Ôñé- their Masters were the Titans of the Spirit, as Jesus Christ, Hermes the thrice-
óìÝãéóôïò, ï ÏñöÝáò, ï Ðõèáãüñáò, ï ÌùõóÞò, ï ÐëÜôùíáò, ï Áììþíéïò great, Orpheus, Pythagoras, Moses, Plato, Ammonios Sakkas, Plotinos,
ÓáêêÜò, ï Ðëùôßíïò, ï ÁäáìÜíôéïò ÙñéãÝíçò, ï Êñßóíá, ï Âïýäáò, ï Ìá÷áâß- Adamantions Orighenis, Crisna, Buddha, Mahavira, Ramakrisna, Vivekanan-
ñá, ï Ñáìáêñßóíá, ï ÂéâåêáíÜíôá êáé Üëëïé ðïëëïß, ïé ïðïßïé ü÷é ìüíï äåí á- da and many others who not only did not aim at a personal profit, but on the
ðÝâëåðáí óå ðñïóùðéêü üöåëïò, áëëÜ áíôßèåôá ìå contrary, showing a full self-denial and self- sacri-
ðëÞñç áõôáðÜñíçóç êáé áõôïèõóßá, ìå ôïí ðñïóù- fice, by their personal exemplification and by the
ðéêü ðáñáäåéãìáôéóìü ôïõò êáé ìå ôçí óõíå÷Þ ðáñïõ- Çëßá Ë. ÊáôóéÜìðá continual presentation of all the True ideals that
óßáóç üëùí ôùí Áëçèéíþí Éäáíéêþí ðïõ ðñÝðåé íá (Ïìáêïåßá ÔñéêÜëùí êáé Èåóóáëïíßêçò) should direct our life, tried to change and to trans-
êáôåõèýíïõí ôçí æùÞ ìáò åðå÷åßñçóáí íá ìåôáâÜë- Ôçë.: 0431 - 75505 form man and society, towards the way of the in-
ëïõí êáé íá ìåôáìïñöþóïõí ôïí Üíèñùðï êáé ôçí Ilias L. Katsiampas dividual self-trangression, into the general Ego, in-
êïéíùíßá, ðñïò ôïí äñüìï ôçò áõèõðÝñâáóçò ôïõ á- (Omakoio of Trikala & Thessaloniki) to the Totality and the Whole.
ôïìéêïý åãþ, óôï ãåíéêü Åãþ, óôï Óýíïëï, óôçí Ï- Tel.: 0431 - 75505 These real spiritual leaders, the Mysts of every
ëüôçôá. Web Site:http://www.omakoio.gr place and of every epoch, were -are and will be- our
Áõôïß ïé ðñáãìáôéêïß ðíåõìáôéêïß çãÞôïñåò, ïé Ìý- E-mail:omakoio@omakoio.gr hyperintellectually acting fellow-men who surpassed
óôåò ôïõ êÜèå ôüðïõ êáé ôçò êÜèå åðï÷Þò, Þôáí -åß- Þ omakoio@aias.gr every measure, but without losing their contact with
íáé êáé èá åßíáé- ïé õðåñäéáíïçôéêþò ëåéôïõñãïýíôåò it, so that by their actual example, they may teach
óõíÜíèñùðïß ìáò ðïõ õðåñÝâáéíáí êÜèå áíèñþðé- the attainable application of the spiritual values
íï ìÝôñï, ÷ùñßò üìùò íá ÷Üíïõí ôçí åðáöÞ ôïõò ì' áõôü, þóôå íá åßíáé óå èÝ- (which anyway constituted for them a personal conception of the Divine Laws
óç ìå ôï Ýìðñáêôï ðáñÜäåéãìÜ ôïõò, íá äéäÜóêïõí ôï åöéêôü ôçò åöáñìïãÞò and a natural expression way of their souls).
ôùí Ðíåõìáôéêþí Áîéþí óôçí êÜèå êïéíùíßá êáé åðï÷Þ (ðñÜãìá ðïõ áðïôåëïý- These humble guides of humanity, the spirits living among us, the alive e-
óå Üëëùóôå ãé' áõôïýò ðñïóùðéêÞ áíôßëçøç ôùí Èåßùí Íüìùí êáé öõóéêü ôñü- mancipated men - everywhere on earth - continually placed and place again
ðï Ýêöñáóçò ôçò øõ÷Þò ôïõò). the wandering man in front of his individual and social responsibilities, giv-
Áõôïß ïé ôáðåéíïß ïäçãïß ôçò áíèñùðüôçôáò, ôá æþíôá áíÜìåóÜ ìáò ðíåýìá- ing him a new (unceasingly renewed) opportunity and a uniquely substan-
ôá, ïé æùíôáíïß áðåëåõèåñùìÝíïé Üíèñùðïé -üðïõ ãçò- åðáíáôïðïèåôïýóáí êáé tial perspective and approach to the Eternal Truths, as much the theoretical-
åðáíáôïðïèåôïýí óõíå÷þò ôïí ðáñáðáßïíôá Üíèñùðï ðñï ôùí åõèõíþí ôïõ, philosphical, as the directly practical one.
áôïìéêþí êáé êïéíùíéêþí, äßäïíôÜò ôïõ ìéá íÝá (óõíå÷þò áíáíåïýìåíç) åõêáé- Some most important words-keys from the treasury of the spiritual stocks
ñßá êáé ìéá ìïíáäéêÜ ïõóéáóôéêÞ ðñïïðôéêÞ êáôáíüçóçò êáé ðñïóÝããéóçò ôùí that these great Masters delivered us actually, are: Modesty, Disinterested,

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 6 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

Áéþíéùí Áëçèåéþí, ôüóï èåùñçôéêÞ - öéëïóïöéêÞ, üóï êáé Üìåóá ðñáêôéêÞ.
ÌåñéêÝò óçìáíôéêüôáôåò ëÝîåéò - êëåéäéÜ áðü ôï èçóáõñïöõëÜêéï ôùí
ðíåõìáôéêþí ðáñáêáôáèçêþí ðïõ ìáò ðáñÝäùóáí äéá æþóçò ïé ìåãÜëïé áõ-
ôïß ÄÜóêáëïé åßíáé: ç Ôáðåéíüôçôá, ç ÁíéäéïôÝëåéá, ç Áõôïãíùóßá, ç Áõôá-
ðÜñíçóç, ç Äéêáéïóýíç, ç ÅéñÞíç, ç Ôåëåéïðïßçóç, ç ÕðÝñâáóç, ç ÁëÞ-
èåéá, ç ÁãÜðç, ç ÁðåëåõèÝñùóç, ï Èåüò. Ìå ìéá ëÝîç ç ÅóùôåñéêÞ Ðáé-
äåßá (ç ÐíåõìáôéêÞ Ãíþóç).
Ìå ðïéüí üìùò ôñüðï, ìÝñïò Þ üëï ôùí ðáñáäïèÝíôùí áõôþí ðíåõìáôéêþí
áñåôþí, èá ìðïñïýóå íá ãßíïõí êôÞìá ìáò êáé íá äéÝðïõí ôéò ìåôáîý ìáò ó÷Ý-
óåéò (óå ìåãáëýôåñï Þ ìéêñüôåñï âáèìü) óôçí óýã÷ñïíç ðñáãìáôéêüôçôá ðïõ
æïýìå; Ðþò èá áîéùèïýìå íá ìåôá÷åéñéóôïýìå ôá Èåßá áõôÜ Äþñá ìÝóá óôçí
êïéíùíßá ìáò; Ðïéüò åßíáé ï ôñüðïò, ç ìÝèïäïò, ðïõ èá ìáò áíïßîåé ôïí äñü-
ìï ðñïò áõôÞ ôçí êáôåýèõíóç;
Ðñéí üìùò áíáöåñèïýìå ó' áõôÝò ôéò ëåðôïìÝñåéåò ðñÝðåé íá åðéóçìÜíïõ-
ìå üôé êáìßá ïõóéáóôéêÞ åöáñìïãÞ ôùí ðíåõìáôéêþí áñåôþí, êáìßá áëçèéíÞ
áëëáãÞ äåí ðñüêåéôáé íá åðÝëèåé óôçí êïéíùíßá ìáò, åÜí ðñþôá äåí êáôáóôåß
äõíáôü íá áëëÜîåé, íá ìåôáâëçèåß, íá ìåôáìïñöùèåß ï ßäéïò ï Üíèñùðïò. Áõ-
ôü åßíáé åöéêôü ìüíï êÜôù áðü ðñïóùðéêÞ áãùãÞ ôïõ áíèñþðïõ äßðëá óå ÄÜ-
óêáëï Þ Ýóôù ÅêðáéäåõôÞ ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò ÅðéóôÞìçò, âÜóåé ôçò øõ÷ïóýíèåóÞò
ôïõ êáé ôùí ôÜóåþí ôïõ. Ç øõ÷ïðíåõìáôéêÞ åîÝëéîç êáé ìåôáâïëÞ ôçò êïéíùíß-
áò åîáñôÜôáé Üìåóá áðü ôçí ðíåõìáôéêÞ áíáãÝííçóç ôïõ êÜèå ìÝëïõò ôçò îå-
÷ùñéóôÜ, ìÝóá áðü ðñïóùðéêÜ âéþìáôá êáé ü÷é ìüíï áðü ðåðïéèÞóåéò.
ÕðÜñ÷ïõí ðïëëÜ óõóôÞìáôá - ìÝèïäïé ðïõ ìáò ðáñÝ÷ïõí áõôÞ ôçí äõíáôü-
ôçôá ôïõ ìßôïõ ôçò ÁñéÜäíçò ãéá íá âãïýìå áðü ôïí äáéäáëþäç ëáâýñéíèï ôçò
ýëçò. ¸íá áðü ôá âáóéêüôåñá áõôÜ óõóôÞìáôá åßíáé ç Ãéüãêá, ðïõ áðü áñ÷áéï-
ôÜôùí ÷ñüíùí ìáò äßäåé ôá öþôá ôçò Ý÷ïíôáò ðéèáíüôáôá ôçí áðþôáôç êáôáãù-
ãÞ ôçò óôçí åðï÷Þ ôùí ðñïãüíùí ìáò Äñáâßäùí, ôùí ðñïåëëÞíùí ôïõ Áéãáß-
ïõ, ôùí ðñï ôùí Ðåëáóãþí.
Ç Ãéüãêá åßíáé ç Æåýîç, ç ¸íùóç äçëáäÞ üëùí ôùí åôåñüêëçôùí óôïé÷åßùí
ôçò ðñïóùðéêüôçôÜò ìáò êáé ç êáôåýèõíóç üëùí áõôþí ôùí åðéìÝñïõò äõíÜ-
ìåùí ðñïò ôçí äéÜíïéîç - åíåñãïðïßçóç ôçò áíþôåñçò áíôßëçøçò ôïõ Íïõ ìáò,
ôçò õðåñäéáíïçôéêÞò.
Ôá ìïíïðÜôéá ôçò Ãéüãêá åßíáé ðÜñá ðïëëÜ êáé äéáöïñåôéêïý âáèìïý ÷ñç-
óéìüôçôáò. ÁõôÜ üìùò ðïõ êñáôïýí ôï Üìåóï åíäéáöÝñïí ìáò åßíáé: ç Êñßãéá
Ãéüãêá (ìÝèïäïò óùìáôïøõ÷éêÞò èåñáðåõôéêÞò), ç ÌÜíôñáì Ãéüãêá (ç Ýíùóç
äéáìÝóïõ ôùí ëÝîåùí äýíáìçò), ç ÌðÜêôé Ãéüãêá (ç Ýíùóç äéáìÝóïõ ôçò áöï-
óßùóçò, ôçò áãÜðçò), ç ÊÜñìá Ãéüãêá (ç Ýíùóç äéáìÝóïõ ôçò áíéäéïôåëïýò õ-
ðçñåóßáò, ôçò ôáðåéíüôçôáò), ç ÃêíÜíé Ãéüãêá (ç Ýíùóç äéáìÝóïõ ôçò öéëïóï-
öéêÞò áíáæÞôçóçò, ôçò Ãíþóçò), ç ÓÜìðô Þ Ëüããï Ãéüãêá (ç Ýíùóç äéáìÝóïõ
ôïõ êõëéüìåíïõ ç÷çôéêïý ñåýìáôïò), ç ÔÜíôñá Ãéüãêá (ç Ýíùóç äéáìÝóïõ ôçò
Êïõíôáëßíç, ôçò áðïèçóáõñéóìÝíçò ðíåõìáôéêÞò åíÝñãåéáò ìÝóá ìáò) êáé ôÝ-
ëïò áóöáëÝóôåñá êáé ðéï ïëïêëçñùìÝíá ç ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá (ç âáóéëéêÞ Ýíùóç äéá-
ìÝóïõ ôçò ìåãÜëçò áõôÞò øõ÷ïëïãßáò, ðïõ áðïôåëåß êáé ôçí êïñùíßäá üëùí ôùí
Ãéüãêá).
Ðéï óõãêåêñéìÝíá ç åðéóôçìïíéêÞ ìÝèïäïò ôçò ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá ôáéñéÜæåé óå ìå-
ãÜëï âáèìü ìå ôï ðëåßóôïí ôùí áíèñþðùí ôçò ÄõôéêÞò êïéíùíßáò ìáò êáé ìðï-
ñåß íá ôïõò äþóåé ôá êáëýôåñá äõíáôÜ áðïôåëÝóìáôá. ÁõôÜ äåí åßíáé ìüíï ëü-
ãéá äéêÜ ìïõ. Ôüóï ï ÄÜóêáëüò ìïõ Íéêüëáïò ÌáñãéùñÞò ðïõ óõíÝãñáøå êáé
åîÝäùóå 75 ðåñßðïõ Ýñãá, ç ÌðëáâÜôóêõ, ç Áëßêç Ìðáßçëõ óôï âéâëßï ôçò "ôï
öùò ôçò øõ÷Þò", üóï êáé ï ÂéâåêáíÜíôá åðåóÞìáíáí êáé ðñïäéÝãñáøáí ôçí ý-
øéóôç áíÜãêç åõñåßáò äéäáóêáëßáò ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò Ðáéäåßáò êáé äç ôçò ÑÜôæá
Ãéüãêá åéäéêüôåñá óôçí åðï÷Þ ìáò (5ç Ñßæá ÖõëÞ), ãéá ôïí ó÷çìáôéóìü õãéþí
êáé éóïññïðçìÝíùí íïþí êáé åíüò áëçèéíÜ "ÍÝïõ Ðíåõìáôéêïý Áíèñþðïõ" ìå
áõôïãíùóßá, áõôïäõíáìßá, áõôïíïìßá, äéåõñõìÝíï Íïõ, äéÜèåóç ðñïóöïñÜò,
áðáëëáãìÝíïõ áðü õëéóôéêÝò ìéêñüôçôåò êáé áðùèçìÝíá, êáôÜëëçëïõ íá óõ-
íôáéñéÜîåé êáé í' áíôáðïêñéèåß êáëýôåñá óôá äåäïìÝíá ôçò óýã÷ñïíçò ðñáãìá-
ôéêüôçôáò, üðùò êáé êÜèå ìåëëïíôéêÞò åðï÷Þò ôçò Áíèñùðüôçôáò.
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
Selfknowledge, Justice, Peace, Perfectionism, Trangression, Truth, Love, E-
mancipation, God. In a word, they offered us the Esoteric Education (the
Spiritual knowledge).
But how a part or the whole of these delivered spiritual virtues, could be
our property and rule our relations between us (more ore less) in the mod-
ern reality we live in? How we will succeed in making use of the Divine these
Presents in our society? What is the way, the method that will open the path
to this direction for us?
However, before we refer to these details, we must indicate that no sub-
stantial application of the spiritual virtues, no true change will happen to our
society, if first man himself is not able to get changed, to get transformed. This
is possible only under the man's personal training beside a Master or even
an instructor of the Esoteric Science, on the basis of his psychosynthesis and
of his tendencies. The soul-spiritual evolution and alteration of the society de-
pends directly on the spiritual renaissance of every member of same, sepa-
rately, through the personal experiences and not only through the beliefs.
There are many systems-methods providing us this possibility of Ariadne's
thread to go out from the labyrinth of matter. One of these most basic sys-
tems is Yoga, that since the very ancient times, has been giving us its lights,
far descendings from Dravidians, the pre-Greeks of the Aegean Sea, the pre-
Pelasghi Greeks.
Yoga is junction, that is the Union of all the heterogenous elements of our
personality and the direction of all these partial powers towards the opening
of a superior conception of our Mind, the hyperintellectual one.
The paths of YOGA are too many and their utility degree is different. But
those keeping our direct interest are: Kriya Yoga (method of somato-psychic
therapeutics), Mantram Yoga (the union through the power words), Bhakti
Yoga (the union through devotion, love), Karma Yoga (the union through the
disinterested service, of humility), Gnani Yoga (the union through the philo-
sophical search, of knowledge), Sampt or Logo Yoga (the union through the
rolling sounding current), Tantra Yoga (the union through Kundalini, the trea-
sured spiritual energy existing within us) and finally, more safely and more
completely, Raja Yoga (the royal Union through this great psychology com-
posing the top of all Yogas).
More precisely, the scientific method of Raja Yoga suits greatly to the most
people of our Western society and can give the best possible results. These
words are not only mine. As much my Master Nikolaos Margioris who wrote
and published about 75 petaphysical books, Blavatski, Alice Baily in her book
"The Soul Light", as Vivekananda, have indicated and prescribed the high-
est necessity of a large teaching of the Esoteric Education and mainly of Ra-
ja Yoga especially in our days (5th Root Race), for the formation of healthy
and balanced minds and of a really "New Spiritual Man" having self-knowl-
edge, self-power, autonomy, a broaded Mind, an offer disposition, being re-
leased from the material meanesses and the pushed back wills, being prop-
er to harmonize and to correspond better to the data of the modern reality,
as well as of every future times of Humanity.
Raja Yoga comprises 8 basic upgrades each one of which composes itself
a whole science, that we shall mention epigramatically.
The first one is Yama meaning death. Death of the old, bad and harmful
habits both for the others and for us. It contains 5 curbings or abstinences:
a) Avoiding presents (that means no bribery, no capture of our conscience
by others or by us,
b) Next comes the purity in everything (that is the spiritual behaviour and
control of the generative impulse),
c) No envy and no theft (no jealousy that burns man and no abstraction
either moral or material),
d) Truthfullness (always sincerity should prevail in our relations), and
7 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 Ç ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá åìðåñéÝ÷åé 8 âáóéêÝò áíáâáèìßäåò ðïõ ç êÜèå ìßá áðïôåëåß
áðü ìüíç ôçò ìßá ïëüêëçñç åðéóôÞìç, ôéò ïðïßåò êáé áíáöÝñïõìå åðéãñáììá-
ôéêÜ:
Ç ðñþôç åßíáé ç ÃéÜìá ðïõ èá ðåé èÜíáôïò. ÈÜíáôïò ôùí ðáëéþí, êáêþí êáé
åðéâëáâþí óõíçèåéþí ãéá ôïõò Üëëïõò êáé ãéá ìáò. ÐåñéÝ÷åé 5 ÷áëéíáãùãÞóåéò
Þ áðï÷Ýò, á) ÁðïöõãÞ äþñïõ (ü÷é äçëáäÞ äùñïäïêßá, ü÷é áé÷ìáëùóßá ôçò óõ-
íåßäçóÞò ìáò áðü Üëëïõò Þ ôùí Üëëùí áðü åìÜò), â) Áêïëïõèåß ç Áãíüôçôá
óå üëá (äçëáäÞ ðíåõìáôéêÞ óõìðåñéöïñÜ êáé Ýëåã÷ï ôçò ãåíåôÞóéáò ïñìÞò),
ã) ¼÷é öèüíï êáé ü÷é êëïðÞ (ü÷é æÞëéá ðïõ êáßåé ôïí Üíèñùðï êáé ü÷é áöáßñå-
óç çèéêÞ Þ õëéêÞ), ä) ÖéëáëÞèåéá (ðÜíôá íá ðñõôáíåýåé ç åéëéêñßíåéá óôéò ó÷Ý-
óåéò ìáò), å) Ìç Âßá (ìç ðñïîÝíçóç ðüíïõ óôïí óõíÜíèñùðï, öõóéêïý Þ øõ-
÷ïëïãéêïý).
ÐåñíÜìå óôçí äåýôåñç âáèìßäá, óôçí ÍéãéÜìá ðïõ èá ðåé ü÷é èÜíáôïò - Á-
èáíáóßá. Åäþ ðñïóðáèïýìå íá êáëëéåñãÞóïõìå ôá áíþôåñá éäáíéêÜ. Ç íéãéÜ-
ìá ðåñéÝ÷åé 5 "åîáíáãêáóìïýò":
á) Áöïóßùóç óôï Èåü Þ óôçí üðïéá áíþôåñç äýíáìç áíáãíùñßæïõìå ãéá ôïí
åáõôü ìáò (åíéó÷ýïõìå ôçí Ðßóôç, ôçí åóùôåñéêÞ äýíáìÞ ìáò óå áðßóôåõôï âáè-
ìü), â) ÌåëÝôç âéâëßùí ðïõ áó÷ïëïýíôáé ìå ôçí ëýôñùóç ôïõ áíèñþðïõ (åßíáé
ç êáëëéÝñãåéá ôçò ôÝëåéáò äüíçóçò ðïõ ðñïÝñ÷åôáé áðü ðñïóùðéêÞ ìåëÝôç Ý-
ãêñéôùí ìåôáöõóéêþí óõããñáììÜôùí êáé éäßùò áðü ôçí Üìåóç ó÷Ýóç ìå ôïí ÄÜ-
óêáëü ìáò), ã) Ðåéèáñ÷ßá êáé áíôï÷Þ (áð' åäþ áñ÷ßæåé ï áõôïÝëåã÷ïò óôïí Üí-
èñùðï), ä) Åõ÷áñßóôçóç ìå ü,ôé õðÜñ÷åé (áõôÜñêåéá, ìç ìåìøéìïéñßá), å) Êáèá-
ñüôçôá óþìáôïò êáé øõ÷Þò (Íýøïí áíïìÞìáôá ìç ìüíáí üøéí).
Ç ôñßôç áíáâáèìßäá ôçò ÑÜôæá áöïñÜ ôçí ÁæÜíá, ôçí êáôÜëëçëç èåñáðåõôé-
êÞ óôÜóç ðïõ ðñÝðåé íá ðÜñåé ôï óþìá ìáò ãéá íá ðñï÷ùñÞóåé óôá åðüìåíá
óêáëïðÜôéá.
Ç ôÝôáñôç åßíáé ç ÐñáíáãéÜìá ðïõ áðïóêïðåß äéá ôçò ñõèìéêÞò áíáðíïÞò
íá åëÝãîåé ôçí ÐáíåíÝñãåéá ðïõ õðÜñ÷åé Ýîù ìáò êáé ìÝóá ìáò, ôçí ßäéá äçëá-
äÞ ôçí Äýíáìç ôçò ÆùÞò.
Ç ðÝìðôç åßíáé ç ÐñáôéáêÜñá ðïõ ìáò åêðáéäåýåé óôçí ÷áëÜñùóç, óôï ñç-
ëÜî, óôçí ôÝëåéá áðïôïîßíùóç ôïõ ïñãáíéóìïý ìáò áðü êÜèå öõóéêÞ Þ íïçôéêÞ
ôïîßíç. Åðéóôçìïíéêüôåñá åßíáé ç áðïêïðÞ ôïõ Íïõ áðü ôá êÝíôñá ôùí áéóèÞ-
óåùí.
Ç Ýêôç åßíáé ç ÍôáñÜíá, äçëáäÞ ç ÓõãêÝíôñùóç, ï Óôï÷áóìüò. Ç äõíáôü-
ôçôá íá êñáôÜìå ôï Íïõ ìáò óå Ýíá èÝìá, óçìåßï, óôü÷ï ãéá 12´´ óõíå÷Þ äåõ-
ôåñüëåðôá ÷ùñßò íá ðáñåéóöñÞóåé äåýôåñç óêÝøç.
Ç Ýâäïìç åßíáé ï Äéáëïãéóìüò (ÍôéÜíá), ç åðéìÞêõíóç ôçò óõãêÝíôñùóçò Ý-
ùò ôá 144´´, ðïõ Ý÷åé ùò áðïôÝëåóìá ôçí åóùôåñéêÞ ôáýôéóÞ ìáò ìå ôïí óôü÷ï.
Êáé ôÝëïò ç üãäïç ðïõ åßíáé ôï ÓáìÜíôé (1728´´ óõãêñÜôçóçò ôçò óêÝøçò) ìáò
äßíåé ôçí ÕðÝñâáóç, ôçí ¸íùóç, ôçí Öþôéóç, ôçí Üìåóç âéùìáôéêÞ áíôßëçøç
ôùí ðíåõìáôéêþí áîéþí ðïõ ãßíïíôáé ðëÝïí öõóéêüò êáé ðçãáßïò ôñüðïò Ýêöñá-
óçò êáé æùÞò.
¼ëç áõôÞ ç ÅóùôåñéêÞ Ðáéäåßá, äçëáäÞ: ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá, Åóùôåñé-
êÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ, Õðíùôéóìüò - Ïñèïøõ÷éóìüò, Åðéóôçìïíéêüò Ðíåõìáôéóìüò,
Áðïêñõöïëïãßá, Ìõóôéêéóìüò, Ãéüãêá êáé ïé åí ãÝíåé ðíåõìáôéêÝò áîßåò ðïõ å-
ìðåñéÝ÷åé, ìðïñåß êáé ðñÝðåé êáé åßíáé åðéôáãÞ ôùí êáéñþí ðëÝïí íá ðáñïõóéá-
óôåß êáé íá äéáäïèåß åõñýôåñá äéáìÝóïõ åé äõíáôüí êáé ôçò Ðïëéôåßáò ð.÷. áðü
ôá õðïõñãåßá Ðïëéôéóìïý, Ðáéäåßáò, Õãåßáò ê.ë.ð., äéáìÝóù ôùí Á.Å.É., éäéùôþí
êáé äéáöüñùí Üëëùí öïñÝùí, êáèþò åðßóçò êáé ôùí Ì.Ì.Å. (ìÝóùí ìáæéêÞò
åðéêïéíùíßáò) ìå äéÜöïñá åðéìïñöùôéêÜ ðñïãñÜììáôá, åíçìåñùôéêÝò åêðï-
ìðÝò, óõíåíôåýîåéò, óõæçôÞóåéò, äçìïóéåýìáôá ê.ë.ð. áðü áíèñþðïõò ïé ïðïß-
ïé êáôÝ÷ïõí ôï èÝìá êáé èá ðñïóöÝñïíôáí íá êáôáèÝóïõí ôéò ãíþóåéò ôïõò êáé
ôéò åìðåéñßåò ôïõò.
Ãéá íá åðéôåõ÷èåß äå áõôü èá ðñÝðåé íá õðÜñîåé ó÷åôéêÞ ü÷ëçóç åê ìÝñïõò
ôïõ óõíüëïõ ôùí ìåôáöõóéêþí êéíÞóåùí êáé ôùí åêðñïóþðùí ôùí, ïé ïðïßïé
êáëïýíôáé íá óõíåñãáóôïýí êáé íá äñáóôçñéïðïéçèïýí ðñïò áõôÞ ôçí êáôåý-
èõíóç.
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
e) No violence (no causing physical or psychical pain to our fellow-men).
We pass to the second grade, Niyama meaning no death Immortality. Here
we try to cultivate the superior ideals. Niyama contains 5 "compulsions":
a) Devotion in God or in any superior power we recognize for ourself (we
strengthen Faith, our internal power at an incredible extent),
b) Study of books occupied in man's liberation (it is the cultivation of the
perfect vibration coming from the personal study and mainly from the direct
relation with our Master),
c) Discipline and tolerance (hence the man's self-control begins),
d) Pleasure in whatever exists (self-sufficiency, no grumbling),
e) Body and soul cleaness (Wash your sins, not only your face).
The third upgrade of Raja concerns Asana, the proper therapeutical pose
our body should take, in order to advance on the next steps.
The fourth one is Pranayama aiming, by the rhythmical breath, to control
the Omni-energy existing outside and inside us, that means the life Power it-
self.
The fifth one is Pratyakara training us to relaxation, to loosening, to the ab-
solute detoxination of our organism from every physical or mental toxin.
More scientifically, it is Mind cutting off from the senses centers.
The sixth one is Concentration (Dharana), Thought. That is the ability to
keep Mind at one subject, point or target for 12" without any second thought
to interfere.
The seventh one is Meditation (Dyana), the prolongation of the concen-
tration to 144" that results our esoteric identification with the target.
Finally, the eighth one Samadhi (1728" of our thought holding) gives us
Transgression, Union, Enlightenment, the direct experiencing conception of
the spiritual values that become now a natural and spontaneous way of ex-
pression and life.
All this Esoteric Education, that is: Esoteric Philosophy, Esoteric Thera-
peutics, Hypnotism - Orthopsychism, Scientific Spiritualism, Occultism, Mys-
ticism, Yoga and in general, the spiritual values that it comprises, can and must
be a command in our times and should be presented and expanded at a
larger extent by the State, for example, by the Ministries of Civilization, Ed-
ucation, Health, etc., through the Highest Educational Institutions, the indi-
viduals and various other bearers, as well as by the Massive Communication
Means, through different educational programs, informative emissions, in-
terviews, discussions, publications etc., by the people who know the subject
and would be offered to lay down their knowledge and their experiences.
In ordert that this may be attained, a relevant annoyance should exist on
the part of the whole metaphysical movements and of their representatives
who are called to cooperate and to get activated towards this direction.
8 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 Ç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ ÁíáæÞôçóç
ùò âáóéêü áíèñþðéíï äéêáßùìá
The Metaphysical Search as a basic human right

Å I
ßíáé ç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ ç äýíáìç áõôÞ ç ïðïßá áíáðôõóóüìåíç ìÝóá óôï s the Metaphysics this power that being developed in the social be-
êïéíùíéêü ãßãíåóèáé ðñïóäßäåé ôïí ÷áñáêôÞñá ìéáò åîåëéãìÝíçò êïé- coming, gives the character of an evolved society? And which is this e-
íùíßáò; Êáé ðïéá åßíáé ç åîåëéãìÝíç êïéíùíßá; ÁõôÜ åßíáé ôá åñùôç- volved society? These are the questions that occupy me, as I start writ-
ìáôéêÜ ðïõ ìå áðáó÷ïëïýí êáèþò îåêéíþ íá ãñÜøù ôï êåßìåíï áõ- ing this text. In the contemporary society, the Metaphysics is an exist-
ôü. Óôç óýã÷ñïíç êïéíùíßá ç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ åßíáé ìéá äýíáìç õðáñêôÞ, áëëÜ ing power, but limited within some small groups of people who function as
ðåñéïñéóìÝíç, ìÝóá óå ìéêñÝò ïìÜäåò áíèñþðùí ðïõ ëåéôïõñãïýí óáí ðíåõ- spiritual oasis.
ìáôéêÝò ïÜóåéò. On the other part, the big mass of the humanity lives and exists at least con-
Áðü ôçí Üëëç ðëåõñÜ, ç ìåãÜëç ìÜæá ôçò áíèñùðüôçôáò æåé êáé õðÜñ÷åé sciously, far from the Metaphysics and it considers the Metaphysic reality, in
óõíåéäçôÜ ôïõëÜ÷éóôïí, ìáêñéÜ áðü ôç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ êáé èåùñåß ôçí Ìåôáöõ- the worst case, as an insanity, and in the best case, as an occupation for the
óéêÞ ðñáãìáôéêüôçôá, óôçí ÷åéñüôåñç ðåñßðôùóç óáí ìéá ðáñÜíïéá êáé óôçí privileged or the elite.
êáëýôåñç ôùí ðåñéðôþóåùí óáí ìéá áó÷ïëßá ãéá ðñïíïìéïý÷ïõò Þ åêëå- However, which is the reality?
êôïýò. Ðïéá åßíáé ç ðñáãìáôéêüôçôá üìùò; The reality is that the big majority of the people are absorbed by an end-
Ç ðñáãìáôéêüôçôá åßíáé üôé ç ìåãÜëç ðëåéïøçößá ôùí áíèñþðùí åßíáé á- less activation, aiming to the acquisition of the experience that does not give
ðïññïöçìÝíç áðü ìßá áôÝëåéùôç äñáóôçñéïðïßçóç ìå óêïðü ôçí áðüêôçóç the human mind any liberty to become conscious of its true course in the Cre-
åìðåéñßáò ç ïðïßá äåí äßíåé ðåñéèþñéá óôïí áíèñþðéíï Íïõ ãéá óõíåéäçôï- ation.
ðïßçóç ôçò áëçèéíÞò ôïõ ðïñåßáò ìÝóá óôçí Äçìéïõñãßá. The awful attachment of the mind to the works of its daily life and the ig-
Ç öïâåñÞ ðñïóêüëëçóç ôïõ íïõ óôá Ýñãá ôçò êáèçìåñéíüôçôÜò ôïõ êáé ç norance of the esoteric Truth, have left man uncovered and unprotected, to
áãíùóßá ôçò åóùôåñéêÞò ÁëÞèåéáò Ý÷ïõí áöÞóåé ôïí face all alone the trials of life, but also the pain that
Üíèñùðï áêÜëõðôï êáé áðñïóôÜôåõôï íá áíôéìåôù- life causes to all the levels…
ðßæåé ìüíïò ôïõ ôéò äïêéìáóßåò ôçò æùÞò áëëÜ êáé ôïí Man is forced to exhaust all the psychical, noet-
ðüíï ðïõ ðñïêáëåß ç æùÞ ó' üëá ôá åðßðåäá... ÃñÜöåé ç ÓìÜñù ÊïóìÜïãëïõ ic and physical powers, in order to defend and to
ÁíáãêÜæåôáé ï Üíèñùðïò íá åîáíôëÞóåé üëåò ôéò (õðåýèõíç ôïõ Ïìáêïåßïõ Áèçíþí) be protected from the trials he accepts through his
øõ÷éêÝò, íïçôéêÝò êáé öõóéêÝò äõíÜìåéò ðñïêåéìÝ- Ôçë.: 01 - 8210051 practice in life.
íïõ íá áìõíèåß êáé íá ðñïóôáôåõèåß áðü ôéò äïêé- It is proved that the modern education but also
ìáóßåò ðïõ äÝ÷åôáé ìÝóá áðü ôçí ôñéâÞ ôïõ óôç æù- By Smaro Kosmaoglou the religion are not enough in order to give an out-
Þ. Ç óýã÷ñïíç ðáéäåßá áëëÜ êáé ç èñçóêåßá áðï- (responsible of the Omakoio of Athens) let and a relief to man.
äåéêíýåôáé üôé äåí åßíáé áñêåôÝò ãéá íá äþóïõí äé- Tel.: 01 - 8210051 Man has lost now his orientation and he is lead
Ýîïäï êáé áíáêïýöéóç óôïí Üíèñùðï. Ï Üíèñù- to a self-destructive sloping course.
ðïò Ý÷åé ÷Üóåé ðëÝïí ôïí ðñïóáíáôïëéóìü ôïõ êáé In fact, he has lost a very great Good.
ïäçãåßôáé óå ìßá áõôïêáôáóôñïöéêÞ êáôéïýóá ðï- The communication with himself, with his Great
ñåßá. ¸÷åé ÷Üóåé óôçí ðñáãìáôéêüôçôá Ýíá ðïëý ìåãÜëï Áãáèü. Ôçí åðéêïé- Self, his Internal Self.
íùíßá ìå ôïí åáõôü ôïõ, ôïí ÌåãÜëï Åáõôü ôïõ, ôïí ¸óù Åáõôü ôïõ. Today, the Metaphysics or the Esoterism come to remind him and to give
Ôï äéêáßùìÜ ôïõ ó' áõôü ôï ÕðÝñôáôï Áãáèü Ýñ÷åôáé óÞìåñá ç Ìåôáöõ- him again his right to this Supreme Good.
óéêÞ Þ ï Åóùôåñéóìüò íá ôïõ ôï õðåíèõìßóåé êáé íá ôïõ ôï îáíáäþóåé. Áõôü This is what asked by the contemporary man, either he knows it, or not.
åßíáé ôï æçôïýìåíï ôïõ óýã÷ñïíïõ áíèñþðïõ, åßôå ôï ãíùñßæåé, åßôå ü÷é. The Metaphysics-Esoterism is the only philosophy that can redefine the
Ç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ - Åóùôåñéóìüò åßíáé ç ìüíç öéëïóïößá ðïõ ìðïñåß íá å- true identity but also the orientation of man in life.
ðáíáðñïóäéïñßóåé ôçí áëçèéíÞ ôáõôüôçôá áëëÜ êáé ôïí ðñïóáíáôïëéóìü ôïõ The man of today, cut off from his Internal Self, abandoned from the Es-
áíèñþðïõ ìÝóá óôç æùÞ. Ï Üíèñùðïò ôïõ óÞìåñá åßíáé åãêáôáëåëåéììÝíïò oteric Knowledge, without any Faith in the Divine, heads to the unknown,
áðü ôçí ÅóùôåñéêÞ Ãíþóç, ÷ùñßò Ðßóôç óôï Èåßï, ðïñåýåôáé óôï Üãíùóôï, opposite to the fear, the loneliness and the oppression that come from his ex-
áíôéìÝôùðïò ìå ôï öüâï, ìå ôç ìïíáîéÜ êáé ìå ôçí êáôáðßåóç ðïõ ðñïÝñ÷å- ternal but also his internal factors.
ôáé áðü åîùôåñéêïýò áëëÜ êáé åóùôåñéêïýò ôïõ ðáñÜãïíôåò. In order to escape from the whirlwinds of all these, but also from other fac-
Ãéá íá îåöýãåé áðü ôéò äßíåò üëùí áõôþí, áëëÜ êáé Üëëùí ðáñáãüíôùí êá- tors, he directs his Being, his Mind, to the material interests that give him the
ôåõèýíåé ôï Åßíáé ôïõ, ôï Íïõ ôïõ, óå åíäéáöÝñïíôá õëéóôéêÜ ðïõ ôïõ äßíïõí hallucination of his safety and his justification in life and that in fact, howev-
ôçí øåõäáßóèçóç ôçò áóöÜëåéáò êáé ôçò äéêáßùóÞò ôïõ ìÝóá óôç æùÞ êáé ðïõ er, send him still farther from the confront of his real problem.
óôçí ðñáãìáôéêüôçôá üìùò ôïí áðïìáêñýíïõí áêüìá ðåñéóóüôåñï áðü ôçí Each man ought to know that life has also another side, more Substantial,

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 9 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

áíôéìåôþðéóç ôïõ áëçèéíïý ôïõ ðñïâëÞìáôïò.
Ï êÜèå Üíèñùðïò ïöåßëåé íá ãíùñßæåé üôé ç æùÞ Ý÷åé êáé ìéá Üëëç üøç
ðéï ÏõóéáóôéêÞ, ðéï ÁëçèéíÞ, ç ïðïßá ìðïñåß íá ôïõ äéåõñýíåé ôïõò ïñßæï-
íôåò áíôßëçøçò êáé íá ôïí êáôáóôÞóåé ðéï åõôõ÷éóìÝíï, ðéï ïëïêëçñùìÝíï
óáí ïíôüôçôá. ÁõôÞ üìùò ç äéáöïñåôéêÞ áíôßëçøç ôùí ðñáãìÜôùí, ðñïûðï-
èÝôåé ìéá äéáöïñåôéêÞ ðáéäåßá áðü áõôÞí ðïõ ìÝ÷ñé ðñüôéíïò ãíþñéæå. ×ñåéÜ-
æåôáé äçëáäÞ äéáöïñåôéêü ôñüðï ôïõ óêÝðôåóèáé êáé êáôÜ óõíÝðåéá äéáöï-
ñåôéêü ôñüðï áíôéìåôþðéóçò ôçò ÆùÞò. Åäþ ó' áõôü ôï óçìåßï ÷ñåéÜæåôáé ç
Ãíþóç ôçò áëçèéíÞò - ïñèÞò ÌåôáöõóéêÞò ÅðéóôÞìçò.
Ç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ äåí åßíáé üðùò ðïëëïß íïìßæïõí ìüíï äéÜöïñåò öéëïóï-
öéêÝò ãíþóåéò áëëÜ êáé ðñáêôéêÝò, ðïõ áöïñïýí êáôáóôÜóåéò ðïõ îåöåýãïõí
áðü ôçí öõóéêÞ ðñáãìáôéêüôçôá êáé ðñïåôïéìÜæïõí óôáäéáêÜ ôïí áíèñþðé-
íï Íïõ íá äéåõñýíåé ôçí áíôßëçøÞ ôïõ êáé ôïí åðáíáðñïóäéïñéóìü ôùí ïõ-
óéáóôéêþí ôïõ áîéþí óå ó÷Ýóç ìå ôçí ðíåõìáôéêÞ ôïõ õðüóôáóç êáé äýíáìç
ðïõ öÝñåé ìÝóá ôïõ ç ïðïßá âñßóêåôáé óå ëáíèÜíïõóá êáôÜóôáóç.
Ç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ åßíáé êáèçìåñéíÞ ðñÜîç êáé âßùìá.
¸÷åé Üìåóï áíôßêôõðï óôçí êáèçìåñéíÞ æùÞ, ìÝóá óôéò áíèñþðéíåò ó÷Ý-
óåéò, óôçí ïéêïãÝíåéá, óôéò öéëßåò, óôçí åñãáóßá, ðáíôïý, äéüôé êáëëéåñãåß ôçí
áíþôåñç äéÜêñéóç óôïí áíèñþðéíï Íïõ ìå áðïôÝëåóìá óå üðïéï ôïìÝá ôçò
æùÞò êáé íá õðåéóÝëèåé ç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ íá åðéöÝñåé ôçí åóùôåñéêÞ ÃáëÞíç áë-
ëÜ êáé ôçí Õãåßá óôï Íïõ êáé óôï óþìá. ÌÝóá óôçí ïéêïãÝíåéá ãßíåôáé ãíþ-
ìïíáò äéêáéïóýíçò êáé êáôÜ óõíÝðåéá êáëýôåñçò åðéêïéíùíßáò ôùí ìåëþí ðïõ
ôçí áðáñôßæïõí êáé áñìïíéêüôåñçò óõíýðáñîçò.
Áí ðåñéïñéóôïýìå ó' áõôÜ ôá äýï ìüíï üóïí áöïñÜ ôçí åðßäñáóç ôçò Ìå-
ôáöõóéêÞò óôçí êáèçìåñéíÞ æùÞ ìáò, äçëáäÞ óôï ðñïóùðéêü åðßðåäï áñ-
÷éêÜ êáé óôç óõíÝ÷åéá ìÝóá óôçí ïéêïãÝíåéá êáé óôéò äéáðñïóùðéêÝò ó÷Ýóåéò
ôùí áíèñþðùí, âëÝðïõìå üôé åßíáé áñêåôÜ ãéá ôç âåëôßùóç ôçò ðïéüôçôáò ôçò
æùÞò. Ãéáôß ï ðõñÞíáò êÜèå ïñãáíùìÝíçò êïéíùíßáò åßíáé ç ïéêïãÝíåéá êáé
ï ðõñÞíáò ôçò ïéêïãÝíåéáò åßíáé ôï Üôïìï. Êáé åìåßò ðéóôåýïõìå óôï ¢ôïìï.
ÅÜí ôï êÜèå Üôïìï îå÷ùñéóôÜ êáé ìåôÜ üëïé ìáæß äåí óôñáöïýìå ðñïò ôç
ÌåôáöõóéêÞ íá äñÝøïõìå ôïõò êáñðïýò ôçò, äåí ìðïñåß íá õðÜñîåé ðñáã-
ìáôéêÞ åîÝëéîç óôçí êïéíùíßá ìáò. Åßíáé ãíùóôü ðëÝïí üôé ï ôå÷íïêñáôéêüò
ðïëéôéóìüò ìáò äåí åßíáé öåñÝããõïò êáé äåí ìðïñåß íá ðñïóöÝñåé ïýôå ðïéü-
ôçôá æùÞò, ïýôå åîÝëéîç êïéíùíéêÞ. Ãíùñßæïõìå üôé ðñÝðåé íá éóïóêåëéóôåß ìå
ôçí ðíåõìáôéêÞ áíÜðôõîç êáé êáëëéÝñãåéá ôçò êïéíùíßáò ìáò.
Åäþ õðåéóÝñ÷åôáé ç áíáãêáéüôçôá ôçò ÌåôáöõóéêÞò êáé ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý
óáí âáóéêü êáé áíáíôßññçôï áíèñþðéíï äéêáßùìá.
Ï Üíèñùðïò ãéá íá áíá÷áéôßóåé ôçí êáôéïýóá ðïñåßá ôçò õëéóôéêÞò ðïñåß-
áò æùÞò óôçí ïðïßá âñßóêåôáé ÷ñåéÜæåôáé Ýíáí áíôßðïäá. ×ñåéÜæåôáé ôï ðíåõ-
ìáôéêü áíôßâáñï ðïõ èá ôïí öÝñåé óôç óùóôÞ êáôåýèõíóç, þóôå íá áðïâåß
õãéÝò êýôôáñï ôçò êïéíùíßáò áëëÜ êáé íá óõìöéëéùèåß ìå ôïí åáõôü ôïõ.
¿óôå áíáêåöáëáéþíïíôáò èá ðñÝðåé íá åóôéÜóïõìå ôçí ðñïóï÷Þ ìáò óå
äýï óçìåßá.
Ðñþôïí: Ç Ãíþóç ôçò ÌåôáöõóéêÞò åßíáé åêåßíç ç äõíáìéêÞ ðïõ ìðïñåß
íá áðåëåõèåñþóåé ôïí Üíèñùðï áðü ôï áäéÝîïäï óôï ïðïßï âñßóêåôáé óÞ-
ìåñá êáé íá ôïí ïäçãÞóåé óå ìéá óõíåéäçôïðïßçóç ôïõ áëçèéíïý ôïõ ðñïï-
ñéóìïý ìÝóá óôç Äçìéïõñãßá, ìå áðïôÝëåóìá íá áíáêáëýøåé üôé ìðïñåß íá
åßíáé éóïññïðçìÝíïò, ãáëÞíéïò êáé äõíáôüò åóùôåñéêÜ Üíèñùðïò.
Äåýôåñïí: Ìå ôçí åðßäñáóç ôçò ÌåôáöõóéêÞò óôçí êïéíùíßá ìáò ìðïñåß
íá åðÝëèåé åîõãßáíóç êïéíùíéêÞ êáé ìðïñåß ï êüóìïò áõôüò íá ìåôáôñáðåß
óå ðáñáäåßóéá ÷þñá üðïõ ïé Üíèñùðïé ìðïñïýí íá óõíõðÜñ÷ïõí êáé íá á-
íáðôýóóïíôáé åéñçíéêÜ...
Ìüíï ôüôå ìðïñïýí íá õëïðïéçèïýí êáé íá ðÜøïõí íá åßíáé áðïêëåéóôé-
êÜ üíåéñá éäåáëéóôþí Þ ïõôïðßá ïëßãùí ôá áíþôåñá éäáíéêÜ êáé íá ãßíïõí á-
îßåò êÜèå áíèñþðïõ ðïõ äéáêñßíåôáé áðü Þèïò êáé ïñèÞ óêÝøç.
Ôï éäáíéêü ôçò åëåõèåñßáò ãéá ðáñÜäåéãìá ìðïñåß íá Ý÷åé èÝóç ìüíï áí
áõôÞ ç ðåñéðüèçôç áðåëåõèÝñùóç ðñáãìáôùèåß ìÝóá óôïí Üíèñùðï ðñþ-
ôá, ãéá íá êáôáëÞîåé êáôüðéí óôçí åîùôåñéêÞ ôïõ åêäÞëùóç.
ÊáôÜ ôçí ßäéá Ýííïéá ôï éäáíéêü ôçò áäåëöïóýíçò üëùí ôùí áíèñþðùí êáé
ôï õðÝñôáôï éäáíéêü ôçò ÁãÜðçò êáé ôçò ÅéñÞíçò ìðïñïýí åðéôÝëïõò íá ãß-
íïõí ðñáãìáôéêüôçôá, áí èåìåëéùèïýí ìÝóá óôïí Üíèñùðï ìå ôçí êáëëéÝñ-
ãåéÜ ôïõò áðü ôç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ Öéëïóïößá êáé ìüíï ì' áõôÞ!!!
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
more True, that can enlarge his horizons of the perception and make him hap-
pier, more completed as an entity.
But this different conception about the things, presupposes a different ed-
ucation than the one he knew a little ago. That is, he needs a different way
of thinking and consequently, a different way of facing Life.
Here, at this point, the Knowledge of the true-right Metaphysical Science
is required.
The Metaphysics is not, as many people think, only various philosophical
knowledge, but also practical, concerning some situations that escape from
the physical reality and prepare little by little the Human Mind to enlarge its
perception and the redefinition of his substantial values, in relation with his
spiritual substance and power that he bears within him, and that is at a latent
state.
The Metaphysics is a daily action and experience.
It has a direct effect in the daily life, in the human relations, in family, in
friendship, in work, everywhere, as it cultivates the superior distinction in the
human Mind, resulting that at any factor the Metaphysics may enter into, it
will bring the Harmony and the Equilibrium.
At a personal level, it brings the internal Peace but also the Health in the
Mind and in the body.
In family, it becomes a gnomon of justice and consequently, of a better com-
munication of the members that constitute it and of a more harmonious co-
existence.
If we confine ourselves in these two only concerning the influence of Meta-
physics in our daily life, that is first at the personal level and then in family
and in the interpersonal relations of the people, we see that it is enough for
the improvement of the quality of life. Because the kernel of every organized
society is family and the kernel of family is the individual. And we believe to
the Individual. If every individual separately and then all together, do not
turn to the Metaphysics in order to gather Its fruit, no real evolution can ex-
ist in our society.
It is known now, that our technocratic civilization is not reliable and it can
offer neither any quality of life nor any social evolution.
We know that it must be balanced with the spiritual development and cul-
tivation of our society.
Here the necessity of the Metaphysics and of the Esoterism enters into as
a basic and undeniable human right.
In order that man restrain the sloping course of the material life where he
is found, he needs an antipode. He needs the spiritual counterweight that will
lead him to the right direction, in order to become a healthy cell of the soci-
ety but also to be conciliated with his being.
Therefore, recapitulating, we must focus our attention to two points:
First: The Knowledge of the Metaphysics is the dynamics that can deliver
man from the deadlock In which he is found nowadays and guide him to a
consciousness of his real destination in the Creation, to the effect that he will
discover that he may be a well-balanced, calm and internally strong man.
Second: By the influence of the Metaphysics in our society, a social re-
forming may come and this people may be converted into a paradisiacal
country where the people will be able to coexist and to be developed peace-
fully…
Only then the superior ideals will be able to take shape and to stop being
exclusively the dreams of the idealists, or the utopia of a few people, and to
become the values of every man who is discerned for his morality and his right
thought.
The ideal of the freedom, for example, can have a place only if this deliv-
erance is accomplished first in man, in order to end, afterwards, to his exter-
nal expression.
In the same sense, the ideal of the brotherhood of all the people and the
supreme ideal of Love and Peace, may at last become real, if they are based
within man by their cultivation in the Metaphysical Philosophy and only in
this!!
10 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 Ç åíüôçôá ôïõ 2001
The unity of 2001
ÃñÜöåé o ÄçìÞôñçò ÔóáðÜñáò
(õðåýèõíïò Ïìáêïåßùí Ëáìßáò êáé ÊáëëéèÝáò)
Ôçë.: 0231 - 32888
¼ Á
ëïé ïé Üíèñùðïé, üëïé ïé ëáïß, üëç ç Ãç ðñÝðåé íá ãßíïõíå
óýìâïëï ÅÍÏÔÇÔÁÓ, ÅéñÞíçò, ÁãÜðçò êáé Öéëßáò (ÅÍ ÔÏ
ÐÁÍ) êáé ïé ðÜíôåò íá ãßíïõí ÅÍÁ. Ï Íïõò ôïõ áíèñþðïõ
äåí ìðïñåß íá êáôáíïÞóåé ôï åíéáßï êáé áäéá÷þñéóôï ìüíï Å-
ÍÁ, ãéáôß äåí ÷ùñÜåé ìÝóá óôï ìõáëü ôïõ.
Ãéá íá ôá êáôáëÜâåé ï Íïõò ôá áñéèìåß, ôá ÷ñùìáôßæåé, ôá äéáéñåß êáé ôá
êáôáíÝìåé óå Üðåéñåò õðïäéáéñÝóåéò êáé ïíïìáóßåò. Ïé Üíèñùðïé üìùò æç-
ôïýí áðü ìáò óùóôÞ ðëçñïöüñçóç. Ïé íÝïé ìáò äéøïýí ãéá õøçëÞ Ðíåõ-
ìáôéêÞ Ãíþóç.
Åìåßò ðïõ Ý÷ïõìå ôç äéÜèåóç íá ôåèïýìå óôçí õðçñåóßá ôçò Áíèñùðü-
ôçôáò, åßìáóôå Ýôïéìïé íá ðñïóöÝñïõìå ìéá æùÞ ãåìÜôç áãÜðç óôïõò Üë-
ëïõò Þ æçôÜìå ôç äéêÞ ìáò óùôçñßá; Áí æçôÜìå ôçí äéêÞ ìáò óùôçñßá êÜ-
íïõìå óïâáñü ëÜèïò. Ôçí óùôçñßá ôùí Üëëùí ðñÝðåé íá æçôÜìå.
Ï åõëïãçìÝíïò ôïõ Èåïý äåí åßíáé áõôüò ðïõ ðáßñíåé, áëëÜ áõôüò ðïõ
äßíåé áíéäéïôåëþò.
Åìåßò ôïõëÜ÷éóôïí ãíùñßæïõìå üôé, ìÝóá ìáò æåé êáé õðÜñ÷åé ç Üóâåóôç
óðßèá ôçò ìåãÜëçò öëüãáò, ôïõ ßäéïõ ôïõ ðáôÝñá ìáò Èåïý. ÌÝóá ìáò æåé
êáé õðÜñ÷åé ï óáñêùìÝíïò ëüãïò Ôïõ, ôï áüñáôï ðíåýìá (ï óðéíèÞñáò)
ï áéþíéïò óõìðáñáóôÜôçò, ðïõ äéäÜóêåé ôçí øõ÷Þ êáé ôï Íïõ ìáò.
Êáìßá åõôõ÷ßá êáé ÷áñÜ äåí åßíáé áíþôåñç áðü ôçí ÷áñÜ ðïõ áéóèÜíå-
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
By Dimitriw Tsaparas
(responsible of the Omakoios of Lamia and of Kallithea)
Tel.: 0231 - 32888
ll the fellows, all the people, all the earth, we must become a sym-
bol of UNITY, peace, love and friendship (IN EVERYTHING) and
everybody must become ONE. The Mind of man cannot compre-
hend the uniformed and inseparable only ONE, because it does not
get in his mind.
In order that the mind understand them it counts them, it colors them,
it divides them and it distributes them to infinite subdivisions and names.
But the people ask a right information by us. Our young are thirsty for a
high Spiritual Knowledge.
We who have the disposition to be placed to the Service of the Hu-
manity, are we ready to offer a life full of love to the others? Or do we seek
for our own salvation? If we look after our own salvation, we make a se-
rious mistake. We must seek for the salvation of the others.
The blessed of God is not he who takes, but he who gives unselfishly.
At least we know that within us the undying spark of the big flame of
our own father, God, lives and exists.
Within us His incarnated word, the invisible spirit (the sparkle), the eter-
nal assistant who teaches our soul and our mind, lives and exists.
No happiness or joy is superior but the joy that man feels in his soul,
but only when he realizes His divine and eternal origin. We are the ex-
11 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
ôáé ï Üíèñùðïò ìÝóá óôçí øõ÷Þ ôïõ, ðáñÜ ìüíï, üôáí áíôéëçöèåß ôç èåß-
á êáé áéþíéá êáôáãùãÞ ôïõ.
Åßìáóôå åêäçëþóåéò ìéáò áüñáôçò äýíáìçò, ðíåõìáôéêÜ ðáéäéÜ ôïõ Èå-
ïý. Ç Âáóéëåßá ôïõ Èåïý åíôüò çìþí åóôß. Õéïß ôïõ õøßóôïõ åóìÝí. ÊÜèå
Üíèñùðïò åßíáé õéüò Èåïý. Ï Èåüò åßíáé ôüóï áãÜðç üóï êáé Óïößá. Ãé'
áõôü áí áãáðÜò ôï Èåü õðçñÝôçóå ôïí Üíèñùðï. ¼ôáí ç áãÜðç ãßíåé
ðñÜîç ôüôå ìïíÜ÷á ïöåëåß.
Åìåßò äåí ðñÝðåé íá îå÷ùñßæïõìå ôïõò áíèñþðïõò óå êßôñéíïõò, ìáý-
ñïõò, Üóðñïõò. Óå ëáïýò, êñÜôç êáé èñçóêåßåò, èá ðñÝðåé íá Ý÷ïõìå á-
ãÜðç êáé óåâáóìü ãéá üëïõò êáé ãéá üëá, ôüôå ç Ðáãêüóìéá Åíüôçôá èá
åßíáé ðïëý êïíôÜ ìáò.
ÐñÝðåé üìùò íá ôï äÝóïõìå âáèéÜ ìÝóá óôï Íïõ ìáò, üôé ìüíï ìéá êïé-
íùíéêÞ ôÜîç õðÜñ÷åé. Ç êïéíùíéêÞ ôÜîç ôçò áíèñùðüôçôáò. Ìüíï ìéá
ãëþóóá õðÜñ÷åé. Ç ãëþóóá ôçò êáñäéÜò. Ìüíï ìéá èñçóêåßá õðÜñ÷åé. Ç
èñçóêåßá ôçò áãÜðçò.
Êáé ìçí îå÷íÜìå üôé õðåñÜíù êÜèå èñçóêåßáò åßíáé ç ÁëÞèåéá.
Ï êüóìïò ôïýôïò åîáêïëïõèåß íá åßíáé ìßãìá êáëïý êáé êáêïý.
¼ôáí îå÷íÜò ôï ìÝóá óïõ öùò, ãßíåóáé óêïôÜäé êáé üôáí ôï èõìÜóáé îá-
íáãßíåóáé öùò.
Íá åßìáóôå öéëéêïß êáé óðëá÷íéêïß óå åêåßíïõò ðïõ õðïöÝñïõí. Íá ÷áé-
ñüìáóôå üôáí ïé Üëëïé åõôõ÷ïýí êáé ÷áßñïíôáé. Íá åßìáóôå ðñÜïé êáé áôÜ-
ñá÷ïé áðÝíáíôé óôïõò óõêïöÜíôåò. Óôï êáëü íá íéþèïõìå ÷áñÜ êáé óôï
êáêü íá ìÝíïõìå áôÜñá÷ïé. Íá ìçí åðéóôñÝöïõìå ôçí ýâñç óôïõò õâñé-
óôÝò ìáò. ÊÜèå áíôßäñáóç ìå ôçí ìïñöÞ åãùéóìïý, ìßóïõò êáé êáêßáò ìáò
æçìéþíåé êáñìéêÜ.
ÌÜèå íá óõã÷ùñåßò ôïõò å÷èñïýò óïõ áëëÜ ìç óõã÷ùñåßò êáé äéêáéï-
ëïãåßò ôïí åáõôü óïõ. Ï Üíèñùðïò ðñÝðåé íá áðïêôÞóåé ôéò åìðåéñßåò ôïõ
ìÝóá áðü ôéò áíôéèÝóåéò (êáëü, êáêü).
Ôï ìßóïò äåí óâÞíåé ìå ìßóïò. Ôï ìßóïò óâÞíåé êáé ëéþíåé óôçí ðñáã-
ìáôéêÞ áãÜðç. Áí ï Üíèñùðïò èá ìðïñïýóå íá äåé ôá ôÝñáôá ôïõ èõìïý
ôïõ ðïôÝ ôïõ äåí èá èýìùíå.
Äüîá ðíåõìáôéêÞ ÷ùñßò èõóßá õëéêÞ äåí õößóôáôáé êáé äåí õðÜñ÷åé. Ï
Üíèñùðïò ðñþôá èõóéÜæåôáé êáé ýóôåñá äïîÜæåôáé. Ðñþôá âáðôßæåôáé óôïõò
ðüíïõò êáé ýóôåñá áíáóôáßíåôáé. Ãé' áõôü üðïõ õðÜñ÷åé ðüèïò åêåß åßíáé
êáé ï ðüíïò.
Ç äõóôõ÷ßá ôïõ áíèñþðïõ ðñïÝñ÷åôáé áðü ôïí åêíåõñéóìü, ôïí åãùé-
óìü, ôçí æÞëéá êáé ôçí õðåñçöÜíåéá. ÐÜóá öÞìç, äüîá, ôßôëïò êáé ïößêéï
åðéäñÜ áñíçôéêÜ óôçí åîÝëéîç ôïõ áíèñþðïõ, åðéâñáäýíåé êáé êáèõóôå-
ñåß ôçí ðíåõìáôéêÞ ôïõ áíýøùóç. Ãé' áõôü ìçí áãáðÜôå üóá åßíáé ôïõ êü-
óìïõ ôïýôïõ. Íá áãáðÜôå ôá ðíåõìáôéêÜ, ôá õøçëÜ êáé ôá áíþôåñá.
Ôï óþìá ìáò öÝñíåé ðÜíù ôïõ åðéèõìßåò (áìáñôßåò) êáé åßíáé ïöåéëÝ-
ôçò ôçò ýëçò. Ãé' áõôü ôï öõóéêü óþìá ðåèáßíåé êáé ðáñáìÝíåé åäþ óôç Ãç,
ãéáôß åßíáé ãÞéíï. Åìåßò üìùò äåí åßìáóôå óþìáôá ãÞéíá. Åßìáóôå ðíåõìá-
ôïøõ÷Ýò, êáèÜñéá ðíåõìáôéêÜ ðáéäéÜ ôïõ Èåïý. Êáé åßìáóôå üëá ìÝóá
Ôïõ, ãéáôß áí êÜðïéïò âñéóêüôáí Ýîù Ôïõ èá Þôáí äåýôåñïò èåüò. Ôüôå äåí
èá ëÝãáìå Ýíáò åßíáé ï Èåüò êáé åßíáé Ðáíôá÷ïý Ðáñþí.
Íá ãéáôß ï Ê.Ç.É.×. åßðå: "Åãþ êáé ï ðáôÞñ åí åóìÝí". Ï ðáôÞñ åí åéìß
êáãþ åí áõôþ. Êáé åóåßò èåïß åóôáß.
ÌÝóá ìáò ëïéðüí æåé êáé õðÜñ÷åé ï óáñêùìÝíïò ëüãïò ôïõ Èåïý. Áò
øÜîïõìå íá ôïí âñïýìå.
Ðñïóï÷Þ üìùò. Íá åßìáóôå åñåõíçôÝò ÷ùñßò åìðÜèåéá êáé öáíáôéóìü.
Åý÷ïìáé óå üëïõò ôï 2001 íá ìáò áíõøþóåé ðåñéóóüôåñá ðíåõìáôéêÜ.
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
pressions of an invisible power, the spiritual children of God. The royalty
of God is within us. We are the sons of the Lord. Every man is the Son of
God. God is as much love as wisdom. Thus, If you love God, do serve man.
Only when love becomes an act, it is of benefit.
We must not distinguish the people to yellow, black, white, to peoples,
to states and to religions. We must feel love and respect for everybody
and for everything; then the Universal Unity is too near us.
We must, however, bind deeply in our mind, that only one social class
exists: the social class of the humanity. Only one language exists. The lan-
guage of the heart. Only one religion exists. The religion of love.
And let us not forget that above every religion, truth is.
This people continue to be a mixture of the good and of the evil.
When you forget the light inside you, you become darkness and when
you remember it, you become light again.
Let us be friendly and merciful to those who suffer. Let us be happy
when the others prosper and rejoice. Let us be mild and calm against the
sycophants. We must feel joy to the good and we must remain unemotional
to the evil. We must not return the insult to our revilers. Because every re-
action in the form of the egoism, hate and badness, damages us In karmic.
Learn how to forgive your enemies, but don't forgive nor justify your-
self. Man must get his experiences through the oppositions (good, evil).
The hate is not extinguished with the hate. The hate is extinguished and
melted with the true love. If man could see the monsters of his anger, he
would never get angry.
Because there is none spiritual glory without any material sacrifice. Man
first is sacrificed and then is glorified.
Man first gets baptized in the pains and then he is resurrected. For this
reason, where there is desire, there is also pain. The unhappiness of man
comes from the irritation, the egoism, the jealousy and the pride.
Every fame, glory, title and axiom Influences negatively to the evolution
of man, it retards and delays his spiritual elevation. Thus, don't love what
is of this world. Love the high and the superior spiritual things.
Our body bears on it some desires (sins) and it is the debtor of the mat-
ter.
For this reason, our physical body dies and remains here on earth, be-
cause it is earthy. But we are not earthy bodies. We are spirit-souls, pure
spiritual children of God. And all of us we are within Him, because if some-
body were out of Him, he would be a second God. Then we would not
say "God is one and He is present everywhere."
That is why OUR LORD JESUS CHRIST said: "Me and father are one.
Father in me and me in Him. And you are Gods."
Therefore, within us the incarnated word of God lives and exists. Let us
search for to find it.
But, attention! We must be searchers without any empathy and fanatism.
I wish to everybody that the year 2001 elevate us spiritually.
12 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 Ôï Âáèýôåñï Ìõóôéêü ôçò Ãéüãêá êáé ïé ðñïåëëçíéêÝò ôçò ñßæåò
Ç åðéóôçìïíéêÞ
ìÝèïäïò ôçò Ãéüãêá
Ïé åöáñìïãÝò ôçò óôïí óýã÷ñïíï Üíèñùðï
The deeper secret of Yoga and its pre-hellenic roots
The scientific method of Yoga
Its applications to the modern man
Çëßá Ë. ÊáôóéÜìðá,
äçìïóéïãñÜöïõ, êáèçãçôÞ ÖõóéêÞò ÁãùãÞò,
ÅêðáéäåõôÞ ÅóùôåñéêÞò Öéëïóïößáò,
Ãéüãêá & Åíáëëáêôéêþí Èåñáðåõôéêþí ìåèüäùí
(õðåýèõíïõ Ïìáêïåßùí ÔñéêÜëùí & Èåóóáëïíßêçò)
ÔçëÝöùíï: 0431 - 75505
ÔÉ ÄÅÍ ÅÉ ÍÁÉ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ
1) Êáô' áñ÷Üò ðñïò áðïóáöÞíéóç êáé äéÜëõóç ôùí ðáñáíïÞóåùí - äéáäü-
óåùí - ðáñåîçãÞóåùí (óõêïöáíôéþí - êáôçãïñéþí) ðñïåñ÷ïìÝíùí åßôå áðü
Üãíïéá, åßôå áðü åëëéðÞ Þ óêüðéìá êáêÞ ðëçñïöüñçóç èá ðñÝðåé íá äïýìå ôé
äåí åßíáé Ãéüãêá:
Ðñþôá áð' üëá ç Ãéüãêá äåí åßíáé Èñçóêåßá, Äüãìá, Ðßóôç, Ëáôñåßá, Áßñå-
óç ê.ë.ð. üðùò êáêüâïõëá ìåñéêÝò öïñÝò äéáäßäåôáé, ïýôå Ý÷åé ó÷Ýóç ì' áõ-
ôÜ, ðáñÜ ìüíï óôï âáèìü ðïõ ç Öéëïóïößá ôçò ìáò ðáñïõóéÜæåé ìéá ìåôáöõ-
óéêÞ èåþñçóç ôçò Äçìéïõñãßáò êáé ôïõ áíèñþðïõ, ðñÜãìá ðïõ óôç Äýóç ùò
åðß ôï ðëåßóôïí äåí äéäÜóêåôáé êáé üôáí óõìâáßíåé íá äéäÜóêåôáé, óßãïõñá äåí
Ý÷åé ïõäåìßá ó÷Ýóç ìå ôçí ÈñçóêåõôéêÞ Ðßóôç.
Ç Ãéüãêá åßíáé ôï 4ï Éíäéêü (Äñáâéäéáêü) Öéëïóïöéêü Óýóôçìá êáé áðïôå-
ëåß ôçí ìåãáëýôåñç äéáóùèåßóá ðñáêôéêÞ øõ÷ïëïãéêÞ ìÝèïäï, éêáíÞ íá âïç-
èÞóåé ôïí Üíèñùðï ïõóéáóôéêÜ ó' üëá ôá åðßðåäá ôçò æùÞò (óùìáôéêü, óõíáé-
óèçìáôéêü, íïçôéêü êáé ðíåõìáôéêü).
Óôçí Ãéüãêá äåí áðáéôåßôáé ïýôå æçôåßôáé êÜðïéá ðßóôç, ôïõíáíôßïí ï êÜèå ìá-
èçôÞò ôçò óðïõäÜæåé êáé êáôáñôßæåôáé ðÜíù óôéò ðñáêôéêÝò ôçò, ôéò ïðïßåò ïöåß-
ëåé -áíÜëïãá ìå ôçí éäéïóõãêñáóßá ôïõ, ôçí Ýöåóç êáé ôçí èÝëçóÞ ôïõ- ìå
óêëçñÞ êáé åðßðïíç ðñáêôéêÞ íá åöáñìüóåé ãéá íá ðÜñåé ôçí ðñïóùðéêÞ âå-
âáßùóç ôùí ïõóéáóôéêþí áðïôåëåóìÜôùí ôçò ðÜíù óôïí åáõôü ôïõ (óþìá êáé
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
Ilias L. Katsiampas
Journaliste, professor of Physical Education (Training),
Instructor of Esoteric Philosophy, Yoga
& Alternative Curative Methods
(responsible of the Omakoia of Trikala & of Thessaloniki)
WHAT IS NOT YOGA
1) As a beginning, to clarify and dissolve the misapprehensions-rumors-mis-
understandings |(slanders-defamations), resulting either from ignorance or
from deficient or intentionally wrong information, we should se what is not
Yoga.
First of all, Yoga is not any Religion, Dogma, Faith, Worship, Heresy etc.,
as sometimes it is malevontly rumored. It is nor relevant to all these, but on-
ly at the extent that its Philosophy presents us a metaphysical attestation of
Creation and of man, which in the West mostly is not taught, but when it hap-
pens to be taught, it surely does not have any relation with the Religious
Faith.
Yoga is the 4th Indian (Dravidian) Philosophical System and constitutes the
greatest saved practical psychological method, being able to help man sub-
stantially to all the life levels (bodily, sentimental, mental and spiritual).
In Yoga no faith is required or asked, on the contrary: its every student s-
tudies and gets formed on its practices, that he must - according to his idio-
syncrasy, his inclination and his will - after a hard and painful practice, apply
in order to get the personal confirmation of its substantial results on himself
(body and Mind).
2) It is not anything ascetic keeping us away and isolating us from life. In
13 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
Íïõ).
2) Äåí åßíáé êÜôé ôï áóêçôéêü ðïõ ìáò áðïìáêñýíåé êáé ìáò áðïìïíþíåé á-
ðü ôçí æùÞ. Óôçí ðñáãìáôéêüôçôá ìáò ðñïùèåß, ìáò åíôÜóóåé, ìáò âïçèåß, ìáò
îåêïõñÜæåé, ìáò åíäõíáìþíåé, ìáò ïëïêëçñþíåé êáé ìáò ôïðïèåôåß ðéï õðåý-
èõíá êáé äñáóôÞñéá ìÝóá óôçí êïéíùíßá.
3) Óå êáìßá ðåñßðôùóç äåí åßíáé îåíüöåñôç üðùò ìáò ðáñïõóéÜæåôáé. Ðñü-
êåéôáé ãéá ìéá ðñáêôéêüôáôç ãíþóç, ìéá ïëïêëçñùìÝíç ìÝèïäïò êáëëéÝñãåéáò
ôïõ áíèñþðïõ, ìå áñ÷áéüôáôåò ðñïåëëçíéêÝò ñßæåò êé ü÷é êÜôé ðïõ üðùò óÞ-
ìåñá öáßíåôáé íá ìáò Ýñ÷åôáé áðü ôçí ÁíáôïëÞ. Ðéï óõãêåêñéìÝíá ç áðþôá-
ôç êáôáãùãÞ, ìåôá÷åßñéóç êáé ðéèáíÞ åðéíüçóÞ ôçò, üðùò âÜóéìá õðïóôçñßæå-
ôáé, Ýãéíå áðü ôïõò ðñïãüíïõò ìáò Äñáâßäåò, ôïõò ðñïÝëëçíåò ôïõ Áéãáßïõ,
ôïõò ðñï ôùí Ðåëáóãþí, ïé ïðïßïé ìåôÜ ôïí êáôáêëõóìü ìåôáêéíÞèçêáí ðñïò
áíáôïëÜò ãéá åýñåóç íÝáò ðáôñßäáò êáé êáôÜ êýìáôá ó÷çìÜôéóáí óôçí êïéëÜ-
äá ôïõ Éíäïý óôï óçìåñéíü ÐáêéóôÜí äýï ôåñÜóôéåò ðïëéôåßåò, ôçí Ìï÷Ýíæï ÍôÜ-
ñï êáé ôçí Åë ×áññÜðá, ôçò ôÜîçò ôùí 2.000.000 êáôïßêùí ìå 8 óôñþìáôá ðï-
ëéôåéþí (ôç ìßá èáììÝíç êÜôù áðü ôçí Üëëç) ðïõ äçìéïýñãçóáí ôá êýìáôá ôùí
áöé÷èçóïìÝíùí Äñáâßäùí. Ç âáèýôåñç ðïëéôåßá õðïëïãßæåôáé ðÝñáí ôïõ 4.000
- 6.000 ð.×. êáé ðáñïõóéÜæåé ìéá ìïíáäéêÞ, áîéïæÞëåõôç êáé áìßìçôç ãéá ôçí å-
ðï÷Þ ãíþóç êáé ìåôá÷åßñéóç ôïõ ðïëåïäïìéêïý óõóôÞìáôïò, ôïõ õäñáõëéêïý
êáé ôïõ áðï÷åôåõôéêïý (ìÝóá óå êÜèå óðßôé õðÞñ÷áí ôá ëïõôñÜ ìå ôï ôñå÷ïý-
ìåíï æåóôü êáé êñýï íåñü) óå ìéá áñ÷éôåêôïíéêÞ ôåëåéüôçôá êáé ìéá áíáëïãßá
åíôõðùóéáêÞ ãéá üóïõò Ý÷ïõí åéäéêÞ ãíþóç ôïõ èÝìáôïò.
Ìåôáîý ôùí áñ÷áéïëïãéêþí åõñçìÜôùí âñÝèçêáí áãáëìáôßäéá óå óôÜóç
Ãéüãêá, åðéãñáöÝò ìå ó÷Ýäéá ðïõ ìáò ðáñáðÝìðïõí óôá ôáõñïêáèÜøéá ôùí
Êñçôþí êáé ðïëëÜ Üëëá ôá ïðïßá ðéóôïðïéïýí üôé ï ìåôáêéíçèåßò ëáüò ôùí
Äñáâßäùí, åßíáé áõôüò ðïõ ìå ôçí ìåôáíÜóôåõóÞ ôïõ ðñïò ôçí áíáôïëÞ ìåôÝ-
öåñå êáé ôçí Ãíþóç ôçò Ãéüãêá êáé ôåëéêþò ôçí åìöýôåõóå óôçí Éíäßá. Ãé' áõ-
ôü åéäéêÜ ôï èÝìá õðÜñ÷ïõí áñêåôÜ êáé óçìáíôéêÜ ôåêìÞñéá áíèñùðïëïãéêÜ,
áñ÷áéïëïãéêÜ, éóôïñéêÜ, ãëùóóïëïãéêÜ êáé öéëïóïöéêÜ - ìåôáöõóéêÜ, ðïõ äõ-
óôõ÷þò ü÷é ìüíïí äåí åßíáé åõñÝùò ãíùóôÜ, áëëÜ áêüìç êáé ïé åéäéêïß åðéóôÞ-
ìïíåò ôá áãíïïýí Þ äåí äßíïõí ôï áðáéôïýìåíï âÜñïò óôá ðïéêßëá óôïé÷åßá Ý-
ôóé þóôå íá ìçí õðÜñ÷åé ìéá óôïé÷åéþäçò êñáôéêÞ ìÝñéìíá ãéá íá ôáîéíïìçèïýí
êáé íá ìåëåôçèïýí óå âÜèïò üëá áõôÜ ôá ðïëõó÷éäÞ áðïäåéêôéêÜ óôïé÷åßá ðïõ
õðÜñ÷ïõí êáé íá áðïôåëÝóïõí Ýíá åíéáßï óýíïëï éó÷õñÞò ôåêìçñßùóçò, ðá-
ñüëï ðïõ îÝíïé áñ÷áéïëüãïé (ï Éíäüò áñ÷áéïëüãïò ÓáôôÜñæé óôï Ýñãï ôïõ "His-
tory and Culture of the Indian People" óôïí ðñþôï ôüìï "The Vedic Age" óôï
êåöÜëáéï "Race Movements and prehistoric Culture" áíáãíùñßæåé ôçí õðüèå-
óç ôçò ìåôáíÜóôåõóçò ôùí ðñïãüíùí ìáò Äñáâßäùí, áðü ôçí ÊñÞôç êáé ôá õ-
ðüëïéðá íçóéÜ, áðü ôçí ÌéêñÜ Áóßá, ôçí çðåéñùôéêÞ ÅëëÜäá êáé ãåíéêüôåñá
áðü ôçí Ìåóüãåéï óôéò Éíäßåò. Åðßóçò ï äéáêåêñéìÝíïò éíäüò áñ÷áéïëüãïò Ìé-
ñáíôæÜ ÓáíêÜñ Ãêïý÷á óôï Ýñãï ôïõ "ÖõëåôéêÜ óôïé÷åßá ôïõ ðëçèõóìïý" äéá-
êñßíåé ôÝóóåñéò êýñéåò öõëåôéêÝò ðïéêéëßåò ðïõ óõã÷ùíåýèçêáí, ìåôáîý ôùí ï-
ðïßùí êáé ôïõò Äñáâßäåò ðïõ áðïôåëïýí óÞìåñá ôçí âÜóç üëùí ôùí ëáþí ôçò
íüôéáò Éíäßáò) êáé Üëëïé ìåëåôçôÝò êáé åðéóôÞìïíåò (éóôïñéêïß: ÍôõñÜí) áðåöÜí-
èçóáí åð' áõôïý áíáãíùñßæïíôáò ôçí Üðïøç ôçò ìåôáíÜóôåõóçò ôùí Äñáâß-
äùí ðñïò áíáôïëÜò áðü ôçí Ìåóüãåéï, êáèþò êáé ôçí ìåôáöïñÜ ôçò Ãíþóçò
ôçò Ãéüãêá (ÂëÝðå åðßóçò óôïí 21ï ôüìï -61 ôüìïé- ôçò åãêõêëïðáßäåéáò Ìðñé-
ôÜíéêá, Ýêäïóç 1996, óôï ëÞììá Äñáâßäåò, üðïõ ìåôáîý Üëëùí áíáöÝñïíôáé
ôá åîÞò: "Ðéóôåýåôáé üôé ïé äçìéïõñãïß ôïõ ðïëéôéóìïý ôçò êïéëÜäáò ôïõ Éíäïý
-ôùí ðüëåùí Ìï÷Ýíæï ÍôÜñï êáé Åë ×áññÜðá- õðÞñîáí ïé Äñáâßäåò, áíÞêáí
äå óôïí áíáôïëéêüôåñï êëÜäï ôçò ìåóïãåéáêÞò öõëÞò, äçëáäÞ ôùí ÉâÞñùí,
Åôñïýóêùí, Êñçôþí, Áéãõðôßùí, ×éôôéôþí êáé Óïõìåñßùí". 23 åßäç (ðáñáëëá-
ãÝò) Äñáâéäéêþí ãëùóóþí ìéëïýíôáé óÞìåñá óôçí Íüôéá Áóßá).
ÔÉ ÅÉ ÍÁÉ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ
Ç Ãéüãêá åßíáé ôï äÝóéìï, ç æåýîç, ôï ðÜíôñåìá, ç Ýíùóç üëùí ôùí åôå-
ñüêëçôùí óôïé÷åßùí ôçò ðñïóùðéêüôçôÜò ìáò (Ýíóôéêôá, áðùèçìÝíá, óõíáé-
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
reality, it drives us forward, it enrolls us, it helps us, it gives us rest, it strength-
ens us, it completes us and it places us more responsibly and actively in the
society.
3) It is not at all outlandish as it appears. It is about a most practical knowl-
edge, a complete method of cultivation for man, having very ancient pre-hel-
lenic roots and does not come, as it seems today, from the East. More con-
cretely, its remotest origin, use and probable invention, as it is well founded
supported, were established from our ancestors Dravidians, the first Greeks
of the Aegean Sea, the pre-Pelasghi Greeks, who, after the Deluge, moved
to the East in order to find a new country. They formed in waves two huge
tates in Pakistan, Mohenzo Daro and El Harrapa, of the class of 2.000.000
inhabitants with 8 layers of states (the one burried under the other) that cre-
ated the waves of Dravidians who arrived there. The deeper state is estimat-
ed to have been established in more than 4.000-8.000 b.C. and present a u-
nique, enviable and inimitable knowledge for those times. Also the use of the
city planning system, of the hydraulic and of the drain systems (in every house
there were bathrooms with running hot and cold water) presented an archi-
tectural perfection and an impressive quality for those who know.
ÐáíïñáìéêÞ Üðïøç ôçò Ìï÷Ýíæï ÍôÜñï.
Reconstruction of Mohenzo Daro.
Among the archeological findings, some statuettes were discovered at a Yo-
ga posture, as well as some inscriptions that refer to the Taurokathapsia of the
Cretans and to many other things certifying that the removed people of the
Dravidians are those who, by their immigration to the east transferred also the
Knowledge of Yoga and finally they implanted it in India. For this subject, par-
ticularly, there are enough and important anthropological, archeological, his-
torical, glossological and philosophic-metaphysical proofs that, unfortunately,
not only are not largely known, but even the special scientists ignore them, or
they do not give the required heaviness to the various elements, so that there
may not be any elementary state care in order that all these multifarious demon-
strative elements existing may be classified and studied thoroughly and con-
stitute a unique total of a powerful documentation, in despite of that some for-
eigner archeologists (the Indian archeologist Satarzi, in his work "History and
Culture of the Indian People", in the first volume "The Vedic Age" , capital "Race
Movements and prehistoric Culture" recognizes the matter of the immigration
of our ancestors Dravidians from Crete and from the rest islands, from Asia
Minor, from continental Greece and generally, from the Mediterranean to In-
dia. Also, the distinguished Indian archeologist Mirantza Sankar Gouha, in his
work "Racial elements of the population" discerns four main racial varieties that
were blended, among which also the Dravidians who compose today the base
of all the peoples of South India), and some other speculator and scientists (his-
torians: Duran), expressed their opinion on it, recognizing the view of the im-
migration of the Dravidians to the East from the Mediterranean, as well as the
transport of the Knowledge of Yoga (see also at the 21st volume- 61 volumes
- of the Britannica encyclopaedia, edition 1996, in the lemma Dravidians,
14 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
óèÞìáôá, óêÝøåéò) ðïõ êáôáôñþãïõí ôçí äýíáìç ôçò æùÞò ôïõ áíèñþðïõ êáé
ôïí áññùóôáßíïõí. Ðéï áðëÜ áêüìç åßíáé ç óõóðåßñùóç, ç óõãêÝíôñùóç ü-
ëçò ôçò äéá÷õìÝíçò åíÝñãåéáò æùÞò ðïõ Ý÷ïõìå ìÝóá ìáò êáé ï ðñïóáíá-
ôïëéóìüò ôçò ðñïò ÌÉÁ êáé ìïíáäéêÞ êáôåýèõíóç (ïé äéáíïçôéêÝò äõíÜìåéò
åßíáé óáí äéáóêïñðéóìÝíåò áêôßíåò, üôáí åíùèïýí öùôßæïõí).
Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá ôçí Ìåãáëýôåñç ÐñáêôéêÞ ÅóùôåñéêÞ Øõ÷ïëïãßá üëùí ôùí
åðï÷þí (ÍïçôéêÞ ÔÝ÷íç) -ðïõ Ý÷åé äéáóùèåß óå áìéãÞ ìïñöÞ ùò ôéò ìÝñåò
ìáò- ç ïðïßá ìáò äßíåé ôçí äõíáôüôçôá íá öÝñïõìå óå åðáöÞ, íá åíþóïõìå
ôïí åîùôåñéêü åáõôü ìå ôïí åóùôåñéêü - êñõöü åáõôü ìáò, ôïí Íïõ ìå ôïí
Õðåñíïý, ôçí Óõíåßäçóç ìå ôçí õðïóõíåßäçóç êáé ôçí Õðåñóõíåßäçóç.
ÅÉÄÇ ÃÉÏ ÃÊÁ
ÕðÜñ÷ïõí ðïëëÜ åßäç Ãéüãêá (áõôü óçìáßíåé üôé ç Ãéüãêá, ç Ýíùóç áõôÞ
ðñáãìáôïðïéåßôáé óå äéÜöïñá åðßðåäá). Ôá âáóéêüôåñá ðïõ êñáôïýí ôï åí-
äéáöÝñïí ìáò åßíáé ôá ðáñáêÜôù:
á) Ç ×Üèá Ãéüãêá ðïõ åßíáé ç ðéï äéáäåäïìÝíç óôç Äýóç êáé áó÷ïëåßôáé
ó÷åäüí áðïêëåéóôéêÜ ìå óùìáôéêÝò áóêÞóåéò, åßíáé ç Ýíùóç êáé ç óõíåñãá-
óßá ìå ôï óþìá ìáò.
â) Ç Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá. Åöáñìüæåôáé üðùò êáé ç ×Üèá, åßôå ðñïëçðôéêÜ åßôå
èåñáðåõôéêÜ. Åßíáé ìÝèïäïò Óùìáôïøõ÷éêÞò ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò (áõôïèåñáðåßáò)
ìå ôçí ïðïßá åðéäéþêåôáé íá êáôáðïëåìÞóåé ìüíïò ôïõ ï Üíèñùðïò, ìÝóù
åéäéêþí áóêÞóåùí, ìéá åõñýôáôç ãêÜìá áðü äéÜöïñá ïñãáíéêÜ ðñïâëÞìá-
ôá ð.÷. Üóèìá, ðßåóç, áûðíßá, êõêëïöïñéêü, ñåõìáôéóìïß, áñèñéôéêÜ, áóèÝ-
íåéåò óðïíäõëéêÞò óôÞëçò, äéáâÞôç, ðá÷õóáñêßá, êïéëéáêÜ êáé óôïìá÷éêÜ
ðñïâëÞìáôá, ðïíïêåöÜëïõò, çìéêñáíßåò, êáñäéáããåéáêÝò ðáèÞóåéò. ÄéÜöï-
ñåò âëáâåñÝò (êáêÝò) Ýîåéò üðùò ôï ôóéãÜñï Þ ôï ðïôü, äéÜöïñåò öïâßåò êáé
åëáôôþìáôá üðùò ç êëåéóôïöïâßá, ç õøïöïâßá, ç ðõñïöïâßá, ç áíèñùðï-
öïâßá, ç ùñáéïðÜèåéá, ç åãùðÜèåéá, ç áìíçóßá, ê.ë.ð., êáèþò åðßóçò êáé ôéò
áöüñçôåò åíôÜóåéò - ðéÝóåéò - öïñôßóåéò Üã÷ïõò, óôñåóáñßóìáôïò, óõã÷ýóå-
ùí, åêíåõñéóìþí (óùìáôéêþí, óõíáéóèçìáôéêþí, íïçôéêþí), ðïõ ìáò êáôá-
âÜëïõí êáèçìåñéíÜ êáé äçìéïõñãïýí ðñïûðïèÝóåéò ðïëëþí óùìáôïøõ÷é-
êþí ðáèÞóåùí. ÌÜëéóôá åêôéìÜôáé üôé óôçí Ôñßôç ×éëéåôçñßäá ìßá áðü ôéò êõ-
ñßáñ÷åò ðáèÞóåéò èá åßíáé øõ÷áóèÝíåéá êáé ç øõ÷ïðÜèåéá, äçëáäÞ ç ôñÝë-
ëá (óôçí ðñáãìáôéêüôçôá íïïáóèÝíåéá êáé íïïðÜèçóç êáé ü÷é áóèÝíåéá ôçò
øõ÷Þò üðùò áðü ëÜèïò ëÝãåôáé. Ç øõ÷ïëïãßá èá Þôáí ðïëý ðéï óùóôü êáé
ôáéñéáóôü íá ïíïìÜæåôáé Íïïëïãßá ìéá êáé ôï áíôéêåßìåíü ôçò åßíáé ï Íïõò
êáé ü÷é ç Øõ÷Þ ðïõ åßíáé êÜôé ôï Üðéáóôï êáé èåùñçôéêÜ Üöèáñôï êáé áéþ-
íéï).
ã) Ç ÌÜíôñáì Ãéüãêá ðïõ áó÷ïëåßôáé ìå ôéò êáëïýìåíåò ëÝîåéò Äýíáìçò,
ðïõ åíéó÷ýïõí ôçí äýíáìç ôçò ðñïóï÷Þò êáé ôçò óõãêÝíôñùóçò óôïí Üíèñù-
ðï.
ä) Ç ÊÜñìá Ãéüãêá ðïõ åßíáé ç ÄñÜóç - ÐñÜîç - ÅíÝñãåéá, ç áíéäéïôåëÞò
õðçñåóßá, ç ðñïóöïñÜ Ýñãïõ ÷ùñßò áíáìïíÞ êáñðþí (áíôáðüäïóçò), åñ-
ãáóßá äçëáäÞ ãéá ôï óýíïëï êáé ü÷é ãéá ôïí åáõôü ìáò.
å) Ç ÃêíÜíé Ãéüãêá åßíáé ç ÖéëïóïöéêÞ - ÃíùóéïëïãéêÞ Ãéüãêá, ç Ýíùóç
äéáìÝóïõ ôçò öéëïóïöéêÞò ðñïóÝããéóçò ôçò ÁëÞèåéáò, âÜóåé ôùí äéäáóêá-
ëéþí ðïõ ìáò Ý÷ïõí ðáñáäþóåé ôá ìåãÜëá ðíåýìáôá.
óô) Ç ÌðÜêôé Ãéüãêá åßíáé ç Ãéüãêá ôïõ óåâáóìïý, ôçò áöïóßùóçò ðñïò
ôï éäáíéêü, ôçò ëáôñåßáò, ôçò èåßáò ÁãÜðçò, ç ïðïßá ãéá íá åßìáóôå åéëéêñé-
íåßò åßíáé äýóêïëï íá äéäá÷ôåß êáé êõñßùò íá åöáñìïóôåß óôçí ðñÜîç, äéüôé
äåí õðÜñ÷ïõí ðáñÜ åîáéñåôéêÜ óðÜíéåò ðåñéðôþóåéò áíèñþðùí (øõ÷ïóõí-
èÝóåùí) ðïõ íá Ý÷ïõí ôçí áëçèéíÞ áíÜãêç íá áöåèïýí ÷ùñßò ðåñéïñéóìïýò
ðñïò ôï éäáíéêü ôïõò (íá èõóéÜæïíôáé ãé' áõôü, áõôïðáñÜäïóç - åîÜñôçóç).
æ) Ç ÔÜíôñá Þ Êïõíôáëßíç Ãéüãêá åßíáé ç Ãéüãêá ðïõ âáóßæåôáé óôçí Äý-
íáìç ôçò ÆùÞò, ôçò ÅíÝñãåéáò (ôçò ðíåõìáôéêÞò óõóðåéñùìÝíçò Äýíáìçò ìÝ-
óá ìáò), åßíáé áõôÞí ðïõ üôáí âãáßíåé ðñïò ôá Ýîù ôçí ïíïìÜæïõìå óðÝñìá
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
where, among others, the following are mentioned: “It is believed that the cre-
ators of the civilization of the valley of the Hindu river - the cities Mohenzo Daro
and El Harrapa were the Dravidians, and they belonged to the eastern branch
of the Mediterranean tribe, that is of the Iberians, Etrusks, Cretans, Egyptians,
Hittits and Soumerians”. 23 kinds (variations) of Dravidian languages are spo-
ken today in South Asia).
WHAT IS YOGA
This evening, you will necessarily hear also some sanscrit words, which I will
interpret for you.
Yoga is the binding, the yoking, the marriage, the junction of all the het-
erogenous elements of our personality (instincts, repulsed wills, sentiments,
thoughts) that devour the power of man's life and get him ill. More simply, it
is the gathering around, the concentration of all the diffused energy we have
within us and it orientation to one and sole direction (the intellectual powers
are like the dispersed rays: when they get united, they enlighten).
It is about the greatest practical psychology of all the times (Intellectual Art)
- that has been saved in a pure form until our days - that gives us the possi-
bility to bring in touch, to unite our Conscience with Subconscience and Hy-
perconscience.
KINDS OF YOGA
There are many Yoga types (this means that Yoga, this junction, is effect-
ed in different levels). The most fundamentdal of them keeping our interest,
are the following:
a) Hatha Yoga that is the mostly spread in the West and is occupied almost
exclusively in the bodily exercises, is the union and the cooperation with our
body.
b) Kriya Yoga. It is applied either preventively or therapeutically. It is a
method of Body-soul Therapeutics (self-therapy) by which man himself seeks
to fight against a largest range of various anomalies, rheumatisms, arthritics,
spine diseases, diabetes, obesity, headaches, migraines. Different harmful (bad)
habits, as smoking or drinking, different phobias and defects as clistophobia,
phobia of the heights, phobia of fire, anthropophobia, passion of Beauty, e-
gopathy, amnesia etc., as well as the unbearabl intensities-pressures-troubles
of strain, stressings, confusion, enervations (bodily, sentimental, mental), that
throw us down every day and create the presuppositions for many body-soul
diseases. It is even estimated that on the Third millenium, the dominant dis-
eases will be psychoasthenia and psychopathy, that is the madness domina-
tion (in fact it is a disease of the mind and an affection of the mind, and not a
disease of the soul, as it erroneously called. It would be much more right and
proper that the psychology be called Mindology since its object is the Mind and
not the Soul (Psyche), that is something intangible and theoretically imper-
ishable and eternal).
c) Mantram Yoga that is occupied with the so-called words of Power, that
strengthen the power of the attention and of the concentration in man.
d) Karma Yoga that is Activity - Action - Energy, the disinterested service,
the work offer without expecting any fruit (return), that is the work for the w-
hole and not for ourselves,
e) Gnani Yoga is the Philosophical - Gnosiological Yoga, the union through
the philosophical approach of Truth, in the basis of all what the great Spirits
have offered us.
f) Bhakti Yoga is Yoga of the respect, of the devotion to the ideal, of the
worhsip, of the divine Love that, to be sincere, is difficult to be taught and
mainly to be applied in practice, because there are only extremely rare cases
15 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
êáé ôçí ïðïßá ìðïñïýìå êÜôù áðü ðñïûðïèÝóåéò êáé óêëçñüôáôç åñãáóßá
ìå ôïí åáõôü ìáò íá ôçí ìåôá÷åéñéóôïýìå åëåã÷üìåíá ãéá ôçí ðíåõìáôéêÞ
ìáò åîÝëéîç.
ÑÁÔÆÁ ÃÉÏ ÃÊÁ
Áò ãßíïõìå üìùò ðéï ðñáêôéêïß ìéëþíôáò ü÷é ôüóï ãéá ôï åî' ïëïêëÞñïõ ðñá-
êôéêü óýóôçìá ôçò Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá, ðïõ äåí Ý÷ïõìå ôçí äõíáôüôçôá áõôÞ ôçí
óôéãìÞ íá áíáëýóïõìå êáé íá åöáñìüóïõìå óôçí ðñÜîç, äéüôé ÷ñåéÜæåôáé óõì-
ìåôï÷Þ áðü ìÝñïõò ôùí åíäéáöåñïìÝíùí êáé êõñßùò ÷þñï êáé ÷ñüíï ãéá á-
íÜëõóç, üóï ãéá ôçí ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá.
ÑÜôæá èá ðåé âáóéëéÜò. ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá åßíáé ç ÂáóéëéêÞ Þ ÅðéóôçìïíéêÞ Þ
Øõ÷ïëïãéêÞ Þ ÍïçôéêÞ ´Åíùóç, ç Êïñùíßäá üëùí ôùí Ãéüãêá. ÊùäéêïðïéÞ-
èçêå ìåôáîý ôïõ 250 - 300 ð.×. ßóùò êáé ðïëý ðéï ðñéí, áðü ôïí Éíäü óïöü
ÐáôÜíôæáëé.
ÐáñÝ÷åé Ýíáí áóöáëÞ, óßãïõñï, ïñèïëïãéóôéêü êáé ó÷åôéêÜ åýêïëá ðñï-
óåããßóéìï äñüìï ãéá ôïí êÜèå Üíèñùðï, ï ïðïßïò ôïõ äßíåé üëá ôá áðáñáß-
ôçôá åöüäéá (öþôá) ãéá íá êáôáíïÞóåé ôïí åáõôü ôïõ êáé íá áñ÷ßóåé óéãÜ óé-
ãÜ íá êõñéáñ÷åß ðÜíù ôïõ (óùìáôéêÜ êáé íïçôéêÜ). ¼ìùò ðÜíù áð' üëá ôïõ
åðéôñÝðåé íá âåâáéþóåé ðñïóùðéêÜ ôá üóá ç èåùñßá äéäÜóêåé, ìÝóá áðü ôï
ðåßñáìá êáé ôçí åðáëÞèåõóç.
Ç ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá âáóßæåôáé óôéò ôñåéò âáóéêÝò éäéüôçôåò ôïõ áíèñþðïõ. Ôçí
ÓêÝøç, ôçí ÈÝëçóç êáé ôçí Öáíôáóßá. ÁõôÝò ìåôá÷åéñßæåôáé êáé ì' áõôÝò åðé-
ôåëåß ôï Ýñãï ôçò.
Ï Íïõò ìáò óýìöùíá ìå ôçí Ãéüãêá åßíáé ôñéóõðüóôáôïò, Ý÷åé ôñåéò âáóé-
êÝò êáôáóôÜóåéò. Ôçí óõíåßäçóç, ôçí õðïóõíåßäçóç êáé ôçí õðåñóõíåßäçóç
(Ï ÁúíóôÜúí ëÝãåôáé üôé ìåôá÷åéñéæüôáí ôï 45% ôïõ åãêåöÜëïõ ôïõ, ï Íáðï-
ëÝùí åß÷å ôçí éäéüôçôá íá õðáãïñåýåé ôáõôü÷ñïíá 7 åðéóôïëÝò, ï ÓùêñÜôçò
ìå ôïí Óôï÷áóìü ôïõ Ýðáéñíå áðáíôÞóåéò óå êñßóéìá èÝìáôá -ìÜ÷ç Ðïôéäáß-
áò, Óõìðüóéï-, ï Ðõèáãüñáò ãéá íá âïçèÞóåé ôïí Üíèñùðï íá ìåôá÷åéñéóôåß
ôéò äõíÜìåéò ôïõ êáé ãéá íá ôïí åîåëßîåé äçìéïýñãçóå ôï Ïìáêïåßï óôïí Êñü-
ôùíá ôçò íüôéáò Éôáëßáò, üëá ôá ìõçôÞñéá êáé ìõóôÞñéá ðïõ õðÞñ÷áí óôçí áñ-
÷áéüôçôá, áöïñïýóáí ôçí ÷ñçóéìïðïßçóç ôçò áíþôåñçò ëåéôïõñãßáò ôïõ Íïõ
ìáò).
Ç óõíåßäçóç Þ åãñÞãïñóç ëåéôïõñãåß êáè' üëç ôçí äéÜñêåéá ôçò çìÝñáò
êáé ôñïöïäïôåß ìå ðëçñïöïñßåò ôïí Üíèñùðï, äçìéïõñãþíôáò âáóéêÜ ôï öáé-
íüìåíï ôçò óêÝøçò. ÃåíéêÜ åßíáé óå äñáóôçñéüôçôá üóï åßìáóôå îýðíéïé êáé
ìáò ðáñÝ÷åé ìå ôçí óõíåðéêïõñßá ôçò íüçóçò ôïí ðåñéâüçôï ïñèïëïãéóìü
ðïõ áí êáé ÷ñÞóéìïò åßíáé áíåðáñêÞò íá óõëëÜâåé ôïí üëï Üíèñùðï, áëëÜ
êáé íá ôïí áíôéìåôùðßóåé óáí ìéá åíéáßá øõ÷ïóùìáôéêÞ ïíôüôçôá (ðáñáìÝíåé
óôï ñéíãê ðáò íïô, äçëáäÞ ü÷é ðÝñáí ôïõ äá÷ôõëßïõ Þ ôïõ äá÷ôõëéäéïý ôùí ü-
óùí áíôéëáìâÜíåôáé äéá ôùí 5 áéóèÞóåùí).
Ç õðïóõíåßäçóç åßíáé ìéá õøçëüôåñç Þ êáëýôåñá âáèýôåñç (ìç óõíåéäç-
ôÞ) êáôÜóôáóç ôïõ Íïõ ìáò, ìå ïõóéáóôéêÝò äñáóôçñéüôçôåò êáé åõèýíåò, ç ï-
ðïßá âáóéëåýåé êáôÜ ôçí äéÜñêåéá ôïõ öõóéêïý Þ ôå÷íçôïý ìáò ýðíïõ (äåí
óôáìáôÜåé ôçí äñáóôçñéüôçôÜ ôçò áêüìá êé üôáí åßìáóôå îýðíéïé), åðïðôåýåé
êáé öñïíôßæåé ìå áðßóôåõôç ëåðôïìÝñåéá êáé áêñßâåéá ãéá üëåò ôéò áêïýóéåò
ëåéôïõñãßåò ôïõ ïñãáíéóìïý ìáò ãéá ôéò ïðïßåò êáé åßíáé õðåýèõíç, êáèþò êáé
ãéá ôçí áðïôïîßíùóç êáé áðïêáôÜóôáóç êÜèå äéáóÜëåõóÞò ôïõ (ï Öñüûíô, ï
Âßë÷åëì ÑÜú÷, ï Ãéïýíãê, åéäéêüôåñá ï Ãéïýíãê ìåëÝôçóå ôï üëï èÝìá êáé á-
ðïöÜíèçêå ãéá ôï èÝìá ôïõ õðïóõíåßäçôïõ, êáèþò êáé õðÝñ áõôÞò ôçò øõ-
÷ïëïãéêÞò ìåèüäïõ, äçëáäÞ ôçò Ãéüãêá).
ÔÝëïò ç õðåñóõíåßäçóç åßíáé ç áíùôÜôç ëåéôïõñãßá ôïõ Íïõ ìáò ç ïðïßá
üôáí êÜðïôå åíåñãïðïéçèåß (åßíáé áäñáóôçñéïðïßçôç, óå ëáíèÜíïõóá êáôÜ-
óôáóç) ìáò ðáñïõóéÜæåé Ýíá íÝï ôýðï áðüëõôá åîåëéãìÝíïõ êáé ôÝëåéïõ áí-
èñþðïõ ðëÞñïõò Ãíþóçò, Ðíåõìáôéêüôçôáò, Ìáêáñéüôçôáò êáé ÁãÜðçò. Ó÷å-
ôéêÜ ðáñáäåßãìáôá åß÷áìå ìå ôïí Ðõèáãüñá, ôïí Ðëùôßíï, ôïí Áììþíéï Óáê-
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
of people (psychosynthesises) that really need to be left without any restrictions
to their ideal (to be sacrificed for it, self- delivery-dependence),
g) Tantra or Kundalini Yoga is Yoga based on the Life Power, of Energy
(spiritual gathered Power), it is the one that when it goes out we call it sperm
and that we can use it in control under some presuppositions and a hardest
work with ourself, for our spiritual evolution (progress).
RAJA YOGA
However, let is be more careful when we talk not so much about the prac-
tical systems of Criya Yoga, that now we cannot analyze and practice - because
the participation on the part of the interested persons is needed - as about Ra-
ja Yoga.
Raja means King. Raja Yoga is the Royal or the Scientific or Psychological
or Intellectual Union, the Zenith of all Yogas. It was codified in 250-300 b. C.
and maybe much longer ago, by Indian wise Patantazli.
It affords a safe, sure, orthologistic and relatively easy approachable way for
every man that gives him all the necessary equipments (lights) to comprehend
himself and to start little by little dominating on himself (bodily and mentally).
But most of all, it allows him to confirm personally what theory teaches, through
the experiment and the verification.
Raja Yoga is based on the three fundamendal qualities of man: Thought,
Will and Imagination. It is them that it uses and by them it performs its work.
According to Yoga, our Mind is three-substantial, it has three basic situations:
Conscience, subconscience and hyperconscience (it is said that Einstein used
the 45% of his brains, Napoleon was able to dictate 7 letters at the same time,
Socarate by his Thought receive answers in crucial matters - the battle of
Potidea, Symposium - Pythagoras to help man develop and use his powers
created the Omakoio of Krotonas in South Italy, all the initiation places and
the mysteries that existed in the ancient times and they concern the higher func-
tion of our Mind).
Conscience or Vifilance operates during all the day and supplies man with
information, creating basically the thought phenomenon. Generally, it is ac-
tive as long as we are awake and it affords us the signal orthologism that, al-
though is useful, it is insufficient to conceive the whole man, but also to face
him as a unique psychosomatic entity (it remains in "ring pass not", that is, do
not pass beyond the ring).
Subconscience is a higher or rather a deeper (not conscious) situation of our
Mind, with substantial activities and responsibilities, that prevails during our
physical or our technical sleep (it does not stop acting even when we are
awake). (It supervises and cares in an incredible accuracy for all the involun-
tary functions of our organism of which it is responsible, as well as for the
detoxication and restoration of every disturbance of the organism (Adler,
Freud, Vilhelm Reich, Young - especially Young had studied this matter and
expressed a favourable opinion about this psychological method-).
Finally, hyperconscience is the supreme function of our Mind that when
gets activated (in the latent situation it is inactive and unfunctioned) it presents
us a new type of an absolutely evolved and perfect man, full of knowledge,
Spirituality, Bliss and Love. We had analogous examples with Pythagoras,
Plotinos, Ammonios Sakkas, Iraklitos, Asclepios, Socrates etc., who - judging
from the works they left to us - we suspect that they were claimed of such a
donation, that however got it by their value.- Will and action, the means and
the spiritual values that these beings present and develop remain inimitable
and timeless, escaping and surpassing every means, but also a high limit ex-
isting.
To be more comprehensible, I should say that conscience (mental function,
owning the nervous system), is occupied in the examination of the external-
16 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
êÜ, ôïí ÇñÜêëåéôï, ôïí Áóêëçðéü, ôïí ÓùêñÜôç ê.ë.ð., ïé ïðïßïé -áðü ôá Ýñ-
ãá ðïõ ìáò Üöçóáí- õðïøéáæüìáóôå ìå âáóéìüôçôá üôé áîéþèçêáí ìéáò ôÝôïéáò
äùñåÜò, ôçí ïðïßá üìùò ôçí ðÞñáí ìå ôï óðáèß ôïõò. Ç ÈÝëçóç êáé ç ÄñÜ-
óç, ôá ìÝóá êáé ïé ÐíåõìáôéêÝò Áîßåò ðïõ ðáñïõóéÜæïõí êáé áíáðôýóóïõí áõ-
ôÜ ôá üíôá ðáñáìÝíïõí áìßìçôá êáé äéá÷ñïíéêÜ, îåöåýãïíôáò êáé õðåñâáßíï-
íôáò êÜèå ìÝóï, áëëÜ êáé õøçëü üñéï ðïõ õðÜñ÷åé óôçí áíèñùðüôçôá.
Ãéá íá ãßíïõìå áêüìá ðéï êáôáíïçôïß èá Ýëåãá üôé ç óõíåßäçóç (äéáíïçôé-
êÞ ëåéôïõñãßá, ðïõ Ý÷åé óôçí åîïõóßá ôçò ôï íåõñéêü óýóôçìá) áó÷ïëåßôáé ìå
ôçí åîÝôáóç ôùí åîùôåñéêþí - öõóéêþí öáéíïìÝíùí êáé ãåãïíüôùí êáé ðÜíù
ó' áõôÜ åîáíôëåß ôïí äõíáìéóìü ôçò.
Ç õðïóõíåßäçóç åßíáé åðéöïñôéóìÝíç ìå ôá åóùôåñéêÜ ãåãïíüôá ðïõ óõì-
âáßíïõí ìÝóá ìáò êáé ãéá ôá ïðïßá äåí Ý÷ïõìå êáìßá áíôßëçøç. Ãéá ðáñÜäåéã-
ìá ç ëåéôïõñãßá ôçò êáñäéÜò, ôùí ðíåõìüíùí, ôçò
ðÝøçò ê.ë.ð. ¼ëá áõôÜ åëÝã÷ïíôáé êáé êáôåõèý-
íïíôáé áðü ôï õðïóõíåßäçôü ìáò (äéáìÝóù ôïõ
ÐñïìÞêç) ðïõ äåí ðáýåé íá åßíáé Ýíá êïììÜôé
ôïõ åáõôïý ìáò, áíåîÜñôçôá åÜí åìåßò ôï áãíïïý-
ìå êáé ôï ðáñáìåëïýìå, Ý÷ïíôÜò ôï ìüíéìá óôï ðå-
ñéèþñéï.
Ç Ãéüãêá ìáò óõìöéëéþíåé êáé ìáò öÝñíåé íá
óõíåñãáóôïýìå êáé áêüìç, íá ôïëìÞóïõìå íá å-
ëÝãîïõìå, ìÝñïò Þ êáé üëåò, ôéò áêïýóéåò ëåéôïõñ-
ãßåò ôïõ ïñãáíéóìïý ìáò âÜóåé ôçò åêðáßäåõóçò
ðïõ Ý÷ïõìå õðïóôåß êáé íá âïçèÞóïõìå ïõóéá-
óôéêÜ óôçí ôá÷ýôåñç áíÜññùóÞ ôïõ áðü ðïëëÝò
áóèÝíåéåò. ÐÜíù áð' üëá üìùò íá ìÜèïõìå íá
êñáôÜìå ìßá "ôÝëåéá" ãñáììÞ õãåßáò êáé ìéá ðï-
ñåßá áõôïãíùóßáò.
Ç õðåñóõíåßäçóç ìÜò äßíåé ôçí äõíáôüôçôá íá
óõëëÜâïõìå ëåðôüôåñïõò êñáäáóìïýò êáé äïíÞ-
óåéò ðïõ õðÜñ÷ïõí ãýñù ìáò (âëÝðå ôéò áíáêá-
ëýøåéò ôçò óýã÷ñïíçò - êâáíôéêÞò öõóéêÞò), þ-
óôå íá ó÷çìáôßóïõìå ïëïêëçñùìÝíç êáé óáöÞ
åéêüíá ôçò ÁëÞèåéáò ãéá ôïí åáõôü ìáò êáé ãéá ôï
Óýìðáí - Êüóìï (ýëç - ìïñöÞ - åíÝñãåéá) êáé ü-
÷é åðéìÝñïõò üðùò ìÝ÷ñé óÞìåñá Ý÷ïõìå ìå ôçí
ëåéôïõñãßá ôçò êáêüìïéñçò êáé äýóìïéñçò óõíåß-
äçóÞò ìáò (ðéï áðëÜ ôïõ åãùéóìïý), ðïõ íïìßæåé
üôé áõôüò åßíáé êé Üëëïò êáíÝíáò, åðåéäÞ Ý÷åé ôï Ìï÷Ýíæï ÍôÜñï. Ó÷Ýäéï ôçò ðüëçò.
ðñïíüìéï íá âáóéëåýåé óôçí öõóéêÞ ìáò äéÜóôá- Mohenjo-daro, the citadel. Plan.
óç êáé í' áðïôåëåß ôïí êáô' åðßöáóéí öáéíïìåíé-
êÜ öõóéêüôåñï ôñüðï Ýêöñáóçò êáé æùÞò.
ÁëëÜ áò Ýñèïõìå óôçí ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá ðïõ ïõóéáóôéêÜ èá åîåôÜóïõìå ãéá íá
äïýìå ðéï êáèáñÜ ôçí ðñáêôéêÞ êëßìáêá áíüäïõ ôçò.
Ç ÑÜôæá Þ ÑÜãéá Þ ÁóôÜíãêá (ïêôÜóêáëç) Þ ÌÜ÷á Ãéüãêá (ìåãßóôç) áðï-
ôåëåßôáé áðü 8 óêáëïðÜôéá Þ áíáâáèìßäåò ðïõ Ý÷ïõí ùò åîÞò:
1) ÃéÜìá (ðåñéÝ÷åé 5 çèéêÝò åíôïëÝò. ÁöïñÜ ôçí ó÷Ýóç ìå ôïõò óõíáíèñþ-
ðïõò ìáò)
2) ÍéãéÜìá (ðåñéëáìâÜíåé 5 çèéêïýò êáíüíåò. ÁöïñÜ ôçí ó÷Ýóç ìå ôïí å-
áõôü ìáò)
3) ÁæÜíá (áó÷ïëåßôáé ìå êáôÜëëçëåò èåñáðåõôéêÝò óôÜóåéò)
4) ÐñáíáãéÜìá (åßíáé ç åîÜóêçóç óôçí ñõèìéêÞ áíáðíïÞ)
5) ÐñáôéáêÜñá (åßíáé ç ÷áëÜñùóç)
6) ÍôáñÜíá (åßíáé ç ÓõãêÝíôñùóç)
7) ÍôõÜíá (åßíáé ï ðåñéâüçôïò Äéáëïãéóìüò)
8) ÓáìÜíôé (åßíáé ç ´Åíùóç, ç áíþôáôç êáôÜóôáóç Óõíåéäçôüôçôáò)
ÓçìåéùôÝïí üôé ôï êÜèå óêáëïðÜôé áðü ìüíï ôïõ åßíáé Ýíá ïëïêëçñùìÝíï
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
physical phenomena and facts and it exhausts its dynamism on them.
Subconscience is charged with the external events happening inside us for
which we have no idea. For example, the heart, the lungs, the digestion func-
tions, etc. All these are controlled and addressed by our subconscious (through
the Oblong) that does not cease being a piece of ourself, no matter if we ig-
nore and neglect it, leaving it permanently in margin.
Yoga reconciles us and makes us to cooperate and also to dare control a
part of all the unvoluntary functions of our organism in the basis of the edu-
cation that we have had and to help substantially in the recovery from many
diseases. But much more hepls us to keep a "perfect" is line of health and a
course of Self-Knowledge.
Hyperconscience enables us to conceive some subtler vibrations and sways
existing around us (see the discoveries of con-
temporary kvantic physics), so that we may be
able to form a complete and clear image of Truth
about ourselves and about the Universe-World
(matter-form) and not partially as we have done
till now, by the function of our unfortunate and
miserable conscience (more simply, of the ego-
ism). This egoism makes us think that we are the
unique beings in the world, because we have the
privilege to rule in our physical dimensions and
to constitute in appearance only the most natur-
al way of expression and life.
But let us come in Raja Yoga that we shall sub-
stantially examine today, in order to see more
clearly its practical ascending scale.
Raja or Raya or Astanga or Maha Yoga is com-
posed of 8 steps or upgrades, as follows:
1) Yama (it comprises 5 moral commands. It
concerns the relation between us and our fellow-
men).
2) Niyama (it comprises 5 moral rules. It con-
cerns the relation between us and ourselves).
3) Asana (it is occupied in proper therapeuti-
cal poses).
4) Pranayama (it is the practice in the rhyth-
mical breath).
5) Pratyahara (it is relaxation).
6) Dharana (it is concentration).
7) Dhiana (it is the wellknown Meditation).
8) Samadhi (it is the Union, the supreme Consciousness situation).
To be noted that every step is in itself a completed separate scientific sys-
tem, the learning of which can constitute also a deposit of life, for the exhaus-
tion of a study and application as possible as complete. In fact, every step is
tied with its previous and its next one, so that there may be an unbreakable
continuation and consistence in the spiritual accomplishment of man.
But let us examine the above steps, one to one:
Yama means Temperance, control. It has 5 abstinences or curbings:
a) Avoiding presents, on our part or on the others part (that means not to
the buying off of the conscience. ours or of the others). More simply, no do-
nation,
b) Purity in everything - Brahmatsarya (meaning economy of our spiritual
and sexual powers, not aimless waste for the enjoyment of a pleasure that
empties us of energy,
c) Truthfulness-Satya (a Yogi should be friend of Truth in all its expressions
and he should seek for it no matter what way and price in,
17 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
îå÷ùñéóôü åðéóôçìïíéêü óýóôçìá, ðïõ ìðïñåß ç åêìÜèçóÞ ôïõ íá áðïôåëÝ-
óåé êáé êáôÜèåóç æùÞò, ãéá ôçí åîÜíôëçóç ìéáò êáôÜ ôï äõíáôüí ðëÞñïõò ìå-
ëÝôçò êáé åöáñìïãÞò. Óôçí ðñáãìáôéêüôçôá ôï êÜèå óêáëïðÜôé äÝíåé ìå ôï ðñï-
çãïýìåíü ôïõ êáé ôï åðüìåíü ôïõ, þóôå íá õðÜñ÷åé ìéá áññáãÞò óõíÝ÷åéá êáé
óõíÝðåéá óôçí ðíåõìáôéêÞ ïëïêëÞñùóç ôïõ áíèñþðïõ.
ÁëëÜ áò ðÜñïõìå Ýíá Ýíá ôá ðáñáðÜíù 8 óêáëïðÜôéá.
ÃéÜìá èá ðåé ÅãêñÜôåéá, Ýëåã÷ïò. ´Å÷åé 5 áðï÷Ýò Þ ÷áëéíáãùãÞóåéò: á) Á-
ðïöõãÞ Äþñïõ - ÁðáñéãêñÜ÷á (ðïõ óçìáßíåé ü÷é åîáãïñáóìü óõíåéäÞóåùí,
ôùí äéêþí ìáò Þ ôùí Üëëùí. Ðéï áðëÜ ü÷é äùñïäïêßá). â) Áãíüôçôá óå üëá
-Ìðñá÷ìáôóÜñõá (ðïõ óçìáßíåé ïéêïíïìßá óôéò äõíÜìåéò ìáò ðíåõìáôéêÝò
êáé óåîïõáëéêÝò êáé ü÷é Üóêïðç óðáôÜëç ãéá ôçí áðüëáõóç ìéáò çäïíÞò ðïõ
ìáò áäåéÜæåé áðü åíÝñãåéá). ã) ÖéëáëÞèåéá - ÓÜôõá (Ýíáò Ãéüãêé èá ðñÝðåé íá
åßíáé ößëïò ôçò ÁëÞèåéáò óå üëåò ôéò åêöÜíóåéò ôçò êáé èá ðñÝðåé ìå êÜèå ôñü-
ðï êáé ìå üðïéï ôßìçìá íá ôçí åðéäéþêåé). ä) ´Ï÷é Öèüíï êáé ü÷é ÊëïðÞ - Á-
óôÝãéá (ï ìåí öèüíïò êáôáêáßåé åóùôåñéêÜ ôïí Üíèñùðï, ç äå êëïðÞ æçìéþ-
íåé ôïí óõíÜíèñùðï. ¸íáò áëçèéíüò Ãéüãêé äåí ôá êáôáäÝ÷åôáé áõôÜ Þ ôïõ-
ëÜ÷éóôïí ðáó÷ßæåé íá ôá õðåñâåß). å) ¼÷é Âßá - Á÷ßìóá (åßíáé ìßá áðü ôéò ìå-
ãÜëåò áñåôÝò ðïõ ðñÝðåé íá áêïëïõèåß ï Ãéüãêé óå üëá ôá åðßðåäá -óùìáôé-
êü, óõíáéóèçìáôéêü êáé øõ÷éêü-. Ï Ìá÷Üôìá ÃêÜíôé ìå ôçí ìç Âßá êáôÜöåñå
íá íéêÞóåé êáé íá åêäéþîåé ôïõò ÅããëÝæïõò êáôáêôçôÝò áðü ôçí Éíäßá.
Ôï äåýôåñï óêáëß åßíáé ç ÍéãéÜìá ðïõ èá ðåé Ðåéèáñ÷ßá. ´Å÷åé åðßóçò 5 áñ-
÷Ýò ("åîáíáãêáóìïýò"): á) Áöïóßùóç óôïí Èåü - ÉóâÜñá ÐñáíéíôÜíá Þ óôçí
üðïéá áíþôåñç äýíáìç äÝ÷åôáé ï êÜèå Üíèñùðïò ãéá ôïí åáõôü ôïõ. Åäþ á-
íáãíùñßæåé ï Üíèñùðïò Ýíá üñéï óôïí åáõôü ôïõ, óôçí óõíåéäçôÞ áíôßëçøç
ôùí ðñáãìÜôùí ðïõ Ý÷åé êáé ôïðïèåôåß ìðñïóôÜ ôïõ Ýíá ïðïéïäÞðïôå éäáíé-
êü, ìéá áíþôåñç äýíáìç ðïõ ôïí õðåñâáßíåé, Ýíá áíþôåñï éäáíéêü, Ýíáí á-
ãþíá ãåíéêüôåñá ðñïò ôï ¢ðåéñï, ðïõ ôïí ëåðôáßíåé, ôïí åîåõãåíßæåé, ôïí ìá-
ëáêþíåé, ôïí êñáôÜåé ôáðåéíü êáé ôïõ åíéó÷ýåé äéáñêþò ôçí èÝëçóÞ ôïõ. â)
ÌåëÝôç âéâëßùí ðïõ áó÷ïëïýíôáé ìå ôçí ëýôñùóç (ðíåõìáôéêüôçôá) ôïõ áí-
èñþðïõ - ÓâáíôéÜãéá (åäþ åííïïýìå ôá ìåôáöõóéêÜ - ìõóôéêéóôéêÜ âéâëßá ðïõ
ðáñÝ÷ïõí ïõóéáóôéêÞ ðíåõìáôéêÞ ôñïöÞ -ÅóùôåñéêÞ Ðáéäåßá- óôïí Üíèñù-
ðï êáé ôïõ äéáðëÜèïõí ìéá åéêüíá ôçò Ôåëåéüôçôáò, ìéá ôÝëåéá äüíçóç ìÝóá
ôïõ, Ýíá êÝíôñï âÜñïõò, ìßá óôáèåñüôçôá. ã) Ðåéèáñ÷ßá êáé Áíôï÷Þ - Tapas
(÷ùñßò ðåéèáñ÷ßá ïýôå ìðïñåß íá ìÜèåé áõôÜ ðïõ ôïõ äéäÜóêïíôáé, áëëÜ ïý-
ôå êáé ìðïñåß íá ôá åöáñìüóåé ãéá íá åëÝãîåé ôïí åáõôü ôïõ). ä) Åõ÷áñßóôçóç
ãéá üëá ü,ôé Ý÷åé - Óáìôüóá (ìáèáßíåé íá åßíáé ïëéãáñêÞò êáé åõ÷áñéóôçìÝíïò
ìå üôé ôïõ ðáñÝ÷åé ç æùÞ, ç äçìéïõñãßá, ï Èåüò êáé äåí ðáñáðïíéÝôáé, ïýôå
ìåìøéìïéñåß). å) Êáèáñüôçôá Óþìáôïò êáé Øõ÷Þò - Shausa (äçëáäÞ Íýøïí
áíïìÞìáôá ìç ìüíáí üøéí).
¼ëá ôá ðáñáðÜíù ðïõ áíáöÝñáìå áðïóêïðïýí íá óõìâïõëåýóïõí êáé
íá õðïäåßîïõí óôïí Üíèñùðï ðþò èá ðñÝðåé íá ïñãáíþóåé ôçí æùÞ ôïõ óå
ó÷Ýóç ìå ôïõò Üëëïõò, áëëÜ êáé ìå ôïí åáõôü ôïõ, þóôå íá äçìéïõñãÞóåé Ý-
íá óôáèåñü Üîïíá, ìßá õðïäïìÞ, ìßá çèéêÞ èåìåëßùóç ðïõ èá áðïôåëåß êáé
ôï óÞìá êáôáôåèÝí ìéáò ðëÞñïõò óùìáôïøõ÷éêÞò áãùãÞò, ðïõ öÝñíåé ôïí Üí-
èñùðï óå áñìïíßá ìå ôïí åáõôü ôïõ êáé ìå ôïõò óõíáíèñþðïõò ôïõ.
Åííïåßôáé üôé Ýíáò óùóôüò ìáèçôÞò ôçò Ãéüãêá êáôáâÜëåé öéëüôéìåò ðñïóðÜ-
èåéåò íá ðñïóåããßóåé ôá ðáñáðÜíù éäáíéêÜ ðñþôá áð' üëá ãéá ôïí ßäéï êáé ìå-
ôÜ ãéá ôïõò Üëëïõò (áí äåí åîåëßîïõìå ôçí áãñéåìÝíç êáé ðñùôüãïíç öýóç
ìáò, áí äåí âåëôéþóïõìå ôïõò åáõôïýò ìáò äåí ìðïñïýìå íá öéëïäïîÞóïõ-
ìå üôé õðÜñ÷åé ðåñßðôùóç íá âïçèÞóïõìå ïõóéáóôéêÜ ôïõò óõíáíèñþðïõò ìáò
áëëÜ êáé ôçí êïéíùíßá).
Óå äéáöïñåôéêÞ ðåñßðôùóç óðïõäÜæïõìå ôçí Ãéüãêá åíôåëþò ÁêáäçìáúêÜ
êáé èåùñçôéêÜ (åðéìïñöùôéêÜ) ÷ùñßò íá äçìéïõñãïýìå ðñïûðïèÝóåéò âåëôß-
ùóçò ôïõ åáõôïý ìáò êáé ÷ùñßò íá ðëçñïýìå ôéò óôïé÷åéþäåéò áñ÷Ýò - õðï-
÷ñåþóåéò åíüò Áíèñþðïõ åðéóôÞìïíá êáé ü÷é ôï áíôßèåôï.
ÐåñíÜìå óôï ôñßôï óêáëïðÜôé, óôçí ÁæÜíá ðïõ èá ðåé óôáèåñÞ êáé áôáëÜ-
íôåõôç èÝóç - óôÜóç ôïõ óþìáôïò (èåñáðåõôéêÞ áãùãÞ).
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
d) No Envy, no Theft - Asteghia (envy burns man internally and theft dam-
ages our fellow-men. A genuine Yogi does not deign these or at least he tries
hard to surpass them.
e) No violence - Ahimsa (it is one of the greatest virtues that a Yogi should
follow in all the levels - bodily, sentimental and psychical - Mahatma Gadhi
through the no-violence, managed to defeat and to sen out of India the Eng-
lish conquerors.
The next step is Niyama that means Discipline. This has also 5 principles:
a) Devotion in God - Isvara Pranintana - or in any superior power that man
recognizes for himself. Here man recognizes a limit for himself, to the con-
scious concept of the things he has and places in front of him any ideal, a
higher power surpassing him, a superior ideal, a sruggle generally to the Infi-
nite, that makes him finer, ennobles him, softens him, keeps him humble and
strengthens continually his will.
b) Study of books occupied in the deliverance (spirituality) of man - Svadi-
aya (by this we mean the metaphysical-mysticist books affording a substantial
spiritual nourishment to man and forming a Perfection picture, a perfect vi-
bration within him, a gravity center, a stability.
c) Discipline and Resistance - Tapas (without discipline he cannot learn
what is taught, but nor apply it in order to control himself).
d) Satisfaction in all what he has - Samtosa (he learns how to be contented
with little things, and with all what life, creation, God afford him, and he does
not complaint nor grumbles).
e) Purity of Body and Soul - Shausa (that is Wash your sins, not only your
face).
All the above-mentioned, aim to advise and to indicate to man how he
must organize his life in relation with the others but also with himself, in order
to be able to create a stable axis, a substructure, a moral foundation that will
constitute his registered sign of a full bodily-psychical training that brings man
in harmony with himself and with his fellow-men.
It is well understood that a right student of Yoga makes generous efforts to
approach the above ideals first of all for himself and then for the others (if we
do not develop our ferocious and primitive nature, if we do not improve our-
selves, we will not be able to aspire that there is the possibility for us to help
substantially our fellow-men).
Otherwise, we study Yoga quite academically and theoretically (trainingly),
without creating the presuppositions of improving ourselves and without ac-
complishing the elementary principles-obligations of a Man scientist and not
the contrary.
We pass on the third step, Asana, meaning a firm and not oscillated posi-
tion-posture of the body (therapeutical training).
There are 8.000.000 different asanas each one of which strengthens, rein-
forces and cures different suffering parts of our body. We use from 36 to 88
poses maximum, that are strictly studied and give us concrete therapeutical re-
sults.
Asana aims to train gradually and to bring a stability and an immobility to
the physical body, so that a gradual procedure of bringing back the harmed
organs of the organism to their original-physiological position may begin. Al-
so that a physiological distribution of the internal juices and energies running
in our body may return and finally, by the body firmness, a message of Mind
immobility may be given, that in an imitative way, will start little by little ap-
plying it, calming down and tranquilising from the uncontrollable annoying
thoughts consuming the Life Substance (sanskritic: prana). Certainly, the far-
thest aim is to be able to keep a stable position for a long time, for the exer-
cising to concentration.
Pranayama is the 4th step of Raja Yoga - Prana the Life Substance, the U-
niversal Energy ("oxygen", "the orgone" of Vilhelm Reich) existing diffuse in
18 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 ÕðÜñ÷ïõí Ýùò êáé 8.000.000 äéáöïñåôéêÝò áæÜíåò ðïõ ç êÜèå ìßá åíäõ- the whole Universe and supplying everything with life.
íáìþíåé, åíéó÷ýåé êáé èåñáðåýåé äéáöïñåôéêÜ ðÜó÷ïíôá ìÝñç ôïõ óþìáôüò ìáò. In Pranayama we are occupied with the most basic phenomenon of life:
ÓõíçèÝóôåñá ÷ñçóéìïðïéïýíôáé áðü 36 Ýùò ôï ðïëý êáé 88 óôÜóåéò, ïé ïðïß- Breath. Man can lack his food for a long time and continue living. However,
åò åßíáé áõóôçñÜ ìåëåôçìÝíåò êáé ìáò äßíïõí óõãêåêñéìÝíá èåñáðåõôéêÜ á- he cannot lack oxygen that composes the basic source of life, except for a few
ðïôåëÝóìáôá. seconds or even for 3-5 minutes.
Ç áæÜíá åêôüò ôçò åíäõíÜìùóçò ôïõ ïñãáíéóìïý êáé ôùí èåñáðåõôéêþí á- The Yogis, long ago noticed the matter of the breath, they examined it
ðïôåëåóìÜôùí ðÜíù óå óõãêåêñéìÝíåò ïñãáíéêÝò ðáèÞóåéò, áðïóêïðåß óôï minutely and they delivered us a special way of rhythmic breaths that contains
íá åêðáéäåýóåé êáé óôáäéáêÜ íá åðéöÝñåé ìßá óôáèåñüôçôá êáé ìßá áêéíçóßá the proper inhalations, the holdings of the air within us, the expirations and
óôï öõóéêü óþìá, þóôå óéãÜ óéãÜ íá áñ÷ßóåé ìéá äéáäéêáóßá åðáíáöïñÜò ôùí the holding of the air out. There are many systems of breaths that aim to feed,
ðåéñáãìÝíùí ïñãÜíùí ôïõ ïñãáíéóìïý óôçí áñ÷éêÞ - öõóéïëïãéêÞ èÝóç ôïõò. to revive and to enforce the whole organism, by creating not only the pre-
Íá åðáíÝëèåé ìéá öõóéïëïãéêÞ êáôáíïìÞ ôùí åóùôåñéêþí ÷õìþí êáé åíåñ- suppositions of the health, but also of the longevity.
ãåéþí ðïõ äéáôñÝ÷ïõí ôï óþìá ìáò êáé ôÝëïò ìå ôçí óôáèåñüôçôá ôïõ óþìá- It is about an exceptionally effective method having direct results in our n-
ôïò íá äïèåß Ýíá ìÞíõìá áêéíçóßáò óôï Íïõ, ðïõ êáôÜ ôñüðï ìéìçôéêü èá áñ- ervous and muscular system, as well as in the circulating, in the heart-blood
÷ßóåé óéãÜ óéãÜ íá ôï åöáñìüæåé, ãáëçíåýïíôáò êáé çñåìþíôáò áðü ôéò áêá- vessel, in the lymphatic, the peptic, the immunity, the endocrinic, the breath-
ôÜó÷åôåò, åíï÷ëçôéêÝò óêÝøåéò, ðïõ ôïõ êáôáíáëþíïõí Ïõóßá ÆùÞò ing, the skeletic systems. In a word, in all the systems of the organism without
(óáíóêñéôéêÜ: ðñÜíá). Áðþôåñïò âÝâáéá óêïðüò åßíáé íá ìðïñïýìå íá äéá- exemption.
ôçñïýìå ìßá óôáèåñÞ óôÜóç ãéá ìåãÜëá ÷ñïíéêÜ äéáóôÞìáôá, ãéá ôçí åîÜóêç-
óç óôçí óõãêÝíôñùóç.
Ç ðñáíáãéÜìá åßíáé ôï 4ï óêáëïðÜôé ôçò ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá. ÐñÜíá åßíáé ç Ïõ-
óßá ôçò ÆùÞò, ç Ðáãêüóìéá ÅíÝñãåéá ("ôï ïîõãüíï", "ç ïñãüíç" ôïõ Âßë÷åë-
ì ÑÜé÷) ðïõ õðÜñ÷åé äéÜ÷õôç ó' üëï ôï Óýìðáí êáé ôñïöïäïôåß ìå æùÞ ôá ðÜ-
íôá.
Óôçí ÐñáíáãéÜìá áó÷ïëïýìáóôå ìå ôï âáóéêüôåñï áðü ôá öáéíüìåíá ôçò
æùÞò. Ìå ôçí ðíïÞ. Ï Üíèñùðïò ìðïñåß íá óôåñçèåß ôï öáãçôü ôïõ ãéá ìå-
ãÜëï ÷ñïíéêü äéÜóôçìá êáé íá óõíå÷ßóåé íá æåß. Äåí ìðïñåß üìùò íá óôåñç-
èåß ðáñÜ ìüíï ãéá åëÜ÷éóôá äåõôåñüëåðôá Þ ôï ìÜîéìïõì ãéá 3-5 ëåðôÜ ôï ï-
îõãüíï, ðïõ áðïôåëåß ôçí âáóéêÞ ðçãÞ ôçò æùÞò.
Ïé Ãéüãêé áðü ðáëéÜ ðáñáôÞñçóáí ôï èÝìá ôçò áíáðíïÞò, ôï ëåðôïëüãç-
óáí êáé ìáò ðáñÝäùóáí Ýíá åéäéêü ôñüðï ñõèìéêþí áíáðíïþí ðïõ ðåñéÝ÷åé
êáôÜëëçëåò åéóðíïÝò, êñáôÞìáôá ôïõ áÝñá ìÝóá ìáò, åêðíïÝò êáé êñáôÞìá-
ôá ôïõ áÝñá Ýîù. ÕðÜñ÷ïõí ðïëëÜ óõóôÞìáôá áíáðíïþí ðïõ áðïóêïðïýí
íá èñÝøïõí, íá áíáæùïãïíÞóïõí êáé íá åíäõíáìþóïõí üëï ôïí ïñãáíéóìü
äçìéïõñãþíôáò ü÷é ìüíï ðñïûðïèÝóåéò õãåßáò, áëëÜ êáé ìáêñïæùßáò.
Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá ìéá åîáéñåôéêÜ áðïôåëåóìáôéêÞ ìÝèïäï ðïõ Ý÷åé Üìåóá åðù-
öåëÞ áðïôåëÝóìáôá óôï íåõñéêü êáé ìõéêü ìáò óýóôçìá, óôï êõêëïöïñéêü,
óôï êáñäéáããåéáêü, óôï ëåìöéêü, óôï ðåðôéêü, óôï áíïóïðïéçôéêü, óôï åíäï-
êñéíéêü, óôï áíáðíåõóôéêü, óôï óêåëåôéêü. Óå üëá áíåîáéñÝôùò ôá óõóôÞìáôá
ôïõ ïñãáíéóìïý.
Ãéá ðáñÜäåéãìá üôáí åéóðíÝïõìå ôïí áÝñá êáé ôïí êñáôÜìå ìÝóá ìáò ôüôå Ï Äßóêïò ôçò Öáéóôïý ðáñïõóéÜæåé ôçí ãñáöÞ
ôùí Åíäï÷ùñçôþí - Åôåïêñçôþí (Äñáâßäùí) ðïõ åßíáé ç áñ÷áéüôåñç
äõíáìþíïõìå êáé åíéó÷ýïõìå ôï êáôáññáêùìÝíï ãéá üëïõò ìáò íåõñéêü óý-
óôïí êüóìï êáé ðéèáíïëïãåßôáé üôé ßóùò Ý÷åé áðïóôáëåß áðü ôçí
óôçìá. Áíôßèåôá üôáí åêðíÝïõìå ôïí áÝñá êáé ôïí êñáôïýìå Ýîù éó÷õñïðïéïý-
Ìï÷Ýíæï ÍôÜñï óôçí ìçôÝñá ðáôñßäá ÊñÞôç.
ìå ôï ìõéêü ìáò óýóôçìá. The Disk of Phaestos writing is believed to be representative
Åñ÷üìáóôå óôï 5ï óêáëïðÜôé, óôçí ÐñáôéáêÜñá. Ç ðñáôéáêÜñá åßíáé ðïë- of the Dravidian writing, one of the first attempts
ëÞ ãíùóôÞ óå üëïõò ìáò ùò ñçëÜî Þ ÷áëÜñùóç. Åßíáé Ýíá éäáíéêü öÜñìáêï in the history of human writing.
ãéá êÜèå åßäïõò êáé ìïñöÞò êïýñáóç, Ýíôáóç, öüñôéóç, ôïîßíùóç ôïõ åßíáé
ìáò. Õðïëïãßæåôáé üôé ìßá þñá óùóôÞò ÷áëÜñùóçò áíôéóôïé÷åß óå ôÝóóåñéò ðå- For instance, when we inhale the air and we hold it within us, we strength-
ñßðïõ þñåò öõóéêïý ýðíïõ. en and reinforce our collapsed nervous system. On the contrary, when we ex-
Ï ïñãáíéóìüò ìáò óðáôáëÜåé êáèçìåñéíÜ ãéá óõëëïãÞ ðëçñïöïñéþí, å- pire the air and we hold it out, we strengthen our muscular system.
íôõðþóåùí, åñåèéóìþí, åìðåéñéþí áðü ôïí Ýîù êüóìï êáé ãéá ôçí ðáñáãù- We come to the 5th step, Pratyakara. Pratyakara is well known to all of us
ãÞ ôçò óêÝøçò Ýíá 70% - 80% ðåñßðïõ ôùí öõóéêþí ôïõ äõíÜìåùí. Ãé' áõ- as relax or loosening. It is an ideal medicine for every kind and type of tire-
ôüí áêñéâþò ôïí ëüãï êïõñÜæåôáé, áäåéÜæåé, áäõíáôßæåé, áññùóôáßíåé êáé êá- some, intensity, pressure, toxication of our existence. One hour of proper re-
ôáâÜëëåôáé óùìáôéêÜ êáé øõ÷éêÜ. Äéüôé áíÜ ðÜóá óôéãìÞ ìå ôçí óõíå÷Þ ëåé- laxation corresponds to about four hours of physical sleep.
ôïõñãßá ôùí áéóèÞóåùí êáé ôçò óêÝøçò õðïöÝñåé áðü Ýëëåéøç æùôéêÞò äýíá- Every day our organism spends about a 70%-80% of its physical powers.
ìçò. For this reason, it gets tired, emptied, it weakens, it gets ill and put down, bod-
Ï öõóéêüò ýðíïò äåí áñêåß ãéá íá áðïôïîéíþóåé ðëÞñùò ôïí ïñãáíéóìü ily and physically. Because, every moment, by the continuous function of the
(õðÜñ÷ïõí êáé ðÜëé åíôÜóåéò, üíåéñá, åöéÜëôåò). Åäþ Ýñ÷åôáé ç ðñáôéáêÜñá senses and of the thought, it suffers of lack of power.
(áöáßñåóç Þ êåíü ôïõ Íïõ Þ áðïêïðÞ ôïõ Íïõ áðü ôéò áéóèÞóåéò Þ áêüìç å- The natural sleep is not enough to detoxicate the organism

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 19 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

óùóôñÝöåéá) êáé ìå ôçí ÷áëÜñùóÞ ôçò ìáò åêðáéäåýåé ðþò èá áíáóôåßëïõìå
ôçí õðåñäñáóôçñéüôçôá áõôÞ ôùí áéóèÞóåùí, þóôå íá ðÜøåé ç óõíå÷Þò ñïÞ
ôùí áêáôÜó÷åôùí åðáíáëáìâáíüìåíùí Ü÷ñçóôùí åñåèéóìþí, ãéá íá ìðïñÝ-
óïõìå íá áíáöïñôßóïõìå ôéò ìðáôáñßåò ìáò êáé íá ãëõôþóïõìå áðü ôï ÷åé-
ñüôåñï ðïõ áñãÜ Þ ãñÞãïñá Ýñ÷åôáé. Ðéï áðëÜ ìáèáßíïõìå íá êÜíïõìå Ýíá
óùôÞñéï äéÜëåéììá áíáóýíôáîçò êáé áíáíÝùóçò ôïõ ïñãáíéóìïý ìáò êáé ôùí
äõíÜìåùí ôïõ.
Åñ÷üìáóôå óôï 6ï óêáëß, óôçí ÓõãêÝíôñùóç Þ áëëéþò Óôï÷áóìü (ÓùêñÜ-
ôçò, ìÜ÷ç Ðïôßäáéáò, Óõìðüóéï). Åßíáé ç äõíáôüôçôá íá êñáôÜìå ôï Íïõ ìáò
óå Ýíá èÝìá, óçìåßï, óôü÷ï ãéá 12´´ óõíå÷Þ äåõôåñüëåðôá ÷ùñßò íá ðáñåéóöñÞ-
óåé äåýôåñç óêÝøç. Áõôü Ý÷åé ùò áðïôÝëåóìá ôçí óõóðåßñùóç êáé ôçí êáôÜ
âïýëçóç êáôåýèõíóç ôùí åóùôåñéêþí äéáíïçôéêþí äõíÜìåùí ãéá ôçí ðáñá-
ãùãÞ åíüò õøçëüôåñï Ýñãïõ.
Ôï 7ï óêáëïðÜôé ç ÍôõÜíá åßíáé ï Äéáëïãéóìüò, ç åðéìÞêõíóç ôçò óõãêÝ-
íôñùóçò Ýùò ôá 144´´ ðïõ Ý÷åé ùò áðïôÝëåóìá ôçí åóùôåñéêÞ ôáýôéóç ìå ôïí
óôü÷ï.
ÔÝëïò ôï 8ï óêáëïðÜôé, ôï ÓáìÜíôé ÷ñåéÜæåôáé 1728´´ óõãêñÜôçóçò ôçò óêÝ-
øçò êáé ìáò äßíåé ôçí õðÝñâáóç, ôçí Öþôéóç, ôçí ÐëÞñç áíôßëçøç ôïõ Åáõ-
ôïý ìáò.
Ùò åßíáé ãíùóôü Ý÷ïõìå 4 åßäç åãêåöáëéêþí êõìÜôùí. ÅãêåöáëéêÜ êýìá-
ôá ÂÞôá (êáôÜóôáóç óõíåßäçóçò, áðü 13-28 c/sec), ´Áëöá (÷áëÜñùóç - åëá-
öñýò ýðíïò, áðü 8-12 c/sec), ÈÞôá (ýðíïò, áðü 4-7 c/sec) êáé ÄÝëôá (âáèýò
ýðíïò, áðü 2-4 c/sec). ÊáôÜ ôçí Ãéüãêá õðÜñ÷ïõí êé Üëëåò êáôáóôÜóåéò óõ-
íåßäçóçò (åßäç åãêåöáëéêþí êõìÜôùí) ðïõ äåí Ý÷åé áããßîåé áêüìá ç åðéóôç-
ìïíéêÞ Ýñåõíá. Ïé öôáóìÝíïé Ãéüãêé ëÝãåôáé üôé Ý÷ïõí ôçí éêáíüôçôá íá åéóÝñ-
÷ïíôáé åêïýóéá óôéò ãíùóôÝò êáé Üãíùóôåò êáôáóôÜóåéò ôçò óõíåßäçóçò, íá á-
íáíåþíïíôáé óùìáôéêÜ êáé íïçôéêÜ êáé åðéðëÝïí íá ãåìßæïõí ôï åßíáé ôïõò ìå
õðåñêüóìéá Ãíþóç. Ó÷åôéêÜ ðáñáäåßãìáôá Ý÷ïõìå ðÜñá ðïëëÜ (Ñáìáêñß-
óíá, ÂéâåêáíÜíôá, ÓÜôõá ÓÜú ÌðÜìðá, Í. ÌáñãéùñÞò, ÅëëçíéêÞ åêðáéäåõ-
ôéêÞ ôçëåüñáóç êáé ðïëëÜ Üëëá).
ÌÅÑÉ ÊÁ Å ÐÉ ÓÔÇ ÌÏ ÍÉÊÁ ÓÔÏÉ×ÅÉÁ
Óôçí Áõóôñáëßá ç Ãéüãêá åßíáé åíóùìáôùìÝíç óôï åêåß Åèíéêü Óýóôçìá Õ-
ãåßáò êáé ïé åêåß ãéáôñïß -áíÜëïãá ìå ôçí ðÜèçóç- óõóôÞíïõí ôçí åîÜóêçóç
óôçí Ãéüãêá, óå áíôßèåóç ìå ôïõò äéêïýò ìáò ãéáôñïýò ðïõ ìç Ý÷ïíôáò óáöÞ
ãíþóç ôçò Ãéüãêá (åêôüò âåâáßùò ïñéóìÝíùí åîáéñÝóåùí ðïõ âáèìçäüí áõ-
îÜíïíôáé) Þ Ýóôù êÜðïéá Üëëç ëýóç Þ ôñüðï áíôéìåôþðéóçò, äßíïõí êáô' áíÜ-
ãêç ìüíï öÜñìáêá ãéá èåñáðåßá äéáöüñùí ðáèÞóåùí (ôá ïðïßá ãíùñßæïõ-
ìå üôé äåí óôåñïýíôáé ðáñåíåñãåéþí êáé üôé áäõíáôßæïõí ôçí öõóéêÞ Üìõíá
ôïõ ïñãáíéóìïý). Åðßóçò ïé ðñáêôéêÝò ôçò äéäÜóêïíôáé óå öõëáêÝò, øõ÷éá-
ôñéêÝò êëéíéêÝò, íïóïêïìåßá, ó÷ïëåßá, ðáíåðéóôÞìéá, åñãïóôÜóéá, ïßêïõò ãéá
êáèõóôåñçìÝíá ðáéäéÜ ê.ë.ð.
Óôçí Äáíßá áíáãíùñßæåôáé ç Ãéüãêá óáí ìÝñïò ôïõ Åèíéêïý Åêðáéäåõôéêïý
ðñïãñÜììáôïò.
Óôçí Ãáëëßá ç Ãéüãêá äéäÜóêåôáé ùò ìÜèçìá åðéëïãÞò óôá ÐáíåðéóôÞìéá,
åíþ ðñüóöáôá ç êõâÝñíçóç Ýäùóå åðé÷ïñÞãçóç åêáôïììõñßùí öñÜãêùí
ãéá íá éäñýóåé Ýíá Ãéïãêéêü ÐáíåðéóôÞìéï, ëßãï Ýîù áðü ôï Ðáñßóé.
Óôçí Ôóå÷ïóëïâáêßá ôï õðïõñãåßï Áèëçôéóìïý êáé Õãåßáò ôïíßæåé ôçí óç-
ìáóßá ôçò Ãéüãêá óå üëç ôçí ÷þñá.
Óôçí ðñþçí ÓïâéåôéêÞ ¸íùóç óõíåñãÜæïíôáé Ãéüãêé ìå åðéóôÞìïíåò óå
äéáóôçìéêÜ åêðáéäåõôéêÜ ðñïãñÜììáôá, ãéá íá ìðïñÝóïõí íá áíáêáëýøïõí
ðþò ôï ÃéïãêéêÜ åêðáéäåõìÝíï óþìá ìðïñåß íá áíôÝîåé ôéò äýóêïëåò óõíèÞ-
êåò ôïõ äéáóôÞìáôïò.
Ó' üëç ôçí Þðåéñï ôçò ËáôéíéêÞò ÁìåñéêÞò áíèßæåé ç Ãéüãêá.
Óôéò ÇÐÁ äéäÜóêåôáé óå ðáíåðéóôçìéáêü åðßðåäï êáé áðïôåëåß ìéá áêáäç-
ìáúêÞ ãíþóç åîõæçôçìÝíç.
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
(intensities,dreams, nightmares). Here Pratyakara comes (substraction, void of
Mind, introversion), through relax and instructs us how to suspend this super-
activity of the senses, so that the continual flow of the uncontrollable and use-
less irritations cease and that we recharge our batteries and escape from the
worse that soon or later will come. More simply, we learn how to make a salu-
tary interval of reorganization and of renewal in our organism.
We reach the 6th step, Concentration or otherwise Reflection (Socrate, bat-
tle of Potidea). It is one's ability to keep one's Mind at a subject, point, target
for 12´´ continual seconds without any second thought to intervene. This caus-
es the gathering and the voluntary direction of the internal mental powers for
the production of a high work.
The 7th step, Dhiana, is Meditation, the conscience elongation to the 144´´
resulting the internal identification with the target.
Finally, the 8th step, Samadhi, needs 1728´´ of our thought control and
gives us transgression, Enlightenment, the Full comprehension of Ourself.
Scientific tokens (experiments): As it is known, we have 4 kinds of brain
waves. Brain waves B (conscience situation, from 13-28 c/sec). A (relax - light
sleep, from 8-12 c/sec), H (sleep, from 4-7 c/sec) and D (deep sleep, from 2-
4 c/sec). According to Yoga, there are more conscience situations (kinde of brain
waves) that the scientific search has not touched yet. It is rumoured that the
attained Yogis are able to enter involuntarily the known and the unknown
conscience situations, to be incarnated bodily and mentally and also to fill their
being with universal Knowledge. We have too many respective examples (Ra-
makrisna, Vivekananda, Satya Sai Baba, Nikolaos A. Margioris, Greek tele-
vision and many others).
In Australia, Yoga is incorporated in the National Health System of the
country: the scientists -according to the disease- recommend exercises in Yo-
ga, contrary to our own doctors who, not having a clear knowledge of Yoga
(except in least cases) or even some other solutions, give unsparingly only
medicines for the treatment of different diseases (that are known as having side
effects and weakening the natural defense of our organism). Also, its practices
are taught in the prisons, in the psychiatric clinics, hospitals, schools, universi-
ties, factories, houses for underdeveloped children, et.
In Denmark, Yoga is recognized as a part of the National Educational pro-
gram.
In France, Yoga is taught as a selected lesson in the Universities, while re-
cently the goverment gave a subsidy of one million francs in order to establish
a Yogic University, a little far from Paris.
In Tsechoslovakia, the ministry of Athletism and Health points out the sig-
nificance of Yoga in all the country.
In the former Sovietic Union Yogis cooperate with the scients in spacing e-
ducational programs to be able to discover how the Yogic trained body can
endure the difficult space conditions.
In the whole continent of Latin America Yoga flourishes.
In U.S.A. it is taught at a university level and constitutes an academic ex-
tradiscussion knowledge.
In India, Yoga has become an obligatory lesson in many governmental
schools and thousands of masters are being trained in it.
In English, Yoga is taought by the BWY (British Wheel of Yoga) that is rec-
ognized by the competent Ministry of Athletism. There is also the EUY (Euro-
pean Federation of Yoga) as well as the IYTA (International Federation of Yo-
ga), the country seat of which is in Australia).
In the 8th volume of the Health Encyclopaedia that is translated into Greek
- which has been approved by the Ministry of Health of South Italy - there is
a dedication of 11 pages about Yoga and the extended and important profits
for the bodily and mental health it affords to every person who will take the
trouble to apply its practices.
20 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 Óôçí Éíäßá ç Ãéüãêá Ý÷åé ãßíåé õðï÷ñåùôéêü ìÜèçìá óå ðïëëÜ áðü ôá êõ-
âåñíçôéêÜ ó÷ïëåßá êáé ÷éëéÜäåò äÜóêáëïé åêðáéäåýïíôáé ó' áõôÞ.
Óôçí Áããëßá ç Ãéüãêá äéäÜóêåôáé áðü ôçí BWY (British Wheel of Yoga =
ÂñåôáíéêÞ ¸íùóç Ãéüãêá) ðïõ åßíáé áíáãíùñéóìÝíç áðü ôï áñìüäéï Õðïõñ-
ãåßï Áèëçôéóìïý. ÕðÜñ÷åé åðßóçò ç EUY (European Federation of Yoga =
ÅõñùðáúêÞ ´Åíùóç Ãéüãêá), êáèþò êáé ç IYTA (International Federation of
Yoga = ÄéåèíÞò ¸íùóç Ãéüãêá ìå Ýäñá ôçí Áõóôñáëßá).
Óôïí 8ï ôüìï ôçò ÉôáëéêÞò Åãêõêëïðáßäåéáò Õãåßá ðïõ åßíáé ìåôáöñáóìÝ-
íç óôá ÅëëçíéêÜ -ç ïðïßá åßíáé åãêåêñéìÝíç áðü ôï Õðïõñãåßï Õãåßáò ôçò É-
ôáëßáò- õðÜñ÷åé áöéÝñùìá 11 óåëßäùí ãéá ôçí Ãéüãêá êáé ôá åêôåôáìÝíá êáé
óçìáíôéêÜ ïöÝëç óôçí óùìáôéêÞ êáé íïçôéêÞ õãåßá ðïõ ðáñÝ÷åé óôïí êÜèå Üí-
èñùðï ðïõ èá ìðåé óôïí êüðï íá åöáñìüóåé ôéò ðñáêôéêÝò ôçò.
Óôçí ÁìåñéêÞ ôï Õðïõñãåßï Õãåßáò ôçò ÊõâÝñíçóçò ôùí ÇíùìÝíùí Ðï-
ëéôåéþí Ý÷åé âãÜëåé Ýíá ïãêùäÝóôáôï âéâëßï ìÝóá óôï ïðïßï ðëçñïöïñåß ôï
áìåñéêáíéêü êïéíü ó÷åôéêÜ ìå åíáëëáêôéêïýò ôñüðïõò áõôïèåñáðåßáò. Ó' áõ-
ôü ôï âéâëßï áíáöÝñåôáé óôï ôé ìðïñåß íá ðñïóöÝñåé ç Ãéüãêá óôçí ðñïëçðôé-
êÞ õãåßá ôùí ðïëéôþí. ÁíôéãñÜöïõìå ïñéóìÝíá áðïóðÜóìáôá ôïõ êåéìÝíïõ
ðïõ áíáöÝñåôáé óôçí Ãéüãêá êáé ðïõ ðåñéëáìâÜíåôáé óôï ùò Üíù âéâëßï:
"Åäþ óôçí ÁìåñéêÞ ç Ãéüãêá áîéïðïéåßôáé ðéï óõ÷íÜ óáí ìÝñïò åíüò ïëé-
óôéêïý ðñïãñÜììáôïò âåëôßùóçò ôçò õãåßáò êáèþò åðßóçò óáí ìéá öõóéêÞ
èåñáðåßá ãéá áññþóôéåò. ¸íá ðáñÜäåéãìá åßíáé ç åöáñìïãÞ ôçò Ãéüãêá áðü
ôïí Dr. Dean Ornish (êáñäéïëüãï), ìáæß ìå áëëáãÝò äéáôñïöÞò, åëåýèåñç á-
åñïâéêÞ Üóêçóç, äéáëïãéóìü êáé ïìÜäåò óõíáéóèçìáôéêÞò õðïóôÞñéîçò, ãéá
íá áíôéóôñÝøåé áññþóôéåò ôçò êáñäéÜò (Ornish 1990)".
"Ôá óùìáôéêÜ êáé øõ÷ïëïãéêÜ ïöÝëç ôçò Ãéüãêá ðåñéëáìâÜíïõí ìáóÜæ
ôùí ìõþí êáé ôùí åóùôåñéêþí ïñãÜíùí, áõîçìÝíç êõêëïöïñßá áßìáôïò, åîé-
óïññüðçóç ôïõ óõìðáèçôéêïý êáé ðáñáóõìðáèçôéêïý óõóôÞìáôïò, áýîçóç
ôùí åíäïñöéíþí óôïí åãêÝöáëï (åãêåöáëßíåò, óåñáôïíßíç), ç áíôéóôñïöÞ
ôùí áñíçôéêþí áðïôåëåóìÜôùí ôçò âáñýôçôáò ðÜíù óôá üñãáíá, ç áýîçóç ôùí
èñåðôéêþí ïõóéþí óôïõò éóôïýò êáé ç áõîçìÝíç ðáñïõóßá ôùí êõìÜôùí Üë-
öá êáé èÞôá óôïí åãêÝöáëï, ðïõ äßíïõí ìåãáëýôåñç çñåìßá óôï Íïõ".
"Áðü ôï 1920 ðïõ ðñùôïîåêßíçóáí áõôÝò ïé åðéóôçìïíéêÝò Ýñåõíåò ùò ôï
1989, ðïõ äéáìïñöþèçêå ôï ðáñáðÜíù Ýñãï Ýãéíáí ðåñßðïõ 1600 ìåëÝôåò.
ÐïëëÝò áêüìá Ý÷ïõí ãßíåé áðü ôüôå êáé ðáñáêÜôù áêïëïõèïýí ìüíï ìåñé-
êÝò áðü áõôÝò ðïõ áíáöÝñïíôáé óôçí áíáöïñÜ ôïõ Õðïõñãåßïõ Õãåßáò ôçò
ÁìåñéêÞò, ùò Ýíá áíôéðñïóùðåõôéêü äåßãìá":
1. Ðïíôßêéá ðïõ ôïðïèåôÞèçêáí êáôáêüñõöá, ìå ôï êåöÜëé êÜôù, ìßá þ-
ñá ôçí çìÝñá ðñïóáñìüóôçêáí óå ôå÷íçôÜ óïê ðéï ãñÞãïñá êáé áðïôåëå-
óìáôéêÜ áðü ôá Üëëá ðïíôßêéá (Udura 1978).
2. ¢íèñùðïé ðïõ êÜíïõí Ãéüãêá åßíáé ðéï áíèåêôéêïß óôï óôñåò (Gaertner
1965).
3. Ç êáñäéÜ ëåéôïõñãåß ðéï áðïôåëåóìáôéêÜ ó' áõôïýò ðïõ êÜíïõí Ãéüãêá
(Ornish 1983), (Bakker 1976).
4. Ìåéþíåôáé ç ðßåóç ôïõ áßìáôïò êáé ôá êýìáôá ôïõ åãêåöÜëïõ äåß÷íïõí
ìéá ðéï Þñåìç åóùôåñéêÞ êáôÜóôáóç (Anand & Chhina 1961), Blacknell 1975),
(Fenwick 1977).
5. Óå óõíäõáóìü ìå áëëáãÝò óôçí äéáôñïöÞ, ãßíåôáé ç ìåßùóç ôçò ÷ïëç-
óôåñßíçò (Ornish 1983).
6. Ç âåëôßùóç ôïõ åðéðÝäïõ æÜ÷áñçò óôï áßìá (Monroe & Fitzgerald 1986).
7. Ëüãù ôùí øõ÷ïëïãéêþí ùöåëåéþí Ý÷åé ÷ñçóéìïðïéçèåß íá âïçèÞóåé
óôçí áðåîÜñôçóç áðü ôá íáñêùôéêÜ êáé ôï êÜðíéóìá (Benson 1969).
8. ¸÷åé áîéïðïéçèåß ìáæß ìå Üëëåò êëáóéêÝò èåñáðåßåò ãéá íá âïçèÞóåé óôï
Üóèìá (Gore 1982), ôçí õøçëÞ ðßåóç (Backnell 1975), ôïí åèéóìü óôá íáñ-
êùôéêÜ (Benson 1969), óôá ðñïâëÞìáôá êáñäéÜò (Ornish 1983), óôéò çìéêñá-
íßåò (Benson 1977), óôïí êáñêßíï (Frank 1975) êáé óôçí áñèñßôéäá (Coudron
& Coudron 1987)".
ÁõôÞ åßíáé åí óõíôïìßá ç áîéïëüãçóç åíüò áíôéðñïóùðåõôéêïý äåßãìáôïò
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
In America, the Ministry of Health of the Government in USA, has issued a
voluminous book in which it informs the American people about the alterna-
tive ways of self-therapy. In this book it is mentioned what Yoga can offer to
the preventive health of the citizens. We copy some extracts of the text that
refers to Yoga and that is contained in the above-mentioned book:
"Here in America, Yoga is utilized most often as a part of a holistic program
for the improvement of the health, as well as a natural therapy for the dis-
eases. An example is the application of Yoga by Dr. Dean Ornish (cardiolo-
gist), together with the changes of the nutrition, the free aerobic exercise, the
meditation and some groups of sentimental support, in order to overturn the
heart diseases (Ornish 1990)."
"The bodily and psychological profits of Yoga contain the massage of the
muscles and of the internal organs, the increased circulation of the blood, the
counterbalancing of the sympathetic and the parasympathetic nervous sys-
tem, the increase of the endorfins in the cerebrum (egkefalins, seratonine), the
inversion of the negative results of the heaviness on the organs, the increase
of the nourishing substances in the tissues and the increased presence of the
ways -A and -È in the cerebrum that give the Mind a greater calmness".
"Since 1920 when these scientific searches started, to 1989 when the above
work was formed, about 1600 studies took place. Still many studies took place
since then and below follow only some of those that are referred in the state-
ment of the Ministry of Health of America, as a representative proof".
1. The mice that were placed vertically, the head downward, one hour every
day, were adjusted on a technical shock quicker and more effectively than the
other mice (Lidura 1978).
2. The people who make Yoga are more resistant in the stress (Gaertner
1965).
3. The heart functions more effectively to those who make Yoga (Ornish
1983), (Bakker, 1975).
4. The pressure of the blood is reduced and the waves of the cerebrum
show a calmer internal situation (Anand and Chhina 1961, Blacknell 1975),
(Fenwic\k, 1977).
5. In combination with the changes to the nutrition, the reduction of the c-
holesterol takes place (Ornish, 1983).
6. The improvement of the sugar level in the blood (Monroe and Fitzerald,
1985).
7. Due to the psychological benefits it has been used to help to the purga-
tion of drug and smoking addiction (Benson, 1969).
8. It has been evaluated together with other classic therapies to help in the
asthma (Gore, 1962), the high pressure (Backnell 1975), the drug addiction
(Benson 1969), the heart problems (Ornish 1983), the migraines (Benson
1977), the cancer (Frank 1975) and the arthritis (Coudron & Coudron, 1987).
This is, briefly, the evaluation of a representative sign of scientific studies and
experiments for Yoga, from the Ministry of Health of the USA.
We meet a similar respect and a respective acceptance for Yoga, almost in
the whole planet.
Also, in order to prove and show you the value, the importance and the great
utility of Yoga, I shall refer quickest to the Sofrology that constitutes a new u-
niversal scientific method, being recently developed that mainly the neurolo-
gists-psychiatrists use, and that, as it officially admits, has borrowed many el-
ements from the Eastern Philosophy and particularly by the techniques and
methods of Yoga, of Zen and of the Buddhism. Also, in combination with the
Eastern thought, it has formed a new completed educational and therapeutic
method, mainly of psychological support and of the beginning for the self-im-
provement of man.
The term Sofrology was created in 1960, by neurve-psychiatrist Alfonso
Caycedo, and it comes from the union of three Greek words. Soos: integral,
21 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
åðéóôçìïíéêþí ìåëåôþí êáé ðåéñáìÜôùí ãéá ôçí Ãéüãêá áðü ôï Õðïõñãåßï Õ- self-poised, harmonious. (Freen: spirit, Word, cause, science, logic).
ãåßáò ôùí ÇíùìÝíùí Ðïëéôåéþí. The 1st Congress of the Sofrology took place in Barcellona, in October of
¸íáí ðáñüìïéï óåâáóìü êáé ìéá áíÜëïãç áðïäï÷Þ ãéá ôçí Ãéüãêá óõíá- 1972 and 1500 councilors from all the world participated in it. The Sofrology
íôïýìå óå ó÷åäüí ïëüêëçñï ôïí ðëáíÞôç. is enrolled in the mild - physical medical methods and it is practiced by the physi-
Áêüìç ãéá íá óáò ôåêìçñéþóù êáé êáôáäåßîù ôçí áîßá, ôçí óçìáíôéêüôçôá cians but also by the people of the paramedical professions.
êáé ôçí ìåãÜëç ÷ñçóéìüôçôá ôçò Ãéüãêá èá áíáöåñèþ åí ôÜ÷åé óôçí Óùöñï- Even, relatively recently, also in Greece the first popularized book of neu-
ëïãßá ç ïðïßá áðïôåëåß ìéá íÝá ðáãêüóìéá åðéóôçìïíéêÞ ìÝèïäï ðïõ áíáðôýó- rologist-psychiatrist Mr. Theodoros Balis, from Thessaloniki, was edited, un-
óåôáé ôåëåõôáßá ôçí ïðïßá ÷åéñßæïíôáé êõñßùò íåõñïëüãïé - øõ÷ßáôñïé êáé ç ï- der the title "Strain-Stress-Oppression, a contemporary confronting of them.
ðïßá üðùò åðßóçìá ðáñáäÝ÷åôáé Ý÷åé äáíåéóôåß ðïëëÜ óôïé÷åßá áðü ôçí Áíá- by the method of the Sofrology".
ôïëéêÞ Öéëïóïößá êáé åéäéêüôåñá áðü ôéò ôå÷íéêÝò êáé ìåèüäïõò ôçò Ãéüãêá,
ôïõ Æåí êáé ôïõ Âïõäéóìïý êáé óå óõíäõáóìü ìå ôçí ÄõôéêÞ óêÝøç ó÷çìÜôé-
óå ìßá íÝá ïëïêëçñùìÝíç ðáéäáãùãéêÞ êáé èåñáðåõôéêÞ ìÝèïäï, êõñßùò øõ-
÷ïëïãéêÞò õðïóôÞñéîçò êáé áðáñ÷Þò ãéá ôçí áõôïâåëôßùóç ôïõ áíèñþðïõ.
Ï üñïò Óùöñïëïãßá äçìéïõñãÞèçêå ôï 1960 áðü ôïí íåõñïøõ÷ßáôñï Al-
fonso Caycedo êáé ðñïÝñ÷åôáé áðü ôçí Ýíùóç ôñéþí åëëçíéêþí ëÝîåùí. Óþ-
ïò: áêÝñáéïò, éóïññïðçìÝíïò, áñìïíéêüò. Öñçí: ðíåýìá. Ëüãïò: áéôßá, åðé-
óôÞìç, ëïãéêÞ.
Ôï 1ï Ðáãêüóìéï ÓõíÝäñéï Óùöñïëïãßáò Ýãéíå óôçí Âáñêåëþíç ôïí Ï-
êôþâñç ôïõ 1972 êáé óõììåôåß÷áí ó' áõôü 1500 óýíåäñïé áð' üëï ôïí êüóìï.
Ç Óùöñïëïãßá åíôÜóóåôáé óôéò Þðéåò - öõóéêÝò éáôñéêÝò ìåèüäïõò êáé åîáóêåß-
ôáé áðü ãéáôñïýò áëëÜ êáé áðü áíèñþðïõò ðáñáúáôñéêþí åðáããåëìÜôùí.
ÌÜëéóôá ó÷åôéêÜ ðñüóöáôá åêäüèçêå êáé óôçí ÅëëÜäá ôï ðñþôï åêëáú-
êåõìÝíï âéâëßï ôïõ íåõñïëüãïõ øõ÷ßáôñïõ ê. Èåüäùñïõ ÌðáëëÞ áðü ôçí
Èåóóáëïíßêç ìå ôßôëï "¢ã÷ïò - Óôñåò - ÊáôÜèëéøç, ìßá óýã÷ñïíç áíôéìåôþ-
ðéóÞ ôïõò ìå ôç ìÝèïäï ôçò Óùöñïëïãßáò"
ÌåñéêÝò áêüìá ãåíéêÝò åðéãñáììáôéêÝò åöáñìïãÝò ôçò Ãéüãêá óôïí óýã-
÷ñïíï Üíèñùðï åßíáé ïé åîÞò:
á) Ïé áóêÞóåéò ôçò Ãéüãêá óå óõíäõáóìü ìå êáôÜëëçëåò áíáðíïÝò êáé åê-
ìÜèçóç ôçò ÷áëÜñùóçò ðáñÝ÷ïõí åîáéñåôéêÞ âïÞèåéá êáé óõíåéóöïñÜ ãéá
êÜèå ðÜèçóç êáé ðéï åéäéêÜ óôï èÝìá ôçò Åãêõìïíïýóáò ìçôÝñáò ãéá ôçí ðå-
ñßðôùóç ôïõ áíþäõíïõ ôïêåôïý - ãÝííáò (äÝïí íá åîáóöáëßæåôáé êáé Ýããñá-
öç Üäåéá ôïõ ãéáôñïý, üôé äåí õðÜñ÷åé êÜðïéï ïñãáíéêü ðñüâëçìá ðïõ íá êá-
èéóôÜ áäýíáôç ôçí åîÜóêçóç óôçí Ãéüãêá Þ êÜðïéï Üëëï ðïõ íá ÷ñåéÜæåôáé é-
äéáßôåñï ôñüðï ðñïóÝããéóçò áðü ìÝñïõò ôùí áóêÞóåùí). Óêïðüò ôùí áóêÞ-
óåùí áõôþí åßíáé íá ðÜñåé ôÝôïéá èÝóç ìÝóá óôç ëåêÜíç ôçò ãõíáßêáò ç ìÞ-
ôñá, þóôå ç áðüèåóç ôïõ âñÝöïõò íá ãßíåé öõóéïëïãéêÜ êáé ÷ùñßò êáìßá êÜ-
êùóç (åîÜóêçóç ìå Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá áðü ôïí 1ï Ýùò êáé ôïí 6ï ìÞíá, ìåôÜ óõ-
íå÷ßæåôáé ç åîÜóêçóç ìüíï ìå ñõèìéêÝò áíáðíïÝò). Here are some epigrammatical applications of Yoga to the man of today:
Åðßóçò êÜèå óùóôÞ êáé ü÷é øåýôéêç áæÜíá (óôÜóç - Üóêçóç)) áíôéðñïóù- a) The exercises of Yoga combined with the proper breaths and the learn-
ðåýåé ìéá ðåñßïäï êáé ìéá ðáñÜëëçëç óôÜóç ôïõ åìâñýïõ (ìùñïý), ìÝóá óôçí ing of the relax, give an excellent help and contribution for every affection and
ìÞôñá ôçò ìçôÝñáò ôïõ, êáôÜ ôï äéÜóôçìá ôçò êýçóçò. ÅííÝá ìÞíåò ìÝóá óôçí particularly to the matter of the Pregnant mother for the case of the anodyne
ìÞôñá ìáò êÜíïõí 9 × 4 åâäïìÜäåò ï ìÞíáò = 36 åâäïìÜäåò. Ó' áõôÝò ôéò delivery (a written permission of the doctor should be secured, that there is not
36 åâäïìÜäåò ðïõ ìáò êÜíïõí ïé 9 ðåñßðïõ ìÞíåò ôçò êýçóçò, óõíôåëåßôáé any organic problem rendering impossible the practice of Yoga (or any other
ìéá ðñïïäåõôéêÞ ìåôáëëáãÞ ðïõ èá êáôáëÞîåé óôçí ïëïêëÞñùóç ìéáò áí- problem that needs a particular approaching way on the part of the exercis-
èñþðéíçò æùÞò. es). The aim of these exercises in to make the womb to take such a position
ÁõôÜ ðåñßðïõ ôá óôÜäéá áêïëïõèåß ðéóôÜ ç Ãéüãêá, þóôå íá äþóåé ôïí öõ- in the woman's pelvis, that the laying down of the baby can be normally and
óéêü ñõèìü, ôïí áñ÷éêü, ìáæß ìå ôçí äõíáìéêÞ åíÝñãåéá ðïõ Ýðáéñíå ôï Ýì- without any harm (exercise with Kriya Yoga from the 1st until the 6th month,
âñõï êáôÜ ôç öõóéêÞ ôïõ äéÜðëáóç ìÝóá óôçí ìÞôñá, óôï ôåëåéüôåñï åñãáóôÞ- then the exercise is continued only by rhythmic breaths).
ñéï ôçò öýóçò, õðü ôçí åðßâëåøç ôïõ ÐëÜóôç, ôïõ ßäéïõ ôïõ Èåïý. Also, every right and not false asana represents a period and a parallel po-
â) Ïé áóêÞóåéò ôçò Ãéüãêá âïçèïýí óôçí ñýèìéóç ôçò ìçíéáßáò Ýììçíçò ñÞ- sition of the embryo (baby), in the mother's womb, durint the gestation. Nine
óçò ôçò ãõíáßêáò êáé óôçí åîéóïññüðçóç ôùí ïñìïíéêþí åêêñßóåùí. months in the womb make 9 X 4 weeks in month = 36 weeks. In these 36
ã) Ìå ôéò çèéêïðëáóôéêÝò áóêÞóåéò (óõãêÝíôñùóç êáé óýãêñéóç, Êñßãéá Ãéü- weeks that the about nine months of the destation make, a progressive change
ãêá) âåëôéþíïõìå ôïí ÷áñáêôÞñá ìáò, êáôáðïëåìïýìå êáêÝò óõíÞèåéåò, å- is effected that will end in the completion of a human life.
îáëåßöïõìå Ýììïíåò éäÝåò êáé öïâßåò. Yoga follows faithfully these stages about, to give the psysical, the original
ä) Ìå ôéò óùìáôéêÝò áóêÞóåéò èåñáðåýïõìå ðÜó÷ïíôá óçìåßá ôïõ ïñãáíé- rhythm, together with the dynamic energy that the embryo was taking during
óìïý, âÜóåé ôùí êáôÜëëçëùí óôÜóåùí ðïõ áéìáôþíïõí êáé åíåñãïðïéïýí óõ- the physical formation in the womb, whixh is the perfect laboratory of nature,
ãêåêñéìÝíá ìÝñç - ìÝëç ôïõ óþìáôüò ìáò. under the surveyance of Creator, of God Himself.

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 22 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

 å) Ìå ôéò ñõèìéêÝò áíáðíïÝò áíáæùïãïíïýìå êáé åíåñãïðïéïýìå ôïí ïñ-
ãáíéóìü.
óô) Ìå ôçí ÷áëÜñùóç áðïôïîéíþíïõìå êáé áíáíåþíïõìå ôï óþìá êáé ôï
Íïõ ìáò.
æ) Ìå ôçí óõãêÝíôñùóç (áõôïóõãêÝíôñùóç) ìáèáßíïõìå íá åëÝã÷ïõìå ôéò
íïçôéêÝò äéåñãáóßåò êáé íá áíáêüðôïõìå ôéò áêáôÜó÷åôåò êáé åíï÷ëçôéêÝò óêÝ-
øåéò.
ç) Ìå ôïí äéáëïãéóìü áñ÷ßæïõìå íá áíáãíùñßæïõìå êáé íá åìâáèýíïõìå
óôçí åóùôåñéêÞ ïõóßá - áéôßá ôïõ êÜèå öáéíïìÝíïõ - áíôéêåéìÝíïõ - ãåãïíü-
ôïò.
è) Ìå ôçí áõôïãíùóßá áíôéëáìâáíüìáóôå ôá âáèýôåñá óôñþìáôá ôïõ åáõ-
ôïý ìáò, ðïõ ðáñáìÝíïõí óå ëáíèÜíïõóá êáôÜóôáóç (áóõíåéäçôïðïßçôá) êáé
ðñïóðáèïýìå íá ôá ìåôá÷åéñéóôïýìå.
Åõ÷Þò Ýñãï èá Þôáí íá åíóùìáôþíïíôáí êáé óôçí ÅëëÜäá ç äéäáóêáëßá é-
äßùò ôçò ×Üèá, ôçò Êñßãéá êáé ôçò ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá óå Ðáíåðéóôçìéáêü åðßðåäï
(Ó÷ïëÞ ÔÅÖÁÁ, ÉáôñéêÞ Ó÷ïëÞ, ðáñáúáôñéêÜ åðáããÝëìáôá ê.ë.ð.), þóôå íá
âãáßíïõí Üíèñùðïé óùóôüôåñá êáôáñôéóìÝíïé ðïõ èá ðñïóáíáôïëßæïõí ìå ôçí
óåéñÜ ôïõò ïñèüôåñá ôïí êÜèå óõíÜíèñùðï ãéá ôï èÝìá êáôáñ÷Üò ôçò ðñü-
ëçøçò ôçò õãåßáò ôïõ êáé óôçí áíÜãêç êáé ôçò åîÜíôëçóçò ôùí ðñïóùðéêþí
äõíáôïôÞôùí ôïõ ãéá èåñáðåßá, êáé ôÝëïò ùò Ýíá âáèìü êáé ôçò áõôïãíùóßáò
ôïõ... ðñÜãìá áêüìá ðéï óçìáíôéêü êáé êáèüëá áðáñáßôçôï ãéá üëïõò ìáò...
Áêüìá åßìáóôå áíïé÷ôïß óå êÜèå ðñüôáóç áðü ìÝñïõò åéäéêþí åðéóôçìü-
íùí (ãéáôñþí, ðáéäáãùãþí ê.ë.ð.) ãéá íá åðéäåßîïõìå Þ êáé íá åêìÜèïõìå ìå-
ñéêÝò áðü ôéò óôïé÷åéþäåéò áñ÷Ýò êáé áóêÞóåéò ôçò Ãéüãêá (óùìáôéêÝò êáé íï-
çôéêÝò áóêÞóåéò) ðïõ åßíáé äõíáôüí íá åöáñìïóôïýí óõìðëçñùìáôéêÜ êáé å-
ðéêïõñéêÜ ôçò üðïéáò Üëëçò éáôñéêÞò áãùãÞò óå ÷þñïõò åðéóôçìïíéêïýò, íï-
óçëåõôéêïýò (íïóïêïìåßá óå áóèåíåßò, ðáíåðéóôçìéáêÝò ó÷ïëÝò ê.ë.ð.) êÜôù
áðü ôçí åðßâëåøç ôùí õðåõèýíùí éáôñþí Þ êáèçãçôþí þóôå íá êáôáäåé÷ôåß
Ýìðñáêôá ï âáèìüò áðïôåëåóìáôéêüôçôáò êáé ÷ñçóéìüôçôáò ôçò Ãéüãêá.
ÂÉÂËÉÏÃÑÁÖÉÁ:
1) Ôï­Ìõ­óôé­êü­ôçò­×Ü­èá­Ãéü­ãêá,­Íé­êï­ëÜ­ïõ­Á.­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ
2) Ðñá­êôé­êÞ­ÌÝ­èï­äïò­Óù­ìá­ôï­øõ­÷é­êÞò­Èåñ­ðá­åõ­ôé­êÞò,­Êñß­ãéá­Ãéü­ãêá,­Í.­Á.­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
3) ÑÜ­ôæá­Ãéü­ãêá,­ôïõ­Í.­Á.­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
4) Äñá­âß­äåò­ïé­Ðñü­ãï­íïé­ôùí­Åë­ëÞ­íùí,­Í.­Á.­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
5) Óôéò­ÌÝ­ñåò­ôïõ­ìå­ãÜ­ëïõ­Âá­óé­ëéÜ­ôçò­ÊñÞ­ôçò­Ìß­íù­á,­Í.­Á.­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
6) Äß­ôï­ìç­Ìå­ôá­öõ­óé­êÞ­Å­ãêõ­êëï­ðáß­äåéá,­Í.­Á.­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
7) ÊÜñ­ìá.­Ï­Íü­ìïò­ôçò­Á­íôá­ðï­äï­ôé­êÞò­Äé­êáéï­óý­íçò,­Í.­Á.­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
8) Ìå­ôåí­óÜñ­êù­óç.
9) Ôñéó­äéÜ­óôá­ôïò­êáé­Ôå­ôñá­äéÜ­óôá­ôïò­Êü­óìïò.
10) Ìõ­óôé­êé­óìüò.­×ñé­óôï­êå­íôñé­êüò­êáé­×ñé­óôï­êñá­ôé­êüò­Ìõ­óôé­êé­óìüò,­Í.­Á.­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
11) Ç­Èå­ïõñ­ãß­á­Äé­äÜ­óêåé­ôïí­áéþ­íéï­äñü­ìï­ôçò­øõ­÷Þò.
12) Ìõ­óôé­êÞ­Äé­äá­óêá­ëß­á­Ã´­Ôü­ìïò,­Í.­Á.­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
13) Ôá­Å­ëåõ­óß­íéá­Ìõ­óôÞ­ñéá.
14) Ðõ­èá­ãü­ñåéá­Á­ñéè­ìï­óï­öß­á.
15) Á­ðï­óõì­âï­ëé­óìüò­ôçò­Åë­ëç­íé­êÞò­Ìõ­èï­ëï­ãß­áò.
16) Á­íá­óôå­íÜ­ñéá­êáé­Á­íá­óôå­íÜ­ñç­äåò.­Îõ­ðü­ëç­ôïé­÷ï­ñåý­ïõí­ðÜ­íù­óôçí­öù­ôéÜ.
17) Ìå­ôá­öõ­óé­êü­Ðå­ñéï­äé­êü­"Ï­ìá­êï­åß­ï"­49­ôåý­÷ç,­Í.­Á.­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
18) ÊëÜ­äïé­Óðïõ­äþí­äé'­áë­ëç­ëï­ãñá­öß­áò­á)­Äéá­ëï­ãé­óìüò­â)­Å­óù­ôå­ñé­êÞ­Èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôé­êÞ,­
Í.­Á.­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ­êáé­ã)­Õ­ðíù­ôé­óìüò­-­Ïñ­èï­øõ­÷é­óìüò.
19) ×åé­ñï­ðëá­óôé­êÞ­Èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôé­êÞ­ÓéÜ­ôóïõ­(ôñåéò­ôü­ìïé).
20) Øõ­÷ï­èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôé­êÞ.
21) Á­ðü­ôï­óôü­ìá­ôïõ­Äá­óêÜ­ëïõ­óôï­áõ­ôß­ôïõ­ìá­èç­ôÞ,­ìå­å­ìðå­ñé­óôá­ôù­ìÝ­íï­öé­ëï­óï­öé­êü­
ëå­îé­êü­Óáí­óêñé­ôé­êÞò­(400­ëÝ­îå­ùí)­ãéá­ôïõò­óðïõ­äá­óôÝò­ôçò­Ãéü­ãêá,­Ç­ëß­á­Ë.­Êá­ôóéÜ­ìðá.
22) Ðëç­ñÝ­óôá­ôï­êáé­á­íá­ëõ­ôé­êü­ôá­ôï­Ëå­îé­êü­-­Ï­äç­ãüò­Ìå­ôá­öõ­óé­êþí­Åí­íïéþí­(õ­ðü­Ýê­äï­óç),­
Ç­ëß­á­Ë.­Êá­ôóéÜ­ìðá.
23) Ôá­Óõ­óôÞ­ìá­ôá­ôçò­Å­óù­ôå­ñé­êÞò­Èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôé­êÞò­(õ­ðü­Ýê­äï­óç),­Ç­ëß­á­Ë.­Êá­ôóéÜ­ìðá.
24) Å­íç­ìå­ñù­ôé­êü­Ý­íôõ­ðï­"Óá­ôõá­íÜ­íôáó­ñáì",­Óá­ôõá­íÜ­íôá­Áó­ñÜì­Åë­ëÜ­äïò.
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
b) It helps in the regulation of the woman's menses.
c) By the ethicoplastic exercises (concentration and comparison, Kriya Yo-
ga), we improve our character, we fight against the wrong habits, we efface
the obsessions and the phobias.
d) By the bodily exercises we cure the suffering parts of the organism, in the
basis of the proper poses that bleed and activate certain parts of our body.
e) By the rhythmical breaths we revive and activate the organism.
f) By relaxation we detoxicate and revive our body and our Mind.
g) By the concentration (self-concentration) we learn how to control the in-
tellectual workings through and how to stop the uncontrollable and annoying
thoughts.
h) By meditation we start recognizing and penetrating the internal substance
- cause of every phenomenon-object-fact.
i) by self-knowledge we realize the deeper layers of ourself that remain in a
letent situation (unconscious) and we try to use them.
It would be a wishful thinking that the teaching mainly of Hatha, of Kriya
and of Raja Yoga, were incorporated also in Greece, at a University level
(TEFAA School, Medical School, paramedical professions, etc.), so that some
people right constituted come out who will orientate on their turn, more cor-
rect every fellowman about the matter, first of the prevention of his health and
if necessity, of his personal abilities for a remedy, and finally, at an extent, of
his self-knowledge… which is even more important and quiet necessary for
all of us…
Also, we are open to every proposition on the part of the special scientists
(doctors, profesors etc.), in order to show or also to learn some of the ele-
mentary principles and exercises of Yoga (bodily and noetic exercises) that may
be applied complementarily and additionally to any other medical treatment,
in the scientific, hospital places (hospitals, university schools, etc.), under the
supervision of the responsible physicians or profesors, so that the degree of the
effectivenes and of the utility of Yoga may be proved.
BIBLIOGRAPHY:
1) The­Secrets­of­Hatha­Yoga,­by­Nikolaos­A.­Margioris.
2) Practical­Method­of­Somatopscychical­Therapeutics,­Kriya­Yoga,­by­N.­A.­Margioris.
3) Raja­Yoga,­by­N.­A.­Margioris.
4) Dravidians,­the­Ancestors­of­the­Greeks,­by­N.­A.­Margioris.
5) In­the­Times­of­Minos,­the­great­King­of­Crete,­by­N.­A.­Margioris.
6) A­Metaphysical­Encyclopaedia­of­Two­volumes,­by­N.­A.­Margioris.
7) Karma.­The­Law­of­the­Retributive­Justice,­by­N.­A.­Margioris.
8) Reincarnation.
9) Three-dimensional­and­Four-dimensional­Word.
10) Mysticism,­Christocentric­and­Christocratic­Mysticism,­by­N.­A.­Margioris.
11) The­Theurgy­Teaches­the­eternal­way­of­the­soul.
12) Mystic­Teaching,­C'­Volume,­by­N.­A.­Margioris.
13) The­Elefsinian­Mysteries.
14) Pythagorean­Arithmosophy.
15) Desymbolism­of­the­Greek­Mythology.
16) Anastenaria­and­Anastenarides.­Barefoot­they­dance­on­the­fire.
17) Metaphysical­Magazine­"Omakoio",­49­issues,­by­N.­A.­Margioris.
18) Branches­of­Correspondence­Course,­a)­Meditation,­b)­Esoteric­Therapeutics,­
by­N.­A.­Margioris­and­c)­Hypnotism-Orthopsychism.
19) Chiroplastic­Therapeutics­Siatsu­(three­volumes).
20) Psychotherapeutics.
21) From­the­Master's­mouth­to­the­student's­ear,­with­a­thorough­philosophical­
dictionary­of­Sanscrit­(400­words),­for­the­students­of­Yoga,­by­Ilias­L.­Katsiampas.
22) A­full­and­analytical­Dictionary-Guide­of­Metaphysical­Meanings­(to­be­published),­
by­Ilias­l.­Katsiampas.
23) The­Systems­of­the­Esoteric­Therapeutics­(to­be­published),­by­Ilias­L.­Katsiampas.
24) An­informative­printed­matter­"Satyanantasram",­Satyananda,­Astram­of­Greece.
23 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
Ï Åóùôåñéóìüò ãéá ¼ëïõò - The Esoterism for Everybody
ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
(1913-1993)
Ðáñïõóßáóç
ôïõ ðñïóþðïõ
êáé ôïõ Ýñãïõ ôïõ
ÁÐÏ­ÔÏÍ­ÌÁÈÇÔÇ­ÔÏÕ­ÇËÉÁ­Ë.­ÊÁÔÓÉÁÌÐÁ
(ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÁ­ÔÑÉÊÁËÙÍ­&­ÈÅÓÓÁËÏÍÉÊÇÓ)
ÊÅÖÁËËÇÍÉÁÓ­21­42100­ÔÑÉÊÁËÁ­-­ÅËËÁÄÁ
ÔÇË.­&­ÖÁÎ:­0431­-­75505­Þ­031­-­410497­Þ­093­-­2418994
Web­Site:­http://www.omakoio.gr
E-maile:­omakoio@omakoio.gr­&­omakoio@aias.gr
¼ëá üóá áêïëïõèïýí ðáñáêÜôù áðïôåëïýí ôá êõñéüôåñá ìÝ-
ñç áðü ôï ôåñÜóôéï, áìéãÝò, áõôïãåíÝò êáé ðïëõäéÜóôáôï åêëáú-
êåõìÝíï Ýñãï ôïõ ¸ëëçíá ìåôáöõóéêïý - âéùìáôéêïý ÄáóêÜëïõ,
ðáãêïóìßïõ êýñïõò êáé áêôéíïâïëßáò, ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ.
Äßäáîå áäéáëåßðôùò åðß ìßá 35åôßá, áðü ôï 1958 ðïõ Þñèå óôçí
ÅëëÜäá Ýùò êáé ôï 1993 ðïõ ìåôÝóôç, êáèþò åðßóçò êáé óôçí Áß-
ãõðôï êáé Éíäßá ðñïôïý åðéóôñÝøåé óôçí ÅëëÜäá.
Ðåñéóóüôåñåò ðëçñïöïñßåò ãéá ôï ðñüóùðï êáé ôï Ýñãï ôïõ
èá âñåßôå óôá Áöéåñþìáôá ðïõ áêïëïõèïýí.
ÌåôáöõóéêÞ Þ Åóùôåñéóìüò
(Áðïêñõöïëïãßá êáé Ìõóôéêéóìüò)
ÐåñéëçðôéêÜ ðåñéëáìâÜíïíôáé ìå ëåðôïìÝñåéá óôá ÅËËÇÍÉÊÁ
êáé óôá ÁÃÃËÉÊÁ ôá êÜôùèé èÝìáôá ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý:
Óôçí ðáñáêÜôù ðñþôç ãåíéêÞ ðáñïõóßáóç ôïõ ðñïóþðïõ êáé
ôïõ Ýñãïõ ôïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ ðåñéÝ÷ïíôáé ôá åîÞò:
´Ïëá ôá åßäç ôçò Ãéüãêá, Áõôïãíùóßá, Äéáëïãéóìüò, Åóùôåñé-
êÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ, ÅóùôåñéêÞ Ìýçóç, ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá, Õ-
ðíùôéóìüò - Ïñèïøõ÷éóìüò, Åðéóôçìïíéêüò Ðíåõìáôéóìüò, Á-
óôñïëïãßá - Áóôñïóïößá, Áðïóõìâïëéóìüò ê.ë.ð., ó÷åôéêÜ âéâëß-
á, Áöéåñþìáôá ôïõ ìåôáöõóéêïý óõããñáöÝá ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. Ìáñ-
ãéùñÞ, Óôáãüíåò Óïößáò áðü ôï Ýñãï ôïõ, Ó÷ïëÝò Ãéüãêá - Åóù-
ôåñéóìïý êáé ÅóùôåñéêÞò ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò ðïõ ëåéôïõñãïýí óôçí
ÅëëÜäá áðü ìáèçôÝò ôïõ, âéâëßá ôïõ ìáèçôÞ ôïõ Çëßá ÊáôóéÜ-
ìðá, öùôïãñáöéêü õëéêü ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. Ìáñãéù-
ñÞ, ðïõ õðïãñáììßæïõí Ýìðñáêôá ôï ôéôÜíéï Ýñãï ôïõ êáé äõíá-
ôüôçôá ôïõ ïðïéïõäÞðïôå åíäéáöåñüìåíïõ íá Ýñèåé óå åðáöÞ
ìáæß ìáò ãéá íá åíçìåñùèåß ãéá ôï üðïéï åðéìÝñïõò èÝìá ôïí åí-
äéáöÝñåé Þ ãéá íá ìáò åðéóçìÜíåé ü,ôé èåùñåß áðáñáßôçôï.
Óå ðåñßðôùóç ðïõ êÜðïéïò åíäéáöÝñåôáé ãéá ôçí Ýêäïóç êáé
äéáêßíçóç ôùí ðáñáðÜíù âéâëßùí óôá ÁããëéêÜ Þ óå üðïéá Üëëç
ãëþóóá, ðáñáêáëåßôáé íá åðéêïéíùíÞóåé ìå ôïí ìáèçôÞ ôïõ óõã-
ãñáöÝá, Çëßá Ë. ÊáôóéÜìðá, óôçí äéåýèõíóç ðïõ áíáãñÜöåôáé
óôçí êïñõöÞ ôçò óåëßäáò, þóôå íá ôïí öÝñåé óå åðáöÞ ìå ôïõò
êëçñïíüìïõò ôïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ ÌáñãéùñÞ.
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
(1913-1993)
His personality
and his work
presentation
BY­HIS­STUDENT­ILIAS­L.­KATSIAMPAS
(OMAKOEIA­OF­TRIKALA­&­THESSALONIKI)
21,­KEFALLINIAS­STREET,­42100­TRIKALA­-­GREECE
TELEPHONE­AND­FAX­No.­0431­-­75505­or­093­-­2418994
Web­Site:­http://www.omakoio.gr­­
E-maile:­omakoio@omakoio.gr­&­omakoio@aias.gr
All what follows constitutes Nikolaos A. Margiori's main part of
the immense, pure, self-born and multidimensional popularized
work. Nikolaos A. Margioris was the Greek metaphysical-experi-
encing Master of an international authority and radiation. He taught
unceasingly, for 35 years, from 1958 when he came to Greece un-
til 1993, when he died, as well as in Egypt and in India, before he
came back to Greece.
You will find more details about his personality and his work in
the Dedications that follow.
Metaphysics or Esoterism
(Occultism and Mysticism)
In summary, the following matters of the Esoterism are com-
prised in detail in GREEK and in ENGLISH:
In the following first general presentation of Nikolaos A.
Margiori's personality and work, are contained:
All the kinds of Yoga, Self-knowledge, Meditation, Esoteric
Therapeutics, Esoteric Initiation, Esoteric Philosophy, Hyp-
notism - Orthopsychism, Scientific Spiritualism, Astrology -
Astrosophy, Desymbolism, etc., relevant books, Metaphysical
writer Nikolaos A. Margiori's dedications, Wisdom Drops, from
his work, Schools of Yoga-Esoterism, and of Esoteric Thera-
peutics that function in Greece by his students, his student Il-
ias Katsiampa"s books, a photographic material of Master
Nikolaos A. Margioris, thousands of tapes that underline ac-
tually his titanic work and the possibility for everyone con-
cerned to come in touch with us, in order to be informed about
whatever distributed subject he is interested in or to .indicate
us what he considers necessary.
In case that somebody is interested in the publication and
in the trading of the above books in English or in any other
language, he is requested to contact the writer's student, Ilias
L. Katsiampas, to the address mentioned on the tiop of the
page, so that he can bring him in touch with Nikolaos Mar-
giori's heirs.
24 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÁ ÔÑÉÊÁËÙÍ ÊÁÉ ÈÅÓÓÁËÏÍÉÊÇÓ
ÇËÉÁÓ Ë. ÊÁÔÓÉÁÌÐÁÓ
ÌÅÔÁÖÕÓÉÊÅÓ­ÅÑÅÕÍÅÓ­ÃÉÏÃÊÁ­&­ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ­•­ÅÊÄÏÓÅÉÓ­-­ÐÙËÇÓÅÉÓ­ÂÉÂËÉÙÍ­&­ÐÅÑÉÏÄÉÊÙÍ
ÊÅÖÁËËÇÍÉÁÓ­21,­42100­ÔÑÉÊÁËÁ­Á.Ö.Ì.:­045357881­•­ÔÇË.­&­FAX:­0431-75505­Þ­093­-­2418994,­
Web­Site:­http://www.omakoio.gr­E-mail:­omakoio@omakoio.gr­&­omakoio@aias.gr
ÔÉÌÏÊÁÔÁËÏÃÏÓ ÂÉÂËÉÙÍ
ÔÏÕ ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÕ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇ (ÊËÇÑÏÍÏÌÏÉ)
-­ÉÓ×ÕÅÉ­ÁÐÏ­ÓÅÐÔÅÌÂÑÉÏ­1998­-
(ðáñáêáëïýìå íá åíçìåñþíåóôå ãéá ôõ÷üí áíáðñïóáñìïãÝò ôùí ôéìþí)
1. ÐáôÜðéïò ï ôáðåéíüò ï åî Áéãýðôïõ Öéëüóïöïò êáé ´Ïóéïò, 1ç Ýêäïóç
1970 (óåë.156), 2ç Ýêäïóç 1987 ìå óõìðëçñùìáôéêÞ êáé åðåîçãçìáôéêÞ
ýëç (óåë. 220), äéÜóôáóç 21×14. 2500 äñá÷ìÝò (7.336 Åõñþ).
2. Öùò óôï Óêüôïò, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1975 (óåë. 300), 2ç Ýêä. 1987 ìå
óõìðëçñùìáôéêÞ êáé åðåîçãçìáôéêÞ ýëç (óåë. 429), äéÜóô. 24×17.
5000 äñá÷ìÝò (14.673 Åõñþ).
3. Ç Èåïõñãßá ÄéäÜóêåé ôïí áéþíéï äñüìï ôçò øõ÷Þò, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1975 (óåë.
318), 2ç Ýêäïóç 1987 ìå óõìðëçñùìáôéêÞ êáé åðåîçãçìáôéêÞ ýëç (óåë.
408), äéÜóôáóç 24×17. 4500 äñá÷ìÝò (13.206 Åõñþ).
4. Ç ¢ëëç ´Ïøç ôïõ Äüãìáôïò ôïõ ´Åñé÷ Öïí Íôáßíéêåí, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1976
(óåë. 318), 2ç Ýêäïóç 1994 (óåë. 372) ISBN: 960-7484-00-2), äéÜóôáóç
24×17. 4500äñá÷ìÝò (13.206 Åõñþ).
5. Ôï Ìõóôéêü ôçò ×Üèá Ãéüãêá, 1ç Ýê.. 1976 (óåë. 111), äéÜóô. 24×17, 2ç
Ýê. 1997 (óåë. 155), ISBN: 960-7484-04-5. 2500 äñ÷ (7.336 Åõñþ).
6. Ç Ðõèáãüñåéá Áñéèìïóïößá, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1977 (óåë. 168), 2ç Ýêäïóç
1987 ìå óõìðëçñùìáôéêÞ êáé åðåîçãçìáôéêÞ ýëç (óåë. 271), 3ç Ýêäïóç
1993 (óåë. 276), äéÜóôáóç 24×17, ISBN: 960-7152-06-09. 4000 äñá÷ìÝò
(11.738 Åõñþ).
7. Ôá Åëåõóßíéá ÌõóôÞñéá, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1978 (óåë. 99), 2ç Ýêäïóç 1987 ìå
óõìðëçñùìáôéêÞ êáé åðåîçãçìáôéêÞ ýëç (óåë. 159), 3ç Ýêäïóç 1993
(óåë. 178), äéÜóôáóç 24×17, ISBN: 960-7152-11-5. 3000 äñá÷ìÝò (8.804
Åõñþ).
8. Ç Ôåëåõôáßá ÌÝñá ôïõ ÓùêñÜôç, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1978 (óåë. 111), 2ç Ýêäïóç
1988 ìå óõìðëçñùìáôéêÞ êáé åðåîçãçìáôéêÞ ýëç (óåë. 152), äéÜóôáóç
24×17. 2500 äñá÷ìÝò (7.336).
9. Ïé Öáñáþ Áêåíáôüí êáé Ôïõôáã÷áìþí, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1978 (óåë. 151), 2ç
Ýêäïóç 1991 ìå óõìðëçñùìáôéêÞ êáé åðåîçãçìáôéêÞ ýëç (óåë. 311),
äéÜóôáóç 24×17, ISBN: 960-7152-00-X. 4500 äñá÷ìÝò (13.206 Åõñþ).
10. ÃÝíåóç êáé ÈÜíáôïò ôùí Êüóìùí, ´Õëç - Áíôéàëç - Õðåñýëç, Óýìðáí -
Áíôéóýìðáí - Õðåñóýìðáí, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1979 (óåë. 195), 2ç Ýêäïóç 1990
ìå óõìðëçñùìáôéêÞ êáé åðåîçãçìáôéêÞ ýëç (óåë. 323), äéÜóôáóç 24×17,
ISBN: 960-85024-5-4. 4500 äñ÷. (13.206 Åõñþ).
11. Äñáâßäåò óôçí ÁããëéêÞ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1979 (óåë. 45), äéÜóôáóç 28×21.
1500 äñá÷ìÝò (4.402 Åõñþ).
12. Óôéò ÌÝñåò ôïõ ÌåãÜëïõ ÂáóéëéÜ ôçò ÊñÞôçò Ìßíùá, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1979
(óåë.88), ´ Ýêä. 1997 (óåë. 105), ISBN:960-7484-06-1. 2000 äñá÷ìÝò
(5.869 Åõñþ).
13. Äñáâßäåò ïé Ðñüãïíïé ôùí ÅëëÞíùí, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1979 (óåë. 88), 2ç
Ýêäïóç 1989 ìå óõìðëçñùìáôéêÞ êáé åðåîçãçìáôéêÞ ýëç (óåë. 143), 3ç
Ýêäïóç 1996 (óåë. 167), äéÜóôáóç 24×17. 3000 äñá÷ìÝò (8.804 Åõñþ).
14. ËåõêÞ Ìáãåßá, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1979 (óåë. 134), 2ç Ýêäïóç 1992 ìå
óõìðëçñùìáôéêÞ êáé åðåîçãçìáôéêÞ ýëç (óåë. 227), äéÜóôáóç 24×17,
ISBN: 960-7152-03-4. 3500 äñá÷ìÝò (10.271 Åõñþ).
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 25
15. ÁíáóôåíÜñéá êáé ÁíáóôåíÜñçäåò, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1980 (óåë. 95), äéÜóôáóç
24×17. 1500 äñá÷ìÝò (4.402 Åõñþ).
16. ÌåôáèáíÜôéá ÆùÞ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1982 (óåë. 256), 2ç Ýêäïóç 1993 ìå
óõìðëçñùìáôéêÞ êáé åðåîçãçìáôéêÞ ýëç (óåë. 262), äéÜóôáóç 24×17,
ISBN: 960-7152-09-3. 4000 äñá÷ìÝò 11.738 Åõñþ).
17. ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1983 (óåë. 208), äéÜóôáóç 24×17. 3500
äñá÷ìÝò (10.271 Åõñþ).
18. Äßôïìç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ Åãêõêëïðáßäåéá, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1985/86 (Á´ Ôüì. óåë.
443, ´ Ôüì. óåë. 752), äéÜóô. 28×21. 24000 äñ÷. (70.432 Åõñþ).
19. Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá. ÐñáêôéêÞ ÌÝèïäïò Óùìáôïøõ÷éêÞò ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò, 1ç Ýêä.
1988 (óåë. 357), äéÜóô. 28×21. 7000 äñ÷. (20.542 Åõñþ).
20. Áðïóõìâïëéóìüò ÅëëçíéêÞò Ìõèïëïãßáò, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1988 (óåë. 521),
äéÜóôáóç 24×17. 7500 äñá÷ìÝò (22.010 Åõñþ).
21. ÔñéóäéÜóôáôïò êáé ÔåôñáäéÜóôáôïò Êüóìïò, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1989 (óåë. 214)
äéÜóô. 24×17, ISBN: 960-85024-3-8. 3000 äñ÷. (8.804 Åõñþ).
22. ÌõóôéêÞ Äéäáóêáëßá Á´ Ôüìïò, 1ç Ýêä. 1991 (óåë. 346), äéÜóô. 28×21,
ISBN: 960-85024-1-1 SET 960-85024-7-0. 7000 äñ÷. (20.542 Åõñþ).
23. ÊÜñìá. Ï Íüìïò ôçò ÁíôáðïäïôéêÞò Äéêáéïóýíçò, 1ç Ýêä. 1989 (óåë.
373), 24×17, ISBN: 960-85024-0-3. 5000 äñ÷. (14.673 Åõñþ).
24. ÌåôåíóÜñêùóç, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1990 (óåë. 286), äéÜóôáóç 24×17, ISBN: 960-
85024-4-6. 4000 äñá÷ìÝò (11.738 Åõñþ).
25. ×åéñïðëáóôéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ Á´ Ôüìïò, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1990 (óåë.
533), 24×17, ISBN: 960-85024-6-2. 7000 äñ÷. (20.542 Åõñþ).
26. Øõ÷ïèåñáðåõôéêÞ äß÷ùò öÜñìáêá, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1991 (óåë. 325), äéÜóôáóç
24×17, ISBN: 960-85024-8-9. 2500 äñ÷. (7.336 Åõñþ).
27. Ìõóôéêéóìüò. ×ñéóôïêåíôñéêüò êáé ×ñéóôïêñáôéêüò Ìõóôéêéóìüò, 1ç
Ýêäïóç 1991 (óåë. 331), äéÜóô. 24×17, ISBN: 960-85024-9-7.
4500 äñá÷ìÝò (13.206 Åõñþ).
28. Áðïêñõöïëïãßá Á´ Ôüìïò, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1991 (óåë. 391), äéÜóôáóç 24×17,
ISBN: 960-7152-01-8, 960-7152-02-6. 5500 äñ÷. (16.140 Åõñþ).
29. Áðïêñõöïëïãßá ´ Ôüìïò, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1992 (óåë. 428), äéÜóô. 24×17,
ISBN: 960-7152-01-8, T.2. 960-7152-04-2. 6000 äñ÷. (17.608 Åõñþ).
30. ×åéñïðëáóôéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ Â´ Ôüìïò, 1ç Ýêä. 1993 (óåë.
395), äéÜóô. 24×17. ISBN: SET 960-7152-07-7, 960-7152-08-5.
5500 äñá÷ìÝò (16.140 Åõñþ).
31. ÌõóôéêÞ Äéäáóêáëßá ´ Ôüìïò, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1993 (óåë. 388), 28×21, IS-
BN: SET 960-85024-7-0, 960-7152-05-0. 7000 äñ÷. (20.542 Åõñþ).
32. ÌõóôéêÞ Äéäáóêáëßá ô Ôüìïò, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1994 (óåë. 379), 28×21, IS-
BN: SET 960-85024-7-0, 960-7152-10-7. 7000 äñ÷. (20.542 Åõñþ).
33. ×åéñïðëáóôéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ Ã´ Ôüìïò, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1996 (óåë.
255), äéÜóôáóç 24×17. 4000 äñ÷. (11.738 Åõñþ).
34. Áðïêñõöïëïãßá ô Ôüìïò, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1997 (óåë. 103), ISBN: 960-7484-
05-3. 2000 äñá÷ìÝò (5.869 Åõñþ).
ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 ÂÉÂËÉÁ ÇËÉÁ Ë. ÊÁÔÓÉÁÌÐÁ (ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÁ ÔÑÉÊÁËÙÍ
ÊÁÉ ÈÅÓ/ÍÉÊÇÓ) ÌÁÈÇÔÇ ÔÏÕ Í. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇ
1) Áðü ôï Óôüìá ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ óôï áõôß ôïõ ìáèçôÞ, ìå åìðåñéóôáôùìÝíï
ãëùóóÜñéï ÓáíóêñéôéêÞò (öéëïóïöéêü ëåîéêü, 400 ëÝîåéò) ãéá ôïõò
óðïõäáóôÝò ôçò Ãéüãêá, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1995 (óåë. 270), äéÜóôáóç 24×17,
ISBN: 960-85735-0-5. ÕðÜñ÷åé óôá ÅëëçíéêÜ êáé óôá ÁããëéêÜ. 3000 &
5000 äñá÷ìÝò áíôßóôïé÷á Þ 8.804 Åõñþ êáé 14.673 Åõñþ áíôßóôïé÷á.
2) Ç ÁðïêÜëõøç ôïõ ÉùÜííç ÅîçãçìÝíç áðü ôïí ÄÜóêáëï Íéêüëáï Á.
ÌáñãéùñÞ (Äßãëùóóç ÅëëçíïáããëéêÞ Ýêäïóç). Õðü ôçí åðéìÝëåéá êáé
ôïõò åêôåíåßò áíáëõôéêïýò ó÷ïëéáóìïýò ôïõ ìáèçôÞ ôïõ Çëßá ÊáôóéÜìðá,
1ç Ýêäïóç 1999, ISBN: 960-85735-1-3. 3000 äñ÷. (8.804 Åõñþ).
3) Äéáëïãéóìüò êáé Ìõóôéêéóìüò, ÑÜôæá êáé Êïõíôáëßíç Ãéüãêá (Èåùñßá &
ÐñÜîç), õðü Ýêäïóç.
4) Ôá ÓõóôÞìáôá ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò, õðü Ýêäïóç.
5) ÐëçñÝóôáôï êáé áíáëõôéêüôáôï Ëåîéêü - Ïäçãüò Ìåôáöõóéêþí Åííïéþí,
õðü Ýêäïóç.
6) Åã÷åéñßäéï - Ïäçãüò ãéá õðïøÞöéïõò ÅêðáéäåõôÝò ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý, õðü
Ýêäïóç.
ÈÅÑÌÏÊÏËËÇÌÅÍÅÓ ÌÅËÅÔÅÓ Í. Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇ
1. Ó×ÏËÇ ÁÓÊËÇÐÉÙÍ - ÕÐÍÏÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÙÍ, åðáíÝêäïóç 1994 (óåë.
15), äéÜóôáóç 30×21. 1000 äñ÷. (2.934 Åõñþ).
2. ÓÁÑË ÖÏÍ ÑÁÚ×ÅÌÐÁ×, åðáíÝêäïóç 1987 (óåë. 20), äéÜóôáóç 30×21.
1200 äñ÷. (3.521 Åõñþ).
3. Ó×ÏËÇ ÁÓÊËÇÐÉÙÍ - ÐÍÅÕÌÁÔÏÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÙÍ ÈÅÏÖÑÁÓÔÏÓ
ÐÁÑÁÊÅËÓÏÓ, 1987 (óåë. 20), 30×21. 1200 äñ÷. (3.521 Åõñþ).
4. ÌÁÃÍÇÔÏÈÅÑÁÐÅÉÁ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1974 (óåë. 12), äéÜóôáóç 30×21.
1000 äñá÷ìÝò (2.934 Åõñþ).
5. ÁÓÊËÇÐÉÅÉÁ ÊÁÉ ÁÌÖÉÁÑÁÅÉÁ 1ç Ýêäïóç (óåë. 15), äéÜóôáóç 30×21.
1000 äñá÷ìÝò (2.934 Åõñþ).
6. Ç ÈÅÑÁÐÅÉÁ ÔÙÍ ÐÑÏÁÉÙÍÙÍ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1974, 2ç Ýêäïóç 1994
(óåë. 32), äéÜóôáóç 30×21. 1400 äñ÷. (4.108 Åõñþ).
7. ÔÏ ÌÕÓÔÇÑÉÏ ÔÏÕ ÊÕÔÔÁÑÏÕ ÊÁÉ ÔÇÓ ÆÙÇÓ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1974, 2ç
Ýêä. 1994 (óåë. 29), äéÜóô. 30×21.1400 äñ÷. (4.108 Åõñþ).
8. ÅÊÔÏÐËÁÓÌÁ ÊÁÉ ÕËÏÐÏÉÇÓÅÉÓ ÁÓÁÑÊÙÍ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1974, 2ç
Ýêä. 1994 (óåë. 23), äéÜóô. 30×21. 1200 äñ÷. (3.521 Åõñþ).
9. ÅÓÓÁÉÏÉ, 1ç Ýêäïóç, 2ç Ýêäïóç 1994 (óåë. 28), äéÜóôáóç 30×21. 1400
äñ÷. (4.108 Åõñþ).
10. ÅÌÖÁÍÉÓÅÉÓ ÅÉÄÙËÙÍ ÆÙÍÔÙÍ ÁÍÈÑÙÐÙÍ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1974
(óåë.43), 2ç Ýêä. 1994 (óåë. 35), äéÜóô. 30×21. 1500 äñ÷. (4.402 Åõñþ).
11. ÁÍÁÓÔÅÍÁÑÉÁ, 1ç Ýêäïóç, 2ç Ýêäïóç 1994 (óåë. 19), äéÜóôáóç 30×21.
1200 äñ÷. (3.521 Åõñþ).
12. Ç ÄÇÌÉÏÕÑÃÉÁ ÔÙÍ ÊÏÓÌÙÍ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1975, 2ç Ýêäïóç 1994
(óåë. 24), äéÜóôáóç 30×21. 1400 äñ÷. (4.108 Åõñþ).
13. ÌÕÓÔÉÊÉÓÌÏÓ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1976, 2ç Ýêäïóç 1994 (óåë. 17), äéÜóôáóç
30×21. 1300 äñ÷. (3.815 Åõñþ).
14. ÄÑÁÂÉÄÅÓ ÏÉ ÐÑÏÃÏÍÏÉ ÔÙÍ ÅËËÇÍÙÍ, 1ç Ýêäïóç, 2ç Ýêäïóç
1975 (óåë. 31), äéÜóôáóç 30×21. 1400 äñ÷. (4.108 Åõñþ).
15. Ï ÅËÅÃ×ÏÓ ÔÙÍ ÄÏÍÇÓÅÙÍ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1980, 2ç Ýêäïóç 1993
(óåë. 34), äéÜóôáóç 30×21. 1500 äñ÷. (4.402 Åõñþ).
16. ÔÉ ÅÉÍÁÉ Ï ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÓÌÏÓ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1980 (óåë. 23), 2ç Ýêäïóç 1994
(óåë. 27), äéÜóôáóç 30×21. 1200 äñ÷. (3.521 Åõñþ).
17. ÉÅÑÏÓ ÊÕËÉÍÄÑÏÓ ÔÏÕ ÊÁÍÏÍÉÓÌÏÕ ÔÙÍ ÅÓÓÁÉÙÍ, 1ç Ýêäïóç
1981, 2ç Ýêäïóç 1994 (óåë. 36), 30×21. 1500 äñ÷. (4.402 Åõñþ).
18. Ï ÅÑÙÔÁÓ ÊÁÉ Ç ÁÃÁÐÇ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1982 (óåë. 22), äéÜóôáóç 30×21.
1500 äñ÷. (4.402 Åõñþ).
19. ÊÁÔÁËËÇËÇ ÄÉÁÔÑÏÖÇ ÌÅ ÁÍÁËÏÃÇ ÄÉÁÉÔÁ, ÁÄÕÍÁÔÉÓÌÁ, 1ç
Ýêä. 1984 (óåë. 101), 2ç 1994 (óåë. 93), 30×21. 2000 äñ÷. (5.869 Åõñþ).
20. Ç ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ÄÉ×ÙÓ ÖÁÑÌÁÊÁ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1987 (óåë. 93,
óåìéíÜñéï), äéÜóôáóç 30×21. 2000 äñ÷. (5.869 Åõñþ).
21. ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ÌÅ ÅÃÊÏÉÌÇÓÇ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1987 (óåë. 97, óåìéíÜñéï),
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
äéÜóôáóç 30×21. 2000 äñ÷. (5869 Åõñþ).
22. ÈÅÑÁÐÅÉÁ ØÕ×ÁÓÈÅÍÅÉÁÓ ÊÁÉ ØÕ×ÏÐÁÈÅÉÁÓ ÌÅ ÕÐÏÂÏËÇ,
1ç Ýêä. 1976 (óåë. 82), 2ç Ýêä. 1986 (óåë. 83), 2000 äñ÷. (5869 Åõñþ).
23. ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ, ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ÌÅÈÏÄÏÓ ÄÕÏ ÔÏÌÏÉ, 1ï óåìéíÜñéï, 1ç
Ýêäïóç 1989 (óåë. 127). 1500 äñ÷. (4.402 Åõñþ).
24. ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ, ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ÌÅÈÏÄÏÓ ÄÕÏ ÔÏÌÏÉ, 2ï óåìéíÜñéï, 1ç
Ýêäïóç 1989 (óåë. 101). 1500 äñ÷. (4.402 Åõñþ).
25. ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ, ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ÌÅÈÏÄÏÓ ÄÕÏ ÔÏÌÏÉ, 3ï óåìéíÜñéï, 1ç
Ýêäïóç 1990 (óåë. 65). 1500 äñ÷. (4.402 Åõñþ).
26. ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ, ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ÌÅÈÏÄÏÓ ÄÕÏ ÔÏÌÏÉ, 4ï óåìéíÜñéï, 1ç
Ýêäïóç 1990 (óåë. 68). 1500 äñ÷. (4.402 Åõñþ).
27. ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ, ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ÌÅÈÏÄÏÓ ÄÕÏ ÔÏÌÏÉ, 5ï óåìéíÜñéï, 1ç
Ýêäïóç 1991 (óåë. 92). 1500 äñ÷. (4.402 Åõñþ).
28. ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ, ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ÌÅÈÏÄÏÓ ÌÏÍÏÔÏÌÏÓ, 6ï óåìéíÜñéï,
1ç Ýêäïóç 1991 (óåë. 46). 1500 äñ÷. (4.402 Åõñþ).
29. ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ, ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ÌÅÈÏÄÏÓ ÌÏÍÏÔÏÌÏÓ, 7ï óåìéíÜñéï,
1ç Ýêäïóç 1992 (óåë. 55). 1500 äñ÷. (4.402 Åõñþ).
30. ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ, ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ÌÅÈÏÄÏÓ ÌÏÍÏÔÏÌÏÓ, 8ï óåìéíÜñéï,
1ç Ýêäïóç 1992 (óåë. 51). 1500 äñ÷. (4.402 Åõñþ).
31. ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ, ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ÌÅÈÏÄÏÓ ÌÏÍÏÔÏÌÏÓ, 9ï óåìéíÜñéï,
1ç Ýêäïóç 1992 (óåë. 80). 1500 äñ÷. (4.402 Åõñþ).
32. ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ, ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ÌÅÈÏÄÏÓ ÌÏÍÏÔÏÌÏÓ, 10ï óåìéíÜñéï,
1ç Ýêäïóç 1993 (óåë. 94). 1500 äñ÷. (4.402 Åõñþ).
33. ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ, ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ÌÅÈÏÄÏÓ ÌÏÍÏÔÏÌÏÓ, 11ï óåìéíÜñéï,
1ç Ýêäïóç 1993 (óåë. 66). 1500 äñ÷. (4.402 Åõñþ).
34. ÁÐÏÓÕÌÂÏËÉÓÌÏÓ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1977 (óåë. 47), äéÜóôáóç 30×21. 2000
ÌÅÔÁÖÕÓÉÊÏ ÐÅÑÉÏÄÉÊÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
Ôï áñôéüôåñï ìåôáöõóéêü êáé áðïêñõöéóôéêü ðåñéïäéêü ôïõ ôüðïõ ìáò. ÊÜèå
Üñèñï ôïõ êáé ìéá áðïêÜëõøç. ÊÜèå óåëßäá ôïõ êáé ìéá äéáöþôéóç.
Äéáôßèåôáé áíÜ åîÜäá. Êõêëïöüñçóå 8 ÷ñüíéá ìå äéìçíéáßá ðáñïõóßáóç.
´Áñ÷éóå ôçí áñßèìçóÞ ôïõ ìå ôïí áñéèìü 2, ïðüôå Ýöôáóå ôïí áñéèìü 49
(óýíïëï óåëßäùí: 1658). Åßíáé 8 åîÜäåò ìå 48 ôåý÷ç ðñïò 3.500 äñ÷.
(10.271 Åõñþ) ç åîÜäá.
ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÏ ÊËÅÉÄÉ - ÓÐÏÕÄÅÓ ÄÉ' ÁËËÇËÏÃÑÁÖÉÁÓ
ÅðôÜ îå÷ùñéóôïß ÊëÜäïé ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý. Ï êÜèå êëÜäïò ðåñéÝ÷åé áíÜëïãá
áðü ôñéÜíôá Ýùò ôñéáíôáôñßá ìáèÞìáôá Þ áðü äÝêá Ýùò Ýíôåêá ôñéÜäåò
(óýíïëï óåë: 3034). ÊÜèå ôñéÜäá êïóôßæåé 3.000 äñ÷ (8.804 Åõñþ).
ÅããñáöÞ 3.000 äñ÷ (8.804 Åõñþ). Ïé êëÜäïé åßíáé ïé åîÞò:
1. ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1977 (óåë. 418), äéÜóôáóç 30×21.
2. ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ - ÏÑÈÏØÕ×ÉÓÌÏÓ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1977 (óåë. 400),
äéÜóôáóç 30×21.
3. ÅÐÉÓÔÇÌÏÍÉÊÏÓ ÐÍÅÕÌÁÔÉÓÌÏÓ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1981 (óåë. 400),
äéÜóôáóç 30×21.
4. ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÖÉËÏÓÏÖÉÁ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1977 (óåë. 388), äéÜóôáóç 30×21.
5. ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1981 (óåë. 385), äéÜóôáóç 30×21.
6. ÁÓÔÑÏËÏÃÉÁ - ÁÓÔÑÏÓÏÖÉÁ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1978 (óåë. 565), äéÜóôáóç
30×21.
7. ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ, 1ç Ýêäïóç 1977 (óåë. 478), äéÜóôáóç
30×21.
Ó×ÏËÅÓ ÓÅ ËÅÉÔÏÕÑÃÉÁ ÔÙÍ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÙÍ
Á) ØÕ×ÏËÏÃÉÊÇ - ÍÏÇÔÉÊÇ Ó×ÏËÇ ÑÁÔÆÁ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ
Â) ÓÙÌÁÔÏØÕ×ÉÊÇ Ó×ÏËÇ ÊÑÉÃÉÁ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ
Ã) ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ×ÅÉÑÏÐËÁÓÔÉÊÇ ÔÑÉÙÍ ÅÉÄÙÍ:
1) ÉÁÐÙÍÉÊÇ ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ - ÄÁÊÔÕËÏÐÉÅÓÇ
2) Í. Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇ - ÄÁÊÔÕËÏÊÔÕÐÇÓÇ
3) ÁÑ×ÁÉÁ ÅËËÇÍÉÊÇ ÌÁËÁÎÇ
Ä) ÓÅÌÉÍÁÑÉÁ ÊÁÉ ÏÌÉËÉÅÓ ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇÓ ÖÉËÏÓÏÖÉÁÓ
26 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 OMAKOIO OF TRIKALA END THESSALONIKI
ILIAS L. KATSIAMPAS
METAPHYSICAL­SEARCHES­OF­YOGA­AND­SIATSOU­­•­EDITIONS­-­SALES­OF­BOOKS­AND­OF­MAGAZINES
21­KEFALLINIAS­STREET­(FORMERLY­A’­PARODOS­FLEGHIOU­TERMA),­42100­TRIKALA,­GREECE­•­E.S.T..:­045357881­•­TEL­&­FAX:­0431-75505­or­093­-­2418994,­
Web­Site:­http://www.omakoio.gr­E-mail:­omakoio@omakoio.gr­&­omakoio@aias.gr
BOOK PRICE - LIST
BY NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS (ISSUES)
-­FROM­1-9-1998­-
(Prices subject to change without notice.)
1. Patapios the Humble Philosopher and Saint from Egypt, 1st edition
in 1970, (156 page), 2nd edition 1987. With a supplementary and
explanatory material (220 page). 2500 Drahmas or 7.336 Euro.
2. Light in the Darkness, 1st edition in 1975 (300 page), 2nd edition
in 1987. With a supplementary and explanatory material (429
page). 5000 Drahmas or 14.673 Euro.
3. Theurgy Instructs, 1st edition in 1975 (318 page), 2nd edition in
1987. With a supplementary andexplanatory material (408 page).
4500 Drahmas or 13.206 Euro.
4. The Other View of Erich Von Daineken's Dogma, 1st edition in 1976
(318 p.), 2nd edition in 1994 (372 page), ISBN: 960-7484-00-2.
4500 Drahmas or 13.206 Euro.
5. The Secret of Hatha Yoga, 1st edition in 1976 (111 page), 2nt edi-
tion 1997 (155 page). 2500 Drahmas or 7.336 Euro.
6. The Pythagorean Arithmosophy, 1st edition in 1977 (168 page),
2nd edition in 1987 with a supplementary and explanatory mate-
rial (271 page), 3rd edition in 1993 (276 page), ISBN: 960-7152-
06-09. 4000 Drahmas or 11.738 Euro.
7. The Elefsinian Mysteries, 1st edition in 1978 (99 page), 2nd edition
in 1987 with a supplementary and explanatory material (159 page),
3rd edition in 1993 (178 page), ISBN: 960-7152-11-5. 3000 Drah-
mas or 8.804 Euro.
8. Socrates Last Day, 1st ed. in 1978 (111 p.) 2nd ed. in 1988 with a
supplementary and explan. material (152 p.). 2500 Dr. or 7.336
Euro.
9. The Pharaos, 1st edition in 1978 (151 page), 2nd ed. in 1991 with
a supplementary and explanatory material (311 page), ISBN: 960-
7152-00-X. 4500 Drahmas or 13.206 Euro.
10. Birth and Death of the Worlds, Mater - Antimater - Supermater, U-
niverse - Antiuniverse - Superuniverse, 1st ed. in 1979 (195p.), 2nd
ed. in 1990 with a supplementary and explanatory material (323 p.).
ISBN: 960-85024-5-4. 4500 Dr. or 13.206 Euro.
11. Dravidians, in English, 1st edition in 1979 (45 page). 1500 Drah-
mas or 4.402 Euro.
12. In the Times of Minos, the Great King of Crete, 1st edition in 1979
(88 page), 2nd ed. 1997 (105 page). 2000 Dr. or 5.869 Euro.
13. Dravidians, the Ancestors of Greeks, 1st edition in 1979 (88 page),
2nd edition in 1989 with a supplementary and explanatory mater-
ial (143 page), 3rd edition 1996 (167 page), ISBN: 960-85024-2-X.
3000 Drahmas or 8.804 Euro.
14. White Magic, 1st ed. in 1979 (134 p.), 2nd ed. in 1992 with a sup-
pl. and expl. material (227 p.), ISBN: 960-7152-03-4. 3500 Dr. or
10.271 Euro.
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 27
15. Anastenaria and Anastenarithes, 1st edition in 1980 (95 page).
1500 Drahmas or 4.402 Euro.
16. Posthumous Life, 1st edit. in 1982 (256 p.), 2nd ed. in 1993 (262
p.), ISBN: 960-7152-09-3. 4500 Drahmas or 13.206 Euro.
17. Raja Yoga, 1st edition in 1983 (208 page). 3500 Drahmas or 10.271
Euro.
18. Two volumes Metaphysical Encyclopaedia, 1st edit. in 1985/86 (A´
volume: 443 page, B´ volume: 752 page). 24000 Dr. or 70.432 Eu-
ro.
19. Practical Psychosomatic-Theurapetic Method Kriyia-Yoga, 1st ed-
it. in 1988 (357 page). 7000 Drahmas or 20.542 Euro.
20. Desymbolism of the Greek Mythology, 1st edition in 1988 (521
page). 7500
21. Three-Dimentional and Four-Dimentional World, 1st ed. in 1989
(214 page), ISBN: 960-85024-3-8. 3000 Dr. or 8.804 Euro.
22. Mystical Teaching A´ volume, 1st edition in 1991 (346 page),
ISBN: 960-85024-1-1 SET: 960-85024-7-0. 7000 Dr. or 20.542
Euro.
23. Karma. The Retributive Justice Law, 1st edition in 1989 (373 page),
ISBN: 960-85024-0-3. 5000 Dr. or 14.673 Euro.
24. Reincarnation, 1st edition in 1990 (286 page), ISBN: 960-85024-
4-6. 4000 Drahmas or 11.738 Euro.
25. The Chiroplastic Theurapeutics of SIATSU, volume A', 1st ed. in
1990 (533 p.), ISBN: 960-85024-6-2. 7000 Dr. 20.542 Euro.
26. Pshychotherapeutics without medicaments, 1st edition in 1991
(325 p), ISBN: 960-85024-8-9. 2500 Dr. or 7.336 Euro.
27. Mysticism. Christocentric and Christocratic Mysticism, 1st edition
in 1991 (331 p.), ISBN: 960-85024-9-7. 4500 Dr. or 13.206 Euro.
28. Occultism, volume A', 1st edition in 1991 (391 page), ISBN: 960-
7152-01-8, 960-7152-02-6. 5500 Dr. or 16.140 Euro.
29. Occultism, volume B', 1st edition in 1992 (428 page), ISBN: 960-
7152-01-8, T.2. 960-7152-04-2. 6000 Dr. or 17.608 Euro.
30. The Chiroplastic of SIATSU, volume B', 1st ed. in 1993 (395 page),
ISBN: SET 960-7152-07-7, 960-7152-08-5. 5500 Dr. or 16.140 Eu-
ro.
31. Mystical Teaching, volume B', 1st edition in 1993 (388 page), IS-
BN: SET 960-85024-7-0, 960-7152-05-0. 7000 Dr. or 20.542 Euro.
32. Mystical Teaching, volume C', 1st ed. in 1994 (379 page), ISBN:
SET 960-85024-7-0, 960-7152-10-7. 7000 Dr. or 20.542 Euro.
33. The Chiroplastic Theurapeutics of SIATSU, volume C´, 1st edition
1996 (255 p.). 4000 Dr. or 11.738 Euro.
34. Occultism, volume C´,1st edition 1997 (103 page), ISBN:960-7484-
05-3. 2000 Drahmas or 5.869 Euro.
ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 BOOKS BY ILIAS L. KATSIAMPAS (OMAKOEIA TRIKALON &
THES/NIKIS) STUDENT OF N. MARGIORIS
1. From Master's mouth to the student's ear, with a thorough glossary
of Sanscrit (philosophical dictionary, 400 words) for the students
of Yoga, 1st edition 1995 (270 page), ISBN: 960-85735-0-5. 3000
Drahmas or 8.804 Euro.
2. Ioanni's Apocalypse, Explained by Master Nikolaos A. Margioris
(Bilingual Greek-English edition), under the attendance and the ex-
tensive analytical commentings of his student Ilias L. Katsiampas,
1st edition 1999, ISBN: 960-85735-1-3. In Greek 3000 Drahmas or
8.804 Euro, in English 5000 or 14.673 Euro (in Thermo-Soldered
Essays).
3. Meditation and Mysticism, Raja and Kundalini Yoga (Theory and
Practice), under edition
4. The Systems of the Esoteric Terapeutics, to be published.
5. A full and analytical dictionary - Guide of Metaphysical Conceptions,
to be published.
6. Manual-Guide for the candidate Instructors of the Esoterism, on the
basis of Master Nikolaos A. Margiori's Deposits (only for the mem-
bers of the Omakoia).
(5th seminar) 1500 Drahmas or 4.402 Euro.
28. SIATSU. THERAPEUTIC METHOD ONE VOLUME (6th seminar)
1500 Drahmas or 4.402 Euro.
29. SIATSU. THERAPEUTIC METHOD ONE VOLUME (7th seminar)
1500 Drahmas or 4.402 Euro.
30. SIATSU. THERAPEUTIC METHOD ONE VOLUME (8th seminar)
1500 Drahmas or 4.402 Euro.
31. SIATSU. THERAPEUTIC METHOD ONE VOLUME (9th seminar)
1500 Drahmas or 4.402 Euro.
32. SIATSU. THERAPEUTIC METHOD ONE VOLUME (10th seminar)
1500 Drahmas or 4.402 Euro.
33. SIATSU. THERAPEUTIC METHOD ONE VOLUME (11th seminar)
1500 Drahmas or 4.402 Euro.
III) OMAKOEIO JOURNAL (49 issues)
The most precise journal in Metaphysics in Greece. Every one of its ar-
ticles is a revelation. Every page is an elucidation. It is available in
six pieces and it's costs 3500 Drahmas or 10.271 Euro. It's circu-
lated for 8 years, in one issue every month. The issue from 2 to 49
are available they are sold in 8 half dozens = 48 issues.

II) THERMO-SOLDERED ESSAYS

BY NIKOLAOS. A. MARGIORIS IV) ESOTERIC KEY
1. SCHOOL OF ASKLEPIANS - HYPNOTHERAPISTS 1000 Drahmas Eight separate studies branches of Esoterism. Every branch contains
or 2.934 Euro. correspondingly from thirty to thirty three lessons, that is ten or
2. CHARL VON REICHEBACH 1200 eleven triads. The branches are the following:
3. SCHOOL OF ASKLEPIANS - SPIRITUAL THERAPISTS THE- 1) MEDITATION (418 page)
OFRASTOS PARAKELSOS 1200 Drahmas or 3.521 Euro. 2) HYPNOTISM - ORTHOPSYCHISM (400 page)
4. MAGNETOTHERAPY 1000 Drahmas or 2.934 Euro. 3) SCIENTIFIC SPIRITUALISM (400 page)
5. ASKLEPIAIA AND AMFIARAEIA 1000 Drahmas or 2.934 Euro. 4) ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY (388 page)
6. THE THERAPY OF THE AGELONG 1400 Drahmas or 4.108 Euro. 5) ESOTERIC INITIATION (385 page)
7. THE CELL AND LIFE MYSTERY 1400 Drahmas or 4.108 Euro. 6) ASTROLOGY - ASTROSOPHY (565 page)
8. ECTOPLASM 1200 Drahmas or 3.521 Euro. 7) ESOTERIC THERAPEUTICS (478 page)
9. ESSENES 1400 Drahmas or 4.108 Euro. 8) DESYMBOLISM
10. APPEARANCES OF ALIVE PEOPLE IDOLS 1500 Drahmas or 4.402
Euro.
11. ANASTENARIA 1200 Drahmas or 3.521 Euro. SCHOOLS IN FUNCTION OF OMAKOIOS
12. CREATION OF THE WORLDS 1400 Drahmas or 4.108 Euro. A. PSYCHOLOGICAL - INTELLECTUAL SCHOOL OF RAJA YOGA
13. MYSTICISM 1300 Drahmas or 3.815 Euro. B. SCHOOL OF THERAPEUTICS PSYCHOSOMATIC OF KRIYA YO-
14. DRAVIDIANS, THE FIRST GREEKS OF THE AGEAN SEA 1400 GA
Drahmas or 4.108 Euro. C. THERAPEUTIC AND CHIROPLASTIC SCHOOL WITH 3 METH-
15. THE VIBRATIONS CONTROL 1500 Drahmas or 4.402 Euro. ODS:
16. WHAT ESOTERISM IS 1200 Drahmas or 3.521 Euro. 1. JAPANESE SHIATSU (FINGER-PRESSURE)
17. THE HOLY CYLINDER OF THE ESSENS RULES 1500 Drahmas 2. THE METHOD OF FINGER BLOW
or 4.402 Euro. 3. MASSAGE FROM THE ANCIENT GREECE
18. EROS AND LOVE 1500 Drahmas or 4.402 Euro. D. SEMINARS - LECTURES IN ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY
19. PROPER NUTRITION WITH PROPORTIONAL DIET, LOSING
WEIGHT 2000 Drahmas or 5.869 Euro.
20. THERAPEUTICS WITHOUT MEDICAMENTS 2000 Drahmas or
5.869 Euro.
21. THERAPEUTICS BY HYPNOTISM 2000 Drahmas or 5.869 Euro.
22. THERAPY OF PSYCOPATHY 2000 Drahmas or 5.869 Euro.
23. SIATSU. THERAPEUTIC METHOD TWO DUPLICATED VOLUMES
(1st seminar) 1500 Drahmas or 4.402 Euro.
24. SIATSU. THERAPEUTIC METHOD TWO DUPLICATED VOLUMES
(2nd seminar) 1500 Drahmas or 4.402 Euro.
25. SIATSU. THERAPEUTUC METHOD TWO DUPLICATED VOLUMES
(3rd seminar) 1500 Drahmas or 4.402 Euro.
26. SIATSU. THERAPEUTIC METHOD TWO DUPLICATED VOLUMES
(4th seminar) 1500 Drahmas or 4.402 Euro.
27. SIATSU. THERAPEUTIC METHOD TWO DUPLICATED VOLUMES

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 28 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001


n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
ÐÁÔÁÐÉÏÓ Ï ÔÁÐÅÉÍÏÓ
Ï ÅÎ ÁÉÃÕÐÔÏÕ
ÖÉËÏÓÏÖÏÓ & ÏÓÉÏÓ
Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá ôï ðñþôï âéâëßï ôïõ Íé-
êïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ ðïõ ðñùôïåêäüèç-
êå ôï 1970 (äýï åêäüóåéò). ÁöïñÜ ôïí âßï
êáé ôï Ýñãï åíüò áãßïõ áíäñüò, ðïõ êá-
ôáíÜëùóå ôç æùÞ ôïõ äéäÜóêïíôáò ôçí
áëçèÞ Ýííïéá ôçò äéäáóêáëßáò ôïõ Êõñß-
ïõ Çìþí Éçóïý ×ñéóôïý, ðïõ åßíáé ç áãÜ-
ðç, ç áíï÷Þ, ç óõã÷þñåóç êáé ç êÜëõøç
ôùí áäõíáìéþí êáé óöáëìÜôùí ôùí óõíáíèñþðùí. Ôï èáõìáôïõñãéêü
Ýñãï ôïõ êáôáäåß÷ôçêå ìå ôç èåñáðåßá ôçò öÜãïõóáò (êáñêßíïõ) êáé èå-
ùñåßôáé ï êáôáíéêçôÞò ôçò...
ÐáñÜëëçëá åîéóôïñïýíôáé ïé äýóêïëåò êáôáóôÜóåéò ôùí ðñþôùí ìå-
ôá÷ñéóôéáíéêþí ÷ñüíùí, ïé áéñÝóåéò ðïõ õðÞñ÷áí Þ äçìéïõñãÞèçêáí êáé
ç áíôéìåôþðéóÞ ôïõò áðü ôá öùôéóìÝíá ðíåýìáôá ôçò åðï÷Þò.
Åðßóçò äéáôõðþíåôáé ôï ÷ñéóôéáíéêü åóùôåñéêü ðéóôåýù ìå øõ÷éêÞ ïñ-
ìÞ êáé ìå áðüëõôç ëïãéêüôçôá ðïõ åäñáéþíåé óôéò áíèñùðïøõ÷Ýò ôï ìå-
ãáëåßï ôçò ÁëÞèåéáò, üôáí áõôÞ ðáñïõóéÜæåôáé.
ÐÁÔÁÐÉÏÓ Ï ÔÁÐÅÉÍÏÓ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
ÐÑÙ ÔÇÓ ÊÁÉ ÄÅÕ ÔÅ ÑÇÓ ÅÊ ÄÏ ÓÇÓ
ÅéóáãùãÞ 11, Ðñüëïãïò ôçò ðñþ-
ôçò Ýêäïóçò 13, Ðñüëïãïò ôçò äåýôå-
ñçò Ýêäïóçò 14, Ç ðñï ôïõ Ïóßïõ Ðá-
ôáðßïõ åðï÷Þ 18, ÊáôáãùãÞ ôïõ Áãß-
ïõ Ðá ôá ðß ïõ 19, Ç ß äñõ óç ôçò Á ëå -
îáíäñåßáò 19, Áðüóôïëïò ÌÜñêïò, é-
äñõôÞò ôçò Åêêëçóßáò Áëåîáíäñåßáò
21, ÅîÜðëùóç óôçí Áßãõðôï ôçò íÝáò
Èñçóêåßáò 23, Ç êáôç÷çôéêÞ ó÷ïëÞ Á-
ëåîáíäñåßáò 25, ÐÜíôáéíïò, ï ðñþôïò
äéåõèõíôÞò áõôÞò, ÊëÞìçò ï Áëåîáí-
äñåýò, äåýôåñïò äé/íôÞò áõôÞò, Ùñé-
ãÝíçò ôñßôïò äéå/íôÞò áõôÞò, ¢ñåéïò ç
ðñþ ôç ìå ãÜ ëç áß ñå óç 36, ÌÝ ãáò Á -
èáíÜóéïò, ï õðÝñìá÷ïò ôçò Ïñèïäï-
îßáò 38, Ðñþôç ÏéêïõìåíéêÞ Óýíïäïò
39, Áíá÷ùñçôÝò - ÁóêçôÝò - Ìïíá÷Ýò
42, ÈÞ âåò 46, Ôï ðñþ ôï èáý ìá, èå -
ñá ðåß á ôïõ íå á ñïý Ðá ôá ðß ïõ 50, Ï
íÝ ïò ÐÜ ðáò êáé Ðá ôñéÜñ ÷çò Á ëå îáí -
äñåßáò Èåüöéëïò 52, Åðßóêåøç ôïõ å-
ðÜñ÷ïõ êáé ðáôñüò áõôïý óôçí Ýñçìï
62, ÈÜíáôïò ôçò öéëïóüöïõ Õðáôßáò
54, Äéäáóêáëßá ôïõ ïóßïõ Ðáôáðßïõ,
ðå ñß á ãÜ ðçò 54, Ôï äåý ôå ñï èáý ìá
ôïõ á ãß ïõ, ôï ï ìá äé êü 56, Ôï ôñß ôï
èáýìá 58, ÔÝôáñôï èáýìá. Èåñáðåßá
ðá ñá ëý ôïõ ðáé äéïý 59, Ï ÐÜ ðáò êáé
Ðá ôñéÜñ ÷çò Á ëå îáí äñåß áò Êý ñéë ëïò
61, Ìå ôá öï ñÜ ëåé øÜ íùí Êý ñïõ êáé
ÉùÜííïõ óôï Áìðïýñ Êõñ 63, Áíá÷þ-
ñçóç áðü ôçí ÁëåîÜíäñåéá ãéá Êùí-
óôáíôéíïýðïëç 67, Ï ÐáôÜðéïò óþæùí
ôï ðëïßï áðü ôçí ôñéêõìßá 68, Ôï èáý-
ìá ôïõ ïóßïõ åðß ôïõ Óå÷íïýôé 69, Äé-
äáóêáëßá ôïõ áãßïõ Ðáôñüò óôï óðÞ-
ëáéï ÊñÞôçò 71, ¢öéîç óôçí Êüñéíèï
73, Áíåýñåóç õðü ôïõ ïóßïõ ôïõ åí
Ãåñáíßïéò Óðçëáßïõ 74, Ïìéëßá ôïõ ï-
óß ïõ óôá Ãå ñÜ íåéá 75, Ôï á íÝ óðå ñï
öùò á ðü ôçí ðïé ç ôé êÞ óõë ëï ãÞ ôïõ
Ìáñ ãéù ñÞ, ôï öùò ôçò ÓÜ ìïõ 78, Ç
èåñáðåßá óôá ÃåñÜíéá üñç ôïõ ìïíá-
÷ïý Áñóåíßïõ 79, Åðéèõìßá ôïõ Ðáôá-
ðßïõ, üðùò ôáöåß óôá ÃåñÜíåéá 80, Á-
óêç ôÞò Ìá êÜ ñéïò, ï ÌÝ ãáò Á ëå îáí -
äñåýò 82, Ç Èåïëïãßá ôçò Áíôéï÷åßáò
84, Íåóôüñéïò, ï ôçò ×ñéóôéáíïóýíçò
ÁéñåóéÜñ÷çò 87, Ôñßôç ÏéêïõìåíéêÞ Óý-
íï äïò 430 ð.×. 90, Á íá ÷þ ñç óç á ðü
ôá Ãå ñÜ íåéá ãéá Êùí óôá íôé íïý ðï ëç,
435 ì.×. 91, Ôï ìÝãá èáýìá 93, Ðñü-
óêëçóç ðáñÜ ôçò ÁõôïêñáôïñéêÞò Ïé-
êïãÝíåéáò 95, ÓõíÜíôçóç ìå ôçí Áõôï-
êñÜôåéñá Åõäïîßá 98, Ç ßáóç ôïõ ôõ-
öëïý 104, Ç ôïõ åî õäñïðéêßáò èåñá-
ðåßá 105, ÅêâïëÞ áêáèÜñôïõ ðíåýìá-
ôïò 106, Èåñáðåßá êáñêéíïðáèïýò ãõ-
íáé êüò 107, Ôå ëåõ ôáß á óý íá îç ôùí
ìáèçôþí áõôïý óôçí Êùí/ðïëç 110,
Äé äá óêá ëß á ôïõ ï óß ïõ. ÐëÜ óôçò êáé
ðëÜ óìá ôá 111, Äé äá óêá ëß á ôïõ ï óß -
ïõ. Ç áîßá ôçò ãíþóåùò 112, Äéäáóêá-
ëßá ôïõ ïóßïõ. Ç äéá ôçò ëïãéêÞò áäõ-
íáìßá ôçò óõëëÞøåùò 113, Äéäáóêá-
ëßá ôïõ ïóßïõ. Ç êÜèáñóç ôçò øõ÷Þò
115, Ç ôåëåõôáßá äéäáóêáëßá ôïõ ìõ-
óôç ñß ïõ ôïõ èá íÜ ôïõ 116, Ç ôå ëåõ -
ôáßá åí æùÞ åõëïãßá ôïõ ïóßïõ Ðáôá-
ðßïõ 117, Ï ÊñÞôçò ÁíäñÝáò, ¼ãäïïò
Áéþí ì.×. 118, Óõ ìå þí ï ìå ôá öñá -
óôÞò, ÅíäÝêáôïò Áéþí ì.×. 119, Áíåý-
ñåóç ôïõ éåñïý ËåéøÜíïõ ôïõ Ïóßïõ
120, Ôï íÝï ìïíáóôÞñé óôá ÃåñÜíåéá
üñç 122, Åðßëïãïò ôçò ðñþôçò Ýêäï-
óçò 123, ÈåñìÞ ðáñÜêëçóç 124, Óõ-
ìðåñÜóìáôá ôçò äéäáóêáëßáò êáé öé-
ëïóïößáò ôïõ Ïóßïõ 125
ÓÕÌÐËÇÑÙÌÁÔÉ ÊÁ
ÊÁÉ ÅÐÅÎÇÃÇÌÁÔÉÊÁ
ÊÅÖÁËÁÉÁ ÔÇÓ Â´ ÅÊ ÄÏÓÇÓ 137
Ôá å óù ôå ñé êÜ Ðé óôåý ù ôïõ Èñç -
óêåõü ìå íïõ Ìý óôç Ï óß ïõ Ðá ôá ðß ïõ
139, Ôï ÄñÜìá ôùí ÁéñÝóåùí óôçí Áß-
ãõðôï 148, Ðñþôç ÓõíÜíôçóç ôïõ Ðá-
ôá ðß ïõ ìå ôïí Áõ ôï êñÜ ôï ñá Èå ï äü -
óéïí ôïí ´ 158, Äåýôåñç ÓõíÜíôçóÞ
ôïõ ìå ôïí ßäéï ÁõôïêñÜôïñá êáé Åóù-
ôå ñé êÞ Á íÜ ëõ óç ôïõ ×ñé óôéá íé óìïý
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
168, Ôñßôç ÏìáäéêÞ ÓõíÜíôçóç Ðáôá-
ðßïõ êáé ÂáóéëéêÞò ÏéêïãÝíåéáò. Ç Áõ-
ôï êñÜ ôåé ñá Åõ äï îß á óõì öù íåß á ðü -
ëõ ôá ìå ôéò á ðü øåéò ôïõ Áé ãý ðôéïõ
Ìïíá÷ïý 177, Èåñáðåßá õðü ôïõ Ðá-
ôáðßïõ ôïõ øõ÷ïðáèïýò áõëéêïý óõã-
ãåíÞ ôïõ ÁõôïêñÜôïñá 189, ÏñãÜíù-
óç õðü ôïõ Ðáôáðßïõ Ìõóôéêéóôéêþí
Ï ìÜ äùí á ðü ëá ú êïýò êáé êëç ñé êïýò
óôá äéÜöïñá êÝíôñá ôçò ×ñéóôéáíïóý-
íçò 200, Å ðß ëï ãïò ôçò Äåý ôå ñçò
¸êäïóçò 214.
PATAPIOS THE HUMBLE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
OF THE FIRST
AND OF THE SECOND EDITION
Introduction 11, Preface of the
First Edition 13, Preface of the Sec-
ond Edition 14, The era 18, Saint Pat-
apio's Origin 19, The Establishment of
Alexandria 19, Apostle Markos, the
founder of the Church of Alexandria
21, The expansion of the new religion
in Egypt 23, The Sunday School of
Alexandria 25, Pantenos, its first di-
rector 26, Klimis the Alexandrian, its
second director 27, Orighenis, its third
director, great Aerois. The first great
heresy 29, Athanasios the Great, the
defender of Orthodoxy 38, The first
Ecumenical Synod 39, Hermits - As-
cetis - Monks 42, Thebes 46, The first
miracle, young Patapio's therapy 50,
Theofilos, new Pope and Patriarch of
Alexandria 52, Prefect's and his fa-
ther visit to the desert 62, Death of
philosopher Ipatia 54, Saint Patapio's
teaching about love 54, The saint's
second collective miracle 56, The third
miracle 58, The fourth miracle. The
paralytic child's therapy 59, Pope and
Patriarch of Alexandria Kyrilos 61,
Transfer of Kyro's and Ioanni's relics
in Abu Kir 63, Departure from Alexan-
dria to Constantinopolis 67, Patapios
saving the boat from storm 68, The
saint's miracle on Sehnuti 69, Saint Fa-
ther's teaching in a cave of Crete 71,
Arrival to Corinth 73, Finding out of
the Cave in Gerania by the saint 74,
Saint's speech in Gerania 75, The nev-
er setting light from our poetic col-
lection The light from Samos 78, Monc
Arsenio's therapy in Gerania moun-
tains 79, Askete Makarios, Great
Alexandreus 82, Theology of Adiochia
84, torios, the pre-Christianic Here-
siarch 87, Third Ecumenical Synod in
430 b.C. 90 , Departure from Gerania
to Constantinopolis, in 435 A.D. 91,
The great miracle 93, Invitation by the
Imperial Family 95, Meeting with Em-
press Evdoxia 98, The blind's cure 104,
Therapy of the man suffering from
hydropikia 105, Ejection of dirty spir-
it 106, Therapy of the woman suffer-
ing from cancer 107 , The last gath-
ering of his students in Constanti-
nopolis 110, The saint's teaching. Cre-
ator and creatures 111, The saint's
teaching. The value of knowledge 112,
The saint's teaching. The conception
inability through logic 113, The saint's
teaching. The soul purification 115,
The last teaching of the death mys-
29 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
PATARIOS THE
HUMBLE THE
PHILOSOPHER AND
SAINT FROM EGYPT
This is Nikolaos A. Margiori’s
first book and it was published
for the first time in 1970 (two
editions). It refers to the life and
to the work of a saint man who
has consumed his life in teaching
the true meaning of the instruc-
tions of our Lord Jesus Christ that
is: love, toleration, forgiveness
and covering of the weknesses
and of the faults of our fellow-
men. This miraculous work of his
was proved by the cure of the
wearing out disease (cancer)
whose he is considered as the
winner...
At the same time, the difficult
situations of the first post-chris-
tianic years are narrated, the
heresises that existed or that
were created and their con-
fronting by the enlightened spir-
its of those times.
Also, the christianic esoteric
beleif is formulated in psychical
urge and in absolute reason-
ableness, that establishes .in the
human souls the greatness of the
Truth, whenever it is presented.
tery 116, Saint Patapio's last bless in
life 117, Cretan Andreas. Eighth Cen-
tury A.D. 118, Symeon, the translator,
Eleventh Century A.D. 119, Finding of
the Saint's holy relics 120, The new
monastery in Gerania mountains 122,
Epilogue of the first edition 123,
Warm request 124, Conclusions of
Saint's teaching and philosophy 125
SUPPLEMENTARY
AND EXPLANATORY
CHAPTERS OF THE B' EDITION 137
- Religious Initiate Saint Patapio's
Esoteric Beliefs 139, - The Heresies
Drama in Egypt 148, - Patapio's First
Meeting with Emperor Theodosios B'
158, - Second Meeting with the same
Emperor and Esoteric Analysis of
Christianism 168, - Patapio's Third Col-
lective Meeting with the Royal Fami-
ly. Empress Evdoxia Agrees Absolute-
ly with, Egyptian Monc's views. 177, -
The Emperor's Courtier Psychopath
Relative therapy by Patapios 189, -
Patapio's Organization of the Mys-
ticistic Groups by Laymen and Clergy-
men in the different, - Christendom
200, - Epilogue of the Second Edition
214
 ÖÙÓ ÓÔÏ ÓÊÏÔÏÓ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ ÐÑÙÔÇÓ
ÊÁÉ ÄÅÕÔÅÑÇÓ ÅÊÄÏÓÇÓ
Ï Åóùôåñéóìüò. Ðïßçìá ôïõ Í. Á. Ìáñãéù-
ñÞ 8, Óçìåßùóç 9, ÕðÝñôáôç ÅóùôåñéêÞ Áðï-
êÜëõøç 10, ÅðáíõðïâïëÞ éäßùí åñùôÞóåùí
11, Ðñüëïãïò ôçò ðñþôçò Ýêäïóçò 13, Ðñü-
ëïãïò ôçò äåýôåñçò Ýêäïóçò 15, ÅéóáãùãÞ
17, Ï Åóþôåñïò Åáõôüò ìáò 21, Åñþôçóç 1ç:
Ôé åßíáé Åóùôåñéóìüò 27, Åñþôçóç 2á: Äéáöï-
ñÜ Ãíþóåùí, Åóùôåñéêïý êáé Åîùôåñéêïý Êü-
óìïõ 36, Åñþôçóç 3ç: ÐáñÜäåéãìá ëåéôïõñ-
ãßáò Åóùôåñéêþí Ãíþóåùí 38, Åñþôçóç 4ç:
ÄÝíäñï Ãíþóåùò Êáëïý êáé Êáêïý 40, Åñþ-
ôçóç 5ç: Ôï Ôñéóõðüóôáôïí 44, Åñþôçóç 6ç:
Ôá ÃáëÜæéá ÂïõíÜ ôçò ¸ëåíáò ÌðëáâÜôóêõ
49, Åñþôçóç 7ç: Ç óýóôáóç ôùí Üëëùí Äéá-
óôÜóåùí 51, Åñþôçóç 8ç: Ó÷Ýóç Åóùôåñé-
óìïý ìåôÜ ôçò Èñçóêåßáò 54, Åñþôçóç 9ç:
ÅìöÜíéóç ôïõ Ê.Ç.É.×. óôçí Ìáñßá 60, Åñþôç-
óç 10ç: Ôé ãíùñßæïõìå ðåñß Áíôéóýìðáíôïò 61,
Åñþôçóç 11ç: Ôé ãíùñßæïõìå ðåñß Áíôéàëçò
62, Åñþôçóç 12ç: ÁäÜì êáé Åýá 64, Åñþôçóç
13ç: Åêôüðëáóìá 65, Åñþôçóç 14ç: Õðåñâü-
ñåéá ÖõëÞ 67, Åñþôçóç 15ç: Ç Áýñá ôïõ áí-
èñþðïõ 70, Åñþôçóç 16ç: Ôï ÌõóôÞñéï ôïõ
ÊõôôÜñïõ74, Åñþôçóç 17ç: Ìåßùóç âÜñïõò
áðü ôïõò áñ÷áßïõò Áéãõðôßïõò 81, Åñþôçóç
18ç: Áñ÷Þ åíÜñîåùò äéäáóêáëßáò Åóùôåñé-
óìïý 90, Åñþôçóç 19ç: Áéôßá Äçìéïõñãßáò ôïõ
Óýìðáíôïò 93, Åñþôçóç 20ç: Ç Áýñá ôùí Æþ-
ùí 95, Åñþôçóç 21ç: Ôé åßíáé ç ÔÅÔÑÁÊÔÕÓ. ÐÕ-
ÈÁÃÏÑÁÓ 97, Åñþôçóç 22á: Äßäåé ï Ëüãïò ôçí
n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
LIGHT IN DARKNESS
This is N. Margiori’s second
book. It was published for the first
time in 1975 (two editions) and it
comprises 81 questions, with e-
qual in number answers of a
metaphysical content. A little but
substantial encyclopedic dictio-
nary is presented in the difficult
points of the metaphysics and
keeps the reader analytically in-
formed..
More plainly, it contains the
necessary information for the
substance of the Esotterism and
helps the reader to enter the
Daedalo’s branchings and to study
the false phenomena of the mat-
ter, ascertaining the existence of
the Substance-Spirit behind it.
ÈÝóç ôïõ óå Üëëïõ åßäïõò äéäá÷Ýò; 101, Åñþ-
ôçóç 23ç: Ôé åßíáé Ìõóôéêéóìüò. Ðïßçìá ÔÜîç åê
ôïõ ×Üïõò 106, Åñþôçóç 24ç: ÄéáöïñÜ ìå-
ôáîý Øõ÷Þò, Ðíåýìáôïò êáé åêôïðëÜóìáôïò.
Ðñïóåõ÷Þ Êýñéå Êýñéå 110, Åñþôçóç 25ç: Ãéá-
ôß íá õðÜñ÷åé ôï ÊÜñìá 114, Åñþôçóç 26ç:
Äéüñáóç êáé ÄéáêïÞ 118, Åñþôçóç 27ç: Ôï ÊÜñ-
ìá êáé ôá ÖõôÜ 120, Åñþôçóç 28ç: Ôá Æþá õ-
ðüêåéíôáé óå ÊÜñìá 122, Åñþôçóç 29ç: ÅðéóêÝ-
øåéò ÅîùãÞéíùí 124, Åñþôçóç 30ç: Ï Éó÷õ-
ñüò êáé ï Áäýíáôïò óôï Óýìðáí 129, Åñþôç-
óç 31ç: Ôé åßíáé Ðíåõìáôéóìüò 133, Åñþôçóç
32á: Ï áöáíéóìüò ôçò Áôëáíôßäáò 140, Åñþ-
n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
ÖÙÓ ÓÔÏ ÓÊÏÔÏÓ
Åßíáé ôï äåýôåñï âéâëßï ôïõ Í. Ìáñ-
ãéùñÞ. Ðñùôïåêäüèçêå ôï 1975 (äýï åê-
äüóåéò) êáé ðåñéÝ÷åé 81 åñùôÞóåéò ìå é-
óÜñéèìåò áðáíôÞóåéò ìåôáöõóéêïý ðå-
ñéå÷ïìÝíïõ. ¸íá ìéêñü áëëÜ ïõóéáóôé-
êü åãêõêëïðáéäéêü ëåîéêü äßíåé ôï ðá-
ñüí ôïõ, óôá äýóêïëá ôçò ìåôáöõóéêÞò
óçìåßá êáé êáôáôïðßæåé áíáëõôéêÜ ôïí á-
íáãíþóôç.
Ðéï áðëÜ ðåñéÝ÷åé áðáñáßôçôåò ðëç-
ñïöïñßåò ãéá ôçí ïõóßá ôïõ Åóùôåñé-
óìïý êáé âïçèåß ôïí áíáãíþóôç íá åéóÝëèåé ìÝóá óôïõ Äáßäáëïõ ôéò
äéáêëáäþóåéò êáé íá ìåëåôÞóåé ôá øåõäïöáéíüìåíá ôçò ýëçò, äéáðé-
óôþíïíôáò ôçí ýðáñîç ôçò Ïõóßáò - Ðíåýìáôïò ðßóù áð’ áõôÞí.
ôçóç 33ç: Ôá óôïé÷åéáêÜ êáé ôï áíèñþðéíï ïí
146, Åñþôçóç 34ç: Ç åðßäñáóç ôùí Óôïé÷åéá-
êþí 147, Åñþôçóç 35ç: Åðßäñáóç ôçò áíèñþ-
ðéíçò øõ÷Þò åðß Üëëçò 148, Åñþôçóç 36ç: Äõ-
óìåíÞò åðßäñáóç Óôïé÷åéáêþí åðß ôïõ Êüóìïõ
150, Åñþôçóç 37ç: Èåßï Ó÷Ýäéï êáé ç åîÝëéîç
ôçò Äçìéïõñãßáò 153, Åñþôçóç 38ç: Äéäáóêá-
ëßá ôïõ Âïýääá 156, Åñþôçóç 39ç: Áöïìïéþ-
íåé ç åðï÷Þ ìáò ôïí Âïýääá; 159, Åñþôçóç
40ç: ÁðïóôïëÞ ÁíùôÜôùí ÏíôïôÞôùí 161, Å-
ñþôçóç 41ç: Ðïéïò åßìáé; Ãéáôß åßìáé; Áðü ðïý
åßìáé; 164, Åñþôçóç 42á: Ï Áéþíéïò Äñüìïò
ôçò Øõ÷Þò 166, Åñþôçóç 43ç: Ôæâáë Êïõë êáé
ÄéÜìåóá 171, Åñþôçóç 44ç: ÐáñÝìâáóç ôïõ
Ïõñáíßïõ Ðíåõìáôéêïý Êüóìïõ 176, Åñþôç-
óç 45ç: ÅîÝëéîç ôùí Øõ÷þí êáé Æùéêü Âáóß-
ëåéï 179, Åñþôçóç 46ç: Ðñïóåõ÷Ýò. Õðü Í. Á.
ÌáñãéùñÞ. Ðñïóåõ÷Þ èåñáðåßáò øõ÷Þò êáé
óþìáôïò 182, Åñþôçóç 47ç: ÍôåëÝæ êáé Æù-
éêüò Ìáãíçôéóìüò 186, Åñþôçóç 48ç: ÓõóêåõÞ
Ìßëëåñ - D.N.A. - R.N.A. êáé Êýôôáñï 189, Åñþ-
ôçóç 49ç: Ðíåõìáôéóìüò êáé ÉáôñéêÞ 195, Å-
ñþôçóç 50ç: Öõóéêü Óþìá êáé Øõ÷Þ 202, Åñþ-
ôçóç 51ç: Ôé åßíáé ç Øõ÷Þ 208, Åñþôçóç 52á:
Ôá ¼íåéñá 212, Åñþôçóç 53ç: Ôé åßíáé ï Êü-
óìïò 215, Åñþôçóç 54ç: Ôï Ðñïðáôïñéêü Á-
ìÜñôçìá 220, Åñþôçóç 55ç: Ðåñß ÁããÝëùí
224, Åñþôçóç 56ç: Ðëçí ôïõ Öõóéêïý êáé Üë-
ëïé èÜíáôïé 233, Åñþôçóç 57ç: Óå ðïéåò åðé-
óôÞìåò åìðåñéÝ÷åôáé ï Åóùôåñéóìüò 236, Å-
ñþôçóç 58ç: ÐñáãìÜôùóç Þ Ãíþèé Óáõôüí
240, Åñþôçóç 59ç: Áíôßäñáóç ôçò óõíåéäÞóå-
ùò êáôÜ ôï èÜíáôï 244, Åñþôçóç 60ç: Ç
äéáéþíéóç ôïõ Åßäïõò êáé ïé ÅóùäéáóôÜóåéò
248, Åñþôçóç 61ç: Êáôáðïíôéóìüò ôçò Áôëá-
íôßäáò 252, Åñþôçóç 62á: ¢ññåí, ÈÞëõ êáé
ÊÜñìá 254, Åñþôçóç 63ç: Ç ìïñöÞ ôùí Á-
ôëÜíôùí Þ Áôëáíôßíùí 255, Åñþôçóç 64ç:
¸íùóç áíèñþðéíçò óõíåßäçóçò êáé Áéùíßïõ
257, Åñþôçóç 65ç: Ôï Êëåéäß ôçò Åõôõ÷ßáò 261,
Åñþôçóç 66ç: Ç ðáñïýóá ÆùÞ 263, Åñþôç-
óç 67ç: ÐñïÝëåõóç ôçò Øõ÷Þò 265, Åñþôç-
óç 68ç: ¸íáñîç ëåéôïõñãßáò ôïõ ÊÜñìá 268,
Åñþôçóç 69ç: ÊÜñìá óôá ÏñõêôÜ, ÖõôéêÜ êáé
ÆùéêÜ Åßäç 271, Åñþôçóç 70ç: Ìíçìåßá ÁôëÜ-
íôùí êáé ç Óößããá 273, Åñþôçóç 71ç: Êëçñï-
íïìßá åê ôùí ÁôëÜíôùí 276, Åñþôçóç 72á: Ç
äéäáóêáëßá ôïõ ÃêáïõôÜìá Âïýääá 278, Åñþ-
ôçóç 73ç: Ó÷Ýóç Âïýääá êáé Åóùôåñéóìïý
283, Åñþôçóç 74ç: Ó÷Ýóç ÃåííÞôïñïò ôùí Ðü-
íôùí êáé Øõ÷Þò 287, Åñþôçóç 75ç: Ôá ÄéÜìå-
óá êáé ç åðï÷Þ ìáò 291, Åñþôçóç 76ç: Ôá å-
ãêëÞìáôá êáé ï ðíåõìáôéêüò êüóìïò 296, Åñþ-
ôçóç 77ç: Ç ÅîÝëéîç êáé ôá ÆùéêÜ êáé ÖõôéêÜ Åß-
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
äç 299, Åñþôçóç 78ç: ÉÅ×ÙÂÁ. Ôé óçìáßíåé Å-
âñáúêÜ 302, Åñþôçóç 79ç: Èåñáðåßá äéá ôïõ
Ìáãíçôéóìïý 310, Åñþôçóç 80ç: Ìáãíçôéêüò
¾ðíïò 313, ÌåëÝôç Ðíåõìáôïèåñáðåßáò êáé
Ìáãíçôïèåñáðåßáò 318, Åñþôçóç 81ç: Ç Óýí-
äåóÞ ìáò ìå ÕøçëÝò Ïíôüôçôåò 348, ÅÐÉËÏÃÏÓ
Á´ ÅÊÄÏÓÇÓ 353
ÓÕÌÐËÇÑÙÌÁÔÉÊÁ ÊÁÉ ÅÐÅÎÇÃÇÌÁÔÉÊÁ
ÊÅÖÁËÁÉÁ ´ ÅÊÄÏÓÇÓ
Ç áíáãÝííçóç ôùí øõ÷þí - ÌåôåíóÜñêù-
óç 357, ÊÜñìá: Ï Íüìïò ôçò ÁíôáðïäïôéêÞò
Äéêáéïóýíçò 365, Ç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ ÁëÞèåéá á-
ðïôåëåß ôï öùò ôïõ êüóìïõ 374, Ôï ÅëåõèÝ-
ñéï ôçò Âïýëçóçò 382, Åôåñïêáôáëçøßåò 390,
Ôï ¢íïéãìá êáé ôï Êëåßóéìï ôçò Ðáíäçìéïõñãß-
áò 400, Ï Æùí ¢ñôïò ôïõ ÅõáããåëéóôÞ ÉùÜí-
íç äéäÜóêåé ôçí Áéùíéüôçôá 410, Åðßëïãïò ´
¸êäïóçò 419.
LIGHT IN DARKNESS CONTENTS
OF THE FIRST AND OF THE SECOND EDITION
Esoterism. N.A. Margiori's poem 8, Note 9,
Supreme Esoteric Revelation 10, Re-asking the
same Questions 11, Preface of the First Edition
13, Preface of the Second Edition 15, Intro-
duction 17, Our Esoteric Self 21, 1st Question:
What is Esoterism 27, 2nd Question: Difference
between the knowledge of the Esoteric and
Exoteric World 36, 3rd Question: Example of E-
soteric Knowledge Function 38, 4th Question:
Tree of Knowledge of the Good and the Evil
40, 5th Question: The Threesubstantial 44, 6th
Question: The Blue Mountains by Elena Blavats-
ki 49, 7th Question: The Other Dimensions for-
mation 51, 8th Question: Relation Between E-
soterism and Religion 54, 9th Question: Our
Lord Jesus Christ Appearance to Maria 60, 10th
Question: What we know about the Antiuni-
verse 61, 11th Question: What we know about
the Antimatter 62, 12th Question: Adam and
Eve 64, 13th Question: Hectoplasm 65, 14th
Question: Supernorth Race 67, 15th Question:
Man's Aura 70, 16th Question: The Cell Mys-
tery 74, 17th Question: Weight Loss by Ancient
Egyptians 81, 18th Question: Principle of Be-
ginning the Teaching of Esoterism 90, 19th
Question: The Cause of the Universe Creation
93, 20th Question: The Animals Aura 95, 21st
Question: What is TETRAKTYS. PYTHAGORAS 97,
22nd Question: Does God give His Place to any
other kind of Teachings? 101, 23rd Question:
What is Mysticism 106, POEM - CLASS - FROM -
CHAOS 24th Question: Difference between Soul
and Hectoplas 110, 25th Question: Why Karma
30 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
Exists 114, 26th Question: Insight and Inhear-
ing 118, 27th Question: Karma and Plants 120,
28th Question: Are Animals Subject to Karma?
122, 29th Question: Outerrestrial Beings' Visits
124, 30th Question: The Strong and the Weak
in Universe 129, 31st Question: What is Spiri-
tualism 133, 32nd Question: Ruin of Atlantis
140, 33rd Question: Elementary and Human
Being 146, 34th Question: The Influence of the
Elementary 147, 35th Question: Influence of
the Human Soul on Another 148, 36th Ques-
tion: Unfavorable Influence of the Elementary
on the World 150, 37th Question: Divine Plan
and the Creation Evolution 153, 38th Ques-
tion: BUDDHAS Teaching 156, 39th Question:
Do our Days Assimilate Buddhas? 159, 40th
Question: Mission of Supreme Entities 181, 41st
Question: Who Am I? Why Am I? Where Am I
From? 164, 42nd Question: The Eternal Soul
Way 166, 43rd Question: JVAL KUL and Inter-
mediates 171, 44th Question: Intervention of
the Celestial Spiritual World 176, 45th Ques-
tion: Evolution of Souls and Annimals Kingdom
179, 46th Question: Prayers. By N.A. MARGIORIS
PRAYER OF SOUL AND BODY THERAPY 182, 7th
Question: DELEZ and Animal Megnetism 186,
48th Question: Apparatus MILLER-D.N.A. and
Cell 189, 49th Question: Spiritualism and Med-
icine 195, 50th Question: Physical Body and
Soul 202, 51st Question: What is Soul 208, 52nd
Question: Dreams 212, 53rd Question: What is
World 215, 54th Question: The Original Sin 220,
55th Question: About Angels 224, 56th Ques-
tion: Except the Physical there are more Deaths
233, 57th Question: In which Sciences is Eso-
terism comprised? 236, 58th Question: Ac-
complishment or KNOW YOURSELF 240, 59th
Question: Conscience Reaction During Death
244, 60th Question: The Species Perpetuation
and the Esoteric Dimensions 248, 61st Ques-
tion: Sinking of Atlantis 252, 62nd Question:
Masculine, Feminine and Karma 254, 63rd
Question: The Atlantians or Atlantines Form
255, 64th Question: The Union of the Human
Conscience and of ETERNITY 257, 65th Ques-
tion: The Happiness Key 261, 66th Question:
The Present Life 263, 67th Question: Soul Ori-
gin 265, 68th Question: Beginning of Karma
Function 266, 69th Question: Karma in Miner-
al, Vegetable and Animal Kinds 271, 70th Ques-
tion: Monuments of Atlantes and Sphinx 273,
71st Question: Inheritance of Atlantes 276,
72nd Question: Gautama Buddha's Teaching
278, 73rd Question: Relation between Buddha
and Esoterism 283, 74th Question: Relation be-
tween Progenitor of Everything and Soul 287,
75th Question: The Intermediates and our
Times 291, 76th Question: Crimes and Spiritu-
al World 296, 77th Question: Evolution and An-
imal and Vegetable Kinds 299, 78th Question:
JEHOVA. What it means in Hebrew 302, 79th
Question: Therapy through Magnetism 310,
80th Question: Magnetic Sleep 313, Study of
Spirit therapy and Magnetotherapy 318, 81st
Question: Our Connection with High Entities
348, EPILOGUE OF THE A' EDITION 353, SUP-
PLEMENTARY AND EXPLANATORY CHAPTERS - B'
EDITION 355, 1) THE SOULS RENAISSANCE -
REINCARNATION 357, 2) KARMA: THE LAW OF
THE RETRIBUTIVE JUSTICE 365, 3) THE META-
PHYSICAL TRUTH CONSITUTES THE LIGHT OF THE
WORLD 374, 4) FREEDOM OF WILL 382, 5) HET-
EROCATALEPSIES 390, 6) OPENING AND CLOS-
ING OF OMNICREATION 400, 7) EVANGELIST
IOANNI'S LIVING BREAD TEACHES ETERNITY 410,
8) EPILOGUE OF THE B' EDITION 419.
 Ç ÈÅÏÕÑÃÉÁ ÄÉÄÁÓÊÅÉ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
ÌÅÑÏÓ ÐÑÙÔÏÍ
ÐáñÜêëçóç ôïõ óõããñáöÝá 6, ¸ãñá-
öïí 7, Ðñüëïãïò ôçò äåýôåñçò Ýêäïóçò
10, Ï Åóùôåñéóìüò Áðïêáëõðôüìåíïò
13, Ôá ðåñéëáìâáíüìåíá Ãåíéêþò 16, Á-
öéÝñùóç 21, Ç ÌÝãéóôç ÁëÞèåéá 22, Ç
ÏñèÞ Óïößá êáôÜ Ðáýëïí 23, Õðáéíéãìïß
ðåñß ôçò ÁíáóôÜóåùò 24, Ï ÌÝãáò Ðáý-
ëïò éäñõôÞò ôïõ ×ñéóôéáíéêïý Ìõóôéêé-
óìïý 31, ÁõôïìÝäùí. Ðïßçìá óõìâïëé-
êü 39, Ç êÜèïäïò ôù Øõ÷þí 43, ¼íôá å-
ðß ÁðïóôïëÞ 47, Ç Ìåôáøõ÷éêÞ ùò Åðé-
óôÞìç 54, Ï ÷ñüíïò ÌçäÝí óôïí Åóù-
ôåñéóìü 59, Ìõóôéêéóìüò 77, Åóùóôñå-
öÞò êáé ÅîùóôñåöÞò Ìõóôéêéóìüò 104,
Ï Ìõóôéêéóìüò Ãñçãïñßïõ ôïõ ÓéíáÀôç
125, ÉùÜííçò ï Èåïëüãïò óõíèåìåëéù-
ôÞò ôïõ ×ñ. Ìõóôéêéóìïý 136, Åêôüðëá-
óìá 144, ÁðïêÜëõøç ëåéôïõñãßáò ôùí
21 Áêôßíùí ôïõ áíèñþðéíïõ üíôïò - ôï
Æùéêü Ñåýìá 153,
ÌÅÑÏÓ ÄÅÕÔÅÑÏÍ
Ç Èåïõñãßá ÄéäÜóêåé - ìÝñïò äåýôå-
ñï 165, Ï Óêåðôéêéóìüò ôïõ Éùâ 167, Åé-
óáãùãÞ, áíÜëõóç, åöáñìïãÞ ôçò Èå-
ïõñãßáò 168, Ïé ÅðôÜ Ìõóôçñéþäåéò Áý-
ëáêåò Åðéêïéíùíßáò ôçò áíèñùðïøõ÷Þò
ìåôÜ ôïõ ÅóùâÜèïõò 174, Èåïëüãïò Éù-
Üííçò ï ÅõáããåëéóôÞò ï Ìõóôéêüò ôçò
Ãíþóåùò 184, Ôá ¸óù êáé ¸îù Óýìðá-
íôá 189, Ç óå ãåíéêÝò ãñáììÝò ðñáêôéêÞ
åîÜóêçóç êáé åöáñìïãÞ ôïõ Åíäïóôñå-
öïýò ÓéíáÀôéêïõ Ìõóôéêéóìïý. Çóõ÷á-
óôÝò, Ïìöáëïóêüðïé, ÌÝèïäïò Ãñçãï-
ñßïõ ôïõ ÓéíáÀôç 204, Íéêüäçìïõ ôïõ Á-
ãéïñåßôç åöáñìïóìÝíç ðñùôüôõðç ÌÝ-
èïäïò Åíäïóôñåöïýò Ìõóôéêéóìïý 218,
Ìáãíçôïèåñáðåßá 234, Âáóêáíßá - ÌÜ-
ôéáóìá êáé ç èåñáðåßá ôïõò 245, Áßôéá
Âáóêáíßáò êáé ÌáôéÜóìáôïò Áíèñþðùí,
Æþùí, Öõôþí, Ïñõêôþí 255, ÐÜñáäåéã-
ìá ôñüðïõ èåñáðåßáò Âáóêáíßáò êáé Ìá-
ôéÜóìáôïò ôçò åðï÷Þò ìáò 260, Ìáãíç-
ôïèåñáðåßá Íåõñáëãßáò ðñïóþðïõ, ï-
äüíôùí, ïöèáëìþí, áõôéþí êáé ëáéìïý
(èõñåïåéäÞò áäÝíáò) 264, ÌÝèïäïò Ìõ-
óôéêÞò Åíþóåùò ðñï÷ñéóôéáíéêÞò åðï-
÷Þò - ÌéèñáúêÜ ÌõóôÞñéá ôïõ ¢ôôéïò êáé
ÊõâÝëçò 270, ÓõìâïëéêÞ áíáðáñÜóôá-
óç ÅñìçôéêÞò ôåëåôïõñãßáò êáé ×ñéóôéá-
íéêÞò Áðïëõôñþóåùò. Ç åïñôÞ ôùí éå-
ñþí Çëéïóôáóßùí 277, Ç éåñÜ íýêôá ôçò
Öùôßóåùò êáé ôçò ÁãÜðçò 279, ¾ìíïò
ðñïò ôçí Áéùíéüôçôá, «Åßíáé ç þñá Áäåë-
Ç ÁËËÇ ÏØÇ ÔÏÕ ÄÏÃÌÁÔÏÓ
ÔÏÕ ÅÑÉ× ÖÏÍ ÍÔÁÉÍÉÊÅÍ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
ÌÅÑÏÓ ÐÑÙÔÏ
Ìüíéìç äéÜêñéóç áíÜìåóá óôçí ýëç êáé
óôï ðíåýìá 7, ÐáñÜêëçóç ôïõ óõããñáöÝá
8, ÁöéÝñùóç 9, Ðëçñïöïñéáêü óçìåßùìá
ãéá ôï ðáñüí âéâëßï 11, ÁíïéêôÞ åðéóôïëÞ
ôïõ óõããñáöÝá ðñïò ôïí åîáßñåôï åñåõíç-
ôÞ ¸ñé÷ Öïí Íôáßíéêåí 15, ÌÝóá óôïí Åóù-
ôåñéóìü åìðåñéÝ÷ïíôáé êé áð’ ôçí ïõóßá ôïõ
ðñïÝñ÷ïíôáé ïé ÃÞéíïé, ïé åîùãÞéíïé êáé ðñï-
ðáíôüò ïé ÕðåñãÞéíïé 29, Äß÷ùò öáíáôéóìü
Èñçóêåõôéêü, Åðéóôçìïíéêü êáé Ìåôáöõóéêü
67, Óêïðüò ôïõ Ýñãïõ ôïõ åßíáé 79, Ðñüëï-
ãïò89, Õðåíèýìéóç 119.
ÌÅÑÏÓ ÄÅÕÔÅÑÏ
Ï Ðßíäáñïò áðïêáëýðôåé 133, Âñá÷åßåò
öïß» 290, ýìíïò åðéêëÞóåùò ðñïò ôçí
áéùíéüôçôá, ðïßçìá, óôß÷ïé, áðüäïóç
292, ÌïõóéêÞ áðåéêüíéóç ýìíïõ. Ìåëï-
ðïßçóç áõôïý õðü ôçò êáò ¢ííáò Ìü-
ó÷ïõ 294, Ç èåïõñãßá êáé ç Åêêëçóßá
295, ÓõìðåñÜóìáôá 305, ÍÝá óõìðëç-
ñùìáôéêÞ êáé åðåîçãçìáôéêÞ ýëç 309,
ÁéèåñéêÞ Êüëõøç ôïõ öõóéêïý ìáò Êü-
óìïõ êé üëïõ ôïõ äéáëõìÝíïõ Óýìðá-
íôïò 311, Èåïõñãüò êáé Èåïõñãßá 322,
ÁéãõðôéáêÞ Èåïëïãßá êáé Ìýèïò ôïõ ¼óé-
ñé, ôçò ºóéäáò êáé ¿ñïõ 329, Ç ÌõóôéêÞ
Áíáãêáéüôçôá 341, Ôá ÐñùôïóðÝñìáôá
348, Áéãõðôéáêüò êáé Åâñáúêüò Ìõóôéêé-
óìüò, Ôáñþ êáé Óåöéñþè 357, ÌÝñïò
Ðñþôï Ôáñþ 359, ÔÁÑÙ - ï Áéãõðôéáêüò
Óõìâïëéóìüò «Ôáñþ» 361, ÌÝñïò Äåý-
ôåñï Óåöéñþè 373, Óåöéñþè 375, ÌÝñïò
Ôñßôï 381, Áíôéóôïé÷ßåò ôïõ Åâñáúêïý Áë-
öáâÞôïõ 383, ÓõìðåñÜóìáôá 387, Åðß-
ëïãïò Ðñþôçò Åêäüóåùò 395, Åðßëïãïò
Äåýôåñçò ¸êäïóçò 399, Ðßíáêáò Ðåñéå-
n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
Ç ÈÅÏÕÑÃÉÁ ÄÉÄÁÓÊÅÉ
Åßíáé ôï ôñßôï êáôÜ óåéñÜ Ýñãï ôïõ
Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ êáé ðñùôïåêäüèçêå ôï
1975 (äýï åêäüóåéò). Åßíáé ôçò
ìåôáöõóéêÞò ôï ðñïúüí . ÌÝóá ôïõ
öÝñíåé ôïí Áéãõðôéáêü êáé ôïí
Åëëçíï÷ñéóôéáíéêü Ìõóôéêéóìü. ÅñìÞò
ï ÔñéóìÝãéóôïò ìá êáé Íéêüäçìïò ï
Áãéïñåßôçò. ¸íáò óõãêåñáóìüò ôçò
ðñï÷ñéóôéáíéêÞò êáé ÷ñéóôéáíéêÞò
ðïñåßáò ôïõ áèÜíáôïõ åëëçíéêïý
ðíåýìáôïò.
n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
THEURGY TEACHING
This is N. Margiori's third work in turn that was published for the first
time in 1975 (two editions). It is the product of the metaphysics. It
bears within it the Egyptian and the Greek-christianic Mysticism. Her-
mes the Three-greatest but also Nikodimos the Sacred Mountainous. A
mixing of the prechristianic and of the christianic course of the im-
mortal Greek spirit.
áðáíôÞóåéò óå äéÜöïñá áðïóðÜóìáôá êå-
öáëáßùí ôïõ âéâëßïõ ôïõ ¸ñé÷ Öïí Íôáßíéêåí
«ÁíáìíÞóåéò áðü ôï ÌÝëëïí» êåö. 4ï, óåë.
62 135, Áðü ôï âéâëßï ôïõ Å.Ö.Í. «Åðéóôñï-
öÞ óô’ Üóôñá», ï ìáãéêüò ëý÷íïò ôïõ Áëá-
íôßí êáé ïé ìç÷áíéóìïß ôïõ 157, Áðü ôï âéâëßï
ôïõ Å.Ö.Í. «ÁíáìíÞóåéò áðü ôï ìÝëëïí» Ãéá-
ôß ìéëÜåé ï Èåüò óôïí ðëçèõíôéêü195, Áðü ôï
âéâëßï ôïõ Å.Ö.Í. «ÓðïñÜ óôï ÄéÜóôçìá». Ç
êáôÜñá ôùí Öáñáþ 215, Áðü ôï âéâëßï ôïõ
Å.Ö.Í. «ÓðïñÜ óôï ÄéÜóôçìá». Ðïéïò Þ ôé äç-
ìéïýñãçóå ôçí ÕöÞëéï 231, Áðü ôï âéâëßï
ôïõ Å.Ö.Í. «ÓðïñÜ óôï ÄéÜóôçìá». Ðþò áðü
ôïí Íåïëéèéêü Üíèñùðï îåðÞäçóå ï Homo
Sapiens 237, Áðü ôï âéâëßï ôïõ Å.Ö.Í. «Óðï-
ñÜ óôï ÄéÜóôçìá». Ìýèïé ãéá ôç ÃÝíåóç ôçò
Ãçò 249, Áðü ôï âéâëßï ôïõ Å.Ö.Í. «Åðéóôñï-
öÞ óô’ Üóôñá». Ôï Ðñïðáôïñéêü áìÜñôçìá
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
÷ïìÝíùí 406.
THEURGY TEACHING
THE SOUL ETERNAL WAY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART ONE
WRITER'S REQEST 6, DOCUMENT 7,
PREFACE OF THE SECOND EDITION 10, E-
SOTERISM REVEALED 13, THE COMPRISED
GENERALLY 16, DEDICATION 21, THE
GREATEST TRUTH 22, THE RIGHT WISDOM
ACCORDING TO PAVLOS 23, HINTS ABOUT
RESURRECTION 24, GREAT PAVLOS -
FOUNDER OF CHRISTIANIC MYSTICISM 31,
AUTOMETHON - SYMBOLIC POEM 39, THE
SOULS DESCENT 43, BEINGS ON MISSION
47, METAPSYCHIS AS SCIENCE 54,ZERO
TIME IN ESOTERISM 59, MYSTICISM 77, IN-
TROVERT - AND - EXTROVERT MYSTICISM
104 , GRIGORIOS SINAITI'S MYSTICISM 125,
IOANNIS THEOLOGOS - THE CO-FOUNDER
OF THE CHRISTIANIC MYSTICISM 136,
263, Áðü ôï âéâëßï ôïõ Å.Ö.Í. «ÓðïñÜ óôï
ÄéÜóôçìá». Óýìâïëá êáé áðïóõìâïëéóìüò
ôïõò, áðïóõìâïëßæïíôáé 99 óýìâïëá 283,
Áðü ôï ìüëéò êõêëïöïñÞóáí âéâëßï´ôïõ
Å.Ö.Í. «Ôá Èáýìáôá». ÐåñéëçðôéêÞ ãåíéêÞ á-
ðÜíôçóç 329, Áðü ôï âéâëßï ôïõ Å.Ö.Í. «Ï
êüóìïò ìïõ óå åéêüíåò» óåë. 171. Áñ÷áßá Áé-
ãõðôéáêÜ ÌïíôÝëá ÁåñïðëÜíùí 349, Åðßëï-
ãïò 359, Éóôïñéêü ôïõ âéâëßïõ áõôïý 361, Ëß-
ãá ëüãéá ãéá ôïí óõããñáöÝá 363, ÌåñéêÜ ëü-
ãéá ãéá ôï ðïëõäéÜóôáôï Ýñãï ôïõ 365, Êõ-
êëïöïñïýíôá ôïõ ßäéïõ âéâëßá
THE OTHER SIDE OF ERICH VON
DAINIKEN’S DOGMA
CONTENTS
PART ONE
Constant distinction between matter and
spirit 7, The writer's request 8, Dedication 9,
31 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
HECTOPLASM 144, REVELATION OF OP-
ERATION OF THE 21 RAYS OF THE HUMAN
BEING - THE ANNIMAL CURRENT 153.
PART TWO
THEURGY TEACHING PART TWO 165 ,
JOV'S SCEPTICISM 167, INTRODUCTION -
ANALYSIS - APPLICATION OF THEURGY OF
PART TWO 168, THE SEVEN - MYSTERIOUS
- FURROWINGS - OF COMMUNICATION OF
MAN-SOUL WITH THE ESOTERIC DEPTH
174 , THEOLOGOS IOANNIS, THE SECRET
EVANGELIST OF KNOWLEDGE 184, THE U-
NIVERSES INSIDE AND OUTSIDE 189, THE
GENERAL PRACTICE AND APPLICATION OF
THE INTROVERSIVE SINAITIC MYSTICISM
204, NICODIMO'S THE AGIORITIS APPLIED
ORIGINAL METHOD OF INTROVERSIVE MYS-
TICISM 218, MAGNETOTHERAPY 234, EVIL
EYE - SPELL AND THEIR THERAPY 245, THE
CAUSE OF SPELL AND EVIL EYE TO MEN -
ANIMALS - PLANTS AND MINERALS 255,
EXAMPLE OF THERAPY WAY OF EVILE EYE
AND SPELL IN OUR TIMES 260, MAGNE-
TOTHERAPY OF NEURALGIA - FACE -
TEETH - EYES - EARS AND NECK (THYROID
GLAND) 264, METHOD OF MYSTIC UNION
OF THE PRE- CHRISTIANIC ERA - ATTIO'S
AND KIVELI'S MYTHRAIC MYSTERIES 270,
SYMBOLIC REPRESENTATION OF HERMITIC
TELETURGY AND OF CHRISTIANIC DELIV-
ERANCE - THE FEAST OF THE HOLY SOL-
STICE 277, THE HOLY NIGHT OF ENLIGHT-
MENT AND LOVE 279, HYMN TO ETERNI-
TY "TIME HAS COME, BROTHERS" 290,
HYMN OF APPEAL TO ETERNITY - POEM -
VERSES - PERFORMANCE 292, MUSICAL
DEPICTION OF HYMN - ITS SETTING TO MU-
SIC BY Mrs. ANNA MOSCHOU 294, THEUR-
GY AND CHURCH 295, CONCLUSIONS 305,
NEW SUPPLEMENTARY AND EXPLANTORY
MATERIAL 309, ETHERIC COVER OF OUR
PHYSICAL WORLD AND OF ALL THE DIS-
SOLVED UNIVERSE 311, THEURGOS AND
THEURGY 322, EGYPTIAN THEOLOGY AND
OSIRI'S, ISI'S AND ORO'S MYTH 329, THE
MYSTIC NECESSITY 341, THE ORIGINAL
SPERMS 348, EGYPTIAN AND HEBREW
MYSTICISM - TARO AND SEPHIROTH 357,
PART ONE TARO 359, TARO - THE EGYPT-
IAN SYMBOLISM "TARO" 361, PART TWO
SEPHIROTH 373, SEPHIROTH 375, PART
THREE 381, CORRESPONDENCES OF THE
HEBREW ALPHABET 383, CONCLUSIONS
387, EPILOGUE OF THE FIRST EDITION 395,
EPILOGUE OF THE SECOND EDITION 399,
TABLE OF CONTENTS 406.
Informative note for the present book 11,
The writer's open letter to excellent searcher
Erich von Daineken 15, In Esoterism Terres-
trials, Outterrestrials, and mainly Hyperter-
restrial are comprised and they come from
its substance 29, Without any Religious, Sci-
entific and Metaphysical phanatism 67, Aim
of this work is 79, Preface 89, Reminder 119.
PART TWO
Pindaros reveals 139, Short answers to d-
ifferent passages of the chapters from Erich
von Daineken's book "Memories from the Fu-
ture", Chap. IV, page 62,135, From Erich Von
Daineken's book "Return to the stars" A-
landin's magic oil-lamp and its mechanisms
157, From Erich Von Daineken's book "Mem-
ories from the Future" , Why God speaks in
the plural number 195, From Erich Von
 n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
Ç ÁËËÇ ÏØÇ THE OTHER SIDE OF ERICH
ÔÏÕ ÄÏÃÌÁÔÏÓ ÔÏÕ VON DAINIKEN’S DOGMA
ÅÑÉ× ÖÏÍ ÍÔÁÉÍÉÊÅÍ This is N. A. Margiori’s fourth work and it was published for the first time
in 1976 (two editions). In those times Dainiken dazzled the restless read-
Åßíáé ôï ôÝôáñôï Ýñãï ôïõ Í. Á. Ìáñãéù- ers. Then, the writer wanted to make known the Esoteric side of the al-
ñÞ êáé ðñùôïåêäüèçêå ôï 1976 (äýï åê- legations presented in Dainiken’s books.
äüóåéò). ¹ôáí ç åðï÷Þ ðïõ ï Íôáßíéêåí åß- This work, "The Other Side of Erich Von Dainiken’s Dogma" contains
÷å åêèáìâþóåé ôï áíÞóõ÷ï áíáãíùóôéêü within it the revelation of the hidden mysteries of all the epochs and it
êïéíü. Ôüôå ï óõããñáöÝáò èÝëçóå íá äþ- enlightens abundantly every reader about the symbols used in all the pre-
óåé ôçí ÅóùôåñéêÞ ðëåõñÜ ôùí ðáñïõóéá- ages of our blue planet.
æïìÝíùí óôá âéâëßá ôïõ Íôáßíéêåí. At the same time, it answers by inexhaustible arguments, to Erich Von
Ôï Ýñãï ôïýôï «Ç ¢ëëç ¼øç ôïõ Äüã- Dainiken’s numerous and endless questions, to the very ancient findings,
ìáôïò ôïõ ¸ñé÷ Öïí Íôáßíéêåí», ìÝóá ôïõ ðåñéÝ÷åé ôçí áðïêÜëõøç êñõì- to the in explicable.. catvings on the rocks, to the inconceivable passages
ìÝíùí ìõóôçñßùí üëùí ôùí åðï÷þí êáé Üðëåôá äéáöùôßæåé ôïí êÜèå áíá- of the old Scriptures and proves him that it is not the Out-terrestrial be-
ãíþóôç óôá ÷ñçóéìïðïéçèÝíôá óýìâïëá üëùí ôùí ðñïáéþíùí ôïõ ãáëá- ings that have guided and still guide us, but the Over-terrestrial beings
íïý ðëáíÞôç ìáò. who did. so.
ÓõíÜìá áðáíôÜåé ìå áíåîÜíôëçôá åðé÷åéñÞìáôá óôïõ ê. ¸ñé÷ Öïí Íôáß-
íéêåí ôéò Üöèïíåò êáé ôéò áôÝëåéùôåò åñùôÞóåéò, ðÜíù óôá áñ÷áéüôáôá åõ-
ñÞìáôá, ôá áíåîÞãçôá âñá÷ïóêáëßóìáôá, óô’ áêáôáíüçôá åäÜöéá ôùí ðá- 237, From Erich Von Daineken's book "Sow- Miracles". Summary general answer 329,
ëáéþí ãñáöþí êáé ôïõ áðïäåéêíýåé üôé äåí åßíáé ïé ÅîùãÞéíïé ðïõ ìáò ïäÞ- ing in the Space". Tales for the Birth of Earth From Erich Von Daineken's book "My world
ãçóáí êáé ìáò ïäçãïýí, áëëÜ ïé ÕÐÅÑÃÇÉÍÏÉ. 249, From Erich Von Daineken's book "Re- in pictures", page 171. "Ancient Egyptian Air-
turn to the Stars". The Original Sin 263, From planes Models" 349, Epilogue 359, Back-
Erich Von Daineken's book "Sowing in the ground of this book 361, A few words about
Daineken's book "Sowing in the Space". or what created World 231, From Erich Von Space". Symbols and their desymbolism, 99 the writer 363, A few words about his mul-
Pharaos' curse 215, From Erich Von Daineken's book "Sowing in the Space". How symbols are desymbolized 283, From Erich tidimensional work 365, Circulating books of
Daineken's book "Sowing in the Space". Who HOMO SAPIENS sprang from Neolithic man Von Daineke's recently published book "The same.

n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ

THE SECRET ÔÏ ÌÕÓÔÉÊÏ
OF HATHA YOGA ÔÇÓ ×ÁÈÁ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ
This is the writer's fifth book whish was published for the first time Åßíáé ôï ðÝìðôï âéâëßï ôïõ óõããñáöÝá
in 1976 (two editions). It is the commencement of N. Margiori's com- êáé ðñùôïåêäüèçêå ôï 1976 (äýï åêäü-
plete work in Yoga in Greece. In this book, the writer refers constant- óåéò). Åßíáé ç áðáñ÷Þ ôïõ ïëïêëçñùìÝ-
ly to Kriya Yoga, that after a few years he presented officially in Greece, íïõ Ýñãïõ ôçò Ãéüãêá ôïõ Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ
theoretically and practically (see the homonymous book Kriya Yoga). óôçí ÅëëÜäá. Ó' áõôü áíáöÝñåôáé óõíÝ-
It is about a practical philosophical book that introduces, in its own way, ÷åéá óôçí Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá, ðïõ ìåôÜ áðü ëß-
the reader to the secrets of the most ancient science in earth, that is ãá ÷ñüíéá ðáñïõóßáóå êáé åðßóçìá óôçí
of YOGA. If the searcher gets really excited of the revelations pre- ÅëëÜäá èåùñçôéêÜ êáé ðñáêôéêÜ (âëÝðå
sented in this little but important work, the union of the lower ego with ïìþíõìï âéâëßï Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá).
the higher Ego will be achieved. Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá Ýíá ðñáêôéêü öéëïóïöéêü
âéâëßï, ðïõ åéóÜãåé ìå ôïí äéêü ôïõ ôñüðï ôïí áíáãíþóôç óôá ìõóôéêÜ ôçò
áñ÷áéüôåñçò åðéóôÞìçò ôçò áíèñùðüôçôáò, ôç ÃÉÏÃÊÁ. Ç Ýíùóç ôïõ ÷áìç-
Ô Ï Ì Õ Ó Ô É ÊÏ Ô Ç Ó × Á ÈÁ Ã É Ï Ã ÊÁ 75, ÁæÜíåò ÄéÜöïñåò 80, Íáäßò ëïý åãþ ìå ôï áíþôåñï Åãþ ëáâáßíåé ÷þñá áí ï åñåõíçôÞò ðñáãìáôéêÜ å-
ÐÅ ÑÉÅ× Ï ÌÅ ÍÁ 90, Ç ×Ü èá Ãéü ãêá êáé êÜ èå Ãéü ãêá
Ðñï-ðñü ëï ãïò 7, Ðñü ëï ãïò 10, 93, Åðßëïãïò 109, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá
ñåèéóèåß ìå ôéò áðïêáëýøåéò ôïõ ìéêñïý áëëÜ óçìáíôéêïý áõôïý Ýñãïõ.
Åé óá ãù ãÞ 13, Ìå ôá åé óá ãù ãé êÜ 18, 112
Èå ù ñç ôé êü ÌÝ ñïò 20, ×á ëÜ ñù óç duction 13, Postintroductory 18, 61, Different Muntras 75, Differ-
28, ¢ëëá åßäç ÷áëÜñùóçò 34, THE SECRET OF HATHA YOGA Theoretical Part 20, Relaxation 28, ent Asanas 80, Nadis 90, Hatha Yo-
Äéá ëï ãé óìüò 42, ÓÜ êñá - ÊÝ íôñá - CONTENTS Other Relaxation kinds 34, Medita- ga and every Yoga 93, Epilogue
Äõ íÜ ìåéò 61, Ìïý íôñåò ÄéÜ öï ñåò Forword 7, Preface 10, Intro- tion 42, Sakra - Centers - Powers 109, Contents 112.

Ç ÐÕÈÁÃÏÑÅÉÁ ÁÑÉÈÌÏÓÏÖÉÁ äÞëùóçò ÅóùäõíÜìåùí, ìå óõíåñãïýò ÊÅÖÁËÁÉÏ ÔÅÔÁÑÔÏ ÊÅÖÁËÁÉÏ ÅÂÄÏÌÏ

ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ ÐÑÙÔÇÓ
ÊÁÉ ÄÅÕÔÅÑÇÓ ÅÊÄÏÓÇÓ
ÁöéÝñùóç 5, ÐáñÜêëçóç 6, Ïìáêïåßï
Þ Ïìáêüúï 7, Ðñüëïãïò ôçò ðñþôçò Ýê-
äïóçò 9, Ðñüëïãïò ôçò äåýôåñçò Ýê-
äïóçò 13, ÅéóáãùãÞ 21.
ÊÅÖÁËÁÉÏ ÐÑÙÔÏ
Áñéèìïß - Óýìâïëá óõãêåêñéìÝíçò åê-
óôï Ó÷Ýäéï ôïõò Íüìïõò 24 ¢ñôéïé êáé Ðåñéôôïß áñéèìïß, áñíçôé- Ïé Ýîé ìÝñåò ôçò Äçìéïõñãßáò êáé ç Ý-
ÊÅÖÁËÁÉÏ ÄÅÕÔÅÑÏ êÝò êáé èåôéêÝò ó÷Ýóåéò 70. âäïìç ôçò áíÜðáõóçò ôïõ Èåßïõ Íïõ (6
ÐáñáóôáôéêÞ áðåéêüíéóç åóùäõíÜ- ÊÅÖÁËÁÉÏ ÐÅÌÐÔÏ + 1 = 7. 4 + 3 = 7). ËåðôïìÝñåéåò ãéá
ìåùí ìå áñéèìïýò üðùò ôïõò ãíùñß- Ï ÷ñüíïò êáé ïé åðôÜ ôñï÷ïß ôïõ 89. ôï Å ðôá äé êü êáé Åí íå á äé êü Óý óôç ìá
æïõìå Þ üðùò ôïõ áðåéêüíéæáí ïé áñ- ÊÅÖÁËÁÉÏ ÅÊÔÏ 139.
÷áßïé ðïëéôéóìïß 42 ÓõóôÞìáôá áðüêñõöá ôçò Áñéèìïóï- ÊÅÖÁËÁÉÏ ÏÃÄÏÏ
ÊÅÖÁËÁÉÏ ÔÑÉÔÏ ößáò: Åðôáäéêü, Åííåáäéêü, Äùäåêáäé- Ðõèáãüñåéïò Ìõóôéêéóìüò 171, Åðß-
ÔÜîç áðü ôï ×Üïò 54. êü, áðïóõìâïëéæüìåíá 112. ëïãïò Á´ Ýêäïóçò 191.

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 32 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
THE PYTHAGOREAN ARITHMOSOPHY Ç ÐÕÈÁÃÏÑÅÉÁ
This book was published for the first tune in 1977 (three editions). ÁÑÉÈÌÏÓÏÖÉÁ
The date of its edition gives us the following: 1+9+7=24=2+4=6. It
is N. Margiori's sixth book and the result of its edition year is also the Ðñùôïåêäüèçêå ôï 1977 (ôÝóóåñéò
number six. According Divine Pythagoras, the number six is the num- åêäüóåéò). Ç ðñþôç ÷ñïíïëïãßá Ýêäï-
ber of the Trinity, the refolding being the positive and negative con- óÞò ôïõ ìáò äß íåé ôá å îÞò:
nection of the couples. They are the plus and the minus for each tri- 1+9+7+7=24=2+4=6. Åßíáé ôï Ýêôï
adic development, the yang and yin, they are the polarizations of the âéâëßï ôïõ Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ êáé ôï áðï-
thesises and of the antithesises. ôÝëåóìá ôïõ ÷ñüíïõ ÝêäïóÞò ôïõ åß-
The wisdom of the numbers with their substantial distinctions in íáé å ðß óçò ï á ñéè ìüò Ý îé. Êá ôÜ ôïí
even and odd,. represents the eternal Unit., in the drawings of the Èåßï Ðõèáãüñá ï áñéèìüò Ýîé åßíáé ôçò
multiplicity. In its holy branchings, of the numbers wisdom, the ÔñéÜäáò ç áíáäßðëùóç, åßíáé ôùí æåõ-
searcher of the numbers finds the essence itself, that separated in the ãþí ç èåôéêÞ êáé áñíçôéêÞ óýæåõîç. Åßíáé ôá óõí êáé ðëçí êáôÜ ôñéá-
natural coating., in its external form only, gives the impression that it äéêÞ áíÜðôõîç, ôï ãéáíãê êáé ãéí, åßíáé ôùí èÝóåùí êáé áíôéèÝóåùí
is divided in infinite amounts, while in the esoteric reality it remains ïé ðïëþóåéò.
integral and complete. Ç óïößá ôùí áñéèìþí ìå ôéò ïõóéáóôéêÝò äéáêñßóåéò ôïõò óå Üñ-
With the assistance of the Pythagorean Arithmosophy, we are initi- ôéïõò êáé ðåñéôôïýò, áíôéðñïóùðåýåé ôçí áéþíéá ÌïíÜäá, óôçò ðïë-
ëáðëüôçôáò ôá äéáãñáöÞìáôá. ÌÝóá óôéò Üãéåò äéáêëáäþóåéò ôçò,
ated in Theology, in the arithmetic scale, to the ascension on the spir-
ôçò óïößáò ôùí áñéèìþí, âñßóêåé ï åñåõíçôÞò ôùí áñéèìþí ôçí ßäéá
itual area, tha the searched, true spiritual Theology develops..
ôçí ïõóßá, ðïõ äéá÷ùñéæüìåíç óôï öõóéêü åðÝíäõìá, óôçí åîùôå-
By the mathematical reasonableness, the hyperintellectual ideolo-
ñéêÞ ìüíïí ìïñöÞ ôçò, äßíåé ôçí åíôýðùóç ðùò åßíáé ÷ùñéóìÝíç óå
gy of conceiving the other -however invisible world - is perceptible. It
Üðåéñá ðïóÜ, åíþ óôçí åóùôåñéêÞ ðñáãìáôéêüôçôá, ìÝíåé áêÝñáéá
teaches the Truth and it manages to introduce us in the substantial
êáé ïëïêëçñùìÝíç.
truth of the Numbers. Enjoy reading the Pythagorean thoughts for
Ìå ôçí âïÞèåéá ôçò Ðõèáãüñåéáò Áñéèìïóïößáò åéóáãüìáóôå óôç
the Beyond.
Èåïëïãßá, óôçí áñéèìçôéêÞ êëßìáêá, ãéá áíÜâáóç óôçí ðíåõìáôéêÞ
ðåñéï÷Þ, ðïõ ôçí áîéïëïãåß ç áíáæçôïýìåíç áëçèéíÞ ðíåõìáôéêÞ
Èåïëïãßá.
ÓÕÌÐËÇÑÙÌÁÔÉÊÁ Dedication 5, Request 6, Omakoeio or
ÊÁÉ ÅÐÅÎÇÃÇÌÁÔÉÊÁ Omakoio 7, Preface of the First Edition 9, Ìå ôç ìáèçìáôéêÞ ëïãéêÞ ãßíåôáé áíôéëçðôÞ ç õðåñäéáíïçôéêÞ êï-
ÊÅÖÁËÁÉÁ ´ ÅÊÄÏÓÇÓ Preface of the Second Edition 13, Intro- óìïèåùñßá ôçò áíôßëçøçò ôïõ Üëëïõ - áïñÜôïõ üìùò êüóìïõ. Äé-
Ç Ðõèáãüñåéá èåùñßá ôùí áñéèìþí duction 21. äÜóêåé ôçí ÁëÞèåéá êáé êáôïñèþíåé íá ìáò åéóÜîåé óôçí ïõóéáóôéêÞ
197, Ó÷Ýóåéò Ïõóßáò - Ðíåõìáôïåíåñãé- FIRST CHAPTER áëÞèåéá ôùí Áñéèìþí. Áðïëáýóôå äéáâÜæïíôåò ôïõò Ðõèáãüñåéïõò
óìïý êáé óõìâüëùí - áñéèìþí óôïí êü- Numbers - Symbol the Esoteric powers ëïãéóìïýò ãéá ôï õðåñðÝñáí.
óìï ôçò ìïñöÞò 208, Ç Ïõóßá - ÌïíÜäá åß- concrete expression, having the Laws as
íáé ç áñ÷Þ êáé ôï ôÝëïò ðÜóçò åêäÞëù- accessories to the project 24.
óçò ôçò Ðáíäçìéïõñãßáò 218, Ôåôñáêôýò SECOND CHAPTER tadic, Enneadic, Dodecadic, desymbolized bers 197, Relations of Substance-Spiriten-
åßíáé ôï éäåáôü üñãáíï ôçò áõôüìáôçò êá- Representative depiction of the Esoteric 112. ergirsm and of symbols-numbers in the
ôáãñáöÞò ôùí óõíôåëïýìåíùí äïíÞóå- powers with numbers as we know the or SEVENTH CHAPTER forms world. 208, The Substance-Unit is
ùí - ðñÜîåùí ïðïõäÞðïôå ôùí êüóìùí as the ancient civilizations described them The six days of Creation and the sev- the beginning and the end of every Om-
225, Óïößá åßíáé ç ãíþóç ôçò ÁëÞèåéáò 42. enth day of the repose of the Divine Mind nicreation expression 218, Tetractys is the
232, Ï Íïõò ôïõ Ðõèáãüñá 237, Ôï ìÝãá THIRD CHAPTER (6+1=7. 4+3=7) 139. Details for the Hep- conceptual organ of the automatic record
èåþñçìá ðïõ åîéóïýôáé ìå ôçí ÁëÞèåéá. Order from Chaos 54. tadic and the Enneadic systems of the vibrations-actions everywhere in
ÌçäÝí óõí Üðåéñïí ßóïí ÌïíÜäá 244, Ôï FOURTH CHAPTER EIGHTH CHAPTER the world 225, Wisdom is the knowledge
Ðõèáãüñåéï ðíåýìá 253, Ï Ðõèáãüñáò ìÝ- Even and Odd numbers, negative and Pythagorean Mysticism 171, Epilogue of of truth 232, Pythagora's Mind 237, The
ãáò ìýóôçò 258, Åðßëïãïò ´ Ýêäïóçò 265. positive relations 70. the A' edition 191. great theorem that is equalized with truth.
FIFTH CHAOTER COMPLEMENTARY Zero plus infinite equals Unit 244, The
THE PYTHAGOREAN ARITMOSOPHY Time and its seven wheels 89. AND EXPLANATORY Pythagorean spirit 253, Pythagorean, the
CONTENTS OF THE FIRST SIXTH CHAPTER CHAPTERS - B' EDITION great myst 258, Epilogue of the B' edition
AND OF THE SECOND EDITION Occult systems of Arithmosophy, Hep- The Pythagorean Theory of the num- 265.

ÔÁ ÅËÅÕÓÉÍÉÁ ÌÕÓÔÇÑÉÁ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
Ðñüëïãïò ôçò ðñþôçò Ýêäïóçò 7,
Ðñüëïãïò ôçò äåýôåñçò Ýêäïóçò 13, THE ELEFSINIAN MYSTERIES
Ðñüëïãïò ôçò ôñßôçò Ýêäïóçò 15, Åéóá-
ãùãÞ 17, Ç ÅóùôåñéêÞ êáé ÅîùôåñéêÞ It is N. Margiori's seventh book in turn, and it was published for the first time in 1978 (4th editions).
äñáóôçñéüôçôá ôùí õðåýèõíùí ãéá ôç After Pythagora's apotheosis (see the sixth book) the Elefsinian Initiation should be notified.
äéåîáãùãÞ ôùí Ìõóôçñßùí - ôá ÌéêñÜ
I wonder why did the Athenian State rely upon this initiation? Why did the Ionic side of the Hellenism
ÌõóôÞñéá ôçò ¢ãñáò 23, Ôá ÌåãÜëá Ìõ-
óôÞñéá, ôá ÓåìíÜ ¼ñãéá 29, Ôá Ëåãüìå- give us the marvels of art? Why did Dorians' sterile philosophy fail miserably?
íá 47, Ôá Äñþìåíá 53, Ôá Äåéêíõüìåíá In the Elefsinian Mysteries the other function of the human-mind is presented. The superior Ego pre-
77, ÏõñÜíéï Ðõñ 85, Åðßëïãïò ôçò ðñþ- dominates and governs higly. Here the hypercnscience rules. This is the reign of the Spirit. The hy-
ôçò Ýêäïóçò 111, ÓõìðåñÜóìáôá 117. perconscience works distinctively and gives its splendid fruits. The revelation of an invisible world
ÓÕÌÐËÇÑÙÌÁÔÉÊÇ ÕËÇ that contains the meaning of the Mysteries takes place. The Elefsininans open the doors of the hid-
ÄÅÕÔÅÑÇÓ ÅÊÄÏÓÇÓ
Óêïðüò ôùí Ìõóôçñßùí 121, Ôá ÏñöéêÜ
den mysteries.
Äüãìáôá 127, ºáê÷ïò. Ôï Ìõóôçñéþäåò Áñ-

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 33 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

óåíéêü Ðñüóùðï ôçò Åëåõóßíéáò ÔñéÜäáò
133, Ç åðßäñáóç ôïõ ÉåñïöÜíôç óôï Íïõ
ôïõ ìõïõìÝíïõ 139, Ãßíïíôáí áëçèéíÞ á-
öýðíéóç êáôÜ ôçí Åëåõóßíéá ìýçóç; 145, Ôï
ÌõçôÞñéï ôçò Åëåõóßíáò 151, ÁëÜäå Ìý-
óôáé 157, ÄÞìçôñá - Ðåñóåöüíç - ºáê÷ïò
163, Åðßëïãïò äåýôåñçò Ýêäïóçò 169.
THE ELEFSINIAN MYSTERIES
CONTENTS
PREFACE OF THE FIRST EDITION 7,
PREFACE OF THE SECOND EDITION 13,
PREFACE OF THE THIRD EDITION 15, IN-
TRODUCTION 17, THE ESOTERIC AND EX-
OTERIC ACTIVITY OF THE MYSTERIES THAT
ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE TRANSACTION
- THE LITTLE MYSTERIES OF AGRA 23, THE
GREAT MYSTERIES - THE DECENT ORGIES
29, THE SAID THINGS 47, THE ACTED
THINGS 53, THE INDICATED THINGS 77,
HEAVENLY FIRE 85, EPILOGUE OF THE
FIRST EDITION 111, CONCLUSIONS 117,
SUPPLEMENTARY MATTERIAL
OF THE SECOND EDITION
AIM OF THE MYSTERIES 121, THE ORPHIC
Ç ÔÅËÅÕÔÁÉÁ ÌÅÑÁ
ÔÏÕ ÓÙ ÊÑÁÔÇ
ÐÅ ÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
Á öé Ý ñù óç 5,Óç ìåß ù óç Á´ Ýê äï óçò
1978 7, Óç ìåß ù óç ´ Ýê äï óçò 1988
8, Ðñü ëï ãïò Á´ Ýê äï óçò 1978 9,
Ðñüëïãïò ´ Ýêäïóçò 1988 16, Åéóá-
ãù ãÞ Á´ Ýê äï óçò 1978 19, Åé óá ãù ãÞ
´ Ýê äï óçò 1988 28, É óôï ñé êÞ ôï ðï -
èÝôçóç 31, Ç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ ËïãéêÞ ôïõ
ÌåãÜëïõ Äéáëåêôéêïý Öéëüóïöïõ 36,
Ðá ëé Ýò êáé êáé íïýñ ãéåò Øõ ÷Ýò 44,
Ìüíç êõâåñíÞôñá ôïõ Åßíáé ìáò ç Øõ-
÷Þ 50, Ï Á ëç èé íüò Öé ëü óï öïò êáé ï
êïé íüò èíç ôüò 57, Ç å ðé âß ù óç ôçò
Øõ ÷Þò 64, Ïé Áñ ÷é êÝò ÌÞ ôñåò É äÝ åò
äß äïõí ôçí á ðÜ íôç óç êáé ëý íïõí ôá
ðñï âëÞ ìá ôá 70, Ï Íü ìïò ôçò Ó÷å ôé -
êüôçôáò áíÜìåóá óôï Ðñüôõðï êáé ôá
Á íÜ ôõ ðá êáé ç Á íá ëï ãß á ôïõò 78, Ëß -
ãåò óôéã ìÝò ðñï ôïõ èá íÜ ôïõ ôïõ 83,
Å ðß ëï ãïò Á´ Ýê äï óçò 88
´ ÅÊ ÄÏÓÇ 1988
Ðñï ëå ãü ìå íá ãéá ôç äåý ôå ñç Ýê -
äï óç 99, ÐëÜ ôù íáò êáé Óù êñÜ ôçò
101, Ï Óù êñÜ ôçò óôïí Ðáñ ìå íß äç
104, Ï Óù êñÜ ôçò óôï Óõ ìðü óéï ôïõ
ÐëÜ ôù íá 109, Óù êñá ôï ðëá ôù íé êÞ
Öé ëï óï öß á 115, Ïé óç ìå ñé íÝò ìáò
óêÝøåéò ãéá ôïí ÓùêñÜôç 122, Ç Ìíç-
ìåéþäçò Áðïëïãßá ôïõ ÓùêñÜôç 127,
Ðñï óù êñá ôé êÞ êáé Ìå ôá óù êñá ôé êÞ
ÓêÝ øç 136, Å ðß ëï ãïò ôçò äåý ôå ñçò
Ýê äï óçò 142, Ðß íá êáò åé êü íùí 151,
Ðå ñéå ÷ü ìå íá 152.
SOCRATE'S LAST DAY
CONTENTS
Dedication 5, Note of A' Edition
1978 7, Note of B' Edition 1988 8,
Preface of A' Edition 1978 9, Pref-
ace of B' Edition 1988 16, Introduc-
tion of A' Edition 1978 19, Intro-
duction of B' Edition 1988 28, His-
torical Placement 31, The Metaphys-
ical Logic of Socrates, the Great Di-
alectic Philosopher 36, Old and New
Souls 44, Soul, the Unique Ruler of
n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
ÅËÅÕÓÉÍÉÁ ÌÕÓÔÇÑÉÁ
Åßíáé ôï Ýâäïìï êáôÜ óåéñÜ âéâëßï ôïõ Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ êáé ðñùôïåêäüèçêå ôï
1978 (ôÝóóåñéò åêäüóåéò). ¾óôåñá áðü ôçí áðïèÝùóç ôïõ Ðõèáãüñá (âëÝ-
ðå Ýêôï âéâëßï) Ýðñåðå íá êïéíïðïéçèåß ç Åëåõóßíéá Ìýçóç.
Ãéáôß Üñáãå ç ÁèçíáúêÞ Ðïëéôåßá âáóßóôçêå óôç ìýçóç áõôÞ; Ãéáôß ìáò Ý-
äùóå ôá èáýìáôá ôçò ôÝ÷íçò ç ÉùíéêÞ ðëåõñÜ ôïõ Åëëçíéóìïý; Ãéáôß ç óôåß-
ñá ôùí ÄùñéÝùí öéëïóïößá áðÝôõ÷å ïéêôñÜ;
Óôá Åëåõóßíéá ÌõóôÞñéá ðáñïõóéÜæåôáé ç Üëëç ëåéôïõñãßá ôïõ áíèñùðï-
íïý. Ôï áíþôåñï Åãþ êõñéáñ÷åß êáé áíùôåñïäéïéêåß. Åäþ âáóéëåýåé ç õðåñ-
óõíåßäçóç. Åßíáé ç âáóéëåßá ôïõ Ðíåýìáôïò. Ç õðåñóõíåßäçóç äïõëåýåé äéá-
êñéôéêÜ êáé äßíåé ôïõò áãëáïýò êáñðïýò ôçò. Ãßíåôáé ç áðïêÜëõøç åíüò áï-
ñÜôïõ êüóìïõ ðïõ ðåñéÝ÷åé ôçí Ýííïéá ôùí Ìõóôçñßùí. Ôá Åëåõóßíéá áíïßãïõí ôéò ðüñôåò ôùí êñõììÝíùí
ìõóôçñßùí.
DOGMAS 127, IAKHOS THE MYSTERIOUS PHANT TO THE INITIATED 139, DID A TRUE ELEFSIS 151, ALATHE INITIATIVES 157 DIM-
MASCULINE PERSON OF THE ELEFSINIAN AWAKENING TAKE PLACE DURING THE ELEF- ITRA - PERSEFONI - IAKHOS 163, EPILOGUE
TRIAD 133, THE INFLUENCE OF THE HIERO- SINIAN INITIATION? 145, THE MYSTERY OF OF THE SECOND EDITION 169.
n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
Ç ÔÅËÅÕÔÁÉÁ ÌÅÑÁ SOCRATE'S
ÔÏÕ ÓÙÊÑÁÔÇ LAST DAY
Åß íáé ôï ü ãäï ï âé âëß ï ôïõ Í. This is N. Margiori's eighth book
and it was published in 1978 (t-
ÌáñãéùñÞ êáé ðñùôïåêäüèçêå ôï
1978 (äýï åêäüóåéò). ÐáñïõóéÜæåé wo editions). It presents true Pla-
ôïí áëçèéíü Ðëáôùíéêü ÓùêñÜôç, tonic Socrates who, by his last
ðïõ ìå ôéò ôåëåõôáßåò ôïõ ïìïëï- confessions, proves his great be-
ãßåò áðïäåéêíýåé ôï ìåãÜëï ôïõ ðé- lief in the eternity of his spirit-
óôåý ù ãéá ôçí áéù íéü ôç ôá ôçò soul, ridiculing thus the opposite
believes of the followers of the
ðíåõìáôïøõ÷Þò ôïõ, ãåëïéïðïéþ-
íôáò Ýôóé ôï áíôßèåôá ðñåóâåõü- materialism.
ìå íï ôùí ï ðá äþí ôïõ õ ëé óìïý. As a perfect representative of
ÔÝëåéïò åêðñüóùðïò ôùí Åëåõ- the Elefsinian Mysteries he ex-
óéíßùí Ìõóôçñßùí äéáôõðþíåé ôïõò ïñéóìïýò ôçò ìåôáöõóéêÞò êáé presses the definitions of the
êáèéåñþíåé Ýíáí óêåðôéêéóìü êáôÜëëçëï ãéá ôéò ðÝñáí áðü ôçò metaphysics and establishes a
skepticism proper for our per-
óõíåéäçôÞò, ãíùóôÞò ìáò áíôéëÞøåéò, ôéò Üëëåò ðïõ áíåâÜæïõí
ôïí èíçôü óôá ýøç ôçò Áèáíáóßáò. ceptions existing beyond our con-
Ç Ôåëåõôáßá ÌÝñá ôïõ ÓùêñÜôç áíïßãåé ôéò ðñïïðôéêÝò ãéá ìéá scious knowledge, that is the oth-
íÝá æùÞ óôïí Üíèñùðï. Ó÷ßæåé ôá ðáñáðåôÜóìáôá ôïõ èáíÜôïõ êáé er ones that bring the mortal be-
ìáò ðáñïõóéÜæåé ôçí áéùíéüôçôá. ing up to the heights of the Im-
mortality.
Ìéá íÝá åðï÷Þ ðïõ Þôáí ðñïúüí ôùí Åëåõóéíßùí Ìõóôçñßùí. Ãé'
Socrate's Last Day opens the
áõôü êáé Ýãñáøå ôïí ÓùêñÜôç ìåôÜ ôï âéâëßï ôïõ Åëåõóßíéá Ìõ-
óôÞñéá. prospects for a n new life to man.
ÊÜèå âéâëßï ôïõ óõããñáöÝá åßíáé ç åðüìåíç óêÜëá ãéá ôçí á- It tears the curtains of the death
íýøùóç ôïõ áíèñþðïõ óôá ïõñÜíéá ýøç, üðïõ ç áéùíéüôçôá ìå and it presents us the Eternity. A
ôçí õðåñâáôéêüôçôá óõìðïñåýïíôáé êáé óõíïõóéÜæïíôáé. new epoch that was the product
of the Elefsinian Mysteries. For
this reason the writer wrote
our Being 50, The True Philosopher 1988 99, Platon and Socrates 101,
Socrate's Last Day, after his book
and the Common Mortal Being 57, Socrates in Parmenides 104,
The Soul Survival 64, The Original Ma- Socrates in Platon's Symposium Elefsinian Mysteries.
trixes Ideas Give the Answer and Solve 109, The Socratoplatonic Philoso- Every book of the writer is the
the Problems 70, The Law of Rela- phy 115, Our Present Thoughts next scale for the elevation of
tiveness Between the Original and the about Socrates 122, Socrate's man to the heavenly heights,
Offprint and their Contradiction 78, Monumental Apology 127, Pre-So- where the eternity and the tran-
A Few Moments Before his Death 83, cratic and Metaphysical Thought
Epilogue of A' Edition 88. 136, Epilogue of the Second Edi- scendency go along with and
B' EDITION 1988 97 tion 142, Table of Images 151, have a close intercourse.
Predicted for the Second Edition Contents 152.
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 34 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 ÏÉ ÖÁÑÁÙ ÁÊÅÍÁÔÏÍ
ÊÁÉ ÔÏÕÔÁÃ×ÁÌÙÍ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
Åéêüíá åìðñïóèßïõ åîùöýëëïõ êáé óêß-
ôóá ôçò ÁéãõðôéáêÞò éåñïãëõöéêÞò ãëþó-
óáò êáèþò êáé ÃéïãêéêÝò óôÜóåéò ôçò Öá-
ñáùíéêÞò åðï÷Þò 5
Á´ ÅÊÄÏÓÇÓ 1978
Ðñïëåãüìåíá 9, Ðñüëïãïò 13, Åéóá-
ãùãÞ 23, Ôá ÁéãõðôéáêÜ ÌõóôÞñéá 29, Ôá
ÌõóôéêÜ ôùí Ðõñáìßäùí 47, Óößããá: Ôï
áñ÷áéüôåñï Óýìâïëï ôïõ Êüóìïõ 65, Á-
ìåí÷ïôÝð - Áêåíáôüí - Áìåíüöéò ï Ä´ 75,
Ç Ìýçóç ôïõ Áìåí÷ïôÝð óôçí Çëéïýðïëç
85, Ç åéóäï÷Þ ãéá Ìýçóç 89, Ç áíÜññç-
óç óôï èñüíï ôçò ìåãáëýôåñçò Áõôïêñá-
ôïñßáò 99, Ç ðñþôç áßñåóç óôïí êüóìï
105, Ç íÝá ðñùôåýïõóá ôçò Áõôïêñáôï-
ñßáò Áêåôáôüí Åë ÁìÜñíá 115, Ç ðôþóç
êáé ï èÜíáôïò ôïõ Áêåíáôüí 125, Ç äéÜäï-
÷ç êáôÜóôáóç ìåôÜ ôçí ðôþóç 129, Ç ôá-
öÞ åíüò Üóçìïõ Öáñáþ êáé ç áíåýñåóç
ôïõ ôÜ öïõ ôïõ Ôïõ ôáã ÷á ìþí 135, Ôï
Èáýìá ôçò åýñåóçò ôïõ ôÜöïõ 137, Ç êá-
ôÜñá ôùí Öáñáþ 151, Ôá åõñÞìáôá ôïõ
ôÜöïõ ôïõ Öáñáþ Ôïõôáã÷áìþí 161, Å-
ðßëïãïò Á´ Ýêäïóçò 171
´ ÅÊÄÏÓÇÓ
(ÌÅ ÓÕÌÐËÇÑÙÌÁÔÉÊÇ ÕËÇ)
Ðñüëïãïò äåýôåñçò Ýêäïóçò 181, Åé-
óáãùãÞ äåýôåñçò Ýêäïóçò 187, ÅñìÞò ï
ÔñéóìÝãéóôïò Èùè Þ Èùô Þ Ôå÷ïýôé:, Ðñþ-
ôï êåöÜëáéï 191, Äåýôåñï êåöÜëáéï 199,
ÁöéÝñùóç óôïí ÄéäÜóêáëü ìïõ 209, Öù-
ôïãñáößá íåáñÞò çëéêßáò ôïõ êüìçôá Êñß-
íï Íôå ÊÜóôñï 210, Ëßãá ëüãéá ãéá ôïí Äé-
äÜóêáëü ìïõ 211, Ôé áêñéâþò ðÞñá áðü
ôïí ÄéäÜóêáëü ìïõ 213, ÅëÜ÷éóôåò ðëç-
ñïöïñßåò ðåñéóùèåßóåò 215, ÁíáìíÞóåéò
áðü ôïí ÄéäÜóêáëü ìïõ 219, Äåýôåñïò
ðñüëïãïò äåýôåñçò Ýêäïóçò 223, Äåý-
ôåñç åéóáãùãÞ äåýôåñçò Ýêäïóçò 225,
Ôá ÉåñïãëõöéêÜ ôçò ÷þñáò ôïõ Íåßëïõ (Áé-
ãýðôïõ) 227, Ç Ãéüãêá óôá ÖáñáùíéêÞ å-
ðï÷Þ, üðùò ôçí ðáñïõóéÜæïõí ôá áñ÷áéï-
ëïãéêÜ åõñÞìáôá 293, Ôá åßêïóé óêßôóá
ôçò ÖáñáùíéêÞò Ãéüãêá ôïõ áñ÷áéïëüãïõ
ôïõ äÝêáôïõ üãäïïõ áéþíá Áíêïõåôéë Íôé
Ðåññüí 295, Åðßëïãïò äåýôåñçò Ýêäïóçò
1991 301, Åõ÷áñéóôÞñéï óôïõò âïçèÞóá-
íôåò ôçí åðéìÝëåéá ôçò Ýêäïóçò 305, Åé-
êüíåò 306, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá 307, Êõêëïöï-
ñïýíôá ôïõ ßäéïõ âéâëßá, ìåëÝôåò, ðåñéï-
äéêü, åóùôåñéêü êëåéäß, ó÷ïëÝò 311
PHARAOS AKENATON
AND TUTAGHAMON
CONTENTS
FORWORD 9, PREFACE 13, INTRODUC-
TION 23, THE EGYPTIAN MYSTERIES 29, THE
SECRETS OF THE PYRAMIDS 47, SPHINX:
n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
ÏÉ ÖÁÑÁÙ ÁÊÅÍÁÔÏÍ THE PHARAOHS
ÊÁÉ ÔÏÕÔÁÃ×ÁÌÙÍ AKENATON
Åßíáé ôï Ýíáôï âéâëßï ôïõ Í. Ìáñãéù-
AND TUTAGHAMON
ñÞ êáé ðñùôïåêäüèçêå ôï 1978 (äýï åê-
It is N. Margiori's ninth book
äüóåéò). Åßíáé ç Üëëç ðëåõñÜ ôçò Åëëç-
which was published for the first
íïáéãõðôéáêÞò ìýçóçò. Ï áíáãíþóôçò Ý-
time in 1978 (two editions). It is
ðñåðå íá óõììåèÝîåé óôï óýóôçìá ôçò
the other side of the Greek-E-
ÁéãõðôéáêÞò ìýçóçò ìéá êáé õðÜãåôáé óôï
gyptian initiation. The reader
ßäéï êýêëùìá ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò ÁëÞèåéáò.
should participate in the system
Ï ìÝãáò Ìýóôçò Öáñáþ Áêåíáôüí ß-
of the Egyptian initiation, since he
äñõóå ãéá ðñþôç öïñÜ óôïí êüóìï, ôçí
is part of the same circuit of the
áíïé÷ôÞ èñçóêåßá ôïõ Åíüò Èåïý, ôïõ
Esoteric Truth.
Öùôåéíïý Áôüí. ¸íáò ìõóôéêéóìüò áéöíßäéá ðáñïõóéÜóôçêå ãýñù óôá 1500
Great Initiate Pharaoh Akena-
ð.×. êáé äüíçóå ôïõò ëßãïõò ðïõ ãíþñéæáí óå ôé áíôéóôïé÷ïýóå. Áõôüò ï
ton established for the first time
ðåñßåñãïò Öáñáþ åíþèçêå ìáæß ìå ôçí ßäéá Ðñùôáñ÷éêÞ ÌïíÜäá êáé ìáò
in earth, the open religion of One
áðïêÜëõøå ôçí õøçëÞ ÁëÞèåéá ôçò Ìïíáäïàðáñîçò.
God, of Luminous Aton. A mysti-
Ïé ìõÞóåéò ôçò ôüôå åðï÷Þò, óôçí Çëéïýðïëç, óôéò ÈÞâåò êáé óôç ÌÝì-
cism was appeared suddenly in
öéäá, Ýäùóáí ôïõò ìýóôåò ôïõò äéêïýò ìáò, ðïõ ìõÞèçêáí åêåß, áðü ôïí
the years 1500 b.C. and vibrated
áëçóìüíçôï ÏñöÝá, ùò ôïí åõëïãçìÝíï Èåßï Ðõèáãüñá. Ï Ìïíïèåúóìüò
the few people who knew what
ôïõ ÌùõóÞ äéäÜ÷ôçêå åêåß, ãéá í' áðïâåß áñãüôåñá ï åâñáúêüò Éå÷ùâÜ êáé
it corresponded in. This strange
ôïõ ðñïöÞôç ÌùÜìåè ôïõ äïîáóìÝíïõ ôïõ ÁëëÜ÷.
Pharaoh was united with the
Ç ÁéãõðôéáêÞ Ìýçóç ðñïÝñ÷åôáé áðü ðáëéïýò ðïëéôéóìïýò (Äñáâßäåò),
same Primary Unit and revealed
ðïõ öÝñíïõí ìÝóá ôïõò ôï óðÝñìá ôçò áëçèéíÞò Ðíåõìáôéêüôçôáò. Ôï âé-
us the high Truth of the Unit-Ex-
âëßï ôïýôï èá óáò ðñïåôïéìÜóåé ãéá ôçí ìåãÜëç ìýçóç ôçò äéÜäï÷çò åë-
istence.
ëçíéóôéêÞò ìýçóçò.
The initiations of that period, in
ÐáñÝ÷åôáé åðßóçò êáé ìÝèïäïò åêìÜèçóçò ôçò éåñïãëõöéêÞò ãñáöÞò
Heliopolis, in Thebes and in Mem-
ãéá üóïõò èá Þèåëáí íá åìâáèýíïõí éäßïéò üììáóé óôá íüçìáôá êáé óôéò
phis, gave our own initiates who
Ýííïéåò ðïõ ïé ÷éëéåôçñßäåò äéÝóùóáí ùò óÞìåñá.
were initiated there, fron unfor-
gettable Orfeas, to blessed Divine
THE OLDEST SYMBOL OF THE WORLD 65, A- 191, SECOND CHAPTER 199, DEDICATION Pythagoras. Mose's Monotheism
MENHOTEP - AKENATN - AMENOFIS THE D' TO MY MASTER 209, COUNT KRINO DE CAS- was instructed there, in order to
75, AMENHOTEP'S INITIATION IN HELIOPO- TRO'S PHOTOGRAPH IN YOUNG AGE 210, end in the Hebrew Jehovah and
LIS 85, THE ADMITTANCE FOR INITIATION A FEW WORDS ABOUT MY MASTER 211,
to the praised of Allah prophet
89, THE GREATEST EMPIRE'S ASCENSION WHAT I GOT EXACTLY BY MY MASTER 213,
ON THE THRONE 99, THE FIRST HERESY IN LEAST SAVED INFORMATION 215, MEMO- Mohamed.
WORLD 105, AKENATON'S EMPIRE NEW RIES FROIM MY MASTER 219, SECOND The Egyptian Initiation comes
CAPITAL - EL AMARNA 115, AKENATON'S PREFACE OF THE SECOND EDITION 223, from the old civilizations (Dravid-
FALL AND DEATH 125, THE SUCCESSIVE SIT- SECOND INTRODUCTION OF THE SECOND ians), tha bear within them the
UATION AFTER THE FALL 129, AN UN- EDITION 225, THE HIEROGLYPHICS OF NILE sperm of the true Spiritualism.
KNOWN PHARAO'S BURIAL AND THE DIS- COUNTRY (EGYPT) 227, YOGA IN THE
This book will prepare you for the
COVERY OF TUTAGHAMON'S GRAVE 135, PHARAONIC ERA, AS THE ARCHEOLOGICAL
THE MIRACLE OF THE DISCOVERY OF THE FINDINGS PRESENT IT 293, THE TWENTY great initiation of the successor
GRAVE 137, THE PHARAOS' CURSE 151, SKETCHES OF PHARAONIC YOGA OF THE hellenistic initiation.
THE FINDINGS OF PHARAO TUTAGHAMON'S ARCHEOLOGIST OF THE EIGHTEENTH CEN- Also a method of how to learn
GRAVE 161, EPILOGUE OF THE A' EDITION TURY, ANKUETIL DI PERON 295, EPILOGUE the hieroglyphic writing is afford-
171 OF THE SECOND EDITION 1991 301, ed to those who would like to go
B' EDITION THANKS TO THOSE WHO HELPED IN THE
deeply by their own mind, into the
(of Supplementary Material) ATTENDANCE OF THE EDITION 305, IM-
PREFACE OF THE SECOND EDITION 181, AGES 306, CONTENTS 307, CIRCULATING senses and the meanings that he
INTRODUCTION OF THE SECOND EDITION BOOKS BY SAME, ESSAYS, JOURNAL, ESO- milleniums preserved until now.
187, HERMES, THE THRICE FIRST CHAPTER TERIC KEY, SCHOOLS 311.

ÃÅÍÅÓÇ ÊÁÉ ÈÁÍÁÔÏÓ ÔÙÍ ÊÏÓÌÙÍ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
ÌÅÑÏÓ ÐÑÙÔÏ
Ðñüëïãïò 7, ÅéóáãùãÞ 19, ÓõóôïëÞ - Óõ-
óðåßñùóç êáé áöáíéóìüò ôïõ ðñïçãïýìå-
íïõ Óýìðáíôïò 23, Ç Áíôéàëç 39, Ðõèáãüñáò
êáé ÁúíóôÜéí 45, ¾ëç êáé Áíôéàëç 55, Ç ðôþ-
óç ôùí ðñïóõìðáíôéêþí ðñïãüíùí óôçí Á-
íôéàëç 67, ÌåôÜ ôçí ìåôáðÞäçóç óôçí Á-
íôéàëç 97, Ôï ÔÝëïò ôùí Êáéñþí 117
ÌÅÑÏÓ ÄÅÕÔÅÑÏ
Ç ÌåãÜëç Áðïõóßá ôïõ Èåßïõ ¼íôïò 125,
Ôï Îýðíçìá ôïõ Èåßïõ ¼íôïò 131, ¸íáñîç
ôçò ÃÝíåóçò ôùí Êüóìùí 137, Ç ¸âäïìç Á-
êôßíá êáé ï ó÷çìáôéóìüò ôùí äåêáôñéþí äéá-
óôÜóåþí ôçò 141, Ôá Áíôéóýìðáíôá ìå ôçí
Áíôéàëç ôïõ êáé ôï ×Üïò 177, Ôï ×Üïò, êá-
ôáöýãéï ôùí äïêéìáóìÝíùí øõ÷þí 189, Ôá
Õðåñóýìðáíôá ç ¸äñá ôïõ ÐáôÝñá 195,
Åðßëïãïò 219.
ÔÑÉÔÏ ÌÅÑÏÓ ÔÇÓ Â´ ÅÊÄÏÓÇÓ
Ç åéêüíá ôïõ åìðñïóèßïõ åîùöýëëïõ êáé
ï áðïóõìâïëéóìüò ôçò 229, Ðñüëïãïò ôçò
äåýôåñçò Ýêäïóçò 233, ÅéóáãùãÞ ôçò äåý-
ôåñçò Ýêäïóçò 237, Ðíåõìáôéêüò Åíåñãé-
óìüò 241, Ôá ÏñÜìáôá 253, Ç ÌåãÜëç ¿ñá
273, Ç ÌõóôéêÞ ÄéáèÞêç 291, ÈÜíáôïò Óþ-
ìáôïò - ÁíÜóôáóç Ðíåýìáôïò 304, Åðßëï-
ãïò äåýôåñçò Ýêäïóçò 313, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá
317, Êõêëïöïñïýíôá ôïõ ßäéïõ âéâëßá 319,
ÐïëõãñáöçìÝíåò ìåëÝôåò 320, Ðåñéïäéêü
Ïìáêïåßï 321, Åóùôåñéêü Êëåéäß 321, Óõíï-
ðôéêÞ ðåñßëçøç ôïõ Ýñãïõ 323.
BIRTH AND DEAT OF THE WORLDS
CONTENTS Page
PART ONE
PREFACE 7 , INTRODUCTION 19, CON-
TRACTION - GATHERING AROUND AND ANNI-
HILATION OF THE PREVIOUS UNIVERSE 23,
ANTIMATTER 39, PYTHAGORAS AND EINSTEIN
45, MATTER AND ANTIMATTER 55, THE FALL
OF THE PRE-UNIVERSAL ANCESTORS IN THE
ANTIMATTER 67, AFTER THE JUMPING OVER
THE ANTIMATTER 97, THE END OF THE TIMES
117.
PART TWO
10) THE GREAT ABSENCE OF THE DIVINE
BEING 125, THE AWAKENING OF THE DIVINE
BEING 131, OPENING OF THE BIRTH OF THE
WORLDS 137, THE SEVENTH RAY AND THE
FORMATION OF ITS THIRTEEN DIMENSIONS

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 35 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

 n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
ÃÅÍÅÓÇ ÊÁÉ ÈÁÍÁÔÏÓ "BIRTH AND DEATH OF THE WORLDS
ÔÙÍ ÊÏÓÌÙÍ AND OF THE BEINGS"
Åßíáé ôï äÝêáôï âéâëßï ôïõ Í. Ìáñãéù- To the acknowledgement of everyone interested in "Margiori's
ñÞ êáé ðñùôïåêäüèçêå ôï 1979 (äýï åê- Apocalypse" we quote for you the brief summary and the con-
äüóåéò). tents of his book "Birth and Death of the Worlds and of the Be-
Ó' áõôü ï óõããñáöÝáò äßíåé áðÜíôçóç ings", in which he "exhaus" within the possible human limits, for
ðñïóùðéêÞ, áðüëõôá äéêÞ ôïõ, óôï ìÝãá the FIRST TIME in our Planet the Greatest Matter of all the Times
èÝìá êÜèå åðï÷Þò, ôï åó÷áôïëïãéêü. Ç and the Peoples of the Earth, the Eschatological, transferring Self-
ìõóôéêéóôéêÞ øõ÷Þ ôïõ öáíåñþíåé ôéò å- same Parts of the Transcendental Divine Truth (of the Divine Plan)
ìðåéñßåò ôçò êáé ðñïóðáèåß íá äþóåé ôçí to our Dimension and to our threedimensional reason.
áðÜíôçóç, ìå ìÝóï êáé üñãáíï ôï Íïõ "The Birth and the Death of the Worlds and of the Beings" is the
êáé ôç ãñáößäá, ãéá õðåñäéáíïçôéêÜ êáé tenth of the about 75 books of Nikolaos A. Margioris, with the
õðåñóõíåéäçôÜ óõìâÜíôá. ÂÜóåé áõôþí îåäéðëþíåôáé Ýíáò áéþíéïò äç- first edition in 1979 and the second edition in 1990, with a com-
ìéïõñãéêüò êýêëïò, ðïõ ôïí óõíôïíßæåé êáé ôïí äçìéïõñãåß ï ËÏÃÏÓ, ðïõ plementary and explanatory matter.
óôçí áíèñþðéíÞ ìáò ãëþóóá ëÝãåôáé Éçóïýò ×ñéóôüò. In this work, the author gives a Personal, completely his own,
Óôï åí ëüãù Ýñãï ìáò êõñéáñ÷åß Ýíáò âáèýò êáé áôÝëåéùôïò ïñáìáôé- answer to the Great matter of all the Times, the ESCHATOLOGICAL
óìüò, óõíäõáóìÝíïò êáé åíéó÷õìÝíïò ìå ÐõñçíéêÞ ÖõóéêÞ, Áóôñïíïìßá, ONE. His mysticist soul reveals its Deep Experiences and tries to
Áóôñïóïößá, Èåïëïãßá êáé ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá, áðü ôïí ðñüëïãï áêü- give the Answer, using as a means the Mind and the pen, for the
ìá êáé öôÜíåé óôïí åðßëïãï ðïëý ãéãáíôùìÝíïò ãéá íá ðñïóöÝñåé óôïí hyperintellectual and the hyperconscious facts. On the basis of
êáôÜðëçêôï áíáãíþóôç óêçíÝò õðåñâéâëéêþí êáé áðßèáíùí åéêüíùí. these an Eternal Creative Circle is unfolded, that is Coordinated
Ç ÃÝíåóç êáé ÈÜíáôïò ôùí êüóìùí îåôõëßãåôáé ìðñïóôÜ óôç öõóéêÞ ï- and Created by the WORD, that in our human language is called
èüíç ðïõ ðáñáêïëïõèåß ï áíáãíþóôçò êáé âëÝðåé üôé êáíÝíá áðü ôá ü- Jesus Christ.
íôá ðïõ ãåííéïýíôáé ìÝóá óôïõò ðïëõðïßêéëïõò êüóìïõò ôçò Äçìéïõñãß- In the said transcendental work a Deep and Endless Visionism
áò äåí åîáéñåßôáé êáé äå äéáöåýãåé áðü ôïõò áéþíéïõò Íüìïõò, ðïõ êáèï- prevails, combined and reinforced by the Nuclear Physics, As-
ñßæïõí êáé åðïðôåýïõí ôçí áñ÷Þ êáé ôï ôÝëïò ôïõò. tronomy, Astrosophy, Theology and Esoteric Philosophy, starting
¾ëç, Áíôéàëç êáé Õðåñýëç õðáêïýïõí êáé áêïëïõèïýí ðéóôÜ ôï åêôå- already from the preface and arriving to the epilogue very gi-
ëïýìåíï Ó÷Ýäéï Åêåßíïõ, ðïõ óêïðüò ôïõ åßíáé ç åîÝëéîç ôùí êüóìùí êáé anted in order to offer the surprised reader some scenes of Hy-
ôùí üíôùí, ôçò ßäéáò ôçò Ïõóßáò Ôïõ ôá ðñïúüíôá. ¸íáò áãþíáò áôÝëåéù- perbiblical and Improbable Pictures.
ôïò ôùí äé÷áóìÝíùí äõíÜìåþí Ôïõ ãåííÜ ôç æùÞ êáé ôç ìïñöÞ óôïõò Ü- The Birth and the Death of the worlds unfolds in front of the
ðåéñïõò êüóìïõò Ôïõ êáé êáôåõèýíåé ôï áéþíéï ÃÉÃÍÅÓÈÁÉ. Ç ìåãáëåéþäçò physical screen that the reader follows and sees that none of the
áõôÞ êáé áéþíéá óêçíÞ ðïõ ìÝóá ôçò êéíïýíôáé ôá ÐñùôïóðÝñìáôá ôçò Ðáí- beings that are born in the multivarious worlds of the Creation is
äçìéïõñãßáò ðåñéãñÜöåôáé, åñìçíåýåôáé êáé æùãñáößæåôáé áíÜãëõöá ìÝ- exempted and escapes from the Eternal Laws that define and su-
óá óôéò áíåðáíÜëçðôåò óåëßäåò ôïõ âéâëßïõ.... pervise their beginning and their end.
Matter, Antimatter and Hypermatter obey and follow faithful-
141, THE ANTIUNIVERSES WITH THEIR ANTI- SECOND EDITION 237, SPIRITUAL ENERGISM ly the executed Plan of Him, whose the purpose is the Evolution
MATTER AND THE CHAOS 177, CHAOS, THE 241, VISIONS 253, THE GREAT MOMENT 273, of the worlds and of the beings, the products of Its Substance it-
REFUGE OF THE TRIED SOULS 189, HYPER- THE SECRET TESTAMEMT 291, DEATH OF self. An endless struggle of Its divided Powers bears the life and
UNIVERSES, FATHER'S SEAT 195, EPILOGUE BODY, RESURRECTION OF SPIRIT 304, EPI- the form in Its infinite worlds and directs the eternal BECOMING.
219. LOGUE OF THE SECOND EDITION 313, CON- This Superb and Eternal Scene in which the First sperms of the Om-
PART THREE OF THE B' EDITION TENTS 317, CIRCULATING BOOKS OF SAME
THE PICTURE OF THE FRONT COVER AND 319, POLYGRAPHED ESSAYS 320, OMAKOEIO nicreation move, is described, interpreted and depicted emboss-
ITS DESYMBOLISM 229, PREFACE OF THE SEC- JOURNAL 321, ESOTERIC KEY 321, BRIEF SUM- edly in the unique pages of this book...
OND EDITION 233, INTRODUCTION OF THE MARY OF THE WORK 323.

n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS DRAVIDIANS THE PRE-HELLENIC GREEKS

CONTENTS
DRAVIDIANS IN ENGLISH PREFACE
DRAVIDIANS THE PRE-HELLENIC GREEKS
This is N. Margiori's eleventh book (who was archeologist and metaphysical EPILOQUE
philosopher) and it was published for the first time in 1979. It is a luxurious SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY
edition on an analogous paper and is addressed to those who speak another SIMILAR BOOKS OF THE AUTHOR UNDER
language (it is written in English). It comprises a lot of information about the PRINT
ancient ancestral people of the Greeks, the Dravidians. You will find more in-
formation about it in the writer's book "Dravidians, the Ancestors of the Greeks".
In this book, it is proved that the Dravidians are the ancestors of the Greeks
and of the Pelasghis and that it is them who gave their spiritual lights to India
and mainly the scientific method of Yoga. It is about an antediluvian people -
civilization who had an unattainable greatness and spiritualism, and whose the
last remnants are found in Crete of Minos and in Pakistan, in the cities Mo-
henzo Daro and El Harrapa.

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 36 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
ÓÔÉÓ ÌÅÑÅÓ IN THE TIMES OF MINOS,
ÔÏÕ ÌÅÃÁËÏÕ ÂÁÓÉËÉÁ THE GREAT KING OF CRETE
ÔÇÓ ÊÑÇÔÇÓ ÌÉÍÙÁ This is N. Margiori's twelfth book and it was published for the first time
Åßíáé ôï äùäÝêáôï âéâëßï ôïõ Í. Ìáñ- in 1979 (two editions).
ãéùñÞ êáé ðñùôïåêäüèçêå ôï 1979 (äýï In it, the Minoic civilization is described that is the only one being able
åêäüóåéò). to stand by its own arms, as the most ancient civilization of the Mediter-
Ó' áõôü ðåñéãñÜöåôáé ï Ìéíùéêüò ðïëé- ranean sea and of all Europe.
ôéóìüò ðïõ åßíáé êáé ï ìüíïò ðïõ ìðïñåß Through archeologist Evan's searches, some archeologic findings came
ìå ôá äéêÜ ôïõ üðëá íá óôáèåß, óáí ï áñ- in light which ascertain us that there were many Minoans, thousands of
÷áéüôåñïò ðïëéôéóìüò ôçò Ìåóïãåßïõ êáé years before the Trojan war.
ïëüêëçñçò ôçò Åõñþðçò. The above are not any arbitrary conclusions. Homer tells us about the
Ìå ôéò Ýñåõíåò ôïõ áñ÷áéïëüãïõ ¸âáíò, Þëèáí óôï öùò áñ÷áéïëïãéêÜ curious machine "Talos" which turned around the island three times per
åõñÞìáôá, ðïõ ìáò äßíïõí ôç âåâáéüôçôá, üôé õðÞñîáí Ìßíùåò ðïëëïß, ÷é- twenty hours, and it was spying its shores. .
ëéÜäåò ÷ñüíéá ðñéí áðü ôïí Ôñùéêü ðüëåìï. Then, in front of the searcher's eyes Lavrys rises, the perfect symbol of
Äåí ðñüêåéôáé ãéá óõìðåñÜóìáôá áõèáßñåôá. Ï ¼ìçñïò ìáò äéçãåßôáé ãéá the dualism. Spirit - matter - Even - odd, Life - death, Visible -invisible,
ôï ðåñßåñãï ìç÷Üíçìá "ÔÜëù", ðïõ ãýñéæå ôñåéò öïñÝò ôï åéêïóéôåôñÜùñï Known - unknown etc.
ôç íÞóï êáé êáôáóêüðåõå ôéò áêôÝò ôçò. In these symbols that the writer desymbolizes so simply, the reader en-
¾óôåñá ïñèþíåôáé ìðñïóôÜ ôá ìÜôéá ôïõ åñåõíçôÞ ï ËÜâñõò, ôï ôåëåéü- ters the principles of the mysteries of the very old civilizations, where the
ôåñï óýìâïëï ôïõ äõéóìïý. Ðíåýìá - ýëç. ¢ñôéá - ðåñéôôÜ. ÆùÞ - èÜíáôïò. initiates of those times kept for the knowledge of their descendants, so
ÏñáôÜ - áüñáôá. ÃíùóôÜ - Üãíùóôá ê.ë.ð. that one day they may become again the property of the later generations.
ÌÝóá óôá óýìâïëá áõôÜ ðïõ ôüóï áðëÜ ï óõããñáöÝáò áðïóõìâïëßæåé,
åýêïëá åéóÝñ÷åôáé ï áíáãíþóôçò ìÝóá óôéò áñ÷Ýò ôùí ìõóôçñßùí ðïëý ðá- PREFACE 7 THE PALACE AND THE CITY OF KNOSSOS
ëéþí ðïëéôéóìþí, üðïõ ïé ôüôå ìýóôåò öýëáãáí ãéá ôïõò áðïãüíïõò ôïõò FIRST CHAPTER 40
ôéò ãíþóåéò, þóôå ìéá ìÝñá íá ãßíïõí ðÜëé êôÞìá ôùí ìåôÝðåéôá ãåíåþí. THE HISTORY OF MINO'S THE EYROPEAN SEVENTH CHAPTER
BIRTH 11, DESYMBOLISM OF THESEU'S COURSE. THE-
SECOND CHAPTER SEU'S INITIATION. ARIADNE AND DEDALUS 49
ÓÔÉÓ ÌÅÑÅÓ ÔÏÕ ÌÅÃÁËÏÕ ÂÁÓÉËÉÁ âïëéóìüò ôçò ðïñåßáò ôïõ ÈçóÝá, ç Ìýçóç MINO'S SON, MINOTAUR 18, EIGHTH CHAPTER
ÔÇÓ ÊÑÇÔÇÓ ÌÉÍÙÁ ôïõ ÈçóÝá., ÁñéÜäíç êáé Äáßäáëïò 49, Ãßãá- THIRD CHAPTER WAS TALOS A GIANT OR A FLYING MA-
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ íôáò Þ ðôçôéêÞ ìç÷áíÞ ï Ôáëþò; 64, Ôáõ- KNOSSOS, THE QUEEN OF THE MEDITER- CHINE? 64
Ðñüëïãïò 7, Ç Éóôïñßá ôçò ÃÝííçóçò ôïõ ñïêáèÜøéá êáé ÔáõñïêáèÜðôåò 72, Áðïóõì- RANNEAN CITIES AND THE FIRST CITY IN ALL NINTH CHAPTER
Ìßíùá áðü ôçí Åõñþðç 11, Ï ãéïò ôïõ Ìß- âïëéóìüò ôïõ Ôñéáäéêïý ó÷Þìáôïò - óõìâü- EUROPE 23, TAUROKATHAPSIA AND TAUROKATHAPTES
íùá, Ìéíþôáõñïò 18, Êíùóóüò, Âáóßëéóóá ëïõ ôùí ÔáõñïêáèÜøéùí 80, Åðßëïãïò 85 FOURTH CHAPTER 72
ôùí ðüëåùí ôçò Ìåóïãåßïõ êáé ðñþôç üëçò LAVRYS OR THE DOUBLE AXE 30 TENTH CHAPTER
ôçò Åõñþðçò 23, ËÜâñõò Þ Äéðëïýò ÐÝëå- IN THE TIMES OF MINOS THE GREAT KING FIFTH CHAPTER DESYMBOLISM OF THE TRIADIC SCHEME -
êõò 30, Ôá ÌõóôÞñéá ôïõ ËÜâñõ 34, Ôï ÁíÜ- OF CRETE LAVRY'S MYSTERIES 34 SYMBOL OF TAUROKATHAPTES 80, EPILOGUE
êôïñï êáé ç ðüëç ôçò Êíùóóïý 40, Áðïóõì- CONTENTS Page SIXTH CHAPTER 85

n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
ÄÑÁ ÂÉ ÄÅÓ ÏÉ ÐÑÏ ÃÏ ÍÏÉ ÔÙÍ ÅË ËÇ ÍÙÍ
Åß íáé ôï äÝ êá ôï ôñß ôï âé âëß ï ôïõ Í. Ìáñ ãéù ñÞ êáé ðñù ôï åê äü èç -
êå ôï 1979 (ôÝó óå ñéò åê äü óåéò). Á ó÷ï ëåß ôáé ìå ôïõò ðñï ãü íïõò ôùí
ÅëëÞíùí, ôïõò Äñáâßäåò. Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá ìéá åðï÷Þ ðïõ
Ý ëç îå ãý ñù óôá äþ äå êá Ý ùò äå êÜ îé ÷é ëéÜ äåò ÷ñü íéá
ðñï ×ñé óôïý.
Ó' áõ ôÞ ôçí ìá êñé íÞ å ðï ÷Þ ìå ôá õ ðå ñü ðëá ôïõò
áë ëç ëï âõ èß óôç êáí ç Á ôëá íôß äá (óôïí Á ôëá íôé êü ù -
êåáíü) êáé ç Åíäï÷þñá (ôï ìåãáëýôåñï ìÝñïò ôçò óç-
ìå ñé íÞò Ìå óï ãåß ïõ èá ëÜó óçò) ý óôå ñá á ðü Ý íáí ðü -
ëåìï óêëçñü ìå ôïõò áíôéðÜëïõò ôùí Äñáâßäùí, ôïõò
Á ôëá íôß íïõò, ïé ï ðïß ïé åß ÷áí äç ìéïõñ ãÞ óåé ôü ôå ðïë -
ëÜ äåé íÜ. Âõ èß óôç êå êáé ÷Ü èç êå Ý íáò ëá ìðñüò ëá üò
(äñá âß äåò) ìå é ó÷õ ñü ðï ëé ôé óìü ôå ÷íé êü êáé é äß ùò
ðíåõ ìá ôé êü êáé å ðÝ æç óáí ìü íï ü óïé âñÝ èç êáí óôá õ -
øç ëÜ âïõ íÜ ôçò á ôÝ ëåéù ôçò ðå äéÜ äáò ôçò Ìå óï ãåß -
ïõ.
Ðå ñé ãñÜ öå ôáé ç ôñá ãù äß á ôïõ "êá ôá êëõ óìïý" óå ü -
ëç ôçò ôçí äéÜ óôá óç êáé ëå ðôï ìÝ ñåéá êáé ü ÷é ü ðùò óõ ìðéå óôé êÜ ôçí
á íá öÝ ñåé óôçí Ðå íôÜ ôåõ ÷ü ôïõ ï Ìù õ óÞò. Ìå ôÜ ôïí êá ôá óôñå ðôé -
êü ðü ëå ìï ðïõ äç ìéïýñ ãç óáí ïé Á ôëá íôß íïé åéò âÜ ñïò ôùí Äñá âß -
äùí ï Á ôëá íôé êüò êáé ï Åé ñç íé êüò ù êå á íüò Ý óðá óáí ôá öñÜã ìá ôÜ
ôïõò êáé ìðÞ êáí ìÝ óá óôçí Åí äï ÷þ ñá. Ôçí Ý êá íáí Ìå óü ãåéï èÜ -
ëáó óá êáé óêÝ ðá óáí ÷é ëéÜ äåò ðü ëåéò êáé ÷ù ñéÜ ôùí ðñï ãü íùí Äñá -
âß äùí. Á êü ìá ç èÜ ëáó óá ôçò Á öñé êÞò, ç ôþ ñá Ý ñç ìïò Óá ÷Ü ñá, êý -
ëç óå óôç Ìå óü ãåéï êáé Ý ðíé îå ôá ðÜ íôá.
Áõ ôïß ðïõ å ðÝ æç óáí ãý ñé óáí óôçí ç ðåé ñù ôé êÞ Åë -
ëÜ äá, ü ðùò ï Äåõ êá ëß ù íáò êáé ç Ðýñ ñá êáé å ðåé äÞ á -
êñé âþò Ý ðëå áí óõ íå ÷þò óôçí èÜ ëáó óá, óôá ðå ëÜ ãç,
ìå ôï íï ìÜ óôç êáí óå Ðå ëá óãïß êáé áñ ãü ôå ñá ðïõ êá -
ôÞë èáí ïé Ü ñéïé êáé Ý ãé íå ìß îç ôùí äý ï ëá þí, Ðå ëá -
óãþí êáé Á ñß ùí, ó÷ç ìÜ ôé óáí ôïõò ¸ëëç íåò.
Ìå ãÜ ëï ìÝ ñïò ôùí äéá óù èÝ íôùí Äñá âß äùí ôñÜ âç -
îå ðñïò ôçí Á íá ôï ëÞ êáé Ý öèá óáí óôçí Éí äß á, Ý îé ÷é -
ëéÜ äåò ÷ñü íéá ðñéí öôÜ óïõí å êåß ïé ¢ñéïé, êáé åß íáé
áõ ôïß ðïõ äç ìéïýñ ãç óáí ôçí Ãéü ãêá êáé ôá Öé ëï óï -
öé êÜ Óõ óôÞ ìá ôá ðïõ ôçí óõ íï äåý ïõí, êá èþò êáé ôïí
Éí äé êü ëá ü êáé Ðï ëé ôé óìü, ï ï ðïß ïò óôïí ìå ãá ëý ôå ñü
ôïõ âáè ìü åß íáé ìå ôá öï ñÜ ôïõ ðï ëé ôé óìïý ôùí Äñá -
âß äùí - Ðå ëá óãþí - Åë ëÞ íùí.
Óôï âéâëßï áõôü ðáñáôßèåíôáé åðßóçò áñ÷áéïëïãéêÜ,
ãëùó óï ëï ãé êÜ, é óôï ñé êÜ êáé ìå ôá öõ óé êÜ ôåê ìÞ ñéá êáé íôï êïõ ìÝ -
íôá ðïõ ðé óôï ðïéïýí ôçí ùò Ü íù Ü ðï øç.

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 37 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

 ÄÑÁ ÂÉÄÅÓ ÏÉ ÐÑÏÃÏÍÏÉ ÔÙÍ ÅËËÇÍÙÍ
ÐÅ ÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
ÁöéÝñùóç 6, Ðñïåéóáãùãéêü Óçìåß-
ùìá Á´ Ýêäïóçò 7, Ðñïåéóáãùãéêü Óç-
ìåßùìá ´ Ýêäïóçò 15, ÅéóáãùãÞ Á´ Ýê-
äï óçò 17, Åé óá ãù ãÞ Â´ Ýê äï óçò 19,
Ðñüëïãïò Á´ Ýêäïóçò 23, Ðñüëïãïò ´
Ýêäïóçò 25, Ðïéïß Þôáí ïé Äñáâßäåò 27,
Ç á íá êÜ ëõ øç êáé ç åê óêá öÞ ôçò Ìï -
÷Ýíæï ÍôÜñï êáé ôçò Åë ×áññÜðá 35, Á-
íôáãùíéóôéêïß ðüëåìïé áíÜìåóá óôïõò
Äñáâßäåò êáé óôïõò Áôëáíôßíïõò 49, Á-
ðïóõìâïëéóìüò ìå Ïäçãü ôçí Ðõèáãü-
ñåéá Á ñéè ìï óï öß á 57, Ç ìå ãá ëý ôå ñç
ÌåôáíÜóôåõóç ôùí Áéþíùí êáé ç Ôý÷ç
ôùí äýï ðôåñýãùí ôçò 65, Ç áðþôáôç
óýíèåóç ôïõ Ëáïý ôçò óçìåñéíÞò Éíäß-
áò 75, Ç ÓðïñÜ ôïõ Áñ÷éêïý Ðïëéôéóìïý
ôùí Äñáâßäùí óôïõò áðïãüíïõò ôïõò
81, Åðßëïãïò Á´ Ýêäïóçò 93.
ÄÅÕ ÔÅÑÇ ÅÊÄÏÓÇ 1989
Äåõ ôå ñï ëï ãß á ôçò ´ Ýê äï óçò 101,
ÐñïäñáâéäéêÞ åðï÷Þ 103, Ëßãá áðü ôïí
Äñáâéäéêü Ðïëéôéóìü 115, ÊáôáãùãÞ ôùí
Äñá âß äùí êáé ôùí ¢óðïí äùí å ÷èñþí
ôïõò Áôëáíôßíùí 127, Ç ÄñáâéäéêÞ Óößããá
êáé ï Áðïóõìâïëéóìüò ôçò 137, Åðßëïãïò
ôçò ´ Ýêäïóçò 1989 151, Ðåñßëçøç ôïõ
Ýñãïõ 155, Ëßãá ëüãéá ãéá ôïí óõããñáöÝá
159, ÌåñéêÜ ëüãéá ãéá ôï ðïëõäéÜóôáôï
Ýñãï ôïõ 161, Êõêëïöïñïýíôá ôïõ ßäéïõ
âéâëßá 163, ÐïëõãñáöçìÝíåò ìåëÝôåò
165, Ðåñéïäéêü Ïìáêïåßï, Åóùôåñéêü Êëåé-
äß, Ó÷ïëÝò ðïõ ëåéôïõñãïýí 166
DRAVIDIANS, THE ANCESTORS
OF GREEKS
CONTENTS
Dedication 6, 11troductory Note
of the A' Edition 7, Introductory Note
of the B' Edition 15, Introduction of
the A' Edition 17, Introduction of the
B' Edition 19, Preface of the A' Edi-
tion 23, Preface of the B' Edition 25
FIRST CHAPTER
Who were Dravidians 27
SECOND CHAPTER
The Discovery and the Excavation
of Mohenzo-Daro and of Harappa 35,
Competitive Wars Between Dravidi-
ans and Atlantinians 49
THIRD CHAPTER
Desymbolism with Guide the
Pythagorean Arithmosophy 57, The
Greatest Immigration of the Cen-
turies and the Luck of its two Wings
65
SIXTH CHAPTER
The Furthest Composition of the
Modern Indian People 75, The Sowing
of the Original Civilization of Dravid-
ians to their Descedants 82, Epilogue
of the A' Edition 93
SECOND EDITION 1989
Rejoinder of the B' Edition 101,
Pre-Dravidian Era 103, A Few Words
About Dravidian Civilization 115, The
Origin of Dravidians and of their Ir-
reconcilable Enemies Atlantinians
127, Dravidian Sphinx and its Desym-
bolism 137, Epilogue of the B' Edi-
tion 1989 151, Summary of the Work
155, A Few Words About the Writer
159, A Few Words About his multi-di-
mensional work 161, Circulating
books of same 163, Polygraphed Es-
says 165, Omakoeio Journal, Esoteric
Key - Schools in function 166.
n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
DRAVIDIANS. THE ANCESTORS
OF THE GREEKS
This is N. Margiori's thirteenth book that was published for the first time in 1979
(three editions). .It is occupied in the Greeks' ancestors, the Dravidians. It con-
cerns an era that ended in about twelve to sixteen thousands years B. C.
During that far-off time, Atlantis (in the Atlantic ocean) and Hinterland (the
largest part of the today's Mediterranean sea) sank by turns, due to their super-
arms, after a cruel war against the Dravidians' opponents, the Atlantins, who
had then created many sufferings. A splendid people (Dravidians) who had a
strong technical and mainly spiritual civilization, sank. And only those who lived
on the high mountains of the endless plain of the Mediterranean sea, survived.
The tragedy of the "cataclysm" is described at all its extent and in detail, and
not as Moses mentionss it conpressively in his Pentateuch. After the destructive
war that the Atlantins created at the expense of the Dravidians, the Atlantic and
the Pacific oceans broke their barriers. and entered the Hinterland. They made
it the Mediterranean sea and covered thousands of towns and villages of our an-
cestors Dravidians. Also, the African sea, now the desert Sahara, rolled into the
Mediterranean sea and drowned everything.
Those who survived came back to the mainland of Greece, as Deukalion and
Pyrra and exactly because they sailed continually to the open seas, to the "pelaghi"
(the greek work for the .oceans), they were renamed Pelasghi. And later on, when
the Aryans descended and a mixing of the two peoples, Pelasghi and Aryans
took place, they formed the Greeks.
A gteat part of the rescued Dravidians moved to the East and they reached
India, six years before the Aryans arrived there. These were they who created
Yoga and the Philosophical Systems that accompany it, as well as the Indian peo-
ple and Civilization that, in its greatest part, is a transference of the civilization
of the Dravidians - Pelasghi - Greeks.
In this book also many archeological, glossological, historical and metaphysi-
cal proofs and documents verify the above point of view.

n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
ÁÍÁÔÏËÉÊÇ ÊÁÉ ÄÕÔÉÊÇ ËÅÕÊÇ ÊÁÉ ÌÁÕÑÇ
ÌÁÃÅÉÁ (ËÅÕÊÇ ÌÁÃÅÉÁ - ´ ÅÊÄÏÓÇ)
Åßíáé ôï äÝêáôï ôÝôáñôï âéâëßï ôïõ Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ êáé ðñùôïåêäüèçêå ôï 1979
(äýï åêäüóåéò). Ó' áõôü ãßíåôáé óáöÝóôáôç êáé îåêÜèáñç äéÜêñéóç áíÜìåóá óôçí
ëåõêÞ êáé ìáýñç ìáãåßá.
Ìéá äéåîïäéêÞ áíÜëõóç ðïõ äåß÷íåé ôï áãáèü êáé ôçí äéáöïñÜ ôïõ áðü ôï áéþ-
íéï êáêü, ôïí ëåõêü ìÜãï ðïõ íéêÜåé ðÜíôá êáé ó÷åôéêÜ åýêïëá
ôïí ìáýñï, ôïí êáêü, ôïí ìï÷èçñü áíôßðáëü ôïõ.
Åðßóçò ìáò äåß÷íåé ôïí áãþíá ôïõ ëåõêïý ìÜãïõ - èåñáðåõ-
ôÞ ï ïðïßïò ìÝñá ìå ôçí ìÝñá áíäñþíåôáé ðåñéóóüôåñï êáé ìÜ-
ëéóôá åíéó÷ýåôáé áõôüìáôá áðü ôçí ßäéá ÌÜíá öýóç, ðïõ áäéÜ-
êïðá åíäéáöÝñåôáé ãéá ôï áñìïíéêü êáé ãéá ôï ôÝëåéï, ðñÜãìá-
ôá ðïõ ìüíï ï ëåõêüò ìÜãïò áãáðÜåé.
¼ðùò ðåñéãñÜöåôáé óôï åí ëüãù âéâëßï ç ëåõêÞ êáé ç ìáý-
ñç óêÝøç åßíáé åíäåéêôéêÝò êáôáóôÜóåéò ôçò øõ÷éêÞò ðïéïôéêÞò
åîÝëéîçò ôïõ óõíáíèñþðïõ êáé üôé åßíáé ðéá äéáðéóôùìÝíï, üôé
üóï ï Üíèñùðïò åîåëßóóåôáé, ôüóï ï øõ÷éêüò ôïõ êüóìïò ðáý-
åé íá óôñÝöåôáé ðñïò ôá êáôþôåñá áãáèÜ ôçò ýëçò êáé êáôÜ óõ-
íÝðåéá äåí ðáó÷ßæåé íá ôá áðïêôÞóåé ìå êÜèå ôñüðï. Áðü ôç íé-
êçôÞñéá áõôÞ óôéãìÞ ôçò áðï÷Þò ìáò áðü ôçí áðüêôçóç ôùí
ðëÜíùí áãáèþí ôçò ýëçò, ç ìáýñç óêÝøç ðïõ ôá åðéæçôïýóå,
áðïìáêñýíåôáé áðü ôçí åîïõóßá ôçò êáé ðáñá÷ùñåß ôç èÝóç ôçò óôçí Üëëç á-
äåëöÞ ôçò, ôç ëåõêÞ óêÝøç.
¼ôáí áõôÞ ç áëëáãÞ êÜðïéá óôéãìÞ ðñáãìáôïðïéçèåß ìÝóá óôïí øõ÷éêü ìáò
êüóìï, áñ÷ßæåé íá êõñéáñ÷åßôáé ç êáèçìåñéíÞ æùÞ ìáò áðü ôçí ëåõêÞ ìáãåßá.
ËåõêÞ ìáãåßá åßíáé ç äýíáìç ðïõ äéåãåßñåé ôéò ðáãùìÝíåò ôïõ ïñãáíéóìïý áé-
èåñéêÝò äõíÜìåéò, ðïõ äßíïõí óôá öõóéêïêýôôáñÜ ìáò óöñßãïò êáé æùÞ. Áíôß-
èåôá ç áäåëöÞ ôçò ç ìáýñç êïéìßæåé êáé íáñêþíåé ôéò ìÝóá ìáò äõíÜìåéò êáé äåí
áöÞíåé ôç æùÞ åëåýèåñá íá áíôëåß áõôÜ ðïõ Ý÷åé óáí áíÜãêç ôçò.
Ï Üóðñïò ìÜãïò óáí óôñáôéþôçò ôïõ êáëïý äßíåé ìå ôçí øõ÷Þ ôïõ ôéò äõíÜ-
ìåéò ðïõ ÷ñåéÜæåôáé ï Üíèñùðïò óôç öõóéêÞ ðáñÜóôáóÞ ôïõ. Áíôßèåôá ï ìáý-
ñïò ìÜãïò íáñêþíåé ôéò ìÝóá ìáò äõíÜìåéò êáé êüâåé ìå êÜèå ôñüðï ôçí áðïñ-
ñüöçóÞ ôïõò áðü ôï öõóéêü ìáò óþìá, ðïõ ôéò ãõñåýåé ãéá íá æÞóåé. ¼ðïéïò
äéáâÜóåé ôï âéâëßï áõôü èá ðÜñåé èÝóç óôïí åîïíôùôéêü áãþíá áíÜìåóá óôï
ðíåýìá ôïõ Êáëïý êáé ôïõ Êáêïý.
Óôï âÜèïò ðñüêåéôáé ãéá áíèñùðïåîÝëéîç êáé áíèñùðïðíåõ-
ìáôïàøùóç. Çèéêïêõñéáñ÷ïýìåíïò ï èíçôüò, ìåôáâÜëëåôáé óå
áõôïêõñßáñ÷ï ×ñéóôéêü ¼í êáé óâÞíåé ôéò ìáýñåò äõíÜìåéò ðïõ
êÜðïôå ôïí êõñéáñ÷ïýóáí.
ÐáñÝ÷ïíôáé êáôÜëëçëåò ðñïóåõ÷Ýò ðáñìÝíåò áðü ôá ðñï-
áéþíéá áñ÷åßá ôùí áãáèþí êáé ôùí áãßùí üëçò ôçò áíèñùðü-
ôçôáò. ÐáñáêëÞóåéò êáé åðéêëÞóåéò ðñïò ôçí Üììùìç ÌïíÜäá,
ôïí áãíü êáé áéþíéï Ðëáóôïõñãü êáé ÐáôÝñá. Ï áíáãíþóôçò å-
îÝñ÷åôáé áðü ôá ãíùóôÜ üñéá ôçò ðåñéïñéóìÝíçò áíôßêñéóçò ôïõ
êáêïý êáé ðñïóëáìâÜíåé õðåñïýóéåò äõíÜìåéò, ìå ôéò ïðïßåò êá-
ôáðïëåìÜåé ôï åðÜñáôï êáêü ó' üëåò ôéò åêäçëþóåéò ôïõ êáé ôå-
ëéêÜ ìå ôçí âïÞèåéá ôïõ Èåßïõ Ðíåýìáôïò ÊÁÔÁÍÉÊÁÅÉ.
Ãéá íá ìðïñÝóåé ëïéðüí íá áõôïûøùèåß ï Üíèñùðïò óôéò
ðíåõìáôéêÝò Èåßåò ðåñéï÷Ýò, ìðïñåß íá ÷ñçóéìïðïéÞóåé ôá ãñá-
öÝíôá ìÝóá óå ôïýôï ôï âéâëßï. Ïé áíáãñáöüìåíïé åîïñêéóìïß êáé ðñïóåõ÷Ýò,
èá öïõíôþóïõí ôéò ìÝóá ôïõ ëçèáñãïýóåò èåßåò - áãáèÝò - ôÝëåéåò êáé Üãéåò
äõíÜìåéò ôïõ êáé èá áðïäéþîåé ìüíéìá ôï êáêü óôá ôÜñôáñá ôïõ êüóìïõ. Äïêß-
ìáóå ößëå áíáãíþóôç.

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 38 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

 ËÅÕÊÇ ÌÁÃÅÉÁ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
ÁöéÝñùóç 6, Ðñüëïãïò Á´ Ýêäïóçò 9, Åé-
óáãùãÞ 13, Ôé åßíáé ç ËåõêÞ Ìáãåßá 17, Ôé
åßíáé ç Ìáýñç Ìáãåßá 23, Ðùò ãåííÞèçêáí
ç ËåõêÞ êáé ç Ìáýñç Ìáãåßá 29, Ðùò åñ-
ãÜæåôáé ï Ëåõêüò êáé ðùò ï Ìáýñïò ÌÜãïò
39, ÐáôÝíôá Ðñþôç: ÐñáêôéêÞ ðñïóöïñÜ
ôïõ Ëåõêïý ÌÜãïõ ðÜíù óôïí Üíèñùðï
ãéá ôçí õãåßá ôïõ 47, ÐáôÝíôá Äåýôåñç:
ÐñáêôéêÞ ðñïóöïñÜ ôïõ Ëåõêïý ÌÜãïõ,
ðÜíù óôïí Üíèñùðï ãéá ôçí õãåßá êáé ôçí
åõôõ÷ßá ôïõ 57, ÐáôÝíôá Ôñßôç: Èåñáðåõ-
ôéêÞ äáéìïíïêáôáðëçîßáò êáé äáéìïíïêáôá-
ðëçîßáò áíèñþðùí êáé æþùí 67, ÐáôÝíôá
ÔÝôáñôç: Ðþò ãßíïíôáé ôá ÷áúìáëéÜ - öõëá-
÷ôÜ êáé ðïéïò ï óêïðüò ôïõò 75, ÐáôÝíôá
ÐÝìðôç: Åîïñêéóìïß ãéá óõíáíèñþðïõò, ãéá
æþá ãéá ôá öõôÜ 87, ÐáôÝíôá ¸êôç: Ôåëå-
ôïõñãéêü ðñïêáôáêëõóìéáßùí êáé ìåôáêáôá-
êëõóìéáßùí ðïëéôéóìþí ãéá ãÝííçóç ðáé-
äéþí 97, ÐáôÝíôá ¸âäïìç: Åîïñêéóìïß ãéá
Üóáñêïõò ìå âÜóç ôçí ÁéãõðôéáêÞ ËåõêÞ
Ìáãåßá 105, ÐáôÝíôá ¼ãäïç: Êáèáãéáóìüò
ôùí êéíçôþí êáé áêéíÞôùí 117, Ç Üìõíá ôïõ
áíèñþðïõ óôçí êáôáëõôéêÞ ìáíßá ôçò ìáý-
ñçò êáé öèïñïðïéïý ìáãåßáò 123, ÓõìðåñÜ-
óìáôá 129, Åðßëïãïò Á´ Ýêäïóçò 137
ËÅÕÊÇ ÌÁÃÅÉÁ - ´ ÅÊÄÏÓÇ
Ðåñéå÷üìåíá ´ Ýêäïóçò 143, Ç íÝá ï-
íïìáóßá ôïõ âéâëßïõ 145, Ç åéêüíá ôïõ å-
îùöýëëïõ 147, Ðñüëïãïò ´ Ýêäïóçò 149,
Ëßãá ëüãéá ãéá ôçí äåýôåñç Ýêäïóç: Åíçìå-
ñùôéêÜ ðåñß Ìáãåßáò 157, ÄéáöïñÝò áíÜìå-
óá óôç ËåõêÞ êáé Ìáýñç Ìáãåßá 163, Ç á-
íÜâëõóç ôçò Áíôßèåóçò Þ Ìáýñçò Äýíáìçò
áðü ôïí Ìáýñï ÌÜãï 173, Ç ÄéÜëõóç ôçò
Ìáýñçò Äýíáìçò áðü ôïí êÜèå Üíèñùðï
181, Ç ÁëÞèåéá êáé ôï øÝìá óôçí ôñéóäéÜ-
óôáôç æùÞ ìáò 189, Ç áðåëåõèÝñùóÞ ìáò
áðü ôçí ìáýñç äýíáìç ôçò ìáýñçò ìáãåß-
áò 197, Åîïñêéóìüò ôïõ Ìáýñïõ Äáßìïíá
205, Åîïñêéóìüò ôïõ Ìáýñïõ ÌÜãïõ 209,
Åðßëïãïò ôçò ´ Ýêäïóçò 215, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá
221, Êõêëïöïñïýíôá ôïõ ßäéïõ âéâëßá ìåëÝ-
ôåò 223, Ðåñéïäéêü, Åóùôåñéêü Êëåéäß, Ó÷ï-
ëÝò 225, Óýíôïìç ðåñßëçøç ôïõ Ýñãïõ 227
WHITE MAGIC
CONTENTS
DEDICATION 6, PREFACE OF THE FIRST EDI-
TION 9, INTRODUCTION 13, FIRST CHAPTER:
WHAT IS WHITE MAGIC 17, SECOND: WHAT IS
BLACK MAGIC 23, THIRD: HOW WHITE AND
BLACK MAGIC WERE BORN 29, FOURTH: HOW
WHITE AND BLACK MAGICIANS WORK 39,
FIFTH: FIRST PATENT, Practical offer by the
White Magician to man for his health 47,
n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
EASTERN AND WESTERN WHITE AND BLACK MAGIC
(WHITE MAGIC - B' EDITION)
This is N. Margiori;s fourteenth book and it was published for the first time in 1979 (two editions). In this book,
a clear and very lucid distinction between the white and the black magic, takes place.
It is about a detailed analysis that shows the difference between the good and the eternal evil, the white ma-
gician who always wins rather easily his black, bad and wicked enemy.
Also, it shows us the struggle of the white magician-curer who, every day is more encouraged and even is
strengthened automatically by the Mother nature that is unceasingly interested in the harmonious and the per-
fect, which only the white magician loves.
As described in the said book, the white and the black thoughts are indicative situations of the psychical qual-
itative evolution of the fellow-man and it is now ascertained that as long as man is evoluted, as his psychical world
ceases turning to the lower goods of the matter and consequently, he does not endeavour to get them using all
the means. From this victorious moment of our abstention from the acquisition of the seductive goods of the
matter, the black thought that was seeking the, moves away from its rule and gives its place to its other sister,
the white thought.
When this change is realized in our psychical world one day, our daily life starts being ruled by the white mag-
ic. The white magic ;is the power that excites the frozen etheric powers of the organism that give our nature-
cells rigour and life. On the contrary, its sister, the black magic putsour powers within us to sleep and makes them
lethargic and it does not let life derive freely what it needs.
The white magician , as a soldier of good, gives holeheartedlythe powers that man needs in his physical pre-
sentation. On the contrary, the black magician drugs our powers within us and. cuts in every way their absorp-
tion from our natural body which seeks them, to live. He who reads this book, will participate in the murderous
struggle beteween th spirit of the Good and of the Evil.
In depth, it is about a human evolution and a human spiritual elevation. The mortal being, ruled by the moral-
ity, is changed into a self-ruled Christianic Being and extinguishes the black powers that once predominated.
The proper prayers are given, taken from the archives from the eternity of the goods and of the saints of the
whole humanity. Supplications and appeals to the blameless Unit, our pure and eternal Creator and Father. The
reader gets out of the known limits of the confined facing with the evil and gets hypersubstantial powers by which
he fights against the cursed evil in all its expressions and finally, with the help of the Holy Ghost, it OVERCOMES.
Therefore, in order that man may be able to get self-elebated to the spiritual Divine areas, man can use what
is written in this book The written exorcisms and prayers, will fire up the divine - good - perfect and holy pow-
ers being in lethargy, and will drive away for ever the evil in the Hades of the world.
Do try my friend reader.
SIXTH: SECOND PATENT, Practical offer by of the Egyptian White Magic 105, TWELFTH: GUSHING UP OF THE OPPOSITION OR OF THE
the White Magician to man for his health EIGHTH PATENT Sanctification of the mov- BLACK POWER FROM THE BLACK MAGICIAN
and for his happiness 57, SEVENTH: THIRD able and of the immovable 117, THIR- 173, THE DISSOLUTION OF THE BLACK POW-
PATENT Therapeutics of demon shocking TEENTH: The man's defence against the cat- ER FROM EVERY MAN 181, TRUTH AND LIE IN
and of demon catalepy to men and to ani- alytic fury of the black and corruptive mag- OUR THREEDIMENSIONAL LIFE 189, OUR LIB-
mals 67, EIGHTH: FOURTH PATENT How the ic 123, FOURTEENTH: CONCLUSIONS 129, EPI- ERATION FROM THE BLACK POWER OF THE
charms-amulets are made and what their LOGUE OF THE 1ST EDITION 137. BLACK MAGIC 197, THE EXORCISM OF THE
purpose is 75, NINTH: FIFTH PATENT Exor- WHITE MAGIC - SECOND EDITION BLACK DEMON 205, THE EXORCISM OF THE
cisms for fellow-men, for animals and for CONTENTS OF THE 2ND EDITION 143, BLACK MAGICIAN 209, EPILOGUE OF THE SEC-
plants 87, TENTH: SIXTH PATENT Ritual of an- DEDICATION B´ EDITION 149, A FEW WORDS OND EDITION 215, CONTENTS 221, CIRCU-
tediluvian and postdiluvian civilizations for FOR THE 2ND EDITION INFORMATIVE ABOUT LATING BOOKS, ESSAYS BY SAME 223, JOUR-
the birth of children 97, ELEVENTH: SEVENTH MAGIC 157, DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE NAL, ESOTERIC KEY, SCHOOLS 225, A SHORT
PATENT Exorcisms for fleshless in the basis WHITE AND THE BLACK MAGIC 163, THE SUMMARY OF THE WORK 227.

n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
THEY DANCE BAREFOOT ON THE FIRE (ANASTENARIA)
This is N. Margiori's fifteenth book and it was published for the first time in 1980. In its lines, the reader can find the esoteric value and the substance
of this work. The Greek Anastenarides, who are unique in all the world, prove their mysticist psychological make-up, and by their fire-walking,, they pre-
sent us one of the inexplicable mysteries in earth, the n o n - f l a m m a b l e phenomenon. An invisible power that is unknown to the exoteric science
until now, moves some mechanisms superior than those of the nature, that make man the sovereign and the winner of the natural elements. Having as
his arm his absolute belief, he pours out from the depths of his soul a hyperdynamic substance of etheric nature, Aristotle's tendency to the perfection
or the hectoplasm of the today's scientists, that is scattered in the body and showers it all over. As a dew that pours out from inside, it passes through
the pores of the skin and as soon as it gets in contact with the fire, it gets crystallized and as a hypernatural steel, it becomes impermeable, while it takes
off the permission from the oxygen to be united with the fire, and then it gets quenched.. Here is the soul sovereign of the matter... You will find all the
stirring and unbelievable truths about Anastenaria, in the pages of this book.

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 39 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

 ÎÕÐÏËÇÔÏÉ ×ÏÑÅÕÏÕÍ ÐÁÍÙ ÓÔÇ ÖÙÔÉÁ
(Á ÍÁ ÓÔÅ ÍÁ ÑÉÁ ÊÁÉ Á ÍÁ ÓÔÅ ÍÁ ÑÇÄÅÓ)
Ðåñéå÷üìåíá
Ðñüëïãïò 7, ÅéóáãùãÞ 10, Ôï Áåßæùïí
Ðõñ ôïõ ÇñÜêëåéôïõ êáé ç ÅíôåëÝ÷åéá ôïõ
ÁñéóôïôÝëç, ôï Åßäïò ôïõ Ðõèáãüñá êáé ï
Æùéêüò Ìáãíçôéóìüò ôïõ ÌåóìÝñ. Ðíåýìá
êáé ÐñÜíá 15, ÐåñéãñáöÞ ôçò ÁíáóôåíÜñé-
êçò êáé ÌõóôéêéóôéêÞò Ôåëåôïõñãßáò 24, Ôï
öáéíüìåíï ôçò Á ê á À á ò äéá ìÝóù ôùí ÷é-
ëéåôçñßäùí 34, Ôá Áñ÷áßá ÈñçóêåõôéêÜ Óõ-
óôÞìáôá 43, Êñßóåéò êáé Ó÷üëéá ãéá ôá Áíá-
óôåíÜñéá êáé ôïõò ÁíáóôåíÜñçäåò, ãõíáß-
êåò êáé Üíäñåò 54, Ôï Ýèéìï ôçò èõóßáò êáé
ôçò Èåïöáãßáò 66, Åðßëïãïò 88
ÅÉÊÏÍÅÓ
Ôï Áãßáóìá 26, Ôï åîéëáóôÞñéï èýìá 30,
Ðñüóùðï áíáóôåíÜñç 32, Ïñ÷ïýìåíïò á-
íáóôåíÜñçò 40, ÏìÜäá áíáóôåíÜñçäùí
êñáôþíôáò ôçí ðïäéÜ ôçò ðÜíóåðôçò åé-
êüíáò 45, ÁíáóôåíÜñéóóá ìå ôçí åéêüíá
óôï ÷Ýñé 50, Ôï êÜëåóìá ôùí åéêüíùí 56,
Åéêüíåò ôùí áãßùí Êùíóôáíôßíïõ êáé ÅëÝ-
íçò 62, Åßíáé êáôáöáíÞò ç Ýêóôáóç ôïõ á-
íáóôåíÜñç ðïõ óößããåé óôï óôÞèïò ôïõ
ôçí Üãéá åéêüíá, ýóôåñá áðü ôï êÜëåóìá
ðïõ ðÞñå áð' áõôÞ 69, Ôá îýëá ôçò öù-
ôéÜò 73, Îõðüëçôïé ÷ïñåýïõí ðÜíù óôç
öùôéÜ 76, Äýï áíáóôåíÜñéóóåò ðÜíù óôç
öùôéÜ 80, Êñáôïýí ôéò ×Üñåò - Åéêüíåò
êáé ÷ïñåýïõí 83
n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
ÎÕÐÏËÇÔÏÉ ×ÏÑÅÕÏÕÍ ÐÁÍÙ ÓÔÇ ÖÙÔÉÁ
(ÁÍÁÓÔÅÍÁÑÉÁ)
Åßíáé ôï äÝêáôï ðÝìðôï âéâëßï ôïõ Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ êáé ðñùôïåêäüèçêå ôï
1980. ÌÝóá óôéò ãñáììÝò ôïõ, ï áíáãíþóôçò ìðïñåß íá âñåé ôçí åóùôåñéêÞ
áîßá êáé ôçí ïõóßá ôïõ Ýñãïõ áõôïý. Ïé ¸ëëçíåò ÁíáóôåíÜñçäåò, ìïíáäéêïß
ó' üëï ôïí êüóìï, áðïäåéêíýïõí ôç ìõóôéêéóôéêÞ øõ÷ïóýíèåóÞ ôïõò êáé ìå
ôçí ðõñïâáóßá ôïõò ìáò ðáñïõóéÜæïõí Ýíá áðü ôá áíåîÞãçôá ìõóôÞñéá ôïõ
êüóìïõ, ôçí á ê á À á.
Ìéá äýíáìç áüñáôç êáé Üãíùóôç áêüìá óôçí åîùôåñéêÞ åðéóôÞìç, êéíåß ìç÷á-
íéóìïýò áíþôåñïõò áð' áõôïýò ôçò öýóçò, ðïõ êÜíïõí ôïí áäýíáìï Üíèñùðï
êõñßáñ÷ï êáé íéêçôÞ ôùí öõóéêþí óôïé÷åßùí. Ìå üðëï ôïõ ôï áðüëõôï ðéóôåýù,
åê÷ýíåé áðü ôá âÜèç ôçò øõ÷Þò ôïõ ìéá õðåñäõíáìéêÞ áéèåñéêÞò öýóçò ïõóßá, ôçí åíôåëÝ÷åéá ôïõ ÁñéóôïôÝëç Þ
ôï åêôüðëáóìá ôùí óçìåñéíþí åðéóôçìüíùí, ðïõ äéáóêïñðßæåôáé óôï óþìá êáé ôï ðåñéëïýæåé üëï. Óáí ìéá äñï-
óéÜ ðïõ ÷ýíåôáé áðü ìÝóá, ðåñíÜ áðü ôïõò ðüñïõò ôçò åðéäåñìßäáò êáé ìüëéò Ýëèåé óå åðáöÞ ìå ôç öùôéÜ áðï-
êñõóôáëëþíåôáé êáé... óáí áôóÜëé õðåñöõóéêü ãßíåôáé áäéáðÝñáóôï, åíþ áöáéñåß ôçí Üäåéá áðü ôï ïîõãüíï íá å-
íùèåß ìå ôç öùôéÜ, ïðüôå óâÞíåé... Íá ç øõ÷Þ êõñßáñ÷ç ôçò ýëçò... ¼ëåò ôéò óõíôáñáêôéêÝò êáé áðßóôåõôåò áëÞ-
èåéåò ðÜíù óôá ÁíáóôåíÜñéá èá ôéò äéáâÜóåôå ìÝóá óôéò óåëßäåò ôïõ âéâëßïõ áõôïý.
THET DANCE BAREFOOT ON FIRE MER'S VITAL MAGNETISM - SPIRIT AND TEMS 45, JUDGEMENTS AND COMMENTS
CONTENTS PRANA 10 , DESCRIPTION OF THE ANAS- ABOUT ANASTENARIA AND ANASTENARI-
PREFACE 7, INTRODUCTION, IRAKLITO'S TENARIC AND MYSTICIST RITUAL 24, THE ANS - MEN AND WOMEN 54 , THE SACRI-
ETERNAL FIRE AND ARISTOTLE'S END- NOT BURNING PHENOMENON IN THE MIL- FICE AND THE THEOFAGY CUSTOM 66, EPI-
LESSNESS, PYTHAGORA'S KIND AND MES- LENIUMS 34, THE ANCIENT RELIGIOUS SYS- LOGUE 88.

n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ äñáóôçñéüôçôåò ôçò ðíåõìáôïøõ÷Þò ìÝóá óôéò ãåéôïíéêÝò äéáóôÜ-

ÌÅ ÔÁÈÁÍÁÔÉÁ ÆÙÇ
Åßíáé ôï äÝêáôï Ýêôï âéâëßï ôïõ Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ êáé ðñùôïåêäüèçêå
ôï 1982 (äýï åêäüóåéò). Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá ìéá ïëïêëçñùìÝíç ïñáìáôé-
óôéêÞ áðüäïóç ôçò ìåôÜ èÜíáôï æùÞò ôïõ êÜèå áí-
èñþðïõ.
Ìáò äßäåé ìéá ðñùôïöáíÞ áíÜëõóç ôùí ÷þñùí ðïõ
ç øõ÷Þ åéóÝñ÷åôáé ìåôÜ èÜíáôï, Üóáñêç ðéá êáé áðå-
ëåõèåñùìÝíç. Áðïäåéêíýåé ôçí óõíÝ÷åéá ôçò ðíåõìá-
ôïøõ÷éêÞò æùÞò óå Üëëåò äéáóôÜóåéò êáé ôçí áíÜðôõ-
îç ìéáò äñáóôçñéüôçôáò ðïõ áðïóêïðåß íá ïëïêëçñþ-
óåé ôçí ôåëåéïðïßçóÞ ôçò ðñïò ïìïßùóç ìå ôçí ßäéá
ôçí ôåëåéüôçôá.
¼ëá ôá á íõ ðÝñ âëç ôá å ìðü äéá ôçò äéÜ ëõ óçò ôïõ
óêüôïõò, ôùí äåéóéäáéìïíéþí êáé ôçò áìÜèåéáò Ý÷ïõí
õðåñðçäçèåß êáé ï ìåëåôçôÞò ôùí áïñÜôùí êüóìùí
åéóÝñ÷åôáé èñéáìâåõôÞò ìÝóá óôïõò êüóìïõò ôçò åðÝ-
êåéíá ðåñéï÷Þò. Ìéá æùíôáíÞ êáé Üöïâç äéÞãçóç, ìéá
îåêÜèáñç êáé óáöÞ ðáñïõóßáóç, ìáò äßíåé êáé ôéò ìé-
êñüôåñåò ðëçñïöïñßåò ãéá ôá åðáêüëïõèá ôïõ èáíÜôïõ. ¸íáò æù-
íôáíüò êáèñÝðôçò ìÝóá óôïí ïðïßï öáßíïíôáé üëåò ïé ìåôÜ èÜíáôï
óåéò, üðïõ êáôáöåýãåé.
Ç ÌåôáèáíÜôéá ÆùÞ åíçìåñþíåé ôïí ìáèçôÞ Þ áíáãíþóôç ãéá êÜ-
èå ìåôÜ èÜíáôï óõìâÜí êáé ôïí ðñïåôïéìÜæåé ãéá ôï ìåãÜëï èáýìá
ôçò áðïâïëÞò ôçò ìïýìéáò - öïñÝá - óþìáôïò êáôÜ ôçí þñá ôçò ìå-
ãÜëçò êñßóçò. Äåí Ý÷åé êáìßá ó÷Ýóç ìå öïâßåò êáé ðéêñßåò. ºóá ßóá, åì-
øõ÷þíåé, åíéó÷ýåé êáé ðáñÝ÷åé ìå ôçí áëÞèåéá ðïõ äé-
äÜóêåé, ôÝëåéá øõ÷éêÞ åëÜöñùóç êáé ðáíôïäõíáìßá.
Ìáò ðñïôñÝðåé íá áíáñùôçèïýìå ôé êáêü ìáò êÜíåé
ç ôùñéíÞ ìáò áãíùóßá. Åíþ áíôßèåôá ç ãíþóç ôçò á-
ëÞèåéáò ïðëßæåé ôïí öõóéêü ìáò Íïõ ìå óèÝíïò, ãéáôß
ìáò äßíåé ôéò åóùôåñéêÝò êñõììÝíåò ãíþóåéò ðïõ öÝñ-
íïõí ôçí øõ÷Þ êïíôÜ ìáò êáé ðïõ ìå ôçí âïÞèåéÜ ôçò
á íôé ëáì âá íü ìá óôå ôï âá èéÜ êñõì ìÝ íï ìõ óôé êü ôçò
áéùíéüôçôÜò ìáò.
Ìå ôï âéâëßï áõôü åéóÝñ÷åôáé ï áíáãíþóôçò óå ìéá
ðñïóùðéêÞ ôïõ ìýçóç. Ì' áõôÞí êáôÝ÷åé ðéá ôçí ìÝ-
èïäï ôïõ åîõðçñåôéêïý èáíÜôïõ êáé ôçí ÷ñçóéìïðïéåß
áõôüìáôá êáôÜ ôçí Üãéá óôéãìÞ ôçò áðïâïëÞò ôçò äå-
óìåýôñáò ýëçò - óÜñêáò.
ÄéáâÜóôå ôï áðïêáëõðôéêü áõôü âéâëßï. Ìáò áöïñÜ
üëïõò ìáò, äéüôé ìáò áðïäåéêíýåé êáôÜ ôñüðï áðáñÜìéëëï êáé åìðå-
ñéóôáôùìÝíï ôçí áèÜíáôç ðåñéï÷Þ ôïõ åßíáé ìáò.

ÌÅÔÁÈÁÍÁÔÉÁ ÆÙÇ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
Á öé Ý ñù óç 5, Ðñü ëï ãïò 9, Åé óá -
ãù ãÞ 14, Ðñï å ôïé ìá óß á ôïõ á íá -
ãíþ óôç ãéá ôï èÝ ìá ìáò 17, Öõ óé -
êï áé èå ñé êüò Êü óìïò 22, Áé èå ñé êï -
öõ óé êü Óþ ìá 30, Á óôñé êï èõ ìé êüò
Êü óìïò 37, Á óôñé êï èõ ìé êü Óþ ìá
47, Íï ç ôé êüò êáé Ðíåõ ìá ôé êüò Êü -
óìïò 54, Ðíåõ ìá ôé êü - Íï ç ôé êü Óþ -
ìá 64, Øõ ÷Þ 73, Ðíåý ìá 84, Ìå ôåí -
óÜñ êù óç 92, Ìå ôåì øý ÷ù óç 102,
ÊÜñ ìá 108, Ï èÜ íá ôïò êáé ôá áß ôéá
ôïõ 119, Ìå ôá èá íÜ ôéá æù Þ 129, Ç
¸âäï ìç Á êôß íá ìå ôá ü íôá êáé ôïõò
êü óìïõò ôçò 158, Ï èÜ íá ôïò äåí õ -
ðÜñ ÷åé, ï Üí èñù ðïò åß íáé á èÜ íá ôïò
168, Ôá ìõ óôé êÜ âéþ ìá ôá ìáò ðåß -
èï õ í ã éá ôç í á èá í á ó ß á ì áò
180, ×áß ñå Üí èñù ðå á èÜ íá ôå! Ðé -
óôÞ åé êü íá êáé ðé óôü ï ìïß ù ìá Å êåß -
íïõ 194, Ç á íÜ óôá óç íå êñþí 206,
Èå üò êáé Üí èñù ðïò á ðï ôå ëïýí ôï
ü ëï êáé ôï ìü íïí Ý íá öé ëï óï öé êü
óý óôç ìá 219, Å ðß ëï ãïò 235.
POSTHUMOUS LIFE
BY NIKOLAOS MARGIORIS
CONTENTS
Dedication 5, Preface 9, Introduc-
tion 14, Reader's preparation for our
subject 17, Physicoetheric world 22,
Ethericophysic body 30, Astricothymic
world 37, Astricothymic body 47, Intel-
lectual and spiritual world 54, Spiritual
intellectual body 64, Soul 73, Spirit
84, Reincarnation 92, Metempsychosis
102, Karma 108, Death and its causes
119, Posthumous life 129, The seventh
ray with the beings and its worlds 158,
Death does not exist, man is immortal
168, The mystic experiences convince
us for our immortality 180, Hail im-
mortal man! True image and effigy of
him 194, The resurrection of the dead
206, God and man compose the whole
and single philosophical system 219, E
p i l o g u e 235.

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 40 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

 n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
POSTHUMOUS LIFE
This is N. Margiori's sixteenth book that was
published for the first time in 1982 (two edi-
tions). It is about a complete, visionary inter-
pretation of every man's life after death.
It gives us an unprecedented analysis of the
spaces where the soul enters after death, be-
ing. fleshless and liberated now. It proves the
ontinuation of the spirit-psychical life in other
dimensions and the development of an activi-
ty that aims to complete its perfecting to the
likening with the perfection itself.
All the insurmountable obstacles of the dis-
solution of the darkness, of the superstitions
and of the ignorance, have been overcome
and the student of the invisible worlds enters
triumphantly the worlds of the area beyond. A
vivid and fearless narration, a clear and lucid
presentation, give us even the smallest infor-
mation about the consequents of the death. A
living mirror in which all the posthumous ac-
tivities of the spirit-soul appear, in the adjacent
dimensions where it resorts to.
The posthumous Life keeps the student or
the reader informed about every fact after
death, and prepares him for the great marvel
of the rejection of the mummy - carrier - body,
during the great Judgement. It has no relation
with any phobias or bitternesses. On the con-
trary, it animates, strengthens and provides,
through the Truth it teaches, the perfect psy-
chical relief and omnipower.
It suggests us to wonder how our present
ignorance harms us. While, on the contrary,
the knowledge of the Truth arms our natur-
al Mind with vigour, because it gives us the
esoteric hidden knowledge that bring the
soul near us and that, under its help we re-
alize the secret of our eternity that is deeply
hidden.
By this book, the reader enters his personal
initiation. Through this initiation, he possesses
now the method of the serviceable death and
it uses it automatically at the holy moment of
the rejection of the binding matter-flesh.
Do read this revealing book. It concerns all of
us, because it proves us in an incomparable and
thorough way, the immortal area of our being.

ÑÁÔÆÁ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ óç 12, Ðñüëïãïò 13, ÅéóáãùãÞ 17, Áñ÷áß-

ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ ïé Åëëçíéêïß õðáéíéãìïß ôïõ Óôï÷áóìïý 20,
Ðåñéå÷üìåíá 5, Ôá äýï ìÝñç ôïõ âéâëß- Óçìáóßá ôçò ëÝîçò Ãéüãêá êáé ôçò öñÜóçò
ïõ 7, Ðñïåôïéìáóßá 8, ÐáñÜêëçóç 9, Ðïõ ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá 24, Ôï áíþôáôï óêáëß ôçò
ãñÜöôçêå ôï ðáñüí âéâëßï 9, Ç Öéëïóïößá áñ÷áéüôáôçò Ìýçóçò Þôáí ç ðñáãìÜôùóç
ôïõ Ãéüãêá óôç óåéñÜ ðïõ Ý÷åé óôï åóùôå- ôçò õðåñóõíåéäçóßáò, ç öéëïóïößá ôïõ Ãéü-
ñéêü êëåéäß ìïõ 10, Óçìåßùóç 11, ÁöéÝñù- ãêá 26, Ï óïöüò ìå ôéò ïêôþ êáìðïýñåò,
n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
RAJA YOGA
This is N. Margiori's seventeenth book and it was published for the first
time in 1983. It is about the higher step of the writer's teaching in the E-
soteric Initiation.
Actually the elevation of the conscience to the hyperconscience is
taught, in the spaces and in the worlds that are under another unknown
frequency. It is a practical method of ascension to the transgressive and
hyperconscious situation of the humanmind. Evey man can enter this
great and holy path of the. Divine meeting.
It is written by a perfectly experiencing man of a rare completion (an
occultist and mystic), writer and Master N. Margioris who lived for almost
13 years in India.. The book is full of knowledge, and created with en-
thusiasm and hoping that it will help every man to use this method for
the activation of the other immovable until now half of the humanmind,
Counted in the seconds of the hour, the times of the different con-
centration,, meditation and ecstasis - union - samadhi, afford the studen
the facility and the sureness to walk on the spiritual psychical paths of his
being itself, with a great ease and a certain result.
Raja Yoga, or the Royal Union, is the methodical scientific union of the
man's Mind with the district of his transgressive frequency-situation.
Socrates and Platon call this method Reflection. This word is completely
right. Only through reflection Mind can find its third aspect, the hyper-
esthetic one. The conscience and the hyperconscience withdraw then
completely and leave the full governing to the hypersensation, that di-
rects man to the proper frequency, so that he can catch higher vibrations-
ittitations.
At the same time, the harmony and the perfection themselves are cre-
ated within him. He who enters the vibrations of these frequencies, will
end in an eternal being. He will feel the perfection and he will get vi-
brated by the harmony itself. He needs no special supply. His only guide
is the will and his spontaneous enthusiasm.
Take in your hands fearlessly this Divine Present, the most revealing sys-
tem of the esoteric ascension and advance on the knowledge-shining
light, RISING.
n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
ÑÁÔÆÁ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ
Åßíáé ôï äÝêáôï Ýâäïìï âéâëßï ôïõ Í.
ÌáñãéùñÞ êáé ðñùôïåêäüèçêå ôï 1983.
Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá ôçí áíþôåñç âáèìßäá ôçò äé-
äáóêáëßáò ôïõ óõããñáöÝá óôçí Åóùôåñé-
êÞ Ìýçóç.
ÅìðñÜãìáôá äéäÜóêåôáé ç áíýøùóç ôçò
óõíåßäçóçò óôçí õðåñóõíåßäçóç, óå ÷þ-
ñïõò êáé óå êüóìïõò ìå Üëëç Üãíùóôç óõ-
÷íüôçôá. Åßíáé ìéá ðñáêôéêÞ ìÝèïäïò áíÜ-
âáóçò ðñïò ôçí õðåñâáôéêÞ êáé õðåñóõíåé-
äçôÞ êáôÜóôáóç ôïõ áíèñùðïíïý. Ìðïñåß
ï êÜèå Üíèñùðïò íá ìðåé ó' áõôü ôï ìå-
ãÜëï êáé ôï éåñü ìïíïðÜôé ôçò... Èåßáò óõíÜíôçóçò.
Åßíáé ãñáììÝíï áðü åîáéñåôéêÜ óðÜíéáò ðëçñüôçôáò, ôÝëåéá âéùìáôéêü Üí-
èñùðï (áðïêñõöéóôÞ êáé ìõóôéêéóôÞ), ôïí óõããñáöÝá êáé ÄÜóêáëï Í. Ìáñ-
ãéùñÞ, ðïõ Ýæçóå åðß 13 ó÷åäüí ÷ñüíéá óôçí Éíäßá, êáé åßíáé ìåóôü ãíþóçò,
ãñáììÝíï ìå åíèïõóéáóìü êáé ìå åëðßäá ðùò èá âïçèÞóåé êÜèå Üíèñùðï
íá ÷ñçóéìïðïéÞóåé áõôÞ ôçí ìÝèïäï ãéá ôçí åíåñãïðïßçóç ôïõ áêéíçôïýíôïò
Ýùò ôá ôþñá Üëëïõ Þìéóõ ôïõ áíèñùðïíïý.
ÌåôñçìÝíïé óå äåýôåñá ëåðôÜ ôçò þñáò ïé ÷ñüíïé ôùí äéáöüñùí öÜóå-
ùí óõãêÝíôñùóçò, äéáëïãéóìïý êáé Ýêóôáóçò - Ýíùóçò - óáìÜíôé, ðáñÝ÷ïõí
ôçí åõ÷Ýñåéá êáé ôçí óéãïõñéÜ óôïí ìáèçôÞ, íá ðåñðáôÞóåé óôá ðíåõìáôï-
øõ÷éêÜ ìïíïðÜôéá ôïõ ßäéïõ åßíáé ôïõ, ìå ìåãÜëç åõêïëßá êáé ìå âÝâáéï á-
ðïôÝëåóìá.
Ç ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá Þ ç ÂáóéëéêÞ ¸íùóç, åßíáé ç ìåèïäéêÞ åðéóôçìïíéêÞ Ýíù-
óç ôïõ Íïõ ôïõ áíèñþðïõ ìå ôçí ðåñéï÷Þ ôçò õðåñâáôéêÞò óõ÷íüôçôáò -
êáôÜóôáóÞò ôïõ. Ï ÓùêñÜôçò êáé ï ÐëÜôùíáò áðïêáëïýí ôçí ìÝèïäï áõôÞ
Óôï÷áóìü. Åßíáé óùóôüôáôç ç ëÝîç áõôÞ. Ìüíï ìå ôïí óôï÷áóìü ìðïñåß ï
Íïõò íá âñåé ôçí ôñßôç üøç ôïõ, ôçí õðåñáéóèçôéêÞ. Ç óõíåßäçóç êáé ç õ-
ðïóõíåßäçóç õðï÷ùñïýí ôüôå ðáíôåëþò êáé áöÞíïõí ôçí ðëÞñç êõâÝñíç-
óç óôçí õðåñáßóèçóç, üðïõ ïäçãåß ôïí Üíèñùðï óôçí êáôÜëëçëç óõ÷íü-
ôçôá ãéá íá êáôáóôåß éêáíüò íá ðéÜóåé áíþôåñïõò êñáäáóìïýò - åñåèéóìïýò.
Ôáõôü÷ñïíá äçìéïõñãåßôáé ç ßäéá ç áñìïíßá êáé ç ôåëåéüôçôá ìÝóá ôïõ.
¼ðïéïò èá ìðåé óôïõò êñáäáóìïýò áõôþí ôùí óõ÷íïôÞôùí, èá áðïâåß áðü
åêåßíç ôçí óôéãìÞ áéþíéïò. Èá íéþóåé ôçí ôåëåéüôçôá êáé èá äïíçèåß ìå ôçí
ßäéá ôçí áñìïíßá. ÊáíÝíá éäéáßôåñï åöüäéï äåí Ý÷åé áíÜãêç. Ìüíïò ôïõ ïäç-
ãüò åßíáé ç èÝëçóç êáé ï ðçãáßïò åíèïõóéáóìüò ôïõ.
ÐÜñôå óôá ÷Ýñéá Üöïâá áõôü ôï Èåßï Äþñï, ôï áðïêáëõðôéêüôáôï óýóôç-
ìá ôçò åóùôåñéêÞò áíÜâáóçò êáé ðñï÷ùñÞóôå ðñïò ôçí ëÜìðïõóá áðü ôï
öùò ôçò ãíþóçò ÁÍÁÔÏËÇ.

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 41 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

ÁóôáâÜêñá 29, ÁíÜëõóç ôùí óêáëïðáôéþí
ôçò ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá 33, Ïé ïêôþ Ãéüãêá ðïõ
ïäçãïýí óôçí ðñáãìÜôùóç 37, ÊÑÉÃÉÁ ÃÉÏ-
ÃÊÁ 41, ×ÁÈÁ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ 43, ÌÁÍÔÑÁÌ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ
44, ÊÁÑÌÁ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ 46, ÌÐÁÊÔÉ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ 47,
ÓÁÌÐÔÁ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ 50, ÃÊÍÁÍÉ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ 52, ÑÁ-
ÔÆÁ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ 53, Ó÷üëéá êáé êñßóåéò ðÜíù óôç
Ãéüãêá ãåíéêÜ êáé éäéáßôåñá ðÜíù óôç ÑÜ-
ôæá Ãéüãêá 58, ÐñáíáãéÜìá ìï÷ëüò ôçò ÑÜ-
ôæá Ãéüãêá 62, ÐñáôéáêÜñá: ÁðïêïðÞ Íïõ
êáé áéóèÞóåùí 69, ÓõãêÝíôñùóç: Ç áðáñ-
÷Þ áíýøùóçò óôïí õðåñíïý. ÍôáñÜíá 72,
Äéáëïãéóìüò: ÍôõÜíá 75, ÓáìÜíôé: Èýùóç
- Åíùóç. ¢öéîç óôçí õðåñóõíåßäçóç 79,
Íïõò êáé Íüçóç óå îÝ÷ùñç ðáñáôÞñçóç
ãéá ôç óõíåñãáóßá ôïõò 85, Ðíåõìáôïøõ-
÷Þ êáé ï ñüëïò ôçò 90, ÄéáöïñÜ áíÜìåóá
óôïí ãíþñéìï Ìõóôéêéóìü êáé óôéò ðåñßåñ-
ãåò õøþóåéò ôçò ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá 96, Êïõíôá-
ëßíç êáé Íïõò 100, ÓÜêñá - Êïõíôáëßíç -
êáé Íïõò 104, ÐñáôéáêÜñá êáé Íïõò 116,
Íüçóç êáé Íïõò 120, ÍôáñÜíá - ÍôõÜíá -
ÓáìÜíôé êáé Íïõò 125, ÌÅÑÏÓ ÄÅÕÔÅÑÏ,
ÐñáêôéêÞ áðüäïóç ôçò ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá, Ðåñé-
ãñáöÞ äß÷ùò åéêüíåò 129, ÈÝóç ãéá Ýíáñ-
îç. Ôï óþìá ðáßñíåé ôç óôÜóç ôïõ êáé ôïí
ÄÉÔÏÌÇ ÌÅÔÁ ÖÕÓÉÊÇ ÅÃÊÕÊËÏÐÁÉÄÅÉÁ
(Á´ ÔÏÌÏÓ - ÁÐÏ ÔÏ ÃÑÁÌÌÁ Á ÅÙÓ ÔÏ Ì)
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
ÁöéÝñùóç 3, ÐáñÜêëçóç ðñïò ôïõò åí-
äéáöåñüìåíïõò 4, Ðïõ êáé ðüôå ãñÜöôçêå
5, Ç ïíïìáóßá ôïõ âéâëßïõ ôïýôïõ 6, Ãéáôß
ãñÜöôçêå 7, ÁíÜðôõîç ôïõ ôñüðïõ ÷ñÞ-
óçò 8, Ðñüëïãïò 10, ÅéóáãùãÞ 13, Á: Áâá-
ôÜñ 17, ÁãÜðç. Ôé åßíáé ç ÁãÜðç 18, ÁãÜðç
óôç ÌðÜêôé Ãéüãêá 23, ¢ããåëïé êáé Áñ÷Üã-
ãåëïé 25, Áãíùóôéêéóìüò 28, ÁäáìéêÞ Öõ-
ëÞ. Ðïéá Þôáí 30, ÁäåëöÝò Øõ÷Ýò. Ôé åßíáé
32, ÁæÜíåò - óôÜóåéò - èÝóåéò 35, ÁéèåñéêÜ
ìáãíçôïçëåêôñéêÜ ðåäßá 37, Áéèåñéêüò êü-
óìïò. Ôé åßíáé 38, Áéèåñéêü óþìá. Ôé åßíáé
41, Áêåíáôüí, ï ðñþôï ÌïíïèåúóôÞò 43,
ÁëåîáíäñéíÞ ó÷ïëÞ. Ôé Þôáí 45, ÁìÜñôçìá
ôï ðñïðáôïñéêü 46, Áììþíéïò ÓáêêÜò.
Ðïéïò Þôáí 48, ÁíÜâáóç ìõóôéêéóôéêÞ ðíåõ-
ìáôéêÞ æùÞ 50, ÁíáäñïìÞ óôï ðáñåëèüí
52, ÁíáìíÞóåéò ÐõèáãïñéêÝò 54, ÁíáðíïÞ
óôçí ÐñáíáãéÜìá 56, ÁíÜóôáóç. Ôé åßíáé 58,
ÁíÜóôáóç ôï ðéóôåýù ôùí ×ñéóôéáíþí 59,
ÁíáóôåíÜñéá. Ôé åßíáé 61, ÁíäñïìÝäá ôï ìå-
ôáöõóéêü ðáñüí ôçò 63, ¢íèñùðïò. Ôé åß-
íáé ï Üíèñùðïò 64, Áíèñþðéíåò ÖõëÝò
ðïõ ìáò ðñïåôïßìáóáí 66, Áíïñèüäïîá Éí-
äéêÜ ÖéëïóïöéêÜ ÓõóôÞìáôá 68, Áíôáóêá-
ñÜíá. Ôé åßíáé ç ÁíôáóêáñÜíá 75, Áíôßèåóç
óôç ÈÝóç 77, Áíôéóýìðáí Áíôéàëç. Ôé åßíáé
79, Áðïêñõöéóìüò. Ôé åßíáé 81, Áðïëýôñù-
óç, áðïðíåõìÜôùóç 84, Áðïìõèïëïãßóåéò
ôïõ Åëëçíéêïý ÐÜíèåïõ 85, Áðïóõìâïëé-
óìüò 87, Áñéèìïóïößá. Ôé åßíáé ç Áñéèìïóï-
ößá 89, Áñ÷áúêÜ ÌõóôÞñéá 92, Áóêëçðéåßá
ðþò èåñÜðåõáí 94, Áóêëçðéåßï Åðéäáýñïõ
96, Áóêëçðéüò. Áóêëçðéåßá, ÊÝíôáõñïò 98,
ÁóñÜì. Ôé åßíáé ÁóñÜì 103
Áóôñéêüò Êüóìïò. Ôé åßíáé 104, Áóôñéêü
Óþìá. Ôé åßíáé 107, Áóôñïëïãßá - Áóôñïóï-
ößá. ÐñïÝëåõóÞ ôïõò 109, ÁóôñïëïãéêÞ
Ãéüãêá 111, ÁôëÜíôéá ÖõëÞ. Ðïéá Þôáí 116,
ÁõèõðïâïëÞ êáé ÕðïâïëÞ. Ôé åßíáé 118, Á-
÷ßìóá. Ç íéêçôÞñéá Üâéá óõìðåñéöïñÜ 121,
Â: Âáãéïý, ôá áÝñéá ôçò óõãêñÜôçóçò ôçò
æùÞò 124, Âáóéëåßá ôùí Ïõñáíþí 125, Âá-
óêáíßá - ÌÜôéáóìá. Ôé åßíáé 127, Âáóêáíßá
ðñïóáíáôïëéóìü ôïõ 131, Ðñïãñáììáôé-
óìüò ðñéí áðü êÜèå Ýíáñîç 134, ÐñáêôéêÞ
åîÜóêçóç ôçò ÐñáíáãéÜìá Þ áãùãÞò åëÝã-
÷ïõ êáé ïäÞãçóçò ôçò ÐñÜíá 135, Ðñáêôé-
êÞ åîÜóêçóç ôçò ÐñáôéáêÜñá 141, Íôá-
ñÜíá: ÓõãêÝíôñùóç óôçí ðñÜîç 146,
ÍôõÜíá: Äéáëïãéóìüò áëçèéíüò óôçí ðñÜ-
îç 151, ÓáìÜíôé - Èåþñçóç - Åðïðôåßá - Å-
íùóç - Õðåñóõíåéäçóßá êáé ç ðñáãìÜôùóÞ
ôïõ 156, ÏêôÜóêáëç Üóêçóç. ÐñáêôéêÞ å-
öáñìïãÞ 161, ÓõìðåñÜóìáôá 165, Áíáöå-
ñüìåíïò óôá äýï ìÝñç ôïõ âéâëßïõ 170,
ÉíäéêÞ Öéëïóïößá 190, Åðßëïãïò 199, Åê-
äïèÝíôá Ýñãá ôïõ ßäéïõ 204, ¸ñãá ôïõ ß-
äéïõ óõããñáöÝá ìç åêäïèÝíôá 206, Ç ß-
äñõóç ôçò íÝáò ó÷ïëÞò ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá 207.
RAJA YOGA
PART ONE
CONTENTS 5, THE TWO PARTS OF THE
BOOK 7, PREPARATION 8, REQUEST 9,
WHERE THE PRESENT BOOK WAS WRITTEN
9, THE YOGA PHILOSOPHY AT THE ORDER IT
HAS IN MY ESOTERIC KEY 10, NOTE 11, DED-
ICATION 12, PREFACE 13, INTRODUCTION
17, ANCIENT GREEK HINTS OF THOUGHT 20,
êáé ÌÜôéáóìá, ïé äõï ðëçãÝò 130, Âéâåêá-
íÜíôá ï ðéï áíèñùðéóôÞò 132, Âñá÷ìáíé-
óìüò ç Èñçóêåßá ôçò Éíäßáò 134, Âñßôôéò
óôç ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá 138, Âñõêüëáêåò. Ôé åßíáé
ïé âñõêüëáêåò 140, Ãéüãêá. Ôé åßíáé ç Ãéüãêá
144, Ãíþóç óôç ÃêíÜíé Ãéüãêá 151, Ãêüìðõ
Ýñçìïò. Ôé åßíáé ç Ýñçìïò Ãêüìðõ 153, Ãéï-
ãêáíÜíôá. Ç áõôïâéïãñáößá åíüò Ãéüãêé
154, Ä: Äéáßóèçóç. Ôé åßíáé ç Äéáßóèçóç 158,
ÄéÜêñéóç óôç ÊÜñìá Ãéüãêá 159, Äéáëïãé-
óìüò. Ôé åßíáé ï Äéáëïãéóìüò 162, Äéáëïãé-
óìüò óôçí ðñÜîç 165, Äßáò. Ðïéïò Þôáí ï
Äßáò 167, Äßáõëïé áíÜìåóá óôéò ÄéáóôÜóåéò
168, ÄéáöïñÜ áíÜìåóá óôïí Áðïêñõöéóìü
êáé Ìõóôéêéóìü 171, Äéüñáóç. Ôé åßíáé ç Äéü-
ñáóç 173, Äüãìá. Ôé åßíáé ôï Äüãìá 176,
ÄïíÞóåéò óôéò äéÜöïñåò ÄéáóôÜóåéò 178,
Äñáâßäåò. Ðïéá Þôáí ç éóôïñßá ôïõò 180,
Äñáâßäåò ïé ðñüãïíïß ìáò 182, Äñüìïò
ðñïò ôï ÓáìÜíôé 184, Äõéóìüò. Ôé åßíáé ï
Äõéóìüò 186, Å: ÅéóáãùãÞ óôïí Õðíùôéóìü
188, ¸êôáêôåò óùìáôþóåéò áóùìÜôùí
189, Åêôüðëáóìá 191, Åëåõóßíéá ÌõóôÞñéá
196, Åíüñáóç. Ôé åßíáé ç Åíüñáóç 198, Åí-
óôéêôþäåéò õðïóõíåßäçôåò ôÜóåéò 200, Å-
îùãÞéíïé. Ôáõôüóçìá üíôá ìå ôïí Üíèñù-
ðï 202, Åðéèõìßá. Ôé åßíáé ç åðéèõìßá 204,
ÅðéëïãÞ óôç ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá 206, Åñåèéóìïß
äïíÞóåùí ìå ôéò 5 áéóèÞóåéò 208, ¸ñù-
ôáò. Ôé åßíáé ï ¸ñùôáò 210, ÅóùóôñåöÞò
êáé ÅîùóôñåöÞò Ìõóôéêéóìüò 213, Åóùôå-
ñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá êáé Ðëáôùíéêü Éäåþäåò
216, Åóùôåñéóìüò. Ôé åßíáé ï Åóùôåñéóìüò
217, Åóùôåñéóìüò êáé ÌåôáöõóéêÞ 220,
ÅõáããåëéêÝò ðåñéêïðÝò ãéá ôçí ÌåôåíóÜñ-
êùóç 222, ÅöôÜ åßíáé ïé Áýëáêåò åðáöÞò
226, ÅöôÜ óþìáôá ôçò øõ÷Þò. Ðïéá åßíáé
228, Æ: Æáñáôïýóôñá 231, Ç: ¹ñá. Ðïéá Þ-
ôáí ç ¹ñá 233, Çñáêëåéþôåò êáé Áíäñï-
ìåäéêïß ÅîùãÞéíïé 234, Çóõ÷áóôÝò ôïõ
14ïõ áéþíá 236, È: ÈÜíáôïò. Ôé åßíáé ï èÜ-
íáôïò 241, ÈÜíáôïò åõåñãÝôçò 244, Èáý-
ìá. Ôé åßíáé ôï Èáýìá 246, Èåßá Êïéíùíßá.
Ôé åßíáé 248, Èåßá ÌåôÜëçøç óôç ×ñéóôéáíï-
óýíç 250, Èåúóìüò êáé Áíôéèåúóìüò 252,
Èåüò. Ôé åííïïýìå ìå ôç ëÝîç Èåüò 254,
Èåïóïößá. Ôé åßíáé ç Èåïóïößá 256, Èåïõñ-
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
SIGNIFICANCE OF THE WORD YOGA AND OF
THE PHRASE RAJA YOGA 24, THE SUPREME
STEP OF THE VERY ANCIENT INITIATION WAS
THE ACCOMPLISHMENT OF THE HYPERCON-
SCIENCE, THE YOGA PHILOSOPHY 26, THE
WISE WITH THE EIGHT HUMPS ASTAVAKRA
29, ANALYSIS OF THE RAJA YOGA STEPS 33,
THE EIGHT YOGAS THAT GUIDE TO THE AC-
COMPLISHMENT 37, 1) KRIYA YOGA 41, 2)
HATHA YOGA 43, 3) MANTRAM YOGA 44, 4)
KARMA YOGA 46, 5) BHAKTI YOGA 47, 6)
SAMPTA YOGA 50, 7) GNANI YOGA 52, 8)
RAJA YOGA 53, COMMENTS AND JUDJE-
MENTS ON YOGA GENERALLY AND PARTICU-
LARLY ON RAJA YOGA 58, PRANAYAMA, THE
LEVERY OF RAJA YOGA 62, PRATYAHARA:
CUTTING OFF OF MIND AND SENSES 69,
CONCENTRATION: THE BEGINNING OF THE
HYPERMIND ELEVATION - DHARANA 72,
MEDITATION: DHIANA 75, SAMADHI: THEOSIS
- UNION - ARRIVAL TO THE HYPERCON-
SCIENCE 79, MIND AND INTELLECT IN A SEP-
ARATE OBSERVATION FOR THEIR COOPERA-
TION 85, SPIRITSOUL AND ITS PART 90, DIF-
FERENCE BETWEEN THE FAMILIAR MYSTI-
CISM AND THE CURIOUS ELEVATIONS OF RA-
ãßá. Ôé åßíáé ç Èåïõñãßá 257, Èåïõñãßá ç á-
íõøùôéêÞ 259, Èåñáðåßá ìå ôçí áñìïíßá
ôùí ìáãíçôéêþí ñåõìÜôùí 261, Èåñáðåõ-
ôéêÞ áðü áðüóôáóç 264, ÈÝóç êáé Áíôßèå-
óç 265, ÈÝùóç 269, Èñçóêåßá. Ôé åßíáé ç
Èñçóêåßá 271, Èýìïò ï ðñïáäÝíáò 272,
Èùô Þ Èùè 274, ÉÜðåôïò 277, ÉäñõôéêÝò Á-
êôßíåò - Áýëáêåò 279, Éíäéêü Ôñéìïýñôé,
ÂñÜ÷ìá - Âéóíïý - Óßâá 280, Éïõäáúóìüò
282, Éóçìåñßåò êáé ÇëéïóôÜóéá 285, ÉóëÜì.
Ìùáìåèáíéóìüò 288, ÉùÜííçò Åõáããåëé-
óôÞò 290, ÉùÜííçò ÅõáããåëéóôÞò ï ãéïò ôçò
ÂñïíôÞò 292, Ê: Êáâåßñéá ÌõóôÞñéá 295,
Êáãéáôñß. Øáëìïç÷çôéêÝò äïíÞóåéò ôïõ ìÝ-
óá êáé ôïõ Ýîù ìáò 297, ÊÜèáñóç. Ôé åßíáé
ç ÊÜèáñóç 299, ÊáÀñçò Èåüöéëïò. Ðïéïò
Þôáí 301, Êáëëéüóôñï ÁëÝîáíäñïò. Ìý-
óôçò êáé Ìõóôáãùãüò 302, Êáðáëáðáôßíá
ôçí áðïêáëïýí óôçí ÅëëÜäá 305, ÊáñëéÜí:
ÌÝèïäïò óýëëçøçò ôçò áýñáò ôïõ áí-
èñþðïõ 307, ÊÜñìá: Ï Íüìïò ôçò Áíôá-
ðïäïôéêÞò Äéêáéïóýíçò 309, ÊáñìéêÝò Áíôé-
óôáèìßóåéò 322, Êáôáëçøßá. Ôé åßíáé ç êáôá-
ëçøßá 323, ÊÝíôáõñïé: ÓõããåíéêÜ üíôá ôùí
ÔéôÜíùí 327, ÊÝíôñá Äýíáìçò áíáëõüìå-
íá 329, Êüëáóç. Ôé åßíáé ç Êüëáóç 331, Êü-
ñïò. Ôé åßíáé ï Êüñïò 333, Êüìçò ÁëÝîáí-
äñïò Êáëëéüóôñï 335, Êïìöïýêéïò. Ðïéïò
Þôáí 337, Êïõíôáëßíç: Ç áðïèçóáõñéóìÝ-
íç ìÝóá ìáò åíÝñãåéá 340, Ë: ËÜâñõò: Ôé åß-
íáé ï ËÜâñõò 343, Ëáâýñéíèïò: Ôé Þôáí ï
Ëáâýñéíèïò 344, Ëåìïýñéá Ñßæá ÖõëÞ 346,
ËåõêÞ ÖõëÞ 348, ËÞèáñãïò óôïí Õðíùôé-
óìü 349, ËÞèç: Ôé åßíáé ç Ëþèç 351, Ëßððé-
êá: Ôé åßíáé ïé Ëßððéêá 353, Ëþñïò: Ìåôù-
ðéêüò áéèåñéêüò äéðëüò 354, Ì: Ìáãåßá. Ôé
åßíáé ç Ìáãåßá 357, Ìáãåßá ËåõêÞ êáé Ìáý-
ñç 358, ÌÜãéá - ÐëÜíç. Ôé åßíáé ç ÌÜãéá -
ÐëÜíç 360, Ìáãíçôéêüò Õðíùôéóìüò 362,
ÌáíÜò ç óôåñåïðïéçìÝíç Ïõóßá ôçò ÆùÞò
365, Ìáíáóáðïýôñáò. Ðïéïé Þôáí ïé Ìá-
íáóáðïýôñáò 367, Ìáíïý. Ôé åßíáé Ìáíïý
369, Ìáíôéáìßêá Óïýôñá Þ ôï Áðüëõôï Êå-
íü 371, ÌÜíôñáì. Ôé åßíáé ôï ðåñßöçìï ÌÜ-
íôñáì 373, ÌÜ÷áôæü÷áí. Ôé åßíáé ï ÌÜ÷á-
ôæü÷áí 375, ÌåãÜëá Åëåõóßíéá ÌõóôÞñéá
376, Ìåë÷éóåäÝê. Ç êáôÜ ôÜîç Ìåë÷éóåäÝê
42 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
JA YOGA 96, KUNDALINI AND MIND 100,
SHAKRA - KUNDALINI - AND MIND 104,
PRATYAHARA AND MIND 116, INTELLECT
AND MIND 120, DHARANA - DHIANA -
SAMADHI AND MIND 125, PART TWO, PRAC-
TICAL PERFORMANCE OF RAJA YOGA DE-
SCRIPTION WITHOUT IMAGES 129, POSE FOR
THE STARTING THE BODY TAKES ITS POSI-
TION AND ITS ORIENTATION 131, PRO-
GRAMMING BEFORE EVERY BEGINNING 134,
PRACTICE IN PRANAYAMA OR IN THE TRAIN-
ING OF CONTROL AND GUIDANCE OF PRANA
135, PRACTICE IN PRATYAHARA 141, DHA-
RANA: CONCENTRATION IN PRACTICE 146,
DHIANA: TRUE MEDITATION IN PRACTICE
151, SAMADHI - THEORESIS - SUPERVISION
- UNION - HYPERCONSCIENCE AND ITS AC-
COMPLISHMENT 156, EIGHTSCALE EXERCISE
PRACTICAN DESCRIPTION 161, CONCLU-
SIONS 165, REFERRING TO THE TWO PARTS
OF THE BOOK 170, INDIAN PHILOSOPHY 190,
EPILOGUE 199, PUBLISHED WORKS BY SAME
204, UNPUBLISHED WORKS BY THE SAME
WRITER 206, THE ESTABLISHMENT OF THE
NEW SCHOOL RAJA YOGA 207.
Äçìéïõñãßá 379, ÌÝóìåñ - ÌðñÝúô - Óáñêþ
êáé Ëéåìðþë 381, ÌåôåíóÜñêùóç. Ôé åßíáé
ç ÌåôåíóÜñêùóç 384, ÌåôåíóÜñêùóç óôç
êáèçìåñéíÞ æùÞ 398, Ìç÷áíéêüò Õðíùôé-
óìüò 400, ÌéêñÜ Åëåõóßíéá ÌõóôÞñéá ôá
åí ¢ãñáéò 402, ÌðÜíôåò 404, ÌðáãêáâÜô
ÃêéôÜ. Êñßóíá êáé Áñôæïýíá 406, ÌðëáâÜ-
ôóêõ ¸ëåíá Ðåôñüâíá. Ðïéá Þôáí 409, Ìý-
èïé êáé Ìõèïëïãßåò. Ôé åßíáé ï Ìýèïò 413,
ÌõèïðëáóôéêÞ Áðüêñõøç ðáíÜñ÷áéùí
ãíþóåùí 418, ÌõóôÞñéá êáé ÌõÞóåéò. Ôé
åßíáé ôá ÌõóôÞñéá 420, Ìýóôçò, ÄéäÜóêá-
ëïò Óïößáò, Ãêïõñïý 425, Ìõóôéêéóìüò. Ôé
åßíáé ï Ìõóôéêéóìüò 428, ÌõóôéêéóôéêÞ ôå-
÷íéêÞ ìå ôç Èåßá Êïéíùíßá 432, ÌùõóÞò.
Ðïéïò Þôáí ï ÌùõóÞò 434.
ÄÉÔÏÌÇ ÌÅÔÁÖÕÓÉÊÇ ÅÃÊÕÊËÏÐÁÉÄÅÉÁ
´ ÔÏÌÏÓ (ÁÐÏ ÔÏ ÃÑÁÌÌÁ Í ÅÙÓ ÔÏ Ù)
Í: Íá÷ïýóá - Óïößá ÏñèÞ 13, Íåïðëá-
ôùíéêÞ Ó÷ïëÞ 14, Íåïðõèáãïñéóìüò 16,
ÍéñâÜíá 18, Íüçóç - Ýíá üñãáíï Üãíùóôï
20, Íüçóç êáé íïÞìïíá üíôá 22, Íïçôéêüò
Êüóìïò 24, Íïçôéêü Óþìá 29, Íüìéìåò êáé
Üíïìåò óáñêþóåéò 30, Íïõò ðëáóôüò Þ
ðëÜóôçò 32, ÍôÝâáò 34, Î: Îüáíá 37, Ï: Ï-
ëýìðéï ÄùäåêÜèåï 39, Ïìáêüéï 41, Ïìá-
êïåßï Áèçíþí äñáóôçñéüôçôåò 48, Ï ìå-
ãÜëïò ñüëïò ôïõ ðåñéïäéêïý ìáò Ïìáêï-
åßïõ 51, Ôï Åóùôåñéêü Êëåéäß 54, Ôá ìÝ÷ñé
þñáò 17 âéâëßá ìïõ 60, ÌåëÝôåò ðïëõãñá-
öçìÝíåò 65, Ôá ôÝóóåñá ó÷ïëåéÜ ìáò ðç-
ãÞ ðíåõìáôéêÞò æùÞò 71, ÏìÞñïõ Ïäýó-
óåéá 77, Ïìöáëïóêüðïé 79, ¼íåéñá 81,
¼ñáìá 84, ÏñöÝáò ï áíáèåùñçôÞò 87,
¼óéñéò êáé ºóéäá 89, Ïõäüò. Ôé åßíáé Ïõäüò
93, Ïõäüò. Ôï êåöáëüóêáëï Þ êáôþöëé 94,
Ð: ÐáëìïäïíÞóåéò êáé Êñáäáóìïß 97, Ðáí-
äçìéïõñãéêÞ åîÝëéîç 98, ÐáñÜäåéóïò 100,
Ðáñáßóèçóç 102, ÐáñÜëëçëåò åîåëßîåéò
104, ÐáñÜëëçëåò åîåëßîåéò. ÐïéÝò åßíáé
106, Ðáñáøõ÷ïëïãßá óôçí áñ÷éêÞ åêäÞëù-
óç 108, Ðáñáøõ÷ïëïãßá ôé åßíáé óôï âÜèïò
110, Ðáñáøõ÷ïëïãßá ÌåôáöõóéêÞ Þ Åðé-
óôÞìç 111, ÐáôÜíôæáëé ÁóôÜíãêá Ãéüãêá
114, ÐáôÝñáò Õéüò êáé ¢ãéï Ðíåýìá 116,
Ðáýëïò ÌÝãáò Áðüóôïëïò ôçò ×ñéóôéáíï-
óýíçò 118, ÐëáóôïõñãéêÞ Åðôáóýíèåôç

n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
ÄÉÔÏÌÇ ÌÅÔÁÖÕÓÉÊÇ
ÅÃÊÕÊËÏÐÁÉÄÅÉÁ
Åßíáé ôï äÝêáôï üãäïï äßôïìï Ýñãï ôïõ
ÍéêïëÜïõ ÌáñãéùñÞ êáé åêäüèçêå ôï 1985-
86. Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá Ýíá ìíçìåéþäåò Ýñãï ðïõ
áöïñÜ ôçí ãíÞóéá ÌåôáöõóéêÞ - Åóùôåñé-
êÞ Öéëïóïößá êáé äåí ðñÝðåé íá ëåßðåé áðü
êáìßá âéâëéïèÞêç, äéüôé åßíáé ìåóôüôáôï
ãíþóåùí, áìéãÝò, ðëÞñåò èåìáôïëïãßáò, á-
ðïêáëõðôéêü, åêëáúêåõìÝíï êáé áíáëõôéêü-
ôáôï, óõíïäåõìüìåíï äå åðéðëÝïí êáé áðü
åéóáãùãéêü ãëùóóÜñéï ÌåôáöõóéêÞò ïñï-
ëïãßáò.
Ç Äßôïìç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ Åãêõêëïðáßäåéá
ãñÜöôçêå áðü ìéá ðñáãìáôéêÞ áíÜãêç ãéá
ôçí åíçìÝñùóç ôïõ êÜèå åíäéáöåñüìåíïõ
ãéá ôçí ðñáãìáôéêÞ ÁëÞèåéá ðïõ ðåñéÝ÷åôáé
óôçí á÷áíÞ ðåñéï÷Þ ôïõ áïñÜôïõ êüóìïõ.
ÐñïóöÝñåôáé ìå ôçí ßäéá áãÜðç êáé ôçí ßäéá
åéëéêñßíåéá ãéá êÜèå ìåôáöõóéêü Þ áíôéìåôá-
öõóéêü ðïõ èá èåëÞóåé íá ãíùñßóåé ôïí Üë-
ëï êüóìï, áõôüí ðïõ åêôåßíåôáé ðÝñáí ôïõ
öõóéêïý, ìåôÜ áðü ôç öõóéêÞ äéÜóôáóÞ ìáò.
¼ðùò ðåñéãñÜöåôáé, ï áüñáôïò áõôüò
êüóìïò ðïõ åßíáé áðßóôåõôá ôåñÜóôéïò, óôç-
ñßæåé ôïí ãíþñéìü ìáò ïñáôü óáí ìéá êüëïõ-
ñç ðõñáìßäá êáé ôïõ ðñïóöÝñåé ü÷é ìïíÜ÷á ôçí õðüóôáóç êáé ôç æùÞ, áëëÜ
êáé ôç ìåãÜëç ôïõ öñïíôßäá, íá ôïí äéáôçñåß êáôÜëëçëï ãéá ôïí ðñïïñéóìü
ôïõ, ôçò åêðáßäåõóçò ôùí áíèñùðïøõ÷þí ðïõ óùìáôïãåííïýíôáé ìÝóá ôïõ.
Ç óçìåñéíÞ ðïëõðïßêéëç öéëïëïãßá áíåýèõíùí èåùñéþí ðÜíù óôçí éå-
ñÞ ÌåôáöõóéêÞ, áíÜãêáóå ôïí óõããñáöÝá íá óõããñÜøåé êáé íá ðáñïõóéÜ-
óåé óå äýï ìïíÜ÷á ôüìïõò, ó÷åäüí ìå ðåñßëçøç, ôá ïõóéùäÝóôåñá óçìåß-
á ôçò ÌåôáöõóéêÞò, þóôå íá åíçìåñþóåé éäéáßôåñá ôç íåïëáßá ðïõ ðñï-
óðáèåß íá âñåé Ýíá óùóôü, áãíü êáé ôßìéï ðñïóáíáôïëéóìü, óôï èÝìá ìáò
áõôü. Ìå ìéá ïñèüäïîç - áëçèéíÞ ðëçñïöüñçóç ïé íÝïé ìáò èá êáôåõ-
èõíèïýí ðñïò ôçí ïñèÞ ÌåôáöõóéêÞ ãíþóç êáé ìå ôç âÜóç áõôÞ èá ðñï-
âïýí óôá ðñïóùðéêÜ ôïõò ðåéñÜìáôá ãéá íá åðáëçèåýóïõí ôïí áðÝíáíôß
ìáò êüóìï, ôçò ìÝëëïõóáò æùÞò.
Áðïôåßíåôáé óå êÜèå Üíèñùðï êáëÞò ðßóôçò ãéá íá ôïõ ðáñïõóéÜóåé ôïõò
ìåãÜëïõò Üíäñåò êáé ãõíáßêåò ðïõ ðÝñáóáí áðü ôç ãç ìáò, ïé ïðïßïé äß÷ùò
ôáðåéíü êáé áíÜîéï óõìöÝñïí ìáò ìåôáâßâáóáí ôéò ãíþóåéò ôïõò ãéá ôï Üëëï
óêÝëïò ôçò Äçìéïõñãßáò, ôï áüñáôï. Áêüìç ðñïóèÝôåé êáé ôéò äéêÝò ôïõ ðï-
ëõ÷ñüíéåò åìðåéñßåò ìÝóá óôïí Áðïêñõöéóìü êáé óôï Ìõóôéêéóìü ôçò Ìåôá-
öõóéêÞò ðïõ ôéò ïíüìáóå áðü ôüôå ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÓÌÏ.
Ç Äßôïìç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ Åãêõêëïðáßäåéá ãñÜöôçêå ãéá íá ðñïóöÝñåé óôïí
áíáæçôçôÞ ôçò áéþíéáò ÁëÞèåéáò, ãíþóåéò áôÝëåéùôåò êáé óðÜíéåò, þóôå íá
ôïí ðñïåôïéìÜóåé ãéá ôéò áíþôåñåò óõ÷íüôçôåò ðïõ ãýñù ìáò õðÜñ÷ïõí, ìáò
äéáðåñíïýí êáé ìáò ðëçñïöïñïýí ãéá ôï äéêü ôïõò êüóìï, äß÷ùò åìåßò íá ôéò
êáôáíïïýìå êáé íá ôéò áíôéëáìâáíüìáóôå.
Ï áíáãíþóôçò èá ðñÝðåé íá ãíùñßæåé ðùò üëç ó÷åäüí ç ýëç ôçò Äßôïìçò
ÌåôáöõóéêÞò Åãêõêëïðáßäåéáò ðñïÝñ÷åôáé óôï óýíïëü ôçò áðü ôá ïëïêëç-
ñùìÝíá ìõóôéêéóôéêÜ âéþìáôá ôïõ óõããñáöÝá êáé êáôÜ óõíÝðåéá, äåí Ý÷ïõí
ôá ãñáöüìåíÜ ôïõ êáìéÜ ìá êáìéÜ ó÷Ýóç ìå ôá ðéèáíüí ïìïéÜæïíôá óõã-
ãñÜììáôá ÅëëÞíùí êáé áëëïåèíþí. Ãéá ôïýôï ç êÜèå åñìçíåßá ðïõ ðáñÝ÷åé,
ðñïÝñ÷åôáé áðü ôéò âáèýôáôåò ðñïóùðéêÝò - õðåñâáôéêÝò ôïõ ãíþóåéò ðÜíù
óå üëç ôçí ãêÜìá ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý.
Åðßóçò ãéá íá âïçèçèåß áêüìç ðåñéóóüôåñï ï áíáãíþóôçò, åßôå Ìåôáöõ-
óéêüò åßíáé åßôå îÝíïò ðñïò ôç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ, ï óõããñáöÝáò ðñïóÝèåóå óôï
ôÝëïò ôçò Åãêõêëïðáßäåéáò Ýíá åéäéêü - áíáëõôéêü ãëùóóÜñéï, Ýíá áðëü êáé
óýíôïìï åéóáãùãéêü ëåîéêü (400 ëÝîåéò) óôçí ïñïëïãßá ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý.
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
ÐñùôïåíÝñãåéá 120, ÐëÜôùíáò ï óõãêå-
íôñùôÞò ôùí Ðõèáãüñåéùí ÄïãìÜôùí 123,
ÐëáôùíéêÜ Éäåþäç 125, ÐëáôùíéêÞ Öéëï-
óïößá 128, Ðëïýôáñ÷ïò óõããñáöÝáò ¼óé-
ñé êáé ºóéäá 130, Ðëïýôùíáò ¢äçò, êÜôù
êüóìïò, êüëáóç 133, Ðëùôßíïò. Ðïéïò Þôáí
135, Ðíåýìá. Ôé åßíáé Ðíåýìá 137, Ðíåõ-
ìáôéóìüò. Ôé åßíáé Ðíåõìáôéóìüò 145, Ðïë-
ëáðëüôçôá. Ôé åßíáé Ðïëëáðëüôçôá 150,
Ðüíïò. Áðü ôé óõíßóôáôáé êáé ðïõ áðïâëÝ-
ðåé 151, Ðïñöýñéïò 153, ÐñÜíá Ïõóßá Æù-
Þò, Ðíåõìáôéêüôçôá 155, ÐñáôéáêÜñá óôç
ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá 158, ÐñïâéùôÝò êáé ðñïóáñ-
êþóåéò 160, ÐñïåêâïëÞ êáé ðñïÝêôáóç
óêÝøåùí 162, ÐñïìçèÝáò - ÖïñùíÝáò
ðïéïò Þôáí 164, Ðñïïñõêôþäçò Ýíáñîç Á-
ôïìéêïðïßçóçò 166, Ðñïóåõ÷Þ. Ôé åßíáé
Ðñïóåõ÷Þ 168, Ðñïóåõ÷Þ ôï ãåöýñé Èå-
ïý êáé áíèñþðïõ 170, Ðñïóåõ÷Þ óôç ×ñé-
óôéáíéêÞ Èñçóêåßá 172, Ðõèáãüñáò. Ðïéïò
Þôáí 174, Ðõèáãüñåéá Ìåôåìøý÷ùóç 176,
Ðõèáãïñéóìüò. Ôé ðñïóÝöåñå 178, Ðõñá-
ìßäåò êáé Óößããá, ôé óõìâïëßæïõí 180, Ðõ-
ñáìïåéäåßò áðüøåéò 183, Ñ: ÑÜìá. Ðïéïò Þ-
ôáí ï ÑÜìá 186, Ñïäüóôáõñïé. Ðïéïé Þôáí
189, Ñïêüôóêõ Êüìçò Þ ¢ãéïò Ãåñìáíüò Þ
Óáéí Æåñìáßí 193, Ó: Óáéí Æåñìáßí. Ðïéïò Þ-
ôáí 196, ÓÜêñáò. Ôé åßíáé ÓÜêñáò 197, Ôá
ÓÜêñá 199, ÓÜìêõá, Áñßèìçóç - ÊáôÜôáîç
201, ÓáíêÜñá ï ÌïíïèåúóôÞò Üãéïò Éíäüò
204, ÓáôáíÜò. ÕðÜñ÷åé ï ÓáôáíÜò; 205, Óå-
ñáöåßì Þ ÓðéíèÞñåò ¢ããåëïé 207, Óéùðç-
ëïß 3 ÷ñüíéá óôï Ïìáêïåßï 209, ÓêÝøç. Ôé
åßíáé ç óêÝøç 211, ÓïõôñÜôìá. Ôé åßíáé ç
ÓïõôñÜôìá 213, ÓïõôñÜôìá êáé Áíôáóêá-
ñÜíá 2 óõóêåõÝò æùÞò 215, ÓïõôñÜôìá ï
ëÞðôùñáò ôçò ÐñÜíá 217, Óïõöéóìüò. Ôé
åßíáé ï Óïõöéóìüò 219, Óïõ÷éïýìíá 221,
Óïöüò - Óïößá. Ôé åßíáé ï Óïöüò êáé ôé åßíáé
ç Óïößá 223, Óôïé÷åéáêÜ - ÍåñÜéäåò - Ìïõñ-
ìïõëßêéá. Ôé åßíáé üëá áõôÜ 224, Óýãêñéóç
óôçí Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá 227, Óõìðáèçôéêü êáé
Ðáñáóõìðáèçôéêü 230, Óýìðáí - Áíôéóý-
ìðáí - Õðåñóýìðáí 232, ÓõíáéóèÞìáôá á-
ðáñ÷Ýò áíüäïõ 234, Ó÷Ýóåéò áíÜìåóá óôá
õðåñãÞéíá êáé åîùãÞéíá üíôá 236, Ó÷Ýóåéò
Íïõ - Øõ÷Þò - Ðíåýìáôïò 238, Ó÷ïéíß ôïõ
Áñãõñßïõ. Ôé åßíáé áõôü 240, ÓùêñáôéêÝò õ-
ðïèÞêåò 241, ÓùìáôéêÝò Áêôßíåò ðïõ öôÜ-
íïõí ôéò åßêïóé ìßá 244, Ô: Ôáëþò. ÌÝãáò
Ôå÷íïêñÜôçò êáé ðôçôéêÞ ìç÷áíÞ 247, Ôá-
ïúóìüò, ËÜï Ôóå 249, Ôåêôïíéóìüò - Ìáóï-
íßá. Ôé åßíáé ï Ôåêôïíéóìüò 250, Ôåëåôïõñ-
ãßá. Ôé åßíáé Ôåëåôïõñãßá 252, ÔÝóóåñéò åß-
íáé ïé åãêÝöáëïé ôïõ áíèñþðïõ 254, Ôæá-
íÜêá, ï ïñèïëïãéóôÞò ÂáóéëéÜò 256, Ôæâáë
Êïõë ï áñ÷áéüôåñïò ôùí ÄéäáóêÜëùí 259,
Ôóü÷áí êáé Ìáíïý Õðåýèõíïé ¢ñ÷ïíôåò
261, Ôï Ôñéóõðüóôáôï. Ôé åßíáé ôï Ôñéóõðü-
óôáôï 263, Ôï Ôñßôï ÌÜôé. Ôé åßíáé êáé ðþò
ëåéôïõñãåß 267, Ôñïöþíéï ¢íôñï 271, Õ:
¾âñçò êáé ÍÝìåóçò 274, ¾ëç. Ôé åßíáé ç
¾ëç 276, Õðåñáíèñþðéíïò ðñïêáôáêëõ-
óìéáßïò ðïëéôéóìüò 277, ÕðåñãÞéíïé Üóáñ-
êá üíôá 280, Õðåñýëç. Ôé åßíáé ç Õðåñýëç
281, Õðíïâáóßá óôïí Õðíùôéóìü 283, Õ-
ðíùôéóìüò - Ïñèïøõ÷éóìüò. Ôé åßíáé 285,
ÕðïâïëÞ óôïí Õðíùôéóìü áêáñéáßá 289, Õ-
ðïâïëçìéáßïò Õðíùôéóìüò 291, ÕðïèÞêåò
Åóùôåñéêïý 293, Ö: Öáíôáóßá. Ôé åßíáé Öá-
íôáóßá 296, ÖáíôÜóìáôá. Ôé åßíáé ôá Öá-
íôÜóìáôá 297, Öéëïóïößá. Ôé åßíáé Öéëïóï-
ößá 302, Öéëïóïöïýìå ìå ôçí ÁëÞèåéá
304, Öëåãüìåíç êáé ìç êáéüìåíç ÂÜôïò
306, Öùò ÁíÝóðåñï - Öùò ¢êôéóôï
308, ×: ×áëÜñùóç. Ôé åßíáé ç ×áëÜñùóç
43 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
311, ×Üïò. Ôé åßíáé ôï ×Üïò 313, ×áñáêôÞ-
ñáò. Ôé óçìáßíåé êáé ôé åßíáé 315, ×åéñïèåñá-
ðåßá. Áñ÷áéüôáôç ÅðéóôÞìç 318, ×ïæáñóßö
Þ Áìùò Þ ÌùõóÞò 319, ×ñéóôéáíéóìüò
322, ×ñéóôüò - Êïóìïðáñïõóßá 330, Ø: Øõ-
÷Þ. Ôé åßíáé ç Øõ÷Þ 337, Øõ÷éêÝò Åìðåéñßåò
áðü ôéò äéáäñïìÝò ôïõò 352, Øõ÷éêÝò Ðôþ-
óåéò 353, Øõ÷ïìåôñéêü Õãñü 355, Ù: Ùì Þ
Áïýì, Èåßïí ÊÜëåóìá 358, ÙñéãÝíçò Áäá-
ìÜíôéïò. Ðïéïò Þôáí 360. ÁÊÏËÏÕÈÅÉ ÅÉÄÉ-
ÊÏ ÅÐÅÎÇÃÇÌÁÔÉÊÏ ÃËÙÓÓÁÑÉÏ ÃÉÁ ÔÇÍ ÅÉ-
ÓÁÃÙÃÇ ÔÙÍ ÁÑ×ÁÑÉÙÍ ÓÔÇÍ ÌÅÔÁÖÕÓÉÊÇ
(ÁÐÏ ÔÏ Á ÅÙÓ ÔÏ Ù)
FIRST VOLUME A-M.
SECOND VOLUME N-Z
WITH THE BIG DICTIONARY-GLOSSARY
OF ESOTERISM OMAKOIO
OF ATHENS EDITIONS 1985
CONTENTS OF THE FIRST VOLUME
FROM -ALPHA TO -EM LETTERS
DEDICATION 3, REQUEST TO THOSE WHO
ARE INTERESTED 4, WHERE AND WHEN IT
WAS WRITEN 5, THE NAME OF THIS BOOK 6,
WHY IT WAS WRITEN 7, DEVELOPMENT OF
THE USE WAY 8, PREFACE 10, INTRODUC-
TION 13, A: AVATAR 17, LOVE WHAT IS LOVE
18, LOVE IN BHAKTI YOGA 23, ANGELS
ARGHANGELS 25, AGNOSTICISM 28, ADAM-
IC RACE WHO THEY WERE 30, SISTER SOULS
WHAT THEY ARE 32, ASANAS - POSES - PO-
SITIONS 35, ETHERIC MAGNETOELECTRIC
LEVELS 37, ETHERIC WORLD WHAT IT IS 38,
ETHERIC BODY WHAT IT IS 41, AKENATON,
THE FIRST MONOTHEIST 43, ALEXANDRIAN
SCHOOL WHAT IT WAS 45, THE ORIGINAL SIN
46, AMMONIOS SAKAS, WHO HE WAS 48,
MYSTICIST ASCENT, SPIRITUAL LIFE 50, GOING
BACK TO THE PAST 52, PYTHAGOREAN MEM-
ORIES 54, BREATH IN PRANAYAMA 56, RES-
URRECTION WHAT IT IS 58, RESURRECTION,
THE BELIEF OF CHRISTIANS 59, ANASTENARIA
WHAT IT IS 61, ANDROMEDHA, ITS META-
PHYSICAL PRESENT 63, MAN WHAT IS MAN
64, HUMAN RACES THAT PREPARED US 66,
ANORTHODOX INDIAN PHILOSOPHIC SYS-
TEMS 68, ANTASKARANA WHAT AN-
TASKARANA IS 75, ANTITHESIS TO THESIS 77,
ANTIUNIVERSE, ANTIMATTER, WHAT THEY
ARE 79, OCCULTISM, WHAT IT IS 81, DELIV-
ERANCE DESPIRITUALIZATION 84, DE-
MYTHOLOGISMS OF THE HELLENIC PAN-
THEON 85, DESYMBOLISM 87, ARITHMOSO-
PHY, WHAT ARITHMOSOPHY IS 92, ARCHAIC
MYSTERIES 94, ASCLEPIEIA HOW THEY
CURED 96, ASCLEPIEIO OF EPIDAVROS 98,
ASCLEPIEIOS ASCLEPIEIA KENTAVROS 103,
ASRAM WHAT ASRAM IS 104, STELLAR
WORLD, WHAT IT IS 107, STELLAR BODY,
WHAT IT IS 109, ASTROLOGY, ASTROSOPHY,
ITS ORIGIN 111, ASTROLOGIC YOGA 116, AT-
LANTA RACE, WHO THEY WERE 116, AUTO-
SUGGESTION AND SUGGESTION, WHAT THEY
ARE 118, AHIMSA, THE VICTORIOUS UNLIVING
BEHAVIOUR 121, B: VAYU, THE AIRIES OF
HOLDING LIFE 124, KINGDOM OF HEAVENS
125, EVIL EYE - SPELL WHAT THEY ARE 127,
EVIL EYE AND SPELL THE TWO WOUNDS 130,
VIVEKANANDA, THE GREATEST HUMANIST
132, VRAHMANISM, THE RELIGION OF INDIA
134, VRITTIS IN RAJA YOGA 138, VAMPIRES
WHAT VAMPIRES ARE 140, C: YOGA WHAT
YOGA IS 144, KNOWLEDGE IN GNANI YOGA
151, GOBY DESERT WHAT GOBY DESERT IS
153, YOKANANDA, A YOGI'S AUTOBIOGRA-
PHY 154, D: PERCEPTION WHAT PERCEP-
TION IS 158, DISTINCTION IN KARMA YOGA
159, MEDITATION WHAT MEDITATION IS 162,
MEDITATION IN PRACTICE 165, JUPITER,
WH0 WAS JUPITER 167, CHANNELS AMONG
DIMENSIONS 168, DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
OCCULTISM AND MYSTICISM 171, INSIGHT
WHAT INSIGHT IS 173, DOGMA WHAT DOG-
MA IS 176, VIBRATIONS IN DIFFERENT DI-
MENSIONS 178, DRAVIDIANS WHAT THEIR
HISTORY WAS 180, DRAVIDIANS, OUR AN-
CESTORS 182, WAY TO SAMADHI 184, DU-
ALISM WHAT DUALISM IS 186, E: INTRODUC-
TION IN HYPNOTISM 188, EXTRA BODY FOR-
MATIONS OF INCORPOREAL 189, HECTO-
PLASM 191, ELEFSINIAN MYSTERIES 196, IN-
SIGHT WHAT INSIGHT IS 198, INSTICT SUB-
CONSCIOUS TENDECIES 200, OUTERRESTRI-
AL BEINGS, IDENTIFIED WITH MAN 202, DE-
SIRE WHAT DESIRE IS 204, CHOICE IN RAJA
YOGA 206, VIBRATIONS IRRITATIONS WITH
THE 5 SENSES 208, LOVE WHAT LOVE IS 210,
INTROVERT AND EXTROVERT MYSTICISM 213,
ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY AND PLATONIC IDE-
AL 216, ESOTERISM, WHAT ESOTERISM IS
217, ESOTERISM AND METAPHYSICS 220, E-
VANGELIC PASSAGES FOR THE REINCARNA-
TION 222, THE COMMUNICATION FURROW-
INGS ARE SEVEN 226, SEVEN BODIES OF
SOUL WHICH THEY ARE 228, Z: ZARATOUS-
TRA 231, H: HERA WHO HERA WAS 233, I-
RAKLIOTES AND ANDROMEDICS OUTERRES-
TRIALS 234, HERMITS OF THE 14TH CENTU-
RY 236, DEATH WHAT DEATH IS 241, BENE-
FACTOR DEATH 244, MIRACLE WHAT MIRA-
CLE IS 246, DIVINE COMMUNION WHAT IT IS
248, DIVINE COMMUNION IN CHRISTENDOM
250, THEISM AND ANTITHEISM 252, GOD
WHAT WE MEAN BY WORD GOD 254, THEOS-
OPHY WHAT THEOSOPHY IS 256, THEURGY
WHAT THEURGY IS 257, THEURGY, ELEVAT-
ING 259, THERAPY THROUGH HARMONY OF
THE MAGNETIC CURRENTS 261, THERAPEU-
TICS FROM FAR 264, THESIS AND ANTITHE-
SIS 265, THEOSIS 269, RELIGION WHAT RE-
LIGION IS 271, THYMUS, THE PRE-GLAND
272, THOT OR THOTH 274, JAPETUS 277,
FOUNDING RAYS-FURROWINGS 279, INDIAN
TRIMURTI VRAHMA-VISNOU-SIVA 280, JU-
DAISM 282, EQUINOXES AND SOLSTICES 285,
ISLAM, MOAMETHANISM 288, EVANGELIST
IOANNIS 290, EVANGELIST IOANNIS, THE SON
OF THUNDER 292, K: KAVIRIA MYSTERIES
295, KAGIATRI, THE PSALMSOUNDING VI-
BRATIONS OF INSIDE AND OUTSIDE US 297,
CATHARSIS WHAT CATHARSIS IS 0x 299,
KAIRIS THEOFILOW WHO HE WAS 301,
KALLIOSTRO ALEXANDROS, INITIATE AND
MYSTAGOGUE 302, KAPALAPATINA IS CALLED
IN GREECE 305, KARLIAN: METHOD OF
CATCHING THE MAN AURA 307, KARMA; THE
LAW OF THE RETRIBUTIVE JUSTICE 309,
KARMIC COUNTERBALANCES 322, KATALEP-
SY WHAT CATALEPSY IS 323, CATALEPSY IN
HYPNOTISM 325, KENTAVROI: RELATIVES OF
TITANS 327, ANALYZED POWER CENTERS
329, HELL: WHAT HELL IS 331, REPLETION
WHAT REPLETION IS 333, COUNT ALEXAN-
DER CALLIOSTRO 335, COMFUKIOS WHO HE
WAS 337, KUNDALINI: THE ENERGY TREA-
SURED WITHIN US 340, L: LAVRYS WHAT
LAVRYS IS 343, LABYRINTH: WHAT
LABYRINTH WAS 344, LEMURIA ROOT RACE
346, WHITE RACE 348, LETHARGUS: IN HYP-
NOTISM 349, OBLIVION: WHAT OBLIVION IS
351, LIPPIKAS: WHAT LIPPIKAS ARE 353,
CORD: FRONTAL DOUBLE ETHERIC 354, M:
MAGIC WHAT MAGIC IS 357, MAGIC, WHITE
AND BLACK 358, MAGIC-ERROR WHAT MAG-
IC ERROR IS 360, MAGNETIC HYPNOTISM
362, MANAS WHAT MANAS IS 364, MANAS,
THE SOLIDIFIED LIFE SUBSTANCE 365, MAN-
ASAPUTRAS WHO MANASAPUTRAS WERE
367, MANU WHAT MANU IS 369, MANT-
GYAMIKA SUTRA OR THE ABSOLUTE VOID
371, MANTRAM WHAT WELLKNOWN
MANTRAM IS 373, MAHATZOHAN WHAT MA-
HATZOHAN IS 375, GREAT ELEFSINIAN MYS-
TERIES 376, MELHISEDEK THE CREATION AC-
CORDING THE MELHISEDEK ORDER 379,
MESMER-BREIT-SARKO AND LIEBOL 381,
REINCARNATION WHAT REINCARNATION IS
384, REINCARNATION IN OUR DAILY LIFE
398, MECHANIC HYPNOTISM 400, LITTLE
ELEFSINIAN MYSTERIES IN AGRAS 402,
BANDS 404, BAGAVAT GITA CRISNA AND
ARTZUNA 406, BLAVATSKY ELENA PETROVNA
WHO SHE WAS 409, MYTHS AND MYTHOLO-
GIES WHAT MYTH IS 413, MYTHOPLASTIC HID-
ING OF THE VERY ANCIENT KNOWLEDGE 418,
MYSTERIES AND INITIATIONS WHAT MYSTER-
IES ARE 420, INITIATE, WISDOM GURU MAS-
TER 425, MYSTICISM WHAT MYSTICISM IS
428, MYSTICISTIC TECHNIQUE THROUGH THE
DIVINE COMMUNION 432, MOSES WHO
MOSES WAS 434.
TWO VOLUME
OF METAPHYSICAL ENCYCLOPAEDIA
CONTENTS OF THE SECOND VOLUME
FROM THE LETTER N TO THE LETTER Z
N: NAHUSA - RIGHT WISDOM 13, NEO-
PLATONIC SCHOOL 14, NEOPYTHAGORISM
16, NIRVANA 18, INTELLECT - AN UNKNOWN
ORGAN 20, INTELLECT AND INTELLIGENT BE-
INGS 22, INTELLECTUAL WORLD 24, INTEL-
LECTUAL BODY 29, LAWFUL AND UNLAWFUL
BODY FORMATIONS 30, MIND FAKED OR
CREATOR 32, DEVAS 34, X: XOANA 37, O:
OLYMPION OF TWELVE GODS 39, OMAKOEIO
41, OF ATHENS ACTIVITIES 48, THE GREAT
PART OF OUR OMAKOEIO JOURNAL 51, THE
ESOTERIC KEY 54, MY BOOKS UNTIL 17
HOURS 60, POLYGRAPHED ESSAYS 65, OUR
FOUR SCHOOLS SOURCE OF SPIRITUAL LIFE
71, HOMER'S ODYSSEY 77, NAVEL-GAZERS
79, DREAMS 81, VISION 84, ORPHEUS, THE
REVISER 87, OSIRIS AND ISIS 89, UDOS WHAT
UDOS IS 93, UDOS THE LANDING OR THRESH-
OLD 94, P: PULSEVIBRATIONS AND THROB-
BINGS 97, OMNICREATIVE EVOLUTION 98,
PARADISE 100, HALLUCINATION 102, PAR-
ALLEL EVOLUTIONS 104, PARALLEL EVOLU-
TIONS WHO THEY ARE 106, PARAPSYCHOL-
OGY IN THE ORIGINAL EXPRESSION 108,
PARAPSYCHOLOGY WHAT IT IS IN DEPTH 110,
PARAPSYCHOLOGY METAPHYSICS OR SCI-
ENCE 111, PANTAZALI ASTANGA YOGA 114,
FATHER SON AND HOLY SPIRIT 116, PAVLOS
THE GREAT APOSTLE OF CHRISTENDON 118,
PLASTURGIC HEPTASYNTHETIC FIRST ENER-
GY 120, PLATON, THE CONCENTRATOR OF
THE PYTHAGOREAN DOGMAS 123, PLATON-
IC IDEALS 125, PLATONIC PHILOSOPHY 128,
PLUTARCHOS, THE WRITER OF OSIRIS AND I-
SIS 130, PLUTO ADES THE GREAT BEYOND,
HELL 133, PLOTINOS WHO HE WAS 135,
SPIRIT WHAT SPIRIT IS 137, SPIRITUALISM
WHAT SPIRITUALISM IS 145, MULTIPLICITY
WHAT MULTIPLICITY IS 150, PAIN OF WHAT
IT IS CONSTITUTED AND WHERE IT AIMS 151,
PURPLE 153, PRANA LIFE SUBSTANCE SPIR-
ITUALISM 155, PRATYAHARA IN RAJA YOGA
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
METAPHYSICAL ENCYCLOPAEDIA
OF TWO VOLUMES
This is Nikolaos Margiori's eighteenth book of two volumes and it was
publised for the first time in 1985-86. It is about a monumental work that
concerns the genuine Metaphysical-Esoteric Philosophy which should not
be missing of any library, because it is full of knowledge, pure, full of the-
matologies, revealing. popularized and most analytical, combined alsowith
an introductory glossary of the Metaphysical terminology.
The Metaphysical Encyclopedia of two volumes was written by a real
necessity for every concerned person to be informed of the real Truth that
is contained in the immense area of the invisible world. It is offered with
the the same love and the same frankness for every metaphysical or an-
timetaphysical being who will wish to know the other world, that is ex-
tended beyond the natural one, beyond our physical dimension.
As described, this invisible world that is incredibly huge, supports our
known visible world, as a docked pyramid and it offers it not only substance
and life, but also its great care, in order to keep him proper for his desti-
nation, meaning to train the humansouls that are bodyborned within him.
The present variegated litterature of the irresponsible theories on the
sacred Metaphysics, has obliged the writer to write and to present in on-
ly two volumes, nearly in summary, the most substantial points of the
Metaphysics, so as to keep informed the young people who try to find a
correct, pure and honest orientation, in this subject of ours. Through an
orthodox- true information, our youths willl turn to the right Metaphys-
ical knowledge and in this basis they will proceed to their personal ex-
periments in order to verify our opposite world, of the futute life
It is addressed to every man having a good faith to present huim the
great men and women that passed from our earth, who without any
humble and ..... interest, transmitted their knowledge ti the other ..... of
the Creation, the invisible, Also, it adds his own longyears experiences in
Occultism and Mysticism of the Metaphysics that he called since then E-
SOTERISM.
The Metaphysical Encyclopaedia of two volumes was written to offer
the searche of the eternal Truth, endless and rare knowledge to prepare
him for the superior frequenciest hat exist around us, pass through and
inform us about their own world, without us understanding and realiz-
ing them
The reader should know that almost the whole matter of the Meta-
physical Encyclopedia of two volumes comes in total from the writer's
complete mysticist experiences and consequently his writings have no re-
lation with the probably alike wtirings of the Greeks and of the foreigns.
For this reason, every interpretation it affords, comes from hiss deepest
personal-transgressive knowledge on the whole scale of the Esoterism.
Also, in order that the reader may be helped more, either the reader
is Metaphysical or foreign to the Metaphysics, the writer added at the end
of the Encyclopedia, a special-analytical glossary, a simple and short in-
troductory dictionary (400 words) in the terminology of the Esoterism.
158, PRELIVING BEINGS AND PRE-CARNA- 189, ROCOTSKY, COUNT OR SAINT, GERMAN
TIONS 160, PROJECTION AND PROLONGA- OR SAINT GERMAIN 193, SAINT GERMAIN
TION OF THOUGHTS 162, PROMETHEUS - WHO HE WAS 196, SAKRAS WHAT SAKRAS
PHORONEUS WHO HE WAS 164, PRE-MIN- ARE 197, SAKRAS 199, SAMKYA COUNTING-
ERAL BEGINNING OF INDIVIDUALIZATION 166, CLASSIFICATION 201, SANKARA, THE
PRAYER WHAT PRAYER IS 168, PRAYER THE MONOTHEIST SAINT INDIAN 204, SATAN, IS
BRIDGE BETWEEN GOD AND MAN 170, THERE SATAN 205, SERAPEIM OR SPARKLES
PRAYER TO THE CHRISTIANIC RELIGION 172, ANGELS 207, SILENT IN OMAKOEIO FOR
PYTHAGORA WHO HE WAS 174, PYTHAGORE- THREE YEARS 209, THOUGHT WHAT
AN METEMPSYCHOSIS 176, PYTHAGORISM THOUGHT IS 211, SUTRATMA WHAT SUTRAT-
WHAT HE HAS OFFERED 178, PYRAMIDES MA IS 213, SUTRATMA AND ANTASKARANA,
AND SPHINX WHAT THEY SYMBOLIZE 180, 2 LIFE APPARATUSES 215, SUTRATMA, THE
PYRAMOID VIEWS 183, R: RAMA WHO WAS RECEIVER OF PRANA 217, SUFISM, WHAT
RAMA 186, ROSE-CROSSES WHO THEY WERE SUFISM IS 219, SUHIOUMNA 221, WISE-WIS-
44 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
DOM WHAT WISE AND WISDOM ARE 223, EL-
EMENTARY - FAIRIES MURMULIKIA, WHAT
THIS ALL IS 224, COMPARISON IN KRIYA YO-
GA 227, SYMPATHETIC AND PARASYMPA-
THETIC 230, UNIVERSE - ANTIUNIVERSE -
HYPERUNIVERSE 232, SENTIMENTS BEGIN-
NINGS OF ASCENT 234, RELATION BETWEEN
THE HYPERTERRESTRIAL AND OUTERRES-
TRIAL BEINGS 236, RELATION BETWEEN
MIND - SOUL - SPIRIT 238, ARGYRION ROPE
WHAT IT IS 240, SOCRATIC MORTGAGES 241,
BODILY RAYS ARRIVING TO TWENTY ONE
244, T: TALOS, THE GREAT TECHNOCRAT
AND FLYING MACHINE 247, TAOISM LAO-
TSE 249, FREEMASONERY - MASONERY
WHAT FREEMASONERY IS 250, TELETURGY
WHAT TELETURGY IS 252, FOUR ARE THE
HUMAN BRAINS 254, JANAKA, THE OR-
THOLOGIST KING 256, JVAL-KUL, THE OLD-
EST MASTER 259, JOHAN AND MANU, RE-
SPONSIBLE ARCHONS 261, THE THREE-SUB-
STANTIAL WHAT THREESUBSTANTIAL IS 263
, THE THIRD EYE WHAT IT IS AND HOW IT
OPERATES 267, TROFONO ANTRO 271, Y:
YERIS AND NEMESIS 274, MATTER WHAT
MATTER IS 276,,SUPERHUMAN ANTEDILU-
VIAN CIVILIZATION 277, HYPERTERRESTRI-
AL, FLESHLESS BEINGS 280, HYPERMATTER,
WHAT HYPERMATTER IS 281, SOMNANM-
BULISM IN HYPNOTISM 283, HYPNOTISM -
ORTHOPSYCHISM - WHAT THEY ARE 285,
SUGGESTION IN HYPNOTISM MOMENTARY
289, SUBSTITUTED HYPNOTISM 291, MORT-
GAGES OF INTERIOR 293, F: FANTASY
WHAT FANTASY IS 296, GHOSTS WHAT
GHOSTS ARE 297, PHILOSOPHY WHAT PHI-
LOSOPHY IS 302, WE PHILOSOPHIZE BY
TRUTH 304, INFLAMED AND NOT BURNED
BRIER 306, NEVER SETTING LIGHT - UN-
BUILT LIGHT 308, H: RELAXATION WHAT RE-
LAXATION IS 311, CHAOS WHAT CHAOS IS
313, CHARACTER WHAT IT MEAND AND IS
315, CHIROTHERAPEUTICS VERY ANCIENT
SCIENCE 318, HOZARSIF OR AMOS OR
MOSES 319, CHRISTIANISM 322, CHRIST -
WORLDPRESENCE 330, SOUL, WHAT SOUL
IS 337, PSYCHIC EXPERIENCES FROM THEIR
RUNNINGS THROUGH 352, PSYCHIC FALLS
353, PSYCHOMETRIC LIQUID 355, O: OM OR
AUM, DIVINE CALL 358, ORIGHENIS
ADAMANDIOS WHO HE WAS 360, CON-
TENTS OF GLOSSARY.

ÊÑÉÃÉÁ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ êáé èÝóç ãÝííáò 156, ¢óêçóç åíäÝêáôç:

ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
ËåõêÞ óåëßäá 1, ËåõêÞ óåëßäá 2, Åóþ-
öõëëï 3, ËåõêÞ óåëßäá 4, ÁöéÝñùóç 5, Èåñ-
ìÞ ðáñÜêëçóç 6, Ðéóôïðïßçóç ôçò Åãêõñü-
ôçôáò ôïõ Ýñãïõ 6, Ïíïìáóßá ôïõ Ýñãïõ 7,
ÓêéôóïðáñáóôÜóåéò ôïõ Ýñãïõ 7, ÅðéìÝëåéá
ôïõ Ýñãïõ 8, Ãéáôß ãñÜöôçêå ç ÌÝèïäïò ôçò
ÐñáêôéêÞò ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá 9, Ðïý
êáé ðüôå ãñÜöôçêå ç ÐñáêôéêÞ ÌÝèïäïò ôçò
ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá 10, Ðñï-ðñüëï-
ãïò 11, Ïé áíáâéùôÝò ôçò Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá 14,
Ðñüëïãïò 15, ÅéóáãùãÞ 18, ÓÜêñá êáé Íá-
äßò 24, Ç Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá ðñïúüí Óõíåßäçóçò Õ-
ðïóõíåßäçóçò 30, Óõíåñãáóßá Íåõñéêïý êáé
Ìõéêïý ÓõóôÞìáôïò 36, Ç ÐñáíáãéÜìá óôçí
Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá 39, Ôá æåýãç ôùí öÜóåùí 44,
ÌåèïäåõìÝíç ÐñáêôéêÞ ÅöáñìïãÞ ôçò óù-
ìáôïèåñáðåõôéêÞò Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá 46, Ç Åðé-
óôÞìç ôçò áíáðíïÞò óõíïäåýåé áäéÜêïðá
ôçí Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá 50, Âáãéïý (Áéèåñéêüò áÝ-
ñáò) 54,
ÐÑÙÔÏ ÌÅÑÏÓ: ÓõìâïõëÝò âãáëìÝíåò á-
ðü ôçí åìðåéñßá ôçò åîÜóêçóçò óôçí Êñßãéá
Ãéüãêá 58, ÁóêÞóåéò ðåñéãñáöéêÝò -Üíåõ óõ-
íïäåßáò óêßôóùí- åëåýèåñåò 59, Ïíïìáóôé-
êÞ êáôÜóôáóç ôùí óõìðåñéëçöèÝíôùí ìÝ-
óá óôï Ýñãï ôïýôï åëåõèÝñùí, ðåñéãñáöé-
êþí êáé áóêéôóïðáñïõóßáóôùí èåñáðåõôé-
êþí áóêÞóåùí 60, ÁóêÞóåéò ãéá ïëüêëçñï
ôï óþìá. ÔïíùôéêÝò ôïõ íåõñéêïý êáé ìõéêïý
óõóôÞìáôïò 61, Ðñþôç Üóêçóç: Ôùí åðéôï-
ðßùí ðçäçìÜôùí 61, Äåýôåñç Üóêçóç: Èå-
ñáðåßáò ðïíïêåöÜëùí êáé çìéêñáíéþí 64,
Ôñßôç Üóêçóç: Êáèáñéóìïý ôùí ïöèáëìþí
(Tratakaposture) 66, ÔåôÜñôç Üóêçóç: Èå-
ñáðåßáò ôïõ ôñÝìïõëïõ 68, ÐÝìðôç Üóêç-
óç: Èåñáðåßáò ôïõ öôù÷ïý êõêëïöïñéêïý
êé åîÜëåéøç ôçò ÷éïíßóôñáò êáé ôïõ êñõïðá-
ãÞìáôïò 70, ¸êôç Üóêçóç: ÃåíéêÝò êé ïëï-
êëçñùôéêÝò áóêÞóåéò Íåõñéêïý, Áíáðíåõ-
óôéêïý, Êõêëïöïñéêïý, Ìõéêïý êáé Ìåôáâï-
ëéóôéêïý ÓõóôÞìáôïò 72, ¸âäïìç Üóêçóç:
Áíáðíåõóôéêïý êáé êõêëïöïñéêïý 74, ¼ãäïç
Üóêçóç: Êáèáñéóìïý üëïõ ôïõ ïñãáíéóìïý
76, ¸íáôç Üóêçóç: Êáèáñéóìïý êáé êáëëéÝ-
ðåéáò ôçò öùíÞò 78, ÄÝêáôç Üóêçóç: Åðéôï-
ðßùí áíõøùìÜôùí ôùí ðïäþí ìåôÜ ñõèìé-
êÞò áíáðíïÞò 80, ÅíäÝêáôç Üóêçóç: Õðåñ-
âáñÝùí áðü 100-150 êéëÜ áðü êáñÝêëá 82,
ÄùäÝêáôç Üóêçóç: ÕðåñâáñÝùí áðü 100-
150 êéëÜ áðü ôï ðÜôùìá 84, ÄÝêáôç ôñßôç
Üóêçóç: ×áéñåôéóìüò óôïí Þëéï 85, ÄÝêáôç
ôÝôáñôç Üóêçóç: Ãýìíáóìá ôùí êáôùôÝñùí
ìõþíùí ôùí ãïöþí. ÁíáóêåëïêåêáìÝíïò
ãõìíáóìüò 87, ÄÝêáôç ðÝìðôç Üóêçóç: Á-
íôéáûðíéáêÞ Üóêçóç 89, ÄÝêáôç Ýêôç Üóêç-
óç: ÁíôéäéáâçôéêÞ êé áíôéáóèìáôéêÞ 91, ÄÝ-
êáôç Ýâäïìç Üóêçóç: ÅðáíáöïñÜ óôç èÝ-
óç ôïõò ôùí ìõþíùí ôùí ÷åñéþí 93, ÄÝêá-
ôç üãäïç Üóêçóç: ÅðáíáöïñÜ óôç èÝóç
n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ ¸íùóç ÷åñéþí êáé ðïäéþí ìå Ýêôáóç ãïíÜ-
ôùí 161, ¢óêçóç äùäÝêáôç: ÈÝóç ôïõ öé-
ÐÑÁÊÔÉÊÇ ÌÅÈÏÄÏÓ äéïý 166, ¢óêçóç äÝêáôç ôñßôç: ÈÝóç ëéï-
íôáñéïý 171, ¢óêçóç äÝêáôç ôÝôáñôç: ÈÝ-
ÓÙÌÁÔÏØÕ×ÉÊÇÓ óç êáìÞëáò 176, ¢óêçóç äÝêáôç ðÝìðôç:
ÈÝóç ôüîïõ. ÁíôéäéáâçôéêÞ 180, ¢óêçóç äÝ-
ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇÓ êáôç Ýêôç: ÈÝóç áñüôñïõ. Ðáíèåñáðåõôé-
êÞ 184, ¢óêçóç äÝêáôç Ýâäïìç: ÈÝóç åðé-
ÊÑÉÃÉÁ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ èáíÜôéá ãéá áñôçñéïóêëÞñùóç êáé õðÝñôá-
óç 189, ¢óêçóç äÝêáôç üãäïç: ÈÝóç ÷åéñï-
Åßíáé ôï äÝêáôï Ýíáôï âéâëßï ôïõ Í. ðïäþí. Èåñáðåýôñá ôùí íåýñùí êáé ôùí
ÌáñãéùñÞ ðïõ ðñùôïåêäüèçêå ôï 1988, ðíåõìüíùí 194, ¢óêçóç äÝêáôç Ýíáôç: Ç á-
ôï ïðïßï ìáò ðáñïõóéÜæåé ìéá áñ÷áéüôáôç íôßèåôç üøç. ËáìðÜäá 199, ¢óêçóç åéêï-
óôÞ: ÈÝóç éó÷ýùí êé ïêëáäüí. Èåñáðåßá ôïõ
ìÝèïäï èåñáðåõôéêÞò, øõ÷Þò êáé óþìá- ËïõìðÜíãêïõ 203, ¢óêçóç åéêïóôÞ ðñþôç:
ôïò, ðïõ öÝñíåé ôçí õãåßá óôïí áññùóôç- ÈÝóç öïßíéêá. ×áñßæåé ýøïò 208, ¢óêçóç åé-
ìÝíï Üíèñùðï. êïóôÞ äåýôåñç: ÈÝóç äéáãþíéá. Èåñáðåý-
Ïé áóêÞóåéò ôùí ìåëþí ôïõ óþìáôïò ìå ôçí áõóôçñÜ ñõèìéóìÝíç óõì- ôñá óõêùôéïý 212, ¢óêçóç åéêïóôÞ ôñßôç:
ìåôï÷Þ ôçò ðíïÞò, åíäõíáìþíïõí ôï ìõéêü êáé íåõñéêü óýóôçìá, ìå åé- ÈÝóç ôñéãùíéêÞ. Äõíáìþôñá êáñäéÜò 217,
óðíïÞ, êñÜôçìá ôïõ áÝñá ìÝóá ìáò, åêðíïÞ êáé êñÜôçìá ôïõ áÝñá Ýîù ¢óêçóç åéêïóôÞ ôÝôáñôç: ×åéñïðïäéêÝò ìå
ôïí áíôß÷åéñá èÝóåéò. Äõíáìþíåé Íïõ êé áé-
ìáò, þóôå íá éóïæõãéóèïýí êáé åîéóïññïðçèïýí ïé äõíÜìåéò ôïõ ïñãáíé- óèÞóåéò 222, ¢óêçóç åéêïóôÞ ðÝìðôç: Åíüò
óìïý. ðïäéïý ìüíï èÝóç. Åíáíôßïí ôçò áäõíáìßáò
Ç ðñáêôéêÞ ìÝèïäïò ôçò Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá ãñÜöôçêå ãéá íá åöáñìïóèåß óù- ôùí íåýñùí 228, ¢óêçóç åéêïóôÞ Ýêôç: ÈÝ-
óôÜ áðü ôïõò åêðáéäåõüìåíïõò êáé ôïõò åêðáéäåõôÝò ôïõò. Íá èåñáðåý- óç âïõíïý. Äõíáìþôñá ðíåõìüíùí 234,
óåé äß÷ùò êáèüëïõ öÜñìáêá êáé äß÷ùò ìç÷áíéêÜ ìÝóá êÜèå óùìáôïáññþ- ¢óêçóç åéêïóôÞ Ýâäïìç: ÈÝóç ðïõ ïìïñ-
óôéá êáé êÜèå øõ÷ïðÜèåéá. öáßíåé ôá ðÜíôá êáé âïçèåß ôï óåî 240, ¢óêç-
óç åéêïóôÞ üãäïç: Ç Ãéüãêá ðïõ óöñáãßæåé
Óôçñßæåôáé óôï Íïõ êáé óôéò áóêÞóåéò ðïõ õðïâÜëëåôáé ôï óþìá, ìå âï- ôï ðñüóùðï ôïõ Ãéüãêé 246, ¢óêçóç åéêï-
çèïýò, ôï Íåõñéêü êáé Ìõéêü óýóôçìá. Ç êÜèå Üóêçóç ôçò Êñßãéá, ìå ôéò óôÞ Ýíáôç: Ðñïöýëáîç áðü ôï êýñôùìá
åðôÜ öÜóåéò ôçò, ü÷é ìïíÜ÷á èåñáðåýåé ôéò óùìáôéêÝò áññþóôéåò, áëëÜ êáé ôùí þìùí êáé ôï ðÝóéìï ôïõ óôïìá÷éïý 251,
áíáæùïãïíåß üëï ôïí ïñãáíéóìü êáé ðñïëáâáßíåé íá áðùèçèïýí êáé íá ìç ¢óêçóç ôñéáêïóôÞ: ÈÝóç Êýêíïõ. Éóïññï-
êáëëéåñãçèïýí ìÝóá óôï óþìá ôïõ áíèñþðïõ ïé ôÜóåéò ãéá ðáèÞóåéò. ðßá êáé áñìïíßá óôï óþìá 257,
Áêüìá Ý÷åé ôç ìåèïäåõìÝíç éêáíüôçôá íá èåñáðåýåé ôéò ïíïìáæüìåíåò ÄÅÕÔÅÑÏ ÌÅÑÏÓ: Ç èåñáðåõôéêÞ ôïõ Íïõ
262, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá ôïõ äåýôåñïõ ìÝñïõò
øõ÷ïðÜèåéåò, äçëáäÞ ôéò ðáèÞóåéò ôïõ Íïõ ôïõ áíèñþðïõ. ÐñïÜãåé ôçí 262, Ôá ðñïëåãüìåíá ôïõ äåýôåñïõ ìÝñïõò
áëçèéíÞ ÷ñéóôüôçôá ìáæß ìå ôç óùìáôéêÞ êáé øõ÷éêÞ (ÍïçôéêÞ) õãåßá. Ðá- 263, Ï ðÝðëïò ôçò ÇèéêïðëáóôéêÞò óôçí Êñß-
ñÝ÷åé ôçí áëçèéíÞ äéäáóêáëßá ãéá ìéá áíþôåñç ðíåõìáôéêÞ çèéêÞ, ðïõ å- ãéá Ãéüãêá 266, Ôï ÊÝíôñï ôçò Óõíåßäçóçò
îõøþíåé ôéò óùóôÝò áñåôÝò ôïõ åêðáéäåõïìÝíïõ. 269, ÓõãêÝíôñùóç êáé Óýãêñéóç. Ôá äýï õ-
Ìéá ìüíï ìáôéÜ äåß÷íåé ìå ôá Üðåéñá óêßôóá êáé ôéò ðåñéãñáöÝò ôùí á- ðåñüðëá ôïõ Íïõ 272, Ãéáôß ïíïìÜóôçêáí
óêÞóåùí ðþò èåñáðåýïíôáé ïé ðÜìðïëëåò áññþóôéåò. ÄïêéìÜóôå ãéá íá øõ÷áóèÝíåéåò ïé áññþóôéåò êáé ôá åëáôôþ-
ìáôá ôïõ Íïõ 275, Ðñþôç Üóêçóç: Ç øõ÷é-
ðåéóèåßôå. êÞ èåñáðåõôéêÞ óôïõò ðáíÜñ÷áéïõò ëáïýò
Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá Ýíá óðÜíéï êáé ìïíáäéêü óå áíÜëõóç Ýñãï, âÜóåé ôùí ðá- ôçò Éíäßáò ìå ïäçãü ôçí Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá. Áðï-
ãêïóìßùí äåäïìÝíùí, ôï ïðïßï áíáâéþíåé ôçí áõèåíôéêÞ åðéóôÞìç ôçò êïðÞ ôïõ êáðíßóìáôïò 278, Äåýôåñç Üóêç-
Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá êáé ôçí ðáñïõóéÜæåé áõôïýóéá êáé ðÜëé óôçí áíèñùðüôçôá. óç: ÁðïêïðÞ ôçò ïéíïðïóßáò 282, Ôñßôç Ü-
óêçóç: ÁðïâïëÞ ôçò êëåðôïìáíßáò 285, ÔÝ-
ôáñôç Üóêçóç: ÅîáöÜíéóç ôïõ øåýäïõò
ôïõò ôùí ìõþíùí ôùí ðïäéþí 96, ÄÝêáôç êáé ôïõ öïõóêþìáôïò ôïõ óôïìá÷éïý 111, 288, ÐÝìðôç Üóêçóç: ÅðáíáöïñÜ ôçò ìíÞ-
Ýííáôç Üóêçóç: Ôùí äáêôýëùí ôùí ÷åéñþí ¢óêçóç ôñßôç: Ôçò ÷åëþíáò, ç áíáíåùôéêÞ ìçò 291, ¸êôç Üóêçóç: ÊáôáðïëÝìçóç ôçò
99, ÅéêïóôÞ Üóêçóç: Ôùí äáêôýëùí ôùí ðï- 117, ¢óêçóç ôÝôáñôç: Ôïõ ðëïßïõ. Áíáöüñ- áëáæïíåßáò 294, ¸âäïìç Üóêçóç: Èåñáðåßá
äéþí 101, ôéóç íåõñéêïý êáé ìõéêïý óõóôÞìáôïò 124, ôçò êïóìïöïâßáò 297, ¼ãäïç Üóêçóç: Èå-
ÁÓÊÇÓÅÉÓ ÓÊÉÔÓÏÐÁÑÁÓÔÁÔÉÊÅÓ ¢óêçóç ðÝìðôç: Ôïõ Äéáìáíôéïý. Ç ôÝëåéá Ü- ñáðåßá ôçò íåõñïöïâßáò 301, ¸íáôç Üóêç-
ÁÐÏ ÔÏÍ ÁÑÉÈÌÏ 1 ÅÙÓ 30 óêçóç 130, ¢óêçóç Ýêôç: Ôïõ áõ÷Ýíá 134, óç: Èåñáðåßá ôçò ðõñïöïâßáò 304, ÄÝêáôç
ÏíïìáóôéêÞ êáôÜóôáóç ôùí 30 óêéôóï- ÁóêÞóåéò åãêõìïóýíçò: Áíþäõíïò Ôïêåôüò Üóêçóç: Èåñáðåßá ôçò áññùóôïöïâßáò 306,
ðáñáóôáôçìÝíùí áóêÞóåùí 103, ¢óêçóç 140, ¢óêçóç Ýâäïìç: Áðü ïêëáäüí èÝóç ÅíäÝêáôç Üóêçóç: Èåñáðåßá ôçò ðïëõöáãß-
ðñþôç: ÁðáëëáãÞ ôïõ Ýóù åßíáé ìáò áðü ìåôáôüðéóçò óêåëþí 141, ¢óêçóç üãäïç: áò 310, ÄùäÝêáôç Üóêçóç: Èåñáðåßá ôçò
ôá óõãêïëëçìÝíá ìÝóá ìáò áññùóôïáÝñéá Ïêëáäüí êáé ãïíÜôéóìá 146, ¢óêçóç Ýííá- èáíáôïöïâßáò 313, ÄÝêáôç ôñßôç Üóêçóç:
105, ¢óêçóç äåýôåñç: Èåñáðåßá ôïõ ãåñï- ôç: Ïêëáäüí êé áðïëýôùò ôïîïôÞ 151, ¢óêç- Èåñáðåßá ôçò åñùôïìáíßáò 316, ÄÝêáôç ôÝ-
íôéêïý ôñÝìïõëïõ ôçò êáôáèëéðôéêÞò ðßåóçò óç äÝêáôç: Ìå ñÜ÷ç êáé êåöÜëé óôï Ýäáöïò ôáñôç Üóêçóç: Èåñáðåßá ôçò ãáìïìáíßáò

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 45 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

319, ÄÝêáôç ðÝìðôç Üóêçóç: Èåñáðåßá ôçò
ðëïõôïìáíßáò 323, ÄÝêáôç Ýêôç Üóêçóç:
Èåñáðåßá ôçò ìáôáéïäïîßáò 326, ÄÝêáôç Ý-
âäïìç Üóêçóç: Èåñáðåßá ôçò ïêíçñßáò 328,
ÄÝêáôç üãäïç Üóêçóç: Èåñáðåßá ôçò õðíç-
ëßáò 331, ÄÝêáôç Ýíáôç Üóêçóç: Èåñáðåßá
ôçò åãùðÜèåéáò 334, ÅéêïóôÞ Üóêçóç: Èå-
ñáðåßá ôçò ùñáéïðÜèåéáò 337,
ÔÑÉÔÏ ÌÅÑÏÓ: Ôï õðåñâáôéêü óôçí Êñßãéá
Ãéüãêá 341, Ó÷Ýóç ôùí ôñéþí ìåñþí ôïõ Ýñ-
ãïõ 341, Õðåñâáôéêüò ðñïóáíáôïëéóìüò
óôçí Êñßãéá 342, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá ôïõ ôñßôïõ
ìÝñïõò 342, ×áìÝíï åßíáé óÞìåñá ôï èáý-
ìá ôçò õðåñâáôéêüôçôáò óôçí Êñßãéá 343, Ç
îå÷áóìÝíç ìÝèïäïò áíýøùóçò óôçí õðåñ-
âáôéêüôçôá ôçò Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá 346, Ç åõëïãßá
óôá ðáéäéÜ ôçò Ãçò áðü ôçí Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá 349,
Åðßëïãïò 351.
KRIYA YOGA
CONTENTS
White Page 1, White Page 2, White Page
3, White Page 4, Dedication 5, Warm Re-
quest 6, Certification of the work validity 6,
Name of the work 7, Sketch representations
of the work 7, Attendance of the work 8,
Why the Method of the Practical Therapeu-
tics Kriya Yoga was written 9, When and
where the Practical Method of the Thera-
peutics of Kriya Yoga was writen 10, Forword
11, The revivers of Kriya Yoga 14, Preface 15,
Introduction 18, Sakra and Nadis 24, Criya
Yoga as a Product of Conscience Subcon-
science 30, Cooperation of the Nervous and
the Musclar Systems 36, Pranayama in Kriya
Yoga 39, The pairs of the phases 44, The han-
dled Practical Application of the somato-
therapeutics Kriya Yoga 46, The breath sci-
ence accompanies inceasingly Kriya Yoga 50,
Vayu (Etheric air) 54,
FIRST PART 57, Advices taken from the
experience of the practice in Kriya Yoga 58,
Descriptive not-sketch representative fre ex-
ercises 59, Nominal situation of the free, de-
scriptive and not sketch representatives ther-
apeutical exercises 60, Exercises for all the
body Strengthening exercises of all the n-
ervous and muscular system 61, First exer-
cise: Of the local junps 61, Second exercise:
Of the headaches and migraines therapy 64,
Third exercise: Of the eyes cleaning Trataka-
posture 66, Fourth exercise: Of the therapy
of the poor circulation and removal of the
chilblain and the frostbite 68, Sixth exercise:
General and total exercises of the Nervous,
Respiratory, Circulating, Muscular and 70,
Metabolistic System 72, Seventh exercise: Of
the Respiratory and Circulating System 74,
Eighth exercise: Of the whole organism
cleaning 76, Ninth exercise: Of cleaning and
elegance of the voice 78, Tenth exercise: Of
the feet risings on the spot with rhythmical
breath 80, Eleventh exercise: Of overweight
from 100-150 kilos from chair 82, Twelfth
exercise: Of overweight from 100-150 kilos
from floor 84, Thirteenth exercise: Salute to
the sun 85, Fourteenth exercise: Exercising
the lower muscles of the hunches Supinely-
bent exercising 87, Fifteenth exercise: Anti-
somniac exercise 89, Sixteenth exercise: An-
tidiabetic and antiasthmatic 91, Seventheeth
exercise: Bringing back at their position the
muscles of the hands 93, Eighteenth exer-
cise: Bringing back at their position the mus-
cles of the legs 96, Nineteenth exercise: Of
the fingers 99, Twentieth exercise: Of the
toes 101,
SKETCH REPRESENTATIVE
EXERCISES FROM NO 1 TO 30
Nominal situation of the 30 sketch rep-
resented exercises 103, First exercise: Dis-
charge of our being from the attached ill
aeries within us 105, Second exercise: Ther-
apy of the old age trembling, of the de-
pressing pressure and of the stomach swell
111, Third exercise: The reneing of the tor-
toise 117, Fourth exercise: Of the ship
Recharge of the nervous and of the mus-
cular systems 124, Fifth exercise: Of the dia-
mant The perfect exercise 130, Sixth exer-
cise: Of the neck 134, Pregnancy exercises:
Painless childbirth 140, Seventh exercise:
From the quatting pose displacements of
the legs 141, Eighth exercise: Squatting pose
and kneeling146, Ninth exercise: Squatting
pose and absolutely arched 151, Tenth ex-
ercise: The back and the head on the floor
at a birth pose 156, Eleventh exercise: Unit-
ing hands and legs and stressing the knees
161, Twelfth exercise: Sneak pose 166, Thir-
teenth exercise: Lion pose 171, Fourteenth
exercise: Camel pose 176, Fifteenth exer-
cise: Arch pose Antidiabetic 180, Sixteenth
exercise: Plow pose Omnitherapeutical 184,
Seventeenth exercise: Death pose Of arte-
riosclerosis and hypertasis Curing the nerves
and the lungs 189, Eighteenth exercise:
Hands and legs pose Curing the nerves and
the lungs 194, Nineteenth exercise: The op-
posite view Torch 199, Twentieth exercise:
Hips and squatting pose Lumbago therapy
203, Twentith first exercise: Phoenix pose It
adds height 208, Twentieth second exercise:
Diagonal pose Curer of liver 212, Twentieth
third exercise: Triagonal pose Strengtherning
the heart 217, Twentieth fourth exercise:
Hand-legs by thumb poses It strengthens
Mind and senses 222, Twentieth fifth exer-
cise: One leg only pose Against the nerves
weakness 228, Twentieth sixth exercise:
Mountain pose Strengthening the lungs
234, Twentieth seventh exercise: Pose that
makes everythin beautiful and helps in sex
240, Twentieth eighth exercise: Yoga seal-
n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
PRACTICAL METHOD OF SOMATOPSYCHIC
THERAPEUTICS KRIYA YOGA
It is N. Margiori's nineteenth book that was published in 1988, and that
presents us a very ancient method of therapeutics for the soul and the
body, that brings health back to the diseased person.
The exercises of the members of the body, combined with the strictly
regulated participation of the breathing, strengthen the muscular and the
nervous systems, with inhalation, holding the air inside us, expiration and
holding the air outside us, so that the powers of the organism may be able
to be counterbalanced and equalized.
The practical method of Kriya Yoga was written to be applied rightly by
the trainees and their trainers. To cure without medicines and without
any mechanical means every bodily disease and every psychopathy.
It is based on the Mind and on the exercises where the body is subject.,
having as assistants the Nervous and the Musculat systems. Every exer-
cise of Kriya, by its seven phases, not only cures the body diseases, but it
also revives the whole organism and prevents the tendencies for diseases
to be cultivated in the body of man.
Also, it has the systematized ability to cure the so-called psychopathies,
that is the diseases of the man's Mind. It promotes the true honourable
sense.., together with the bodily and the psyschical (Intellectual) health.
It provides the true teaching for a higher spiritual morality, that elevates
the right virtues of the trainee.
One single glance shows, by the infinite sketcjes and the descriptions
of the exercises, how the numerous diseases can be cured. Try and be
convinced yourselves.
It is about a rare and unique in analysis work, on the basis of the uni-
versal data, which revives the authentical science of Kriya Yoga and pre-
sents it selfsame to the humanity again.
ing Yogi's face 246, Twentieth ninth exer- exercise: Therapy of pyrophobia 306, Tenth
cise: Precaution from the shoulders curving exercise: Therapy of arostophobia 304,
and from the stomach fall 251, Thirtieth ex- Eleventh exercise: Therapy of excessive eat-
ercise: The swan pose Balance and harmo- ing 310, Twelfth exercise: Therapy of death
ny in body 257, phobia 313, Thirteenth exercise: Therapy of
SECOND PART: Mind Therapeutics 262, lovesickness 316, Forteenth exercise: Ther-
Contents of the Second Part 262, The for- apy og fucking mania 319, Fifteenth exer-
word of the second part 263, The veil of cise: Therapy of plutomania 323, Sixteenth
Ethicoplastics in Kriya Yoga 266, The Con- exercise: Therapy of vanity 326, Seven-
science Center 269, Concentration and Com- teenth exercise: Therapy of laziness 328,
parison The two superguns of Mind 272, Why Eighteenth exercise: Therapy of sleepiness
the Mind diseases and defects were named 331, Nineteenth exercise: Therapy of e-
psychoasthenias 275, First exercise: The psy- gopathy 334, Twentieth exercise: Therapy of
chic therapeutics in the very ancient peo- oreopathia 337,
ples 278, Second exercise: Cutting off wine- THIRD PART: The transgressive in Criya Yo-
drinking 282, Third exercise: Rejection of ga 340, Relation of the three parts of the
cleptomania 288, Fourth exercise: Dissa- work 341, Transgressive orientation in Criya
pearance of lie 291, Fifth exercise: Bringing 342, Contents of the third part 343, In our
back the memory 294, Sixth exercise: Fight- days the miracle of the transgressivenes in
ing against arrogance 297, Seventh exer- Kriya is lost 346, The forgotten method of el-
cise: Therapy of cosmophobia 301, Eighth evation to the transgresiveness of Kriya Yo-
exercise: Therapy of nerophobia 304, Ninth ga 349, EPILOGUE 351.

ÁÐÏÓÕÌÂÏËÉÓÌÏÓ
ÔÇÓ ÅËËÇÍÉÊÇÓ ÌÕÈÏËÏÃÉÁÓ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
Ç õðïãñáöÞ ôïõ óõããñáöÝá 7, Ôüðïò
êáé ÷ñüíïò ôçò óõããñáöÞò ôïõ 7, Áéôßá ôçò
ÝêäïóÞò ôïõ 8, ÁöéÝñùóç ôïõ óõããñáöÝá
9, ÈåñìÞ ðáñÜêëçóç 10, Ìýèïò êáé Íïõò
11, Áéôßåò ðïõ ìå ðáñáêßíçóáí íá åêäþóù
ôï ìÝ÷ñé óÞìåñá áíÝêäïôï ôïýôï Ýñãï ìïõ
12,
ÐÑÙÔÏ ÌÅÑÏÓ: Åíçìåñùôéêü óçìåßùìá
ãéá ôçí ÅëëçíéêÞ Ìõèïëïãßá 17, Ôé åßíáé Ìý-
èïò 17, Ìýèïò êáé Óýìâïëï 22, Ðñüëïãïò
27, ÅéóáãùãÞ 38, ÅðôáäïíçôéêÜ ÓõóôÞìá-
ôá Ìçôñþí Éäåþí - Óõìâüëùí - Áñ÷åôý-
ðùí, Ðñþôç ÓõìâïëéêÞ Êëåßäá ôçò Åðôá-
âáèìéêÞò Èåßáò ÔÜîçò 49, ÅðôáäïíçôéêÜ Óõ-
óôÞìáôá Ìçôñþí Éäåþí - Óõìâüëùí - Áñ-
÷åôýðùí, Äåýôåñç ÓõìâïëéêÞ Êëåßäá ôçò
ÅðôáâáèìéêÞò Èåßáò ÔÜîçò 52, Åðôáäïíçôé-
êÜ ÓõóôÞìáôá Ìçôñþí Éäåþí - Óõìâüëùí
- Áñ÷åôýðùí, Ôñßôç ÓõìâïëéêÞ Êëåßäá ôçò
ÅðôáâáèìéêÞò Èåßáò ÔÜîçò 58, Åðôáäïíçôé-
êÜ ÓõóôÞìáôá Ìçôñþí Éäåþí - Óõìâüëùí
- Áñ÷åôýðùí, ÔÝôáñôç ÓõìâïëéêÞ Êëåßäá
ôçò ÅðôáâáèìéêÞò Èåßáò ÔÜîçò 63, Åðôáäï-
íçôéêÜ ÓõóôÞìáôá Ìçôñþí Éäåþí - Óõìâü-
ëùí - Áñ÷åôýðùí, ÐÝìðôç ÓõìâïëéêÞ Êëåß-
äá ôçò ÅðôáâáèìéêÞò Èåßáò ÔÜîçò 67, Åðôá-
äïíçôéêÜ ÓõóôÞìáôá Ìçôñþí Éäåþí - Óõì-
âüëùí - Áñ÷åôýðùí, ¸êôç ÓõìâïëéêÞ Êëåß-
äá ôçò ÅðôáâáèìéêÞò Èåßáò ÔÜîçò 72, Åðôá-
äïíçôéêÜ ÓõóôÞìáôá Ìçôñþí Éäåþí - Óõì-
âüëùí - Áñ÷åôýðùí, ¸âäïìç ÓõìâïëéêÞ
Êëåßäá ôçò ÅðôáâáèìéêÞò Èåßáò ÔÜîçò 76,
Äõï ëüãéá ãéá ôçí ÅðôÜâáèìç ÓõìâïëéêÞ
Êëåßäá ðïõ ðåñéÝ÷åôáé óôï Ìýèï 81,
ÄÅÕÔÅÑÏ ÌÅÑÏÓ: Ï ËÜâñõò áðïóõìâï-
ëéæüìåíïò 88, Ï ÔÜíôáëïò 95, Ëçôþ êáé Íéü-
âç 107, Ôáýñïò 120, Æåýò - Äßáò: Áðïóõì-
âïëéóìüò ôïõ ôüôå õðÝñôáôïõ Èåïý ôçò
ÅëëçíéêÞò áñ÷áéüôçôáò êáé Ìõèïëïãßáò,
áñ÷çãÝôç ôïõ Ïëõìðéáêïý ðÜíèåïõ, ÐáôÝ-
ñá ôùí áíèñþðùí êáé Èåþí 133, ÁèçíÜ: Ç
ÍïçôéêÞ ÅîÝëéîç ôùí ÅëëÞíùí 167, Áðï-
óõìâïëéóìüò ôïõ Ìýèïõ ôçò ´Çñáò 196,
ÄÞìçôñá - Ðåñóåöüíç - ºáê÷ïò: Áðïóõì-
âïëéóìüò ôïõ Ìýèïõ ôïõò 221, ÐñïìçèÝ-

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 46 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

áò: Áðïóõìâïëéóìüò ôïõ Ìýèïõ ôïõ 241,
Áöñïäßôç: Ôï Ìõóôéêü ôçò áíáãÝííçóçò á-
ðïêáëýðôåôáé 259, ¹öáéóôïò: Áðïìõèï-
ëüãçóç ôçò ÌõóôéêÞò ÔÝ÷íçò ôïõ 278, Ï
Ðïóåéäþíáò ößëïò êáé å÷èñüò ìáò 294,
¢äçò - Ðëïýôùíáò: Èåüò óôá êáôá÷èüíéá
âáóßëåéá 313, Äéüíõóïò: Ï Ãéïò ôïõ Äßá êáé
ôçò ÓÝìåëçò 333, ÅñìÞò: Èåüò Áããåëéïöü-
ñïò 379, Áðüëëùíáò: Èåüò ¹ëéïò 403, ÈåÜ
¢ñôåìç: ÁäåëöÞ ôïõ Áðüëëùíá 446, ¢ñçò:
Èåüò ôïõ ðïëÝìïõ 467, Åóôßá: ÈåÜ ôïõ üñ-
êïõ 488, Åðßëïãïò ôïõ üëïõ Ýñãïõ 505,
Åõ÷áñéóôÞñéï ðñïò ôïõò óõíåñãÜôåò ìïõ
517, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá 519, ¸ñãá ôïõ óõããñá-
öÝá 522.
DESYMBOLISM OF THE GREEK MYTHOLOGY
CONTENTS
THE WRITER'S SIGNATURE 7, PLACE AND
TIME OF HIS WRITING 7, CAUSES OF ITS EDI-
TION 8, THE WRITER'S DEDICATION 9, WARM
REQUEST 10, MYTH AND MIND 11, CAUSES
THAT URGED ME TO PUBLISH THIS UNPUB-
LISHED UP TO NOW WORK OF MINE 12,
FIRST PART: INFORMATIVE NOTE FOR
GREEK MYTHOLOGY 15, WHAT IS MYTH 17,
MYTH AND SYMBOL 22, PREFACE 27, IN-
TRODUCTION 38, HEPTAVIBRATING SYSTEMS,
OF MATRIXES IDEAS - SYMBOLS - ARCHE-
TYPES FIRST SYMBOLIC KEY OF THE HEPTA-
GRADING DIVINE ORDER 49, HEPTAVI-
BRATIND SYSTEMS OF MATRIXES IDEAS - SYM-
BOLS - ARCHETYPES SECOND SYMBOLIC KEY
OF THE HEPTAGRADING DIVINE ORDER 52,
HEPTAVIBRATING SYSTEMS OF MATRIXES
IDEAS - SYMBOLS - ARCHETYPES THIRD SYM-
BOLIC KEY OF THE HEPTAGRADING DIVINE
ORDER 58, HEPTAVIBRATING SYSTEMS OF
MATRIXES IDEAS - SYMBOLS - ARCHETYPES
n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
ÔÑÉÓÄÉÁÓÔÁÔÏÓ
ÊÁÉ ÔÅÔÑÁÄÉÁÓÔÁÔÏÓ
ÊÏÓÌÏÓ
Åßíáé ôï åéêïóôü ðñþôï âéâëßï ôïõ Í.
ÌáñãéùñÞ ðïõ ðñùôïåêäüèçêå ôï 1989.
Ó' áõôü åîéóôïñåßôáé êáé äéäÜóêåôáé ç ý-
ðáñîç áðü åðéóôçìïíéêÞò ðëåõñÜò, ôïõ
áïñÜôïõ Þ êáôÜ ôçí åðéóôÞìç, ôåôñáäéá-
óôÜôïõ êüóìïõ.
ÌÝóá óôéò åðéóôçìïíéêÝò êáé ìõóôéêéóôé-
êÝò óåëßäåò ôïõ, ðáñåëáýíïõí ïé åðéóôÞ-
ìïíåò ôçò åðï÷Þò ìáò (ðõñçíéêïß öõóéêïß êáé áóôñïöõóéêïß) êáé ïé ìåãÜëïé
ìõóôéêéóôÝò ðïõ Þîåñáí ôïí Üëëï Þ ôåôñáäéÜóôáôï êüóìï ðñï áìÝôñç-
ôùí ÷ñüíùí êáé ðïõ ìüëéò ôþñá áíáêÜëõøáí ïé ðõñçíéêïß åðéóôÞìïíåò.
Áðïäåéêíýåôáé ðåñßôñáíá ç ðñïáíáããåëßá êáé ç äéäáóêáëßá ôïõ Üëëïõ
(ðíåõìáôéêïý) êüóìïõ áðü ôïõò ìõóôéêéóôÝò êáé ç ìüëéò ðñüóöáôá øçëÜ-
öéóÞ ôïõ êáé áðü ôïõò åðéóôÞìïíåò ìÝóá áðü ôá ðåñÜìáôÜ ôïõò óôïí Ìé-
êñüêïóìï (åðéôá÷õíôÞñéá - êõêëïôñüíéá) êáé ôïí Ìáêñüêïóìï (ìáýñåò Þ
ëåõêÝò ïðÝò, íåôñßíá ê.ë.ð.)
ÔÑÉÓÄÉÁÓÔÁÔÏÓ ÊÁÉ
ÔÅÔÑÁÄÉÁÓÔÁÔÏÓ ÊÏÓÌÏÓ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
ÁöéÝñùóç 5, Óêïðüò ôïõ âéâëßïõ 6, Ðïý
ãñÜöôçêå ôï âéâëßï 7, Ðõèáãüñáò - ÐëÜôù-
íáò 8, ¢ëìðåñô ÁúíóôÜéí 9, Ðñüëïãïò 11, Åé-
n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
ÁÐÏÓÕÌÂÏËÉÓÌÏÓ
ÔÇÓ ÅËËÇÍÉÊÇÓ
ÌÕÈÏËÏÃÉÁÓ
Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá ôï åéêïóôü âéâëßï ðïõ åê-
äüèçêå ôï 1988 óôï ïðïßï ï óõããñáöÝ-
áò áðïóõìâïëßæåé åéò âÜèïò ôï Ìýèï ôçò
ÅëëçíéêÞò ÅóùôåñéêÞò Öéëïóïößáò êáé
êáôáäåß÷íåé ôç Ãíþóç êáé Óïößá ðïõ ïé
ðñüãïíïß ìáò åß÷áí.
¸êñõâáí ôïí Ìïíïèåúóìü êáé Ýäéíáí
óôïõò áìáèåßò êáé óôïõò áìýçôïõò ôï áß-
óèçìá ôïõ öüâïõ, åíþ ïé ãíþóôåò ôçò áëÞèåéáò äéáêñáôïýóáí ôçí áãÜ-
ðç êáé ôçí ðíåõìáôéêüôçôá. Ï êÜèå Åëëçíéêüò ìýèïò êñýâåé ôá ÌõóôÞ-
ñéá, ðïõ ï ìåôÝðåéôá ×ñéóôéáíéóìüò åëåýèåñá áðåêÜëõøå óôïõò ðñïåôïé-
ìáóìÝíïõò íá ôá äå÷èïýí êáé íá ôá áöïìïéþóïõí.
FOURTH SYMBOLIC KEY OF THE HEPTAGRAD-
ING DIVINE ORDER 63, HEPTAVIBRATING SYS-
TEMS OF MATRIXES IDEAS - SYMBOLS - AR-
CHETYPES FIFTH SYMBOLIC KEY OF THE HEP-
TAGRADING DIVINE ORDER 67, HEPTAVI-
BRATING SYSTEMS OF MATRIXES IDEAS - SYM-
BOLS - ARCHETYPES SIXTH SYMBOLIC KEY OF
THE HEPTAGRADING DIVINE ORDER 72, HEP-
TAVIBRATING SYSTEMS OF MATRIXES IDEAS -
SYMBOLS - ARCHETYPES SEVENTH SYMBOL-
IC KEY OF THE HEPTAGRADING DIVINE OR-
DER 76, A FEW WORDS ABOUT THE HEPTA-
GRADING SYMBOLIC KEY COMPRISED IN MYTH
81,
PART TWO: LAVRYS DESYMBOLIZED 88,
óáãùãÞ 17, Ðñïëåãüìåíá 26, ÔåôñáäéÜóôá-
ôåò äïíÞóåéò 34, Öùò óôï Óêüôïò 62,
¸ìðíåõóç Åðéóôçìüíùí êáé Åìðåéñßá Ìõ-
óôéêéóôþí 76, Ãåíéêüôçôåò ðÜíù óôç äéáíï-
çôéêÞ äñáóôçñéüôçôá 97, Äéáíïçôéêüò ðåñß-
ðáôïò óôïí ôñéóäéáóôáôéêü ìáò êüóìï 113,
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
DESYMBOLISM
OF THE GREEK
MYTHOLOGY
It is about the twentieth book
that was published in 1988 and in
which the writer desymbolizes
the myth of the Greek Esoteric
Philosophy and demonstrates the
knowledge and the wisdom of our
ancestors.
They used to hide the
Monotheism and to give the ig-
norants and the non-initiated the
feeling of the fear, while those
who knew the truth, held love and
spiritualism. Every Greek myth
TANTALOS 95, LITO AND NIOVI 107, TAURUS
JOVE - ZEUS: DESYMBOLISM OF THE
hides the mysteries that the later
SUPREME GOD OF 120, GREEK ANTIQUITY IN on christianism revealed freely to
THOSE TIMES, 0F THE FIRST LEADER OF THE those who were prepared to ac-
OLYMPIAN PANTHEON, THE FATHER OF MEN cept and to assimilate them.
AND GODS 133, MINERVA: THE INTELLECTU-
AL EVOLUTION OF GREEKS 167, DESYMBOL-
ISM OF HERA'S MYTH 196, DEMETER - PERSE- KINGDOMS 313, DIONYSUS: JUPITER'S AND
PHONE - IAKHUS: DESYMBOLISM OF THEIR SEMELI'S SON 333, HERMES: MESSENGER
MYTH 221, PROMETHEUS: DESYMBOLISM OF GOD 379, APOLLO: GOD OF SUN 403, DIANA:
HIS MYTH 241, VENUS: THE SECRET OF RE- APOLLO'S SISTER 446, ARES: GOD OF WAR
NAISSANCE IS REVEALED 259, HEPHAESTUS: 467, HESTIA: GODDESS OF OATH 488, EPI-
DEMYTHOLOGISM OF HIS SECRET ART 278, LOGUE OF THE WHOLE WORK 505, THANKS
NEPTUNE, OUR FRIEND AND OUR ENEMY TO MY COOPERATORS 517, CONTENTS 519,
294, HADES - PLUTO: GOD IN THE INFERNAL THE WRITER'S WORKS 522.
n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
THREEDIMENSIONAL AND
FOURDIMENSIONAL WORLD
This is N. Margiori's twentieth first book which was published for the first
time in 1989. In it, the existence of the invisible or according to the sci-
ence, of the fourdimensional world, is narrated in a scientific way.
In its scientific and mysticist pages, the scientists of our times parade
(the nuclear physicists) and the great mystics who knew the other or the
fourdimensional world, countless years ago, which the nuclear scientists
just discovered.
The announcement beforehand and the teaching of the other (spiritu-
al) world are proved indisputably by the mystics and its recent groping by
the scientists through their experiments in the Microcosm (accelerations
- cyclotrons) and in the Macrocosm (black or white holes, netrina, etc.)
Ïñáôüò Êüóìïò 136, Áüñáôïò Êüóìïò 159, ras - Platon 8, 5) Albert Einstein 9, 6) Pref-
Åðßëïãïò 177, Ðñïò ôïõò ÅðéóôÞìïíåò ü- ace 11, 7) Introduction 17, 8) Predicted 26,
ëïõ ôïõ êüóìïõ 188, Ðñïò ôïõò áíáãíþ- 9) Fourdimensional vibrations 34, 10) Light
óôåò ìïõ 202, Ðßíáêáò åéêüíùí 210, ÊáôÜ- in the Darkness 62, 11) The Scientists' Inspi-
ëïãïò âéâëßùí ôïõ éäßïõ, ìå Üëëåò ó÷åôéêÝò ration and the Mysticists' Experience 76, 12)
ðëçñïöïñßåò 211, Ðßíáêáò ðåñéå÷ïìÝíùí Generalities on the intellectual activity 97,
214. 13) Intellectual walking in our three- dimen-
sional world 113, 14) Visible world 136, 15)
THREEDIMENSIONAL AND FOURDIMEN- Invisible world 159, 16) Epilogue 177, 17) To
SIONAL WORLD the Scientist of all the world 188, 18) To my
CONTENTS Readers 202, 19) Table of Images 210, 20) List
1) Dedication 5, 2) Aim of the book 6, 3) of books of same with other relevant infor-
Where the book was written 7, 4) Pythago- mation 211-213, 21) Table of contents 214.
47 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
ÌÕÓÔÉÊÇ ÄÉÄÁÓÊÁËÉÁ MYSTIC TEACHING, 1st VOLUME
Á´ ÔÏÌÏÓ It is Master Nikolaos A. Margiori's twenty-second work It comprises
three volumes and its first volume was published in 1991.
Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá ôï åéêïóôü äåýôåñï Ýñ- The aim of the first volume of this metaphysical work is the detailed
ãï ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. Ìáñãéù- analysis of its occultistic and mysticist phenomena that flood every man's
ñÞ. Åßíáé ôñßôïìï êáé ï ðñþôïò ôüìïò ôïõ life. An effort is made so that the causes that produce the facts that the
åêäüèçêå ôï 1991. people call psychical phenomena or psycical urgings or psychical diseases
Óêïðüò ôïõ ðñþôïõ ôüìïõ ôïõ ìåôá- etc., as well as the whole metaphysical circuit of the Esoterism, may be
öõóéêïý áõôïý Ýñãïõ åßíáé ç ëåðôïìå- analyzed.
ñÞò áíÜëõóç ôùí áðïêñõöéóôéêþí êáé Thus, man is taught that his life on earth being full of tortures, may be
ìõóôéêéóôéêþí öáéíïìÝíùí ðïõ êáôáêëý- directly a true Paradisiac Life, provided that everyone learns right who is,
æïõí ôçí æùÞ êÜèå Üíèñùðïõ. Ãßíåôáé where he goes, where he comes from and finally, what he must do ex-
ðñïóðÜèåéá íá áíáëõèïýí ôá áßôéá ðïõ ðñïêáëïýí ôá ãåãïíüôá ðïõ ï actly to avoid the bonds of Karma, the results of the retributive justice,
êüóìïò ôá áðïêáëåß øõ÷éêÜ öáéíüìåíá Þ øõ÷éêÝò ðáñïñìÞóåéò Þ øõ÷ï- the behaviour that must have and do in the world of the temporatiness
áññþóôéåò Þ øõ÷áóèÝíåéåò ê.ë.ð., êáèþò êáé üëï ôï ìåôáöõóéêü êýêëù- where all of us live.
ìá ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý. A most detailed analysis of the Divine Laws and of all the districts of the
¸ôóé äéäÜóêåôáé ï Üíèñùðïò ðþò ç æùÞ ðïõ æåé ìå ôüóá âÜóáíá óôç Invisible World that the Occultism searches and thet the Mysticism di-
ãç, ìðïñåß íá ãßíåé åõèýò áìÝóùò ìéá áëçèéíÞ Ðáñáäåßóéá ÆùÞ, áñêåß ï rects, arriving to the holiest points of the Father's Roof The Secret Teach-
êáèÝíáò ìáò óùóôÜ íá ìÜèåé, ðïéïò åßíáé, ðïõ ðçãáßíåé, áðü ðïõ Ýñ÷åôáé ing opens its doors wide to the invisible area of the Omnicreation and
êáé ôÝëïò ôé áêñéâþò ðñÝðåé íá êÜíåé ãéá í' áðïöýãåé ôá äåóìÜ ôïõ ÊÜñ- lets the amazed soul know the place of its origin.
ìá, ô' áðïôåëÝóìáôá ôçò áíôáðïäïôéêÞò äéêáéïóýíçò, ôç óõìðåñéöïñÜ ðïõ Consequently, it enlarges the man's Mind and prepares it to be orien-
ðñÝðåé íá Ý÷åé êáé íá êÜíåé ìÝóá óôïí êüóìï ôçò ðñïóùñéíüôçôáò ðïõ ü- tated beyond the chroniclity, where the Omnicreation is incredibly spread.
ëïé ìáò æïýìå. Man stops being occupied only with the human things of our past world
Ãßíåôáé ëåðôïìåñÝóôáôç áíÜëõóç ôùí Èåßùí Íüìùí êáé üëùí ôùí ðå- and turns to study the eternity, where his spirit-soul belongs.
ñéï÷þí ôïõ ÁïñÜôïõ Êüóìïõ, ðïõ åñåõíÜ ç Áðïêñõöïëïãßá êáé ðïõ ôçí Finally, the Mystic Teaching affords us Occultistic and Mysticist matters
êáôåõèýíåé ï Ìõóôéêéóìüò, öôÜíïíôáò ùò ôá éåñüôåñá óçìåßá ôçò ÓôÝãçò and not something that is mystic and it reveals it. Therefore, when we
ôïõ ÐáôÝñá. Ç ÌõóôéêÞ Äéäáóêáëßá áíïßãåé äéÜðëáôá ôéò èýñåò ðñïò ôçí say Mystic Teaching - the writer says - we do not reveal any mystics, nor
áüñáôç ðåñéï÷Þ ôçò Ðáíäçìéïõñãßáò êáé ãíùñßæåé óôçí Ýêèáìâç øõ÷Þ, we teach any first-revealed and first-discovered unknown things to the
ôïí ôüðï ôçò êáôáãùãÞò ôçò. people. We bring actuality back the esoteric experiences of our fellow-
ÊáôÜ óõíÝðåéá äéåõñýíåé ôï Íïõ ôïõ áíèñþðïõ êáé ôïí åôïéìÜæåé íá men who felt and studied and lived their life with them and in them and
ðñïóáíáôïëéóèåß ðÝñá áðü ôçí ÷ñïíéêüôçôá, üðïõ áðëþíåôáé áðßóôåõ- moreover, we notify all what did not happen, due to the conditions, to
ôá ç Ðáíäçìéïõñãßá. Ï Üíèñùðïò ðáýåé íá áó÷ïëåßôáé ìüíïí ìå ôá áí- the times, but also to the weakness if the conventional and restrictive log-
èñþðéíá ôïõ ðåðåñáóìÝíïõ êüóìïõ ìáò êáé óôñÝöåôáé íá ìåëåôÞóåé ôçí ic, to include and to present them in a modern and understandable word.
áéùíéüôçôá, üðïõ ç ðíåõìáôïøõ÷Þ ôïõ áíÞêåé. Also, the present Mystic Teaching has no relation with any other meta-
Åí ôÝëåé ç ÌõóôéêÞ Äéäáóêáëßá ìáò ðáñÝ÷åé ÁðïêñõöéóôéêÜ êáé Ìõ- physical work. It simply describes the esoteric experiences as the writer
óôéêéóôéêÜ èÝìáôá êáé ü÷é êÜôé ðïõ åßíáé ìõóôéêü êáé ôï áðïêáëýðôåé. Óáí himself has lived them in this life.
ëÝìå ëïéðüí ÌõóôéêÞ Äéäáóêáëßá -ãñÜöåé ï óõããñáöÝáò-, äåí áðïêá- It also writes that the reader does not need to believe before he sees
ëýðôïõìå ìõóôéêÜ, ïýôå äéäÜóêïõìå ðñùôïöáíÝñùôá êáé ðñùôïáðï- with his soul eyes what he himself writes. And that the time will come
êáëõðôüìåíá, Üãíùóôá óôïí êüóìï. ÅðáíáöÝñïõìå óôçí åðéêáéñüôç- when these will be a part of him, and he will also experience them, as the
ôá ôá åóùôåñéêÜ âéþìáôá óõíáíèñþðùí ðïõ Ýíéùóáí êáé ìåëÝôçóáí innumerable fellowmen experienced them from the beginning of the
êáé Ýæçóáí ôç æùÞ ôïõò ì' áõôÜ êáé ìÝóá ó' áõôÜ êáé åðéðëÝïí äçìï- Creation. See also the summaries of the other two volumes.
óéïðïéïýìå üóá äåí Ýôõ÷å ëüãù óõíèçêþí, åðï÷þí, áëëÜ êáé áäõíá-
ìßáò ôçò óõìâáôéêÞò êáé ðåñéïñéóôéêÞò ëïãéêÞò íá ôá óõìðåñéëÜâåé êáé óìùí êáé ôùí ¼íôùí 245, Ìõóôéêéóìüò 255, TION 57, 9 LIFE AND DEATH 71, 10 CONCEP-
íá ôá ðáñïõóéÜóåé ìå óýã÷ñïíï êáé êáôáíïçôü ëüãï. Ðùò ÷ñçóéìïðïéåßôáé ï Ìõóôéêéóìüò 263, Óáéí TION OF LAWFULLNESS 81, 11 THE ORNA-
Åðßóçò ç ðáñïýóá ÌõóôéêÞ Äéäáóêáëßá äåí Ý÷åé ó÷Ýóç ìå êáíÝíá Üë- Æåñìáßí Þ ¢ãéïò Ãåñìáíüò Þ êüìçò Ñïêüôóêõ MENTS OF LIFE 95, 12 THE LAW OF THE RET-
ëï ìåôáöõóéêü Ýñãï. ÁðëÜ ðåñéãñÜöåé ôá åóùôåñéêÜ âéþìáôá üðùò ï (ÌÜë÷ïò) 273, ÁëÝîáíäñïò Êáëëéüóôñï RIBUTIVE JUSTICE "KARMA" 103, 13 THE FREE-
281, Ï Åóùôåñéóìüò åßíáé Áðïêñõöéóìüò êáé DOM OF THE WILL 117, 14 ANGELS AND AR-
óõããñáöÝáò ðñïóùðéêÜ ôá âßùóå ìÝóá óå ôïýôç ôç æùÞ.
Ìõóôéêéóìüò 295, Ï ¢ñ÷ïíôáò Ìé÷áÞë - Ìå- CGHANGELS 127, 15 THE COSMIC GOOD AND
Áêüìá ãñÜöåé üôé ï áíáãíþóôçò äåí ÷ñåéÜæåôáé íá ðéóôÝøåé ðñéí äåé ìå ôáöõóéêü ðïßçìÜ ìïõ 309, Ç ÁéãõðôéáêÞ Ìá- BAD 143, 16 GNOSTICISM 151, 17 HYPNOTISM
ôá ìÜôéá ôçò øõ÷Þò ôïõ áõôÜ ðïõ ï ßäéïò ãñÜöåé. Êáé üôé èá Ýëèåé ç þñá ãåßá. Ôá ÌõóôÞñéá ºóéäáò êáé ¼óéñé 323, Åðß- - SPIRITUALISM 177, 18 WE ARE THE CHILDREN
ðïõ èá ãßíïõí êôÞìá ôïõ êáé èá ôá æåé êé áõôüò, üðùò ôüóïé áìÝôñçôïé óõ- ëïãïò 329, Áðïóõìâïëéóìüò ôïõ åîùöýë- OF LIGHT 203, 19 MORTALITY AND IMMOR-
íÜíèñùðïé, ôá æÞóáí áðü êáôáâïëÞò Äçìéïõñãßáò. ÂëÝðå êáé ôéò ðåñéëÞ- ëïõ 337, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá 343, Êõêëïöïñïý- TALITY 225, 20 MAYA THE IMMORTALITY SE-
øåéò ôùí Üëëùí äýï ôüìùí. íôá ôïõ éäßïõ âéâëßá, ðåñéïäéêÜ, åóùôåñéêü CRET 233, 21 PLATONIC DESCRIPTIONS OF THE
êëåéäß, ìåëÝôåò 344. WORLDS AND OF THE BEINGS 245, 22 MYSTI-
CISM 255, 23 HOW MYSTICISM IS USED 263,
Ç ÌÕÓÔÉÊÇ ÄÉÄÁÓÊÁËÉÁ - Á´ ÔÏÌÏÓ óç 57, ÆùÞ êáé ÈÜíáôïò 71, Áíôßëçøç ôçò MYSTIC TEACHING, 1st VOLUME 24 SAIN GERMAIN OR SAINT GERMAN OR
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ Íïìéìüôçôáò 81, Ôá óôïëßäéá ôçò ÆùÞò 95, CONTENTS COUNT ROKOTSKY (MALH0S) 273, 25 ALEXAN-
ÈåñìÞ ðáñÜêëçóç 5, ÕðïãñáöÞ ôïõ Ï Íüìïò ôçò ÁíôáðïäïôéêÞò Äéêáéïóýíçò A WARM REQUEST 5, B THE WRITER'S SIG- DROS KALIOSTRO 281, 26 ESOTERISM IS OC-
óõããñáöÝá 6, Ç ïíïìáóßá ôïõ Ýñãïõ 7, "ÊÜñìá" 103, Ôï ÅëåõèÝñéï ôçò Âïýëçóçò NATURE 6, C THE NAME OF THE WORK 7, D CULTISM AND MYSTICISM 295, 27 ARCHON
ÓõìâïõëÝò ðñïò ôïí áíáãíþóôç 8, Ðñïá- 117, ¢ããåëïé êáé Áñ÷Üããåëïé 127, Ôï Êïóìé- ADVICES TO THE READER 8, E PRE-DEDICA- MICHAEL - A METAPHYSCIAL POEM OF MINE
öéÝñùóç - Óçìåéþìáôá 9, ÁöéÝñùóç 10, êü Êáëü êáé Êáêü 143, Ãíùóôéêéóìüò 151, Õ- TION - NOTES 9, F DEDICATION 10, 1 THE 309, 28 EGYPTIAN MAGIC ISI'S AND OSIRI'S
Ðñïåôïéìáóßá ôïõ áíáãíþóôç 13, Ðïéïò ï ðíùôéóìüò - Ðíåõìáôéóìüò 177, Åßìáóôå ôá READER'S PREPARATION 13, 2 WHAT IS THE MYSTERIES 323, 29 EPILOGUE 329, 30 DESYM-
óêïðüò ôïõ Ýñãïõ ìïõ áõôïý 17, Ðñüëï- ÐáéäéÜ ôïõ Öùôüò 203, Èíçôüôçôá êáé Áèá- AIM OF THIS WORK OF MINE 17, 3 PREFACE BOLISM OF THE COVER 337, 31 CONTENTS
ãïò 21, ÅéóáãùãÞ 25, Ï Èåüò 27, Ï ¢íèñù- íáóßá 225, ÌÜãéá. Ôï Ìõóôéêü ôçò Áèáíáóß- 21, 4 INTRODUCTION 25, 5 GOD 27, 6 MAN 343, 32 CIRCULATING BOOKS OF SAME, JOUR-
ðïò 37, Ìåôåìøý÷ùóç 47, ÌåôåíóÜñêù- áò 233, ÐëáôùíéêÝò ðåñéãñáöÝò ôùí Êü- 37, 7 METEMPSYCHOSIS 47, 8 REINCARNA- NALS, ESOTERIC KEY, ESSAYS 344.

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 48 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
ÊÁÑÌÁ, Ï ÍÏÌÏÓ KARMA, THE LAW
ÔÇÓ ÁÍÔÁÐÏÄÏÔÉÊÇÓ OF THE RETRIBUTIVE JUSTICE
ÄÉÊÁÉÏÓÕÍÇÓ It is Nikolaos Margiori's twenty-third book that was published for the first
time in 1989.
Åßíáé ôï åéêïóôü ôñßôï âéâëßï ôïõ Íéêï-
Through this book the writer addresses himself to the fellow-men of his
ëÜïõ ÌáñãéùñÞ êáé ðñùôïåêäüèçêå ôï
times and to those who will live in the future, indicating them a way of
1989.
life that will have as its baisis love, based on the sacrifice of what he con-
Ï óõããñáöÝáò ìÝóá áð' áõôü ôï âéâëßï
siders as his conquered rights, though most times, these so-called rights
áðïôåßíåôáé óôïõò óõíáíèñþðïõò ôçò å-
take away the freedom from his alikes.
ðï÷Þò ôïõ êáé óôïõò ìÝëëïíôåò íá æÞ-
At the same time, he gives all the greatness of the responsibilities, of
óïõí, õðïäåéêíýïíôáò Ýíá ôñüðï æùÞò,
every action, word or thought that, though they appear an absolute ap-
ðïõ óáí âÜóç ôïõ, èá Ý÷åé ôçí áãÜðç óôç-
parently agreement with the established things, in depth they take away
ñéæüìåíç óôç èõóßá áõôþí ðïõ èåùñåß êåêôçìÝíá äéêáéþìáôÜ ôïõ êáßôïé ôéò
happiness, joy and progress and delay the evolution of the fellow-man, by
ðéï ðïëëÝò öïñÝò, áõôÜ ôá äÞèåí äéêáéþìáôÜ ôïõ, áöáéñïýí ôçí åëåõèå-
the privation of these holy rights of him, that is caused substantially by
ñßá áðü ôïõò ïìïßïõò ôïõ.
the absence of the JUSTICE.
Ôáõôü÷ñïíá, äßíåé üëï ôï ìÝãåèïò ôùí åõèõíþí, êÜèå ðñÜîçò, ëüãïõ, óêÝ-
Addressing himself to his readers, he appeals them to pay attention to
øçò, ðïõ ðáñ' üëï ðïõ äåß÷íïõí áðüëõôç äÞèåí óõìöùíßá ìå ôá êáèéåñù-
their position in their family, in their society, in their nation and in the w-
ìÝíá, óôï âÜèïò, ðáßñíïõí ôçí åõôõ÷ßá, ôç ÷áñÜ, ôçí ðñüïäï êáé êáèõóôå-
hole human race, to behave as the Law of the Retributive Justice defines,
ñïýí ôçí åîÝëéîç ôïõ óõíáíèñþðïõ, áðü ôç óôÝñçóç áõôþí ôùí éåñþí äé-
from which nothing escapes and that is our irrefutable observer, for every-
êáéùìÜôùí ôïõ, ðïõ ðñïêáëåßôáé ïõóéáóôéêÜ, áðü ôçí áðïõóßá ôçò ÄÉÊÁÉÏ-
thing we think of, we say and we do, because he has his observatory in
ÓÕÍÇÓ.
the depth of our actual being.
Áðåõèõíüìåíïò ðñïò ôïõò áíáãíþóôåò ôïõ, ôïõò êÜíåé Ýêêëçóç íá ðñï-
In this book of many pages the three reconnoitering points that man
óÝîïõí ôçí èÝóç ôïõò ìÝóá óôçí ïéêïãÝíåéÜ ôïõò, ìÝóá óôçí êïéíùíßá ôïõò,
brings to our world at the moment he is born, are analyzed. These are the
óôï Ýèíïò ôïõò êáé ó' üëç ôçí áíèñþðéíç öõëÞ, íá óõìðåñéöÝñïíôáé üðùò
three seeds that accompany the spirit-soul to our threedimensional dis-
ï Íüìïò ôçò ÁíôáðïäïôéêÞò Äéêáéïóýíçò ïñßæåé, áõôüò ðïõ ôßðïôá äåí ôïõ
trict. The seed of the Retributive Justice, the seed of the Free Will and the
äéáöåýãåé êáé ðïõ åßíáé áäéÜøåõóôïò ðáñáôçñçôÞò ìáò, ãéá êÜèå ôé ðïõ óêå-
seed of the Reincarnation. Also, many practical examples of the way in
ðôüìáóôå, ðïõ ëÝìå êáé ðïõ êÜíïõìå, ãéáôß Ý÷åé ôï ðáñáôçñçôÞñéü ôïõ ìÝ-
which Karma functions individually and collectively, are cited
óá óôá âÜèç ôïõ ðñáãìáôéêïý åßíáé ìáò.
It is about a book with rare details and analysises that are for the first
ÌÝóá óôï ðïëõóÝëéäï áõôü Ýñãï áíáëýïíôáé ôá ôñßá áíáãíùñéóôéêÜ óç-
time presented to the wide public so extensively and thoroughly.
ìåßá ðïõ öÝñíåé ìå ôçí ãÝííçóÞ ôïõ ï Üíèñùðïò óôïí êüóìï ìáò. Åßíáé ïé
ôñåéò óðüñïé ðïõ óõíïäåýïõí ôçí ðíåõìáôïøõ÷Þ óôçí ôñéóäéÜóôáôç ðåñéï-
÷Þ ìáò. Ï óðüñïò ôçò ÁíôáðïäïôéêÞò Äéêáéïóýíçò, ï óðüñïò ôçò Åëåýèå- óôéò ïéêïãÝíåéåò 59, Ôï ÊÜñìá áíÜìåóá óå DEDICATION OF THE WORK 6, 6) THE
ñçò Âïýëçóçò êáé ï óðüñïò ôçò ÌåôåíóÜñêùóçò. äõï Þ óå ðåñéóóüôåñåò ïéêïãÝíåéåò 97, Ôï WRITER'S VOICE 7, 7) THE COVER WITH
Åîéóôïñïýíôáé åðßóçò ðïëëÜ ðñáêôéêÜ ðáñáäåßãìáôá ôïõ ôñüðïõ ìå ôïí Áôïìéêü ÊÜñìá éó÷õñüôåñï áðü üëá ôá Üë- MAGISTRATE MICHAEL'S BRIGHT REPRESEN-
ïðïßï ëåéôïõñãåß ôï ÊÜñìá óå áôïìéêü êáé óõëëïãéêü åðßðåäï. ëá ÊÜñìá 145, Öõëåôéêü, õðïöõëåôéêü êáé TATION 9, 8) HOW KARMA WAS WRITTEN BY
åèíéêü ÊÜñìá 193, ÊáñìéêÝò ðáñáóôáôéêÝò THIS BOOK 11, 9) PREFACE 13,10) INTRO-
Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá Ýíá âéâëßï ìå óðÜíéåò ëåðôïìÝñåéåò êáé áíáëýóåéò ðïõ ãéá åéêüíåò 241, Ðùò áðïöåýãïõìå ôï ÊÜñìá DUCTION 19, 11) HOW KARMA OPERATES 25,
ðñþôç öïñÜ ðáñïõóéÜæïíôáé óôï åõñý êïéíü ôüóï åêôåôáìÝíá êáé åìðåñé- 293, ÓêÝøåéò êáé óõëëïãéóìïß ðÜíù óôï 12) THE OPPOSITIONS AND KARMA 49, 13)
óôáôùìÝíá. ÊÜñìá 319, Åðßëïãïò 343, Êõêëïöïñïýíôá KARMA IN FAMILIES 59, 14) KARMA BE-
ôïõ ßäéïõ âéâëßá 369. TWEEN TWO OR MORE FAMILIES 97, 15) THE
INDIVIDUAL KARMA IS STRONGER THAN ANY
ÊÁÑÌÁ Ï ÍÏÌÏÓ ÔÇÓ ãïõ 6, Ç öùíÞ ôïõ óõããñáöÝá 7, Ôï åîþ- KARMA, THE LAW OTHER KARMA 145, 16) RACIAL, SUBRACIAL
ÁÍÔÁÐÏÄÏÔÉÊÇÓ ÄÉÊÁÉÏÓÕÍÇÓ öõëëï ìå ôç ëáìðñïðáñÜóôáóç ôïõ ¢ñ÷ï- OF THE RETRIBUTIVE JUSTICE AND NATIONAL KARMA 193, 17) KARMIC REP-
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ íôá Ìé÷áÞë 9, Ðùò ãñÜöôçêå ôï ÊÜñìá ìå CONTENTS RESENTATIVE IMAGES 241, 18) HOW WE
ÈåñìÞ ðáñÜêëçóç 4, ÅðéìÝëåéá ôïõ Ýñ- ôïýôï ôï âéâëßï 11, Ðñüëïãïò 13, Åéóáãù- 1) WARM REQUEST 4, 2) ATTENDANCE AVOID KARMA 293, 19) THOUGHTS AND RE-
ãïõ 4, ÕðïãñáöÞ ôïõ óõããñáöÝá 5, Ôï å- ãÞ 19, Ðùò ëåéôïõñãåß ôï ÊÜñìá 25, Ïé Á- OF THE WORK 4, 3) THE WRITER'S SIGNA- FLECTIONS ON KARMA 319, 20) EPILOGUE
îþöõëëï ôïõ âéâëßïõ 5, ÁöéÝñùóç ôïõ Ýñ- íôéèÝóåéò êáé ôï ÊÜñìá 49, Ôï ÊÜñìá ìÝóá TURE 5, 4) THE COVER OF THE BOOK 5, 5) 343, 21) CIRCULATING BOOKS OF SAME 369.

n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
REINCARNATION
This is n. Margiori's twentieth fourth book and it was published in
1990. The writer's aim is, through the pages of this book, to let know
every fellow-man, that life is not what we see exoterically, but it pos-
sesses within it another higher and different life, that does not know
death or disappearance, but it coincides with the imperichableness
and aims to the perfection that one day will definitely reach.
It analyzes in thorough detail, the three basical laws that rule the
whole Creation: the Free Will, Karma and epsecially Reincarnation or
the continual incorporation or the unceasing incarnation of the spir-
it-souls, that get from their every rebirth the experience of our form-
ing world, which consists in the contrasts that prevail in our dimen-
sion. Only by the Reincarnation all the esoteric and exoteric problems
are solved, otherwise a deep darkness predominates in this formlife.
It suggests that when man turnss into himself, when he introspects,
when he wishes to know the truth, he will suddenly see that the out-
er vanity surrounding him. is a delusion that blinds him, by the shine
of the truth he seeks. As soon as he sets aside the thick veil that dark-
ens him, as soon as he turns to the spiritual things, as soon as he leaves
the obstacles of his Mind, he immediately sees the truth and recog-
nizes an eternal and immortal self, a blessed son of the Supreme Fa-
ther. This fine dream becomes real only by the acceptance of the rein-
carnation-rebirth.

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 49 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

 ÌÅÔÅÍÓÁÑÊÙÓÇ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
Óçìåéþóåéò ðñï ôïõ ðñïëüãïõ 5, Ðñü-
ëïãïò 11, ÅéóáãùãÞ 13, Ðñïóáíáôïëéóìüò
êáé êáôáôüðéóç ôïõ áíáãíþóôç 17, Ôé Ìå-
ôåíóáñêþíåôáé êáé ðùò Ìåôåíóáñêþíåôáé
27, Ðïéïò ï óêïðüò ôçò ÌåôåíóÜñêùóçò
43, Áíôéìá÷ßá ôùí ôñéþí ìåãÜëùí Íüìùí,
ÊÜñìá - ÌåôåíóÜñêùóç - Åëåýèåñç Âïý-
ëçóç 57, Ç Öéëïóïößá ôïõ Íüìïõ ôçò Ìå-
ôåíóÜñêùóçò 71, Ôé äåí Ìåôåíóáñêþíåôáé
83, Ìåôåíóáñêþóåéò ôùí ßäéùí ðíåõìá-
ôïøõ÷þí óôéò ßäéåò ïéêïãÝíåéåò 97, Ìåôåí-
óÜñêùóç êáé Ìåôåìøý÷ùóç 111, Ç Áðï-
ëýôñùóç ôùí ðíåõìáôïøõ÷þí áðü ôéò
Ìåôåíóáñêþóåéò ôïõò 125, Ìåôåíóáñêù-
ôéêÞ êÜèïäïò ôùí ÄéäáóêÜëùí ôçò Óïößáò
139, ÌåãÜëïé ÁðïóôáëìÝíïé ôïõ Èåïý ãéá
íá äéáöùôßóïõí ôçí áíèñùðüôçôá 151,
Íýîåéò óôá éåñÜ âéâëßá ãéá ôç ÌåôåíóÜñ-
êùóç 181, Ï Íüìïò ôçò ÐáíóõìðáíôéêÞò
ÁíáãÝííçóçò êáé åðáíáûëïðïßçóçò ôùí
Êüóìùí êáé ôùí ¼íôùí 207, ÅîáêñéâùìÝ-
íåò Ìåôåíóáñêþóåéò 223, ÅîáêñéâùìÝíåò
ÕëïðïéÞóåéò 265, Åðßëïãïò 281, Ðåñéå÷ü-
ìåíá 283, Êõêëïöïñïýíôá ôïõ ßäéïõ âé-
âëßá, ðåñéïäéêÜ, ìåëÝôåò, Åóùôåñéêü Êëåé-
äß 284.
REINCARNATION
CONTENTS
1. NOTES BEFORE THE PREFACE 5-9,
2. PREFACE 11, 3. INTRODUCTION 13, 4.
READER'S ORIENTATION AND ADVISING 17,
5. WHAT AND HOW IS REINCARNATED 27,
6. WHAT IS THE AIM OF REINCARNATION
43, 7. OPPOSITION OF THE THREE GREAT
n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
ÌÅÔÅÍÓÁÑÊÙÓÇ
Åßíáé ôï åéêïóôü ôÝôáñôï âéâëßï ôïõ Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ êáé ðñùôïåêäüèçêå
ôï 1990. Óêïðüò ôïõ óõããñáöÝá åßíáé ìÝóá áðü ôéò óåëßäåò ôïõ åí ëüãù
âéâëßïõ íá öÝñåé óôçí ãíþóç ôïõ êÜèå óõíáíèñþðïõ, ðùò ç æùÞ äåí åß-
íáé üðùò åîùôåñéêÜ ôç âëÝðïõìå, áëëÜ êáôÝ÷åé ìÝóá ôçò Üëëç æùÞ áíþ-
ôåñç êáé äéáöïñåôéêÞ, ðïõ äåí ãíùñßæåé èÜíáôï êáé åîáöÜíéóç, ðáñÜ óõ-
ìðßðôåé ìå ôçí áöèáñóßá êáé ôåßíåé ðñïò ôçí ôåëåéüôçôá ðïõ êÜðïôå ïðùó-
äÞðïôå èá öèÜóåé.
Áíáëýåé ìå âáèýôáôç ëåðôïìÝñåéá ôïõò ôñåéò âáóéêïýò íüìïõò ðïõ äéÝðïõí
Üðáóá ôçí Äçìéïõñãßá. Ôçí Åëåýèåñç Âïýëçóç, ôï ÊÜñìá êáé åéäéêüôåñá ôçí Ìå-
ôåíóÜñêùóç Þ ôçí óõíå÷Þ åíóùìÜôùóç Þ ôçí áäéÜêïðç óÜñêùóç ôùí ðíåõìá-
ôïøõ÷þí, ðïõ ðáßñíïõí áðü êÜèå áíáãÝííçóÞ ôïõò ôçí åìðåéñßá ôïõ ìïñöéêïý
ìáò êüóìïõ, ðïõ óõíßóôáôáé óôéò áíôéèÝóåéò ðïõ åðéêñáôïýí óôçí äéÜóôáóÞ ìáò. Ìüíïí ìå ôçí ÌåôåíóÜñêùóç
ëýíïíôáé üëá ôá åóùôåñéêÜ êáé åîùôåñéêÜ ðñïâëÞìáôá, áëëéþò óêïôÜäé âáèý åðéêñáôåß óå ôïýôç ôçí ìïñöïæù-
Þ üðùò åìðåñéóôáôùìÝíá áðïäåéêíýåôáé áð' üëåò ôéò áðüøåéò ìÝóá óôéò óåëßäåò ôïõ Ýñãïõ ôïõ óõããñáöÝá.
Óõìâïõëåýåé üôé üôáí åóùóôñáöåß ï Üíèñùðïò, üôáí åíäïóêïðÞóåé, üôáí áñ÷ßóåé íá èÝëåé íá ãíùñßóåé ôçí á-
ëÞèåéá, áéöíßäéá èá äåé ðùò ç åîþôåñç ìáôáéüôçôá ðïõ ôïí êõêëþíåé, åßíáé ìéá øåõäáßóèçóç ðïõ ôïí ôõöëþíåé,
áðü ôçí ëÜìøç ôçò áëÞèåéáò, áõôÞò ðïõ áíáæçôåß. Ìüëéò ðáñáìåñßóåé ôï ÷ïíôñü ðÝðëï ðïõ ôïí óêïôéäéÜæåé, ìü-
ëéò óôñáöåß ðñïò ôá ðíåõìáôéêÜ, ìüëéò áöÞóåé ôïõ Íïõ ôïõ ôá åìðüäéá, áìÝóùò âëÝðåé ôçí áëÞèåéá êáé áíáãíù-
ñßæåé Ýíáí åáõôü, áéþíéï êáé áèÜíáôï, åõëïãçìÝíï ãéï ôïõ ¾øéóôïõ ÐáôÝñá. Áõôü ôï ùñáßï üíåéñï ãßíåôáé ðñáã-
ìáôéêüôçôá ìüíïí ìå ôçí áíáãíþñéóç ôçò ìåôåíóÜñêùóçò - áíáãÝííçóçò.
LAWS KARMA - REINCARNATION - FREE SPIRIT-SOULS FROM THEIR REINCARNA- SANCE AND REMATERIALIZATIION OF THE
WILL 57, 8. THE REINCARNATION LAW PHI- TIONS 125, 13. THE WISDOM MASTERS' WORLDS AND OF THE BEINGS 207, 17. AS-
LOSOPHY 71, 9. WHAT IS NOR REINCAR- REINCARNATING DESCENT 139, 14. THE CERTAINED REINCARNATIONS 223, 18. AS-
NATED 83, 10. REINCARNATIONS OF THE GREAT ENVOYS OF GOD FOR THE ENLIGHT- CERTAINED MATERIALIZATIONS 265, 19.
SAME SPIRIT-SOULS IN THE SAME FAMILIES MENT OF HUMANITY 151, 15. HINTS IN THE EPILOGUE 281, 20. CONTENTS 283, 21.
97, 11. REINCARNATION AND METEMPSY- HOLY BOOKS FOR REINCARNATION 181, 16. CIRCULATING BOOKS BY SAME, JOURNALS,
CHOSIS 111, 12. THE DELIVERANCE OF THE THE LAW OF THE OMNIUNIVERSAL RENAIS- ESOTERIC KEY, ESSAYS 284.

ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ÌÅ ÄÉ×ÙÓ ÖÁÑÌÁÊÁ
×ÅÉÑÏÐËÁÓÔÉÊÇ
Á´ ÔÏÌÏÓ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
Èåüò, ôý÷á áãáèÜ 6, ÁöéÝñùóç ôïõ Ýñ-
ãïõ 8, ÈåñìÞ ðáñÜêëçóç 7, ÅðéìÝëåéá ôïõ
Ýñãïõ 7, Óêïðüò ôïõ Ýñãïõ ìïõ áõôïý 9,
Ï ôßôëïò ôïõ âéâëßïõ 11, ÈåñáðåõôéêÜ Üë-
ëá Ýñãá ôïõ óõããñáöÝá 11, Ðñüëïãïò 13,
ÅéóáãùãÞ 19, Ëßãá ëüãéá ãéá ôç ÌÜëáîç 23,
Ëßãá ëüãéá ãéá ôçí Äáêôõëïðßåóç (ÓéÜôóïõ)
29, Ëßãá ëüãéá ãéá ôçí Äáêôõëïêôýðçóç (Í.
ÌáñãéùñÞò) 35, ÓõìðåñÜóìáôá 41, Ôá ôÝó-
óåñá ÓåìéíÜñéá ÓéÜôóïõ óôçí ÁèÞíá 47,
ÐÑÙÔÏ ÓÅÌÉÍÁÑÉÏ ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ: ÌåëÝôç ðñþ-
ôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 53, Ôåý÷ïò ðñþôï 55, Ðïéåò
áññþóôéåò äéäÜ÷ôçêáí 57, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá ôçò
ðñþôçò ìåëÝôçò 61, Ðñüëïãïò ðñþôïõ óå-
ìéíáñßïõ ÓéÜôóïõ 63, ÅéóáãùãÞ ðñþôïõ óå-
ìéíáñßïõ ÓéÜôóïõ 67, ÐåëìáôéêÜ Áõëïáíïßã-
ìáôá öñáãìÝíá ãéá ôéò åêñïÝò 71, Ôá ìá-
ãíçôéêÜ ñåõóôÜ äéåéóäýïõí óôï óþìá ôïõ
èåñáðåõüìåíïõ 75, Ôñüðïò ÷ñçóéìïðïßç-
óçò ôùí äáêôýëùí êáôÜ ôçí þñá ôçò èå-
ñáðåßáò 79, Áõôïèåñáðåßá êáé Åôåñïèåñá-
ðåßá 89, ÈåùñçôéêÞ êáé ðñáêôéêÞ ðáñïõóß-
áóç ìåñéêþí áíáöåñèÝíôùí ãéá èåñáðåßá
áóèåíåéþí 95, Óêéôóïðáñïõóßáóç ôùí ðá-
ëáìþí êáôÜ ôçí èåñáðåõôéêÞ ÷ñçóéìïðïß-
çóÞ ôïõò 127, Óêéôóïðáñïõóßáóç ôùí ðåë-
ìÜôùí êáé óçìåßùí ðïõ êáôáëÞãïõí. Ìå-
óçìâñéíïß áýëáêåò 133, Óå ðïéá óçìåßá ôïõ
óþìáôïò èá âÜëïõìå ôá äÜêôõëÜ ìáò ãéá
íá èåñáðåýóïõìå êÜðïéá áññþóôéá 139,
Ôåý÷ïò äåýôåñï ðñþôçò ìåëÝôçò 147, Åé-
êüíåò ôïõ äåýôåñïõ ôåý÷ïõò ôçò ðñþôçò
ìåëÝôçò ôïõ ðñþôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ ÓéÜ-
ôóïõ151, Åðßëïãïò äåýôåñïõ ôåý÷ïõò
ðñþôçò ìåëÝôçò ðñþôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 183,
Óå ðïéá êåöÜëáéá ðáñïõóéÜæïíôáé äéÜöï-
ñåò èåñáðåõüìåíåò áðü ôç ÓéÜôóïõ áññþ-
óôéåò 187, Õðåýèõíïé ðáñïõóßáóçò üëçò
ôçò ðñþôçò ìåëÝôçò ÓéÜôóïõ 190, ÄÅÕÔÅÑÏ
ÓÅÌÉÍÁÑÉÏ ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ: ÌåëÝôç äåýôåñïõ óå-
ìéíáñßïõ, ôåý÷ïò ðñþôï, äåýôåñçò ìåëÝ-
ôçò 191, ÐåñéãñáöÞ êáé êáèïäÞãçóç ãéá ôç
èåñáðåßá ôùí ðñþôùí ôåóóÜñùí ïìÜäùí
- óõíïìïôáîéþí ôùí áóèåíåéþí ôïõ êåöá-
ëéïý êáé ðñïóþðïõ, ôïõ åìðñüóèéïõ ìÝ-
ñïõò ôïõ ëáéìïý êáé ôùí ðëÜãéùí ôïõ ëáé-
ìïý ðåñéï÷þí 195, Ïé åßêïóé ôñåéò ïìÜäåò
Þ óõíïìïôáîßåò ôùí áóèåíåéþí, ðïõ åðß-
óçìá ãéáôñåýåé ç Äáêôõëïèåñáðåýôñá ÓéÜ-
ôóïõ 196, Ó÷Ýóç ôùí ïìáäïðïéçìÝíùí êáé
ôùí Åîùïìáäéêþí óôç èåñáðåßá ôïõò 197,
Ðñüëïãïò ôïõ ðñþôïõ ôåý÷ïõò, ôçò äåý-
ôåñçò ìåëÝôçò, ôïõ äåýôåñïõ Öèéíïðùñé-
íïý óåìéíáñßïõ ÓéÜôóïõ 199, ÅéóáãùãÞ ôçò
äåýôåñçò ìåëÝôçò ôïõ äåýôåñïõ óåìéíáñß-
ïõ 201, ÏìáäïêáôÜôáîç ôùí áóèåíåéþí
ôïõ áíèñþðïõ óå åßêïóé ôñåéò éäéïèåñáðåõ-
ôéêïýò êëÜäïõò 203, Ðñþôç ÏìÜäá - Óõíï-
ìïôáîßá áóèåíåéþí - êåöÜëé 223, Äåýôåñç
ÏìÜäá - Óõíïìïôáîßá áóèåíåéþí - ðñïóþ-
ðïõ 234, Ôñßôç ÏìÜäá - Óõíïìïôáîßá áóèå-
íåéþí åìðñïóèßïõ ìÝñïõò ôïõ ëáéìïý 241,
ÔÝôáñôç ÏìÜäá - Óõíïìïôáîßá áóèåíåéþí
ðëÜãéá ðåñéï÷Þò ôïõ ëáéìïý 246, Áíáêåöá-
ëáßùóç ôùí áóèåíåéþí ôïõ ðñþôïõ ôåý-
÷ïõò, ôçò äåýôåñçò ìåëÝôçò - óåìéíáñßïõ
251, Ìéá õðåíèýìéóç ÷ñÞóéìç ãéá ôï èåñá-
ðåõôéêü óáò Ýñãï 255, Åðßëïãïò ðñþôïõ
ôåý÷ïõò äåýôåñçò ìåëÝôçò 257, Õðåýèõíïé
ðáñïõóßáóçò üëçò ôçò äåýôåñçò ìåëÝôçò
259, Åõ÷áñéóôÞñéï 260, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá ðñþ-
ôïõ ôåý÷ïõò, äåýôåñçò ìåëÝôçò, öèéíïðù-
ñéíïý óåìéíáñßïõ ÓéÜôóïõ óôçí ÁèÞíá 261,
Ôåý÷ïò äåýôåñï äåýôåñçò ìåëÝôçò 263,
Óêéôóïðáñïõóßáóç ôùí óçìåßùí åðß ôùí ï-
ðïßùí èá åöáñìüóïõìå ôçí ÓéÜôóïõ, ôá
ìÝñç ðïõ èá èåñáðåõèïýí 265, Åéêüíåò
êáé ëåæÜíôåò êáôÜ áñéèìçôéêÞ óåéñÜ, ÊåöÜ-
ëé 269, Åéêüíåò êáé ëåæÜíôåò êáôÜ áñéèìç-
ôéêÞ óåéñÜ, Ðñüóùðï 270, Åéêüíåò êáé ëåæÜ-
íôåò êáôÜ áñéèìçôéêÞ óåéñÜ, åìðñïóèßïõ
óõóôÞìáôïò ëáéìïý 271, Åéêüíåò êáé ëåæÜ-
íôåò êáôÜ áñéèìçôéêÞ óåéñÜ ôùí ðëáãßùí
ôïõ ëáéìïý 272, Óçìåßá èåñáðåõôéêÜ ãéá
ôï êåöÜëé 275, Óçìåßá èåñáðåõôéêÜ ãéá ôï
ðñüóùðï 275, Óêßôóá êåöáëéïý 277, Óêß-
ôóá ðñïóþðïõ 287, Óêßôóá á) åìðñïóèßïõ
ìÝñïõò ôïõ ëáéìïý êáé â) ðëÜãéá ðåñéï÷Þ
ôïõ ëáéìïý 295, Õðåýèõíïé ðáñïõóßáóçò
305, Åõ÷áñéóôÞñéï 306, ÓõíïðôéêÜ 307, Á-
óèÝíåéåò óôï êåöÜëé 309, ÁóèÝíåéåò óôï
ðñüóùðï 311, ÁóèÝíåéåò óôï åìðñüóèéï
óýóôçìá ôïõ ëáéìïý 313, ÁóèÝíåéåò ôùí
ðëáãßùí ðåñéï÷þí ôïõ ëáéìïý 315, Ðåñéå-
÷üìåíá ôïõ äåýôåñïõ ôåý÷ïõò, ôçò äåýôå-
ñçò ìåëÝôçò ôïõ öèéíïðùñéíïý óåìéíáñß-
ïõ ÓéÜôóïõ 317, ÔÑÉÔÏ ÓÅÌÉÍÁÑÉÏ ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ:
ÌåëÝôç ôñßôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 319, Ôåý÷ïò
ðñþôï ôïõ ôñßôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ ÓéÜôóïõ 321,
Ðñüëïãïò ôïõ ôñßôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 323, Åé-
óáãùãÞ ôïõ ôñßôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 325, ÐÝìðôç
ïìÜäá áóèåíåéþí Óéáôóïý 327, ¸êôç ïìÜ-
äá áóèåíåéþí Óéáôóïý 335, ¸âäïìç ïìÜäá
áóèåíåéþí Óéáôóïý 337, ¼ãäïç ïìÜäá á-
óèåíåéþí Óéáôóïý 340, ¸íáôç ïìÜäá áóèå-
íåéþí Óéáôóïý 343, Åðßëïãïò ìåëÝôçò ôñß-
ôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ ÷åéìåñéíïý ÓéÜôóïõ 347, Ïé
óõíôåëÝóáíôåò óôçí ðáñïõóßáóç ôïýôçò
ôçò ìåëÝôçò 351, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá ðñþôïõ
ôåý÷ïõò ôçò ôñßôçò ìåëÝôçò ôïõ ôñßôïõ óå-
ìéíáñßïõ ÓéÜôóïõ 352, Ôåý÷ïò äåýôåñï, ôñß-
ôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ ÓéÜôóïõ óôçí ÁèÞíá 353,
Áðáñ÷Þ äåýôåñïõ ôåý÷ïõò ôïõ ôñßôïõ óå-
ìéíáñßïõ ìå óêßôóï, ôïõ óõããñáöÝá, ôçí
ðáñïõóßá ôçò áñéóôåñÞò ðáëÜìçò 355, Óêß-
ôóá ãéá ôçí ÐÝìðôç ïìÜäá 357, Óêßôóá ãéá
ôçí ¸êôç ïìÜäá ôùí áóèåíåéþí ôçò Óéá-
ôóïý 364, Óêßôóá ãéá ôçí ¸âäïìç ïìÜäá á-
óèåíåéþí Óéáôóïý 368, Óêßôóá ãéá ôçí ¼ãäï-
ç ïìÜäá áóèåíåéþí Óéáôóïý 372, Ìéá äéåõ-
êñßíéóç ðïõ ðåñéÝ÷åôáé ìÝóá óôï êåöÜëáéï
ãéá ôéò áññþóôéåò ôçò üãäïçò ïìÜäáò 376,
Óêßôóá ãéá ôéò áññþóôéåò ôçò ÅíÜôçò ïìÜäáò
379, Åðßëïãïò ôïõ äåýôåñïõ ôåý÷ïõò ôçò
ôñßôçò ìåëÝôçò ôïõ ÷åéìåñéíïý óåìéíáñßïõ
385, Ïé óõíôåëÝóáíôåò óôçí ðáñïõóßáóç
387, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá äåýôåñïõ ôåý÷ïõò, ôñß-
ôçò ìåëÝôçò, ôñßôïõ óåìéí. 388, ÔÅÔÁÑÔÏ
ÓÅÌÉÍÁÑÉÏ ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ: ÌåëÝôç ôïõ ôÝôáñôïõ
óåìéíáñßïõ Óéáôóïý 389, Ðñþôï ôåý÷ïò ôïõ
áíïéîéÜôéêïõ 1990 óåìéíáñßïõ Óéáôóïý 391,
Ðñüëïãïò ôïõ ðñþôïõ ôåý÷ïõò ôçò ìåëÝ-
ôçò, ôïõ ôÝôáñôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ Óéáôóïý 393,
ÅéóáãùãÞ ôïõ ðñþôïõ ôåý÷ïõò ôçò ìåëÝ-
ôçò ôïõ ôÝôáñôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 395, Ôé èá äé-
äá÷èïýìå ó' áõôü ôï áíïéîéÜôéêï óåìéíÜñéï
ôçò Óéáôóïý 397, ÓðïíäõëéêÞ ÓôÞëç 399,
Øõ÷éêÞ êáé óùìáôéêÞ äéÜèåóç êáôÜ ôçí þ-
ñá ôçò Åóùèåñáðåßáò 401, ÄÝêáôç ïìÜäá
áóèåíåéþí ÓéÜôóïõ 403, ÅíäÝêáôç ïìÜäá
áóèåíåéþí ÓéÜôóïõ 406, ÄùäÝêáôç ïìÜäá
áóèåíåéþí ÓéÜôóïõ 407, ÄÝêáôç Ôñßôç ïìÜ-
äá áóèåíåéþí ÓéÜôóïõ 408, ÄÝêáôç ôÝôáñ-
ôç ïìÜäá áóèåíåéþí ÓéÜôóïõ 411, ÄÝêáôç

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 50 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

ÐÝìðôç ïìÜäá áóèåíåéþí ÓéÜôóïõ 412,
ÓêÝøåéò ðÜíù óôá ðñïçãïýìåíá 413, Åðß-
ëïãïò ðñþôïõ ôåý÷ïõò ôÝôáñôçò ìåëÝôçò
ôÝôáñôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ ÓéÜôóïõ 415, Åõ÷áñé-
óôÞñéá 417, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá ôïõ ðñþôïõ ôåý-
÷ïõò ôçò ôÝôáñôçò ìåëÝôçò ôïõ ôÝôáñôïõ
óåìéíáñßïõ ÓéÜôóïõ 418, Äåýôåñï ôåý÷ïò
ôçò ôÝôáñôçò ìåëÝôçò ôïõ ôÝôáñôïõ óåìé-
íáñßïõ ÓéÜôóïõ ôçò ¢íïéîçò ôïõ 1990 419,
Ç ÓðïíäõëéêÞ ÓôÞëç óáí ïäçãüò ôïõ äåý-
ôåñïõ ôåý÷ïõò ôçò ôÝôáñôçò ìåëÝôçò 421,
Ðñïëåãüìåíá ôïõ äåýôåñïõ ôåý÷ïõò ôçò
ôÝôáñôçò ìåëÝôçò 423, ÄÝêáôç ïìÜäá á-
óèåíåéþí ìå åéêüíåò - óêßôóá êáé ëåæÜíôåò
425, Ïé åðéäñÜóåéò ôùí ôñéÜíôá ôñéþí óðïí-
äýëùí åðß ôùí ïñãÜíùí êáé åðß üëïõ ôïõ
óþìáôïò 432, ÄÝêáôç ïìÜäá áóèåíåéþí Å-
óùùìïðëáôéêÞ ðåñéï÷Þ ìå åéêüíåò êáé ëå-
æÜíôåò ðñïò êáôáíüçóç ôçò èåñáðåßáò
ôïõò ìå ÓéÜôóïõ 437, ÅíäÝêáôç ïìÜäá á-
óèåíåéþí Óéáôóïý êáé ç èåñáðåßá ôïõò 440,
ÄùäÝêáôç ïìÜäá áóèåíåéþí Óéáôóïý êáé ç
èåñáðåßá ôïõò 446, ÄÝêáôç Ôñßôç ïìÜäá á-
óèåíåéþí Óéáôóïý êáé ç èåñáðåßá ôïõò 448,
ÄÝêáôç ôÝôáñôç ïìÜäá áóèåíåéþí Óéáôóïý
êáé ç èåñáðåßá ôïõò 454, ÄÝêáôç ÐÝìðôç
ïìÜäá áóèåíåéþí Óéáôóïý êáé ç èåñáðåßá
ôïõò 457, Åðßëïãïò äåýôåñïõ ôåý÷ïõò ôçò
ôÝôáñôçò ìåëÝôçò ôïõ ôÝôáñôïõ óåìéíáñß-
ïõ Óéáôóïý 459, Åõ÷áñéóôÞñéï ãéá ôïõò âï-
çèÞóáíôåò óôçí Ýêäïóç ôçò ôÝôáñôçò ìå-
ëÝôçò ôïõ ôÝôáñôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ Óéáôóïý
óôçí ÁèÞíá 461, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá ôïõ äåýôå-
ñïõ ôåý÷ïõò ôçò ôÝôáñôçò ìåëÝôçò ôïõ ôÝ-
ôáñôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ Óéáôóïý óôçí ÁèÞíá
462, Ðßíáêáò áóèåíåéþí êáé ç èåñáðåßá
ôïõò ìå ÓéÜôóïõ, ðïõ óõìðåñéëáìâÜíïíôáé
óôï Ýñãï ìïõ áõôü ôçò èåñáðåõôéêÞò ìå
äß÷ùò öÜñìáêá - ÷åéñïðëáóôéêÞ 463, Ï Êáñ-
êßíïò áðü åóùôåñéêÞò êáé ìåôáöõóéêÞò
ðëåõñÜò 475, Ç åéêüíá ôïõ åîùöýëëïõ,
ÊÝíôáõñïò ï ×åßñùíáò 477, Öùôïãñáößåò
ðïõ ëÞöèçêáí êáôÜ ôçí äéÜñêåéá ôçò äéäá-
óêáëßáò, óôá ôÝóóåñá óåìéíÜñéá Óéáôóïý
479, Ðßíáêáò óêßôóùí êáé ôé ðáñïõóéÜæåé Ý-
êáóôï 497, ÓõìðåñÜóìáôá 511, Åðßëïãïò
515, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá 523, ÊáôÜëïãïé êõêëï-
öïñïýíôùí âéâëßùí, ìåëåôþí êáé äéÜöï-
ñùí Üëëùí Ýñãùí ôïõ ßäéïõ óõããñáöÝá
531.
CHIROPLASTIC TERAPEUTICS, 1st VOLUME
OF CONTENTS
1) GOD, LUCK GOOD 6, 2) DEDICATION OF
THE WORK 8, 3) AIM OF THIS WORK OF MINE
9, 4) WARM REQUEST 7, 5) ATTENDANCE OF
THE WORK 7, 6) THE TITLE OF THE BOOK 11,
7) THE WRITER'S THERAPEUTICAL OTHER
WORKS 11, 8) PREFACE 13, 9) INTRODUC-
TION 19, 10) A FEW WORDS ABOUT MAS-
SAGING 23, 11) A FEW WORDS ABOUT FIN-
GERPRESSING (SIATSU) 29, 12) A FEW
WORDS ABOUT FINGERTAPPING (N MAR-
GIORIS) 35, 13) CONCLUSIONS 41, 14) THE
FOUR SEMINARS OF SIATSU IN ATHENS 47,
FIRST SEMINAR OF SIATSU, 15) STUDY OF THE
FIRST SEMINAR 53, 16) FIRST ISSUE 55 , 17)
WHICH DISEASES WERE TAUGHT 57, 18) CON-
TENTS OF THE FIRST ESSAY 61, 19) PREFACE
OF THE FIRST SEMINAR OF SIATSU 63, 20) IN-
TRODUCTION OF THE FIRST SEMINAR OF SIAT-
SU 67, 21) PELMATIC PIPE-OPENINGS
BLOCKED FOR THE FLOWINGS OUT 71, 22)
THE MAGNETIC FLUIDS PENETRATE THE
CURED BODY 75, 23) WAY OF USING THE
FINGERS DURING THERAPY 79, 24) SELF-
n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
×ÅÉÑÏÐËÁÓÔÉÊÇ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ Á´ ÔÏÌÏÓ
Åßíáé ôï åéêïóôü ðÝìðôï Ýñãï ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ. Åßíáé ôñß-
ôïìï êáé ï ðñþôïò ôïõ ôüìïò åêäüèçêå ôï 1990.
Ôï Ôñßôïìï êáé Üìåóá ðñáêôéêü áõôü óýããñáììá âáöôßóôçêå ×åéñïðëáóôéêÞ Èå-
ñáðåõôéêÞ ÷ùñßò öÜñìáêá ãéá íá õðïäçëþóåé ôçí èåñáðåßá ìüíïí ìå öõóéêÜ ìÝ-
óá êáé äç ìå ìéá ðëåéÜäá èåñáðåõôéêþí óõóôçìÜôùí, åßôå áõôüíïìá åßôå óå ìß-
îç ìåôáîý ôïõò, ðïõ õðÜãïíôáé óôçí ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ, üðùò åßíáé: ç ÓéÜ-
ôóïõ (ÉáðùíéêÞ ôå÷íéêÞ ðïõ óçìáßíåé äáêôõëïðßåóç), ç Áñ÷áßá ÅëëçíéêÞ Áóêëç-
ðéáêÞ ÌÜëáîç (Áóêëçðéåßá - ÁìöéáñÜåéá), ç Äáêôõëïêôýðçóç (ìÝèïäïò ÍéêïëÜ-
ïõ ÌáñãéùñÞ), ç õðïâïëÞ, ç Åãêïßìçóç (óÞìåñá ïíïìÜæåôáé õðíùôéóìüò), ç Ñå-
öëåîïëïãßá, ç åðßäñáóç åðß ôùí ôñéáíôáôñéþí óðïíäýëùí, ç ÓôáôéêÞ Èåñáðåõ-
ôéêÞ êáé ðÜñá ðïëëþí Üëëùí ìåèüäùí öõóéêÞò - áöÜñìáêçò èåñáðåõôéêÞò ðïõ
åîáóêïýíôáé ìå ãõìíÜ ÷Ýñéá, ìå ãíþóç, åìðåéñßá êáé ðÜíù áð' üëá ìå ÓõãêÝíôñùóç.
Ðéï óõãêåêñéìÝíá ôï ôñßôïìï áõôü Ýñãï åßíáé áðïôÝëåóìá ìéáò óåéñÜò 11 ôñéÞìåñùí Óåìéíáñßùí ÁöÜñìáêçò
ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò ðïõ äßäáîå ï ÄÜóêáëïò Íéêüëáïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò óôçí Ýäñá ôïõ óôï Ïìáêïåßï Áèçíþí. Ó' áõôÜ Ý-
ãéíå åêôåíÞò - åîáíôëçôéêÞ, èåùñçôéêÞ êáé ðñáêôéêÞ, áíÜëõóç ôùí âáóéêüôåñùí èåñáðåõôéêþí ìåèüäùí êáé ðñù-
ôßóôùò ôçò ÓéÜôóïõ. Ôçí ÷þñéóå óå 23 ïìÜäåò ðïõ áíôéðñïóùðåýïõí ôéò 186 ðéï äéáäåäïìÝíåò áóèÝíåéåò êáé ì'
áõôü ôïí ôñüðï ï üðïéïò åíäéáöåñüìåíïò Ý÷åé ôçí äõíáôüôçôá âÜóåé ôçò ðÜèçóçò ðïõ Ý÷åé Þ ðïõ èÝëåé íá èå-
ñáðåýóåé íá áíáôñÝ÷åé óôï ôñßôïìï áõôü Ýñãï, íá âëÝðåé óå ðïéá ïìÜäá Þ êáé ïìÜäåò õðÜãåôáé ôï ðñüâëçìÜ ôïõ
êáé óôç óõíÝ÷åéá íá êïéôÜåé ôá áíÜëïãá óêßôóá ìå ôá óçìåßá ðïõ õðïäåéêíýïíôáé ãéá ôçí åîÜóêçóç ôçò èåñáðåõ-
ôéêÞò ôå÷íéêÞò, þóôå íá åßíáé ðëÞñùò êáôáôïðéóìÝíïò ùò ðñïò ôï ðþò èá ëåéôïõñãÞóåé. ÐáñÜëëçëá ðáñÝ÷åôáé
üëç ç áðáñáßôçôç èåùñçôéêÞ êáôÜñôéóç ðïõ óõìðëçñþíåé ôçí ìüñöùóç ôïõ åîáóêïýìåíïõ, ç ïðïßá ìáæß ìå ôçí
ðñáêôéêÞ ìåèïäïëïãßá ôïõ äßíåé ôçí åõ÷Ýñåéá íá áñ÷ßóåé íá ðáßñíåé ðñùôïâïõëßá ãéá âïÞèåéá ôïõ åáõôïý ôïõ êáé
ôïõ óõíáíèñþðïõ ôïõ.
Ï ðñþôïò ôüìïò ôçò ×åéñïðëáóôéêÞò ðåñéÝ÷åé ôá ôÝóóåñá ðñþôá óåìéíÜñéá (Áðñßëéïò 1989, ÍïÝìâñéïò 1989,
ÌÜñôéïò 1990 êáé Éïýíéïò 1990), ï äåýôåñïò ôüìïò ôá åðüìåíá ôÝóóåñá (ÌÜúïò 1991, ÍïÝìâñéïò 1991, ÌÜñôéïò
1992 êáé Éïýíéïò 1992) êáé ï ôñßôïò êáé ôåëåõôáßïò ôüìïò ôá åíáðïìåßíáíôá ôñßá óåìéíÜñéá (ÍïÝìâñéïò 1992, Öå-
âñïõÜñéïò 1993, ôï ôñßôï åß÷å ðñïãñáììáôéóèåß ãéá ôïí ÌÜúï ôïõ 1993 áëëÜ ëüãù ôçò ìåôÜóôáóçò ôïõ óõããñá-
öÝá ðñáãìáôïðïéÞèçêå ôï öèéíüðùñï áðü ôçí âïçèü ôïõ ÓìÜñù ÊïóìÜïãëïõ).
Óêïðüò ôïõ üëïõ Ýñãïõ åßíáé íá äéäÜîåé ðñáêôéêÜ êáé èåùñçôéêÜ, ôé åßíáé ç áññþóôéá êáé ðþò ìðïñåß êáé ãßíå-
ôáé íá èåñáðåõèåß óùóôÜ êáé ñéæéêÜ, ìå ìéá áíþôåñç åðÝìâáóç, äéÜöïñç åêåßíçò ðïõ ãíùñßæïõìå êáé ðïõ áíôß ãéá
öÜñìáêá êáé íõóôÝñéá, ÷ñçóéìïðïéåß ôçí åóùôåñéêÞ åíåñãçôéêüôçôá, ôïí áðïèçóáõñéóìÝíï ìá êáé á÷ñçóéìïðïß-
çôï ðëïýóéï äõíáìéóìü êÜèå áíèñþðïõ.
Óôï åí ëüãù Ýñãï áíáëýåôáé áðü êÜèå Üðïøç, åîùôåñéêÞ êáé åóùôåñéêÞ, ç áññþóôéá êáé ôá áßôéÜ ôçò, êáèþò å-
ðßóçò êáé ôá âáóéêüôåñá óõóôÞìáôá ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò ãéá ôçí áðïêáôÜóôáóÞ ôçò êáé ôçí åðáíáöï-
ñÜ ôçò õãåßáò êáé áñìïíßáò óôïí ðÜó÷ïíôá óõíÜíèñùðï. ÅìðåñéóôáôùìÝíá ðáñïõóéÜæïíôáé ôüóï èåùñçôéêÜ üóï
êáé ðñáêôéêÜ, ïé ôå÷íéêÝò êáé ïé ìÝèïäïé ðïõ èá ðñÝðåé íá áêïëïõèçèïýí ãéá íá åðéöÝñïõí ôï ðïèçôü áðïôÝëå-
óìá ôçò èåñáðåßáò.
Ï óõããñáöÝáò õðïãñáììßæåé êÜðïõ üôé "äéá ôïõ èåïý êáé ôçò êáëÞò ôý÷çò, ðåôõ÷áßíïíôáé ôá èåñáðåõôéêÜ áðï-
ôåëÝóìáôá. ÊÜèå åñãÜôçò ôïõ êáëïý åßíáé üñãáíï ôçò áðáñÜâáôçò áãáèÞò ôý÷çò (ôïõ Èåïý), äçëáäÞ ôïõ Íüìïõ
ôçò ÁíôáðïäïôéêÞò Äéêáéïóýíçò (ÊÜñìá)".
THERAPY AND HETEROTHERAPY 89, 25) THE- STUDY 191, 36) DESCRIPTION AND GUIDANCE PITULATION OF THE DISEASES OF THE FIRST
ORETICAL AND PRACTICAL PRESENTATION OF FOR THE THERAPY OF THE FIRST FOUR ISSUE, OF THE SECOND ESSAY (AUTOMN)
SOME MENTIONED DISEASED FOR THERAPY GROUPS - CLASSES OF DISEASES OF THE HEAD SEMINAR 251, 47) A REMINDER USEFUL FOR
95, 26) SKETCHES PRESENTATION OF THE AND OF THE FACE, OF THE FRONT PART OF YOUR THERAPEUTICAL WORK 255, 48) EPI-
PALMS DURING THEIR THERAPEUTICAL USE NECK AND OF THE SIDE NECK AREAS 195, LOGUE OF THE FIRST ISSUE OF THE SECOND
127, 27) SKETCHES PRESENTATION OF THE 37) THE TWENTY THREE GROUPS OR CLASS- ESSAY 257, 49) RESPONSIBLE OF PRESENTA-
SOLES AND OF THEIR ENDING POINTS MERID- ES OF THE DISEASES THAT FINGERCURATOR TION OF ALL THE SECOND ESSAY 259, 50)
IONAL FURROWS 133, 28) ON WHICH POINTS SIATSU CURES 196, 38) RELATION OF THE THANKS 260, 51) CONTENTS OF THE FIRST
OF THE BODY WE SHOULD PLACE OUR FIN- GROUPED AND OF THE OUT-MASSIVE IN ISSUE, OF THE SECOND ESSAY, OF THE AU-
GERS IN ORDER TO CURE A DISEASE 139, 29) THEIR REMEDY 197, 39) PREFACE OF THE TOMNAL SEMINAR SIATSU IN ATHENS 261,
SECOND ISSUE OF FIRST STUDY 147, 30) BE- FIRST ISSUE, OF THE SECOND STUDY, OF THE 52) SECOND ISSUE OF THE SECOND ESSAY
GINNING OF THE SECOND ISSUE 149, 31) IM- SECOND AUTOMN SEMINAR OF SIATSU 199, 263, 53) SKETCHES PRESENTATION OF THE
AGES OF THE SECOND ISSUE, OF THE FIRST S- 40) INTRODUCTION OF THE SECOND ESSAY POINTS ON WHICH WE WILL APPLY SIATSU,
TUDY, OF THE FIRST SEMINAR OF SIATSU151, OF THE SECOND SEMINAR 201, 41) GROUP- THE PARTS THAT WILL BE CURED 265, 54)
32) EPILOGUE OF THE SECOND ISSUE, OF THE CLASSING OF THE DISEASES OF MAN IN PICTURES AND CAPTIONS IN ARITHMETICAL
FIRST STUDY, OF THE FIRST SEMINAR 183, TWENTY THREE IDIOTHERAPEUTIC BRANCH- ORDER, HEAD 269, 55) PICTURES AND CAP-
33) IN WHICH CHAPTERS DIFFEREN DISEASES ES 203, 42) FIRST GROUP - CLASS OF DIS- TIONS IN ARITHMETICAL ORDER, FACE 270,
CURED THROUGH SIATSU ARE PRESENTED EASES - HEAD 223, 43) SECOND GROUP - 56) PICTURES AND CAPTIONS IN ARITHMETI-
187, 34) RESPONSIBLE OF PRESENTATION CLASS OF FACE DISEASES 234, 44) THIRD CAL ORDER, OF THE FRONT NECK SYSTEM
OF ALL THE FIRST STUDY OF SIATSU 190, SEC- GROUP - CLASS OF FRONT PART OF NECK DIS- 271, 57) PICTURES AND CAPTIONS IN ARITH-
OND SEMINAR OF SIATSU, 35) STUDY OF THE EASES 241, 45) FOURTH GROUP - CLASS OF METICAL ORDER, OF THE NECK SIDES 272,
SECOND SEMINAR, FIRST ISSUE OF SECOND SIDE NECK AREA DISEASES 246, 46) RECA- 58) THERAPEUTICAL HEAD POINTS 275, 59)
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 51 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
THERAPEUTICAL FACE POINTS 275, 60) HEAD
SKETCHES 277, 61) FACE SKETCHES 287,
62) SKETCHES OF A) FRONT PART OF NECK
and B) SIDE NECK AREA 295, 63) PRESEN-
TATION RESPONSIBLES 305, 64) THANKS 306,
65) BRIEF 307, 66) HEAD DISEASES 309,
67) FACE DISEASES 311, 68) FRONT NECK
SYSTEM DISEASES 313, 69) SIDE NECK AREAS
DISEASES 315, 70) CONTENTS OF THE SEC-
OND ISSUE, OF THE SECOND ESSAY OF THE
AUTOMNAL SEMINAR SIATSU 317, THIRD
SEMINAR OF SIATSU: 71) ESSAY OF THE THIRD
SEMINAR 319, 72) FIRST ISSUE OF THE THIRD
SEMINAR OF SIATSU 321, 73) PREFACE OF
THE THIRD SEMINAR 323, 74) INTRODUCTION
OF THE THIRD SEMINAR 325, 75) FIFTH
GROUP OF DISEASES SIATSU 327, 76) SIXTH
GROUP OF DISEASES SIATSU 335, 77) SEV-
ENTH GROUP OF DISEASES SIATSU 337, 78)
EIGHTH GROUP OF DISEASES SIATSU 340, 79)
NINTH GROUP OF DISEASES SIATSU 343, 80)
EPILOGUE OF ESSAY OF THE THIRD SEMINAR
OF SIATSU, WINTRY 347, 81) THOSE WHO
CONTRIBUTED IN THE PRESENTATION OF THIS
ESSAY 351, 82) CONTENTS OF THE FIRST IS-
SUE, OF THE THIRD ESSAY, OF THE THIRD
SEMINAR OF SIATSU 352,83 ) SECOND ISSUE,
OF THE THIRD SEMINA OF SIATSU IN ATHENS
353, 84) BEGINNING OF THE SECOND ISSUE
OF THE THIRD SEMINAR OF SIATSU WITH THE
WRITER'S SKETCH, THE PRESENTATION OF
THE LEFT PALM 355, 85) SKETCHES FOR THE
FIFTH GROUP 357, 86) SKETCHES FOR THE
SIXTH GROUP OF DISEASES OF SIATSU 364,
87) SKETCHES FOR THE SEVENTH GROUP OF
DISEASES OF SIATSU 368, 88) SKETCHES FOR
THE EIGHTH GROUP OF DISEASES OF SIATSU
372, 89) A CLARIFICATION CONTAINED IN THE
CHAPTER ABOUT THE DISEASES OF THE
EIGHTH GROUP 376, 90) SKETCHES FOR THE
DISEASES OF THE NINTH GROUP 379, 91)
EPILOGUE OF THE SECOND ISSUE OF THE
THIRD ESSAY OF THE WINTRY SEMINAR 385,
92) THOSE WHO CONTRIBUTED TO THE PRE-
SENTATION 387, 93) CONTENTS OF THE SEC-
OND ISSUE, OF THE THIRD ESSAY, OF THE
THIRD SEMINAR 388, FOURTH SEMINAR OF
SIATSU: 94) ESSAY OF THE FOURTH SEMINAR
OF SIATSU 389, 95) FIRST ISSUE OF THE SEM-
INAR OF SIATSU IN SPRING OF 1990 391,
96) PREFACE OF THE FIRST ISSUE OF THE ES-
SAY OF THE FOURTH SEMINAR OF SIATSU 393,
97) INTRODUCTION OF THE FIRST ISSUE OF
THE ESSAY 0F THE FOURTH SEMINAR 395,
98) WHAT WE SHALL BE TAUGHT OF IN THIS
SPRING SEMINAR OF SIATSU 397, 99) VER-
TEBRAL COLUMN 399, 100) PSYCHIC AND
BODILY DISPOSITION DURING ESOTHERAPY
401, 101) TENTH GROUP OF DISEASES OF
SIATSU 403, 102) ELEVENTH GROUP OF DIS-
EASES OF SIATSU 406, 103) TWELFTH
GROUP OF DISEASES OF SIATSU 407, 104)
THIRTEENTH GROUP OF DISEASES OF SIATSU
408, 105) FOURTEENTH GROUP OF DISEASES
OF SIATSU 411, 106) FIFTEENTH GROUP OF
DISEASES OF SIATSU 412, 107) THOUGHTS
MADE ON THE ABOVE-MENTIONED 413, 108)
EPILOGUE OF THE FIRST ISSUE OF THE
FOURTH ISSUE OF THE FOURTH SEMINAR OF
SIATSU 415, 109) THANKS 417, 110) CON-
TENTS OF THE FIRST ISSUE OF THE FOURTH
ESSAY OF THE FOURTH SEMINAR OF SIATSU
418, 111) SECOND ISSUE OF THE FOURTH ES-
SAY OF THE FOURTH SEMINAR OF SIATSU IN
SPRING OF 1990 419, 112) THE VERTEBRAL
COLUMN AS A GUIDE OF THE SECOND ISSUE
OF THE FOURTH ESSAY OF SIATSU 421, 113)
FORWORD OF THE SECOND ISSUE OF THE
FOURTH ESSAY 423, 114) TENTH GROUP OF
DISEASES WITH PICTURES - SKETCHES AND
CAPTIONS 425, 115) THE INFLUENCES OF THE
THIRTY THREE VERTEBRAS ON THE ORGANS
AND ON THE WHOLE BODY 432, 116) TENTH
GROUP OF DISEASES, ESOTERIC SHOULDER
BLADE AREA, WITH PICTURES AND CAPTIONS
FOR THE COMPREHENSION OF THEIR THER-
APY BY SIATSU 437, 117) ELEVENTH GROUP
OF DISEASES OF SIATSU AND THEIR THERAPY
440, 118) TWELFTH GROUP OF DISEASES OF
SIATSU AND THEIR THERAPY 446, 119) THIR-
TEENTH GROUP OF DISEASES OF SIATSU AND
THEIR THERAPY 448, 120) FOURTEENTH
GROUP OF DISEASES OF SIATSU AND THEIR
THERAPY 454, 121) FIFTEENTH GROUP OF
DISEASES OF SIATSU AND THEIR THERAPY
457, 122) EPILOGUE OF THE SECOND ISSUE
OF THE FOURTH ESSAY OF THE FOURTH SEM-
INAR OF SIATSU 459, 123) THANKS FOR
THOSE WHO HELPED IN THE EDITION OF THE
FOURTH ESSAY OF THE FOURTH SEMINAR
SIATSU IN ATHENS 461, 124) CONTENTS OF
THE SECOND ISSUE OF THE FOURTH ESSAY
OF THE FOURTH SEMINAR SIATSU IN ATHENS
(SPRING OF 1990) 462, 125) TABLE OF DIS-
EASES AND THEIR THERAPY BY SIATSU, CON-
TAINED IN THIS WORK OF MINE OF THE THER-
APEUTICS WITHOUT MEDICINES - CHIRO-
PLASTIC 463, 126) CANCER CONSIDERED IN
ESOTERIC AND METAPHYSICAL SIDE 475, 127)
THE COVER PICTURE: KENTAVROS THE CHI-
RON 477, 128) PHOTOGRAPHS TAKEN DUR-
ING TEACHING IN THE FOUR SEMINARS OF
SIATSU 479, 129) TABLE OF SKETCHES AND
WHAT EACH ONE PRESENTS 497, 130) CON-
CLUSIONS 511, 131) EPILOGUE 515, 132)
CONTENTS 523, 133) LISTS OF CIRCULATING
BOOKS, ESSAYS AND DIFFERENT OTHER
WORKS OF SAME WRITER 531,SUBSTANTIAL
CONJUNCTION OF THE FINGERS ENDINGS
WITH THE MAIN ORGANS OF ORGANISM DIS-
COVERY AND USE DURING THE INNER THER-
APEUTICS BY N A MARGIORIS HIMSELF.
n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
CHIROPLASTIC THERAPEUTICS, 1st VOLUME
This is Master Nikolaos A. Margiori's twenty-fifth book. It contains three
volumes and its first volume was published in 1990.
This directly practical writing work of three volumes has been baptized
Chiroplastic Therapeutics without medicines, in order to suggest the ther-
apy achieved ony by physical means and even by a plenty of therapeuti-
cal systems, either autonomous or mixed one with another, that are sub-
ject to the Esoteric Therapeutics, as is Siatsu (Japanese techniques mean-
ing fingerpressing), the Ancient Greek Asclepian Massaging (Asclepia - Am-
fiaraea), the Fingertapping (Nikolaos Margiori's method), the suggestion,
the Ensleeping (today we call it Hpnotism), the Reflexology, the influence
on the thirty three vertebras, the Static Therapeutics and too many oth-
er methods of physical therapeutics without medicines, that are exercised
with bare hands, with knowledge, experience and above all, with Con-
centration.
More concretely, this work composed of three volumes is the result of
a series of 11 seminars that lasted three days for a Therapy Without Med-
icines that Master Nikolaos A. Margioris taught at his seat, in Omakoeio of
Athens. In these seminars, an extensive-exhausting, theoretical and prac-
tical analysis of the most basical therapeutical methods and mainly of Siat-
su, took place. He divided it in 23 groups that represent the 186 most
spread diseases, and thus, he who is intereseted in it, can, on the basis of
the disease he suffers or he wants to cure, run to this work of the three
volumes, to see which group or groups his problem belongs to; and af-
terwards, to start taking the initiative to help himself and his fellow-man.
The first volume of the Chiroplastics comprises the four first seminars
(April 1989, November 1989, March 1990 and June 1990), the second vol-
ume the next four (May 1991, November 1991, March 1992 and June
1992) and the third and last volume the remaining three seminars (No-
vember 1992, February 1993, the third one had been programmed for May
1993 but due to the writer's departurem, it took place in the autumn by
his assistant Smaro Kosmaoglou). See also the summaries of the other t-
wo volumes.
The aim of the whole work is to teach theoretically and practically, what
a disease is and how it can be cured properly and radically, by a superior
operation, different that the one we know and that, instead of medicines
and lancets, uses the esoteric activity, the treasured but also unused rich
dynamism of every man.
In the mentoned book the disease and its causes are analyzed by every
aspect, external and internal, as well as the most basical systems of the
Esoteric Therapeutics for ithe reinstatement and the bringing the health
and the harmony back to the suffering fellow-man. The techniques and
the methods that must be followed in order to bring the desired result of
the therapy, are presented thoroughly, theoretically and practically.
The writer underlines somewhere that "with God and the good luck the
therapeutical results are achieved. Every worker of the good is an organ
of the inviolable good luck (God), that is of the Law of the Retributive Jus-
tice (Karma)".

ÌÅÈÏÄÏÓ ØÕ×ÏÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ
ÌÅ ÄÉ×ÙÓ ÖÁÑÌÁÊÁ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
Áðïóõìâïëéóìüò ôçò åéêüíáò ôïõ åîù-
öýëëïõ 5, Ðñïåôïéìáóßá ôïõ áíáãíþóôç 7,
Ï ôßôëïò ôïõ âéâëßïõ ìïõ áõôïý 9, ÈåñìÞ
ðáñÜêëçóç óå êÜèå áíáãíþóôç 11, Ðïõ
ãñÜöôçêå ôï âéâëßï ìïõ áõôü 13, Ç áöéÝñù-
óç ôïõ âéâëßïõ ìïõ 14, Ðïéïò ï óêïðüò ôïõ
Ýñãïõ ìïõ áõôïý 15, Ðñüëïãïò 17, Åéóáãù-
ãÞ 23, Ìõéêü êáé Íåõñéêü Óýóôçìá óýììá-
÷ïé ãéá èåñáðåßá ôçò øõ÷ïðÜèåéáò 31, Ôé åß-
íáé ç øõ÷ïðÜèåéá êáé ðùò èåñáðåýåôáé 43,
¾ðíùóç êáé Õðíïèåñáðåßá 69, ÃëùóóïìÜ-
ëáîç - ÃëùóóïèåñáðåõôéêÞ ãéá èåñáðåßá
ôçò øõ÷ïðÜèåéáò 91, Õðïâïëçìéáßá èåñá-
ðåõôéêÞ ãéá èåñáðåßá ôçò øõ÷ïðÜèåéáò 113,
Ìáãíçôïèåñáðåßá ôçò øõ÷ïðÜèåéáò 135,
ÄáêôõëïêôõðéêÞ ôå÷íéêÞ ãéá èåñáðåßá ôçò
øõ÷ïðÜèåéáò êáé Üëëùí áóèåíåéþí 167, Åé-
êïíïðëáóôéêÞ èåñáðåõôéêÞ ãéá èåñáðåßá
ôçò øõ÷ïðÜèåéáò êáé Üëëùí áóèåíåéþí 191,
ÌåôÜããéóç õãéïýò åíÝñãåéáò - äüíçóçò äéá
ôùí óöõãìþí ôïõ áññþóôïõ ãéá èåñáðåßá
ôçò øõ÷ïðÜèåéáò 203, Ôï õðïóõíåßäçôï
óáí ÷ñçóéìïðïéçèåß åßíáé ï ôÝëåéïò èåñá-
ðåõôÞò ôçò øõ÷ïðÜèåéáò 219, ÌÜëáîç. Ç
áñ÷áßá åëëçíéêÞ ìÝèïäïò ãéá èåñáðåßá ôçò
øõ÷ïðÜèåéáò 231, Áõôïèåñáðåßá êáé åôåñï-
èåñáðåßá áðü ôçí øõ÷ïðÜèåéá 257, Óõìðå-
ñÜóìáôá 291, Åðßëïãïò 309, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá
323, Êõêëïöïñïýíôá ôïõ ßäéïõ âéâëßá, ìå-
ëÝôåò, ðåñéïäéêÜ, åóùôåñéêü êëåéäß, ó÷ïëÝò
Ïìáêïåßïõ 324.
PSYCHOTHERAPEUTICAL METHOD
WITHOUT MEDICINES
CONTENTS
1 DESYMBOLISM OF THE COVER IM-
AGE 5, 2 READER'S PREPARATION 7, 3
THE TITLE OF THIS BOOK OF MINE 9, 4
WARM REQUEST TO EVERY READER 11, 5
WHERE THIS BOOK OF MINE WAS WRIT-
TEN 13, 6 THE DEDICATION OF MY BOOK
14, 7 WHAT IS THE AIM OF THIS WORK
OF MINE 15, 8 PREFACE 17, 9 INTRO-
DUCTION 23, 10 MUSCULAR AND NER-
VOUS SYSTEMS, ALLIES TO THE THERAPY
OF PSYCHOPATHY 31, 11 WHAT IS PSY-
CHOPATHY AND HOW IT IS CURED 43, 12
HYPNOSIS AND HYPNOTHERAPY 69, 13
TONGUE MASSAGE - TONGUE THERAPEU-

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 52 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

TICS FOR THE THERAPY OF PSYCHOPATHY MAGNETOTHERAPY OF PSYCHOPATHY OTHER DISEASES 167, 17 ICONOPLASTIC MASSAGE THE ANCIENT GREEK METHOD
91, 14 SUBSTITUTED THERAPEUTICS FOR 135, 16 FINGERTAPPING TECHNIQUE FOR THERAPEUTICS FOR THE THERAPY OF PSY- FOR THE THERAPY OF PSYCHOPATHY 231,
THE THERAPY OF PSYCHOPATHY 113, 15 THE THERAPY OF PSYCHOPATHY AND CHOPATHY AND OTHER DISEASES 191, 18 21 SELF-THERAPY AND ETEROTHERAPY
TRANSFUSION OF HEALTHY ENERGY-VI- FROM PSYCOPATHY 257, 22 CONCLU-
n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ BRATION THROUGH THE ILL'S PULSES FOR SIONS 291, 23 EPILOGUE 309, 24 CON-
THE THERAPY OF PSYCHOPATHY 203, 19 TENTS 323, 25 CIRCULATING BOOKS BY
ØÕ×ÏÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ IF THE SUBCONSCIOUS IS USED, IT IS THE SAME, ESSAYS, JOURNALS, ESOTERIC KEY,
PERFECT CURER OF PSYCOPATHY 231, 20 OMAKOEIO SCHOOLS 324.
×ÙÑÉÓ ÖÁÑÌÁÊÁ
n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
Åßíáé ôï åéêïóôü Ýêôï âéâëßï ôïõ Ìáñ-
ãéùñÞ ðïõ ðñùôïåêäüèçêå ôï 1991 êáé PSYCHOTHERAPEUTICS
êáôåõèýíåé ôïí áíáãíþóôç óå áõôïèåñá-
ðåßá êáé åôåñïèåñáðåßá éäßùò ôùí øõ÷é- WHITHOUT MEDICINES
êþí áóèåíåéþí -ðÜíôá ÷ùñßò öÜñìáêá-.
Ðïý üìùò âáóßæåôáé ç áöÜñìáêç èåñá- This is Margiori's twentieth sixth book that was published in 1991 and that
ðåõôéêÞ ìÝèïäïò ôçò øõ÷ïðÜèåéáò; Óôï directs the reader to a self-therapy and a heterotherapy, mainly of the psy-
Íïõ ôïõ ðÜó÷ïíôá áíèñþðïõ. chical diseases - always "without medicines". But where is this therapeutic
¼ðùò ç êõêëïöïñßá ôïõ áßìáôïò âáóß- method of psychopathy based? In the Mind of the man suffering.
æåôáé óôç êáñäéÜ, Ýôóé êáé ç øõ÷ïèåñáðåß- As much as the circulation of the blood is based on the heart, as psy-
á âáóßæåôáé óôïí åãêÝöáëï. Åðßäñáóç óôïí åãêÝöáëï, óõíåéäçôÞ êáé õðï- chotherapy is based on the brain. It has a conscious and subconscious in-
óõíåßäçôç, åðáíáöÝñåé óôç öõóéêÞ ëåéôïõñãßá ôá êÝíôñá ôïõ åãêåöÜëïõ fluence on the brain, it brings the brain centers back to their natural func-
êáé ç ÷åéñïðëáóôéêÞ áð' Ýîù, ìå ôçí õðïóõíåßäçóç áðü ìÝóá, âïçèåß óå ðÜ- tion, and the chiroplastics from outside, with the subconscinene from in-
ñá ðïëëÝò ðåñéðôþóåéò ôïí Üññùóôï. side,, help the patient in too many cases.
ÌÝèïäïé üðùò ç õðïâïëÞ, ï õðíùôéóìüò (åãêïßìçóç), ç ãëùóóïèåñá- Methods as suggestion, hypnotism (ensleeping), glossotherapy, the sta-
ðåßá, ç óôáôéêÞ èåñáðåõôéêÞ, ç ìåôÜããéóç õãéþí äïíÞóåùí óôïí áóèåíÞ, ç tic therapeutics, the transfusion of the healthy vibrations to the patient.,,
áñ÷áßá åëëçíéêÞ ÁóêëçðéáêÞ ìÜëáîç ê.ë.ð. äéäÜóêïíôáé åìðåñéóôáôùìÝíá the ancient Greek Asclepean massage etc., are thoroughly taught , theo-
èåùñçôéêÜ êáé ðñáêôéêÜ ìÝóá áðü ôéò óåëßäåò ôïõ åí ëüãù âéâëßïõ ãéá á- retically and practically, through the pages of the said book, to the con-
íôéìåôþðéóç ôùí øõ÷ïóùìáôéêþí ðáèÞóåùí ôïõ óõíáíèñþðïõ. frontation of the psychosomatic diseases of our fellow-men.

ÌÕÓÔÉÊÉÓÌÏÓ- ×ÑÉÓÔÏÊÅÍÔÑÉÊÏÓ
& ×ÑÉÓÔÏÊÑÁÔÉÊÏÓ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
ÕðïãñáöÞ ôïõ óõããñáöÝá 4, Ôá ÷ñçóéìï-
ðïéçèÝíôá éåñÜ âéâëßá 5, ÖéëéêÞ õðüäåéîç 7, Á-
öéÝñùóç 7, ÅðéìÝëåéá ôçò Ýêäïóçò 8, Ôá åîþ-
öõëëá ôïõ âéâëßïõ 8, Õðüìíçóç óôïí áíá-
ãíþóôç 9, Ðïõ êáé ðùò ãñÜöôçêå ôï âéâëßï
10, Ïé äõï åéêüíåò ôùí åîùöýëëùí 11, Ðñü-
ëïãïò 15, ÅéóáãùãÞ 21, Èåßá ×Üñç 27, Ôé åßíáé
ï Ìõóôéêéóìüò 41, Ðñï÷ñéóôéáíéêüò Ìõóôéêé-
óìüò 59, ×ñéóôéáíéêüò Ìõóôéêéóìüò 75, Ìõóôé-
êéóìüò ôïõ Áðïóôüëïõ Ðáýëïõ 123, Ï Ìõ-
óôéêéóìüò ôïõ áãáðçìÝíïõ ìáèçôÞ 165, Ãñç-
ãüñéïò ÐáëáìÜò êáé Ïìöáëïóêüðïé 233, Ìõ-
óôéêéóôéêÝò ðëçñïöïñßåò 279, ×ñéóôéáíéêüò êáé
Éíäïõéóôéêüò Ìõóôéêéóìüò 289, ÌõóôéêéóôéêÜ
óõìðåñÜóìáôá 305, Åðßëïãïò 319, Ðåñéå÷ü-
ìåíá 328, Êõêëïöïñïýíôá ôïõ ßäéïõ âéâëßá,
ìåëÝôåò, ðåñéïäéêü, åóùôåñéêü êëåéäß 329.
CHRISTOCENTRIC
AND CHRISTOCRATIC MYSTICISM
CONTENTS
THE WRITER'S SIGNATURE 4, THE USED HOLY

n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ Åêåß ç ýëç åßíáé áíýðáñêôç êáé óôçí áíýðáñêôç èÝóç ôçò, âñßóêåôáé ç
ÐíåõìáôéêÞ Ðáíõðáñîßá, ðïõ ç ïëïöùôåéíüôçôÜ Ôçò êáé ç öùôáýãåéÜ Ôçò êáé
×ÑÉÓÔÏÊÅÍÔÑÉÊÏÓ ç óõãêëïíéóôéêÞ ç÷ïâïëßá Ôçò, ðïõ åßíáé Èåßá Ìåëùäßá, ëáìðñï÷ñùìáôßæåé
ÊÁÉ ×ÑÉÓÔÏÊÑÁÔÉÊÏÓ ôá ðÜíôá êáé ìÝóá óôéò öùôïëÜìøåéò Ôçò, ôçò Ðáíðíåõìáôéêüôçôáò, äéáêñß-
íïíôáé ìüíïí áðü ôá üìïéá õðÜñ÷ïíôá ðíåõìáôïüíôá, áñìïíéêÝò áéèÝñéåò óé-
ÌÕÓÔÉÊÉÓÌÏÓ ëïõÝôåò, ðïõ ôï åêäÞëùìÜ ôïõò óáí ôÝëåéá üíôá, ëéãþíåé êáé êáôáêáßåé ôéò
áäåëöéêÝò Üëëåò ïíôüôçôåò, áðü ôï Áéþíéï Èåßï êáé áðñïóìÝôñçôï ÊÜëëïò.
Åßíáé ôï åéêïóôü Ýâäïìï âéâëßï ôïõ Äá- ÃÞéíïé íüìïé äåí õðÜñ÷ïõí êáé äåí íïïýíôáé êáé åßíáé Üãíùóôïé êáé ðåñéô-
óêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ. Ðñùôïåê- ôïß ìÝóá óôç Èåßá Áñìïíßá êáé ôçí ÕðÝñôáôç Ôåëåéüôçôá, ðïõ ï Èåüò åêåß ðá-
äüèçêå ôï 1991. ñßóôáôáé, Üðåéñç êáé áöÜíôáóôç óå Äýíáìç êáé Öùôï÷ñþìáôá åõëïãþíôáò,
Óôéò óåëßäåò ôïõ îåôõëßãåôáé -ìÝóá êáé á- óáí Èåßá Öëüãá êáé óáí ÁíÝóðåñï Öùò, ôá ðáéäéÜ ôïõ Öùôüò.
ðü ðïëëÜ ÷ùñßá ôçò Âßâëïõ- Ýíáò êáéíïýñ- Ó' áõôüí ôïí êüóìï ôçò ôÝëåéáò ÏìïñöéÜò êáé ôçò áóýëëçðôçò Áñìïíßáò,
ãéïò êüóìïò ðïõ åßíáé êáôÜ êáíüíá Üãíù- óêïðåýåé ï ÌÕÓÔÉÊÉÓÌÏÓ, íá ïäçãÞóåé ôï áéþíéï åãþ ôïõ, ôçí ðíåõìáôïøõ-
óôïò óôï ìÝóï Üíèñùðï êáé ðåñéãñÜöåôáé á- ÷Þ ôïõ, ðïõ ìïéÜæåé ìå ôçí ïõóßá ôçò, ôçí ÐíåõìáôéêÞ Ïõóßá ôïõ êüóìïõ
ðü Ýíáí óõíÜíèñùðü ìáò ï ïðïßïò ôïí Ý÷åé ãíùñßóåé ôüóï êáëÜ üóï åìåßò ìáò. Áêüìá ï Ìõóôéêéóìüò æçôÜåé íá áîéùèåß ü÷é ìüíï íá ïäçãÞóåé ùò åêåß
ôïí êüóìï ìáò ðïõ æïýìå. ôçí ðíåõìáôïøõ÷Þ, áëëÜ êáé íá áîéùèåß íá âïçèÞóåé ôçí åðáíåñ÷üìåíç
Áõôüò ï Üëëïò êüóìïò -üðùò ðåñéãñÜöåôáé- åßíáé ðåñßåñãá óõíåíùìÝíïò ðíåõìáôïøõ÷Þ óôï óþìá ôçò, íá ìåôáäþóåé óôïí ôáëáßðùñï áíèñùðïíïý
êáé äåí õðÜñ÷åé êÜôé ôï áðïêïììÝíï áðü ôï óýíïëü ôïõ, Ýóôù êé áí áõôü ôï ôá Èåßá ÊÜëëç ðïõ ãíþñéóå êáé Ýæçóå ðÝñáí ôùí ôñéþí åíäéÜìåóùí êüóìùí
êÜôé, äéáöÝñåé óôç óõìðåñéöïñÜ ôïõ áðü ôï ïëïêëçñùìÝíï óýíïëï, ðïõ ó' ðïõ äéÜâçêå, åêåß óôç Âáóéëåßá ôïõ ÐáôÝñá êáé Èåïý ìáò.
áõôü áíÞêåé. Áíáëýåôáé ï ðñï÷ñéóôéáíéêüò ìõóôéêéóìüò, ï ÷ñéóôéáíéêüò ìõóôéêéóìüò, êá-
Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá ôïí ôåôáñôïäéÜóôáôï Þ óùóôüôåñá ôïí ðïëõäéÜóôáôï Üëëï èþò êáé ï éíäéêüò ìõóôéêéóìüò êáé ïé äéáöïñïðïéÞóåéò ôïõ ìå ôïí ÷ñéóôéáíé-
êüóìï, üðïõ åêåß äåí éó÷ýïõí ïé íüìïé ôçò Ýëîçò, ôçò âáñýôçôáò êáé ôïõ êü. Éäéáßôåñåò ëåðôïìÝñåéåò ðáñÝ÷ïíôáé ãéá ôïí ÷ñéóôïêåíôñéêü êáé ÷ñéóôï-
äéá÷ùñéóìïý ôïõ ôüðïõ êáé ôïõ ÷ñüíïõ, ôçò áéôßáò êáé ôïõ áðïôåëÝóìáôïò, êñáôéêü ìõóôéêéóìü.
ôçò ãÝííçóçò êáé ôïõ èáíÜôïõ, ôçò óýíèåóçò êáé ôçò áðïóýíèåóçò, ôçò ðåß- ¼ëá ôá ðáñáðÜíù âãáßíïõí áðü ôçí áôóáëÝíéá ðßóôç ôïõ óõããñÜøáíôá
íáò êáé ôçò äßøáò, ôçò íý÷ôáò êáé ôçò ìÝñáò, ôïõ êáëïý êáé ôïõ êáêïý, ôïõ áëëÜ êáé ôçí åìðñÜãìáôç áíôßëçøÞ ôïõ, ãéá ôçí áëçèéíüôçôá ôïõ Ìõóôéêé-
ìáýñïõ êáé ôïõ Üóðñïõ, ôïõ Þìåñïõ êáé ôïõ Üãñéïõ, ôïõ ðáñåëèüíôïò, ðá- óìïý ôïí ïðïßï äéáêïíåß áðü ðïëý ìéêñÞ çëéêßá êáé åêöñÜæïõí ôçí ðñïóù-
ñüíôïò êáé ìÝëëïíôïò ê.ë.ð. ðéêÞ êáé áôïìéêÞ ÌõóôéêÞ ÆùÞ Ôïõ.

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 53 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

BOOKS 5, FRIENDLY INDICATION 7, DEDICA- OF THE COVERS 11, PREFACE 15, INTRODUC- MYSTICISM 123, THE BELOVED DISCIPLE'S MYS- TICISM 289, SECRET CONCLUSIONS 305, EPI-
TION 7, PUBLICATION ATTENDANCE 8, THE TION 21, DIVINE GRACE 27, WHAT IS MYSTI- TICISM 165, GRIGORIOS PALAMAS AND THE LOGUE 319, CONTENTS 328, CIRCULATING
COVERS OF THE BOOK 9, WHERE AND HOW CISM 41, PRECHRISTIANIC MYSTICISM 59, NAVEL-GAZERS 233, MYSTICISTIC INFORMA- BOOKS BY SAME, ESSAYS, JOURNAL, ESOTERIC
THE BOOK WAS WRITTEN 10, THE TWO IMAGES CHRISTIANIC MYSTICISM 75, APOSTLE PAUL'S TION 279, CHRISTIANIC AND HINDUISTIC MYS- KEY 329.

n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
CHRISTOCENTRIC AND CHRISTOCRATIC MYSTICISM
It is Master Nikolaos A. Margiori's twenty-seventh book. It was published for the first time in 1991.
In its pages - and from many hometowns of the Bible - a new world is unrolled that is generally unknown to the average man and that is described by
one of our fellow-men who has known it as well as we have known the world we live in. This other world - as described - is curiously united and there is
nothing cut off from its total, even if it differs in its behavior from the complete whole where it belongs.
It is about the fourdimensional or more correctly, the multidimensional other world, where the laws of the attraction, of the gravity and of the sepa-
ration between the place and the time, the cause and the result, the birth and the death, the synthesis and the aposynthesis, the hunger and the thirst,
the night and the day, the good and the evil, the black and the white, the tame and the wild, the past, the present and the future, etc., are not in force.
There the matter is non-existent and at its non-existent place the Spiritual Omniexistence is, of which the all-brightness and the illumination and the
shattering sounding being the Divine Melody, colours splendid everything and through Its light brightness, only from the alike existing spirit-beings, some
harmonious, etheric silhouettes are discerned, the expression of which, as perfect beings, lessens and burns the other brotherly entities, from the Eter-
nal Divine and immeasurable Beauty. The earthly laws do not exist and are not understood and are unknown and superfluous in the Divine Harmony and
in the Supreme Perfection, where God is present. This Perfection is immense and unimagined in Power and in Luminous colours, blessing, as a Divine
Flame and as a Never setting Light., the Children of Light. In this world of the perfect Beauty and of the unconceived Harmony, MYSTICISM aims to guide
its eternel ego, its spirit-soul that looks like its substance, the Spiritual Sustance of our world. Also, the Mysticism seeks to be enabled not only to guide
until there the spirit-soul, but also to help the returned back in its body and to transmit the miserable human-mind the Divine Charms he knew and he
lived beyond the three intermediate worlds he passed, there in the Kingdom of our Father and God.
The prechristianic mysticims, the christianic mysticism, as well as the Indian mysticism and its differentiation's from the christianic one. Particular de-
tails are afforded for the christocentric and the christocratic mysticism.
All the above come out from the writer's steely faith but also from his actual conception, for the truthfulness of the Mysticism that he serves from a
very going age, and express His personal Mysticist Life.

ÁÐÏÊÑÕÖÏËÏÃÉÁ Á´ ÔÏÌÏÓ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
ÈåñìÞ ðáñÜêëçóç 5, ÅðéìÝëåéá ôïõ üëïõ
Ýñãïõ 5, Ç ïíïìáóßá ôïõ Ýñãïõ 7, Ç ðáñå-
îçãçìÝíç ëÝîç ôçò Áðïêñõöïëïãßáò 9, Áöé-
Ýñùóç 13, Óêïðüò ôïõ Ýñãïõ ìïõ áõôïý 15,
Äéáßñåóç ôïõ üëïõ Ýñãïõ óå äýï ôüìïõò 17,
Ðñïåôïéìáóßá ôïõ áíáãíþóôç 19, Ç èåùñç-
ôéêÞ ðëåõñÜ ôçò üëçò Áðïêñõöïëïãßáò 21,
Ðñüëïãïò 23
ÅéóáãùãÞ 25, Áðïêñõöïëïãßá ç ðñþôç
ôùí Åðéóôçìþí 29, Áò ÁðïêñõöïëïãÞóïõìå
ôï Óýìðáí 53, Ï Üíèñùðïò áíÜìåóá óôïõò
êüóìïõò 75, Ìåñéêïß êëÜäïé ôçò Áðïêñõöï-
ëïãßáò ðïõ ìðïñïýí íá êáôáíïçèïýí 105, Ç
ìáíßá ôçò ìáíôåßáò 151, Ç èåñáðåõôéêÞ ìá-
íßá 175, ÐáñáðëÞóéåò åîåëßîåéò 191, ¢íïìá
ðåñéðëáíþìåíá üíôá 219, Óáñêþóåéò êáé á-
ðïóáñêþóåéò ðíåõìáôïøõ÷þí 247, Ïé Äç-
ìéïõñãßåò êáé ïé êáôáóôñïöÝò ôïõò 271, Ç Å-
ëåýèåñç Âïýëçóç 297, ÏìáäéêÝò Øõ÷Ýò
327, Ôá ÁäåëöÜ Ðíåýìáôá 343, Ï Ðáíôåðü-
ðôçò Ïöèáëìüò 361, Åðßëïãïò 373, Ôï åîþ-
öõëëï ôïõ ðñþôïõ ôüìïõ 383, Ôá åõ÷áñé-
óôÞñéÜ ìïõ 385, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá 387, Êõêëï-
öïñïýíôá ôïõ ßäéïõ âéâëßá, ìåëÝôåò 389,
Ðåñéïäéêü, åóùôåñéêü êëåéäß, ó÷ïëÝò 391.
OCCULTISM A´ VOLUME
WARM REQUEST 5, ATTENDANCE OF THE W-
HOLE WORK 5, THE NAME OF THE WORK 7, THE
MISUNDERSTOOD WORD OF THE OCCULTISMOL-
OGY 9, DEDICATION 13, AIM OF THIS WORK OF
MINE 15, DIVISION OF THE WHOLE WORK IN TWO
VOLUMES 17, THE READER'S PREPARATION 19,
THE THEORETICAL SIDE OF THE WHOLE OC-
CULTISMOLOGY 21, PREFACE 23, INTRODUCTION
25, OCCULTISM, THE FIRST SCIENCE 29, LET US
OCCULT UNIVERSE 53, MAN AMONG THE
WORLDS 75, SOME BRANCHES OF OC-
CULTISMOLOGY THAT CAN BE COMPREHENDED
105, THE DIVINATION MANIA 151, THE THERA-
PEUTICAL MANIA 175, SIMILAR DEVELOPMENTS
191, LAWLESS WANDERING BEINGS 219, CAR-
NATIONS AND DECARNATIONS OF SPIRITSOULS
247, CREATIONS AND THEIR DESTROYMENTS 271,
THE FREE WILL 297, COLLECTIVE SOULS 327, THE
FRATERNAL SPIRITS 343, THE OMNI-OVERSEER
EYE 361, EPILOGUE 373, THE COVER OF THE FIRST
VOLUME 383, MY THANKS 385, CONTENTS 387,
CIRCULATING BOOKS BY SAME, ESSAYS, JOUR-
NAL, ESOTERIC KEY, SCHOOLS 391.

n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
OCCULTISM, 1st VOLUME
It is Master Nikolaos Margiori's twenty-eighth work. It comprises three vol-
umes and its first volume was published in 1991.
This Metaphysical philosophical composition of three volumes has been
baptized as Occultism because it is occupied exclusively with the hidden
and unrevealed Laws of the whole Universe, that the intellectual range can-
not contain in its reasonable - conscious area, that however affect us con-
tinually and on which our life itself and our evolution depend.
In summary, the Occultism is the Science of the skilful people who strug-
gle hardly to study the experiences of the metaphysical searchers (initiates)
on the lethargic powers of every man and to verify them to themselves.
For this reason, it affords us all what is known until today but also the un-
known achievements of its numerous distributed branches that cover as
much the Microcosm (man), as the Macrocosm (the whole universe), with
the invisible to the human substance deep situations filled by infinite be-
ings, worth of their high vibrations.
All the necessary Esoteric Education that man needs on the crossroad of
the modern reality, is analyzed extensively, and the greatest Occultists of
all the times are presented. Also their work, the great number of the branch-
es that the Occultism contains and finally, the metaphysical details and rev-
elations that, for the first time get activated, are analyzed.
The causes that pushed the writer to write the said book - besides the
above mentioned ones - is also the man's, every man's thirst to know WHAT
HE IS, WHERE HE COMES FROM, WHERE HE GOES AND WHICH TRUTH HE HIDES
WITHIN HIM.
The aim of the said work is to let every man know that Occultism is a sep-
arate and true Science, the Science of the First Principles, and that this
meaning is nearly identical with the Esoteric Philosophy, the Metaphysical
One, and the Esoterism. More precisely, it aims to give man a superior knowl-
edge, pulling him higher than the brutal and instinctive situation where he
lives and bringing him once again near Perfection, where he was once.
A lot of knowledge and unprecedented Revelations are afforded aiming
exclusively to inform and to instruct truly and deeply the reader about the
hyper-reality, as well as to succeed to unhook him from his conscience, so
that he can be orientated or Mind can be connected with his subconscience
or his hyperconsscience that will provide him in person the knowledge and
the verification against all what the rich and perfect experience of his fel-
low-men gives evidence. See also the summaries of the other two volumes.

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 54 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
ÁÐÏÊÑÕÖÏËÏÃÉÁ Á´ ÔÏÌÏÓ
Åßíáé ôï åéêïóôü üãäïï Ýñãï ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á.
ÌáñãéùñÞ. Åßíáé ôñßôïìï êáé ï ðñþôïò ôïõ ôüìïò åêäüèçêå ôï
1991.
Ôï Ôñßôïìï áõôü Ìåôáöõóéêü öéëïóïöéêü óýããñáììá âá-
öôßóôçêå Áðïêñõöïëïãßá ãéáôß áó÷ïëåßôáé áðïêëåéóôéêÜ ìå
ôïõò êñõììÝíïõò êáé áöáíÝñùôïõò Íüìïõò ôïõ üëïõ Óýìðá-
íôïò, áõôïýò ðïõ ç äéáíïçôéêÞ åìâÝëåéá áäõíáôåß íá ðåñéëÜ-
âåé óôç ëïãéêÞ - óõíåéäçôÞ ðåñéï÷Þ ôçò, ïé ïðïßïé üìùò ìáò å-
ðçñåÜæïõí äéáñêþò êáé áðü ôïõò ïðïßïõò åí ôÝëåé åîáñôÜôáé
ç ßäéá ìáò ç æùÞ êáé ç åîÝëéîÞ ìáò.
ÐåñéëçðôéêÜ ç Áðïêñõöïëïãßá åßíáé ç ÅðéóôÞìç ôùí åðéäÝ-
îéùí óõíáíèñþðùí ðïõ áãùíßæïíôáé óêëçñÜ, íá ìåëåôÞóïõí
ôéò åìðåéñßåò ôùí ìåôáöõóéêþí åñåõíçôþí (ìõóôþí), ðÜíù óôéò ëçèáñãïý-
óåò äõíÜìåéò êÜèå áíèñþðïõ êáé íá ôéò åðáëçèåýóïõí óôïõò åáõôïýò ôïõò.
Ãé' áõôü ìáò ðáñÝ÷åé üëá ôá ãíùóôÜ ùò óÞìåñá áëëÜ êáé Üãíùóôá åðéôåýã-
ìáôá ôùí ðÜìðïëëùí åðß ìÝñïõò êëÜäùí ôçò ðïõ êáëýðôïõí ôüóï ôïí Ìé-
êñüêïóìï (Üíèñùðï), üóï êáé ôïí Ìáêñüêïóìï (ôï óýìðáí ïëüêëçñï), ìå
ôéò áüñáôåò óôçí áíèñùðïûðüóôáóç âáèéÝò ôïõ êáôáóôÜóåéò, ðïõ ôéò ãåìßæïõí
Üðåéñá üíôá, êáôÜëëçëá ôùí õøçëïäïíÞóåþí ôïõò.
Áíáëýåôáé åêôåíþò üëç ç áíáãêáßá ÅóùôåñéêÞ Ðáéäåßá ðïõ Ý÷åé áíÜãêç ï
óçìåñéíüò Üíèñùðïò óôï óôáõñïäñüìé ôçò óýã÷ñïíçò ðñáãìáôéêüôçôáò, ðá-
ñïõóéÜæïíôáé ïé ìåãáëýôåñïé Áðïêñõöïëüãïé üëùí ôùí åðï÷þí, ôï Ýñãï
ôïõò, ç ðëåéïíüôçôá ôùí êëÜäùí ðïõ ðåñéÝ÷åé ç Áðïêñõöï-
ëïãßá êáé ôÝëïò ìåôáöõóéêÝò ëåðôïìÝñåéåò êáé áðïêáëýøåéò
ðïõ ãéá ðñþôç öïñÜ äçìïóéïðïéïýíôáé.
Ôá áßôéá ðïõ ïäÞãçóáí ôïí óõããñáöÝá óôï íá ãñáöåß ôï
åí ëüãù âéâëßï -ðÝñáí ôùí áíáöåñèÝíôùí- åßíáé êáé ç äßøá
ôïõ áíèñþðïõ, êÜèå áíèñþðïõ, íá ðëçñïöïñçèåß ÔÉ ÅÉÍÁÉ,
ÁÐÏ ÐÏÕ ÅÑ×ÅÔÁÉ, ÐÏÕ ÐÇÃÁÉÍÅÉ ÊÁÉ ÔÉ ÁËÇÈÅÉÁ ÊÑÕÂÅÉ ÌÅ-
ÓÁ ÔÏÕ.
Óêïðüò ôïõ åí ëüãù Ýñãïõ åßíáé íá Ýñèåé óôçí ãíþóç êÜ-
èå áíèñþðïõ ðùò ç Áðïêñõöïëïãßá åßíáé ìéá îÝ÷ùñç êáé á-
ëçèéíÞ ÅðéóôÞìç, ç ÅðéóôÞìç ôùí Ðñþôùí Áñ÷þí êáé Áéôéþí
êáé ðùò åßíáé ó÷åäüí ôáõôüóçìç ç Ýííïéá áõôÞ ìå ôçí Åóù-
ôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá, ôçí ÌåôáöõóéêÞ êáé ôïí Åóùôåñéóìü. Áêü-
ìá ðéï óõãêåêñéìÝíá óêïðü ôçò Ý÷åé íá äþóåé áíþôåñåò Ãíþ-
óåéò óôïí Üíèñùðï, ôñáâþíôáò ôïí øçëüôåñá áðü ôç æùþäç
êáé åíóôéêôþäéêç êáôÜóôáóç ðïõ äéáâéåß êáé öÝñíïíôÜò ôïí Üëëç ìéá öïñÜ êï-
íôÜ óôçí Ôåëåéüôçôá, óôçí ïðïßá êÜðïôå âñéóêüôáí.
ÐáñÝ÷åôáé ðëçèþñá Ãíþóåùí êáé ðñùôüöáíôùí Áðïêáëýøåùí ìå áðï-
êëåéóôéêü óêïðü íá ðëçñïöïñÞóåé êáé íá åêðáéäåýóåé áëçèéíÜ êáé åéò âÜèïò
ôïí áíáãíþóôç ãéá ôçí õðåñðñáãìáôéêüôçôá, êáèþò åðßóçò íá åðéôý÷åé íá ôïí
áðáãêéóôñþóåé áðü ôç óõíåßäçóÞ ôïõ, þóôå íá ðñïóáíáôïëéóôåß Þ êáé íá óõí-
äåèåß ï Íïõò ôïõ ìå ôçí õðïóõíåßäçóç Þ ôçí õðåñóõíåßäçóÞ ôïõ, ðïõ èá ôïõ
ðáñÜó÷åé éäßá ãíþóç êáé åðáëÞèåõóç ãéá üóá ôïõ êáôáìáñôõñÜ ç ðëïýóéá êáé
ôÝëåéá åìðåéñßá åíüò óõíáíèñþðïõ ôïõ. ÂëÝðå êáé ôéò ðåñéëÞøåéò ôùí Üëëùí
äýï ôüìùí.

ÁÐÏÊÑÕÖÏËÏÃÉÁ ´ ÔÏÌÏÓ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
ÈåñìÞ ðáñÜêëçóç 5, ÅðéìÝëåéá ôïõ äåý-
ôåñïõ ôüìïõ ôçò Áðïêñõöïëïãßáò 5, Áöé-
Ýñùóç ôïõ äåýôåñïõ ôüìïõ ôçò Áðïêñõ-
öïëïãßáò 7, Ðïõ ãñÜöôçêå ï äåýôåñïò ôü-
ìïò ôçò Áðïêñõöïëïãßáò 8, Ëßãá ëüãéá ãéá
ôïí áíáãíþóôç ó÷åôéêÜ ìå ôïí äåýôåñï ôü-
ìï ôçò Áðïêñõöïëïãßáò ôçò ÅðéóôÞìçò ôùí
Ðñþôùí Áñ÷þí 9, Ðñüëïãïò 11, ÅéóáãùãÞ
17, Áðüêñõöá ÅõáããÝëéá êáé Ãíùóôéêéóìüò
23, Áë÷çìåßá êáé Áë÷çìéóôÝò 87, Öáñáù-
íéêÜ ÌõóôÞñéá 127, Ï Ðõèáãüñåéïò Äåóìüò
187, Ôñïöþíéï ¢íôñï 315, Óþìá - Íïõò -
Øõ÷Þ - Ðíåýìá 359, ÓõìðåñÜóìáôá 403,
Åðßëïãïò 415, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá 423, Êõêëïöï-
ñïýíôá ôïõ ßäéïõ âéâëßá, ìåëÝôåò 425, Ðå-
ñéïäéêü, åóùôåñéêü êëåéäß, ó÷ïëÝò 427.
OCCULTISM B' VOLUME
WARM REQUEST 5, ATTENDANCE OF
THE SECOND VOLUME OF OCCULTISM 5,
DEDICATION OF THE SECOND VOLUME OF
OCCULTISM 7, WHERE THE SECOND VOL-
UME OF OCCULTISM WAS WRITTEN 8, A
FEW WORDS FOR THE READER ABOUT THE
SECOND VOLUME OF OCCULTISM, THE
FIRST PRINCIPLES SCIENCE 9, PREFACE 11,
INTRODUCTION 17, OCCULT GOSPELS AND
GNOSTICISM 23, ALCHEMY AND AL-
CHEMISTS 87, PHARAONIC MYSTERIES 127,
THE PYTHAGOREAN BOND 167,
TROPHONO CAVE 187, BODY - MIND -
SOUL - SPIRIT 359, CONCLUSIONS 403,
CONTENTS 423, CIRCULATING BOOKS OF
SAME, ESSAYS, JOURNAL, ESOTERIC KEY,
SCHOOLS 427.

n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
ÁÐÏÊÑÕÖÏËÏÃÉÁ ´ ÔÏÌÏÓ
Åßíáé ôï åéêïóôü Ýíáôï Ýñãï ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á.
ÌáñãéùñÞ. Åßíáé ôñßôïìï êáé ï äåýôåñüò ôïõ ôüìïò åêäüèç-
êå ôï 1992. Áíáëýåôáé ç Áðïêñõöïëïãßá ç ïðïßá åîåôÜæåé ôá
öáéíüìåíá êáé ãåãïíüôá, ôá óõìâÜíôá êáé ôéò Ãíþóåéò áðü ìéá
Üëëç ðëåõñÜ, áíôßèåôç ðáíôåëþò áõôÞò ðïõ åîåôÜæåé ç ãíþ-
ñéìç èýñáèåí ðáéäåßá ôïõ êüóìïõ ìáò.
Ç ÅðéóôÞìç ðïõ ìåôá÷åéñßæåôáé ç Áðïêñõöïëïãßá ïíïìÜ-
æåôáé ÌåôáöõóéêÞ ÅðéóôÞìç êáé èåùñåßôáé ç Ðñþôç ôùí Åðé-
óôçìþí ãéáôß áðü áõôÞ îåêßíçóå ç ðñþôç ãíþóç êáé ç ðñþ-
ôç ðñïóáíáôïëéóôéêÞ ðïñåßá ôïõ áíèñþðïõ.
ÓéãÜ óéãÜ üìùò -üðùò ðåñéãñÜöåôáé- áõôÞ ç ðñþôç ãíþóç êáé ç ðñþôç ôùí
Åðéóôçìþí, ç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ Öéëïóïößá, áëëïéþèçêå êáé îÝðåóå êáé åîáèëéþ-
èçêå êáé åêöõëßóôçêå êáé ìåôáâëÞèçêå óå åîùôåñéêÞ ïñèïëïãéóôéêÞ êñéôéêÞ,
áöÞíïíôáò ãéá ðÜíôá ôéò Ýóù Ãíþóåéò ðïõ êïóìïýóáí ôçí áíèñþðéíç éäéüôç-
ôá êáé åîáóöÜëéæáí ôüôå ó' áõôÞí ôç âáóéëåßá ôïõ êüóìïõ ôïýôïõ, ôïõ öõ-
óéêïý êáé ôñéóäéÜóôáôïõ, ðïõ äÝèçêå óôï ôÝëïò ôïõ óôç äéáíïçôéêÞ êïõë-
ôïýñá ôçò ãíþñéìçò åîùóôñåöéêÞò óõíåßäçóÞò ôïõ.
Ï ïñèïëïãéóìüò ìå ôç äéáíïçôéêÞ ëåéôïõñãßá ôïõ ðåñéüñéóå ôï Íïõ ìÝóá
óôá óôåíÜ üñéá ôïõ êüóìïõ ôïýôïõ, üðùò Ýíá èçñßï êëåßíåôáé ìÝóá óôï êëïõ-
âß êáé ìáñáßíåôáé ìÝ÷ñé íá øïöÞóåé. ¸ôóé -êáôÜ ôçí ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá- êáé
ï Üíèñùðïò ìáñÜèçêå êáé áññþóôçóå êáé äéåöèÜñç êáé îÝöõãå áðü ôï äñü-
ìï ôçò áíüäïõ, áöïý ôïõ êüøáí ôá öôåñÜ ôçò ÌåôáöõóéêÞò áíüäïõ êáé ôïõ
êëÝøáí ôçí ëåõôåñéÜ ôïõ... Ç Áðïêñõöïëïãßá óêïðü ôçò Ý÷åé íá îáíáöÝñåé
ôçí åëðßäá, ôç ÷áñÜ, ôçí ðáñçãïñéÜ êáé ôçí áëçèéíÞ Ëåõôå-
ñéÜ óôïí Üíèñùðï, ÷áñßæïíôÜò ôïõ ôç ìåãÜëç óêÜëá, ðïõ
ìðïñåß åýêïëá íá ôçí áíåâåß êáé íá âñåèåß óôïõò Ïõñáíïýò,
üðùò ï Ðáýëïò êáé Üëëïé ðïëëïß, áñêåß íá ðñïåôïéìáóèåß êá-
ôÜëëçëá êáé íá ãßíåé ôÝëåéïò, êáôÜëëçëïò êáé éêáíüò í' áíÝ-
âåé êáé íá ôñõãÞóåé ôïõò êáñðïýò ðïõ åßíáé Ýôïéìïé íá ìáæåõ-
ôïýí áðü áõôüí...
Åí ôÝëåé ç Áðïêñõöïëïãßá åßíáé äéôôÞ åðéóôÞìç Þ ç äõáäé-
êÞ åîÝôáóç ôïõ êüóìïõ. Ôïõ ïñáôïý ìáò êüóìïõ êáé ôïõ á-
ïñÜôïõ ìáò êüóìïõ, äéüôé ðñïðïñåýåôáé ôçò åîùôåñéêÞò ìáò
åðéóôÞìçò ðáñÜ ðïëý êáé äéáíïßãåé ôï äñüìï óå ìÝëëïõóåò
ðïñåßåò, ðïõ ç åîùôåñéêÞ åðéóôÞìç èá áðïôïëìÞóåé ìåôÜ á-
ðü ðïëëÝò åêáôïíôáåôßåò, åíþ ç åóùôåñéêÞ åðéóôÞìç, ç Áðï-
êñõöïëïãßá, èá áíåâåß áêüìá ðéï øçëÜ êáé ðïôÝ äåí èá óôá-
ìáôÞóåé íá åñåõíÜ ôá Óýìðáíôá êáé ôïõò Åóùêüóìïõò.
¼ðùò ãßíåôáé áíôéëçðôü ç Áðïêñõöïëïãßá åßíáé á÷áíÞò êáé ðïôÝ äåí åßíáé
äõíáôüí íá óõìðåñéëçöèïýí óå Ýíá Þ óå ðïëëÜ âéâëßá ôá üóá ç Áðïêñõöï-
ëïãßá îÝñåé, êáôÝ÷åé êáé åíäéáöÝñåôáé Þ áãùíßæåôáé íá ìÜèåé.
Óôïí äåýôåñï ôüìï ôçò Áðïêñõöïëïãßáò áðïêáëýðôïíôáé áðü ôïí óõã-
ãñáöÝá áñêåôÜ ãéá ôá óõìâáßíïíôá Ýîù óôïí ôñéóäéÜóôáôü ìáò êüóìï, ôïí
áéèåñéêïöõóéêü Þ êáé Ýîù áðü ôï çëéáêü ìáò óýóôçìá êáé Ýîù áðü ôïí áóôå-
ñéóìü ôçò Áñãïýò ðïõ áíÞêïõìå êáé Ýîù áðü ôïí áñéèìü åðôÜ ôïðéêü ìáò Ãá-
ëáîßá. Éäßùò üóá ëáâáßíïõí ÷þñá åíôüò ôïõ ôñéóäéÜóôáôïõ êüóìïõ ìáò, ôçò
13çò áéèåñéêïöõóéêÞò ìáò ÄéÜóôáóçò üðïõ ôá áßôéá ôïõ áéèåñéêïý ìáò êü-
óìïõ óõíôåëïýí óôçí ðáñïõóßáóç êáé óõíôÞñçóç ôïõ öõóéêïý ìáò êüóìïõ
ôçò æùÞò êáé ôùí ðïéêßëùí åêäçëþóåþí ôçò. Ãéá ðåñéóóüôåñåò ëåðôïìÝñåéåò
âëÝðå êáé ôéò ðåñéëÞøåéò ôùí Üëëùí äýï ôüìùí.

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 55 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

 n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
OCCULTISM 2nd VOLUME
This is Master Nikolaos A. Margiori's twenty-ninth work. It comprises three
volumes and its second volume was published in 1992.
This book analyzes the Occultism that examines the phenomena and the
facts, the events and the Knowledge from another side, completely opposite
to the one that the known, classical learning of our world examines.
The Science that the Occultism treats is called Metaphysical Science and it is
considered as the First Science because from this the first knowledge and the
first orientating course of man started. But gradually - as it is described - this
first knowledge and the first of the Sciences, the Metaphysical Philosophy,
changed and declined and became miserable and was altered into an external
orthologistic critique, leaving for ever the internal Knowledge that adorned
the human quality and that secured in it the kingdom of this world, the phys-
ical and threedimensional one, which was bound to its end, to the intellectu-
al cultivation of his known extrovert conscience.
The orthologism by its intellectual function confined the Mind in the narrow
limits of this world, as a wild beast is closed in its cage and it fades until it dies.
This way - according to the Esoteric Philosophy - also man faded and fell sick
and was corrupted and declined from the ascending way, since he had the wings
of the Metaphysical ascension cut and he had his freedom stolen.
The Occultism aims to bring the hope, the joy, the consolation and the true
freedom back to man, offering him the great scale that man can ascend eas-
ily, in order to be found in the Heavens, as Apostle Paul and many others, pro-
vided he gets prepared property and becomes perfect, suitable and able to go
up and to gather the fruit that are ready to be gathered by him...
Finally, the Occultism is a double science or the dual consideration of the
world. of the visible world and of the invisible world, because it precedes much
of our external science and it opens the way to future courses, that the exo-
teric science will dare to follow after many hundreds of years, while the eso-
teric science, the Occultism willl ascend even higher and will never stop search-
ing in the Universes and the Esoteric worlds.
As it becomes understood, the Occultism is immense and all what the Oc-
cuktusn knows, possesses and is intereseted in or it struggles to learn, will n-
ever be able to be comprised in one or in many books.
In the second volume of the Occuktism, enough is revealed by the writer
about what happens outside, in our threedimensional world, the etheric-phys-
ical one, or also outside our solar system, and outside the constellation of Ar-
gus, where we belong, and even outside the number seven, our local Galaxy.
Particularly, what takes place in our threedimensional world, contributes to the
presentation and to the preservation of our physical world, of life and of its var-
ious expressions. For more detail, see also the summaries of the other two
volumes.

ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ÌÅ ÄÉ×ÙÓ
ÖÁÑÌÁÊÁ - ×ÅÉÑÏÐËÁÓÔÉÊÇ
(´ ÔÏÌÏÓ)
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
ÁöéÝñùóç ôïõ Ýñãïõ 8, Óêïðüò ôïõ äåý-
ôåñïõ ôüìïõ 9, Ðñüëïãïò ôïõ äåýôåñïõ
ôüìïõ 11, ÅéóáãùãÞ äåýôåñïõ ôüìïõ 17,
Åîþöõëëï Á´ ôåý÷ïõò ðÝìðôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ
19, Ðñüëïãïò ðÝìðôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 21, Åéóá-
ãùãÞ ðÝìðôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 29, Çëéáêü ÐëÝã-
ìá 39, Éåñüí Ïóôïýí 47, Ðåñéï÷Þ Ãëïõôþí
59, Ðåñéï÷Þ óçìåßùí Íáìéêüóç 63, Åðßëïãïò
ðñþôïõ ôåý÷ïõò ðÝìðôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 73,
Åõ÷áñéóôÞñéá 75, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá ðñþôïõ ôåý-
÷ïõò ðÝìðôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 77, Åîþöõëëï
äåýôåñïõ ôüìïõ ðÝìðôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 79,
Åéêüíåò ãéá ôï çëéáêü ðëÝãìá 81, Åéêüíåò
ãéá ôï éåñü ïóôïýí 95, Åéêüíåò ãéá ôçí ðå-
ñéï÷Þ ôùí ãëïõôþí 111, Åéêüíåò ðåñéï÷Þò
Íáìéêüóç 117, Åðßëïãïò äåýôåñïõ ôüìïõ
ðÝìðôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 127, Åõ÷áñéóôÞñéï ãéá
ôïõò óõíôåëåóôÝò ôçò ìåëÝôçò 129, Ðåñéå-
÷üìåíá äåýôåñïõ ôüìïõ ðÝìðôïõ óåìéíá-
ñßïõ 131, Åîþöõëëï ìïíüôïìïõ Ýêôïõ óå-
ìéíáñßïõ 133, Ðñüëïãïò ìïíüôïìïõ Ýêôïõ
óåìéíáñßïõ 135, ÅéóáãùãÞ ìïíüôïìïõ Ý-
êôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 141, Ç åéêïóôÞ ïìÜäá á-
óèåíåéþí Óéáôóïý 147, ¢ëëåò ðåñéï÷Ýò å-
êôüò áðü ôá óêÝëç èá âïçèÞóïõí ôçí èå-
ñáðåßá ìáò 155, ÐñáêôéêÞ åöáñìïãÞ èåñá-
ðåßáò ôùí 21 áóèåíåéþí ôçò 20çò ïìÜäáò
ìå Óéáôóïý 161, ÓõìðåñÜóìáôá ìïíüôïìïõ
Ýêôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 189, Åðßëïãïò ìïíüôï-
ìïõ Ýêôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 195, Åõ÷áñéóôÞñéï
ãéá ôïõò âïçèÞóáíôåò ôçí Ýêäïóç ôçò ìå-
ëÝôçò ôïõ Ýêôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 199, Ðåñéå÷ü-
ìåíá ìïíüôïìïõ Ýêôïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 201, Å-
îþöõëëï Ýâäïìïõ óåìéíáñßïõ ÓéÜôóïõ 203,
Ðëçñïöüñçóç ôïõ áíáãíþóôç Ýâäïìçò ìå-
ëÝôçò 205, Ðñüëïãïò ìïíüôïìïõ Ýâäïìïõ
óåìéíáñßïõ 209, ÅéóáãùãÞ ìïíüôïìïõ Ý-
âäïìïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 215, Ç åéêïóôÞ ðñþôç
ïìÜäá áóèåíåéþí ôçò Óéáôóïý 221, Ç ðñþ-
ôç áññþóôéá ôçò 21çò ïìÜäáò áóèåíåéþí
Óéáôóïý. ÕðåñáñèñéôéêÜ ùìïðëÜôçò êáé âñá-
÷ßïíá 229, Ç äåýôåñç áññþóôéá ôçò åéêï-
óôÞò ðñþôçò ïìÜäáò áóèåíåéþí Óéáôóïý.
n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
CHIROPLASTIC THERAPEUTICS,
2nd VOLUME
It is Master Nikolaos A. Margiori's twenty-second work
It comprises three volumes and its first volume was pub-
lished in 1991
It is Master Nikolaos a. Margiori's thirtieth work. It
comprises three volumes and its second volume was
published in 1993.
This directly practical writing work of three volumes
was baptized Chiroplastic Therapeutics without medi-
cines, to indicate the therapy only by physical means
and even by a plenty of therapeutical systems, either au-
tonomous or mixed, that belong to the Esoteric Thera-
peutics, as: Siatsu (Japanese technique that means fin-
gerpressing), the Ancient Greek Asclepian Massage (As-
clepieia - Amfiaraia), the Fingertapping (Nikolaos Mari-
ori's method), the suggestion, the Ensleeping (today it
is called Hypnotism), the Reflexology, the influence on
the thirty-three vertebras, the Static Therapeutics and
many other methods of physical therapeutics without
medicines, that are applied on with bare hands, by
knowledge, experience and above all, Concentration.
More concretly, this work of the three volumes is the
result of the 11 Seminars that lasted three days for a
Therapy Without Medicines that Master Nikolaos A. Mar-
ioris taught at his seat, in Omakoeio of Athens. There an
extensive-exhausting, theoretical and practical analysis
of the most basical therapeutical methods and main-
ly,of Siatsu took place. He divided in 23 groups that rep-
resent the 186 most spread diseases and this way, he
who is interested in it, can, on the basis of the disease
he suffers or he wants to cure, to run to this work of
three volumes, to see which group or groups his prob-
Íåõñáëãßá Âñá÷éüíùí 237, Ç ôñßôç áññþ- ÐáñÜëõóç ìåóáßïõ íåýñïõ 241, Ç ôÝôáñôç
óôéá ôçò 21çò ïìÜäáò áóèåíåéþí Óéáôóïý. áññþóôéá ôçò 21çò ïìÜäáò áóèåíåéþí Óéá-
lem belongs to and then, to look at the respective s-
ketches with the indicated points for the exercise of
the therapeutical techniques, to be fully informed of
how ge will function. At the same time, all the neces-
sary theoretical formation that completes the trainee's
education, that together with the practical methodol-
ogy, gives him the ease to start taking initiatives, in or-
der to help himself and his fellowmen.
The first volume of the Chiroplastics contains the four
first seminars (April 1989, Nomvember 1989, March
1990 and June 1990), the second volume the remain-
ing four (May 1991, November 1991, March 1992 and
June 1992) and the third and last volume the remain-
ing three seminars (November 1992, February 1993,
the third had been planned for May 1993, but due to the
writer's departure, it was effected in the automn by his
lady assistant Smaro Kosmaoglou).
The aim of the whole work is to teach practically and
theoretically, what the disease is and how it can be
cured rightly and radically, by a superior operation, dif-
ferent than the one we know and that, instead of med-
icines and lancets, uses the internal activity, and the
treasured but unused rich dynamism of every man.
In the said book the disease and its causes, as well as
the most basical systems of the Esoteric Therapeutics
for its reinstation and its bringing the health and the
harmony back to the suffering fellow-man, are ana-
lyzed. The techniques and the methods that must be fol-
lowed to bring the desired result of the therapy are p-
resented thoroughly, as much theoretically as practi-
cally.
The writer mentions at a point that "by God and by
the good luck, the therapeutical results are achieved.
Every worker of the good is an organ of the inviolable
good luck (God), that is the Law of the Retributive Jus-
tice."
ôóïý. ÐáñÜëõóç ôïõ áêôéíùôïý íåýñïõ.
Êåñêéäéêü. Ðôþóç êáñðïý ÷åñéïý 247, ÐÝ-

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 56 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

ìðôç áññþóôéá. ÐáñÜëõóç ôïõ ÙëÝíéïõ
íåýñïõ. Íõ÷éóìüò ÷åñéïý 253, Ç Ýêôç áññþ-
óôéá ôçò 21çò ïìÜäáò áóèåíåéþí Óéáôóïý.
Áñèñéôéêüò ñåõìáôéóìüò 257, ¸âäïìç áñ-
ñþóôéá ôçò 21çò ïìÜäáò áóèåíåéþí Óéá-
ôóïý. Çìéðëçãßá. ÐáñÜëõóç ìéáò ðëåõñÜò
ôïõ áíèñþðéíïõ óþìáôïò 261, ¼ãäïç áñ-
ñþóôéá ôçò 21çò ïìÜäáò áóèåíåéþí Óéá-
ôóïý. ÁóèÝíåéåò ôïõ ÑÝõíåñò. ÐáñÜëõóç
ôùí ìõþíùí ôùí âñá÷éüíùí éäßùò ôùí ãõ-
íáéêþí 273, ¸íáôç áññþóôéá ôçò 21çò ïìÜ-
äáò áóèåíåéþí Óéáôóïý. ÊñÜìðåò ãñáììá-
ôÝùí 283, ÓõìðåñÜóìáôá 287, Åðßëïãïò
289, Åõ÷áñéóôÞñéï 293, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá Ýâäï-
ìçò ìåëÝôçò Ýâäïìïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 295, Å-
îþöõëëï üãäïçò ìïíïôüìïõ ìåëÝôçò 297,
Ðëçñïöüñçóç ôïõ áíáãíþóôç ôïõ ìÝëëï-
íôá íá ÷ñçóéìïðïéÞóåé ôç èåñáðåõôéêÞ ìÝ-
èïäï ÓéÜôóïõ 299, Ðñüëïãïò üãäïçò ìå-
ëÝôçò üãäïïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 303, ÅéóáãùãÞ ü-
ãäïçò ìåëÝôçò üãäïïõ óåìéíáñßïõ 307, Ãå-
íéêüôçôåò. ×ñçóéìïðïßçóç ôùí áõ÷åíéêþí
óðïíäýëùí ãéá ôç èåñáðåßá ôùí óôçèéêþí
íïóçìÜôùí 311, Âñïã÷éêü Üóèìá. Ç ðñþôç
áññþóôéá áðü ôéò ôÝóóåñéò ôçò 22çò ïìÜ-
äáò áóèåíåéþí ôçò Óéáôóïý 317, Íåõñáëãß-
åò áíÜìåóá óôá ðëåõñÜ. Ç äåýôåñç áññþ-
óôéá ôçò åéêïóôÞò äåýôåñçò ïìÜäáò áóèå-
íåéþí ôçò Óéáôóïý 327, ÁíåðáñêÞò ãáëïõ-
÷ßá. Ôñßôç áññþóôéá ôçò 22çò ïìÜäáò áóèå-
íåéþí Óéáôóïý 333, ÊáñäéáêÝò áññþóôéåò.
ÔÝôáñôç áññþóôéá ôçò åéêïóôÞò äåýôåñçò
ïìÜäáò áóèåíåéþí Óéáôóïý 351, Åðßëïãïò
ôçò üãäïçò ìåëÝôçò ôçò åéêïóôÞò äåõôÝ-
ñáò ïìÜäáò áóèåíåéþí Óéáôóïý 369, Åõ÷á-
ñéóôÞñéá ãéá ôïõò óõíôåëÝóáíôåò óôçí Ýê-
äïóç ôçò üãäïçò ìåëÝôçò Óéáôóïý 375, Ðå-
ñéå÷üìåíá ôçò üãäïçò ìåëÝôçò Óéáôóïý
377, ÓõìðåñÜóìáôá åðß ôùí ôåóóÜñùí óå-
ìéíáñßùí ôïõ äåýôåñïõ ôüìïõ 379, Åðßëï-
ãïò äåýôåñïõ ôüìïõ èåñáðåõôéêÞò ìå äß-
÷ùò öÜñìáêá 381, Ëßãá ëüãéá ãéá ôçí åéêü-
íá ôïõ åîùöýëëïõ ôïõ äåýôåñïõ ôüìïõ
ôçò ×åéñïðëáóôéêÞò ôïõ Áóêëçðéïý 383, Ðå-
ñéå÷üìåíá äåýôåñïõ ôüìïõ ÷åéñïðëáóôéêÞò
Óéáôóïý 387.
CHIROPLASTIC THERAPEUTICS
CONTENTS OF THE SECOND VOLUME PAGE
DEDICATION OF THE WORK 8, AIM OF THE
SECOND VOLUME 9, PREFACE OF THE SEC-
OND VOLUME 11, INTRODUCTION OF THE
SECOND VOLUME 17, COVER OF THE A' ISSUE
OF THE FIFTH SEMINAR 19, PREFACE OF THE
FIFTH SEMINAR 21
INTRODUCTION OF THE FIFTH SEMINAR 29,
SOLAR PLEXUS 39, HOLY BONE 47, BUTTOCKS
AREA 59, NAMIKOSI POINTS AREA 63, EPI-
LOGUE OF THE FIRST ISSUE OF THE FIFTH SEM-
INAR 73, THANKS 75, CONTENTS OF THE FIRST
ISSUE OF THE FIFTH SEMINAR 77, COVER OF
THE SECOND VOLUME OF THE FIFTH SEMINAR
79, PICTURES FOR THE SOLAR PLEXUS 81, PIC-
TURES FOR THE HOLY BONE 95, PICTURES
FOR THE BUTTOCKS AREA 111, PICTURES OF
NAMIKOSI AREA 117, EPILOGUE OF THE SEC-
OND VOLUME OF THE FIFTH SEMINAR 127,
THANKS FOR THOSE WHO CONTRIBUTED IN
THE ESSAY 129, CONTENTS OF THE SECOND
VOLUME OF THE FIFTH SEMINAR 131, COVER
OF ONE VOLUME OF THE SIXTH SEMINAR 133,
PREFACE OF THE ONE VOLUNE SIXTH SEMI-
NAR 135, INTRODUCTION OF THE ONE VOL-
UME SIXTH SEMINAR 141, THE TWENTIETH
GROUP OF DISEASES OF SIATSU 147, OTHER
AREAS EXCEPT THE LEGS WILL HELP IN OUR
n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ ðéóìÝíïò ùò ðñïò ôï ðþò èá ëåéôïõñãÞóåé. ÐáñÜëëç-
ëá ðáñÝ÷åôáé üëç ç áðáñáßôçôç èåùñçôéêÞ êáôÜñôéóç
×ÅÉÑÏÐËÁÓÔÉÊÇ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ðïõ óõìðëçñþíåé ôçí ìüñöùóç ôïõ åîáóêïýìåíïõ, ç
´ ÔÏÌÏÓ ïðïßá ìáæß ìå ôçí ðñáêôéêÞ ìåèïäïëïãßá ôïõ äßíåé ôçí
åõ÷Ýñåéá íá áñ÷ßóåé íá ðáßñíåé ðñùôïâïõëßá ãéá âïÞèåéá
Åßíáé ôï ôñéáêïóôü Ýñãï ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ôïõ åáõôïý ôïõ êáé ôïõ óõíáíèñþðïõ ôïõ.
ÌáñãéùñÞ. Åßíáé ôñßôïìï êáé ï äåýôåñüò ôïõ ôüìïò åê- Ï ðñþôïò ôüìïò ôçò ×åéñïðëáóôéêÞò ðåñéÝ÷åé ôá ôÝó-
äüèçêå ôï 1993. óåñá ðñþôá óåìéíÜñéá (Áðñßëéïò 1989, ÍïÝìâñéïò 1989,
Ôï Ôñßôïìï êáé Üìåóá ðñáêôéêü áõôü óýããñáììá âá- ÌÜñôéïò 1990 êáé Éïýíéïò 1990), ï äåýôåñïò ôüìïò ôá
öôßóôçêå ×åéñïðëáóôéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ ÷ùñßò öÜñìáêá åðüìåíá ôÝóóåñá (ÌÜúïò 1991, ÍïÝìâñéïò 1991, ÌÜñ-
ãéá íá õðïäçëþóåé ôçí èåñáðåßá ìüíï ìå öõóéêÜ ìÝóá ôéïò 1992 êáé Éïýíéïò 1992) êáé ï ôñßôïò êáé ôåëåõôáßïò
êáé äç ìå ìéá ðëåéÜäá èåñáðåõôéêþí óõ- ôüìïò ôá åíáðïìåßíáíôá ôñßá óåìéíÜñéá
óôçìÜôùí, åßôå áõôüíïìá åßôå óå ìßîç (ÍïÝìâñéïò 1992, ÖåâñïõÜñéïò 1993,
ìåôáîý ôïõò, ðïõ õðÜãïíôáé óôçí Åóù- ôï ôñßôï åß÷å ðñïãñáììáôéóèåß ãéá ôïí
ôåñéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ, üðùò åßíáé: ç ÓéÜ- ÌÜúï ôïõ 1993 áëëÜ ëüãù ôçò ìåôÜóôá-
ôóïõ (éáðùíéêÞ ôå÷íéêÞ ðïõ óçìáßíåé äá- óçò ôïõ óõããñáöÝá ðñáãìáôïðïéÞèç-
êôõëïðßåóç), ç Áñ÷áßá ÅëëçíéêÞ Áóêëç- êå ôï öèéíüðùñï áðü ôçí âïçèü ôïõ
ðéáêÞ ÌÜëáîç (Áóêëçðéåßá - ÁìöéáñÜ- ÓìÜñù ÊïóìÜïãëïõ).
åéá), ç Äáêôõëïêôýðçóç (ìÝèïäïò Íéêï- Óêïðüò ôïõ üëïõ Ýñãïõ åßíáé íá äéäÜ-
ëÜïõ ÌáñãéùñÞ), ç õðïâïëÞ, ç Åãêïßìç- îåé ðñáêôéêÜ êáé èåùñçôéêÜ, ôé åßíáé ç áñ-
óç (óÞìåñá ïíïìÜæåôáé õðíùôéóìüò), ç ñþóôéá êáé ðþò ìðïñåß êáé ãßíåôáé íá èå-
Ñåöëåîïëïãßá, ç åðßäñáóç åðß ôùí ôñéá- ñáðåõèåß óùóôÜ êáé ñéæéêÜ, ìå ìéá áíþ-
íôáôñéþí óðïíäýëùí, ç ÓôáôéêÞ Èåñá- ôåñç åðÝìâáóç, äéÜöïñç åêåßíçò ðïõ
ðåõôéêÞ êáé ðÜñá ðïëëþí Üëëùí ìåèü- ãíùñßæïõìå êáé ðïõ áíôß ãéá öÜñìáêá
äùí öõóéêÞò - áöÜñìáêçò èåñáðåõôé- êáé íõóôÝñéá, ÷ñçóéìïðïéåß ôçí åóùôåñé-
êÞò ðïõ åîáóêïýíôáé ìå ãõìíÜ ÷Ýñéá, êÞ åíåñãçôéêüôçôá, ôïí áðïèçóáõñé-
ìå ãíþóç, åìðåéñßá êáé ðÜíù áð' üëá ìå ÓõãêÝíôñùóç. óìÝíï ìá êáé á÷ñçóéìïðïßçôï ðëïýóéï äõíáìéóìü êÜ-
Ðéï óõãêåêñéìÝíá ôï ôñßôïìï áõôü Ýñãï åßíáé áðïôÝ- èå áíèñþðïõ.
ëåóìá 11 ôñéÞìåñùí Óåìéíáñßùí ÁöÜñìáêçò Èåñáðåõ- Óôï åí ëüãù âéâëßï áíáëýåôáé áðü êÜèå Üðïøç, åîù-
ôéêÞò ðïõ äßäáîå ï ÄÜóêáëïò Íéêüëáïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò ôåñéêÞ êáé åóùôåñéêÞ, ç áññþóôéá êáé ôá áßôéÜ ôçò, êá-
óôçí Ýäñá ôïõ óôï Ïìáêïåßï Áèçíþí. Ó' áõôÜ Ýãéíå å- èþò åðßóçò êáé ôá âáóéêüôåñá óõóôÞìáôá ôçò Åóùôåñé-
êôåíÞò - åîáíôëçôéêÞ, èåùñçôéêÞ êáé ðñáêôéêÞ, áíÜëõ- êÞò ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò ãéá ôçí áðïêáôÜóôáóÞ ôçò êáé ôçí å-
óç ôùí âáóéêüôåñùí èåñáðåõôéêþí ìåèüäùí êáé ðñù- ðáíáöïñÜ ôçò õãåßáò êáé áñìïíßáò óôïí ðÜó÷ïíôá óõ-
ôßóôùò ôçò ÓéÜôóïõ. Ôçí ÷þñéóå óå 23 ïìÜäåò ðïõ áíôé- íÜíèñùðï. ÅìðåñéóôáôùìÝíá ðáñïõóéÜæïíôáé ôüóï èå-
ðñïóùðåýïõí ôéò 186 ðéï äéáäåäïìÝíåò áóèÝíåéåò êáé ùñçôéêÜ üóï êáé ðñáêôéêÜ, ïé ôå÷íéêÝò êáé ïé ìÝèïäïé
ì' áõôü ôïí ôñüðï ï üðïéïò åíäéáöåñüìåíïò Ý÷åé ôçí ðïõ èá ðñÝðåé íá áêïëïõèçèïýí ãéá íá åðéöÝñïõí ôï
äõíáôüôçôá âÜóåé ôçò ðÜèçóçò ðïõ Ý÷åé Þ ðïõ èÝëåé íá ðïèçôü áðïôÝëåóìá ôçò èåñáðåßáò.
èåñáðåýóåé íá áíáôñÝ÷åé óôï ôñßôïìï áõôü Ýñãï, íá Ï óõããñáöÝáò áíáöÝñåé êÜðïõ üôé "äéá ôïõ èåïý êáé
âëÝðåé óå ðïéá ïìÜäá Þ êáé ïìÜäåò õðÜãåôáé ôï ðñüâëç- ôçò êáëÞò ôý÷çò, ðåôõ÷áßíïíôáé ôá èåñáðåõôéêÜ áðï-
ìÜ ôïõ êáé óôç óõíÝ÷åéá íá êïéôÜåé ôá áíÜëïãá óêßôóá ôåëÝóìáôá. ÊÜèå åñãÜôçò ôïõ êáëïý åßíáé üñãáíï ôçò
ìå ôá óçìåßá ðïõ õðïäåéêíýïíôáé ãéá ôçí åîÜóêçóç ôçò áðáñÜâáôçò áãáèÞò ôý÷çò (ôïõ Èåïý), äçëáäÞ ôïõ Íü-
èåñáðåõôéêÞò ôå÷íéêÞò, þóôå íá åßíáé ðëÞñùò êáôáôï- ìïõ ôçò ÁíôáðïäïôéêÞò Äéêáéïóýíçò".
THERAPY 155, PRACTICE IN THERAPY OF THE the 21st group of diseases SIATSU PARALY- THE NECK VERTEBRAS FOR THE THERAPY OF
21 DISEASES OF THE 20TH GROUP BY SIATSU SIS OF THE RADIAL NERVE (WRISTROP) K- THE CHEST DISEASES 311, BRONCHIAL ASTH-
161, PRESENTATION OF THERAPY OF THE ERKIDIC FALL OF THE WRIST 247, Fifth dis- MA, The first of the four diseases of the
20TH GROUP OF THE 21 DISEASES WITH PIC- ease - PARALYSIS OF THE UNLAR NERVE (LAW- 22nd group of diseases of SIATSU 317, NEU-
TURES167, CONCLUSIONS OF THE ONE VOL- HAND) FINGERNAIL IRREGULARITY 253, The RALGIAS BETWEEN THE RIBS The second dis-
UME SIXTH SEMINAR 189, EPILOGUE OF THE sixth disease of the 21st group of diseases ease of the twentieth second group of SIAT-
ONE VOLUME SIXTH SEMINAR 195, THANKS SIATSU ARTICULAR RHEUMASTISM 257, Sev- SU 327, INSUFFICIENT SUCKLING Third dis-
TO THOSE WHO HELPED IN THE EDITION OF enth disease of the 21st group of diseases ease of the 22nd group of diseases SIATSU
THE ESSAY OF THE SIXTH SEMINAR 199, CON- SIATSU HEMIPLEGIA PARALYSIS OF THE ONE 333, HEART DISEASES Fourth disease of the
TENTS OF THE ONE VOLUME SIXTH SEMINAR SIDE OF THE HUMAN BODY 261, Eighth dis- twentieth second group of diseases of SIAT-
201, COVER OF THE SEVENTH SEMINAR OF ease of the 21st group of diseases of SIAT- SU 351, EPILOGUE OF THE EIGHTH ESSAY OF
SIATSU 203, READER'S INFORMATION ABOUT SU: REYNAUDS DISEASES PARALYSIS OF THE THE TWENTIETH SECOND GROUP OF DISEASES
THE SEVENTH ESSAY 205, PREFACE OF THE ARMS MUSCLES, MAINLY IN WOMEN 273, OF SIATSU 369, THANKS TO THOSE WHO CON-
ONE VOLUME SEVENTH SEMINAR 209, IN- Ninth disease of the 21s group of diseases TRIBUTED TO THE EDITION OF THE EIGHTH ES-
TRODUCTION OF THE ONE VOLUME SEVENTH of SIATSU WRITERS CRAMP 283, CONCLU- SAY OF SIATSU 375, CONTENTS OF THE
SEMINAR 215, THE TWENTIETH FIRST GROUP SIONS 287, EPILOGUE 289, THANKS 293, CON- EIGHTH ESSAY OF SIATSU 377, CONCLUSIONS
OF DISEASES OF SIATSU 221, The first dis- TENTS OF THE SEVENTH ESSAY, OF THE SEV- ON THE FOUR SEMINARS OF THE SECOND
ease of the 21st group of diseases SIATSU ENTH SEMINAR 295, COVER OF THE EIHTHTH VOLUME 379, EPILOGUE OF THE SECOND VOL-
HYPERARTHRITICS OF SHOULDER BLADE OF ONE VOLUME ESSAY 297, FUTURE READER'S UME OF THERAPEUTICS WITHOUT MEDICINES
SIATSU 229, The second disease of the 21st ADVISING HOW TO USE THE THERAPEUTICAL SIATSU 381, A FEW WORDS ABOUT THE COV-
group of diseases SIATSU "BRACHIAL NEU- METHOD SIATSU 299, PREFACE OF THE EI- ER IMAGE OF THE SECOND VOLUME OF CHI-
RALGIA" 237, The third disease of the 21st THTH ESSAY OF THE EIGHTH SEMINAR 303, ROPLASTIC BY ASCLEPIOS 383, CONTENTS OF
group of diseases SIATSU "PARALYSIS OF THE INTRODUCTION OF THE EITHTH ESSAY OF THE THE SECOND VOLUME OF CHIROPLASTIC SIAT-
MEDIAN NERVE" 241, The fourth disease of EIGHTH SEMINAR 307, GENERALITIES USE OF SU 387.
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 57 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 Ç ÌÕÓÔÉÊÇ ÄÉÄÁÓÊÁËÉÁ - ´ ÔÏÌÏÓ êáé ÐáíóõìðáíôéêÞ Áñìïíßá 91, Ìçôñéáñ÷ßá 261, Ç ØéèõñéóôéêÞ Äéáäï÷Þ 271, Óêïðüò ôçò LY AND OMNIUNIVERSAL HARMONY 91, MA-
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ êáé Ðáôñáñ÷ßá 99, ÆùÞ êáé ÈÜíáôïò107, Ôï ÌõóôéêÞò Äéäáóêáëßáò 279, Íá ôé ìáò ëÝãåé TRIARCHY AND PATRIARCHY 99, LIFE AND
ÈåñìÞ ðáñÜêëçóç 5, Ðïõ ãñÜöôçêå ôï Ðñïðáôïñéêü ÁìÜñôçìá 115, Áõôüìáôç ç ÌõóôéêÞ Äéäáóêáëßá 287, Ðùò ëåéôïõñãåß DEATH 107, THE ORIGINAL SIN 115, AUTO-
Ýñãï 6, Ç ïíïìáóßá ôïõ Ýñãïõ 6, Ìéá ÃñáöÞ êáé Ïìéëßá 125, Èíçôüôçôá êáé ç Õðåñóõíåßäçóç ôïõ êÜèå óõíáíèñþðïõ MATIC WRITING AND TALK 125, MORTALITY
äéåõêñßíéóç ãéá ôï Ýñãï ìïõ 7, Ôé áêñéâþò èá Áèáíáóßá 133, ÕðÞñîáí áëçèéíÜ ÌõóôÞñéá 295, Ôñßôï ÌÜôé êáé ç ëåéôïõñãßá ôïõ 305, Ôï AND IMMORTALITY 133, THERE WERE TRUE
ðåñéëáìâÜíåé ï äåýôåñïò ôüìïò ôçò 141, Ðñïêáôáêëõóìéáßïé Ðïëéôéóìïß 151, Ï Áíþôåñï Åãþ êáé ôï êáôþôåñï åãþ 313, MYSTERIES 141, ANTEDILUVIAN CIVILIZATIONS
ÌõóôéêÞò Äéäáóêáëßáò 9, Ðñüëïãïò 11, Ðëáôùíéêüò Óôï÷áóìüò 161, Âñõêüëáêåò êáé Ìáíáóáðïýôñá 321, Ï èÜíáôïò åßíáé ç æùÞ 151, THE PLATONIC THOUGHT 161, VAMPIRES
ÅéóáãùãÞ 19, Ðñïëåãüìåíá 27, ÌÝóá óôá ÖáíôÜóìáôá 171, Ôï ÁíÝóðåñï Öùò181, Ç ìáò 329, Ïé ôñåéò ÌÝãéóôïé Ëüãïé 337, Ç AND GHOSTS 171, THE ETERNAL LIGHT 181,
Üðåéñá âÜèç ôïõ ôïðï÷ñüíïõ 31, Ï ÌÝãáò ðñïò êáôáóêåõÞ 14ç ÄéÜóôáóç 191, Íïõò ÁíÜóôáóç ôïõ ËáæÜñïõ 345, Ç ÁíÜóôáóç THE 14TH DIMENSION UNDER CONSTRUCTION
Èåßïò Íïõò 37, ÁôÝñìïíá åßíáé ôá ÓõóôÞìáôá êáé Ëåéôïõñãßá ôïõ 201, Ôá ¼íåéñá êáé ç ôïõ Éçóïý ×ñéóôïý 353, Ï ÔÝôáñôïò ôùí 191, MIND AND ITS FUNCTION 201, THE
ôïõ áðåñéüñéóôïõ Èåßïõ Íïõ 47, Ïé Õðíþóåéò ÁëÞèåéá ôïõò 211, Ç óÜñêùóç ôùí ÌÜãùí 361, Ç ÊáñìéêÞ ÅðéôñïðÞ 369, DREAMS AND THEIR TRUTH 211, THE INCAR-
ôïõ êáé ïé Áöõðíßóåéò ôïõ 57, ÐõèáãïñéêÝò ðíåõìáôïøõ÷þí 221, Ôï ÌõóôÞñéï ôçò Åðßëïãïò 377, Ëßãá ëüãéá ãéá ôï åîþöõëëï NATION OF THE SPIRITSOULS 221, THE MYS-
áðüøåéò ãéá ôï Èåü, ôïí êüóìï êáé ôá üíôá Èåßáò Êïíùíßáò 231, Ìõóôéêéóìüò ôïõ ´ ôüìïõ 381, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá 383, TERY OF THE HOLY COMMUNION 231, ACTI-
ôïõ 65, Ôï Èåßï Ó÷Ýäéï êáé ï Üíèñùðïò 73, ÄñáóôçñéïðïéçìÝíïò 241, Ïé ÄéäÜóêáëïé ôçò Êõêëïöïñïýíôá ôïõ ßäéïõ âéâëßá ìåëÝôåò, VATED MYSTICISM 241, THE WISDOM MAS-
Ôá ÁããåëéêÜ ôïõ ÔÜãìáôá 81, ÐáíïõñÜíéá Óïößáò 251, Ï Èñçóêåõôéêüò Ìõóôéêéóìüò ðåñéïäéêü, åóùôåñéêü êëåéäß, ó÷ïëÝò 385. TERS 251, THE RELIGIOUS MYSTICISM 261,
THE WHISPERING SUCCESSION 271, AIM OF
MYSTIC TEACHING, 2nd VOLUME THE MYSTIC TEACHING 279, HERE IS WHAT
n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ CONTENTS THE MYSTIC TEACHING TELLS US 287, HOW
ÌÕÓÔÉÊÇ ÄÉÄÁÓÊÁËÉÁ WARM REQUEST 5, WHERE THIS WORK
WAS WRITTEN 6, THE NAME OF THE WORK 6,
EVERY FELLOW-MAN'S HYPERCONSCIENCE
FUNCTIONS 295, THE THIRD EYE AND ITS
´ ÔÏÌÏÓ A CLARIFICATION ABOUT MY WORK 7, WHAT
EXACTLY THE SECOND VOLUME OF THE MYS-
FUNCTION 305, THE SUPERIOR EGO AND THE
LOWER EGO 313, MANASAPUTRA 321, DEATH
TIC TEACHING WILL CONTAIN 9, PREFACE 11, IS OUR LIFE 329, THE THREE GREATEST WORDS
Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá ôï ôñéáêïóôü ðñþôï Ýñãï INTRODUCTION 19, FORWORD 27, IN THE IN- 337, LAZARU'S RESURRECTION 345, JESUS
ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ. Åß- FINITE DEPTHS OF PLACE-TIME 31, THE GREAT CHRIST'S RESURRECTION 353, THE FOURTH
íáé ôñßôïìï êáé ï äåýôåñïò ôüìïò ôïõ åê- DIVINE MIND 37, ENDLESS ARE THE SYSTEMS MAGICIAN 361, THE CARMIC COMMISSION
äüèçêå ôï 1993. OF THE INFINITE DIVINE MIND 47, ITS HYP- 369, EPILOGUE 377, A FEW WORDS ABOUT
Ï äåýôåñïò ôüìïò ôçò ÌõóôéêÞò Äéäá- NOSISES AND ITS AWAKENINGS 57, THE COVER OF THE B' VOLUME 381, CON-
PYTHAGORIC VIEWS ABOUT GOD, WORLD AND TENTS 383, CIRCULATING BOOKS OF SAME -
óêáëßáò ðåñéÝ÷åé ôéò èÝóåéò ôïõ Èåïý êáé ITS BEINGS 65, THE DIVINE PLAN AND MAN ESSAYS - JOURNAL - ESOTERIC KEY - SCHOOLS
ôùí ÌåãÜëùí ÔÝêíùí Ôïõ. Ï áíáãíþóôçò 73, ITS ANGELIC ORDERS 81, OMNIHEAVEN- 385.
èá ðáñáêïëïõèÞóåé ôéò äéáôõðïýìåíåò á-
ðüøåéò ôïõ óõããñáöÝá ÍéêïëÜïõ Ìáñãéù-
ñÞ, ðÜíù óôéò èÝóåéò ðïõ êéíïýíôáé ïé óêÝøåéò ôïõ ÐáôÝñá êáé ôùí Üîéùí ðáé- n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
äéþí Ôïõ, ðïõ åñãÜæïíôáé ìå ðñïèõìßá ãéá ôï Èåßï Ó÷Ýäéü Ôïõ.
¸ôóé ìáò äßíåôáé ç åõêáéñßá íá ðáñáêïëïõèÞóïõìå ôïõ Íïõ ôéò ðñáãìá- MYSTIC TEACHING, 2nd VOLUME
ôþóåéò, ìå óôï÷áóôéêÞ ðñïóðÜèåéá, ðïõ áöïñïýí âáèéÝò áëÞèåéåò ãéá ôï Ìå-
ãÜëï Ïí, ðïõ Ýêáíå ôïõò Êüóìïõò Ôïõ (ôéò ÄéáóôÜóåéò Ôïõ) êáé ôá ¼íôá Ôïõ. This is Master Nikolaos A. Mariori's thirty-first work. It comprises three
¼ðùò ðåñéãñÜöåôáé äåí Ý÷ïõí áñ÷Þ êáé ôÝëïò ôá óõóôÞìáôá ôïõ Èåßïõ volumes and its second volume was published in 1993.
Íïõ. Äéüôé ï Íïõò Ôïõ äåí Ý÷åé ðåñéïñéóìïýò, äåí Ý÷åé ïýôå áñ÷Þ ïýôå ðï- The second volume of the Mystic Teaching contains the positions of
ôÝ ôïõ ôÝëïò. Åßíáé áéþíéïò. Åßíáé Üðåéñïò. Åßíáé ðáíôïãíþóôçò êáé ÐÜíóï- God and of His Great Children. The reader will follow Nikolaos Mariori's for-
öïò. Åßíáé ôï ¢ðáí. Åßíáé ç Ôåëåéüôçôá êáé ðëçñüôçôá ôùí ÐÜíôùí. Åßíáé ç mulated points of view, on the thesises where the thoughts of Father and
ÐçãÞ ôçò Èåßáò Ãíþóçò êáé ôçò ÈåúêÞò Óïößáò. of His capable chilndren who work willingly for His Divine Plan, move.
Áõôü ôï Íïõ ôïí ¢ðåéñï êáé ôïí Áéþíéï, ôïí ÐÜíóïöï êáé ôïí Ðáíôïãíþ- Therefore, we are given the opportunity to follow, in a thinking effort,
óôç, ðñïóðáèåß ï äåýôåñïò ôüìïò ôçò ÌõóôéêÞò Äéäáóêáëßáò, êÜðùò íá the realizations of the Mind that concern the deep truths for the Great Be-
óêéáãñáöÞóåé, íá ðåñéãñÜøåé, ìÝóá óôïí êüóìï ôçò ìïñöÞò êáé ôçò áôÝ- ing, that made His Worlds (His Dimensions) and His Beings.
ëåéáò. Áõôü óçìáßíåé, ðþò üóï êáé íá ðñïóðáèÞóåé ï áíèñùðïíïýò íá äéåéó- As described, the systems of the Divine Mind have neither beginning nor
äýóåé óôá êïíôéíÜ Âáóßëåéá ôïõ áðñïóðÝëáóôïõ Íïõ Ôïõ, äåí èá ìðïñÝóåé end. For His Mind has no limits, has no beginning nor end. It is eternel. It
ðïôÝ íá êáôáëÜâåé ôï ìÝãåèüò Ôïõ êáé ôï ìåãáëåßï Ôïõ, ðáñÜ èá äþóåé óýì- is infinite. It is omniknower and Omniwise. It is Everything. It is the Per-
öùíá ìå ôéò ðåñéïñéóìÝíåò äõíÜìåéò ôïõ, áìõäñÝò ðåñéãñáöÝò ôùí äõíá- fection and the Completion of All. It is the Source of the Divine Knowledge,
ôïôÞôùí Ôïõ êáé Ó÷åäßùí Ôïõ, ðïõ óõíÝ÷åéá ðáñÜãåé êáé èÝôåé óå åöáñìï- and of the Divine Wisdom.
ãÞ ãéá ìéá áÝíáç åîýøùóç ôùí ðÜíôùí. The second volume of the Mystic Teaching tries to sketch and to describe
Äéáôõðþíïíôáé ôá áéþíéá óêéñôÞìáôá ôïõ Íïõ Ôïõ, ðïõ ìÝóá Ôïõ ãåí- somehow this Infinite Mind in the world of the forms and of the imper-
íéïýíôáé êÜèå óôéãìÞ ôïõ áíýðáñêôïõ ãéá Åêåßíïí ÷ñüíïõ, íÝïé êüóìïé ìå fection. This means that, even if the manmind tries hard to penetrate the
êáéíïýñãéá óõóôÞìáôá ãéá áíÜðôõîç êáé åîÝëéîç. Åßíáé ìéá ðñïóðÜèåéá íá near Kingdoms of His impenetrable Mind, it will neve be able to understand
ðëçñïöïñÞóåé ôéò áíèñùðïøõ÷Ýò óôçí äÝêáôç Ôñßôç äéÜóôáóç ôïõ öõóéêï- His greatness and His grandeur, but it will give, according to his confined
áéèåñéêïý ìáò êüóìïõ, ãéá ôá áéþíéá óõìâåâçêüôá ðïõ ëáâáßíïõí ÷þñá ìÝ- powers, some faint descriptions of His abilities and of His Plans, that he
óá Ôïõ. ÐåñéëáìâÜíåé áíÜëïãá êåöÜëáéá ðïõ ðñïåôïéìÜæïõí áö' åíüò ôïí continually produces and applies for a perpetual elevation of everything.
áíáãíþóôç íá åéóÝëèåé óôéò åóùôåñéêÝò äéåñãáóßåò ôùí ó÷çìáôéóìþí ôùí The eternel thrills of His Mind express themselves inside Him at every
Êüóìùí êáé ôùí ¼íôùí õðü ôïõ ìåãÜëïõ Íïõ êáé áö' åôÝñïõ ôïí åéóÜãïõí moment of the time non-existent for Him, and new worlds with new sys-
ìÝóá óôá áéþíéá ìõóôÞñéá ôçò Ðáíäçìéïõñãßáò, üðïõ ç åíáëëáãÞ ôùí ðÜ- tems for the development and for the evolution are born. It is an effort
íôùí åßíáé Èåßïò Óêïðüò êáé üðïõ ôï ôÝëåéï óõíÝ÷åéá ãßíåôáé ôåëåéüôåñï ÷ù- to inform the mansouls about the thirtienth dimension of our physi-
ñßò êáìéÜ áíÜðáõëá. coetheric world, for the eternal facts that take place within Him. The Mys-
Ç ÌõóôéêÞ Äéäáóêáëßá óêïðü ôçò Ý÷åé íá äþóåé áíþôåñïõò äïíéóìïýò tic Teaching aims to give higher vibrations to the reader so that the sub-
óôïí áíáãíþóôç þóôå íá åñåèéóèåß ç ìÝóá ôïõ õðïóõíåßäçôç ãíþóç ðïõ conscious knowledge within him that due to the absolute identification
ëüãù ôçò áðüëõôçò ôáýôéóçò ôïõ áíèñþðéíïõ Íïõ ìå ôçí óõíåßäçóç êáé ôá of the human Mind with the conscience and with the external phenome-
åîùôåñéêÜ öáéíüìåíá Ý÷åé åãêáôáëåéöèåß ùò Ü÷ñçóôç ìå áðïôÝëåóìá ôçí na, has been abandoned as useless, resulting his psychical and spiritual
øõ÷éêÞ êáé ðíåõìáôéêÞ ôïõ ãýìíéá êáé ôï áðüëõôï óêëÜâùìÜ ôïõ óôçí ýëç. bareness and his absolute slavery in the matter.
ÂëÝðå êáé ôéò ðåñéëÞøåéò ôùí Üëëùí äýï ôüìùí. See also the summaries of the two other volumes.

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 58 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
ÌÕÓÔÉÊÇ ÄÉÄÁÓÊÁËÉÁ ô ÔÏÌÏÓ
Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá ôï ôñéáêïóôü äåýôåñï Ýñãï ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ
ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ. Åßíáé ôñßôïìï êáé ï ôñßôïò ôüìïò
ôïõ åêäüèçêå ôï 1994.
Ï ôñßôïò ôüìïò ôçò ÌõóôéêÞò Äéäáóêáëßáò åßíáé ôï ôå-
ëåõôáßï ïëïêëçñùìÝíï Ýñãï (óå ìïñöÞ âéâëßïõ) ôïõ Ìáñ-
ãéùñÞ. ÃñÜöçêå êáé ðáñáäüèçêå ïëïêëçñùìÝíïò ãéá Ýê-
äïóç êáôÜ ôï äéÜóôçìá Öåâñïõáñßïõ - Áðñéëßïõ 1993, á-
ðü ôïí ßäéï ôïí óõããñáöÝá Íéêüëáï Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ óôïí
ìáèçôÞ ôïõ Çëßá Ë. ÊáôóéÜìðá, åêäüôç ôçò êáèçìåñéíÞò
åöçìåñßäáò ôùí ÔñéêÜëùí "Ç ÅÑÅÕÍÁ".
ÌåôÜ ôçí ìåôÜóôáóç ôïõ óõããñáöÝá ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. Ìáñ-
ãéùñÞ óôéò 6-5-1993 óõíå÷ßóôçêå ôï Ýñãï ôçò Ýêäïóçò ôïõ ô ôüìïõ õ-
ðü ôçí åðßâëåøç ôùí êëçñïíüìùí ôïõ óõããñáöÝá, Êáëëéüðçò êáé Áí-
äñÝá ÌáñãéùñÞ, áëëÜ êáé ìå ôçí èåñìÞ õðïóôÞñéîç ôùí ìáèçôþí ôïõ
Ïìáêïåßïõ Áèçíþí, ôïõ ïðïßïõ éäñõôÞò Þôáí ï Íéêüëáïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò,
ôïõ Ïìáêïåßïõ Ëáìßáò êáé ôïõ Ïìáêïåßïõ ÔñéêÜëùí.
Ï ôñßôïò ôüìïò ðåñéÝ÷åé ôçí áíÜëõóç ôçò ÌõóôéêÞò ÆùÞò êáé Ìõóôé-
êÞò ÁíÜâáóçò, ìåãÜëùí êáé ìåãßóôùí üíôùí ôçò áíèñùðüôçôáò, ôçò Éí-
äéêÞò Öéëïóïößáò, ôçò ÅëëçíéêÞò ÖõëÞò êáé ôçò ×ñéóôéáíéêÞò Èñçóêåß-
áò.
Óêïðüò ôïõ óõããñáöÝá åßíáé íá äéáöùôéóèåß áðüëõôá ï áíáãíþóôçò
ôïõ ðÜíù óôéò ìåèüäïõò áíÜâáóçò ðñïò ôçí õðåñôåëåéüôçôá ôùí åîáé-
ñåôéêþí øõ÷þí ôçò áíèñùðüôçôáò, ðïõ ãíþñéóáí ôçí õðåñôåëåéüôçôá,
ôïí ÐëÜóôç ðÜíôùí êáé Èåü êáé öùôßóôçêáí áõôüìáôá áðü ôçí åðáöÞ
áõôÞ êáé Ýãéíáí êÞñõêåò ôçò ïñèÞò êáé áëçèéíÞò êáé åóþôåñçò ÓÏÖÉÁÓ,
ðïõ óêéÜ ôçò ðåíé÷ñÞ êáé ìéóïóêüôåéíç åßíáé ç áíèñþðéíç óïößá, ãé' áõ-
ôÞí ðïõ êüðôïíôáé ïé ó÷ïëáóôéêïß, ïé ïñèïëïãéóôÝò êáé ïé äéáíïçôÝò êáé
åðéóôÞìïíåò, êáôÝ÷ïíôåò ÌÏÍÏÍ ÔÏ ÃÑÁÌÌÁ ÔÇÓ ÖÕÓÉÊÏÛËÇÓ êáé ü÷é ôï
n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
MYSTIC TEACHING, 3rd VOLUME
This is Master Nikolaos A. Mariori's thirty-second work. It contains
three volumes and its third volume was published in 1994.
The third volume of the Mystic Teaching is Mariori's last complete
work (in a book form). It was written and delivered integrated for a
publication, in February-April 1993, by the writer himself Nikolaos
A. Marioris, to his student Ilias L. Katsiabas, publisher of the daily
Trikala journal "THE SEARCH".
After writer Nikolaos A. Mariori's departure on May sixth 1993, the
work of the edition of the 3rd volume was continued under the su-
pervision of the writer's heirs, Kalliopi and Andreas Marioris, but al-
so with the warm support of the students in Athens Omakoeio, whose
the founder was Nikolaos A. Marioris, of Lamia Omakoeio and of
Trikala Omakoeio.
The third volume comprises the analysis of the Mystic Life and of
the Mystic Ascension, of the great and greatest being of the hu-
manity, of the Indian Philosophy, of the Greek race and of the Chris-
tianic religion.
The writer's aim is to enlighten his reader on the methods of the
ascension to the hyper-perfection of the supreme souls of the hu-
manity that knew the hyperperfection, the Creator of evrything and
God and that were automatically enlightened by this touch and be-
came the heralds of the right and the true and inner WISDOM, of
which the poor and half-dark shadow is the human wisdom, for which
the scholastics, the orthologists and the intellectuals and the scien-
tists, possessinh ONLY THE LETTER OF THE PHYSICMATTER and not the
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
ðíåýìá ðïõ æùïãïíåß (ôïí æþíôá Üñôï).
ÐáñÝ÷ïíôáé áêñéâåßò ðëçñïöïñßåò ãéá ôçí ðñáãìáôéêü-
ôçôá ôçò ÌåôáöõóéêÞò êáé éäéáßôåñá ôïõ ìåãßóôïõ êáé á-
îéïëïãüôåñïõ ìÝñïõò ôçò, ôïõ Ìõóôéêéóìïý, ðïõ ôüóï Ý-
÷åé ðáñåîçãçèåß êáé ôüóï Üó÷çìá êáé Üðñåðá Ý÷åé ÷ñçóé-
ìïðïéçèåß ç ëÝîç áõôÞ, áðü ôïõò ìç ãíùñßæïíôåò óùóôÜ
ôá åóùôåñéêÜ ðñÜãìáôá.
¼ðùò ðåñéãñÜöåôáé ó' áõôü üëç ç ÅóùðáíåðéóôÞìç, ç
ÌåôáöõóéêÞ Þ Åóùôåñéóìüò, ÷ùñßæåôáé óå äýï ìåãÜëá
ìÝñç, ôçí Áðïêñõöïëïãßá êáé ôïí Ìõóôéêéóìü. Ç ìåí Á-
ðïêñõöïëïãßá áó÷ïëåßôáé ìå ôïõò êüóìïõò êáé ôá üíôá
ðïõ êáôïéêïýí óôéò Üðåéñåò äéáóôÜóåéò, áõôÝò ðïõ ç ðïé-
êéëßá ôïõò åîáñôÜôáé áðü ôï ðüóï êïíôÜ óôçí Ýäñá ôïõ
ÐëÜóôç ôïõò âñßóêïíôáé. ¼óï îåìáêñáßíïõí, ôüóï ðïë-
ëáðëáóéÜæïíôáé ôá åßäç ôïõò, ãéáôß äéáöïñïðïéïýíôáé á-
ðü ôçí áðïìÜêñõíóÞ ôïõò áðü ôçí ÐíåõìáôéêÞ Åóôßá.
Ç øõ÷ïðíåõìáôéêÞ áíèñþðéíç ýðáñîç ðñïóðáèåß íá äéåñåõíÞóåé ôá
ìõóôÞñéá ôùí Üðåéñùí áõôþí êüóìùí êáé üíôùí êáé ÷ñçóéìïðïéåß ãéá ôï
óêïðü áõôü ôçí õðåñåðéóôÞìç Þ ôçí "Ðñþôç ôùí Åðéóôçìþí" ôçí Áðï-
êñõöïëïãßá. ÁõôÞ åßíáé ï Ýíáò êëÜäïò ôçò ÌåôáöõóéêÞò.
Áíôßèåôá ï Üëëïò êëÜäïò ôçò ÌåôáöõóéêÞò åßíáé ï Ìõóôéêéóìüò, ðïõ
óáí ìïíáäéêü ôïõ óêïðü Ý÷åé íá åíþóåé ôïí Üíèñùðï åíüóù áêüìá æåé
åäþ êÜôù óôç ãç, ìå öõóéêü óþìá êáé áéóèÞóåéò, ìå ôïí ÐáôÝñá êáé ÐëÜ-
óôç Ôïõ êáé Äçìéïõñãü Ôïõ êáé Èåü Ôïõ.
ÁõôÞ ç ðñïóðÜèåéá ôïõ åîáéñåôéêïý óõíáíèñþðïõ åßíáé äýóêïëç ðï-
ëý êáé áîéïèáýìáóôç êáé õðï÷ñåþíåé ôï èíçôü ðïõ ôçí áðïæçôåß, íá á-
íåâåß ôá áðáñáßôçôá ðíåõìáôïóêáëïðÜôéá êáé íá åîïìïéùèåß ìå ôïí ÐëÜ-
óôç - ÐáôÝñá - Èåü, ãåíüìåíïò óéãÜ óéãÜ ôÝëåéïò êáé ôåëåéüôåñïò êáé ôå-
ëåéüôáôïò, þóðïõ íá ìïéÜóåé ôïõ Èåïý, ôïõ Ãéïõ Ôïõ, ôïõ ×ñéóôïý, åí-
óôåñíéæüìåíïò ôï ÁÃÉÏÍ ÐÍÅÕÌÁ. Íá ï óêïðüò ôïõ Ôñßôïìïõ áõôïý Ýñ-
ãïõ ôçò ÌõóôéêÞò Äéäáóêáëßáò.
ÂëÝðå êáé ôéò ðåñéëÞøåéò ôùí Üëëùí äýï ôüìùí.
spirit that animates (the living bread).
Exact information is provided for the reality of the Metaphysics
and particularly, of its greatest and most important part, of the M-
sticism that has been misunderstood greatly. In fact, this word has
been used very badly and improperly by those who do not know the
esoteric matters well.
As described in it, all the Esoscience, the Metaphysics or the Eso-
terism is divided in two great parts: Occultism and Mysticsm. The Oc-
cultism is occupied with the worlds and the beings that live in the
immense dimensions, those that their variety depends on how near
to the seat of their Creator are found. As long as they go away,as
their species get multiplied, because they are differentiated due to
their removal from the spiritual Hestia.
The soulspiritual human existence tries to search the mysteries of
these infinite worlds and beings and uses fot this purpose the hy-
perscience or the "First of the Sciences" the Occultism. This is the
one branch of the Metaphysics.
On the contrary, the other branch of the Metaphysics is Mysticism
the uniqie aim of which is to unite man as long as he still lives here
on earth, in a physical body and sensations, with his Father and his
Creator and his Molder and his God.
This effort of the excellent fellow-man is very difficult and ad-
mirable and obliges the mortal being that seeks it to ascend to the
necessary spiritsteps and to be equalized with the Creator-Father-
God, becoming gradually perferct, and more perfect and most per-
fect, until he looks like God, His son, Christ, adopting the HOLY SPIR-
IT. Here is the aim of this work of the Mystic Teaching of the three
volumes.
See also the summaries of the other two volumes.
59 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 Ç ÌÕÓÔÉÊÇ ÄÉÄÁÓÊÁËÉÁ - ô ÔÏÌÏÓ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
Éóôïñéêü ôïõ âéâëßïõ 4, ÈåñìÞ ðáñÜ-
êëçóç 5, Ìéá äéåõêñßíéóç ôïõ Ýñãïõ 6,
Ðïõ ãñÜöôçêå ôï Ýñãï 7, Ïíïìáóßá ôïõ
Ýñãïõ 7, ÁöéÝñùóç ôïõ üëïõ ôñßôïìïõ
Ýñãïõ 8, Ðïéïò ï óêïðüò ôïõ ôñßôïìïõ
áõôïý Ýñãïõ 9, Ìéá õðåíèýìéóç 11, Ï
Äñüìïò ôçò ÁëÞèåéáò 11, Ðüôå åîåäþ-
èçêáí ïé ôñåéò ôüìïé 12, Ðñüëïãïò ôïõ
ôñßôïõ ôüìïõ 13, ÅéóáãùãÞ ôïõ ôñßôïõ
ôüìïõ 20, Ìõóôéêéóìüò êáé Äéáëïãéóìüò
23, Áñ÷áßåò êáé ÍÝåò äéáêåêñéìÝíåò Ðñï-
óùðéêüôçôåò ôçò ÌåôáöõóéêÞò ÅðéóôÞ-
ìçò, ãíùóôÝò êáé Üãíùóôåò 35, Ï Áðü-
óôïëïò ôùí Åèíþí Ðáýëïò 49, Ï Åõáã-
ãåëéóôÞò ÉùÜííçò 85, Ï Ìõóôéêéóìüò ôïõ
Íéêüäçìïõ Áãéïñåßôç, Íéêüëáïõ Êáëõ-
âïýñôóç 123, Ç ÌõóôéêéóôéêÞ Ôå÷íéêÞ ôùí
ôñéþí áãßùí ôçò ×ñéóôéáíïóýíçò, Ðáý-
ëïõ, ÅõáããåëéóôÞ ÉùÜííç, Íéêüäçìïõ Á-
ãéïñåßôç 159, Ï Ìõóôéêéóìüò ôïõ Èåüöé-
ëïõ ÊáÀñç 181, Ï Ìõóôéêéóìüò Ãñçãïñß-
ïõ ÐáëáìÜ, Áñ÷éåðéóêüðïõ Èåóóáëïíß-
êçò, Çóõ÷áóôïý Ïìöáëïóêüðïõ 209, Ï
Ìõóôéêéóìüò ôïõ Ñáìáêñßóíá, ôåëåõôáß-
ïõ áãßïõ ôçò Éíäßáò 239, Ï Ìõóôéêéóìüò
ôïõ ÂéâåêáíÜíôá, ìáèçôïý ôïõ Ñáìáêñß-
óíá 291, Ï Ìõóôéêéóìüò ôïõ Áäáìáíôßïõ
ÙñéãÝíïõò, ôñßôïõ äéåõèõíôïý ôçò êáôç-
÷çôéêÞò ó÷ïëÞò ÁëåîÜíäñåéáò 321, Óõ-
ìðåñÜóìáôá 345, Åðßëïãïò 361, Ðåñéå-
÷üìåíá 369, Êõêëïöïñïýíôá ôïõ ßäéïõ
âéâëßá, ìåëÝôåò, ðåñéïäéêü, åóùôåñéêü
êëåéäß, ó÷ïëÝò 371, Ëßãá ëüãéá ãéá ôïí
óõããñáöÝá 377.
MYSTIC THECING, 3rd VOLUME
CONTENTS
THE BACKGROUND OF THE BOOK 4,
WARM REQUEST 5 , A CLARIFICATION ABOUT
THE WORK 6, WHERE THE WORK WAS WRIT-
TEN 7, NAME OF THE WORK 7, DEDICATION
OF ALL THE THREE-VOLUME WORK 8, WHAT
IS THE AIM OF THIS THREE-VOLUME WORK
9, A REMINDING 11, THE WAY OF TRUTH
11, WHEN THE THREE VOLUMES WERE PUB-
LISHED 12, PREFACE OF THE THIRD VOL-
UME 13, INTRODUCTION OF THE THIRD VOL-
UME 20, MYSTICISM AND MEDITATION 23,
ANCIENT AND NEW DISTINGUISHED PER-
SONALITIES OF THE METAPHYSICAL SCIENCE,
KNOWN AND UNKNOWN 35, PAVLOS, THE
APOSTLE OF THE NATIONS 49, EVANGELIST
IOANNIS 85, NIKODIMOS THE AGIORITI'S,
NIKOLAOS KALIVURTSI'S MYSTICISM 123, THE
MYSTICISTIC TECHNIQUE OF THE THREE
SAINTS OF CHRISTENDOM, PAVLOS - EVAN-
GELIST IOANNIS - NIKODIMOS THE AGIORITIS
159, THEOFILOS KAIRI'S MYSTICISM 181, THE
MYSTICISM OF GRIGORIOS PALAMA'S, THE
ARCHBISHOP OF THESSALONIKI, HERMIT
AND NAVEL-GAZER 209, THE MYSTICISM OF
RAMAKRISNA, THE LAST SAINT OF INDIA 239,
THE MYSTICISM OF VIVEKANANDA, RA-
MAKRISNA'S STUDENT 291, THE MYSTICISM
OF ADAMANTIOS ORIGHENIS, THE THIRD DI-
RECTOR OF THE CATECHETIC SCHOOL OF
ALEXANDRIA 321, CONCLUSIONS 345, EPI-
LOGUE 361, CONTENTS 369, CIRCULATING
BOOKS OF SAME - ESSAYS - JOURNAL - ES-
OTERIC KEY - SCHOOLS 371, A FEW WORDS
ABOUT THE WRITER 377.

×ÅÉÑÏÐËÁÓÔÉÊÇ ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ Ã´ ÔÏÌÏÓ

ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
ÁöéÝñùóç ôïõ Ýñãïõ 6, ¸íáôï
Öèéíïðùñéíü Èåñáðåõôéêü ÓåìéíÜñéï
ÓéÜôóïõ (20/11-22/11/92 7-83,
ÄÝêáôï ×åéìåñéíü Èåñáðåõôéêü ÓåìéíÜñéï
ÓéÜôóïõ (26/2-28/2/1993 85-171,
ÅíäÝêáôï ÁíïéîéÜôéêï Èåñáðåõôéêü
ÓåìéíÜñéï ÓéÜôóïõ (ðñïãñáììáôéóìÝíï ãéá
28/5-30/5/93, ôï ïðïßï ãñÜöçêå áðü ôïí
ßäéï ôïí ÌáñãéùñÞ, áëëÜ äåí
ðñáãìáôïðïéÞèçêå ëüãù ôçò ìåôÜóôáóÞò
ôïõ åéò Êýñéïí ôçí 6ç ÌáÀïõ 1993) 173-
243, Ëßãá ëüãéá ãéá ôï óõããñáöÝá 247,
ÌåñéêÜ ëüãéá ãéá ôï ðïëõäéÜóôáôï Ýñãï
ôïõ 249, Êõêëïöïñïýíôá ôïõ ßäéïõ âéâëßá
251, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá ôñßôïõ ôüìïõ 245,
ÁÍÁËÕÔÉÊÁ ÔÁ ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ: Åóþöõëëï
êáé óêïðüò ôïõ Óåìéíáñßïõ 175,
Õðåíèýìéóç 177, ÅðáíÜëçøç -
Ðëçñïöüñçóç - Äéåõêñßíéóç 173,
ÕðïãÜóôñéá ðåñéï÷Þ 181, Ðñüëïãïò 185,
ÅéóáãùãÞ 187, ÁöÜñìáêç ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ
191, ÅóùèåñáðåõôÞò 197, Ïé ôåëåõôáßåò
ðÝíôå áññþóôéåò ôçò ÅéêïóôÞò Ôñßôçò
ÏìÜäáò áóèåíåéþí ôçò Óéáôóïý 203,
ÃåíéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ ôùí ðÝíôå áóèåíåéþí
ôçò 23çò ÏìÜäáò 213, Éäéáßôåñç èåñáðåßá
ôùí ðÝíôå áóèåíåéþí ôçò 23çò ÏìÜäáò,
Á´ ÌáëÜêõíóç åãêåöÜëïõ 225, ´
Ãáóôñßôçò 231, ô Íåõñþóåéò óôïìÜ÷ïõ
233, Ä´ Ðá÷õóáñêßåò 234, Å´ Áíéêáíüôçò
235, Åðßëïãïò 239, Ôï ðñïóå÷Ýò
ÓåìéíÜñéï 241, Åõ÷áñéóôÞñéï 242,
Ðåñéå÷üìåíá 243.
THERAPEUTICS WITHOUT MEDICINES
CHUROPLASTIC SIATSU
CONTENTS OF THE THIRD VOLUME
Dedication of the work Page 6, Ninth
Automnal Therapeutical Seminar of Siat-
su (20/11/92 - 22/11/92) Pages 7-83,
Tenth Wintry Therapeutical Seminar of
Siatsu (26/2/93 - 28/2/93) Pages 85-
171, Eleventh Spring Therapeutical Sem-
inar of Siatsu (arranged for 28/5/93 -
30/5/93), the lessons of which had been
written by the writer himself, but it did
not take place due to his departure to
our Lord, on May 6th, 1993) Pages 173
- 243, A few words about the Writer
Page 247, A few words about his multi-
dimensional work Page 249, Circulating
books by same Page 251, Contents of
the third volume Page 245.
n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
×ÅÉÑÏÐËÁÓÔÉÊÇ
ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ Ã´ ÔÏÌÏÓ
Åßíáé ôï ôñéáêïóôü ôñßôï Ýñãï ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ. Åßíáé ôñß-
ôïìï êáé ï ôñßôïò ôïõ ôüìïò åêäüèçêå ôï 1996.
Ôï Ôñßôïìï êáé Üìåóá ðñáêôéêü áõôü óýããñáììá âáöôßóôçêå ×åéñïðëáóôéêÞ
ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ ÷ùñßò öÜñìáêá ãéá íá õðïäçëþóåé ôçí èåñáðåßá ìüíïí ìå öõóé-
êÜ ìÝóá êáé äç ìå ìéá ðëåéÜäá èåñáðåõôéêþí óõóôçìÜôùí, åßôå áõôüíïìá åßôå
óå ìßîç ìåôáîý ôïõò, ðïõ õðÜãïíôáé óôçí ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ, üðùò åßíáé:
ç ÓéÜôóïõ (ÉáðùíéêÞ ôå÷íéêÞ ðïõ óçìáßíåé äáêôõëïðßåóç), ç Áñ÷áßá ÅëëçíéêÞ
ÁóêëçðéáêÞ ÌÜëáîç (Áóêëçðéåßá - ÁìöéáñÜåéá), ç Äáêôõëïêôýðçóç (ìÝèïäïò
ÍéêïëÜïõ ÌáñãéùñÞ), ç õðïâïëÞ, ç Åãêïßìçóç (óÞìåñá ïíïìÜæåôáé õðíùôé-
óìüò), ç Ñåöëåîïëïãßá, ç åðßäñáóç åðß ôùí ôñéáíôáôñéþí óðïíäýëùí, ç ÓôáôéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ êáé ðÜñá ðïë-
ëþí Üëëùí ìåèüäùí öõóéêÞò - áöÜñìáêçò èåñáðåõôéêÞò ðïõ åîáóêïýíôáé ìå ãõìíÜ ÷Ýñéá, ìå ãíþóç, åìðåé-
ñßá êáé ðÜíù áð' üëá ìå ÓõãêÝíôñùóç.
Ðéï óõãêåêñéìÝíá ôï ôñßôïìï áõôü Ýñãï åßíáé áðïôÝëåóìá ìéáò óåéñÜò 11 ôñéÞìåñùí Óåìéíáñßùí ÁöÜñìáêçò
ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò ðïõ äßäáîå ï ÄÜóêáëïò Íéêüëáïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò óôçí Ýäñá ôïõ óôï Ïìáêïåßï Áèçíþí. Ó' áõôÜ
Ýãéíå åêôåíÞò - åîáíôëçôéêÞ, èåùñçôéêÞ êáé ðñáêôéêÞ, áíÜëõóç ôùí âáóéêüôåñùí èåñáðåõôéêþí ìåèüäùí êáé
ðñùôßóôùò ôçò ÓéÜôóïõ. Ôçí ÷þñéóå óå 23 ïìÜäåò ðïõ áíôéðñïóùðåýïõí ôéò 186 ðéï äéáäåäïìÝíåò áóèÝíåéåò
êáé ì' áõôü ôïí ôñüðï ï üðïéïò åíäéáöåñüìåíïò Ý÷åé ôçí äõíáôüôçôá âÜóåé ôçò ðÜèçóçò ðïõ Ý÷åé Þ ðïõ èÝëåé
íá èåñáðåýóåé íá áíáôñÝ÷åé óôï ôñßôïìï áõôü Ýñãï, íá âëÝðåé óå ðïéá ïìÜäá Þ êáé ïìÜäåò õðÜãåôáé ôï ðñü-
âëçìÜ ôïõ êáé óôç óõíÝ÷åéá íá êïéôÜåé ôá áíÜëïãá óêßôóá ìå ôá óçìåßá ðïõ õðïäåéêíýïíôáé ãéá ôçí åîÜóêç-
óç ôçò èåñáðåõôéêÞò ôå÷íéêÞò, þóôå íá åßíáé ðëÞñùò êáôáôïðéóìÝíïò ùò ðñïò ôï ðþò èá ëåéôïõñãÞóåé. Ðá-
ñÜëëçëá ðáñÝ÷åôáé üëç ç áðáñáßôçôç èåùñçôéêÞ êáôÜñôéóç ðïõ óõìðëçñþíåé ôçí ìüñöùóç ôïõ åîáóêïýìå-
íïõ, ç ïðïßá ìáæß ìå ôçí ðñáêôéêÞ ìåèïäïëïãßá ôïõ äßíåé ôçí åõ÷Ýñåéá íá áñ÷ßóåé íá ðáßñíåé ðñùôïâïõëßá ãéá
âïÞèåéá ôïõ åáõôïý ôïõ êáé ôïõ óõíáíèñþðïõ ôïõ.
Ï ðñþôïò ôüìïò ôçò ×åéñïðëáóôéêÞò ðåñéÝ÷åé ôá ôÝóóåñá ðñþôá óåìéíÜñéá (Áðñßëéïò 1989, ÍïÝìâñéïò 1989,
ÌÜñôéïò 1990 êáé Éïýíéïò 1990), ï äåýôåñïò ôüìïò ôá åðüìåíá ôÝóóåñá (ÌÜúïò 1991, ÍïÝìâñéïò 1991, ÌÜñ-
ôéïò 1992 êáé Éïýíéïò 1992) êáé ï ôñßôïò êáé ôåëåõôáßïò ôüìïò ôá åíáðïìåßíáíôá ôñßá óåìéíÜñéá (ÍïÝìâñéïò 1992,
ÖåâñïõÜñéïò 1993, ôï ôñßôï åß÷å ðñïãñáììáôéóèåß ãéá ôïí ÌÜúï ôïõ 1993 áëëÜ ëüãù ôçò ìåôÜóôáóçò ôïõ óõã-
ãñáöÝá ðñáãìáôïðïéÞèçêå ôï öèéíüðùñï áðü ôçí âïçèü ôïõ ÓìÜñù ÊïóìÜïãëïõ).
Óêïðüò ôïõ üëïõ Ýñãïõ åßíáé íá äéäÜîåé ðñáêôéêÜ êáé èåùñçôéêÜ, ôé åßíáé ç áññþóôéá êáé ðþò ìðïñåß êáé ãß-
íåôáé íá èåñáðåõèåß óùóôÜ êáé ñéæéêÜ, ìå ìéá áíþôåñç åðÝìâáóç, äéÜöïñç åêåßíçò ðïõ ãíùñßæïõìå êáé ðïõ á-
íôß ãéá öÜñìáêá êáé íõóôÝñéá, ÷ñçóéìïðïéåß ôçí åóùôåñéêÞ åíåñãçôéêüôçôá, ôïí áðïèçóáõñéóìÝíï ìá êáé á-
÷ñçóéìïðïßçôï ðëïýóéï äõíáìéóìü êÜèå áíèñþðïõ.
Óôï åí ëüãù Ýñãï áíáëýåôáé áðü êÜèå Üðïøç, åîùôåñéêÞ êáé åóùôåñéêÞ, ç áññþóôéá êáé ôá áßôéÜ ôçò, êáèþò
åðßóçò êáé ôá âáóéêüôåñá óõóôÞìáôá ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò ãéá ôçí áðïêáôÜóôáóÞ ôçò êáé ôçí åðáíá-
öïñÜ ôçò õãåßáò êáé áñìïíßáò óôïí ðÜó÷ïíôá óõíÜíèñùðï. ÅìðåñéóôáôùìÝíá ðáñïõóéÜæïíôáé ôüóï èåùñçôé-
êÜ üóï êáé ðñáêôéêÜ, ïé ôå÷íéêÝò êáé ïé ìÝèïäïé ðïõ èá ðñÝðåé íá áêïëïõèçèïýí ãéá íá åðéöÝñïõí ôï ðïèçôü
áðïôÝëåóìá ôçò èåñáðåßáò.
Ï óõããñáöÝáò õðïãñáììßæåé êÜðïõ üôé "äéá ôïõ èåïý êáé ôçò êáëÞò ôý÷çò, ðåôõ÷áßíïíôáé ôá èåñáðåõôéêÜ á-
ðïôåëÝóìáôá. ÊÜèå åñãÜôçò ôïõ êáëïý åßíáé üñãáíï ôçò áðáñÜâáôçò áãáèÞò ôý÷çò (ôïõ Èåïý), äçëáäÞ ôïõ
Íüìïõ ôçò ÁíôáðïäïôéêÞò Äéêáéïóýíçò (ÊÜñìá)".

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 60 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
CHIROPLASTIC THERAPEUTICS,
3rd VOLUME
It is Master Nikolaos Margiori's thirty-third work. It includes three volumes
and its third volume was published in 1996.
This directly practical writing work of three volumes was baptized Chiro-
plastic Therapeutics without medicines, to indicate the therapy only by phys-
ical means and even by a plenty of therapeutical systems, either autonomous
or mixed, that belong to the Esoteric Therapeutics, as: Siatsu (Japanese tech-
nique that means fingerpressing), the Ancient Greek Asclepian Massage (As-
clepieia - Amfiaraia), the Fingertapping (Nikolaos Mariori's method), the sug-
gestion, the Ensleeping (today it is called Hypnotism), the Reflexology, the
influence on the thirty-three vertebras, the Static Therapeutics and many oth-
er methods of physical therapeutics without medicines, that are applied on
with bare hands, by knowledge, experience and above all, Concentration.
More concretly, this work of the three volumes is the result of the 11
Seminars that lasted three days for a Therapy Without Medicines that Mas-
ter Nikolaos A. Marioris taught at his seat, in Omakoeio of Athens. There an
extensive-exhausting, theoretical and practical analysis of the most basical
therapeutical methods and mainly,of Siatsu took place. He divided in 23
groups that represent the 186 most spread diseases and this way, he who
is interested in it, can, on the basis of the disease he suffers or he wants to
cure, to run to this work of three volumes, to see which group or groups his
n ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
ÁÐÏÊÑÕÖÏËÏÃÉÁ
ô ÔÏÌÏÓ
Åßíáé ôï ôñéáêïóôü ôÝôáñôï Ýñãï ôïõ
ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ. Åßíáé
ôñßôïìï êáé ï ôñßôïò ôïõ ôüìïò åêäüèç-
êå ôï 1998. Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá ôï ôåëåõôáßï
Ýñãï (óå ìïñöÞ âéâëßïõ) ôïõ óõããñáöÝ-
á ðïõ óõíÝãñáöå ìÝ÷ñé êáé ôçí çìÝñá
ôçò ìåôÜóôáóÞò ôïõ (6 ÌáÀïõ 1993) êáé
ôï ïðïßï äåí ðñüëáâå íá ïëïêëçñþóåé.
Åßíáé ìéóïôåëåéùìÝíï áëëÜ ôï õðÜñ-
÷ïí êåßìåíï ðåñéÝ÷åé áðßèáíåò ëåðôïìÝñåéåò ó÷åôéêÜ ìå ôçí Äçìéïõñãßá,
ôï Êïóìéêü Êáëü êáé ôï Êïóìéêü Êáêü, êáé ðþò ôï äåýôåñï, ðñïóùðïðïé-
çìÝíï óôï üíïìá ôïõ Áñ÷Üããåëïõ Éëþôá Þ Åùóöüñïõ Þ ÄéÜâïëïõ Þ..., êõ-
ñéÜñ÷çóå óôçí 7ç ÉäñõôéêÞ Áêôßíá êáé ôá üíôá ôçò ãéá ìåãÜëï ÷ñïíéêü äéÜ-
óôçìá óôï áðþôáôï ðáñåëèüí ìÝ÷ñé ùóüôïõ åðéóôñáôåýèçêå áðü ôï Èåß-
ï Ó÷Ýäéï ï Áñ÷Üããåëïò Ìé÷áÞë ï ïðïßïò ìåôÜ áðü ôéôÜíéï áãþíá êáôÜöå-
ñå íá êáôáôñïðþóåé ôïí Ìáýñï Áñ÷Üããåëï ôïõ Óêüôïõò êáé íá ôïí ðåñéï-
ñßóåé óôï ×Üïò. ¸ôóé áíÝëáâå ï ßäéïò ôïí äéáìïéñáóìü ôçò Ïõóßáò ôçò Æù-
Þò áðü ôïí ÐáôÝñá ðñïò ôá üíôá ôïõ. ¼ìùò ôï ìðüëéáóìá ôïõ Ìáýñïõ Áñ-
÷áããÝëïõ Ýìåéíå âáèéÜ ìÝóá óôïõò ïðáäïýò ðïõ ðñüöôáóå íá äçìéïõñ-
ãÞóåé áëëÜ êáé óå ëáíèÜíïõóá êáôÜóôáóç ãýñù ìáò, ìÝóá êáé Ýîù ìáò.
¼ðïéïò äéáâÜóåé áõôü ôï âéâëßï èá íéþóåé ôçí áíÜãêç íá ðÜñåé õðåý-
èõíç èÝóç áíÜìåóá óôï êáëü êáé óôï êáêü êáé íá ãßíåé Ýíáò õðçñÝôçò ôïõ
êáëïý êáé ôçò ôåëåéüôçôáò (èåïý) óå üëåò ôéò åêöÜíóåéò ôçò.
Åðßóçò åîçãåßôáé ðþò êáé ãéáôß êÜðïéïò ï ïðïßïò èá íéþóåé ôçí åóùôå-
ñéêÞ êëÞóç ãéá õðçñåóßá ôïõ Èåßïõ Ó÷åäßïõ êáé èá ôçí áêïëïõèÞóåé, èá
áãêáëéáóôåß áðü ôá ðíåõìáôïäß÷ôõá ôïõ Èåïý êáé èá áðïôåëÝóåé, óõíåé-
äçôÜ ðëÝïí, áíáðüóðáóôï êïììÜôé ôïõ êáé üñãáíï ôçò êáëïóýíçò êáé
ôçò áãÜðçò ôïõ óôïí êüóìï ìáò.
ÂëÝðå êáé ôéò ðåñéëÞøåéò ôùí Üëëùí äýï ôüìùí.
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
problem belongs to and then, to look at the respective sketches with the in-
dicated points for the exercise of the therapeutical techniques, to be fully
informed of how ge will function. At the same time, all the necessary theo-
retical formation that completes the trainee's education, that together with
the practical methodology, gives him the ease to start taking initiatives, in
order to help himself and his fellowmen.
The first volume of the Chiroplastics contains the four first seminars (April
1989, Nomvember 1989, March 1990 and June 1990), the second volume
the remaining four (May 1991, November 1991, March 1992 and June 1992)
and the third and last volume the remaining three seminars (November
1992, February 1993, the third had been planned for May 1993, but due to
the writer's departure, it was effected in the automn by his lady assistant S-
maro Kosmaoglou).
The aim of the whole work is to teach practically and theoretically, what
the disease is and how it can be cured rightly and radically, by a superior op-
eration, different than the one we know and that, instead of medicines and
lancets, uses the internal activity, and the treasured but unused rich dy-
namism of every man.
In the said book the disease and its causes, as well as the most basical sys-
tems of the Esoteric Therapeutics for its reinstation and its bringing the health
and the harmony back to the suffering fellow-man, are analyzed. The tech-
niques and the methods that must be followed to bring the desired result of
the therapy are presented thoroughly, as much theoretically as practically.
The writer mentions at a point that "by God and by the good luck, the
therapeutical results are achieved. Every worker of the good is an organ of
the inviolable good luck (God), that is the Law of the Retributive Justice:."
n NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
OCCULTISM, 3rd VOLUME
This is Master Nikolaos A. Margiori's thirty-fourth work. It contains
three volumes and its third volume was published in 1998.
It is about the last work of the writer who was writing until the
day of his departure (May 6th, 1993) whixh he did not have enogh
time to complete.
It is half-finished but the existing text comprises improbable de-
tails in relation with the Creation, the Cosmic Good and the Cosmic
Evil, and how the second one, personificated in the name of
Arcaghel Ilotas or Lucifer or Devil or.... prevailed on the 7th Found-
ing Ray and its beings for a long time, in the far past until Archangel
Michael was mobilizated by the Divine Plan, and after a titanic strug-
gle, managed to rout the Black Argangel of the Darkness and to
confine him in the Chaos. Thus, he himself undertook to share the
Substance of Life, from Father to his beings. But the inoculation of
the Black Archangel remained deeply to his disciples that he had e-
nough time to create but also at a latent situation around us, with-
in and outside us.
He who reads this book will feel the necessity to take a respon-
sible position between the good and the evil and to become a ser-
vant of the good and of the perfection (god) in all its manifestations.
It is also explained how and why he who needs the esoteric call
for the service of the Divine Plan and follows it, will be embraced
by the spirit-nets of God, and will constitute, consciously now, an
inseparable piece of Him and an organ of His goodness and of his
love in our world.
See also the summaries of the other two volumes.
ÁÐÏÊÑÕÖÏËÏÃÉÁ ô ÔÏÌÏÓ OCCULTISM, 3rd VOLUME
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ CONTENTS
ÐÑÏËÏÃÏÓ, ÅÉÓÁÃÙÃÇ, ÌÐÏÑÅÉ ÅÍÁÓ Á- PREFACE, INTRODUCTION, CAN AN OC-
ÐÏÊÑÕÖÉÓÔÇÓ ÍÁ ÃÉÍÅÉ ÊÁÐÏÔÅ ÌÕÓÔÉÊÉÓÔÇÓ, CULTIST BECOME A MYSTIC, SOME DAY?, IN
ÓÔÁ ÐÍÅÕÌÁÔÏÄÉ×ÔÕÁ ÔÏÕ ÈÅÏÕ. THE SPIRITUAL NETS OF GOD.
61 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 ÂÉÂËÉÁ ÇËÉÁ Ë. ÊÁÔÓÉÁÌÐÁ (ÌÁÈÇÔÇ ÔÏÕ Í. Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇ)
BOOKS BY ILIAS L. KATSIAMPAS (STUDENT OF N. A. MARGIORIS)

n ÇËÉÁ Ë. ÊÁÔÓÉÁÌÐÁ n ILIAS L. KATSIAMPAS

ÁÐÏ ÔÏ ÓÔÏÌÁ ÔÏÕ ÄÁÓÊÁËÏÕ FROM THE MASTER’S
ÓÔÏ ÁÕÔÉ ÔÏÕ ÌÁÈÇÔÇ MOUTH TO THE
ÐÁÑÏÕÓÉÁÓÇ ÔÏÕ ÂÁÓÉËÇ ÐÁÍÏÕ STUDENT’S EAR
¸íá ôïëìçñü êáé áîéïðñüóåêôï âéâëßï êõêëïöüñçóå ðñüóöáôá óôá Ôñßêáëá.
¸íá âéâëßï ðïõ ðñáãìáôåýåôáé, ôá üñéá ôïõ Ìåôáöõóéêïý öéëïóïöéêïý óôï÷áóìïý. · A book-document which con-
Ï óõããñáöÝáò ôïõ âéâëßïõ êáôáöÝñíåé ôçí ðñïóùðéêÞ ó÷Ýóç ðïõ âéþíåé ìå ôï tains an unprecedented, fascinat-
ÄÜóêáëü ôïõ íá ôç ìåôáöÝñåé áõôïýóéá ì' üëåò ôéò ìéêñÝò êáé áóÞìáíôåò -ðïõ äåí ing, revealing and rare metaphysi-
åßíáé- ëåðôïìÝñåéåò óôá ðëáßóéá ìéáò ôñõöåñÞò áëëçëïãñáößáò ðïõ åßíáé êáé ç áñ- cal correspondence between Mas-
÷Þ ãíùñéìßáò ôïõ ìå ôï ÄÜóêáëü ôïõ. ter and the student and defines a
ÁõôÝò ïé ìéêñÝò ëåðôïìÝñåéåò Ý÷ïõí êáé ôçí áíÜëïãç óçìáóßá óôï Ýñãï. Äéüôé right directed internal course.
áíáäåéêíýïõí åéëéêñßíåéá, ðÜèïò, áõèïñìçôéóìü, áãùíßá, äéóôáãìü, áìöéóâÞôçóç · A book-station which succeeds
êáé ãéáôß ü÷é íåáíéêÞ Ýðáñóç, êáé ôÝëïò ôáðåßíùóç. by sincere and interesting popu-
Óôïé÷åßá ðïõ êÜíïõí ôïí Çëßá Ë. ÊáôóéÜìðá, ôïí óõããñáöÝá, íá ãñÜøåé Ýíá âéâëßï ðïõ îåöåýãåé áðü ôá üñéá ðïõ larized essays to condense and to
ðñïûðïèÝôåé ôï èÝìá. ÄçëáäÞ ìéá åêëáúêåõìÝíç áíÜëõóç êáé ðïñåßá ãíþóçò ðñïò ôçí ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÌåôáöõóéêÞ. compose a hot and deep Esoteric
¸íá âéâëßï ìå äýóêïëï ðñïâëçìáôéóìü ôï êÜíåé åõêïëïäéÜâáóôï, êáôáíïçôü, åêëáúêåõìÝíï êáé ðñïóéôü óå êÜ- Knowldedge on the whole spec-
èå áíáãíþóôç. ¸íá åõ÷Üñéóôï áíÜãíùóìá ãéá üóïõò èá Þèåëáí íá ðñïóåããßóïõí ôï ÷þñï ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò Ìåôá- trum of the genuine Metaphysics
öõóéêÞò ìÝóá "Áðü ôï óôüìá ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ óôï áõôß ôïõ ìáèçôÞ". (Occultism and Mysticism).
Ôï âéâëßï óõìðëçñþíåôáé êáé ìå ôï ÃëùóóÜñé (öéëïóïöéêü ëåîéêü) ôçò ÓáíóêñéôéêÞò êáé ôéìÜôáé 3000 äñ÷. · A unique book with an analyti-
ÐÅÑÉËÇØÇ ÔÏÕ ÅÑÃÏÕ cal and thorough Glossary of San-
· ¸íá âéâëßï - íôïêïõìÝíôï, ðïõ ðåñéÝ÷åé ìéá áíåðáíÜëçðôç, óõíáñðáóôéêÞ, áðïêáëõðôéêÞ êáé óðÜíéá ìåôáöõ- skrit (philosophical dictionary)
óéêÞ áëëçëïãñáößá ìåôáîý ÄáóêÜëïõ êáé ìáèçôÞ êáé ðñïóäéïñßæåé ìéá ïñèÜ êáôåõèõíüìåíç åóùôåñéêÞ ðïñåßá. which constitutes a reference point
· ¸íá âéâëßï - óôáèìüò, ðïõ êáôïñèþíåé ìå åéëéêñéíåßò êáé åíäéáöÝñïõóåò åêëáúêåõìÝíåò ìåëÝôåò íá óõìðõêíþ- and a guide for every searcher or s-
óåé êáé íá óõíèÝóåé êáõôÝò êáé âáèéÝò ÅóùôåñéêÝò Ãíþóåéò, ðÜíù ó' üëï ôï öÜóìá ôçò ãíÞóéáò ÌåôáöõóéêÞò (Áðï- tudent of Yoga and of Esoterism.
êñõöéóìïý êáé Ìõóôéêéóìïý). · A book containg Wisdom Drops
· ¸íá âéâëßï ìïíáäéêü, ìå áíáëõôéêü êáé åìðåñéóôáôùìÝíï ÃëùóóÜñéï ÓáíóêñéôéêÞò (öéëïóïöéêü ëåîéêü 400 ëÝ- from Master Nikolaos A. Margiori's
îåùí), ðïõ áðïôåëåß óçìåßï áíáöïñÜò êáé ïäçãü ãéá êÜèå åñåõíçôÞ Þ ìáèçôÞ ôçò Ãéüãêá êáé ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý. work, which is a permanent source
· ¸íá âéâëßï ìå Óôáãüíåò Óïößáò áðü ôá Ýñãá ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ, ðïõ åßíáé ìéá äéáñêÞò ðçãÞ of aid, knowledge, inspiration, right
âïÞèåéáò, ãíþóçò, Ýìðíåõóçò, ïñèïý êáé óôÝñåïõ ðñïóáíáôïëéóìïý óå ðïéêßëá ÅóùôåñéêÜ èÝìáôá. and firn orientation in various Eso-
· ¸íá Ýñãï - ôïìÞ óå üëï ôï êýêëùìá ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý, ðïõ öéëïäïîåß íá äþóåé óôïí áíáãíþóôç Ýíá ðñþôï teric matters.
îåêáèÜñéóìá óôï Åóùôåñéêü ìïíïðÜôé êáé óôç äüìçóç êáé ðëÞñùóç ôïõ ¸óù Åßíáé ôïõ. · A work-section in the whole
ÕðÜñ÷åé êáé óôá áããëéêÜ óå ìïñöÞ èåñìïêïëëçìÝíçò ìåëÝôçò. ring of Esoterism which has the
ambition to give the reader a first
ÁÐÏ ÔÏ ÓÔÏÌÁ ÔÏÕ ÄÁÓÊÁËÏÕ ÌÅÑÏÓ ÄÅÕÔÅÑÏ - ÌÅËÅÔÅÓ 91: Ðñüëïãïò tion, Acknowledgement 3, Request, Atten- clarification in the Esoteric path as
ÓÔÏ ÁÕÔÉ ÔÏÕ ÌÁÈÇÔÇ 93, ÌåëÝôç 1ç 95, ÌåëÝôç 2ç 109, ÌåëÝôç dance of the Work 4, Photographic snap- well as in the structure and in the
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ ÔÏÕ ÂÉÂËÉÏÕ 3ç 115, ÌåëÝôç 4ç 123, ÌåëÝôç 5ç 129, shots 5, Photographic snapshots 6-7 completion of his Internal Being.
Åêäüóåéò, õðïãñáöÞ óõããñáöÝá 4, ÌåëÝôç 6ç 135, ÌåëÝôç 7ç 141, PART ONE - CORRESPONDENCE WITH MAS- · A book containing dedications
ÁöéÝñùóç, åõ÷áñéóôßåò 5, ÐáñÜêëçóç, ÌÅÑÏÓ ÔÑÉÔÏ - ÃËÙÓÓÁÑÉÏ ÓÁÍÓÊÑÉÔÉÊÇÓ TER 8, Preface 9, 1st Letter 12, 1st Answer 13,
åðéìÝëåéá ôïõ Ýñãïõ 6, ÖùôïãñáöéêÜ 145: Ðñüëïãïò 147, ÃñÜììá Á 151, ÃñÜììá 2nd Letter 15, 2nd Answer 17, 3rd Letter 20,
to the person and to the work of
óôéãìéüôõðá 7, ÖùôïãñáöéêÜ óôéãìéüôõðá 8,  161, ÃñÜììá à 165, ÃñÜììá Ä 171, ÃñÜììá 3rd Answer 22, 4th Letter 24, 4th Answer 28, Master of the Esoteric Metaphysics
ÌÅÑÏÓ ÐÑÙÔÏ - ÁËËÇËÏÃÑÁÖÉÁ ÌÅ ÔÏÍ Å 174, ÃñÜììá É 175, ÃñÜììá Ê 176, ÃñÜììá 5th Letter 31, 5th Answer 34, 6th Letter 36, Nikolaos A. Margioris.
ÄÁÓÊÁËÏ 9: Ðñüëïãïò 11, ÅðéóôïëÞ 1ç 15, Ë 182, ÃñÜììá Ì 183, ÃñÜììá Í 191, ÃñÜììá 6th Answer 38, 7th Letter 41, 7th Answer 43, Exicte end in English in thermo-
ÁðÜíôçóç 1ç 16, ÅðéóôïëÞ 2ç 17, ÁðÜíôçóç Ï 197, ÃñÜììá Ð 200, ÃñÜììá Ñ 204, ÃñÜììá 8th Letter 45, 8th Answer 47, Handwritten soldeved essays.
2ç 19, ÅðéóôïëÞ 3ç 21, ÁðÜíôçóç 3ç 23, Ó 207, ÃñÜììá Ô 218, ÃñÜììá Ö 221, answer by Master Nikolaos Margioris 49-50,
ÅðéóôïëÞ 4ç 25, ÁðÜíôçóç 4ç 28, ÅðéóôïëÞ ÃñÜììá × 222, Letter 9a 51, Letter 9b 54, Answer 9a & b 58,
5ç 30, ÁðÜíôçóç 5ç 33, ÅðéóôïëÞ 6ç 35, ÌÅÑÏÓ ÔÅÔÁÑÔÏ - ÓÔÁÃÏÍÅÓ ÓÏÖÉÁÓ 225: Handwritten answer by Master Nikolaos Mar-
ÁðÜíôçóç 6ç 37, ÅðéóôïëÞ 7ç 39, ÁðÜíôçóç Ðñüëïãïò 227, Óôáãüíåò Óïößáò 229, gioris , 10th Letter 61, 11th Letter 66, 11th M 192, Letter N 198, Letter O 201, Letter P
7ç 40, ÅðéóôïëÞ 8ç 41, ÁðÜíôçóç 8ç 42, ÌÅÑÏÓ ÐÅÌÐÔÏ - ÁÖÉÅÑÙÌÁÔÁ ÓÔÏ Answer 69, Handwritten answer by Master 202, Letter R 207, Letter S 209, Letter T 223,
ÁðÜíôçóç (8ç) ÷åéñüãñáöç ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ ÄÁÓÊÁËÏ Í Á ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇ 247: Ðñüëïãïò 249, Nikolaos Margioris , 12th Letter 73, 12th An- Letter U 225, Letter V 228, Letter Y 233
ÍéêïëÜïõ ÌáñãéùñÞ 43, ÅðéóôïëÞ 9á 45, ÓõíÝíôåõîç ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á swer 80, Handwritten answer by Master Niko- PART 4 - WISDOM DROPS 239, Preface
ÅðéóôïëÞ 9â 48, ÁðÜíôçóç 9á&â 51, ÌáñãéùñÞ óôï ðåñéïäéêü Ôñßôï ÌÜôé 251, laos Margioris , 13th Letter 84 240, Wisdom Drops 241
ÁðÜíôçóç (9á&â) ÷åéñüãñáöç ôïõ ÁöéÝñùìá 1ï 254, ÁöéÝñùìá 2ï 258, PART TWO - ESSAYS 90, Preface 90, 1st PART 5 - DEDICATIONS TO MASTER N.A.
ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ ÌáñãéùñÞ 53, ÁöéÝñùìá 3ï 261, Ó÷ïëÝò óå ëåéôïõñãßá ôùí Essay 91, 2nd Essay 107, 3rd Essay 115, 4th MARGIORIS 264, Preface 265, Interview by
ÅðéóôïëÞ 10ç 57, ÅðéóôïëÞ 11ç 61, Ïìáêïåßùí Áèçíþí, Ëáìßáò êáé ÔñéêÜëùí Essay 125, 5th Essay 132, 6th Essay 139, 7th Master Nikolaos A. Margioris to the magazine
ÁðÜíôçóç 11ç 64, ÁðÜíôçóç 264, Âéâëéïãñáößá 267, Ðåñéå÷üìåíá 269. Essay 145 "Thirt Eye" 266, 1st Dedication 269, 2nd Ded-
(11ç) ÷åéñüãñáöç ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ PART 3 - GLOSSARY OF SANSKRIT 150, Pref- ication 274, 3rd Dedication 277, Schools in
ÌáñãéùñÞ 67, ÅðéóôïëÞ 12ç 73, ÁðÜíôçóç FROM THE MASTER’S MOUTH ace 151, Letter A 155, Letter B 166, Letter C function of the Omakoeios in Athens, Lamia
12ç 78, ÁðÜíôçóç (12ç) ÷åéñüãñáöç ôïõ TO THE STUDENT’S EAR 170, Letter D 171, Letter E 177, Letter F 178, & Trikala 280, Bibliography 285, Biographical
ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ ÌáñãéùñÞ 81, CONTENTS Letter G 178, Letter H 179, Letter I 182, Let- note of the writer 290, Contents 292, Sum-
ÅðéóôïëÞ 13ç 87, Editions, the writer's signature 2, Dedica- ter J 183, Letter K 184, Letter L 191, Letter mary of the work 295.

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 62 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

 ÂÉÂËÉÁ ÇËÉÁ Ë. ÊÁÔÓÉÁÌÐÁ (ÌÁÈÇÔÇ ÔÏÕ Í. Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇ)
BOOKS BY ILIAS L. KATSIAMPAS (STUDENT OF N. A. MARGIORIS)

n ÇËÉÁ Ë. ÊÁÔÓÉÁÌÐÁ
ÐÅÑÉËÇØÇ ÁÐÏÊÁËÕØÇÓ ÔÏÕ ÉÙÁÍÍÇ
Ìéá ìïíáäéêÞ êáé áíåðáíÜëçðôç ðáñïõóßá óôá ðáãêüóìéá âéâëéï-
ãñáöéêÜ ÷ñïíéêÜ, ðïõ áöïñÜ ôçí Üìåóç êáé ðñïóéôÞ óå üëïõò Åëåý-
èåñç ÐíåõìáôéêÞ ÅîÞãçóç ôùí ðéï Âáóéêþí êáé Åðßìá÷ùí óçìåßùí ôçò
ÁðïêÜëõøçò ôïõ ÉùÜííç, áðïôåëåß ðëÝïí Ãåãïíüò.
Óôï ðá ñüí äß ãëùó óï Ýñ ãï (åë ëç íé êü êáé áã ãëé êü)
îåôõëßãåôáé ãéá Ðñþôç ÖïñÜ óôá ìÜôéá êáé óôçí êïéíÞ
åìðåéñßá ôïõ áíáãíþóôç óçìáíôéêü ìÝñïò ôçò õðåñ-
âáôéêÞò ÔÝëåéáò ÌõóôéêéóôéêÞò Åìðåéñßáò ôïõ ÄáóêÜ-
ëïõ ôïõ Ðíåý ìá ôïò Íé êï ëÜ ïõ Á. Ìáñ ãéù ñÞ (1913-
1993).
Å íüò Åë ëç íï ïñ èü äï îïõ ×ñé óôï êå íôñé êïý êáé ×ñé -
óôïêñáôéêïý ÌõóôéêéóôÞ, ï ïðïßïò äßíåé ôï Üðëåôï Öùò
ôïõ óôçí Åñìçíåßá ôçò ÁðïêÜëõøçò êáé äéåéóäýåé óôá
ìý÷éá ôçò, áããßæïíôáò üëï ôçò ôï Åóùôåñéêü Ìåãáëåß-
ï, ôï ÂÜèïò êáé ôçí ¸êôáóç, ðïõ ðñïÝñ÷åôáé áðü Ýíá
á ëç èé íü ôÝ êíï ôïõ Ðíåý ìá ôïò, ôïí Á ðü óôï ëï Éù Üí -
íç.
Ìå éäéáßôåñç åðéìÝëåéá áöáéñåß Ýíá - Ýíá ôá ðÝðëá
ôùí âáèýôáôá óõìâïëéóìÝíùí - áéíéãìáôéêþí ëÝîåùí,
ðïõ ôçí êïóìïýí, ðáñïõóéÜæïíôáò ôï êáôáõãÜæïí ¢êôéóôï Öùò ðïõ
âÜóåé ôïõ Èåßïõ Ó÷åäßïõ êáôåõèýíåé ôá ìÝëëïíôá óå ÏËÇ ôçí Ðáí-
äçìéïõñãßá.
Ðá ñÜë ëç ëá ôçí Äéá ÷ù ñß æåé ìå óá öÞ íåéá á ðü êÜ èå ðå ñéñ ñÝ ïõ óá
ãÞéíç - ïñèïëïãéóôéêÞ êáé êáôÜ êáíüíá áíáëçèÞ åñìçíåßá, êáôáôÜó-
óïíôÜò ôçí óôéò ýøéóôåò ÅíïñáôéêÝò óõëëÞøåéò ôïõ Ðíåýìáôïò, ðïõ
ìü íï ïé ¢îéïé (ôá êá ôÜë ëç ëá óêåý ç) åß íáé é êá íïß íá ôéò áã ãß îïõí.
Ìå ëüãéá áðëÜ (ï Åóùôåñéóìüò ãéá ¼ëïõò), êáèçìåñéíÜ êáé ìåóôÜ
õðåñäéáíïçôéêþí Ãíþóåùí, ìåôáëëáãìÝíá óå äéáíïçôéêÜ íïÞìáôá
êáôáäåéêíýåé êáé ìõåß ôïí ìåëåôçôÞ óôï áðýèìåíï âÜèïò êáé äõóèå-
þñçôï ýøïò ôçò Èåßáò ÅêäÞëùóçò, ôùí Íüìùí ðïõ ôçí äéÝðïõí êáé
ôùí üíôùí ðïõ ìÝóá ôçò äéáâéïýí êáé åîåëßóóïíôáé.
Ìéá ÊïóìïãïíéêÞ êáé Åó÷áôïëïãéêÞ ðñïóÝããéóç áóõìâßâáóôç êáé
áêÝñáéç ðíåõìáôéêÜ, Ýíá åîáéñåôéêÜ óðÜíéï õðåñóõíåéäçôü íôïêïõ-
ìÝíôï, ìßá âáèéÜ êáé ïõóéáóôéêÞ ôïìÞ ðïõ èá ðáñáìåßíåé ìíçìåéþ-
äçò óôïí ãÞ é íï ÷ñü íï ðå ñé ãñÜ öå ôáé ìå êÜ èå äõ íá ôÞ ëå ðôï ìÝ ñåéá
êáé áíÜëõóç, åíþ ðáñÜëëçëá áðïôåëåß áóöáëÞ ïäïäåßêôç êáé óôá-
èåñü ðíåõìáôéêü óçìåßï áíáöïñÜò ãéá êÜèå åíäéáöåñüìåíï.
Ôï üëï Ýñãï ðëáéóéþíåôáé áðü ôïõò åêôåíåßò áíáëõôéêïýò ó÷ïëéá-
óìïýò ôïõ ìá èç ôÞ ôïõ Äá óêÜ ëïõ Íé êü ëá ïõ Á. Ìáñ ãéù ñÞ, Ç ëß á Ë.
ÊáôóéÜìðá, ðïõ áðïóáöçíßæåé ôá åîçãïýìåíá åíþ ðáñÜëëçëá âõèï-
ìåôñÜ ôçí åðï÷Þ ìáò, åîåôÜæåé êáé "ðñïäéáãñÜöåé" ôá ìÝëëïíôá ìå
áõóôçñü ãíþìïíá ôï óÞìåñá êáé ôçí èÝóç ôïõ áíèñþ-
ðïõ ó' áõôü êáé êõñßùò óå ó÷Ýóç ìå üëç ôçí óõíôå-
ëåéáêÞ öéëïëïãßá, ôçí ðñïöçôïëïãåßá - ðñïöçôïëá-
ãíåßá êáé êéíäõíïëïãßá ðïõ ìáò êáôáôñÝ÷åé êáé óå ìå-
ãÜëï âáèìü ìáò áðïðñïóáíáôïëßæåé êáé ìáò ðáñáðëá-
íÜ áðü ôá ðñáãìáôéêÜ ìáò êáèÞêïíôá êáé åõèýíåò. Áë-
ëÜ êáé ôïõ ðùò ðñÝðåé íá óõíôåëåóôåß ôï åîùôåñéêü
êáé å óù ôå ñé êü ¢íïéã ìá ôïõ áí èñþ ðïõ á ðÝ íá íôé óôá
ìÝë ëï íôá êáé é äß ùò óå ó÷Ý óç ìå ôá ðíåõ ìá ôé êÜ ðïõ
âñßóêïíôáé ðßóù áðü ôá ÐÜíôá.
¼ëá ü óá ðñÝ ðåé êáé ìðï ñïýí íá äï èïýí óôçí óç -
ìåñéíÞ åðï÷Þ ðáñåëáýíïõí ìðñïóôÜ óôçí ïèüíç ôïõ
öõóéêïý ðáñáôçñçôÞ áðü Ýíáí ãíÞóéï óýã÷ñïíï Ìý-
óôç ðïõ ðåñðÜôçóå áèüñõâá äßðëá ìáò, ðáñÜãïíôáò
Ýíá ÔéôÜíéï Ðíåõìáôéêü ¸ñãï (75 êáé ðëÝïí ìåôáöõ-
óéêÜ âéâëßá), áðüññïéá ôùí ÏëïêëçñùìÝíùí Ðíåõìáôéêþí ÂéùìÜôùí
ðïõ åß ÷å, ôá ï ðïß á á ðï ôå ëïýí ôï å ðé óôÝ ãá óìá ôçò Å îïõ óß áò ôïõ
Ðíåýìáôïò óôï êáôÜëëçëï óêåýïò Ôïõ.
¸íá ¸ñãï Óôáèìüò óôá ðíåõìáôéêÜ äñþìåíá ôïõ ôüðïõ ìáò ìå ôï
ïðïßï åðéóöñáãßæåôáé êáé óôéò ìÝñåò ìáò ç åìðñÜãìáôç óõíÝ÷åéá ôçò
ÔÝëåéáò ÌõóôéêéóôéêÞò óýëëçøçò êáé áðüäïóçò ôçò ÕðåñâáôéêÞò Ãíþ-
óçò óå êáè' üëá áíôéëçðôÞ êáé êáôáíïçôÞ, ðïõ ìå ôéò åìðåñéóôáôù-
ìÝíåò åîçãÞóåéò ôçò îåôõëßãåé áðëü÷åñá ìå ðëÝñéá ÁãÜðç ìðñïóôÜ
ìáò ôï êïõâÜñé ¼ëçò ôçò Äçìéïõñãßáò.
¸íá Ëáìðñü ÊåöÜëáéï ðïõ ðñïÝñ÷åôáé áðü Ýíá áðü ôá ÌåãÜëá
ÐíåõìáôéêÜ ÔÝêíá ôçò ÅëëÜäáò êáé èá ìåßíåé áíáìößâïëá óôçí ðíåõ-
ìáôéêÞ éóôïñßá ôïõ ôüðïõ ìáò áëçóìüíçôï êáé êáè' üëá åðùöåëÝò.
¸íá áíåêôßìçôï Åóùôåñéêü ÐåôñÜäé, ðïõ äåí èá ðñÝðåé íá ëåßøåé
áðü ôçí âéâëéïèÞêç êáíåíüò.

ÐÅ ÑÉÅ×Ï ÌÅÍÁ
ÔÇÓ ÄÉ ÃËÙÓ ÓÇÓ ÅÊ ÄÏ ÓÇÓ
ÃÉÁ ÔÇÍ ÅÎÇ ÃÇ ÓÇ
ÔÇÓ Á ÐÏÊÁ ËÕ ØÇÓ ÔÏÕ ÉÙ ÁÍ ÍÇ
ÅÊ ÄÏ ÓÅÉÓ 3, Á ÖÉÅ ÑÙ ÓÇ 5, ÅÕ×Á ÑÉ -
ÓÔÉÅÓ 6, ÈÅÑ ÌÇ ÐÁ ÑÁ ÊËÇ ÓÇ 7, Å ÐÉ ÌÅ -
ËÅÉÁ ÔÏÕ ÅÑ ÃÏÕ 7, ÅÉ ÓÁ ÃÙ ÃÇ 9, ÐÑÏ -
ËÏ ÃÏÓ 11, ÁÉ ÔÉÁ ÄÇ ÌÏ ÓÉÏ ÐÏÉ Ç ÓÇÓ ÔÇÓ
Á ÐÏ ÊÁ ËÕ ØÇÓ ÔÏÕ ÉÙ ÁÍ ÍÇ Å ÎÇ ÃÇ ÌÅ -
ÍÇÓ ÊÁ ÔÁ ÔÏÍ ÄÁ ÓÊÁ ËÏ ÍÉ ÊÏ ËÁ Ï Á.
ÌÁÑ ÃÉÙ ÑÇ 17, ÓÊÏ ÐÏÓ ÔÏÕ ÅÑ ÃÏÕ 25,
Á ÍÁ ÃÊÁÉÁ ÄÉÅÕ ÊÑÉ ÍÉ ÓÇ 29, ÃÅ ÍÉ ÊÅÓ
ÄÉÁ ÐÉ ÓÔÙ ÓÅÉÓ Å ÐÉ ÔÙÍ ÐÑÏ ÖÇ ÔÅÉÙÍ
ÊÁÉ ÔÇÓ Á ÄÇ ÑÉ ÔÇÓ Á ÍÁ ÃÊÇÓ ÃÉÁ Å ÓÙ -
ÔÅ ÑÉ ÊÇ Å ÎÅ ËÉ ÎÇ ÔÏÕ ÁÍ ÈÑÙ ÐÏÕ 33,
ÓÕ ÍÔÏ ÌÏ ÂÉÏ ÃÑÁ ÖÉ ÊÏ ÔÏÕ Á ÐÏ ÓÔÏ -
ËÏÕ ÉÙ ÁÍ ÍÇ 43, Õ ÐÅÍ ÈÕ ÌÉ ÓÇ 44, Ç
Á ÐÏ ÊÁ ËÕ ØÇ ÔÏÕ ÉÙ ÁÍ ÍÇ Å ÎÇ ÃÇ ÌÅ ÍÇ
Á ÐÏ ÔÏÍ ÐÍÅÕ ÌÁ ÔÉ ÊÏ ÄÁ ÓÊÁ ËÏ Í.
ÌÁÑ ÃÉÙ ÑÇ 45, Å ÐÉ ËÏ ÃÏÓ ÔÇÓ Á ÐÏ ÊÁ -
ËÕ ØÇÓ 61, ÄÉÁ ÐÉ ÓÔÙ ÓÅÉÓ 63, Å ÐÉ ËÏ ÃÏÓ
Ï ËÏ ÊËÇ ÑÏÕ ÔÏÕ ÅÑ ÃÏÕ 67, ÂÉÏ ÃÑÁ ÖÉ -
ÊÏ ÓÇ ÌÅÉÙ ÌÁ ÍÉ ÊÏ ËÁ ÏÕ Á. ÌÁÑ ÃÉÙ ÑÇ
71, ÐÁ ÑÁ ÊËÇ ÓÇ 77, ÄÕÏ ËÏ ÃÉÁ ÃÉÁ ÔÏ
30Ç ÌÅ ÑÏ ÍÉÑ ÃÊÏÕ ÍÁ ÓÁ ÌÁ ÍÔÉ - ÈÅ -
Ù ÓÇ ÔÏÕ ÄÁ ÓÊÁ ËÏÕ Í. ÌÁÑ ÃÉÙ ÑÇ 77,
ÐÅ ÑÉ ËÇ ØÇ ÔÏÕ ÅÑ ÃÏÕ "ÃÅ ÍÅ ÓÇ ÊÁÉ ÈÁ -
ÍÁ ÔÏÓ ÔÙÍ ÊÏ ÓÌÙÍ ÊÁÉ ÔÙÍ Ï ÍÔÙÍ"
ÔÏÕ ÄÁ ÓÊÁ ËÏÕ Í. ÌÁÑ ÃÉÙ ÑÇ 79, ÐÅ -
ÑÉÅ×Ï ÌÅ ÍÁ ÔÏÕ ÅÑ ÃÏÕ "ÃÅ ÍÅ ÓÇ ÊÁÉ
ÈÁ ÍÁ ÔÏÓ ÔÙÍ ÊÏ ÓÌÙÍ ÊÁÉ ÔÙÍ Ï -
ÍÔÙÍ" ÔÏÕ ÄÁ ÓÊÁ ËÏÕ Í. ÌÁÑ ÃÉÙ ÑÇ
80, Ó×Ï ËÅÓ ÓÅ ËÅÉ ÔÏÕÑ ÃÉÁ ÔÙÍ Ï ÌÁ -
ÊÏ ÅÉÙÍ Á ÈÇ ÍÙÍ, ËÁ ÌÉÁÓ & ÔÑÉ ÊÁ ËÙÍ
81, ÂÉ ÂËÉÏ ÃÑÁ ÖÉÁ ÔÏÕ ÅÑ ÃÏÕ 85, ÂÉ -
ÂËÉÁ ÔÏÕ ÄÁ ÓÊÁ ËÏÕ ÍÉ ÊÏ ËÁ ÏÕ Á.
ÌÁÑ ÃÉÙ ÑÇ 85, ÂÉ ÂËÉÁ ÁË ËÙÍ ÓÕÃ ÃÑÁ -
ÖÅ ÙÍ ÐÏÕ ÓÕ ÓÔÇ ÍÏ ÍÔÁÉ ÃÉÁ ÌÅ ËÅ ÔÇ
90, ÅË ËÇ ÍÅÓ ÓÕà ÃÑÁ ÖÅÉÓ ÐÏÕ ×ÑÇ ÓÉ -
ÌÏ ÐÏÉ Ç ÓÁÍ ÓÔÏÉ×ÅÉÁ Á ÐÏ ÔÁ ÂÉ ÂËÉÁ
ÔÏÕ ÄÁ ÓÊÁ ËÏÕ ÍÉ ÊÏ ËÁ ÏÕ Á. ÌÁÑ ÃÉÙ ÑÇ
ÊÁÉ ÔÏ Á ÍÁ ÃÑÁ ÖÏÕÍ ÓÔÇÍ ÂÉ ÂËÉÏ ÃÑÁ -
ÖÉÁ ÔÏÕÓ 93, ÐÅ ÑÉ ËÇ ØÇ ÔÏÕ ÅÑ ÃÏÕ
97, ÐÅ ÑÉÅ×Ï ÌÅ ÍÁ 99.
CONTENTS OF THE ENGLISH EDITION
FOR THE EXPLANATION
OF IOANNI'S APOCALYPSE
PUBLICATIONS 104, DEDICATION 105,
THANKS 106, A WARM REQUEST 107,
ATTENDANCE OF THE WORK 107, IN-
TRODUCTION 109, PREFACE 111, THE
CAUSE OF THE PUBLICATION OF IOAN-
NI'S APOCALYPSE, EXPLAINED ACCORD-
ING TO MASTER NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
117, PURPOSE OF THE WORK 123, A
NECESSARY CLARIFICATION GENERAL
ASCERTAINMENTS ON THE PROPHECIES
AND ON THE UNCONQUERABLE NECES-
SITY FOR THE INTERIOR EVOLUTION OF
MAN 129, A BRIEF BIOGRAPHY OF A-
POSTLE IOANNIS 139, REMINDER 140,
IOANNI'S APOCALYPSE EXPLAINED BY N.
MARGIORIS, THE SPIRITUAL MASTER
141, EPILOGUE OF THE APOCALYPSE
156, ASCERTAINMENTS 157, EPILOGUE
OF THE WHOLE WORK 159, BIOGRAPH-
ICAL NOTE OF NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
164, REQUEST 169, A FEW WORDS
ABOUT THE NIRGUNA SAMADHI - THEO-
SIS LASTING 30 DAYS OF MASTER N.
MARGIORIS 170, THE SUMMARY OF THE
BOOK "BIRTH AND DEATH OF THE
WORLDS AND OF THE BEINGS" BY MAS-
TER N. MARGIORIS 171, CONTENTS OF
THE WORK "BIRTH AND DEATH OF THE
WORLDS AND OF THE BEINGS" BY MAS-
TER N. MARGIORIS 173, SCHOOLS IN
FUNCTION OF THE OMAKOIOS OF A-
THENS, LAMIA AND TRIKALA 175, BIBLI-
OGRAPHY OF THE WORK 178, BOOKS OF
OTHER AUTHORS RECOMMENDED FOR
STUDY 184, GREEK AUTHORS WHO HAVE
USED ELEMENTS FROM MASTER NIKO-
LAOS A. MARGIORI'S BOOKS AND WHO
RECORD IT IN THEIR BIBLIOGRAPHY 186,
A BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE PRESENT
WORK 189, CONTENTS OF IOANNI'S
APOCALYPSE 191.

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 63 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

 n ILIAS L. KATSIAMPAS that will remain monumental in the earthly time is described in every pos-
sible detail and analysis, while at the same time it composes a safe sign-
SUMMARY OF THE IOANNI’S APOCALYPSE post and a solid spiritual point of reference for everyone interested.
A unique and unprecedented presence in the universal bibliographical The whole work is framed by the extensive analytical commentations
annals, that concerns the direct and accessible to everybody Free Spiri- of the Master's student, Ilias L. Katsiampas who clarifies the explained,
tual Explanation of the most basical and disputable points of Ioanni's while at the same time he sounds our times, he examines and "prescribes"
Apocalypse, constitutes a Fact now. the future, having as a strong criterion the today and the position of
In this bilingual work (Greek and English) an important part of the tran- man in it, and especially in relation with all the doomsdaying litterature,
scendental Perfect Mysticist Experience of Nikolaos A. Margioris (1913- the propheciology-propheciolagny and the dangerism that persecutes
1993), the Master of the Spirit, unfolds for the first time. us and that disorientates us at a great extent and that
It is about a Greek-orthodox Christocentral and Christo- misleads us from our real duties and responsibilities. But
cratical Mystic who gives his ample Light to the Interpre- also it examines which way the external and the internal
tation of the Apocalypse and who penetrates its inner- Opening of man against the future and mainly in relation
most, touching its whole Inner Greatness, Depth and Ec- with the spiritual that is found behind Everything must be
stasy, that come from a real child of the Spirit, Apostle completed.
Ioannis. All what must and can be given at our present times pa-
With a particular care, he removes one by one the cov- rade in front of the screen of the physical observer by a
ers of the most deeply symbolized-enigmatical words tha genuine modern Initiate who walked quietly beside us,
decorate it, presenting the illuminating Unbuilt Light that producing a titanic Spiritual Work (more than 75 meta-
on the basis of the Divine Plan directs the future in ALL the physical books), as a consequence of the Complete Spir-
Omnicreation. itual Experiences he had, which constitute the crowing of
At the same time, it Separates it in clarity from any the Spirit Power in His proper Utensil.
earthly - rationalistic and as a rule untrue interpretation A Work-Station in the spiritual actings of our country
flowing around, enlisting in the highest Visionary concep- by which the real continuance of the Perfect Mysticist
tions of the Spirit, that only the Capable (the proper utensils) are able to conception and rendering of the Transcendental Knowledge is sealed,
touch. that is understood and comprehensive in everything, that by its thorough
With simple words (the Esoterism for everybody), daily and full of hy- explanations unfolds open-handedly with Ample Love in front of us the
perintellectual Knowledge, changed into intellectual meanings, he shows skein of the Whole Creation.
and initiates the searcher to the botomless depth and to the hard to A Splendid Capital that comes from one of the Great Spiritual Children
contemplate height of the Divine Expression, of the Laws that rule it and of Greece and that will undoubtedly remain in the spiritual history of our
of the beings that live and are evolved within it. country as unforgettable and profitable in everything.
An Eschatological, incompatible and spiritually integral approach, an ex- An inestimable Esoteric Gem that must not be missing from any li-
tremely rare hyperconscious document, a deep and substantial section brary.

ÕÐÏ ÅÊÄÏÓÇ ÂÉÂËÉÁ ÇËÉÁ Ë. ÊÁÔÓÉÁÌÐÁ - UNDER EDITION BOOKS ILIAS L. KATSIAMPAS
1. ÐëçñÝóôáôï êáé áíáëõôéêüôáôï Ëåîéêü - Ïäçãüò Ìåôáöõóéêþí Åííïéþí
A full end most analytical Dictionary - Guide the Metaphysical Meanings
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2. Ôá ÓõóôÞìáôá ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò
The Systems of the Esoteric Therapeutics
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3. Äéáëïãéóìüò êáé Ìõóôéêéóìüò, ÑÜôæá êáé Êïõíôáëßíç Ãéüãêá (Èåùñßá êáé ÐñÜîç)
Meditation and Mysticism, Raja end Kundalini Yoga, Theory end Practice

ÌÅËÅÔÅÓ ÇËÉÁ Ë. ÊÁÔÓÉÁÌÐÁ - ESSAYS ILIAS L. KATSIAMPAS

1. ÅïñôÞ 10 åôþí áðü ôçí ßäñõóç ôïõ Ïìáêïåßïõ Áèçíþí ôï 1987 óôï îåíïäï÷åßï ÌåãÜëç Âñåôáíßá 3.000 äñ÷. Þ 8.840 Åõñþ
The Feast from the 10 years from the foundation of the Omakoio of Athens, that took place at Grant Britain hotel in Athens,
in 1987, by Master N. A. Margioris. 3000 Dr. or 8840 Euro
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2. Åãêáßíéá Ïìáêïåßùí Ëáìßáò êáé ÔñéêÜëùí áðü ôïí ÄÜóêáëï Í. Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ 3.000 äñ÷. Þ 8840 Åõñþ
Inauguration of the Omakoia of Lamia end of Trikala. 3000 Dr. or 8840 Euro
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3. Åã÷åéñßäéï - Ïäçãüò ãéá õðïøÞöéïõò ÅêðáéäåõôÝò ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý âÜóåé ôùí Ðáñáêáôáèçêþí ôïõ Ýñãïõ ôïõ Í. Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ
(ìüíï ãéá ôá ìÝëç ôùí Ïìáêïåßùí) õðü Ýêäïóç.
Manual - Guide of the candidate Instructors of the Esoterisim, on the basis of Master Nikolaos A. Margioris Deposits
(only for the members of the Omakoia) under edition.

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 64 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

 Ôï åóùôåñéêü êëåéäß
THE ESOTERIC KEY
Ô Ô
ï Åóùôåñéêü Êëåéäß áðáñôßæåôáé áðü 13 ÊëÜäïõò Óðïõäþí äé' áëëç-
ëïãñáößáò ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý åê ôùí ïðïßùí -ðñïò ôï ðáñüí- ìüíïí
ïé 8 Ý÷ïõí åêäïèåß.
Ï êÜèå ÊëÜäïò ôïõ äéäÜóêåôáé áðü ÌåôáöõóéêÞò Þ ÅóùôåñéêÞò ðëåõñÜò.
Âáóßæåôáé áñ÷éêÜ, ðþò åêôüò áðü ôïí ïñèïëïãéóìü êáé ôçí ðáãùìÝíç ëïãé-
êÞ, åêôüò áðü ôéò ðÝíôå ìáò áéóèÞóåéò, õðÜñ÷ïõí ìÝóá ìáò äéÜöïñïé äÝêôåò
êáé Üëëùí ôýðùí êñáäáóìþí, ðïõ äåí âáóßæïíôáé óôçò ýëçò ôá åñåèßóìáôá.
Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá øõ÷éêÝò åêäçëþóåéò ðïõ äýóêïëá ãßíïíôáé áíôéëçðôÝò áðü
ôïí Üíèñùðï. ÁõôÝò ïé øõ÷éêÝò åêäçëþóåéò - åñåèéóìïß, áíôáðïêñßíïíôáé óå
Üëëåò óõ÷íüôçôåò - êñáäáóìïýò, Üëëùí ðåñéï÷þí ôçò Ðáíäçìéïõñãßáò, ðïõ
åîçãïýíôáé ìå ôçí ÌåôáöõóéêÞ Þ ôïí Åóùôåñéóìü.
¼ôáí ëïéðüí ëÝìå ãéá Åóùôåñéêü Êëåéäß, íáé ìåí ðñïûðïèÝôïõìå ôçí ý-
ðáñîç åíüò öõóéêïý Íïõ, áëëÜ êáé ôçí áîßá ôïõ íá óôñÝöåôáé åíäüôåñá - øç-
ëüôåñá ðñïò ôçí õðåñÜíù âñéóêüìåíç Íüçóç êáé áð' áõôÞ íá äÝ÷åôáé ôá øõ-
÷ïðíåõìáôéêÜ êýìáôá - ìçíýìáôá - åñåèéóìïýò ôçò øõ÷Þò. Ôüôå Ýñ÷ïíôáé ïé
åëëÜìøåéò Þ ïé öùôéóìïß, ðïõ ëýíïõí ðñïâëÞìáôá áéþíùí êáé ü÷é öõóéêÜ ç
ðôþóç ôïõ ìÞëïõ áð' ôç ìçëéÜ üðùò Ýãéíå óôïí Íåýôùíá ãéá íá ôïõ ðáñïõ-
óéÜóåé ôçí Ýëîç êáé ôçí âáñýôçôá. Êáé ðïõ åí óõíå÷åßá ç ìåãÜëç óõãêÝíôñù-
óÞ ôïõ Ýêáìå ôïí Íåýôùíá íá óôï÷áóôåß - äéáëïãéóôåß ôüóï, üóï ÷ñåéáæüôáí
ï Íïõò ôïõ ãéá íá åíùèåß ìå ôçí ÍüçóÞ ôïõ êáé ì' áõôÞ íá öôÜóåé óôçí õ-
ðåñâáôéêÞ - õðåñóõíåéäçôÞ êáôÜóôáóÞ ôïõ.
Ïêôþ ÊëÜäïé óáò ðñïóöÝñïíôáé êáé Üëëïé ðÝíôå ßóùò óáò ðñïóöåñèïýí
óôï ìÝëëïí. Ï êÜèå ÊëÜäïò ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý åßíáé ìéá îÝ÷ùñç ÅóùåðéóôÞ-
ìç Þ ìéá ðëåõñÜ Þ ìéá ðåñéï÷Þ ôçò áðïêáëõðôüìåíçò ÁëÞèåéáò.
ÕðÜñ÷ïõí 13 ðñùôáñ÷éêïß ÊëÜäïé ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý. Áð' áõôïýò Ý÷ïõí ðá-
ñïõóéáóôåß ùò óÞìåñá ïé 8, ïé äå õðüëïéðïé ðåñéìÝíïõí ôçí ßäéá ôý÷ç ôùí á-
äåëöéêþí ôïõò ãéá íá äïõí ôçí ðáñïõóßáóÞ ôïõò óôïõò áíáæçôçôÝò ôçò áëÞ-
èåéáò. Ïé 13 áõôïß ÊëÜäïé ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý åßíáé áíáëõôéêÜ ïé åîÞò:
ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ
ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ - ÏÑÈÏØÕ×ÉÓÌÏÓ
ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÖÉËÏÓÏÖÉÁ
ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ
ÁÓÔÑÏËÏÃÉÁ ÁÓÔÑÏÓÏÖÉÁ
ÁÐÏÓÕÌÂÏËÉÓÌÏÓ
ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ
ÅÐÉÓÔÇÌÏÍÉÊÏÓ ÐÍÅÕÌÁÔÉÓÌÏÓ
ÁÐÏÊÑÕÖÉÓÌÏÓ
ÌÕÓÔÉÊÉÓÌÏÓ
ÁÑ×ÁÉÁ ÊÁÉ ÍÅÏÔÅÑÁ ÌÕÓÔÇÑÉÁ
ÐÑÏÊÁÔÁÊËÕÓÌÉÁÉÏÉ ÐÏËÉÔÉÓÌÏÉ
Ç ÁËÇÈÉÍÇ ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÖÉËÏÓÏÖÉÁ ÔÇÓ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ
ÐÜíù ó' áõôïýò ôïõò ÊëÜäïõò ôçò ÌåôáöõóéêÞò èá áíáöåñèïýìå êáé ìå
ôï ÷þñï ðïõ ìáò ðñïóöÝñåôáé èá óõíåñãáóôïýìå, þóôå íá ðëçñïöïñçèåß
ï áíáãíþóôçò ìå ëßãåò öñáóôéêÝò ðéíåëéÝò, ôé äéäÜóêïõí ôá 30 ìå 33 ìáèÞ-
ìáôá ôïõ êÜèå êëÜäïõ Þ ïé 10 ìå 11 ôñéÜäåò ôïõò, üðùò óõíçèßæïõìå íá ôïõò
áðïêáëïýìå.
ÊÜèå ÊëÜäïò ìáò ãíùñßæåé ôçí Üëëç üøç ôçò öõóéêÞò ôïõ åðåîåñãáóßáò,
ôçí åóùôåñéêÞ üøç ôçò ïðïéáóäÞðïôå åðéóôÞìçò, ôå÷íéêÞò Þ öéëïóïöéêÞò.
Ãéáôß ôçí ïíïìÜæïõìå åðéóôÞìç; Ãéá íá ôçò äþóïõìå óôç öõóéêÞ êïõâÝíôá
ôçí áñìüæïõóá èÝóç ðïõ äéêáéïýôáé ùò áëÞèåéá. Ãéáôß ï çëåêôñéóìüò, ç Ýë-
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
he Esoteric Key is constituted by 13 Branches of Studies by Corre-
spondence Courses in the Esoterism of which - for the time being -
only the 8 have been published.
Every Branch of it is taught in the Metaphysical or Esoteric side. First, it
is based on the fact that besides the orhtologism and the stabilized logic,
besides our five senses, there are different receivers of another vibration type,
that are not based on the irritations of the matter. It is about some psychi-
cal expressions that are diffucultly conceived by man. These psychical ex-
pressions-irritations correspond to other frequencies-vibrations of other dis-
tricts in the Omnicreation that are explained by the Metaphysics or by the
Esoterism.
Therefore, when we talk about the Esoteric Key, on the one hand we pre-
suppose the existence of a physical Mind, but on the other hand, its value
to turn inner - higher to the Intellect existing above and through it to receive
the psychical-spiritual waves - messages - irritations of the soul. Then the
splendors or the lightings come that solve the eternal problems and cer-
tainly not the fall of the apple from the apple-tree as it happened with New-
ton, to present him the attraction and the gravity. And that afterwards, its
great concentration made Newton to think-meditate as much as his Mind
needed to be united with his Intellect and through it, to reach the trans-
gressive-hyperconscious situation.
Eight Branches are offered you and five more may be offered you in the
future. Every Branch of the Esoterism is a separate Esoteric Science or a
side or an area of the revealed Truth.
There 13 very original Branches of Esoterism. Until now the 8 of them
have been presented, and the remaining wait the same luck of their broth-
erly ones to see their presentation to the searchers of the truth. These 13
Branches of the Esoterism are analytically the following:
MEDITATION
HYPNOTISM-ORTHOPSYCHISM
ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY
ESOTERIC THERAPEUTICS
ASTROLOGY- ASTROSOPHY
DESYMBOLISM
ESOTERIC INITIATION
SCIENTIFIC SPIRITUALISM
OCCULTISM
MYSTICISM
ANCIENT AND MODERN MYSTERIES
ANTEDILUVIAN CIVILIZATIONS
THE TRUE ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY OF YOGA
We shall refer to these Branches of the Metaphysics, in the limits offered
us and we will cooperate, so that the reader can be informed in a few
phrasal brush strokes what the 30-33 lessons of every branch or their 10-
11 truads, as we use to call them, teach.
Every Branch lets us know the other side of its physical elaboration, the
internal side of any science, technical or philosophical. Why do we call it
science? To give it in the natural talk, the suitable position it is entitled to,
as truth. For we do not know from where the electrism, the attraction, the
gravity, the repulsion, the magnetism and many other powers, energies
65 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
îç, ç âáñýôçôá, ç Üðùóç, ï ìáãíçôéóìüò êáé ðëåßóôåò üóåò ðåñßåñãåò äõíÜ-
ìåéò, åíÝñãåéåò áðü ôçí ßäéá öýóç ôïõò, äåí îÝñïõìå áðü ðïõ ìáò Ýñ÷ïíôáé
êáé ôé ôéò äéáêéíåß...
Ï Åóùôåñéóìüò ìå ôá ÊëåéäéÜ ôïõ, åîåôÜæåé ôçí Üãíùóôç ðëåõñÜ áõôþí
ôùí ãåãïíüôùí - öáéíïìÝíùí êáé ì' áõôÝò ôïõ ôéò åóùåðéóôÞìåò - áðïäåßîåéò,
óôçñßæåé áõôïý ôïõ åßäïõò ôá öáéíüìåíá êáé ìÜëéóôá ìáò åîçãåß ðþò áðü ôïý-
ôåò ôéò Üãíùóôåò ìá ÷ñçóéìïðïéïýìåíåò ðçãÝò åíÝñãåéáò, ü÷é ìüíï óõãêñá-
ôåßôáé ï êüóìïò, áëëÜ êáé ÷Üñéò ó' áõôÝò õðÜñ÷åé êáé ìÝóá ó' áõôïý ôïõ åß-
äïõò ôéò áéôéüôçôåò æïýìå, õðÜñ÷ïõìå êáé äñïýìå, áñíïýìåíïé ôéò ðéï ðïë-
ëÝò öïñÝò ôá áßôéá ôçò ßäéáò ôçò ýðáñîÞò ìáò.
¼ðùò ãßíåôáé íïçôü ï Åóùôåñéóìüò åßíáé ç Êùäéêïðïßçóç ôçò Ðáãêü-
óìéáò Óïößáò ìÝóá üìùò áðü ôçí ðñïóùðéêÞ åðéâåâáßùóç êáé óöñáãßäá å-
íüò óýã÷ñïíïõ ¸ëëçíá ÄáóêÜëïõ - Ìýóôç (áðïêñõöéóôÞ êáé ìõóôéêéóôÞ),
ôïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ (1913-1993).
Ïé äåêáôñåßò áíáöåñüìåíïé ÊëÜäïé ôïõ åßíáé ìüíïí Ýíá ìéêñü óçìåßï ôïõ
áíáëõüìåíïõ èÝìáôïò. Èá ðñÝðåé åðßóçò íá óõìâïõëåõôåßôå êáé íá ìåëåôÞ-
óåôå ôá âéâëßá, ôéò ìåëÝôåò êáé ôï ðåñéïäéêü ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ, ï ïðïßïò áíïßãåé
äéÜðëáôá ôéò èýñåò íá ìðïýìå üëïé óôá ìåãÜëç óÜëá ôïõ ïõñÜíéïõ êüóìïõ,
üðïõ ãéá íá åéóÝëèïõìå ðñÝðåé âåâáßùò íá áðïêáèáñèïýìå áðü ôçò ýëçò
ôïõ øåýôéêïõ ôïýôïõ êüóìïõ ôá äÞèåí êáëÜ êáé áñåóôÜ.
Ç ðïëõãíùóßá ôçò åóùôåñéêÞò ðñáãìáôéêüôçôáò èá ìáò äþóåé ôçí äýíá-
ìç êáé ôçí óïößá íá ãíùñßóïõìå ôïí ¸óù Êüóìï ìå ôçí âïÞèåéá êáé óõ-
ìðáñÜóôáóç ôçò ðïëõäýíáìçò øõ÷Þò ìáò.
Íá ç óðïõäáéüôçôá ôïõ Åóùôåñéêïý Êëåéäéïý êáé ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò Ðáéäåß-
áò. Áîßæåé ôïí êüðï íá êáôáðéáóôåß êáíåßò ìáæß ôïõ, ü÷é âÝâáéá áðëþò íá ôï
äéáâÜóåé, áëëÜ íá ôï ìåëåôÞóåé áðü âáèéÜ ìÝóá ôïõ, þóôå êÜðïôå ìáæß ôïõ
íá óõæÞóåé, åéóåñ÷üìåíïò óôá Üäõôá ôùí áäýôùí ôçò äéêÞò ôïõ ðíåõìáôïøõ-
÷Þò.
Ìðïñåßò êáé óõ ößëå áíáãíþóôç íá Ýëèåéò êïíôÜ óôï Üäõôï êáé íá ãåõ-
èåßò, áí öõóéêÜ ôï Ý÷åéò åóùôåñéêÞ áíÜãêç, ôï ìÝëé - íÝêôáñ ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò
Ðáéäåßáò ðïõ âñßóêåôáé óôï Åóùôåñéêü Êëåéäß ðïõ äçìéïýñãçóå ï ÄÜóêá-
ëïò Íéêüëáïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò êáé ðïõ ðåñéÝ÷åé ÅîåéäéêåõìÝíïõò ÊëÜäïõò
Óðïõäþí ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý äé' áëëçëïãñáößáò, ìå áíÜëïãç èåùñçôéêÞ êáé
ðñáêôéêÞ êáôÜñôéóç.
ÔÏ ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÏ ÊËÅÉÄÉ
Ï ÄÜóêáëïò ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ (1913-1993) ýóôåñá áðü ìå-
ëÝôç êáôÝëçîå óôçí áðüöáóç íá åêäüóåé ôï "ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÏ ÊËÅÉÄÉ", ôçí äé-
äáóêáëßá äçëáäÞ üëùí ôùí êëÜäùí ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý, ìå áëëçëïãñáößá.
Ì' áõôüí ôïí ôñüðï áíôß íá Ýñ÷ïíôáé ïé ìáèçôÝò êïíôÜ ìáò êáé íá õðï÷ñå-
þíïíôáé óôá åðéâáëëüìåíá ùñÜñéá, èá Ý÷ïõí óôá ÷Ýñéá ôïõò ôçí äéäáêôÝá ý-
ëç, èá ìåëåôïýí êáé èá áðáíôïýí óôá åñùôÞìáôá, üðïôå ìðïñïýí, áíÜëïãá
ìå ôéò óõíèÞêåò ôçò éäéáßôåñçò æùÞò ôïõò. ´Åôóé äßäåôáé ç åõêáéñßá íá Ýñ÷ï-
íôáé óå áìåóüôåñç åðáöÞ üëïé ïé Üíèñùðïé ðïõ åíäéáöÝñïíôáé ãéá ôçí Ìå-
ôáöõóéêÞ êáé ôïõò êëÜäïõò ôçò, áíåîÜñôçôá åÜí âñßóêïíôáé åíôüò Þ åêôüò Åë-
ëÜäáò.
ÂÝâáéá ïöåßëïõìå íá äéåõêñéíßóïõìå ðþò ãéá ìéá åíäåëå÷Ýóôåñç åéò âÜ-
èïò ìåëÝôç êáé êõñßùò åöáñìïãÞ ôçò ÌåôáöõóéêÞò Öéëïóïößáò èá ðñÝðåé
íá õðÜñîåé óôáèåñÞ êáé Üìåóç äéäáêôéêÞ ó÷Ýóç ìå ÄÜóêáëï Þ ÅêðáéäåõôÞ
ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý, ãéá íá óðïõäÜóåé êáíåßò åðéóôçìïíéêÜ êáé ðñáêôéêÜ ôçí
áíáâáôéêÞ êëßìáêá ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò ÁëÞèåéáò.
Ãéá íá ëÜâåé êáíåßò ìÝñïò óôï ðñüãñáììá ôïõ "Åóùôåñéêïý Êëåéäéïý" èá
ðñÝðåé íá áêïëïõèÞóåé ôçí åîÞò äéáäéêáóßá:
1. Íá óõìðëçñþóåé ôçí áßôçóç åããñáöÞò ãéá ôï "Åóùôåñéêü Êëåéäß". Ç áß-
ôçóç áõôÞ èá óõíïäåýåôáé ìå ôá÷õäñïìéêÞ åðéôáãÞ 3000 äñ÷. ðïõ èá åßíáé
ãéá ôçí åããñáöÞ.
2. Íá äéáëÝîåé áðü ôïõò ðáñáêÜôù êëÜäïõò áõôüí Þ áõôïýò ðïõ åðéèõìåß
íá ðáñáêïëïõèÞóåé, õðïäåéêíýïíôÜò ôïõò:
· ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ (11 ôñéÜäåò, óåë. 478, ó÷Þìá 30×21)
· ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ (10 ôñéÜäåò, óåë. 418, ó÷Þìá 30×21)
· ÁÓÔÑÏËÏÃÉÁ - ÁÓÔÑÏÓÏÖÉÁ (11 ôñéÜäåò, óåë. 565, ó÷Þìá 30×21)
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
that are curious by nature itself, come and what trades them...
The Esoterism with its Keys, examines the unknown side of these facts-
phenomena and by these esoteric sciences-proofs supports the phenome-
na of this kind and it even explains us how by these unknown but used en-
ergy sources, not only the world is hold but it exists due to them and due
to the causes of this kind we live, exist and act, denying most often, the caus-
es of our existence itself.
As it becomes comprehensible, the Esoterism is the Codification of the
Universal Wisdom, but through the personal confirmation and seal of a
modern Greek Master - Initiate (occultist and mystic), Nikolaos A. Margioris
(1913-1993).
Its thirteen referred Branches is only a small point of the analyzed mat-
ter. You have also to consult and to study the books, the essays and the jour-
nal of the Master who opens wide the doors so that all of us can enter the
big parlor of the heavenly world, where to enter, we first must be purged
from the so-called good and agreeable things of this false world of the mat-
ter.
The deep knowledge of the esoteric reality will give you the power and
the wisdom to know the Esoteric World by the help and the assistance of
your much powerful soul.
Here is the importance of the Esoteric Key and of the Esoteric Education.
It worths the pain for one to be occupied with it, not to read certainly, but
to study it thoroughly, so that to be able one day to discuss it, entering the
sanctuaries of his own spirit-soul.
Also you, my friend reader, can come near to the sanctuary and to taste,
if you need it, the honey-nectar of the Esoteric Education that exists in the
Esoteric Key that Master Nikolaos A. Margioris has created and that con-
tains the Specialized Branches of Studies in the Esoterism by correspondence
cources, in an analogous theoretical and practical formation.
THE ESOTERIC KEY
(From now only to Greek language)
Master NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS (1913-1993) after a thorough study,
decided to publish the "ESOTERIC KEY", that is the teaching of all the E-
soterism branches, by correspondence courses.
This way, instead of the students coming near us and being obliged to
follow the imposed hours, they will have the teaching material on hand, they
will study and will answer the questions, whenever they can, according to
their private life conditions. So, everyone interested in Metaphysics and its
branches, is given the opportunity to come in a direct touch, no matter if
he is inside or outside Greece.
Definitely, we ought to clarify that for a thorough study and mainly for
the implementation of the Metaphysical Philosophy, a steady and direct
teaching relation between a Master or an Instructor of Esoterism should ex-
ist, so that one may be able to study scientifically and in practice the as-
cending scale of the Esoteric Truth.
In order that one may be able to participate in the program of the "Eso-
teric Key", one must follow this procedure:
1. He must complete the enrolment application for the "Esoteric Key". This
application should be accompanied by a mail cheque of 3.000 drs. for the
enrolment fee.
2. He must choose of the following branches the one or the ones he will
follow, indicating them:
· ESOTERIC THERAPEUTICS (11 triads, 478 pages, shape 30X21)
· MEDITATION (10 triads, 418 pages, shape 30X21)
· ATROLOGY - ASTROSOPHY (11 triads, 565 pages, shape 30X21)
· HYPNOTISM - ORTHOPSYCHISM (10 triads, pages 400, shape
30X21)
· SCIENTIFIC SPIRITUALISM (10 triads, 400 pages, shape 30X21)
· ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY (1O triads, 388 pages, shape 30X21)
· ESOTERIC INITIATION (1O triads, 385 pages, shape 30X21)
66 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 · ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ - ÏÑÈÏØÕ×ÉÓÌÏÓ (10 ôñéÜäåò, óåë. 400, ó÷Þìá
30×21)
· ÅÐÉÓÔÇÌÏÍÉÊÏÓ ÐÍÅÕÌÁÔÉÓÌÏÓ (10 ôñéÜäåò, óåë. 400, ó÷Þìá
30×21)
· ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÖÉËÏÓÏÖÉÁ (10 ôñéÜäåò, óåë. 388, ó÷Þìá 30×21)
· ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ (10 ôñéÜäåò, óåë. 385, ó÷Þìá 30×21)
3. Ãéá êÜèå êëÜäï èá ðñïêáôáâÜëëåé ìå ôá÷õäñïìéêÞ åðéôáãÞ ãéá ôá ôñßá
ðñþôá ìáèÞìáôá (1ç ôñéÜäá) 3000 äñ÷. ¼ëïõ ôïõ êýêëïõ ôá ìáèÞìáôá åß-
íáé áíÜëïãá ìå ôïí êëÜäï áðü ôñéÜíôá Ýùò ôñéáíôáôñßá (30-33 ìáèÞìáôá) êáé
åßíáé ÷ùñéóìÝíá óå äÝêá Ýùò Ýíôåêá (10-11) ôñéÜäåò. Ç êÜèå ôñéÜäá ðåñé-
ëáìâÜíåé åííÝá (9) åñùôÞóåéò, óôéò ïðïßåò ï ìáèçôÞò åßíáé õðï÷ñåùìÝíïò
íá áðáíôÞóåé êáé íá ìáò ôéò óôåßëåé ãñáðôþò. Êáôüðéí Ý÷åé ôï äéêáßùìá íá ðÜ-
ñåé ôçí äåýôåñç ôñéÜäá, áöïý ðÜëé áðïóôåßëåé ìéá åðéôáãÞ 3000 äñ÷. Èá á-
ðáíôÞóåé ðÜëé óôéò 9 åñùôÞóåéò êáé èá óõíå÷ßóåé ãéá ôçí ôñßôç ôñéÜäá ìå ôïí
ßäéï ùò Üíù ðåñéãñáöüìåíï ôñüðï.
´Å÷åé åðßóçò ôï äéêáßùìá íá êáèõóôåñåß ôïí êýêëï êÜèå ìáèÞìáôïò (êëÜ-
äïõ) áðü Ýíá (1) Ýùò äýï (2) ÷ñüíéá. Ìðïñåß äçëáäÞ ï êáèÝíáò íá ðáßñ-
íåé ôç óõíÝ÷åéá ôùí ìáèçìÜôùí åíüò êëÜäïõ, ìÝóá ó' áõôü ôï ÷ñïíéêü äéÜ-
óôçìá, åöüóïí êÜèå ÷ñüíï áíáíåþíåé ôçí åããñáöÞ ôïõ óáí ìáèçôÞò ôïõ Ï-
ìáêïåßïõ ÔñéêÜëùí Þ Èåóóáëïíßêçò óôï Åóùôåñéêü Êëåéäß. Ôá Ýîïäá áðï-
óôïëÞò ôùí ìáèçìÜôùí åðéâáñýíïõí ôïí ìáèçôÞ.
ÅðéôáãÝò êáé êÜèå öýóçò åìâÜóìáôá óôïí ê. Çëßá ÊáôóéÜìðá, Êåöáëëç-
íßáò 21, 42100 Ôñßêáëá, ôçë.: 0431 - 75505, e-mail: omakoio@omakoio.gr
Þ óôá áíôßóôïé÷á Ïìáêïåßá ôçò ðåñéï÷Þò óáò.
ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ - ÏÑÈÏØÕ×ÉÓÌÏÓ
Ï Õðíùôéóìüò - Ïñèïøõ÷éóìüò åßíáé Ýíá ðñáêôéêü óýóôçìá åðéêïéíùíß-
áò ìå ôçí øõ÷Þ (õðïóõíåßäçôï) ãéá ëüãïõò ëÞøçò ãíþóåùí êáé ðëçñïöï-
ñéþí äéÜöïñåò ôùí ãíùóôþí - óõíåéäçôþí, ãéá èåñáðåõôéêïýò óêïðïýò, ãéá
ìåëÝôç ôùí øõ÷éêþí öáéíïìÝíùí êáé ãéá ðñïðáñáóêåõÞ óôçí Üíùóç êáé
óôçí ðíåõìáôéêÞ Ýíùóç.
Ï ÊëÜäïò áõôüò ôïõ Åóùôåñéêïý Êëåéäéïý áó÷ïëåßôáé ìå ôï õðïóõíåßäç-
ôï, üôáí ìå ôéò ãíþóåéò ôïõ åñåõíçôÞ, ç óõíåßäçóç ðáñáäþóåé ôç óêõôÜëç
óôçí áäåëöÞ ôçò õðïóõíåßäçóç.
Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá ìéá åðéóôÞìç âáèéÜò áîßáò, ìå ôçí ïðïßá êáôïñèþíïíôáé
áðßóôåõôá åðéôåýãìáôá, ÷Üñéò óôçí áíèñùðïåíåñãåéáêÞ ðáñåìâïëÞ ìå
ôçí õðïâïëçìéáßá åéó÷þñçóç ìÝóá óôïí ðïëýðëïêï êáé ðïëýðëåõñï ÷þ-
ñï ôçò õðïóõíåßäçôçò äñáóôçñéüôçôáò. Ç ôå÷íéêÞ ýðíùóç Þ ç ïñèÞ ôçò
øõ÷Þò åðßäñáóç ðÜíù óôïí åãêÝöáëï ìáò ðáñÝ÷åé ôéò äõíáôüôçôåò ëÞ-
øçò áðü ôïí õðïóõíåßäçôï ÷þñï Þ ôïí áéèåñéêü ÷þñï, ôåñÜóôéùí ãíþ-
óåùí êáé âïÞèåéáò.
Ìå ëßãá ëüãéá áíáëýïíôáò ôçí áîßá ôïõ õðíùôéóìïý - ïñèïøõ÷éóìïý èá
ëÝãáìå ðùò ç ëåéôïõñãßá ôçò õðïóõíåßäçóçò ÔÅ×ÍÉÊÁ öÝñíåé óå åðáöÞ
ôïí áíèñùðïíïý ìå Üëëïõ ôýðïõ óõ÷íüôçôåò, åêåßèåí ôùí ãíþñéìùí öõóé-
êþí óõ÷íïôÞôùí, ðïõ óõíäÝåôáé êáé óõíáãåëÜæåôáé ç óõíåßäçóç.
Ç ýðíùóç ÷ñçóéìïðïéåß ôï õðïóõíåßäçôï ðïõ äéáêáôÝ÷åé Ýíá ðëÞñåò áñ-
÷åßï ôùí ðåñéðåôåéþí ôïõ áíèñþðïõ ôüóï ôïõ ßäéïõ ôïõ öõóéêïý ïñãáíéóìïý
ôïõ, ôùí ïñãÜíùí ôïõ, üóï êáé ôùí ëçóìïíçìÝíùí ó÷Ýóåùí ôçò ðíåõìáôï-
øõ÷Þò, ôüóï óôçí ðáñïýóá óÜñêùóç, üóï êáé óå ðñïçãïýìåíåò.
Ìå ôïí õðíùôéóìü - ïñèïøõ÷éóìü, ìðïñïýìå íá áíáóýñïõìå áðü ôá âÜ-
èç ôçò ìíÞìçò ôåñÜóôéáò áîßáò áíáìíÞóåéò. Ìðïñïýìå íá èåñáðåýóïõìå óù-
ìáôéêÝò êáé øõ÷éêÝò áññþóôéåò. Ìðïñïýìå íá ãõñßóïõìå ôéò áéèåñéêÝò ðå-
ñéï÷Ýò, ðïõ áðïôåëïýí ôá 4/7 ôïõ üëïõ áéèåñéêïöõóéêïý êüóìïõ ìáò.
Ç ýðíùóç åßíáé ðïëýôéìïò âïçèüò óôïí Üíèñùðï, áí åîáóêåßôáé áðü åê-
ðáéäåõìÝíïõò óõíáíèñþðïõò ðïõ ãíùñßæïõí ôïí ôñüðï íá õðåñðçäïýí ôá
åìðüäéá ðïõ ðñïâÜëëåé ç óõíåßäçóÞ ìáò.
Ìðïñåßò êáé óõ ößëå áíáãíþóôç íá Ýëèåéò êïíôÜ óôï Üäõôï êáé íá ãåõ-
èåßò, áí öõóéêÜ ôï Ý÷åéò åóùôåñéêÞ áíÜãêç, ôï ìÝëé - íÝêôáñ ôïõ Õðíùôéóìïý
- Ïñèïøõ÷éóìïý ðïõ âñßóêåôáé óôï Åóùôåñéêü Êëåéäß ðïõ äçìéïýñãçóå ï
ÄÜóêáëïò Íéêüëáïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò êáé ðïõ ðåñéÝ÷åé ÅîåéäéêåõìÝíïõò ÊëÜ-
äïõò Óðïõäþí ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý äé' áëëçëïãñáößáò, ìå áíÜëïãç èåùñçôé-
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
3. For every branch he will pay in advance by mail cheque for the three
first lessons 3.000 drs. The lessons of all the circle are analogous to the
branch from thirty to thirty three (30-33 lessons) and if they are separated
in ten to eleven (10-11) triads. Every triad contains nine (9) questions w-
chih the student is obliged to answer and to send them written to us. Af-
terwards, he has the right to take the second triad, after he has sent us al-
so a cheque of 3.000 drs. He will answer again the questions and he will
continue for the third triad in the same above-described way.
He has also the right to delay every lesson (branch) circle for one (1) to
two (2) years. That is everybody can take the continuation of a branch
lessons within this time, since every year one renews his enrolment as a s-
tudent of Trikala Omakoeio in the Esoteric Key. The dispatch lessons fees
charge the student.
Any cheques and remittances should be addressed to mr. Ilias Katsi-
ampas, 21, Kefallinias street, 42100, Trikala, e-mail: omakoio@omakoio.gr,
tel. no. 0431-75505 or 031 - 410497 or 093 - 2418994 or in the topical
Omakoia of their area.
HYPNOTISM - ORTHOPSYCHISM
The Hypnotism-Orthopsychism is a practical system of communication
with the soul (subconscious) for reasons of receiving knowledge and infor-
mation different than the known-conscious one, for therapeutical purpos-
es, for the study of the psychical phenomena and for the preparation to the
elevation and to the spiritual union.
This Branch of the Esoteric Key is occupied with the conscious, when by
the searcher's knowledge, the conscience delivers the staff to its sister sub-
conscience.
It is about a science of deep value, by which unbelievable attainments
are achieved, due to the human-energical interposition by the substituted
penetration in the complicate and multilateral space of the subconscious ac-
tivity. The technical hypnosis and the right influence on the brain, affords
us the capacities of knowledge by the subconscious space or by the ether-
ic area, of immense knowledge and help.
In one word, by analyzing the value of the hypnotism-orthopsychism, we
would say that the function of the subconscience brings TECHNICALLY in
touch the human-mind with frequencies of another type, of the known
physical frequencies, that the conscience connects and consorts with.
The hypnosis uses the subconscious that possesses a full archives of the
man's adventures, as much of his physical organism itself, of his organs, as
of the forgotten relations of the spirit-soul, as much in the present incarna-
tion as in previous ones.
By the hypnotism - orthopsychism, we can pull up from the depth of the
memory, some remembrances of immense value. We can cure the bodily
and psychical diseases. We can turn the etheric areas that compose the 4/7
of our whiole etheric physical world.
The hypnosis is a valuable assistant to man, if it is exercised by well-
trained fellow-men who know how to jump over the obstacles that our con-
science propounds.
Also you, my friend reader, can come near the sanctuary and taste, if y-
ou need it deeply, the honey-nectar of the Hypnotism-Orthopsychism that
is in the Esoteric Key that Master Nikolaos A. Margioris has created and that
contains Specialized Branches of Studies in the Esoterism by correspondence
course, in an analogous theoretical and practical formation.
ESOTERIC KEY
HYPNOTISM - ORTHOPSYCHISM
CONTENTS 400 PAGES
1ST TRIAD, OCTOBER 1977: 1. THE THEORY OF HYPNOTISM- OR-
THOPSYCHISM. 2. THE KINDS OF THE TODAY'S HYPNOTISM-OR-
THOPSYCHISM. 3. SARCO'S HYPNOTISM. MECHANICAL HYPNO-
TISM.
2ND TRIAD, DECEMBER 1977: 4. LIEMBAUL'S HYPNOTISM, ME-
67 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
êÞ êáé ðñáêôéêÞ êáôÜñôéóç.
ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÏ ÊËÅÉÄÉ
ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ - ÏÑÈÏØÕ×ÉÓÌÏÓ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ ÓÅËÉÄÅÓ: 400
1ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÏÊÔÙÂÑÇÓ 1977: 1. Ç ÈÅÙÑÉÁ ÔÏÕ ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÕ -
ÏÑÈÏØÕ×ÉÓÌÏÕ. 2. ÔÁ ÅÉÄÇ ÔÏÕ ÓÇÌÅÑÉÍÏÕ ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÕ - ÏÑ-
ÈÏØÕ×ÉÓÌÏÕ. 3. ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ ÔÏÕ ÓÁÑÊÏ. ÌÇ×ÁÍÉÊÏÓ ÕÐÍÙÔÉ-
ÓÌÏÓ.
2ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÄÅÊÅÌÂÑÇÓ 1977: 4. ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ ÔÏÕ ËÉÅÌÐÙË.
ÌÇ×ÁÍÉÊÏÓ ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ. 5. ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ ÔÏÕ ËÏÕÉÓ. ÌÇ×ÁÍÉ-
ÊÏÓ ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ. 6. ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ ÊÁÉ ÅÐÉÓÔÇÌÇ ÔÏÕ ÌÐÑÅÉÔ.
ÌÇ×ÁÍÉÊÏÓ ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ.
3ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÖÅÂÑÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ 1978: 7. ÁÕÔÏÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ ÊÁÉ ÁÕÔÏ-
ÓÕÃÊÅÍÔÑÙÓÇ. 8. ÁÕÔÏÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ ÓÁÍ ÅÑÃÏ ÔÇÓ ÁÕÈÕÐÏÂÏ-
ËÇÓ. 9. ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ ÌÅ ÅÐÉÄÑÁÓÇ ÓÔÇÍ ÏÑÁÓÇ.
4ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÁÐÑÉËÉÏÓ 1978: 10. ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ ÌÅ ÅÐÉÄÑÁÓÇ ÓÔÇÍ
ÁÊÏÇ. 11. ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ ÌÅ ÅÐÉÄÑÁÓÇ ÓÔÇÍ ÏÓÖÑÇÓÇ. 12. ÕÐÍÙ-
ÔÉÓÌÏÓ ÌÅ ÅÐÉÄÑÁÓÇ ÓÔÇÍ ÁÖÇ.
5ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÉÏÕËÉÏÓ 1978: 13. ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ ÌÅ ÅÐÉÄÑÁÓÇ ÓÔÇ
ÃÅÕÓÇ. 14. ÓÔÁÄÉÁ ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÕ. 15. ÊÁÔÁËÇØÉÁ.
6ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÏÊÔÙÂÑÇÓ 1978: 16. ÕÐÍÏÂÁÓÉÁ. 17. ËÇÈÁÑÃÏÓ. 18.
ÃÏÇÔÅÉÁ ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÔÉÊÇ (ÎÅÍÇ ÐÑÏÓ ÔÇÍ ÕÐÏÂÏËÇ).
7ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÍÏÅÌÂÑÇÓ 1978: 19. Ï ÊÉÍÄÕÍÏÓ ÅÊ ÔÏÕ ÕÐÍÙÔÉ-
ÓÌÏÕ. 20. ÄÉÁÖÏÑÁ ÐÅÉÑÁÌÁÔÁ ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÕ ÐÁÍÙ ÓÔÁ ÆÙÁ. 21.
ÌÁÃÍÇÔÉÊÏÓ ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ.
8ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÄÅÊÅÌÂÑÇÓ 1978: 22. ËÁ ÖÏÍÔÁÉÍ, Ï ÌÅÃÁËÏÓ Á-
ÐÏÓÔÏËÏÓ ÔÏÕ ÌÅÓÌÅÑ. 23. ÄÉÁÔÁÑÁ×ÅÓ ÔÙÍ ÁÉÓÈÇÓÅÙÍ ÊÁÉ
ÌÅÔÁÈÅÓÅÉÓ ÔÏÕÓ. 24. ÁÍÁÃÍÙÑÉÓÇ ÔÙÍ ÁÔÏÌÙÍ ÔÙÍ ÅÐÉÑÅ-
ÐÙÍ ÐÑÏÓ ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏ.
9ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÁÐÑÉËÇÓ 1979: 25. ÔÉ ÐÅÔÕ×ÁÉÍÏÕÌÅ ÌÅ ÔÏÍ ÕÐÍÙ-
ÔÉÓÌÏ. ÌÍÇÌÇ, ÄÕÍÁÌÇ, ÁÕÔÏÐÅÐÏÉÈÇÓÇ, ÃÍÙÓÇ, ÅÐÁÖÇ ÌÅ
ÌÁÊÑÕÍÏÕÓ ÊÁÉ ÁÏÑÁÔÏÕÓ ÊÏÓÌÏÕÓ. 26. ÏÌÁÄÉÊÏÓ ÕÐÍÙÔÉ-
ÓÌÏÓ ÊÁÉ ÐÁÍÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ. 27. ÐÁÑÁÉÓÈÇÓÅÉÓ ÄÉÁ ÔÏÕ ÕÐÍÙÔÉ-
ÓÌÏÕ.
10ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÉÏÕËÇÓ 1979: 28. ÅÃÊÅÖÁËÉÊÅÓ ÄÉÁÔÁÑÁ×ÅÓ ÊÁÉ Á-
ÌÍÇÓÉÁ ÌÅ ÔÇ ÄÕÍÁÌÇ ÔÏÕ ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÕ. 29. ÔÁ ÁÐÏËÉÈÙÌÅ-
ÍÁ ÅÍÓÔÉÊÔÁ ÕÐÏ ÔÇÍ ÅÐÉÄÑÁÓÇ ÔÏÕ ÁÑ×ÉÊÏÕ ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÕ
ÓÔÏÍ ÁÍÈÑÙÐÏ. 30. ÔÏ ÌÕÓÔÇÑÉÏ ÔÇÓ ÄÉÁÓÐÁÓÇÓ ÔÇÓ ÐÑÏÓÙ-
ÐÉÊÏÔÇÔÁÓ ÌÅ ÔÏÍ ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏ ÊÁÉ ÔÏÍ ÁÕÔÏÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏ.
ÁÓÔÑÏËÏÃÉÁ - ÁÓÔÑÏÓÏÖÉÁ
Ç Áóôñïëïãßá Þôáí ç Áóôñïíïìßá ôùí ðáëéþí êáéñþí. ÐÝñáí áðü ôéò ãíþ-
óåéò ôùí ëáþí áõôþí, ìáò öÝñíåé ìéá åóùôåñéêÞ ëçóìïíçìÝíç ðéá óõíÞèåéá,
ðïõ åßíáé ç áíåýñåóç ôùí ðåñéðåôåéþí ôçò áíèñþðéíçò óÜñêùóçò ìå ôç ìåëÝ-
ôç ôçò åéìáñìÝíçò êÜèå åîáôïìéêïðïéçìÝíïõ üíôïò.
Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá ôï óýóôçìá ôïõ ìåãÜëïõ áñ÷éåñÝá ôçò Áéãýðôïõ Èþô Þ Èþè
(äñáâßäáò) Þ êáôÜ ôïõò áñ÷áßïõò ¸ëëçíåò, ôéò áðïêáëýøåéò ôïõ ÅñìÞ ôïõ Ôñé-
óìÝãéóôïõ ðïõ áöïñïýí ôçí ìåëÝôç ôïõ ÊÜñìá ôïõ áíèñþðïõ.
Ðåñéóðïýäáóôç ÅðéóôÞìç ìå äéáßóèçóç áõôþí ðïõ ìÝëëïõí íá óõìâïýí.
ÐáñÜëëçëá ðëáéóéþíåôáé êáé áðü ôçí Áóôñïóïößá ðïõ óôï âÜèïò ôçò åßíáé ç
ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá êáé ç Ìýçóç óôçí ÊïóìïãïíéêÞ Áóôñïëïãßá.
Ìüíï ìå ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý ôéò ãíþóåéò Ý÷åé áîßá êáé óçìáóßá ç Áóôñïëïãß-
á êáé ç Áóôñïóïößá, áëëéþò åßíáé ó÷åäüí Ü÷ñçóôç êáé áíùöåëÞò. Ïé ìáãíç-
ôéêÝò êáé Üëëåò áêôéíïâïëßåò ôùí Üóôñùí åðçñåÜæïõí ôçí ðïéüôçôá ôïõ ãÞéíïõ
ìáãíçôéóìïý êáé áõôüò ìå ôç óåéñÜ ôïõ åðéäñÜ áöüñçôá ðÜíù óôïí Üíèñùðï.
Ôï óýóôçìá ðïõ ðáñáäßäåôáé óôïí åí ëüãù ÊëÜäï åßíáé óýóôçìá Ìáñãéù-
ñÞ êáé ÅñìÞ ÔñéóìÝãéóôïõ Þ Èþô, "áíáóõñìÝíï" áðü ôçí ÁéãõðôéáêÞ ìýçóç
êáé ìå ÄñáâéäéáêÞ ðñïÝëåõóç êáé ìáò äéäÜóêåé ðþò íá ðñïöõëá÷èïýìå áðü
ôéò åðéäñÜóåéò ôùí Üóôñùí, ðñÜãìá ðïõ èá óõíôåëÝóåé óôçí êáôáíßêçóç ôïõ
êÜñìáôüò ìáò êáé óôçí åðéôÜ÷õíóç ôçò åóùôåñéêÞò ìáò åîÝëéîçò.
Ìðïñåßò êáé óõ ößëå áíáãíþóôç íá Ýëèåéò êïíôÜ óôï Üäõôï êáé íá ãåõèåßò,
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
CHANICAL HYPNOTISM. 5. LOUI'S HYPNOTISM, MECHANICAL HYP-
NOTISM. 6. BRIGHT'S HYPNOTISM AND SCIENCE, MECHANICAL
HYPNOTISM.
3RD TRIAD, FEBRUARY 1978: 7. SELF-HYPNOTISM AND SELF-
CONCENTRATION. 8. SELF-HYPNOTISM AS A WORK OF AUTO-
SUGGESTION. 9. HYPNOTISM AFFECTING EYESIGHT.
4TH TRIAD, APRIL 1978: 10. HYPNOTISM AFFECTING THE HEAR-
ING. 11. HYPNOTISM AFFECTING THE SMELL. 12. HYPNOTISM AF-
FECTING THE TOUCH.
5TH TRIAD, JULY 1978: 13. HYPNOTISM AFFECTING THE TASTE.
14. HYPNOTISM STAGES. 15. CATALEPSY.
6TH TRIAD, OCTOBER 1978: 16. SOMNAMBULISM. 17. LETHARGY.
18. HYPNOTISTIC CHARM (ALIEN TO SUGGESTION).
7TH TRIAD, NOVEMBER 1978: 19. THE DANGERS OF HYPNOTISM.
20. VARIOUS EXPERIMENTS ON ANIMALS. 21. MAGNETIC HYPNO-
TISM.
8TH TRIAD, DECEMBER 1978: 22. LAFONTAINE, MESMER'S GREAT
APOSTLE. 23. SENSATIONS DISTURBANCES AND THEIR TRANSPO-
SITIONS. 24. RECOGNIZING THE INDIVIDUALS PRONE TO HYPNO-
TISM.
9TH TRIAD, APRIL 1979: 25. WHAT WE SUCCEED BY HYPNOTISM,
MEMORY, POWER, SELF-CONFIDENCE, KNOWLEDGE, CONTACT
WITH FAR AND INVISIBLE WORLDS. 26. COLLECTIVE HYPNOTISM
AND OMNI-HYPNOTISM. 27. HALLUCINATIONS BY HYPNOTISM.
10TH TRIAD, JULY 1979: 28. MENTAL DISTURBANCES AND AM-
NESIA BY HYPNOTISM POWER. 29. THE PETRIFIED INSTINCTS UN-
DER THE INFLUENCE OF THE ORIGINAL YHPNOTISM ON MAN. 30.
THE MYSTERY OF THE PERSONALITY SPLITTING BY HYPNOTISM
AND BY SEL-HYPNOTISM.
ASTROLOGY - ASTROSOPHY
The Astrology was the Astronomy of the old times. Besides the knowl-
edge of these peoples, it brings us an internal habit forgotten now, that is
the discovery of the adventures of the human incarnation by studying the
destiny of every individualized being.
It is about the system of great Egyptian prelate Thot or Thoth (dravidi-
an) or according to the ancient Greeks, of Hermes the Threegreatest that
concern the study of man's Karma.
It is a profound Science treatung the presentiment of what is going to hap-
pen. At the same time, it is also surrounded by the Astrosophy that in depth
is the Esoteric Philosophy and the Initiation to the Cosmogonic Astrology.
Only by the knowledge of the Esoterism the Astrology and the Astroso-
phy is in value, otherwise it is nearly useless and vain. The magnetic and
the other radiations of the stars affect the quality of the earthy magnetism
and it, in turn influences intolerably on man.
The system that is delivered to the said Branch is Margiori's and Herme's
the Threegreatest or Thot's system, "pulled up" from the Egyptian initiation
and of a Dravidian origin, and teaches us how to protect ourselves from the
effects of the stars, which will contribute to the overcoming of our karma
and to the acceleration of our internal evolution.
Also you, my friend reader, can come near the sanctuary and taste, if cer-
tainly you need it deeply, the honey - nectar of the Astrology - Astrosophy
that is found in the Esoteric Key that Master Nikolaos A. Margioris has cre-
ated and that contains Specialized Branches of Studies in the Esoterism by
correspondence courses, in the analogous theoretical and practical forma-
tion.
ESOTERIC KEY
ASTROLOGY - ASTROSOPHY
CONTENTS 563 PAGES
1ST TRIAD, JUNE 1978: 1. ANCIENT EGYPTIAN TRADITION. 2. THE
ZODIAC. 3. THE ANCIENTS' PLANETS, THOUGH THEY MARKED SEV-
68 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
áí öõóéêÜ ôï Ý÷åéò åóùôåñéêÞ áíÜãêç, ôï ìÝëé - íÝêôáñ ôçò Áóôñïëïãßáò - Á-
óôñïóïößáò ðïõ âñßóêåôáé óôï Åóùôåñéêü Êëåéäß ðïõ äçìéïýñãçóå ï ÄÜóêá-
ëïò Íéêüëáïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò êáé ðïõ ðåñéÝ÷åé ÅîåéäéêåõìÝíïõò ÊëÜäïõò Óðïõ-
äþí ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý äé' áëëçëïãñáößáò, ìå áíÜëïãç èåùñçôéêÞ êáé ðñáêôé-
êÞ êáôÜñôéóç.
ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÏ ÊËÅÉÄÉ
ÁÓÔÑÏËÏÃÉÁ - ÁÓÔÑÏÓÏÖÉÁ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ ÓÅËÉÄÅÓ: 563
1ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÉÏÕÍÉÏÓ 1978: 1. ÁÑ×ÁÉÁ ÁÉÃÕÐÔÉÁÊÇ ÐÁÑÁÄÏÓÇ. 2.
ÆÙÄÉÁÊÏÓ ÊÕÊËÏÓ. 3. ÏÉ ÐËÁÍÇÔÅÓ ÔÙÍ ÁÑ×ÁÉÙÍ, ÁÍ ÊÁÉ ÓÇÌÅÉÙ-
ÍÁÍ 7.
2ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÉÏÕËÉÏÓ 1978: 4. ÐÅÑÉÅÑÃÇ ÐÑÏÓÇËÙÓÇ ÓÔÏ ÄÙÄÅÊÁ-
ÄÉÊÏ ÓÕÓÔÇÌÁ. 5. ÍÅÁ ÐÑÁÊÔÉÊÇ ÊÁÉ ÁÍÁËÕÔÉÊÇ ÁÐÏÄÏÓÇ ÔÏÕ Ù-
ÑÏÓÊÏÐÉÏÕ. 6. ÔÏ ÍÅÏ ÓÕÓÔÇÌÁ ÈÙÈ - ÉÐÐÁÑ×ÏÕ - ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇ,
ÐÏÕ ÓÕÌÐÅÑÉËÁÌÂÁÍÅÉ ÔÏ ÓÕÍÏËÏ ÔÇÓ ÖÉËÏÓÏÖÉÊÇÓ, ÉÓÔÏÑÉ-
ÊÇÓ ÊÁÉ ÅÌÐÅÉÑÉÊÇÓ ÁÓÔÑÏËÏÃÉÁÓ.
3ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÏÊÔÙÂÑÇÓ 1978: 7. É×ÍÏÃÑÁÖÇÓÇ ÔÏÕ ÆÙÄÉÁÊÏÕ, ÔÙÍ
ÏÉÊÙÍ, ÔÙÍ ÙÑÏÓÊÏÐÉÙÍ ÊÁÉ ÔÇÓ ÁÍÏÄÉÊÇÓ ÊËÉÌÁÊÁÓ. 8. ÊÕ-
ÑÉÁÑ×ÏÉ. 9. ÐÏËÉÊÏÉ ÁÓÔÅÑÅÓ.
4ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÁÐÑÉËÉÏÓ 1980: 10. ÌÅÔÁÔÏÐÉÓÇ ÔÏÕ ÁÎÏÍÁ ÔÇÓ ÃÇÓ.
11. ×ÁÑÁÊÔÇÑÉÓÔÉÊÁ ÓÕÌÂÏËÁ ÔÙÍ ÁÓÔÑÙÍ. 12. ÔÉ ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÕÍ ÌÅ-
ÓÁ ÔÏÕÓ ÏÉ ÄÙÄÅÊÁ ÁÓÔÑÏËÏÃÉÊÏÉ ÏÉÊÏÉ.
5ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÓÅÐÔÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ 1980: 13. ÌÁÃÍÇÔÉÊÇ ÅÐÉÑÑÏÇ ÔÏÕ ÊÁ-
ÈÅ ÆÙÄÉÏÕ. 14. ÓÕÍÏÄÏÉ ÔÙÍ ÐËÁÍÇÔÙÍ ÓÔÁ ÆÙÄÉÁ ÊÁÉ ÏÉÊÏÕÓ.
15. ÔÉ Ó×ÅÓÅÉÓ Å×ÏÕÍ ÌÅÔÁÎÕ ÔÏÕÓ ÔÁ ÆÙÄÉÁ ÊÉ ÁÕÔÁ ÌÅ ÔÏÍ ÁÍ-
ÈÑÙÐÏ.
6ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÓÅÐÔÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ 1980: 16. ÔÏ ÓÕÌÐÁÍ ÓÔÇÍ ÅÎÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ
ÕÐÏÓÔÁÓÇ ÔÏÕ. 17. ÔÉ ÅÉÍÁÉ Ç ÌÁÃÍÇÔÉÊÇ ÅÐÉÑÑÏÇ ÌÅÓÁ ÓÔÇ ÄÇ-
ÌÉÏÕÑÃÉÁ. 18. ÐÑÅÐÅÉ Ï ÁÍÈÑÙÐÏÓ ÍÁ ÐÅÑÉÌÅÍÅÉ ÔÇÍ ÌÏÉÑÁ ÔÏÕ;
7ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÍÏÅÌÂÑÇÓ 1980: 19. ÁÓÔÑÉÊÇ ÂÑÏ×Ç ÓÔÏÍ ÃÁËÁÍÏ
ÐËÁÍÇÔÇ ÌÁÓ. 20. ÐÁËÁÉÏÔÁÔÏÉ ÐÏËÉÊÏÉ ÁÓÔÅÑÅÓ ÁÐÏ ÔÏ 6000
ð.×. 21. ÔÑÉÔÇ ÊÉÍÇÓÇ ÔÇÓ ÃÇÓ. Ç ÌÅÔÁ×ÙÑÇÓÇ ÔÙÍ ÉÓÇÌÅÑÉÍÙÍ
ÓÇÌÅÉÙÍ.
8ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÄÅÊÅÌÂÑÇÓ 1980: 22. Ç ÁÓÔÑÏËÏÃÉÁ ÕÐÇÑÎÅ Ç ÅÐÉ-
ÓÔÇÌÇ ÊÁÉ Ç ÅËÐÉÄÁ ÔÇÓ ÌÉÊÑÏÊÏÓÌÉÊÇÓ ÕÐÏÓÔÁÓÇÓ, ÌÅ ÔÇÍ
ÏÐÏÉÁ ÅÊÁÌÅ Ï ÁÍÈÑÙÐÏÓ ÅÐÁÍÁÓÔÁÓÇ ÅÍÁÍÔÉÁ ÓÔÇ ÌÏÉÑÁ
ÐÏÕ ÐÑÅÓÂÅÕÁÍÁ ÊÁÐÏÉÁ ÐÁËÁÉÏÔÁÔÇ ÅÐÏ×Ç ÏÉ ÁÍÈÑÙÐÏÉ. 23.
Ï ÓÅÉÑÉÏÓ ÁÓÔÅÑÁÓ ÊÁÉ Ï ÁÑ×ÉÅÑÅÁÓ ÈÙÈ ÌÅ ÔÏÍ ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÏ ÓÕ-
ÍÔÏÍÉÓÌÏ ÔÏÕÓ ÐÑÏÓÅÖÅÑÁÍ ÕØÉÓÔÅÓ ÕÐÇÑÅÓÉÅÓ ÓÔÏÍ ÔÏÔÅ
ÊÏÓÌÏ. 24. ÔÁ ÄÅÊÁÇÌÅÑÁ ÓÔÏÕÓ ÁÓÔÑÏËÏÃÉÊÏÕÓ ÕÐÏËÏÃÉ-
ÓÌÏÕÓ ÊÁÉ Ç ÄÕÍÁÌÉÊÇ ÅÐÉÑÑÏÇ ÔÏÕÓ, ÐÁÍÙ ÓÔÏÍ ÁÍÈÑÙÐÏ.
9ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÄÅÊÅÌÂÑÇÓ 1980: 25. Ï ÇÌÅÑÇÓÉÏÓ ÊÁÉ Ï ÍÕÊÔÅÑÉÍÏÓ
ÌÁÃÍÇÔÉÓÌÏÓ ÔÇÓ ÃÇÓ. 26. Ï ÆÙÏÄÏÔÇÓ ÇËÉÏÓ ÅÓÔÉÁ ÌÁ ÊÁÉ ÄÉÁ-
ÍÏÌÅÁÓ ÔÙÍ ÁÊÔÉÍÏÂÏËÉÙÍ ÔÏÕ ÐÅÑÉÂÁËËÏÍÔÏÓ ÓÕÌÐÁÍÔÏÓ
ÊÏÓÌÏÕ ÐÏÕ Ó×ÇÌÁÔÉÆÏÕÍ ÐÁÍÙ ÓÔÏÍ ÐËÁÍÇÔÇ ÌÁÓ ÔÇ ÆÙÇ.
27. ÔÏ ÐÉÓÔÅÕÙ ÔÏÕ ÃÉÁÔÑÏÕ ÌÅÓÌÅÑ ÃÉÁ ÔÏÍ ÌÁÃÍÇÔÉÓÌÏ ÔÙÍ
ÁÓÔÑÙÍ.
10ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÖÅÂÑÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ 1981: 28. Ï ÌÁÃÍÇÔÉÓÌÏÓ ÊÁÔÁ ÔÏÍ
ÂÉÏ×ÇÌÉÊÏ ÓÁÑË ÑÁÉ×ÅÌÐÁ×. 29. ÅÉÍÁÉ ÐÁÍÔÏÔÅ ÅÐÉÔÕ×ÇÌÅÍÅÓ
ÏÉ ÁÓÔÑÏËÏÃÉÊÅÓ ÐÑÏÑÑÇÓÅÉÓ; 30. ÔÏ ÂÁÈÕÔÅÑÏ ÌÕÓÔÇÑÉÏ ÔÇÓ
ÁÓÔÑÏËÏÃÉÁÓ ÓÁÍ ÔÇÓ ÁÑ×ÁÉÏÔÅÑÇÓ ÐÁÍÅÐÉÓÔÇÌÇÓ ÔÏÕ ÊÁÉ-
ÑÏÕ ÔÇÓ, ËÇÓÌÏÍÇÌÅÍÇ ÌÁÍÁ ÔÇÓ ÅÍÄÏÎÇÓ ÓÇÌÅÑÉÍÇÓ ÊÏ-
ÑÇÓ ÔÇÓ ÁÓÔÑÏÍÏÌÉÁÓ.
11ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÉÁÍÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ 1985: 31. ÊÕÂÅÑÍÇÔÅÓ ÆÙÄÉÙÍ. ÔÏ ÆÙ-
ÄÉÏ ÕÖÉÓÔÁÔÁÉ ÔÇÍ ÅÐÉÄÑÁÓÇ ÅÍÏÓ ÐËÁÍÇÔÇ. 32. ÓÕÍÏÄÏÉ ÐËÁ-
ÍÇÔÙÍ. 33. ÁÍÁÊÅÖÁËÁÉÙÓÇ ÙÑÏÓÊÏÐÉÏÕ ÌÅ ÔÏ ÊËÁÓÉÊÏ ÐÁÑÁ-
ÄÅÉÃÌÁ.
ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ - ÓÔÏ×ÁÓÌÏÓ - ÈÅÙÓÇ
Ï Äéáëïãéóìüò åßíáé ðñáêôéêü óýóôçìá áíüäïõ ðïõ åíþíåé ôçí øõ÷Þ ìå
ôï Íïõ êáé ôåëéêÜ ìå ôï ßäéï ôï ðíåýìá. Äéåõñýíåé ôç ìíÞìç êáé óõëëÝãåé åë-
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
EN.
2ND TRIAD, JULY 1978: 4. STRANGE ATTACHMENT ON THE
TWELVE-SYSTEM. 5. NEW PRACTICAL AND ANALYTICAL VERSION
OF HOROSCOPE. 6. THE NEW SYSTEM THOTH - HIPPARCHPOS -
MARGIORIS, CONTAINING THE TOTAL OF THE PHILOSOPHICAL,
HISTORICAL AND EMPIRICAL ASTROLOGY.
3RD TRIAD, OCTOBER 1978: 7. DRAWING THE ZODIAC, THE
HOUSES, THE HOROSCOPES AND THE ELEVATING SXALE. 8. DOM-
INANTS. 9. POLIC STARS.
4TH TRIAD, APRIL 1980: 10. TRANSPOSITION OF THE EARTH AX-
IS. 11. CHARACTERISTIC SYMBOLS OF THE STARS. 12. WHAT THE
TWELVE ASTROLOGICAL HOUSES COMPRISE.
5TH TRIAD, SEPTEMBER 1980: 13. MAGNETIC INFLUENCE OF
EVERY ZODIAC SIGN. 14. PLANET SYMBOLS ON THE SIGNS AND ON
THE HOUSES. 15. THE RELATION OF THE SIGNS AMONG THEM-
SELVES AND THE RELATION BETWEEN THE SIGNS AND MAN.
6TH TRIAD, SEPTEMBER 1980: 16. UNIVERSE IN ITS EXTERNAL
SUBSTANCE. 17. WHAT THE MAGNETIC INFLUENCE IS IN CRE-
ATION. 18. SHOULD MAN WAIT FOR HIS DESTINY?
7TH TRIAD, NOVEMBER 1980: 19. STELLAR RAIN ON OUR BLUE
PLANET. 20. OLDEST POLIC STARS SINCE 6.000 B.C. 21. THE THIRD
MOVEMENT OF EARTH. THE SEPARATION OF THE EQUATORIAL
POINTS.
8TH TRIAD, DECEMBER 1980: 22. ASTROLOGY HAS BEEN THE
SCIENCE AND THE HOPE OF THE MICROCOSMIC EXISTENCE, BY
WHICH MAN REVOLTED AGAINST THE DESTINY PROFESSED IN
OLD AGES. 23. THE SIRIUS STAR AND THE PRELATE THOTH BY
THEIR ESOTERIC COORDINATION OFFERED GREAT SERVICES TO
THAT WORLD. 24. THE TEN-DAY PERIODS IN THE ASTROLOGICAL
CALCULATIONS AND THEIR STRONG INFLUENCE ON MAN.
9TH TRIAD, DECEMBER 1980: 25. THE DAILY AND NOCTURNAL
MAGNETISM OF EARTH. 26. THE LIFE-GIVER SUN AS THE SOURCE
AND THE DISTRIBUTOR OF THE SURROUNDED WORLD RADIA-
TIONS THAT FORM LIFE ON OUR PLANET. 27. DOCTOR MESMER'S
BELIEF ABOUT THE STAR MAGNETISM.
10TH TRIAD, FEBRUARY 1981: 28. MAGNETISM ACCORDING TO
THE BIOCHEMIST CHARLS RAICHEBACH. 29. ARE THE ASTRO-
LOGICAL PREDICTIONS ALWAYS SUCCESSFUL? 30. THE DEEPEST
ASTROLOGY MYSTERY AS THE OLDEST SCIENCE. THE FORGOT-
TEN MOTHER OF THE GLORIOUS TODAY'S DAUGHTER OF AS-
TRONOMY.
11TH TRIAD, JANUARY 1985: 31. DOMINANTS OF THE SIGNS, THE
SIGN IS UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF A PLANET. 32. SYNODS OF
PLANETS. 33. RECAPITULATION OF THE HOROSCOPE ACCORD-
ING TO THE CLASSICAL EXAMPLE.
MEDITATION - THOUGHT - THEOSIS
The Meditation is a practical ascension system that unites the soul with
the Mind and finally, with the spirit itself. It enlarges the memory and col-
lects splendours and ecstasises, inciting the physical brains to fill up with Wis-
dom and to become the depository of new knowledge and revelations for
the very true invisible worlds.
Actually, It would be especially for the Greek, but also for every man, a
great misfortune not to know Greek philosopher Socrate's thought. Even
before him, Iraklitos, Pythagoras, Orfeas and a great number of others,
talked clearly about Theosis.
Yes, they wrote us in the Greek Mysticism about the brilliance's that il-
luminated man and that established him as a true wise and not as a sim-
ple philosopher, as a simple friend of the wisdom.
The meditation ascends or introduces man In a different area where the
causes, the Uterouses original ideas of all the thoughts exist. It gives us
69 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
ëÜìøåéò êáé åêóôÜóåéò ìå áðïôÝëåóìá ï öõóéêüò åãêÝöáëïò íá ðëçñþíåôáé
Óïößáò êáé íá ãßíåôáé èåìáôïöýëáêáò íÝùí ãíþóåùí êáé áðïêáëýøåùí ãéá
ôïõò áëçèÝóôáôïõò áüñáôïõò êüóìïõò.
Èá Þôáí áëÞèåéá, åéäéêÜ ãéá ôïí ¸ëëçíá, áëëÜ êáé ãéá êÜèå Üíèñùðï, ìå-
ãÜëç áôõ÷ßá, íá ìçí ãíùñßæåé ôï óôï÷áóìü ôïõ ¸ëëçíá öéëüóïöïõ ÓùêñÜ-
ôç. Áêüìá ðñéí áð' áõôüí, ÇñÜêëåéôïò, Ðõèáãüñáò, ÏñöÝáò êáé ìéá ðëåéÜ-
äá Üëëùí ìéëïýóáí êáèáñÜ ãéá ÈÝùóç.
Íáé, ìáò Ýãñáøáí óôïí Åëëçíéêü Ìõóôéêéóìü ãéá ôéò åëëÜìøåéò ðïõ öþ-
ôéæáí ôïí Üíèñùðï êáé ôïí êáèéÝñùíáí áëçèéíü óïöü êáé ü÷é Ýíáí áðëü öé-
ëüóïöï, Ýíáí áðëü ößëï ôçò óïößáò.
Ï äéáëïãéóìüò áíåâÜæåé Þ åéóÜãåé ôïí Üíèñùðï óå ìéá äéáöïñåôéêÞ ðå-
ñéï÷Þ, üðïõ õößóôáíôáé ôá áßôéá, ïé ÌÞôñåò áñ÷éêÝò ÉäÝåò üëùí ôùí óêÝøå-
ùí. Ìáò äßíåé õðåñâáôéêÝò êáé õðåñóõíåéäçôÝò ðñáãìáôþóåéò, ðïõ óõãêñé-
íüìåíåò ì' åêåßíåò ôïõ öõóéêïý ìáò Íïõ (óõíåßäçóçò êáé õðïóõíåßäçóçò),
ìáò öáßíïíôáé ùò ôÝëåéåò áðïêáëýøåéò ìå óßãïõñåò Ãíþóåéò ôùí Áéôéþí, ðïõ
ðñïêáëïýí ôïõ êüóìïõ ôïýôïõ ôá öáéíüìåíá.
¸íáíôé áõôþí, ï öõóéêüò Íïõò, ç óõíåßäçóÞ ìáò, ç åãñÞãïñóÞ ìáò, ðïõ
áðïññÝåé áðü ôéò ðÝíôå áéóèÞóåéò, ï Íïõò äçëáäÞ ìå ôçí óõãêñéôéêÞ ëïãéêÞ
ôïõ, åßíáé Ýíá ðáéäáñéþäåò áêüìá êáé óÞìåñá ðáé÷íßäé. Áíôßèåôá ï Óôï÷á-
óìüò áíõøþíåé óå Üëëåò óõ÷íüôçôåò ôïí Íïõ êáé áð' åêåß Ýñ÷ïíôáé ïé öùôß-
óåéò, ðïõ ëÝãïíôáé ëüãù ôïõ êýñïõò ðïõ Ý÷ïõí åëëÜìøåéò.
Ï Óôï÷áóìüò Þ Äéáëïãéóìüò ìáò öÝñíåé áðü ôá âÜèç ôùí áéþíùí ôçí Óù-
êñáôéêÞ Ìýçóç ðïõ ï ÐëÜôùíáò ìáò ðáñïõóéÜæåé óå ðÜìðïëëåò åõêáéñßåò
ôùí ãñáöïìÝíùí ôïõ. Ï ÓùêñÜôçò -óýìöùíá ìå ôïí ÐëÜôùíá- óôï÷áæüôáí
ãéá íá áêïëïõèÞóåé ôçí áëçèéíÞ åñìçíåßá ôùí ðáñáóôÜóåùí.
Ìðïñåßò êáé óõ ößëå áíáãíþóôç íá Ýëèåéò êïíôÜ óôï Üäõôï êáé íá ãåõ-
èåßò, áí öõóéêÜ ôï Ý÷åéò åóùôåñéêÞ áíÜãêç, ôï ìÝëé - íÝêôáñ ôïõ Äéáëïãéóìïý
ðïõ âñßóêåôáé óôï Åóùôåñéêü Êëåéäß ðïõ äçìéïýñãçóå ï ÄÜóêáëïò Íéêüëá-
ïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò êáé ðïõ ðåñéÝ÷åé ÅîåéäéêåõìÝíïõò ÊëÜäïõò Óðïõäþí ôïõ
Åóùôåñéóìïý äé' áëëçëïãñáößáò, ìå áíÜëïãç èåùñçôéêÞ êáé ðñáêôéêÞ êá-
ôÜñôéóç.
ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÏ ÊËÅÉÄÉ
ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ ÓÅËÉÄÅÓ: 418
1ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÍÏÅÌÂÑÇÓ 1977: 1. ÔÉ ÅÉÍÁÉ Ï ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ. 2. ÔÑÏ-
ÐÏÓ ÊÁÉ ÌÅÓÁ ÅÐÉÔÕ×ÉÁÓ ÔÏÕ ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÕ. Ï ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ
ÓÔÇÍ ÐÑÁÎÇ. 3. ÐÑÏÓÏ×Ç ÊÁÉ ÐÑÏÓÇËÙÓÇ. ÐÑÁÊÔÉÊÇ ÅÖÁÑÌÏ-
ÃÇ.
2ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÄÅÊÅÌÂÑÇÓ 1977: 4. ÓÕÃÊÅÍÔÑÙÓÇ ÊÁÉ ÕÐÅÑÓÕÃÊÅ-
ÍÔÑÙÓÇ. Ç ÁÕÔÏÓÕÃÊÅÍÔÑÙÓÇ ÓÅ ÈÅÙÑÉÁ ÊÁÉ ÐÑÁÎÇ. 5. ÓÕÃÊÅ-
ÍÔÑÙÓÇ ÊÁÉ ÔÁÕÔÉÓÇ ÌÅ ÁÍÔÉÊÅÉÌÅÍÏ. ÐÑÁÊÔÉÊÇ ÅÖÁÑÌÏÃÇ. 6.
ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ ÓÔÏ ÅÓÙ ÅÉÍÁÉ ÌÁÓ. ÐÑÁÊÔÉÊÇ ÅÖÁÑÌÏÃÇ.
3ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÌÁÑÔÉÏÓ 1978: 7. ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÏÓ ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ ÓÅ ÁÑ-
ÑÙÓÔÇÌÅÍÁ ÏÑÃÁÍÁ ÔÏÕ ÓÙÌÁÔÏÓ. ÐÑÁÊÔÉÊÇ ÅÖÁÑÌÏÃÇ. 8. ÈÅ-
ÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÏÓ ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ ÌÅ ÐÑÏÏÑÉÓÌÏ ÔÇÍ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÉÁ ÔÑÉÔÙÍ.
ÐÑÁÊÔÉÊÇ ÅÖÁÑÌÏÃÇ. 9. Ï ÕÐÅÑÂÁÔÉÊÏÓ ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ. ÈÅÙÑÉÁ.
4ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÁÐÑÉËÉÏÓ 1978: 10. Ï ÈÑÇÓÊÅÕÔÉÊÏÓ ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ.
11. ÁÐËÏÓ ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ ÃÉÁ ÔÇÍ ÓÐÏÕÄÇ ÔÙÍ ÊÁÔÙÔÅÑÙÍ ÂÁ-
ÓÉËÅÉÙÍ, ÏÑÕÊÔÏÕ, ÖÕÔÉÊÏÕ ÊÁÉ ÆÙÉÊÏÕ. ÐÑÁÊÔÉÊÇ ÅÖÁÑÌÏÃÇ.
12. Ï ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ ÄÇÌÉÏÕÑÃÏÓ ÔÇÓ ÕÐÅÑÌÍÇÌÇÓ. ÐÑÁÊÔÉÊÇ
ÅÖÁÑÌÏÃÇ.
5ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÉÏÕËÉÏÓ 1978: 13. Ï ÕÐÁÔÏÓ ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ ÃÉÁ ÔÇÍ
ÓÐÏÕÄÇ ÔÙÍ ÅÓÙÊÏÓÌÙÍ. ÐÑÁÊÔÉÊÇ ÅÖÁÑÌÏÃÇ ÊÁÉ ÈÅÙÑÉÁ.
14. ÐÑÏÅÔÏÉÌÁÓÌÅÍÏÓ ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ ÊÁÉ ÓÔÉÃÌÉÁÉÏÓ ÄÉÁËÏÃÉ-
ÓÌÏÓ. ÈÅÙÑÉÁ ÊÁÉ ÐÑÁÊÔÉÊÇ ÅÖÁÑÌÏÃÇ. 15. Ï ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ
ÓÔÇÍ ÐÁÉÄÉÊÇ - ÅÖÇÂÉÊÇ - ÁÍÄÑÉÊÇ ÊÁÉ ÃÅÑÏÍÔÉÊÇ ÇËÉÊÉÁ. ÈÅÙ-
ÑÉÁ ÊÁÉ ÐÑÁÊÔÉÊÇ ÅÖÁÑÌÏÃÇ.
6ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÏÊÔÙÂÑÇÓ 1978: 16. Ï ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ ÊÁÉ Ï ÌÕÓÔÉÊÉ-
ÓÌÏÓ ÄÕÏ ÓÊÅËÇ ÔÇÓ ÕÐÅÑÂÁÔÉÊÇÓ ÁÍÕØÙÓÇÓ ÔÏÕ ÐÍÅÕÌÁ-
ÔÏÓ ÓÔÁ ÕØÇ ÔÏÕ ÏÉÊÏÕ ÔÏÕ ÐÁÔÅÑÁ. ÈÅÙÑÉÁ. 17. Ï ÄÉÁËÏÃÉ-
ÓÌÏÓ ÅÉÍÁÉ ÊÁÑÐÏÓ ÔÇÓ ÅÊÓÔÁÓÇÓ, Ï×É ÔÇÓ ÃÍÙÑÉÌÇÓ ÓÔÇÍ Å-
ÐÏ×Ç ÌÁÓ ØÕ×ÁÓÈÅÍÅÉÁÓ, ÁËËÁ ÔÇÓ ÐÍÅÕÌÁÔÏÅÍÅÑÃÅÉÁÓ ÓÔÏ
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
transgressive and hyperconscious accomplishments, that compared with
those of our physical Mind (conscience and subsoncience), appear to us as
perfect discoveries with a sure Knowledge of the Causes that produce the
phenomena of this world.
Against them, the physical Mind, our conscience, our wakefulness that
derives from the five senses, that is the Mind with its comparative logic, is
a still childish game even in our days. On the contrary, the Thought elevated
Mind to other frequencies and from there the illuminations that due to their
validity, are called splendours.
The Thought or the Meditation brings us from the depths of the ages, the
Socratic Initiation tha Platon presents us in too many occasions of his writ-
ten. Socrates - according to Platon - thought to follow the true explanation
of the presentations.
Also you too, my friend reader, can come near the sanctuary and taste,
if you need it internally, the honey-nectar of the Meditation tha exists in the
Esoteric Key that Master Nikolaos A. Margioris has created and that con-
tains Specialized Branches of Studies in the Esoterism by correspondence
courses, in an analogous theoretical an practical formation.
ESOTERIC KEY
MEDITATION
CONTENTS 418 PAGES
1st TRIAD, NOVEMBER 1977: 1. WHAT MEDITATION IS. 2. THE
WAY AND THE MEANS OF SUCCESS IN MEDITATION. MEDITATION
IN PRACTICE. 3. ATTENTION AND CONCENTRATION. PRACTICAL
APPLICATION.
2nd TRIAD, DECEMBER 1977: 4. CONCENTRATION AND OVER-
CONCENTRATION. SELF-CONCENTRATION IN THEORY AND IN
PRACTICE. 5. CONCENTRATION AND IDENTIFICATION WITH THE
OBJECT, PRACTICAL APPLICATION. 6. MEDITATION ON OUR ESO-
TERIC BEING. PRACTICAL APPLICATION.
3rd TRIAD, MARCH 1978: 7. THERAPEUTICAL MEDITATION ON
THE DISEASED ORGANS OF BODY. PRACTICAL APPLICATION. 8.
THERAPEUTICAL MEDITATION AIMING TO CURE THIRD BEINGS.
PRACTICAL APPLICATION. 9. TANSCENDENTAL MEDITATION. THE-
ORY.
4th TRIAD. APRIL 1978: 10. THE RELIGIOUS NEDITATION. 11. SIM-
PLE MEDITATION FOR THE STUDY OF THE LOWER KINGDOMS, OF
THE MINERALS, OF THE PLANT AND ANIMAL KINGDOMS. PRACTI-
CAL APPLICATION.
5th TRIAD. JULY 1978: 13. THE SUPREME MEDITATION FOR THE
STUDY OF THE ESOTERIC WORLD. PRACTICE AND THEORY. 14.
PREPARED MEDIDATION AND INSTANT MEDITATION. THEORY AND
PRACTICE. 15. MEDITATION IN THE CHILDHOOD - MANHOOD AND
OLD AGE. THEORY AND PRACTICE.
6th TRIAD. OCTOBER 1978: 16. MEDITATION AND MYSTICISM. T-
WO SIDES OF THE TRANSCENDAL SPIRIT ELEVATION TO THE
HEIGHTS OF THE FATHER'S HOUSE. THEORY. 17. MEDITATION, A
FRUIT OF ECSTASY, NOT OF THE KNOWN PSYCHA-STHENIA OF
OUR TIMES BUT OF THE SPIRIT-ENERGY AT ITS EXTREME IDENTI-
FICATION WITH THE ETERNAL UNIT - THEORY. 18. ATTENTION - AT-
TACHMENT - CONCENTRATION - SELF-CONCENTRATION AND EC-
STASY.
7th TRIAD. DECEMBER 1978: 19 SPLENDORS AND ECSTASIES BY
HYPNOTISM OF THE VERY ANCIENT. GREEK METHOD (VERY AN-
CIENT GREEK HYPNOTISM). 20. SUGGESTION, AUTOSUGGESTION,
HYPNOTISM ARE THE MAIN AXLES ON WHICH THE TECHNIQUE
OF MEDITATION IS BASED. 21. INDIVIDUAL AND COLLECTIVE MED-
ITATION.
8th TRIAD, DECENBER 1978: 22. WHIICH ARE THE POSTURES OF
THE NORMAL BODY FOR A SUCCESSFUL MEDITATION. 23. MEDI-
TATION AS A PERMANENT METHOD OF GETTING KNOWLDEGE
AND WISDOM. 24. MEDITATION AS A PANACEA FOR EVERY DIS-
70 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
ÅÐÁÊÑÏ ÔÇÓ ÔÁÕÔÉÓÇÓ ÌÅ ÔÇÍ ÁÉÙÍÉÁ ÌÏÍÁÄÁ. ÈÅÙÑÉÁ. 18. ÐÑÏ-
ÓÏ×Ç - ÐÑÏÓÇËÙÓÇ - ÓÕÃÊÅÍÔÑÙÓÇ - ÁÕÔÏÓÕÃÊÅÍÔÑÙÓÇ ÊÁÉ
ÅÊÓÔÁÓÇ. ÐÑÁÊÔÉÊÇ ÅÖÁÑÌÏÃÇ.
7ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÄÅÊÅÌÂÑÇÓ 1978: 19. ÅËËÁÌØÅÉÓ ÊÁÉ ÅÊÓÔÁÓÅÉÓ ÌÅ
ÔÇÍ ÅÃÊÏÉÌÇÓÇ ÔÇÓ ÐÁÍÁÑ×ÁÉÁÓ ÅËËÇÍÉÊÇÓ ÌÅÈÏÄÏÕ (ÕÐÍÙ-
ÔÉÓÌÏÓ ÅËËÇÍÉÊÏÓ ÐÁÍÁÑ×ÁÉÏÓ). 20. ÕÐÏÂÏËÇ, ÁÕÈÕÐÏÂÏËÇ,
ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ ÅÉÍÁÉ ÏÉ ÊÕÑÉÏÉ ÁÎÏÍÅÓ ÐÁÍÙ ÓÔÏÕÓ ÏÐÏÉÏÕÓ
ÓÔÇÑÉÆÅÔÁÉ Ç ÔÅ×ÍÉÊÇ ÔÏÕ ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÕ. 21. ÁÔÏÌÉÊÏÓ ÊÁÉ ÏÌÁ-
ÄÉÊÏÓ ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ.
8ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÄÅÊÅÌÂÑÇÓ 1978: 22. ÐÏÉÅÓ ÅÉÍÁÉ ÏÉ ÓÔÁÓÅÉÓ ÔÏÕ ÖÕ-
ÓÉÏËÏÃÉÊÏÕ ÓÙÌÁÔÏÓ ÃÉÁ ÔÇÍ ÅÐÉÔÕ×ÉÁ ÔÏÕ ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÕ. 23.
Ï ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ ÌÏÍÉÌÇ ÌÅÈÏÄÏÓ ËÇØÇÓ ÔÇÓ ÃÍÙÓÇÓ ÊÁÉ ÔÇÓ
ÓÏÖÉÁÓ. 24. Ï ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ ÐÁÍÁÊÅÉÁ ÊÁÈÅ ÁÑÑÙÓÔÉÁÓ. ÈÅÙÑÉÁ
ÊÁÉ ÐÑÁÊÔÉÊÇ ÅÖÁÑÌÏÃÇ.
9ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÁÐÑÉËÉÏÓ 1979: 25. ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ ÓÅ ÊËÅÉÓÔÏ ×ÙÑÏ
ÊÁÉ ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ ÓÔÏ ÕÐÁÉÈÑÏ. 26. ÃÉÁÔÉ Ï ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ ÄÉÄÁ-
ÓÊÅÉ, ÓÁÍ ÁÐÁÑÁÉÔÇÔÇ ÐÑÏÕÐÏÈÅÓÇ, ÔÇÍ ÐÉÓÔÇ ÔÏÕ ÁÍÈÑÙ-
ÐÏÕ ÓÔÇ ÈÅÉÁ ÅÐÅÍÅÑÃÅÉÁ ÊÁÉ ÐÁÑÏÕÓÉÁ. 27. Ï ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ ÌÅ
ËÅÎÅÉÓ ÄÕÍÁÌÇÓ ÐÏÕ ÓÕÍÔÁÑÁÆÏÕÍ ÔÇÍ ØÕ×Ç.
10ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÌÁÉÏÓ 1979: 28. Ï ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ ÓÔÇÍ ÊÁÈÇÌÅÑÉ-
ÍÇ ÆÙÇ ÓÁÍ ÁÐÁÑÁÉÔÇÔÏ ÂÏÇÈÇÌÁ. 29. Ï ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ ÓÁÍ
ÌÅÓÏ ÊÁÉ ÌÅÈÏÄÏÓ ÅËÅÃ×ÏÕ ÔÇÓ ÓÕÍÅÉÄÇÓÇÓ. 30. Ï ÄÉÁËÏÃÉ-
ÓÌÏÓ ÅÉÍÁÉ Ç ÅÐÁÍÅÕÑÅÓÇ ÔÏÕ ×ÁÌÅÍÏÕ ÅÁÕÔÏÕ ÌÁÓ.
EASE. THEORY AND PRACTICE.
9th TRIAD, DECEMBER 1978: 25. MEDITATION INDOORS AND MED-
ITATION OUTDOORS. 26. WHY MEDITATION TEACHES AS A NEC-
ESSARY PRESUPPOSITION THE MAN'S FAITH TO THE DIVINE EN-
ERGY AND PRESENCE. 27. MEDITATION IN WORDS. POWERS THAT
SHAKE SOUL.
10th TRIAD, MAY 1979: 28. MEDITATION IN DAILY LIFE AS A NEC-
ESSARY AID. 29. MEDITATION AS A MEANS AND AS A METHOD OF
CONTROLLING COPNWXIENCE. 30. MEDITATION IS THE BRINGING
BACK OF OUR LOST SELF.
ESOTERIC THERAPEUTICS
The Esoteric Therapeutics gives its great present to the man's physical ne-
cessities.
Our natural body is surrounded by a luminous netting, knitted by ether-
ic hollow threads which aim to offer the Substance of Life that passes through
them to the cells of the physical organism.
Consequently, every disturbance of the harmony of our etheric covering

ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ
Ç ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ äßíåé ôï ìåãÜëï ðáñüí ôçò óôéò öõóéêÝò áíÜ-
ãêåò ôïõ áíèñþðïõ.
Ôï öõóéêü ìáò óþìá ðåñéâÜëëåôáé ìå äß÷ôõ öùôåéíü ðëåãìÝíï ìå áéèåñé-
êÝò êïßëåò êëùóôÝò, ðïõ óêïðü ôïõò Ý÷ïõí íá ðñïóöÝñïõí ôçí Ïõóßá ôçò
ÆùÞò, ðïõ áðü ìÝóá ôïõò ðåñíÜåé ðñïò ôá êýôôáñá ôïõ öõóéêïý ïñãáíé-
óìïý.
ÊáôÜ óõíÝðåéá êÜèå äéáôÜñáîç ôçò áñìïíßáò ôïõ áéèåñéêïý ìáò ðåñéâëÞ-
ìáôïò, Ý÷åé óáí áðïôÝëåóìá ôçí áíþìáëç äéÜôáîç ôùí èÝóåùí ôùí êõôôÜñùí,
éíþí êáé ïñãÜíùí ôïõ öõóéêïý öïñÝá ìáò.
Ç ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ áíáëýåé üëåò ôéò ðôõ÷Ýò ôïõ öáéíïìÝíïõ ôçò ðá-
ñáãùãÞò êáé äéáôÞñçóçò ôçò æùÞò êáé ôçò õãåßáò, óùìáôéêÞò êáé øõ÷éêÞò, å-
íþ ðáñÜëëçëá ìáò ðáñÝ÷åé üëïõò ôïõò åíäåäåéãìÝíïõò ôñüðïõò, åîùôåñé-
êïýò êáé éäßùò åóùôåñéêïýò ãéá íá áíôéìåôùðßóïõìå êÜèå áóèÝíåéá êáé íá
åðáíáöÝñïõìå ôçí õãåßá êáé ôçí áñìïíßá óôïí åáõôü ìáò Þ óôïí óõíÜíèñù-
ðü ìáò.
Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá åðáíáöïñÜ óôç èåñáðåßá ôùí ðñïáéþíùí äß÷ùò öÜñìáêá,
ðáñÜ ìå ôçí âïÞèåéá êáé ôçí óõìðáñÜóôáóç ôçò øõ÷Þò. Ãßíïíôáé åêôåíåßò õ-
ðïäåßîåéò ôçò ìáãíçôïèåñáðåßáò êáé ôçò áöáßñåóçò Þ ðñüóèåóçò ôùí ðåñéô-
ôþí Þ ôùí áíáãêáéïýíôùí äõíÜìåùí ôçò Ïõóßáò ôçò ÆùÞò (ðñÜíáò). ÄéåîÜ-
ãåôáé ìåëÝôç ôïõ áéèåñéêïý óþìáôïò ìå ôéò ðýñéíåò äéáóôáõñþóåéò ôïõ, êáèþò
êáé ôùí áéèåñéêþí êáé öõóéêþí åíåñãåéáêþí áðïèçêþí æùÞò (ôóÜêñáò & á-
äÝíåò). ÄéäÜóêåôáé ç ÁóêëçðéÜäéêç èåñáðåõôéêÞ ìå ôç âïÞèåéá êáé óõíåñãá-
óßá ôïõ øõ÷éêïý ðáñÜãïíôá ôïõ áíèñþðïõ, ç ñåöëåîïëïãßá ãéá ôçí áðáëëá-
ãÞ áðü ôéò óõóóùñåõìÝíåò ìÜæåò ôùí Ü÷ñçóôùí õðïëåéììÜôùí ôçò êáôáíá-
ëéóêïìÝíçò ýëçò êáé ìéá ðëçèþñá Üëëùí ìåèüäùí êáé ôå÷íéêþí (âëÝðå êáé
ôá âéâëßá ðïõ ó÷åôßæïíôáé ìå ôçí ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ ôïõ Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ).
Ìðïñåßò êáé óõ ößëå áíáãíþóôç íá Ýëèåéò êïíôÜ óôï Üäõôï êáé íá ãåõ- results the abnormal ordering of the position of the cells, the fibers and the
èåßò, áí öõóéêÜ ôï Ý÷åéò åóùôåñéêÞ áíÜãêç, ôï ìÝëé - íÝêôáñ ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò organs of our physical bearer.
ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò ðïõ âñßóêåôáé óôï Åóùôåñéêü Êëåéäß ðïõ äçìéïýñãçóå ï ÄÜ- The Esoteric Therapeutics analyzes all the folds of the production and of
óêáëïò Íéêüëáïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò êáé ðïõ ðåñéÝ÷åé ÅîåéäéêåõìÝíïõò ÊëÜäïõò the perseverance of life and helath - bodily abd psychical - phenomenon,
Óðïõäþí ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý äé' áëëçëïãñáößáò, ìå áíÜëïãç èåùñçôéêÞ êáé while at the same time it affords us all the indicated ways, external and
ðñáêôéêÞ êáôÜñôéóç. mainly internal in order that we can confront every disease and that we bring
ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÏ ÊËÅÉÄÉ the health and the harmony back to ourselves or to our fellowmen.
ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ It is about a return to the therapy of the preages, withlout medicines, but
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ ÓÅËÉÄÅÓ: 478 by the help and the assitance of the soul. Extensive indications for the mag-
1ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÏÊÔÙÂÑÇÓ 1977: 1. ÃÅÍÉÊÇ ÁÍÁÐÔÕÎÇ ÔÇÓ ÅÓÙÔÅ- netotherapy and for the abstraction or the addition of the odd or the nec-

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 71 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

ÑÉÊÇÓ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇÓ ÊÁÉ ÔÙÍ ÄÕÍÁÌÅÙÍ ÐÏÕ ÊÕÑÉÁÑ×ÏÕÍ ÓÔÏ
ÖÕÓÉÊÏ ÌÁÓ ÓÙÌÁ. 2. ÔÉ ÅÉÍÁÉ Ç ÁÑÑÙÓÔÉÁ ÁÐÏ ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇÓ ÐËÅÕ-
ÑÁÓ ÊÁÉ ÐÙÓ ÅÐÉÄÉÙÊÅÔÁÉ Ç ÈÅÑÁÐÅÉÁ ÔÇÓ ÄÉ×ÙÓ ÖÁÑÌÁÊÁ, ÅÍÅ-
ÓÅÉÓ ´Ç ÁËËÁ ÅÎÙÔÅÑÉÊÁ ÐÁÑÁÓÊÅÕÁÓÌÁÔÁ. 3. ÔÁ ÌÕÓÔÇÑÉÙÄÇ
ÓÕÓÔÇÌÁÔÁ ÔÏÕ ÓÕÌÐÁÈÇÔÉÊÏÕ ÊÁÉ ÐÁÑÁÓÕÌÐÁÈÇÔÉÊÏÕ ÓÔÇÍ
ÐÏËÙÓÇ ÔÏÕÓ ÊÁÉ Ç ÅÐÅÌÂÁÓÇ ÔÏÕ ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÏÕ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÇ,
ÓÔÇÍ ÊÑÉÓÉÌÇ ÓÔÉÃÌÇ ÔÇÓ ÍÉÊÇÓ ÔÏÕ ÅÍÏÓ ÐÁÍÙ ÓÔÏ ÁËËÏ.
2ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÉÁÍÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ 1978: 4. ÔÁ ÓÉÁÊÑÁÓ, ÏÉ ÁÄÅÍÅÓ ÐÏÕ
ÐÑÏÇËÈÁÍ ÁÐÏ ÔÇ ÄÉÁÔÁÎÇ ÔÏÕ ÁÉÈÅÑÉÊÏÕ, ÓÔÉÓ ÄÅÎÁÌÅÍÅÓ
ÓÕÃÊÅÍÔÑÙÓÇÓ ÔÇÓ ÐÑÙÔÁÑ×ÉÊÇÓ ÄÕÍÁÌÇÓ - ÐÑÁÍÁ. 5. ÔÏ ÓÁ-
ÊÑÁ ÓÁ×ÁÓÑÁÑÁ, Ï ÁÄÅÍÁÓ ÔÇÓ ÅÐÉÖÕÓÇÓ, ÔÏ ÊÙÍÁÑÉÏ. 6. ÔÏ
ÓÁÊÑÁ ÁÆÍÁ ´Ç ÌÕÎÁÄÅÍÁÓ. Ç ÐÅÑÉÖÇÌÇ ÕÐÏÖÕÓÇ.
3ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÉÏÕËÉÏÓ 1978: 7. ÐÙÓ ËÅÉÔÏÕÑÃÅÉ Ç ÕÐÏÖÕÓÇ ÌÅ
ÔÏÕÓ ÔÑÅÉÓ ËÏÂÏÕÓ ÔÇÓ. 8. ÁÑÑÙÓÔÉÅÓ ÔÇÓ ÕÐÏÖÕÓÇÓ. 9. ÏÉ ÏÑ-
ÌÏÍÅÓ ÔÇÓ ÁÆÍÁÓ.
4ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÌÁÑÔÇÓ 1979: 10. ÐÏÉÁ ÅÉÍÁÉ Ç ÄÕÍÁÌÇ ÐÏÕ ÅÑ×Å-
ÔÁÉ ÓÔÇÍ ÕÐÏÖÕÓÇ ÊÁÉ ÌÁÓ ÐÁÑÅ×ÅÉ ÔÇÍ ÏÑÌÏÍÏÅÎÏÕÓÉÁ ÐÁ-
ÍÙ ÓÔÇÍ ËÅÉÔÏÕÑÃÉÁ ÔÏÕ ÖÕÓÉÊÏÕ ÖÏÑÅÁ ÌÁÓ. 11. ÔÏ ÓÁÊÑÁ
ÂÉÓ×ÉÏÕÍÔÁ, Ï ÈÕÑÅÏÅÉÄÇÓ ÁÄÅÍÁÓ ÊÁÉ Ç ËÅÉÔÏÕÑÃÉÁ ÔÏÕ. 12.
ÁÑÑÙÓÔÉÅÓ ÔÏÕ ÈÕÑÅÏÅÉÄÇ & ÐÙÓ ÁÍÔÉÌÅÔÙÐÉÆÅÉ Ç ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ
ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ÔÇÍ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÉÁ ÔÙÍ ÁÓÈÅÍÅÉÙÍ ÔÏÕ ÓÐÏÕÄÁÉÏÔÁ-
ÔÏÕ ÁÕÔÏÕ ÓÉÁÊÑÁ.
5ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÁÐÑÉËÇÓ 1979: 13. ÔÏ ÓÉÁÊÑÁ ÁÍÁ×ÁÔÁ, ÈÕÌÏÓ ÁÄÅ-
ÍÁÓ. 14. ÊÁÑÄÉÁÊÏÉ ÔÏÍÏÉ. 15. ÁÑÑÙÓÔÉÅÓ ÔÇÓ ÊÁÑÄÉÁÓ.
6ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÏÊÔÙÂÑÇÓ 1979: 16. Ç ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ
ÐËÅÕÑÁ ÄÉ×ÙÓ ÖÁÑÌÁÊÁ ÊÁÉ ×ÅÉÑÏÕÑÃÇÓÅÉÓ. 17. Ï ÑÏËÏÓ ÔÇÓ
ÊÁÑÄÉÁÓ ÊÁÉ Ç ÁÕÔÏÇ×ÇÔÉÊÇ ÔÇÓ ´Ç ÁÕÔÏÙÓÉÊÇ ÔÇÓ ÑÕÈÌÏÅ-
ÍÅÑÃÅÉÁ. 18. ÔÏ ÓÁÊÑÁ ÌÁÍÉÐÏÕÑÁ ÅÉÍÁÉ ÔÏ ÐÅÑÉÖÇÌÏ ÇËÉÁÊÏ
ÐËÅÃÌÁ.
7ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÍÏÅÌÂÑÇÓ 1979: 19. ÁÑÑÙÓÔÉÅÓ ÔÏÕ ÌÁÍÉÐÏÕÑÁ.
20. Ç ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ÄÉÍÅÉ ÔÇ ËÕÓÇ ÔÇÓ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÉÁÓ
ÓÔÏ ÇËÉÁÊÏ ÐËÅÃÌÁ ÌÅ ÔÇÍ ÁÌÉÌÇÔÇ ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÔÉÊÇ ÁÃÙÃÇ ÊÁÉ
ÔÇ ÄÉÏ×ÅÔÅÕÓÇ ÌÁÃÍÇÔÉÊÇÓ ÄÕÍÁÌÇÓ ÁÍÁËÏÃÏÕ ÊÑÁÄÁÓÌÏÕ.
21. Ï ÆÁ×ÁÑÙÄÇÓ ÄÉÁÂÇÔÇÓ ÅÌÖÁÍÉÆÅÔÁÉ ÌÅ ÐËÇÌÌÅËÇ ÅÍÅÑ-
ÃÇÔÉÊÏÔÇÔÁ ÔÏÕ ÌÁÍÉÐÏÕÑÁ ÓÔÁ ×ÅÑÉÁ ÔÏÕ ÈÕÑÅÏÅÉÄÇ ÁÄÅ-
ÍÁ.
8ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÄÅÊÅÌÂÑÇÓ 1979: 22. ÔÏ ÓÉÁÊÑÁ ÓÂÁÍÔÉÓÈÁÍÁ ÊÁÉ
ÏÉ ÓÐÅÑÌÏÃÏÍÏÉ ÁÄÅÍÅÓ. Ç ÁÐÏÓÔÏËÇ ÔÇÓ ÓÂÁÍÔÉÓÈÁÍÁ ÃÉÁ
ÔÇÍ ÁÍÁÐÔÕÎÇ ÊÁÉ ÄÉÁÔÇÑÇÓÇ ÔÏÕ ÁÍÈÑÙÐÉÍÏÕ ÃÅÍÏÕÓ. 23.
Ç ÓÂÁÍÔÉÓÈÁÍÁ Å×ÅÉ ÅÕÈÕÍÇ ÌÅÃÁËÇ ÃÉÁ ÔÉÓ ÅÍÄÏÊÑÉÍÅÉÓ ÐÁ-
ÈÇÓÅÉÓ ÔÙÍ ÏÑ×ÅÙÍ ÊÁÉ ÔÙÍ ÙÏÈÇÊÙÍ. 24. ÅÌÌÇÍÏÑÕÓÉÁÊÏÓ
ÊÕÊËÏÓ. ÁÍÁÐÔÕÎÇ ÄÑÁÓÔÇÑÉÏÔÇÔÁÓ ÔÇÓ ÁÓÈÅÍÏÕÓ ÍÁ ÁÐÏ-
ÂÁËÅÉ ÔÏ ÅÌÐÏÄÉÏ ÌÅ ÕÐÏÄÅÉÎÅÉÓ ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÔÉÊÇÓ ÊÕÑÉÁÑ×ÉÁÓ.
9ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÄÅÊÅÌÂÑÇÓ 1979: 25. ÔÏ ÓÉÁÊÑÁ ÌÏÕËÁÍÔÁÑÁ ´Ç ÔÁ
ÅÐÉÍÅÖÑÉÄÉÁ ÐÏÕ ÂÑÉÓÊÏÍÔÁÉ ÁÐÏ ÅÍÁ ÐÁÍÙ ÓÔÁ ÍÅÖÑÁ. ÔÏ
ÌÕÓÔÉÊÏ ÔÇÓ ÌÏÕËÁÍÔÁÑÁ.26. ÁÑÑÙÓÔÉÅÓ ÔÙÍ ÅÐÉÍÅÖÑÉÄÉÙÍ.
ÕÐÏËÅÉÔÏÕÑÃÉÁ ÔÏÕ ÖËÏÉÏÕ ÊÁÉ ÁÍÅÐÁÑÊÅÉÁ. 27. ÁÐÏÈÇÊÅÕÓÇ
ÐÑÁÍÁÓ ÓÔÏ ÓÉÁÊÑÁ ÁÕÔÏ ×ÁÌÇËÏÐÏÉÏÔÉÊÇÓ ÕÐÏÓÔÁÓÇÓ. ÄÕ-
ÍÁÌÉÊÏ ÊÁÔÅÂÁÓÌÁ ÔÇÓ ÐÑÁÍÁÓ ÊÁÉ ÊÔÕÐÇÌÁ ÐÁÍÙ ÓÔÇ ÌÏÕ-
ËÁÍÔÁÑÁ ÓÉÁÊÑÁ, ÏÔÁÍ ÔÏ ÓÙÌÁ ÂÑÉÓÊÅÔÁÉ ÓÔÇÍ ÊÁÔÁËËÇËÇ
ÓÔÁÓÇ.
10ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÉÁÍÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ 1980: 28. ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÏÉ ÊÁÍÏÍÅÓ ÈÅÑÁ-
ÐÅÕÔÉÊÇÓ: Á) ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÔÉÊÇÓ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇÓ Â) ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÔÉÊÇÓ
ÈÅÑÁ-ÐÅÕÔÉÊÇÓ Ã) ÌÁÃÍÇÔÉÓÔÉÊÇÓ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇÓ. 29. ÐÑÏÅÔÏÉ-
ÌÁÓÉÁ ÔÏÕ ÁÓÈÅÍÇ ÌÅ ÔÏÍ ÊÁÔÁËËÇËÏ ÕÐÏÂÏËÇÌÉÁÉÏ ÔÑÏÐÏ,
ÍÁ ÕÐÁÊÏÕÓÅÉ ÔÇÍ ÏÑÉÆÏÌÅÍÇ ÁÃÙÃÇ ÃÉÁ ÔÇÍ ÁÐÏËÕÔÑÙÓÇ
ÔÏÕ. 30. ÁÖÕÐÍÉÓÇ ÔÙÍ ÐÁÃÏÐÏÉÇÌÅÍÙÍ ÄÕÍÁÌÅÙÍ ÔÏÕ ÓÕ-
ÍÁÍÈÑÙÐÏÕ ÃÉÁ ÔÇÍ ÂÏÇÈÅÉÁ ÔÇÓ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÉÁÓ ÔÏÕ. ÁÍÁÐÔÕÎÇ
ÌÉÁÓ ×ÁÌÅÍÇÓ ÄÕÍÁÌÇÓ ÔÇÓ ÐÉÓÔÇÓ, ÃÉÁ ÔÇ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÉÁ ÔÇÓ ÐÉ-
ÓÔÇÓ.
11ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÄÅÊÅÌÂÑÇÓ 1985: 31. ÐÑÁÊÔÉÊÇ ÅÖÁÑÌÏÃÇ. ÅÎÏÕ-
ÄÅÔÅÑÙÓÇ ÔÙÍ ÁÍÔÉÈÅÓÅÙÍ, ÓÕÌÐÁÈÇÔÉÊÏÕ ÊÁÉ ÐÁÑÁÓÕÌÐÁ-
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
essary powers of the Life Substance (pranas), take place. A study of the ether-
ic body is carried out with its fiery crossings, as well as of the etheric and of
the physical energical stores of life (tsakras and glands). The Asclepean
therapeutics is taught with the hekp and cooperation of the man's psychi-
cal factor, the reflexology for the discharge from the accumulated masses
of the consumed matter useless remainders and plenty of other methods
and techniques (see also N. Margiori's books that refer to the Esoteric Ther-
apeutics).
Also you, my friend reader, can come near the sanctuary and taste, if y-
ou need it deeply of course, the honey - nectar of the Esoteric Theraoeu-
tics where the Esoteric Key that Master Nikolaos A. Margioris has created
and that contains Specialized Study Branches of the Esoterism by corre-
spondence courses, in the analogous theoretical and practical formation.
ESOTERIC KEY
ESOTERIC THERAPEUTICS
A' CIRCLE CONTENTS 478 PAGES
1ST TRIAD, OCTOBER 1977: 1. GENERAL DEVELOPMENT OF THE
ESOTERIC THERAPEUTICS AND OF THE POWERS EXISTING IN OUR
PHYSICAL BODY. 2. WHAT ILLNESS IS ON THE ESOTERIC PART
AND HOW ITS THERAPY IS EFFECTED WITHOUT MEDICINES, IN-
JECTIONS OR OTHER EXTERNAL PREPARATIONS. 3. THE MYSTE-
RIOUS SYMPATHETIC AND PARASYMPATHETIC SYSTEMS IN THEIR
POLARIZATION AND THE ESOTERIC THERAPIST'S INTERVENTION
THE CRITICAL MOMENT OF VICTORY OF THE ONE TO THE OTH-
ER.
2ND TRIAD, JANUARY 1978: 4. SIAKRAS, THE GLANDS THAT DE-
RIVED FROM THE ETHERIC ORDER, ON THE CONCENTRATION
TANKS OF THE ORIGINAL POWER - PRANA.5. SAKRA SAHASRARA,
THE GLAND OP EPIPHYSIS, CONE. 6. SAKRA ASNA OR MUCUS-G-
LAND. THE FAMOUS HYPOPHYSIS.
3RD TRIAD, JULY 1978: 7. HOW HYPOPHYSIS FUNCTIONS WITH
ITS THREE LOBES. 8. HYPOPHYSIS DISEASES. 9. THE ASNA HOR-
MONES.
4TH TRIAD, MARCH 1979: 10. WHICH IS THE POWER COMING TO
HYPOPHYSIS AND PROVIDING US THE HORMONE POWER ON THE
FUNCTION OF OUR NATURAL CARRIER. 11. SAKRA VISACHIOUDA,
THE THYROID GLAND AND ITS FUNCTION. 12. THYROID GLAND
DISEASES OR HOW THE ESOTERIC THERAPEUTICS FACE THE
THERAPY OF THIS MOST IMPORTANT SIACRA DISEASES.
5TH TRIAD, APRIL 1979: 13. SIACRA ANAHATA, THE THYMUS G-
LAND. 14. HEART PULSES. 15. HEART DISEASES.
6TH TRIAD, OCTOBER 1979: 16. THE ESOTERIC THERAPEUTICS
SIDE WITHOUT MEDICINES NOR SURGERY. 17. THE ROLE OF
HEART AND ITS AUTOSOUND OR ITS AUTOTHRUST RHYTHM-EN-
ERGY. 18. SAKRA-MANIPURA IS THE FAMOUS SOLAR PLEXUS.
7TH TRIAD, NOVEMBER 1979: 19. MANIOURA DISEASES. 20. THE
ESOTERIC THERAPEUTICS GIVE THE THERAPY SOLUTION IN THE
SOLAR PLEXUS BY THE INIMTABLE HYPNOTISTIC TREATMENT AND
THE MAGNETIC POWER CONVEYANCE OF THE ANALOGOUS VI-
BRATIONS. 21. SUGAR DIABETES APPEARS IN A DEFECTIVE ENER-
GY OF MANIPURA IN THE HANDS OF THE THYROID GLAND.
8TH TRIAD, DECEMBER 1979: 22. SIAKRA SVANDISTHANA AND
THE SPERMATIC GLANDS. THE MISSION OF SVADISTHANA IN THE
DEVELOPMENT AND THE MAINTENANCE OF THE HUMAN KIND.
23. SVADISTHANA ASSUMES A GREAT RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE
ENDOCRINE DISEASES OF THE TESTICLES AND OF THE OVARIES
DISEASES. 24. MENSTRUATION. DEVELOPMENT OF THE PATIENT'S
ACTIVITY TO THE OBSTACLE UNDER THE RECOMMENDATIONS
OF MEDITATIVE DOMINATION.
9TH TRIAD, DECEMBER 1979: 25. SIACRA MOULADARA OR THE
SUPRARENAL GLANDS EXISTING EACH ONE ON THE KIDNEYS. THE
SECRET OF MULADARA.26. SUPRARENAL DISEASES. SUBFUNC-
72 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
ÈÇÔÉÊÏÕ, ÈÅÑÁÐÅÉÅÓ ÐÏÍÏÊÅÖÁËÙÍ - ÇÌÉÊÑÁÍÉÙÍ - ÁÑÈÑÉÔÉ-
ÊÙÍ ÊÁÉ ÓÐÏÍÄÕËÏÁÑÈÑÉÔÉÊÙÍ ÊÁÉ ÁËËÙÍ ÐÏÍÙÍ.
ÉÄÉÁÉÔÅÑÅÓ ÌÉÊÑÏÓÇÌÅÉÙÓÅÉÓ: Á) ÃÉÁ ×ÅÉÑÏÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ. Â) ÃÉÁ
ÉÑÉÄÏÄÉÁÃÍÙÓÇ.
ÅÐÉÓÔÇÌÏÍÉÊÏÓ ÐÍÅÕÌÁÔÉÓÌÏÓ
Ï Åðéóôçìïíéêüò Ðíåõìáôéóìüò åßíáé ç Üëëç üøç ôïõ Äéáëïãéóìïý. Åíþ
ìå ôïí Äéáëïãéóìü áíõøïýìåèá ðñïò ôçí õðåñâáôéêÞ ëåéôïõñãßá ôïõ Íïõ ìáò,
ðñïò Üëëåò óõ÷íüôçôåò ôçò Ðáíäçìéïõñãßáò, ìå ôïí Åðéóôçìïíéêü Ðíåõìá-
ôéóìü ëåéôïõñãïýìå ôçí õðïóõíåßäçóç êáé ìå ôçí âïÞèåéÜ ôçò öèÜíïõìå
óôá ÷áìçëüôåñá ôçò ýëçò äéáìåñßóìáôá (óôá ÁóôñéêÜ õðïðåäßá) êáé ðáßñíïõ-
ìå ôçí ÷áñÜ ôçò åýñåóçò Üóáñêùí üíôùí, ÷áìçëÜ ùò åðß ôï ðëåßóôïí áíá-
ðáõüìåíá, êáèþò êáé åñåõíïýìå áõôïýò ôïõò ÷áìçëïýò êüóìïõò.
Ï Åðéóôçìïíéêüò Ðíåõìáôéóìüò äéáêéíåßôáé ìå ôçí õðïóõíåßäçóç. ÁõôÞ áñ-
÷ßæåé ôï ëåéôïýñãçìÜ ôçò, üôáí ç óõíåßäçóç áäñáíåß. Ìå ôïí ôå÷íéêü ýðíï (õ-
ðíùôéóìü) áíáëáìâÜíåé ç õðïóõíåßäçóç ôï ìåãÜëï ñüëï ôçò. Óôï ìåôáîý ç
óõíåßäçóç åîáöáíßæåôáé ïëïêëçñùôéêÜ êáé ç õðïóõíåßäçóç êõâåñíÜ ôï óþ-
ìá ìáò. Ôüôå ç ðíåõìáôïøõ÷Þ ìáò ìåôáäßäåé óôï öõóéêïóþìá ðïõ êïéìÜôáé
ôá íåüôåñá ðïõ óõìâáßíïõí óôçí áüñáôç ðåñéï÷Þ ôçò Äçìéïõñãßáò ðïõ ôçí
óôéãìÞ åêåßíç âñßóêåôáé.
Ìéëïýìå ãéá ôïí áðëü Ðíåõìáôéóìü ìå ôïí ïðïßï ï êüóìïò áó÷ïëåßôáé. Ìé-
ëïýìå ãéá ôï äéÜìåóï, ðïõ âñßóêåôáé õðíùôéóìÝíï êÜðïõ óå ìéá ðåñéï÷Þ ðÜ-
íù óôç ãç ìáò, ìéëïýìå áêüìç êáé ãéá ôïí åîåëéãìÝíï Ðíåõìáôéóìü ðïõ âá-
óßæåôáé óå åðáöÝò ìå Üóáñêá üíôá ðïõ åßíáé ëéãüôåñï Þ ðåñéóóüôåñï öôá-
óìÝíá êáé ðïõ áðïôåëïýí êñßêïõò ôçò ÏõñÜíéáò ËåõêÞò Éåñáñ÷ßáò.
Ç ôÝ÷íç ôïõ Ðíåõìáôéóìïý åßíáé ðáíÜñ÷áéá. ÌÝóá óôçí ÅëëçíéêÞ Ìõèï-
ëïãßá áíáöÝñåôáé ðÜìðïëëåò öïñÝò. Óôçí ÐáëéÜ ÄéáèÞêç åðßóçò áíáöÝñå-
ôáé êáé õìíïëïãåßôáé. Åßíáé ìéá Ýììåóç áðüäåéîç ôçò áèáíáóßáò ôçò øõ÷Þò,
ìéáò êáé ï Ðíåõìáôéóìüò áðïôåßíåôáé óôá ¢óáñêá ¼íôá.
ÌÝóá óôï Åóùôåñéêü Êëåéäß áõôü èá âñåßôå ôñüðïõò êáé ìåèüäïõò, ìå á-
íáëýóåéò êáé ìå êñßóåéò áíôéêåéìåíéêÝò, ðïõ ðñïÝñ÷ïíôáé áðü ôïí óõããñá-
öÝá, üðùò ôéò Ýæçóå, ôéò åßäå êáé ôéò Ýêñéíå óôá ðåéñÜìáôá ôùí åíäéáöåñïìÝ-
íùí åñåõíçôþí ôïõ Ðíåõìáôéóìïý.
ÏõóéáóôéêÜ ìå ôïí ÊëÜäï ôïõ Åðéóôçìïíéêïý Ðíåõìáôéóìïý ãßíåôáé ç á-
ðïêÜëõøç ôïõ äñüìïõ ôçò åðáöÞò ìå ôá ìåãÜëá ðíåýìáôá ðïõ ðÝñáóáí á-
ðü ôï öõóéêü ìáò êüóìï.
Êáô' áíÜãêç ëüãù ôçò ìåãÜëçò óçìåñéíÞò ðëÜíçò ôïõ êüóìïõ ðÜíù óôï
èÝìá áõôü, ï êëÜäïò áõôüò áðïäåéêíýåé ôá óöÜëìáôá, ôá ëÜèç, ôéò áðÜôåò,
ôá èýìáôá êáé ôïõò áðáôåþíåò êáé ôóáñëáôÜíïõò áðü ôá ðáëáéüôáôá ÷ñüíéá
ùò ôéò ìÝñåò ìáò, åíþ ðáñÜëëçëá ìáò äßíåé ôïí ïñèü - åðéóôçìïíéêü ôñüðï
ðñïóÝããéóçò ôïõ üëïõ èÝìáôïò, þóôå ìåôÜ áðü êüðïõò êáé âÜóáíá ïé áëç-
èéíïß åñåõíçôÝò ôïõ ÷þñïõ íá åîáóöáëßóïõí ìéá õãéÞ, õøçëÞ êáé áõèåíôé-
êÞ ðíåõìáôéóôéêÞ åðáöÞ.
¼ëá ôá ÅóùôåñéêÜ ÊëåéäéÜ äé' áëëçëïãñáößáò ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý ðñïÝñ-
÷ïíôáé áðü ôçí ðñïóùðéêÞ åìðåéñßá ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ,
ðïõ êñÜôçóå áðü ôá ðñþôá åöçâéêÜ ôïõ ÷ñüíéá Ýùò ôá ýóôáôá ïãäüíôá ôïõ.
¼ìùò, ï êÜèå ÊëÜäïò äåí ðáýåé íá áðïôåëåß ìéá îÝ÷ùñç åðéóôÞìç ðïõ ü-
óï êé áí ðåñéäéáâÜæåé ôá ÌåôáöõóéêÜ, óôáèåñÜ öÝñåé ìÝóá ôïõ ìéáò óôáèå-
ñÞò êáé âáèéÜò áíèñþðéíçò ëïãéêÞò, ôá áéþíéá ôçò ÓðÝñìáôá.
Ìðïñåßò êáé óõ ößëå áíáãíþóôç íá Ýëèåéò êïíôÜ óôï Üäõôï êáé íá ãåõ-
èåßò, áí öõóéêÜ ôï Ý÷åéò åóùôåñéêÞ áíÜãêç, ôï ìÝëé - íÝêôáñ ôïõ Åðéóôçìï-
íéêïý Ðíåõìáôéóìïý ðïõ âñßóêåôáé óôï Åóùôåñéêü Êëåéäß ðïõ äçìéïýñãçóå
ï ÄÜóêáëïò Íéêüëáïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò êáé ðïõ ðåñéÝ÷åé ÅîåéäéêåõìÝíïõò ÊëÜ-
äïõò Óðïõäþí ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý äé' áëëçëïãñáößáò, ìå áíÜëïãç èåùñçôé-
êÞ êáé ðñáêôéêÞ êáôÜñôéóç.
ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÏ ÊËÅÉÄÉ
ÅÐÉÓÔÇÌÏÍÉÊÏÓ ÐÍÅÕÌÁÔÉÓÌÏÓ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ ÓÅËÉÄÅÓ: 404
1ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÓÅÐÔÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ 1981: 1. Ç ÕËÇ ÔÇÓ ÔÑÉÓÄÉÁÓÔÁÔÇÓ
ÁÉÈÅÑÉÊÏÖÕÓÉÊÇÓ ÕÐÏÓÔÁÓÇÓ, ÐÅÑÉÏ×ÇÓ ÐÏÕ ÌÅÓÁ ÔÇÓ ÆÏÕ-
ÌÅ. 2. ÁÉÈÅÑÉÊÏÓ ÊÁÉ ÖÕÓÉÊÏÓ ÊÏÓÌÏÓ. 3. ÁÓÔÑÉÊÏÓ ÊÏÓÌÏÓ.
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
TION OF THE SKIN AND INADEQUANCY. 27. PRANA STORAGE IN
SIAKRA OF LOW QUALITY SUBSTANCE. DYNAMIC DESCENT OF
PRANA AND HIT AT MULANDARA SIACRA, WHEN BODY IS AT THE
SUITABLE POSTURE.
10TH TRIAD, JANUARY 1980: 28. ESOTERIC RULES OF THERA-
PEUTICS: A) MEDITATIVE THERAPEUTICS, B) HYPNOTISTIC THER-
APEUTICS, C) MAGNETIC THERAPEUTICS. 29. PATIENT'S PREPA-
RATION IN THE RIGHT SUBSTITUTED WAY SO THAT HE MAY BE
ABLE TO OBEY THE INDICATED TREATMENT FOR HIS LIBERATION.
30. AWAKENING OF THE FROZEN POWERS OP OUR FELLOW-MAN
AIMING TO ASSIST IN HIS THERAPY. DEVELOPMENT OF A LOST
FAITH POWER FOR THE FAITH THERAPY.
11TH TRIAD, DECEMBER 1985: 31. PRACTICAL APPLICATION. E-
LIMINATION OF THE CONTRASTS BETWEEN THE SYMPATHETIC
AND THE PARASYMPATHETIC SYSTEMS THERAPIES OF
HEADACHES - MIGRAIBES - ARTHRITIS AND SPONDYLO-ARTHRITIS
AND OF OTHER PAINS. 32. ICONOPLASTIC THERAPEUTICS,
METHOD OF COOPERATION OF FABTASY-THOUGHT-WILL. 33. EX-
HAUSTS - HEATINGS - THERMO-VAPOURS, ECTOPLASMATIC E-
JACULATIONS FROM THE MOUTH.
SPECIAL NOTES: A) FOR THERAPEUTICS ON HAND. B) FOR IRIS-
DIAGNOSIS
SCIENTIFIC SPIRITUALISM
The Scientific Spiritualism is the other side of the Meditation. While by
the Meditation we get elevated to the transgressive function of our Mind,
to other frequencies of the Omnicreation, by the Scientific Spiritualism we
function the subconscience and by its help we reach the lower departments
of the matter (to the Stellar sublevels) and we get the joy to find fleshless
beings, low mostly rested, as well as we search these low worlds.
The Scientific Spiritualism is vibrated by the subconscience, It starts func-
tioning when the conscience is inactive. By the technical sleep (hypnotism),
the subconscience undertakes its great role. In the meantime, the conscience
disappears totally and the subconscience rules our body. Then, our spirit-
soul transmits to the physical body that sleeps, what newer happens to the
invisible area of the Creation where it is found at that moment.
We talk about the simple Spiritualism with which the people is occupied.
We talk about the intermediate that is found hypnotized somewhere in a
district on our earth. We still talk about the evolved Spiritualism that is
based on touches with fleshless beings that are more or less attained and
that constitute links of the Celestial White Hierarchy.
The art of the Spiritualism is very ancient. In the Greek Mythology it is
mentioned very often. Also it is referred and praised in hymns in the Old
Testament. It is an indirect proof of the soul immortality, since the Spiritu-
alism applies to the Fleshless Beings.
In this Esoteric Key you will find some ways and methods with analysis-
es and objective critiques that come from the writer as he lived, saw and
criticized them in the experiments of the interested searchers of the Spiri-
tualism.
Substantially, by the Branch of the Scientific Spiritualism the revelation
of the touch way with the great spirits that passed from our physical world,
takes place.
Necessarily, due to the great modern error of the people on this matter,
this branch proves the mistakes, the illusions, the victims and the deceivers
and charlatans from the very old times until our day, while at the same
time, he gives us the proper-scientific way of approaching the whole mat-
ter, so that after many pains and sufferings, the true searchers of the district
can secure a healthy, high and authentical spiritual contact.
All the Esoteric Keys by correspondence courses in the Esoterism come
from Master Nikolaos A. Margiori's personal experience that lasted from his
early adolescent age to his eighty years. But every Branch still constitutes
73 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 2ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÓÅÐÔÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ 1981: 4. Ç ÁÊÔÉÍÏÂÏËÉÁ ÔÏÕ ÖÕÓÉÊÏÕ
ÌÁÓ ÓÙÌÁÔÏÓ. 5. Ç ÌÅÔÁÂÉÂÁÓÇ ÔÇÓ ÓÊÅØÇÓ. 6. ÔÇËÅÐÁÈÇÔÉ-
ÊÁ ÖÁÉÍÏÌÅÍÁ.
3ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÉÁÍÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ 1982: 7. ÔÉ ÅÉÍÁÉ Ç ÄÉÏÑÁÓÇ. 8. ØÕ×ÏÌÅ-
ÔÑÉÁ. 9. ÁÑ×ÅÓ ÔÇÓ ÌÅÔÁØÕ×ÉÊÇÓ.
4ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÁÕÃÏÕÓÔÏÓ 1982: 10. Ç ÍÅÙÔÅÑÁ ÅÐÏ×Ç ÔÇÓ ÌÅÔÁ-
ØÕ×ÉÊÇÓ - ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÕ. 11. ÄÉÁÌÅÓÁ ´Ç ÌÅÍÔÉÏÕÌ. 12. Ç ÄÉÁÌÅ-
ÓÏÔÇÓ ÅÉÍÁÉ ÖÕÓÉÊÇ ´Ç ÅÐÉÊÔÇÔÏÓ;
5ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÉÏÕÍÉÏÓ 1983: 13. ÅÉÄÉÊÅÓ ÅÑÅÕÍÅÓ ÐÁÍÙ ÓÔÁ ÄÉÁ-
ÌÅÓÁ. 14. ÔÑÏÐÏÉ ÅÊÐÁÉÄÅÕÓÇÓ ÔÙÍ ÄÉÁÌÅÓÙÍ. 15. ÏÉ ÊÉÍÄÕÍÏÉ
ÔÙÍ ÄÉÁÌÅÓÙÍ.
6ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÉÏÕËÉÏÓ 1983: 16. ÅÐÉÓÔÇÌÏÍÉÊÇ ÅÑÌÇÍÅÉÁ ÅÐÉ ÔÇÓ
ÄÉÁÌÅÓÏÔÇÔÁÓ. 17. ÌÅÈÏÄÏÉ ÅÐÉÊÏÉÍÙÍÉÁÓ ÌÅÔÁ ÔÙÍ ÐÍÅÕÌÁ-
ÔÙÍ. 18. ÔÏ ÌÕÓÔÇÑÉÏ ÔÇÓ ÐÍÅÕÌÁÔÉÓÔÉÊÇÓ ÐÑÏÓÅÕ×ÇÓ.
7ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, 2 ÁÕÃÏÕÓÔÏÕ 1983: 19. ÄÉÁÊÏÇ, ÌÉÁ ÉÄÉÏÔÇÔÁ ÊÁÉ ÅÉ-
ÄÉÊÏÔÇÔÁ ÄÉÁÌÅÓÉÔÉÊÇ. 20. ÖÁÉÍÏÌÅÍÁ ÐÅÑÉÅÑÃÁ ÊÁÔÁ ÔÉÓ ÓÕÍÅ-
ÄÑÉÁÓÅÉÓ. 21. ÐÑÏÛÐÏÈÅÓÅÉÓ ÏÑÈÏÄÏÎÙÍ ÐÍÅÕÌÁÔÉÓÔÉÊÙÍ ÓÕ-
ÍÅÄÑÉÁÓÅÙÍ.
8ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, 1 ÓÅÐÔÅÌÂÑÉÏÕ 1983: 22. ÔÇËÅÊÉÍÇÔÉÊÁ ÖÁÉÍÏÌÅ-
ÍÁ. 23. ÌÅÔÅÙÑÉÓÅÉÓ ÆÙÍÔÙÍ ÁÍÈÑÙÐÙÍ. 24. ÎÅÍÏÃËÙÓÓÉÅÓ ÄÉÁ-
ÌÅÓÙÍ.
9ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÌÁÉÏÓ 1984: 25. ÄÉÁÊÏÌÉÓÅÉÓ ÁÍÔÉÊÅÉÌÅÍÙÍ. 26. Õ-
ËÏÐÏÉÇÓÅÉÓ. 27. ÅÊÔÏÐËÁÓÌÁ.
10ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÉÏÕÍÇÓ 1984: 28. ÓÔÏÉ×ÅÉÙÌÅÍÁ ÊÔÉÓÌÁÔÁ. 29. ÌÅ-
ÔÁÈÁÍÁÔÉÅÓ ÐÁÑÏÕÓÉÁÓÅÉÓ. 30. ØÅÕÔÏÄÉÁÌÅÓÁ ÊÁÉ ØÅÕÔÏÅÐÁ-
ÖÅÓ.
ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ
Ìå ôçí ÅóùôåñéêÞ Ìýçóç ï áíáæçôçôÞò ìáèáßíåé ðþò ìõïýíôáí óôïõò áñ-
÷áßïõò ÷ñüíïõò ïé êáôÜëëçëïé ãéá íá åéóÝëèïõí óôá Üäõôá ôùí áäýôùí, óôá
ÅóùôåñéêÜ ÌõóôÞñéá.
¼ëåò ïé ðáìðÜëáéåò ìõÞóåéò âáóßæïíôáí ðÜíù óôç öõóéêÞ ðñïåôïéìáóß-
á ôïõ ìõïõìÝíïõ. Ï ìõçôÞò éåñïöÜíôçò åêôåëïýóå êáôÜ ãñÜììá ôçí åóùôå-
ñéêÞ äéáäéêáóßá, ðïõ ï ìõïýìåíïò ôçí ëÜâáéíå ãéá íá ìðïñÝóåé íá åíùèåß
ìå ôçí øõ÷Þ ôïõ êáé ýóôåñá óéãÜ óéãÜ íá ðëçóéÜóåé óôçí ðíåõìáôïðåñéï÷Þ
ôïõ. Ôï óýóôçìá ôçò ìýçóçò Þôáí êáèéåñùìÝíï ó' üëá ôá áñ÷áúêÜ ìõóôÞ-
ñéá.
¸ðñåðå ìå ôéò ôåëåôïõñãßåò ç øõ÷Þ íá âïçèÞóåé ôçí áíýøùóç ôçò óõíåß-
äçóçò. Ôï êáôþôåñï åãþ, Ýðñåðå íá åêèáìâùèåß êáé íá áöÞóåé êÜðïéï Üë-
ëï üñãáíï íá áíôéêáôáóôÞóåé ôï êáôþôåñï êáé ãíþñéìï ôçò êáèçìåñéíÞò æù-
Þò - áíôßëçøçò. Ç üëç äéáäéêáóßá êñáôïýóå þñåò áñêåôÝò êáé ìÝñåò ðñïêá-
èïñéóìÝíåò. Ðüôå åðôÜ êáé ðüôå åííéÜ ìÝñåò âÜóôáãáí ïé ìõÞóåéò Þ ôá ìõ-
óôÞñéá ðïõ Ýäéíáí ôá êëåéäéÜ ôçò âáèýêñõöôçò áëÞèåéáò.
Ðáñ' üëá áõôÜ ôá ôåëåôïõñãéêÜ, ôï êëßìá ðïõ åðéêñáôïýóå Þôáí ìéáò Üë-
ëçò äéáöïñåôéêÞò êáôÜóôáóçò áðü ôï êëßìá ôçò êáèçìåñéíÞò æùÞò. Ôá ßäéá
ëüãéá åß÷áí ìéá éäéáßôåñç óçìáóßá êáé ìéá âáèýôåñç ãéá ôïõò ìõçìÝíïõò Ýí-
íïéá. Ãéá ðñþôç öïñÜ Üêïõãáí, ðþò ðÝñá áðü ôçí ïñáôÞ ðëåõñÜ ôïõ êüóìïõ,
åßíáé Ýíáò Üëëïò, ðéï ðëïýóéïò êáé ðéï áíþôåñïò áðü ôïí êüóìï ôïí äéêü ìáò.
Ìéá ðåñßåñãç áôìüóöáéñá, ðïõ ç áðïäï÷Þ ôçò, áíÝâáæå ôïí ìõïýìåíï èíç-
ôü óôçí ôÜîç ôçò áéùíéüôçôáò.
¸ôóé ï èíçôüò Üíèñùðïò ìåôáâáëëüôáí óå áèÜíáôï Èåü. Ç ðßóôç êáé ç
âåâáéüôçôá ðïõ óõíüäåõå ôïí ìõïýìåíï, Þôáí ôüóï ìåãÜëç, ðïõ ìåôÜ áðü
ôï ôÝñìá ôçò ìýçóçò, ï ìõçèåßò Ýíéùèå áëçèéíÜ ìÝóá ôïõ ôçí Üãíùóôç ìå-
ôÜëëáîç. Íáé ðßóôåõå, Ýíéùèå êáé æïýóå óáí Ýíáò Èåüò áèÜíáôïò. ÌÜèáéíå
ôï ìõóôÞñéï ôïõ èáíÜôïõ, áð' ôçí Üëëç ìåñéÜ, ðïõ áðåëåõèåñþíåé ôçí áí-
èñùðïøõ÷Þ íá öýãåé áðü ôá äåóìùôÞñéá ôçò öõóéêÞò æùÞò. Ãéá ôïýôï äü-
îáæáí ôïí èÜíáôï üóï ìðïñïýóáí ðåñéóóüôåñï, ãéáôß áíýøùíå ôïí èíçôü óôç
èÝóç ôïõ áèÜíáôïõ.
Åí ôÝëåé ç ÅóùôåñéêÞ Ìýçóç åßíáé ç áðïêÜëõøç ôùí ðëáóôïõñãéêþí éäéï-
ôÞôùí ôçò Ïõóßáò ôçò ÆùÞò Þ ôçò ÐíåõìáôéêÞò õðüóôáóçò. Åßíáé ç áíÜëõóç
ôùí áéôéþí üëùí ôùí ãåãïíüôùí ðïõ óõíèÝôïõí ôïõò êüóìïõò êáé öéëïîå-
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
a separate science that as much it walks about the Metaphysics, as steadi-
ly it brings within it the eternal Sperms of a solid and deep human reason.
Also you, my friend reader, can come near the sanctuary and taste. if of
course you need it deeply, the honey-nectar of the Scientific Spiritualism
that is found in the Esoteric Key that Master Nikolaos A. Margioris has cre-
ated and that contains Specialized Branches of Studies of the Esoterism by
correspondence courses, in an analogous theoretical and practical forma-
tion.
ESOTERIC KEY
METAPSYCHICS - SCIENTIFIC SPIRITUALISM
CONTENTS 404 PAGES
1ST TRIAD, SEPTEMBER 1981: 1. THE SUBSTANCE OF THE THREE-
DIMENSIONAL ETHERIC-PHYSICAL AREA WE LIVE IN. 2. ETHERIC
AND [HYSICAL WORLD. 3. STELLAR WORLD.
2ND TRIAD, SEPTEMBER 1981: 4. THE RADIATION OF OUR PHYS-
ICAL BODY. 5. THE TRANSMISSION OF THOUGHT. 6. TELEPA-
THETIC PHENOMENA.
3RD TRIAD, JANUARY 1962: 7. WHAT PERCEPTIVENESS IS. 8. PSY-
CHOMETRY. 9. METAPSYCHOSIS PRINCIPLES.
4TH TRIAD, JUNE 1983:
10. THE RECENT ERA OF METAPSYCHICS - HYPNOTISM. 11. IN-
TERMEDIARIES OR MEDIUMS. 12. IS INTERMEDIACY IS PHYSICAL OR
ACQUIRED?
5TH TRIAD, JUNE 1983: 13. SPECIFIC SEARCHES ON THE INTER-
MEDIARIES. 14. TRAINING METHOD OF THE INTERMEDIARIES. 15.
THE DANGERS OF THE INTERMEDIARIES.
6TH TRIAD, JULY 1983: 16. SCIENTIFIC INTERPRETATION ON IN-
TERMEDIACY. 17. COMMUNICATION METHODS WITH THE SPIRITS.
18. THE MYSTERY OF THE SPIRITUALIST PRAYER.
7TH TRIAD, AUGUST 2ND 1983: 19. TELEHEARING, AN INTER-
MEDIATE CAPACITY AND SPECIALITY. 20. STRANGE PHENOMENA
DURING THE MEETINGS. 21. PRESUPPOSITIONS OF THE ORTHO-
DOX SPIRITUAL MEETINHS.
8TH TRIAD, SEPTEMBER 1, 1983: 22. TELECENETIC PHENOME-
NA. 23. LIVING HUMAN BEINGS LEVITATIONS. 24. INTERMEDIARIES
FOREIGN LANGUAGES.
9TH TRIAD, MAY 1984: 25. TRANSPOSITIONS OF OBJECTS. 26.
MATERIALIZATIONS. 27. ECTOPLASM.
10TH TRIAD, JUNE 1984: 28. HAUNTED BUILDINGS. 29. POSTHU-
MOUS APPEARANCES. 30. FALSE INTERMDIARIES AND FALSE COM-
MUNICATIONS.
ESOTERIC INITIATION
By the Esoteric Initiation, the searcher learns how those who were able
to penetrate the impenetrable sanctuaries, the Esoteric Mysteries, were ini-
tiated.
All the very ancient initiations were based on the initiated's physical
preparation. The initiate hierophant performed literally the esoteric proce-
dure that the initiated received in order to be able to get united with his soul
and then, to approach gradually his spirit area. The system of the initiation
was established in all the archaic mysteries.
The soul should help, by its functions, the elevation of the conscience.
The lower ego shoulc be dazzled and let another organ to replace the low-
er and known one of the daily life - comprehension. The whole procedure
lasted for enough hours and predetermined days. The initiations or the
mysteries that gave the keys of the deeply hidden truth lasted for seven or
for nine days.
Despite all these rituals, the climate that prevailed was of another differ-
ent situation than the climate of the daily life. The same words had a par-
ticular meaning and a deeper sense for the initiated. For the first time, they
heard that beyond the visible side of the world, there is another world, rich-
74 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
íïýí ôá üíôá êáé öõóéêÜ ç ìåãáëåéþäçò åßóïäïò óôá áðáãïñåõìÝíá êÜèå
øõ÷Þò åíäéáéôÞìáôá ôïõ ÁíÝóðåñïõ Öùôüò.
Ìðïñåßò êáé óõ ößëå áíáãíþóôç íá Ýëèåéò êïíôÜ óôï Üäõôï êáé íá ãåõ-
èåßò, áí öõóéêÜ ôï Ý÷åéò åóùôåñéêÞ áíÜãêç, ôï ìÝëé - íÝêôáñ ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò
Ìýçóçò ðïõ âñßóêåôáé óôï Åóùôåñéêü Êëåéäß ðïõ äçìéïýñãçóå ï ÄÜóêáëïò
Íéêüëáïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò êáé ðïõ ðåñéÝ÷åé ÅîåéäéêåõìÝíïõò ÊëÜäïõò Óðïõ-
äþí ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý äé' áëëçëïãñáößáò, ìå áíÜëïãç èåùñçôéêÞ êáé ðñá-
êôéêÞ êáôÜñôéóç.
ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÏ ÊËÅÉÄÉ
ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ ÓÅËÉÄÅÓ: 385
1ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÌÁÑÔÉÏÓ 1981: 1. ÔÉ ÅÉÍÁÉ Ç ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ. 2.
ÄÉÁÖÏÑÁ ÔÇÓ ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇÓ ÁÐÏ ÔÇÍ ÅÎÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ. 3. ÔÑÏ-
ÐÏÉ ÊÁÉ ÓÕÓÔÇÌÁÔÁ ÁÍÁÐÔÕÎÇÓ ÊÁÉ ÌÅÔÁÄÏÓÇÓ ÔÇÓ ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉ-
ÊÇÓ ÌÕÇÓÇÓ.
2ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÁÐÑÉËÇÓ 1981: 4. Ç ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ ÓÔÏÕÓ ÐÑÏ-
ÊÁÔÁÊËÕÓÌÉÁÉÏÕÓ ÐÏËÉÔÉÓÌÏÕÓ. 5. Ç ÌÕÇÓÇ ÓÔÇÍ ÅÎÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ
ÖÉËÏÓÏÖÉÁ ÊÁÔÁ ÔÇÍ ÐÁÑÁÊÌÇ ÔÙÍ ÃÇÉÍÙÍ ÐÏËÉÔÉÓÌÙÍ. 6. Ç
ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ ÊÁÔÁ ÔÏÕÓ ÌÅÔÁÊÁÔÁÊËÕÓÌÉÁÉÏÕÓ ÐÏËÉÔÉ-
ÓÌÏÕÓ.
3ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÁÐÑÉËÇÓ 1981: 7. Ç ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ ÓÔÏÕÓ ÐÑÏ-
ÚÓÔÏÑÉÊÏÕÓ ×ÑÏÍÏÕÓ. 8. Ç ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ ÓÔÏÕÓ ÉÓÔÏÑÉ-
ÊÏÕÓ ×ÑÏÍÏÕÓ. 9. Ç ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ ÓÔÏÕÓ ÔÙÑÉÍÏÕÓ ×ÑÏ-
ÍÏÕÓ.
4ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÁÐÑÉËÉÏÓ 1981: 10. ÐÏÉÏÓ ÅÉÍÁÉ Ï ÓÊÏÐÏÓ ÊÁÉ Ç ÏÕ-
ÓÉÁ ÔÇÓ ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇÓ ÌÕÇÓÇÓ. 11. ÕÐÁÑ×ÏÕÍ ÁÍÈÑÙÐÏØÕ×ÅÓ
ÐÏÕ ÄÅÍ ÌÐÏÑÏÕÍ ÍÁ ÌÕÇÈÏÕÍ ÓÔÁ ÁÑÑÇÔÁ ÊÁÉ ÊÑÕÖÉÁ ÔÇÓ
ÐÁÍÄÇÌÉÏÕÑÃÉÁÓ. 12. ÔÏ ÁÉÙÍÉÏ ÈÅÌÁ ÔÙÍ ÅÎÅËÉÃÌÅÍÙÍ ÊÁÉ
ÌÇ ÅÎÅËÉÃÌÅÍÙÍ ØÕ×ÙÍ ÔÏÕ ÖÕÓÉÊÏÕ ÌÁÓ ÊÏÓÌÏÕ.
5ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÉÏÕÍÉÏÓ 1981: 13. ÐÑÏÛÐÏÈÅÓÅÉÓ ÃÉÁ ÔÇÍ ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉ-
ÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ. 14. ÔÁ ÊÁÔÁËËÇËÏÔÅÑÁ ÓÕÓÔÇÌÁÔÁ ÃÉÁ ÔÇÍ ÅÓÙÔÅ-
ÑÉÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ. 15. ÃÉÍÏÍÔÁÉ ËÁÈÇ ÊÁÔÁ ÔÇÍ ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ;
6ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÉÏÕÍÉÏÓ 1981: 16. ÌÅ×ÑÉ ÐÏÉÏ ÓÇÌÅÉÏ ÕØÙÓÇÓ ÌÐÏ-
ÑÅÉ ÍÁ ÖÈÁÓÅÉ Ç ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ ÅÍÏÓ ÁÍÈÑÙÐÏÕ; 17. Ç Å-
ÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ ÅÉÍÁÉ ÅÍÁÓ ÁÏÑÁÔÏÓ ÈÑÏÍÏÓ ÐÁÍÙ ÓÔÏÍ Ï-
ÐÏÉÏ ÅÃÊÁÈÉÓÔÁÔÁÉ Ç ÍÅÁ ÃÍÙÓÇ - ÁÐÏÊÁËÕØÇ, Ï ÐÑÙÇÍ ÁÍ-
ÈÑÙÐÏÓ ÈÍÇÔÏÓ ÊÁÉ ÔÙÑÁ ÁÈÁÍÁÔÏÓ ÐÍÅÕÌÁÔÏÁÍÈÑÙÐÏÓ.
18. ÌÐÏÑÅÉ ÌÅ ÔÇ ÄÕÍÁÌÇ ÔÇÓ ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇÓ ÌÕÇÓÇÓ ÍÁ ÌÅÔÁË-
ËÁÆÅÉ Ï ÁÍÈÑÙÐÏÓ ÔÏÍ ÌÅÓÁ ÊÁÉ ÔÏÍ ÅÎÙ ÅÁÕÔÏ ÔÏÕ;
7ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÓÅÐÔÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ 1981: 19. ÔÁ ÓÔÁÄÉÁ ÔÙÍ ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÙÍ
ÌÕÇÓÅÙÍ Ó' ÏËÅÓ ÔÉÓ ÅÐÏ×ÅÓ. 20. Ç ÌÕÇÓÇ ÓÔÁ ÓÕÌÂÏËÁ ÔÇÓ
ÌÁÍÁÓ - ÖÕÓÇÓ. 21. Ç ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ ÓÔÁ ÁÏÑÁÔÁ ÊÁÉ ÁÖÇ-
ÑÇÌÅÍÁ ÓÕÌÂÏËÁ.
8ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÓÅÐÔÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ 1981: 22. Ç ÌÕÇÓÇ ÓÔÁ ÈÑÇÓÊÅÕÔÉÊÁ
ÊÁÉ ÓÔÁ ÖÉËÏÓÏÖÉÊÁ ÌÕÓÔÇÑÉÁ. 23. Ç ÌÕÇÓÇ ÓÔÉÓ ØÕ×ÏÐÍÅÕ-
ÌÁÔÉÊÅÓ Ó×ÅÓÅÉÓ ÔÏÕ ÖÕÓÉÊÏÁÍÈÑÙÐÏÕ. 24. Ç ÌÕÇÓÇ ÓÔÇÍ
ÊÏÓÌÏÃÏÍÉÁ.
9ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÓÅÐÔÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ 1981: 25. Ç ÌÕÇÓÇ ÓÔÁ ÁÉÈÅÑÉÊÏÖÕ-
ÓÉÊÁ ÓÕÌÐËÅÃÌÁÔÁ. 26. Ç ÌÕÇÓÇ ÓÔÁ ÌÅÔÁÈÁÍÁÔÉÁ ÐÑÏÂËÇÌÁ-
ÔÁ. 27. Ç ÌÕÇÓÇ ÃÉÁ ÔÉÓ Ó×ÅÓÅÉÓ ÊÁÉ ÔÉÓ ÁËËÇËÏÅÎÁÑÔÇÓÅÉÓ ÓÔÏ
ÌÁÊÑÏÊÏÓÌÏ ÊÁÉ ÓÔÏ ÌÉÊÑÏÊÏÓÌÏ.
10ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÓÅÐÔÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ 1981: 28. ÁÐÏÊÁËÕØÅÉÓ ÃÉÁ ÌÕÇÓÅÉÓ
ÐÏÕ ÅÃÉÍÁÍ ÓÅ ÐÑÏÇÃÏÕÌÅÍÅÓ ÆÙÅÓ. 29. ÔÏ ÂÁÈÕ ÁÐÏÊÑÕÖÏ
ÌÕÓÔÇÑÉÏ ÔÇÓ ÌÕÇÓÇÓ. 30. Ç ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ ÁÐÏÔÅËÅÉ ÔÇÍ
ÅÍÙÓÇ ÔÇÓ ÐÍÅÕÌÁÔÏØÕ×ÇÓ ÌÅ ÔÇÍ ÁÉÙÍÉÁ ÌÏÍÁÄÁ.
ÁÐÏÓÕÌÂÏËÉÓÌÏÓ
ÐñÝðåé íá ðïýìå ðùò ìå ôïí Áðïóõìâïëéóìü ìðáßíïõìå ìÝóá óôá ìõ-
óôÞñéá ôçò öýóçò - ýëçò êáé áð' åêåß ãíùñßæïõìå ôé óõìâïëßæåé Þ ôé áíôéðñï-
óùðåýåé ôï êÜèå ó÷Þìá ôçò ìïñöÞò.
Áêüìá ìå ôïí Áðïóõìâïëéóìü ìáèáßíïõìå ôé Ýãñáøáí Þ ôé ìáò åßðáí áõ-
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
er and higher than ours. There was a curious atmosphere the acceptance
of which ascended the initiated mortal to the eternity class.
So, the mortal being was changed into an immortal God. The faith and
the certainty that accompanied the initiated, were so great that, after the end
of the initiation, the initiated felt deeply inside him the unknown alteration.
Yes, he believed, he felt and he lived as an immortal God. He knew the mys-
tery of death from the other side, that frees the human-soul to leave from
the prisons of the physical life. For this reason, they glorified death as much
as possible, because it elevated the mortal to the position of the immortal.
Finally, the Esoteric Initiation is the revelation of the creative qualities of
the Life Substance or of the Spiritual ground. It is the analysis of the caus-
es of all the facts that compose the worlds and
hospitalize the beings and certainly, the grandiose entrance in every soul
forbidden abodes of the Eternal Light.
Also you, my friend reader, can come near the sanctuary
and taste, if you certainly need it deeply, the honey-nectar of the Eso-
teric Initiation where the Esoteric Key that Master Nikolaos A. Margioris has
created and that contains Specialized Branches of Studies in the Esoterism
by correspondence courses, in the analogous theoretical and practical for-
mation.
ESOTERIC KEY
ESOTERIC INITIATION
CONTENTS, 385 PAGES
1ST TRIAD, MARCH 1981: 1. WHAT ESOTERIC INITIATION IS. 2.
THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE ESOTERIC AND THE EXOTERIC
INITIATION. 3. WAYS AND SYSTEMS OF DEVELOPMENT AND
TRANSMITTANCE OF THE ESOTERIC INITIATION.
2ND TRIAD, APRIL 1981: 4. THE ESOTERIC INITIATION DURING
THE ANTEDILUVIAN CIVILIZATIONS. 5. THE INITIATION IN THE EX-
OTERIC PHILOSOPHY DURING THE DECLINE OF THE EARTHY CIV-
ILIZATIONS. 6. THE ESOTERIC INITIATION DURING THE POST-DILU-
VIAN CIVILIZATION.
3RD TRIAD, APRIL 1981: 7. THE ESOTERIC INITIATION DURING
THE PREHISTORICAL AGES. 8. THE ESOTERIC INITIATION DURING
THE HISTORICAL AGES. 9. THE ESOTERIC INITIATION DURING THE
PRESENT AGES.
4TH TRIAD, APRIL 1981: 10. WHAT IS THE PURPOSE AND THE
SUBSTANCE OF THE ESOTERIC INITIATION. 11. THERE ARE CER-
TAIN HUMAN-SOULS THAT CANNOT BE INITIATED IN THE AND
SEVRETS OF OMNICREATION. 12. THE ETERNAL SUBJECT OF THE
EVOLVED AND NOT-EVOLVED SOULS OF OIR NATURAL WORLD.
5TH TRIAD, JUNE 1981: 13. PRESUPPOSITIONS FOR THE ESO-
TERIC INITIATION. 14. THE MOST APPROPRIATE SYSTEMS FOR THE
ESOTERIC INITIATION. 15. DURING THE ESOTERIC INITIATION MIS-
TAKES ARE BEING MADE.
6TH TRIAD, JUNE 1981: 16. AT WHAT EXTENT CAN A FELLOW'S
ESOTERIC INITIATION REACH? 17. THE ESOTERIC INITIATION IS AN
INVISIBLE THRONE ON WHICH THE NEW KNOLEDGE-REVELATION,
THE FORMER MORTAL AND NOW IMMORTAL SPIRIT-MAN STEE-
LES. 18. CAN MAN THROUGH THE ESOTREIC INITIATION CHANGE
HIS INNER AND HIS OUTER SELF?
7TH TRIAD, SEPTEMBER 1981: 19. THE STAGES OF THE ESO-
TERIC INITIATIONS IN ALL AGES. 20. INITIATION INTO THE SYM-
BOLS OF MOTHER-NATURE. 21. THE ESOTERIC INITIATION INTO
THE INVISIBLE AND ABSTRACT SYMBOLS.
8TH TRIAD, SEPTEMBER 1981: 22. INITIATION INTO THE RELI-
GIOUS AND PHILOSOPJICAL COMPLEXES. 23. INITIATION INTO THE
PSYCHO-SPIRITUAL RELATIONS OF THE PHYSICAL-MAN. 24. INITI-
ATION IN COSMOGONY.
9TH TRIAD, SEPTEMBER 1981: 25. INITIATION INTO THE ETHER-
IC-PHYSICAL COMPLEXES. 26. INITIATION INTO THE POSTHUMOUS
PROBLEMS. 27. INITIATION IN THE RELATIONS AND THE IN THE
75 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
ôïß ðïõ ãíþñéóáí ôá âÜèç ôçò áëÞèåéáò êáé ðïõ ôçí Ýâáëáí, ôç öýëáîáí
ìÝóá óå óýìâïëá ãéá íá ôçí êñáôÞóïõí áð' ôçí öèïñÜ ôïõ ÷ñüíïõ. Ôüóï
áðü ôá óýìâïëá ôçò öýóçò, üóï êáé áðü ôá óýìâïëá ôïõ ãíþóôç ôçò áëÞ-
èåéáò, ìðïñïýìå óáí ãíùñßóïõìå íá áðïóõìâïëßæïõìå, íá âñßóêïõìå ôá
êñõììÝíá Þ ôá áéþíéá ìõóôÞñéá.
Ï Öåñåêýäçò áðïóõìâüëéæå óôï ìáèçôÞ ôïõ Ðõèáãüñá, ôá Ôåñáôïõñ-
ãÞìáôá (áéèåñéêü êüóìï) Þ ôá óýìâïëá ôçò öýóçò êáé ôïõ ìõçìÝíïõ óôá
êñýöéá áíèñùðïíïý. Áðïóõìâïëßæù óçìáßíåé, áðïêáëýðôù ôçí êñõììÝ-
íç áëÞèåéá êáé ïõóßá, ôïõ ëüãïõ êáé ôïõ Ýñãïõ, ìõïýìåíïò ðñþôá óôçí Ýí-
íïéá ôçò öõóéêïóêÝøçò êáé áíèñùðïóêÝøçò.
Ï Áðïóõìâïëéóìüò ìéëÜåé ìå ìéá Üëëç ãëþóóá ãéá ôá êñõììÝíá ôùí
óêÝøåþí ôïõò. Ç ìÜíá öýóç óõìâïëßæåé ìå ôçí ýëç óôéò ìïñöÝò ðïõ ìáò
ðáñïõóéÜæåé, ãéá íá ìáò ðáñáäþóåé óôçí áéùíéüôçôá ôéò óêÝøåéò ôçò. Ðñü-
êåéôáé ãéá ôçí áëÞèåéá ôùí ðñáãìÜôùí, ðïõ óáí ï Üíèñùðïò ôçí ìÜèåé, å-
íþíåôáé ìáæß ôçò êáé ãßíåôáé ãíþóôçò êáé ìÝôï÷üò ôçò.
ÏõäÝðïôå ï Ðõèáãüñáò áðïìáêñýíèçêå áðü ôá ÔåñáôïõñãÞìáôá - Á-
ëÞèåéåò ôùí öõóéêïöáéíïìÝíùí êáé áðü ôéò áíèñùðéíïóõìâïëéêÝò Ýííïéåò
(ðáñáâïëÝò) ôùí ìõçìÝíùí.
Ôï åñþôçìá åßíáé ðþò ãßíåôáé Ýíáò áðïóõìâïëéóìüò; ¼ðùò ãñÜøáìå êáé
ðéï ðÜíù, áðïóõìâïëßæåé åêåßíïò ðïõ ãíùñßæåé ôçò öýóçò ôïí óêåðôéêéóìü
êáé ôïõ áíèñùðïíïý ôçò óýëëçøçò ôá üñéá. Ôüóï ï Íïõò ôçò öýóçò üóï
êáé åêåßíïò ôïõ áíèñþðïõ óêÝðôïíôáé ðáñÜëëçëá êáé ðñÜôôïõí áíÜëïãá.
¼ðïéïò åíþóåé ôçí óõ÷íüôçôÜ ôïõ ìå ôç óõ÷íüôçôá ôùí óêÝøåùí ôçò öý-
óçò, åíþíåôáé áëçèéíÜ ìáæß ôçò. Áõôüò èá ìÜèåé ôçí ãëþóóá ôùí óõìâü-
ëùí ôçò êáé ôùí ìõóôþí ôáõôü÷ñïíá ôéò ãíþóåéò.
ÐñÝðåé ëïéðüí ï áðïóõìâïëéóôÞò íá åíùèåß ìå ôçí ïõóßá ôïõ óõìâüëïõ
êáé áöïý åéóÝëèåé óôçí ïõóßá ôïõ, ôüôå áõôüìáôá èá ìÜèåé ôé êñýâåé êáé ôé
äéäÜóêåé ôï êÜèå óýìâïëï, ôçò ìüíçò áëÞèåéáò ôï êïììÜôé. Ôá âïõíÜ, ôá
äÜóç, ôá ðïôÜìéá, ôá ñõÜêéá, ôá äÝíäñá êáé ïé èÜëáóóåò, ïé èÜìíïé êáé ôá
ëïõëïýäéá, ôá ÷ñþìáôá êáé ó÷Þìáôá, ïé öõóéêïðáñáóôÜóåéò ôïõò, óõìâï-
ëßæïõí ìéá êñõììÝíç Ýííïéá ôçò ìÜíáò öýóçò, ðïõ áí áõôÞ ôçí Ýííïéá ôçí
ðéÜóïõìå, âñéóêüìáóôå óôçí ßäéá óêÝøç ôçò áëÞèåéáò ðïõ ðåñéÝ÷åé ôïí
óêïðü, ôï áßôéï êáé ôïí ðñïïñéóìü áõôïý ôïõ öõóéêïóõìâüëïõ.
Ôï ßäéï ðåñéÝ÷åé ôï áíèñùðïóýìâïëï. Ìéá ðñïáéþíéá áëÞèåéá âñßóêå-
ôáé êñõììÝíç ó' Ýíá óýìâïëï ôå÷íïêáôáóêåõáóìÝíï Þ óå ìéá üìïñöç Ðá-
ñáâïëÞ Þ ó' Ýíá Ðáñáìýèé Þ áêüìá óå ìéá Áëëçãïñßá. ¼ëá äåß÷íïõí ðþò
ìüëéò âñåé ï áíáæçôçôÞò - åñåõíçôÞò, ôïí áëçóìüíçôï ìßôï ôçò ÁñéÜäíçò
ãñÞãïñá èá âãåé áðü ôïí Ëáâýñéíèï ôçò øåõôïðáñÜóôáóçò. Áðïóõìâïëé-
óìüò åßíáé ç åýñåóç ôçò óõìâïëéæüìåíçò áëÞèåéáò.
Ïé ìýèïé ðåñéÝ÷ïõí åðôÜ áëÞèåéåò ðïõ Ý÷ïõí åíóùìáôùèåß óå ìéá áí-
èñùðïíïçôÞ åîéóôïñïýìåíç éäÝá. Ç ïìïñöéÜ ôïõ êÜèå ôýðïõ ìýèïõ åßíáé
êáôÜäçëç ãéáôß áõôïß ðïõ ôïí ó÷çìÜôéóáí, ãíþñéæáí ðþò ôïí áíôéëáìâÜíå-
ôáé êáé ôïí áðïäÝ÷åôáé ï Üíèñùðïò. Áõôüò ï ãíùóôéêéóìüò ôùí ëßãùí ðïõ
Ýðéáóáí óôá ÷Ýñéá ôïõò ôçí êëåßäá ôïõ áðïóõìâïëéóìïý ôïõ êÜèå ìýèïõ,
áðïôåëåß ìéá ðáíÜñ÷áéá ìýçóç óå êáôÜëëçëïõò óõíáíèñþðïõò.
Ðïéïé åßíáé ïé êáôÜëëçëïé ãé' áõôÞ ôçí ìýçóç óõíÜíèñùðïé; Åßíáé áõôïß
ðïõ óõãêëïíßóôçêáí áðü ôïõò åñåèéóìïýò ôùí öõóéêïóõìâüëùí êáé ôùí
áíèñùðïóõìâüëùí. Åßíáé áõôïß ðïõ åíþèçêáí âáèéÜ ìå ôéò öõóéêïðáñá-
óôÜóåéò êáé ôå÷íïðáñáóôÜóåéò êáé ðïõ óõãêëïíßóôçêáí óôï êÜèå ÷ñþìá êáé
óôïí êÜèå Þ÷ï ðïõ êÜðïéá óôéãìÞ óõíÝëáâáí. Åßíáé áõôïß, ðïõ ìÝóá óôá
óýìâïëá âñÞêáí ôá åíäéáöÝñïíôÜ ôïõò êáé ðïõ åíþèçêáí ìáæß ôïõò üôáí
ìÝóá ôïõò ãåííÞèçêáí ðåñßåñãá êáé áíåîÞãçôá óõíáéóèÞìáôá óôï áíôß-
êñéóìá êÜðïéïõ óõìâüëïõ. Åßíáé áõôïß ïé áðïóõìâïëéóôÝò, ðïõ óáí Üêïõ-
óáí ìéá ðáñáâïëÞ, áìÝóùò ìðÞêáí óôçí áëÞèåéá ôùí áéôéþí êáé ãíþñéóáí
ôá áðïôåëÝóìáôÜ ôïõò, áõôÜ ðïõ êÜèå óýìâïëï êáé êÜèå ðáñáâïëÞ ÄéäÜ-
óêåé.
Ìå ôç óùóôÞ áðïóõìâüëéóç ôùí ìýèùí êáé ôùí óõìâüëùí, ìå ôç âïÞ-
èåéá ôçò åñìçíåßáò ôïõò, ï Üíèñùðïò åéóÝñ÷åôáé ìÝóá ó' Ýíáí êüóìï, ü-
ðïõ õðÜñ÷åé êÜôé Üëëï, Üãíùóôï êáé áðßèáíï. Åêåßíïé ðïõ óõíÝèåóáí ôïõò
ìýèïõò êáé ôá óýìâïëá, Þèåëáí íá ìáò êëçñïíïìÞóïõí ôá Üññçôá êáé
êñýöéá ôïõ áüñáôïõ êüóìïõ ìáò.
Ìðïñåßò êáé óõ ößëå áíáãíþóôç íá Ýëèåéò êïíôÜ óôï Üäõôï êáé íá ãåõ-
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
MACROCOSNM AND IN THE MICROCOSM.
10TH TRIAD, SEPTEMBER 1981: 28. REVELATIONS ABOUT INITI-
ATIONS MADE IN PREVIOUS LIVES. 29. THE DEEP SECRET MYS-
TERY OF INITIATION. 30. THE ESOTERIC INITIATION CONSTITUTES
THE UNION OF THE SPIRIT-SOUL WITH THE ETARNAL UNIT.
DESYMBOLISM
We must say that by the Desymbolism we enter the mysteries of the na-
ture - matter and thence, we know what every form scheme symbolizes or
represents
Also, by the Desymbolism we learn what those who knew the truth depths
and put and kept in symbols, to protect it from the time damage, wrote or
told us.
Ferekydes desybolized to his student Pythagoras, the Monstrosities (ether-
ic world) or the symbols of the nature and of the human-mind initiated in
the secrets. To desymbolize means to reveal the hidden truth and substance
of the word and of the work, by being first initiated in the meaning of the
physical thought and of the manthought.
The Desymbolism talks in another language about the secrets of their
thoughts. The mother-nature symbolizes under the matter in the forms it p-
resents us to deliver us its thoughts for ever. It is about the truth of the things
that if man knows it, he gets united with it and becomes its knower and par-
ticipant.
Pythagoras never went away from the Monstrosities - Truths of the phys-
ical phenomena and from the human symbolical meanings (parables) of the
initiated.
The question is how a desymbolism is created. As we wrote above, he
who knows the scepticism of the nature and the conception of man-mind
limits, can desymbolize. The Mind of the nature as well as the man's Mind
think in parallel and act respectively. He who unites his frequency with the
frequency of the nature thoughts, gets united truly with it. He will learn the
language of its symbols and at the same time, the knowledge of the initiat-
ed.
Therefore, the desymbolist must be united with the substance of the sym-
bol and after he enters his substance, he will then learn automatically what
every symbol hides and teaches, the piece of the only truth. The mountains,
the forests, the rivers, the brooks, the trees and the seas, the shrubs and the
flowers, the colours and the shapes, their natural presentations, symbolize
a hidden meaning of the mother-nature, that if we conceive it, we will be
in front of the same thought of the truth that contains the purpose, the cause
and the destination of this physical symbol.
The physical symbol contains the same. A presaging truth is hidden in
an artistically made symbol in a shapeless Parable or in a Tale or even in
an Allegory. Everything shows that as soon as the seeker - searcher finds
the unforgettable Ariadne's thread he will soon get out of the Labyrinth of
the false presentation. Desymbolism is the discovery of the symbolized truth.
The myths contain seven truths that have been incorporated in a man-
understood related idea. The beauty of every myth type is obvious because
those who formed it, knew how man realizes and accepts it. This gnosticism
of the few people who took in their hands the key of every myth desym-
bolism, constitutes a very ancient initiation to the proper fellow men.
Who are the fellow-men proper for this initiation? They are those who
were shacked by the irritations of the physical symbols and of the human
symbols. They are those who were united deeply with the physical pre-
sentations and with the technical presentations and who were excited by
every color and by every sound that they conceived at some moment. They
are those who found in the symbols their interests and who were united with
them, when within them some curious and inexplicable sentiments were
born in front of some symbol. They are these desymbolists who, after hav-
ing eard a parable, they immediately penetrated the truth of the causes and
knew their results, that every symbol and every parable Teaches.
76 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
èåßò, áí öõóéêÜ ôï Ý÷åéò åóùôåñéêÞ áíÜãêç, ôï ìÝëé - íÝêôáñ ôïõ Áðïóõì-
âïëéóìïý ðïõ âñßóêåôáé óôï Åóùôåñéêü Êëåéäß ðïõ äçìéïýñãçóå ï ÄÜóêá-
ëïò Íéêüëáïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò êáé ðïõ ðåñéÝ÷åé ÅîåéäéêåõìÝíïõò ÊëÜäïõò
Óðïõäþí ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý äé' áëëçëïãñáößáò, ìå áíÜëïãç èåùñçôéêÞ êáé
ðñáêôéêÞ êáôÜñôéóç.
Ï ÄÜóêáëïò Í. ÌáñãéùñÞò óõíÝãñáøå êáé åîÝäùóå ìüíï ôçí ðñþôç
ôñéÜäá ôïõ Áðïóõìâïëéóìïý. Ïé õðüëïéðåò åííéÜ äåí Ý÷ïõí ãñáöåß.
ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÏ ÊËÅÉÄÉ
ÁÐÏÓÕÌÂÏËÉÓÌÏÓ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
1ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÄÅÊÅÌÂÑÇÓ 1977: 1. ÁÍÔÉÊÅÉÌÅÍÉÊÏÓ ÓÊÏÐÏÓ ÔÏÕ
ÁÐÏÓÕÌÂÏËÉÓÌÏÕ. 2. ÓÕÌÂÏËÁ ÖÕÓÇÓ ÊÁÉ ÔÅ×ÍÇÓ. 3. ÁËËÇ-
ÃÏÑÉÅÓ, ÁÉÍÉÃÌÁÔÁ, ÐÁÑÏÌÏÉÙÓÅÉÓ, ÌÅÔÁÖÏÑÅÓ.
2ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ: 4. ÐÁÑÁÂÏËÅÓ ÁÐËÅÓ ÊÁÉ ÓÕÍÈÅÔÅÓ. 5. ÌÕÈÏÉ ÐÏÕ
ÌÅÓÁ ÔÏÕÓ ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÕÍ ÁÐÉÓÔÅÕÔÅÓ ÃÍÙÓÅÉÓ. 6. Ï ÏÑÁÌÁ ÔÏÕ
ÍÁÂÏÕ×ÏÄÏÍÏÓÏÑÁ - ÍÁÌÐÏÕÓÏÍÔÍÅÆÁÑ ÊÁÉ Ç ÅÑÌÇÍÅÉÁ
ÔÏÕ ÁÐÏ ÔÏÍ ÐÑÏÖÇÔÇ ÄÁÍÉÇË - ÂÁËÔÁÓÁÓÁÑ.
3ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ: 7. ÌÅËÅÔÇ ÅÉÄÉÊÇ ÐÁÍÙ ÓÔÉÓ ÅÎÇ ÌÅÑÅÓ ÔÇÓ ÄÇ-
ÌÉÏÕÑÃÉÊÁÓ. 8. ÁÐÏÊÁËÕØÇ ÔÏÕ ÐÉÏ ÓÏÖÏÕ ÌÁÈÇÔÇ ÔÏÕ ×ÑÉ-
ÓÔÏÕ, ÉÙÁÍÍÇ, ÃÉÁ ÔÇ ÆÙÇ ÓÔÁ ÌÅËËÏÍÔÁ ÔÏÕ ÊÏÓÌÏÕ. 9. Á-
ÐÏÓÕÌÂÏËÉÓÌÏÓ ÁÐÏ ÔÏ ÖÕÔÉÊÏ ÂÁÓÉËÅÉÏ.
4ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ: 10. ÃÉÁÔÉ ÏÉ ÁÑ×ÁÉÏÔÅÑÅÓ ÈÑÇÓÊÅÉÅÓ ÅÉ×ÁÍ ÃÉÁ
ÔÏÕÓ ÐÉÓÔÏÕÓ ÐÅÑÉÓÓÏÔÅÑÁ ÓÕÌÂÏËÁ ÁÐÏ ÔÉÓ ÍÅÏÔÅÑÅÓ. 11.
ÔÏ ÙÑÁÉÏÔÅÑÏ ÓÕÌÂÏËÏ ÔÏÕ ÓÇÌÅÑÉÍÏÕ ÐÏËÉÔÉÓÌÏÕ ÐÏÕ
ÅË ÊÅÉ ÔÇÍ ÊÁ ÔÁ ÃÙ ÃÇ ÔÏÕ Á ÐÏ ÔÁ Á ÐÑÏ ÓÐÅ ËÁ ÓÔÁ ÂÁ ÈÇ
ÔÙÍ ×ÉËÉÅÔÇÑÉÄÙÍ. 12. Ï ÁÍÈÑÙÐÏÓ ÁÍÁÌÅÓÁ ÓÔÁ ÓÕÌÂÏËÁ,
ÔÏÓÏ ÔÁ ÔÅ×ÍÉÊÁ, ÏÓÏ ÊÁÉ ÔÁ ÖÕÓÉÊÁ.
5ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ: 13. Ç ÅÐÉ ÔÏÕ ÏÑÏÕÓ ÏÌÉËÉÁ, ÐÑÙÔÏ. 14. Ç ÅÐÉ ÔÏÕ
ÏÑÏÕÓ ÏÌÉËÉÁ, ÄÅÕÔÅÑÏ. 15. Ç ÅÐÉ ÔÏÕ ÏÑÏÕÓ ÏÌÉËÉÁ, ÔÑÉÔÏ.
6ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ: 16. ÏÉ ÑÁÖÁÅÉÌ (ÅÎÁÍÔËÇÌÅÍÏÉ - ÊÅÊÏÉÌÇÌÅÍÏÉ).
17. Ç ÓÊÇÍÇ ÔÏÕ ÌÁÑÔÕÑÉÏÕ ÔÏÕ ÌÅÃÁËÏÕ ÌÙÕÓÇ. 18. ÏÓÉÑÉÓ
ÊÁÉ ÉÓÉÄÁ, ÔÁ ÄÕÏ ÁÉÙÍÉÁ ÓÕÌÂÏËÁ.
7ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ: 19. ÓÉÂÁÓ, ÂÉÓÍÏÕ ÊÁÉ ÂÑÁ×ÌÁ, ÔÏ ÉÍÄÉÊÏ ÔÑÉÓÕ-
ÐÏÓÔÁÔÏ. 20. ÔÏ ÓÕÊÏ ÔÏÕ ÂÏÕÄÁ ÓÔÇÍ ÖÕÓÉÊÇ ÓÕÌÂÏËÉÊÇ
ÔÏÕ. 21. ÄÇÌÇÔÑÁ, ÐÅÑÓÅÖÏÍÇ, ÉÁÃ×ÏÓ.
8ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ: 22. Ç ÐÁÑÁÂÏËÇ ÔÏÕ ÁÓÙÔÏÕ. 23. Ï ÌÕÓÔÉÊÏÓ ÄÅÉ-
ÐÍÏÓ ÓÔÇ ÌÕÓÔÇÑÉÁÊÇ ÔÏÕ ÅÍÍÏÉÁ. 24. Ç ÁÍÁÓÔÁÓÇ ÔÏÕ ×ÑÉ-
ÓÔÏÕ ÊÁÉ Ï ÐÁÕËÏÓ.
9ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ: 25. ÔÏ ÅÕÃÅÍÅÓÔÅÑÏ ÐÁÑÁÃÙÃÏ ÔÏÕ ÖÕÔÉÊÏÕ ÂÁ-
ÓÉËÅÉÏÕ, ÔÏ ÐÏËÕÖÕËËÏ ÔÑÉÁÍÔÁÖÕËËÏ. 26. Ï ÊÅÑÁÕÍÏÓ ÔÏÕ
ÄÉÁ. 27. ÊÅÍÔÁÕÑÏÉ.
10ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ: 28. Ï ÇÑÁÊËÇÓ. 29. Ç ÃÅÍÍÇÓÇ ÔÏÕ ÄÉÁ. 30. ÔÁÎÇ
ÁÐÏ ÔÏ ×ÁÏÓ.
ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÖÉËÏÓÏÖÉÁ
Ìå ôçí ÊëÜäï ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò Öéëïóïößáò âñéóêüìáóôå óôá ðñüèõñá
ôïõ éåñïý íáïý ôçò ãíþóçò êáé óïößáò. Åäþ ç Öéëïóïößá óôñÝöåôáé íá ðñï-
óáíáôïëéóôåß óôçí Ýäñá ôçò ÁëÞèåéáò.
Ç ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá óôñáììÝíç Þäç ðñïò ôçí ÁëÞèåéá, åñìçíåýåé
ìå ôïí äéêü ôçò ôñüðï, ôï êïóìïëïãéêü êáé ôï ïíôïëïãéêü ðñüâëçìá ôïõ
áíèñþðïõ. ÁõôÞ ç åñìçíåßá åßíáé ôÝëåéá, åíôåëþò äéáöïñåôéêÞ áðü ôçí åñ-
ìçíåßá ðïõ äßíïõí ôá åîùôåñéêÜ öéëïóïöéêÜ óõóôÞìáôá.
Áí ðáñáäå÷èïýìå ðñïò óôéãìÞ ðþò êÜèå Ýñãï öéëïóïöéêü èá ðáñáìåß-
íåé óôï ìÝëëïí áíÜëïãá ìå ôï ðåñéå÷üìåíü ôïõ óå Ìõóôéêéóìü, ôï Åóùôåñé-
êü áõôü Êëåéäß ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò Öéëïóïößáò èá ðáñáìåßíåé óôï äéçíåêÝò á-
öïý áðü ôçí áñ÷Þ ìÝ÷ñé ôï ôÝëïò ðñáãìáôåýåôáé üëç ôçí ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÁëÞèåéá,
ôá Áßôéá ðïõ ðñüâáëáí ôïí öõóéêü ìáò êüóìï êáé ðïõ óáí êýêëïò èá åðá-
íÝëèåé óôçí áñ÷éêÞ åêêßíçóÞ ôïõ, áöïý ðñþôá äéáãñáöåß üëç ç ðåñéöåñåéá-
êÞ ôïõ õðï÷ñÝùóç, ðáßñíïíôáò ìÝóá ôïõ ôá üíôá êáé ôïõò êüóìïõò ðïõ èá
åéóðñÜîïõí ôéò ìÝëëïõóÝò ôïõò åìðåéñßåò óôï êôßóéìï ôïõ Áéþíéïõ Åáõôïý
Ôïõò.
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
By the right desymbolisation of the myths and of the symbols, by theiir
interpretation assistance, man enters a world where something else un-
known and improbable exists. Those who have composed the myths and
the symbols, wanted to inherit us the ineffable and the secrets of our in-
visible world.
Also you, my friend reader, can come near the sanctuary and taste, if cer-
tainly you need it internally, the honey-nectar of the Desymbolism that is
found in the Esoteric Key that Master Nikolaos A. Margioris has created
and that contains Specialized Branches of Studies in the Esoterism by cor-
respondence courses, in the analogous theoretical and practical formation.
ESOTERIC KEY
DESYMBOLISM
CONTENTS
1ST TRIAD, DECEMBER 1977: 1. THE OBJECTIVE OF THE DESYM-
BOLISM. 2. SYMBOLS OF NATURE AND ART. 3. ALLEGORIES, ENIG-
MAS, COMPARISONS, METAPHORES.
2ND TRIAD: 4. SIMPLE AND COMPOSITE PARABLES. 5. MYTHS
CONTAINING UNBELIEVABLE KNOWLEDGE. 6. NAVOU-
CHOTHONOSSORAS - NABOUSONTENZAR VISION AND ITS INTER-
PRETATION BY PROPHET DANIEL-VALTASSAR.
3RD TRIAD: 7. SPECIAL STUDY ON THE SIX DAYS OF CREATION.
8. THE REVELATION OF CHRIST'S WIDEST STUDENT, JOHN, FOR
THE LIFE IN THE WORLD FUTURE. 9. DESYMBOLISM FROM THE
VEGETABLE KINGDOM.
4TH TRIAD: 10. WHY THE VERY ANCIENT RELIGIONS HAD MORE
SYMBOLS FOR THE FAITHFUL, THAN THE MODERN ONES. 11. THE
MOST BEAUTIFUL SYMBOL OF THE TODAY' CIVILIZATION DERIV-
ING FROM THE IMPERVIOUS DEPTHS OF THE MILLENNIUMS. 12.
MAN AMONG THE TECHNICAL AND THE NATURAL SYMBOLS.
5TH TRIAD: 13. CHRIST'S SERMON ON THE MOUNTAIN, FIRST.
14. CHRIST'S SERMON ON THE MOUNTAIN, SECOND. 15. CHRIST'S
SERMON ON THE MOUNTAIN, THIRD.
6TH TRIAD: 16. THE RAPHAEMS (EXHAUSTED-SLEPT). 17. GREAT
MOSE'S SCENE OF TORTURE. 18. OSIRIS AND ISIS, THE TWO ETER-
NAL SYMBOLS.
7TH TRIAD: 19. SHIVAS, VISNOU AND VRACHMA, THE INDIAN
THREE-SUBSTANCE. 20. BOUDHA'S FIG AT ITS NATURAL SYM-
BOLISM. 21. DIMITRA, PERSEFONI AND HIAGHOS.
8TH TRIAD: 22. THE PRODIGAL SON PARABLE. 23. THE LAST SUP-
PER IN ITS MYSTERIOUS MEANING. 24. CHRIST'S RESURRECTION
AND ST.PAUL.
9TH TRIAD: 25. THE FINEST PRODUCT OF THE VEGETABLE K-
INGDOM, THE LEAFY ROSE. 26. ZEU'S THUNDER. 27. CENTAURS.
10TH TRIAD: 28. HERCULES. 29. ZEU'S BIRTH. 30. ORDER AND
CHAOS.
ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY
By the Branch of the Esoteric Philosophy we are found at the gates of
the knowledge sacred temple. Here the Philosophy turns to be orientated
to the seat of the Truth.
The Esoteric Philosophy turned already to the Truth, interprets in its own
way, the man's cosmologic and ontologic problems. This interpretation is
perfect, completely different than the explanation that the exoteric philo-
sophical systems give.
Let us admit, for a moment, that every philosophical work will remain in
the future according to its content in Mysticism. This Esoteric Key of the E-
soteric Philosophy will remain continually, since, from the beginning to the
end, it treats the whole Esoteric Truth, the Causes that projected our phys-
ical world and that as a circle will come back to its initial starting out, after
all its peripheral obligation is traced, taking inside it the beings and the
worlds that will collect their future experiences in the building of their Eter-
77 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 Ìå ôç âïÞèåéá ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò Öéëïóïößáò ï åãêÝöáëïò öèÜíåé ùò ôçí
øõ÷Þ êáé ôçò æçôÜ ôçí áðïêÜëõøç üëùí ôùí ãåãïíüôùí ôçò ðëÜóçò ôùí ü-
íôùí êáé ôùí êüóìùí, ôçò ðëáóôïõñãéêüôçôáò ôçò ÅíôåëÝ÷åéáò Þ ôçò Ïõóß-
áò ôçò ÆùÞò. Êüóìïé êáé ÅóùäéáóôÜóåéò, ìïñöïðïéÞóåéò êáé åêäçëþóåéò,
ãåííÞóåéò êáé èÜíáôïé. ¼íôá êáôþôåñá êáé üíôá áíþôåñá. Ôåëéêüò ðñïï-
ñéóìüò ç áíáêÜëõøç ôïõ Èåßïõ ¼íôïò...
Ìðïñåßò êáé óõ ößëå áíáãíþóôç íá Ýëèåéò êïíôÜ óôï Üäõôï êáé íá ãåõ-
èåßò, áí öõóéêÜ ôï Ý÷åéò åóùôåñéêÞ áíÜãêç, ôï ìÝëé - íÝêôáñ ôçò Åóùôåñé-
êÞò Öéëïóïößáò ðïõ âñßóêåôáé óôï Åóùôåñéêü Êëåéäß ðïõ äçìéïýñãçóå ï
ÄÜóêáëïò Íéêüëáïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò êáé ðïõ ðåñéÝ÷åé ÅîåéäéêåõìÝíïõò ÊëÜ-
äïõò Óðïõäþí ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý äé' áëëçëïãñáößáò, ìå áíÜëïãç èåùñç-
ôéêÞ êáé ðñáêôéêÞ êáôÜñôéóç.
ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÏ ÊËÅÉÄÉ
ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÖÉËÏÓÏÖÉÁ
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ ÓÅËÉÄÅÓ: 388
1ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÍÏÅÌÂÑÇÓ 1977: 1. ÔÏ ÍÏÇÌÁ ÔÇÓ ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇÓ
ÖÉËÏÓÏÖÉÁÓ. 2. ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ, Ç ÑÉÆÁ ÔÇÓ ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇÓ ÄÉÄÁÓÊÁ-
ËÉÁÓ. 3. Ç ÃÅÍÅÓÇ ÔÙÍ ÊÏÓÌÙÍ.
2ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÄÅÊÅÌÂÑÇÓ 1977: 4. ÔÉ ÄÉÁ×ÙÑÉÆÅÉ ÔÏ ÏÑÁÔÏ ÁÐÏ
ÔÏ ÁÏÑÁÔÏ. 5. ÔÏ ÓÕÓÔÇÌÁ ÔÙÍ ÁÊÔÉÍÏÂÏËÉÙÍ ÊÁÉ ÔÙÍ ÐÁË-
ÌÏÄÏÍÇÓÅÙÍ. 6. ÖÑÁÃÌÏÉ ÁÍÁÌÅÓÁ ÓÔÉÓ ÄÉÁÓÔÁÓÅÉÓ.
3ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÓÅÐÔÅÌÂÑÇÓ 1978: 7. ÏÉ ÄÉÁÕËÏÉ ÃÅÖÕÑÙÍÏÕÍ ÔÉÓ
ÄÉÁÓÔÁÓÅÉÓ. 8. Ç ÐÁËÌÏÄÏÍÇÓÇ ÔÙÍ ÐÁÍÔÙÍ, ÍÏÌÏÓ ÁÐÁÑÁ-
ÂÁÔÏÓ ÔÇÓ ÄÇÌÉÏÕÑÃÉÁÓ. 9. ÔÏ ÖÁÉÍÏÌÅÍÏ ÔÇÓ ÁËËÁÃÇÓ ÔÏÕ
ÖÕÓÉÊÏÕ ÖÏÑÅÁ ÔÏÕ ÁÍÈÑÙÐÏÕ, ÐÏÕ ËÅÃÅÔÁÉ ÁÐËÁ ÈÁÍÁÔÏÓ.
4ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÏÊÔÙÂÑÇÓ 1978: 10. ÅÓÙÄÉÁÓÔÁÓÅÉÓ ÊÁÉ ÊÁÔÁÓÔÁ-
ÓÇ ÔÇÓ ÕËÇÓ ÌÅ ÔÇÍ ÏÐÏÉÁ ÊÁÉ ÅÐÉÔÅËÏÕÍ ÔÏ ÈÅÉÏ ÅÑÃÏ
ÔÏÕÓ. 11. ÔÁ ÅÓÙÓÕÌÐÁÍÔÁ ÊÁÉ ÏÉ ÌÏÍÉÌÏÉ ÊÁÔÏÉÊÏÉ ÔÏÕÓ. 12.
ÐÏÉÏÔÉÊÇ ÅÎÅËÉÎÇ ÓÔÁ ÏÍÔÁ ÔÙÍ ÅÓÙÄÉÁÓÔÁÓÅÙÍ.
5ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÄÅÊÅÌÂÑÇÓ 1978: 13. ÐÙÓ ÓÕÍÔÇÑÏÕÍÔÁÉ ÊÁÉ Õ-
ÐÁÑ×ÏÕÍ ÏÉ ÊÁÔÏÉÊÏÉ ÔÙÍ ÅÓÙÄÉÁÓÔÁÓÅÙÍ ÓÕÌÖÙÍÁ ÌÅ ÔÇÍ
ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÖÉËÏÓÏÖÉÁ. 14. ÁÍÉÏÕÓÁ ÊÁÉ ÊÁÔÉÏÕÓÁ ÄÉÁÄÑÏÌÇ
ÔÙÍ ÏÍÔÙÍ. 15. ÌÏÑÖÏÐÏÉÇÓÇ ÔÑÉÓÄÉÁÓÔÁÔÉÊÇ ÊÁÉ ÁÉÔÉÁ ÔÇÓ
ÕÐÏÓÔÁÓÇÓ ÔÇÓ.
6ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÉÁÍÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ 1979: 16. Ó×ÅÓÅÉÓ ÊÁÉ ÓÕÍÁÖÅÉÁ ÔÏÕ
ÖÕÓÉÊÏÁÍÈÑÙÐÏÕ ÌÅ ÔÏÕÓ ÄÉÁÖÏÑÏÕÓ ÅÓÙÊÏÓÌÏÕÓ. 17. ÁÉÖ-
ÍÉÄÉÁ ÁÖÕÐÍÉÓÇ ÔÙÍ ÐÍÅÕÌÁÔÉÊÙÍ ÄÕÍÁÌÅÙÍ ÁÐÏ ÔÇ ÃÇ Á-
ÊÏÌÇ ÊÁÉ ÓÕËËÇØÇ ÁËÇÈÅÉÙÍ ÁÐÏ ÔÉÓ ÁÍÁÑÉÈÌÇÔÅÓ ÁÑ×É-
ÊÅÓ ÌÇÔÑÅÓ-ÐÑÙÔÅÓ ÉÄÅÅÓ (ÐÕÈÁÃÏÑÁÓ - ÐËÁÔÙÍÁÓ). 18. Ç
ÐÔÙÓÇ ÔÇÓ ØÕ×ÇÓ ÓÔÁ ÌÏÑÖÏÐÏÉÇÌÅÍÁ ÓÕÌÐÁÍÔÁ ÊÁÉ Ç Õ-
ÐÇÑÅÓÉÁ ÐÏÕ ÐÑÏÓÖÅÑÅÉ ÃÉÁ ÓÕËËÇØÇ ÔÇÓ ÅÌÐÅÉÑÉÁÓ, ÔÏ ÓÕ-
ÌÐÁÍ ÌÁÓ.
7ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÉÏÕËÇÓ 1979: 19. ÐÅÐÅÑÁÓÌÅÍÏ ´Ç ÁÐÅÉÑÏ ÊÁÉ
ÁÉÙÍÉÏ. 20. ÐÁÍÔÏÕ Ï ÐÁÍÔÅÐÏÐÔÇÓ ÏÖÈÁËÌÏÓ. 21. Ç ÐËÏ-
ÊÇ ÔÇÓ ÔÑÉÓÄÉÁÓÔÁÔÇÓ ÕËÇÓ.
8ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÉÏÕËÇÓ 1979: 22. ÓÕÌÐÁÍ, ÁÍÔÉÓÕÌÐÁÍ, ÕÐÅÑ-
ÓÕÌÐÁÍ. 23. ÄÉÁÔÅÔÁÃÌÅÍÏÉ ÍÏÌÏÉ ÐÏÕ ÊÁÔÅÕÈÕÍÏÕÍ ÔÇÍ
ÆÙÇ ÊÁÉ ÔÇÍ ÅÎÅËÉÎÇ ÓÔÏÍ ÏÑÁÔÏ ÊÁÉ ÁÏÑÁÔÏ ÊÏÓÌÏ. 24. Ï-
ÍÔÁ ÊÁÉ ÕÐÅÑÏÍÔÁ, ÄÇÌÉÏÕÑÃÇÌÁÔÁ ÔÇÓ ÐÁÍÅÎÅËÉÎÇÓ.
9ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÉÏÕËÇÓ 1979: 25. ÆÙÇ, ÄÇËÁÄÇ ÅÊÄÇËÙÓÇ ÓÔÏÕÓ
ÌÏÑÖÏÐÏÉÇÌÅÍÏÕÓ ÊÏÓÌÏÕÓ ÕÐÏ ÔÇÍ ÅÍÍÏÉÁ ÔÇÓ ÐÁË-
ÌÏÄÏÍÇÓÇÓ. 26. ÐÁÑÅËÈÏÍ, ÐÁÑÏÍ ÊÁÉ ÌÅËËÏÍ, Ï ÊÕÊËÏÓ
ÓÔÇÍ ÁÉÙÍÉÏÔÇÔÁ ÔÏÕ. 27. Ï ÅËÁ×ÉÓÔÏÓ ÓÐÉÍÈÇÑÁÓ ÐÍÅÕ-
ÌÁ, ÌÏÍÏÓ, ÌÅÃÉÓÔÏÓ, ÕÐÁÑÊÔÏÓ ÓÔÇÍ ÕÐÁÑÎÇ ÔÇÓ ÁÍÕ-
ÐÁÑÎÉÁÓ.
10ç ÔÑÉÁÄÁ, ÓÅÐÔÅÌÂÑÇÓ 1979: 28. ÕÐÁÑ×ÅÉ ÄÉÁÖÏÑÁ ÅÓÙÔÅ-
ÑÉÊÇÓ ÅÊÄÇËÙÓÇÓ, ÁÐÏ ÔÇ ÌÉÁ ÄÉÁÓÔÁÓÇ ÓÔÇÍ ÁËËÇ; 29. ÓÕÍ-
ÈÅÓÇ ÊÁÉ ÁÐÏÓÕÍÈÅÓÇ ÔÏÕ ÅÎÙÔÅÑÉÊÏÕ ÐÅÑÉÊÁËÕÌÌÁÔÏÓ,
ÊÁÈÅ ÔÕÐÏÕ ÕÐÏÓÔÁÓÇÓ, ÓÔÁ ÅÎÙÔÅÑÉÊÁ ÊÁÉ ÔÁ ÊÁÔÙÔÅÑÁ
ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÁ ÅÍÄÉÁÉÔÇÌÁÔÁ. 30. Ç ÐÑÙÔÇ ÁÉÔÉÁ ÔÏÕ ÐÁÍÔÏÓ.
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
nal Self.
By the assistance of the Esoteric Philosophy, the cerebral reaches the
soul and asks it the revelation of all the facts that happened in the creation
of the beings and the worlds, of the creation of the Perfection tendency or
the Life Substance. Worlds and Esoterical dimensions, figurations and ex-
pressions, births and deaths. Inferior beings and superior beings. The final
destination is the discovery of the Divine Being...
Also you, my friend reader, can come near the sanctuary and taste, if cer-
tainly you need it deeply, the honey-nectar of the Esoteric Philosophy that
exists in the Esoteric Key that Master Nikolaos A. Margioris has created and
that contains Specialized Branches of Studies in the Esoterism by corre-
spondence courses, in the analogous theoretical and practical formation.
ESOTERIC KEY
ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY
CONTENTS, 388 PAGES
1ST TRIAD, NOVEMBER 1977: 1. THE MEANING OF THE ESOTERIC
PHILOSOPHY. 2. OMAKOEIO, THE ROOT OF THE ESOTERIC PHI-
LOSOPHY. 3. THE GENESIS OF THE WORLDS.
2ND TRIAD, DECEMBER 1977: 4. WHAT DISTINGUISES THE VISI-
BLE FROM THE INVISIBLE. 5. THE RADIATIONS AND VIBRATIONS
SYSTEM. 6. THE BARRIERS AMONG THE DIMENSIONS.
3RD TRIAD, SEPTEMBER 1978: 7. THE CHANNELS RRIDGE THE DI-
MENSIONS. 8. VIBRATION OF EVERYTHING, AN INVIOLABLE CRE-
ATION LAW. 9. THE PHENOMENON OF THE CHANGE OF THE PHYS-
ICAL BEARER OF MAN THAT IS SIMPLY CALLED DEATH.
4TH TRIAD, OCTOBER 1978: 10. THE ESOTERIC DIMENSIONS AND
THE SUBSTANCE STATE FROM WHICH THEY ACCOMPLISH THEIR
DIVINE MISSION. 11. THE EXOTERRIC UNIVERSES AND THEIR PER-
MANENT INHABITANTS. 12. THE QUALITATIVE EVOLUTION OF THE
ESOTERIC DIMENSION BEINGS.
5TH TRIAD, DECEMBER 1978: 13. HOW THE INHABITANTS OF
THE ESOTERIC DIMENSIONS ARE MAINTAINED AND EXIST AC-
CORDING TO THE ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY. 14. ASCENDING AND
DESCENDING COURSE OF BEINGS. 15. THREE-DIMENSIONAL FOR-
MATION AND THE CAUSES OF ITS SUBSTANCE.
6TH TRIAD, JANUARY 1979: 16. RELATIONS AND CONNECTION
OF THE PHYSICAL MAN WITH THE VARIOUS ESOTERIC WORLDS.
17. A SUDDEN AWAKENING OF THE SPIRITUAL POWERS COMING
FROM EARTH, ALSO THE CONCEPRTION OF TRUTHS FROM THE IN-
NUMERABLE ORIGINAL MATRICES - ORIGINAL IDEAS (PYTHAGO-
RAS - PLATON). 18. THE SOUL FALL ON THE FORMED UNIVERSE
AND THE SERVICE OFFERED BY OUR UNIVERSE FOR THE CON-
CEPTION OF EXPERIENCE.
7TH TRIAD, JULY 1979: 19. PINITE OR INFINITE AND ETERNAL. 20.
THE.EVERYWHERE AND ALL-SEEING EYE. 21. THE THREE-SUB-
STANCE MATTER FABRIC.
8TH TRIAD, JULY 1979: 22. UNIVERSE, ANTI-UNIVERSE, HYPER-
UNIVERSE. 23. ORDERED LAWS GUIDING LIFE AND EVOLUTION
ON THE VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE WORLD. 24. BEINGS AND SUPER-
BEINGS, CREATURES OF THE HIGHER EVOLUTION.
9TH TRIAD, JULY 1979: 25. LIFE, THAT IS THE MANIFESTATION
ON THE FORMED WORLDS UNDER THE MEANING THE VIBRA-
TIONS. 26. PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE, THE CIRCLE IN ITS E-
TERNITY. 27. THE SLIGHTEST SPARK OF THE SPIRIT, ALONE,
GREATEST, EXISTING ON THE NON=EXISTENT EXISTINCE.
10TH TRIAD, SEPTEMBER 1979: 28. IS THERE ANY DIFFERENCE
OF ESOTERIC INDICATION BETWEEN THE ONE DIMENSION AND
THE OTHER? 29. COMPOSITION AND DECOMPOSITION OG THE
OUTER COVER OF EVERY KIND OF SUBSTANCE, IN THE EXOTERIC
AND THE ESOTERIC INTERIMS. 30. THE FIRST CAUSE OF EVERY-
THING.
78 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÓ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇÓ
ÌÅÔÁÖÕÓÉÊÏ ÐÅÑÉÏÄÉÊÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
Ï
ñüëïò ôïõ ìåôáöõóéêïý ðåñéïäéêïý Ïìáêïåßïõ åßíáé ðïëý ìåãÜëïò.
Ìå ïõóéþäç Üñèñá áðïêáëýðôåé ôçí ÌåôáöõóéêÞ ÁëÞèåéá,
åêëáúêåýïíôáò ôá ÅóùôåñéêÜ ÌõóôÞñéá ôçò Ðáíäçìéïõñãßáò.
Ôï ðåñéïäéêü Ïìáêïåßï Üñ÷éóå íá åêäßäåôáé áðü ôï öèéíüðùñï ôïõ 1977 óå
äßìçíç ðáñïõóßáóç êáé Ýöèáóå äß÷ùò äéáêïðÞ ìÝ÷ñé êáé ôï ôåý÷ïò áñ. 49
Éïõëßïõ - Áõãïýóôïõ 1985.
Áðü ôçí ðñþôç óôéãìÞ Ý÷åé ÷áñÜîåé ôï äéêü ôïõ äñüìï
êáé ìéá ãñáììÞ áðüëõôá áíåîÜñôçôç áðü ôïõò Üëëïõò
ôýðïõò ôçò ÌåôáöõóéêÞò ÷ùñßò íá áíôéãñÜöåé áðü
ðïõèåíÜ. Áêïëïõèåß ôï óýóôçìá (èåùñçôéêü êáé ðñáêôéêü)
ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ (1913-1993), åíüò
óýã÷ñïíïõ Ðõèáãüñá, ï ïðïßïò êáôáãñÜöåé ìå êÜèå
ëåðôïìÝñåéá üëåò ôéò äõíáôÝò ðôõ÷Ýò ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò
ðñáãìáôéêüôçôáò ìÝóá áðü ôá âáèéÜ - ôÝëåéá ìõóôéêéóôéêÜ
âéþìáôÜ ôïõ, ôá ïðïßá ôá ìåôáëëÜóóåé óå óõíåéäçôÞ -
äéáíïçôéêÞ ãíþóç, þóôå íá ãßíïíôáé íïçôÜ áðü ôïí êÜèå
åíäéáöåñüìåíï Üíèñùðï - áíáæçôçôÞ.
Ó' áõôÜ ôá ôåý÷ç ôïõ ðåñéïäéêïý áíáëýïíôáé ïé áðü
áñ÷áéïôÜôùí ÷ñüíùí ÌåôáöõóéêÝò èåùñßåò, ðïõ óêïðü
ôïõò åß÷áí íá äéáêñßíïõí ôçí Üëëç ðëåõñÜ ôçò öõóéêÞò ìáò
üøçò. Ç äéáöþôéóç áõôÞ áðü ìéá óåéñÜ ìõóôþí üðùò ãéá
ðáñÜäåéãìá Ðõèáãüñá, ÇñÜêëåéôï, ÐëÜôùíá, Áììþíéï
ÓáêêÜ, Ðëùôßíï, Áðïëëþíéï ÔõáíÝá êáé åêáôïíôÜäåò
Üëëïõò, óõíå÷ßæåôáé ìå ôï ðåñéïäéêü Ïìáêïåßï ðïõ
öéëïäïîåß åêëáúêåõìÝíá (ï Åóùôåñéóìüò ãéá üëïõò) êáé ìå áðëÞ ïñïëïãßá íá
ìåôáäþóåé ôéò Áéþíéåò ÁëÞèåéåò.
Ìéá ìéêñÞ áíáãêáßá åéóáãùãÞ óôçí ïõóßá ôïõ èÝìáôïò ðïõ ðñáãìáôåýåôáé
ôï ðåñéïäéêü áëëÜ êáé üëï ôï åí ãÝíåé Ýñãï ôïõ ÌáñãéùñÞ Ý÷åé ùò åîÞò:
Ðßóù áðü ôçí ýëç ôçí äéêÞ ìáò, ôïõ êüóìïõ ôïýôïõ, ðïõ åßíáé äéá÷õìÝíïò
ìÝóá óôç äüíçóç ôçò ôñéóäéÜóôáôçò áõôÞò ðåñéï÷Þò, õößóôáôáé Ýíáò
áóýëëçðôïò óå Ýêôáóç êüóìïò, ðïõ åöÜðôåôáé ôïõ äéêïý ìáò. Ï Íïõò ìáò
åßíáé êáôáóêåõáóìÝíïò êáôÜ ôÝôïéï ôñüðï, ðïõ ëåéôïõñãåß ìå ôïõò åñåèéóìïýò
ôïõ áéèåñéêïöõóéêïý ìáò êüóìïõ, ðïõ áíôáðïêñßíïíôáé áðüëõôá óôïí ìå
ðáñüìïéá ýëç êáôáóêåõáóìÝíï Íïõ ìáò. Ìéá óýìðñáîç ïëïöÜíåñç,
öõóéïëïãéêÞ êáé åîáñôÞóéìç ëáâáßíåé ÷þñá ìåôáîý áíèñþðéíïõ Íïõ êáé ôçò
ÌçôÝñáò öýóçò - ýëçò.
¼ìùò ðáñÜëëçëá ìÝóá óôï óþìá êáé ðÜíù áðü ôï Íïõ ìáò, õößóôáôáé ç
ÍüçóÞ ìáò, ðïõ äÝ÷åôáé ôïõò åóùôåñéêïýò åñåèéóìïýò, áõôïýò ðïõ ç øõ÷Þ
åêâÜëëåé.
ÁõôÞ åßíáé ç ðñáãìáôéêÞ õðüóôáóç ôïõ áíèñþðïõ
Ï Íïõò êáé ç ýëç ãýñù ìáò áðïôåëïýí ìéá áñìïíßá. ¾óôåñá ç Íüçóç ìå
ôçí øõ÷Þ öôéÜ÷íïõí ìéá Üëëç áñìïíßá øçëüôåñç áðü ôçí ðñþôç êáé ðéï
åõáßóèçôç. Ç ìéá áñìïíßá, ç êáôþôåñç, Íïõ êáé öõóéêïàëçò óõìðëçñþíåé ôçí
áíþôåñç ôçò øõ÷ïíüçóçò. ÁõôÝò ïé äõï ìåãÜëåò áñìïíßåò, ç öõóéêÞ êáé ç
øõ÷éêÞ êáôåõèýíïõí êáé äéïéêïýí ôï áíèñþðéíï ïí. Ðüôå ç ìßá êáé ðüôå ç Üëëç
äéïßêçóç - åðßäñáóç, áöÞíïõí ôéò åñåèéóôéêÝò ôïõò åíôõðþóåéò ìå ôéò ïðïßåò
ï êÜèå Üíèñùðïò æåé, óêÝðôåôáé êáé äñáóôçñéïðïéåßôáé.
Ï Ýîù êüóìïò Þ ç êáôþôåñç áñìïíßá åßíáé ôüóï ÷ñÞóéìç, üóï êáé ç Åóþôåñç
Þ øçëüôåñç áñìïíßá, åêåßíç ôçò Íüçóçò êáé ôçò øõ÷Þò. Ìáæß ïé äõï áñìïíßåò
áðïôåëïýí ôï ÌÝãá ËÜìäá ôïõ Ðõèáãüñá, ðïõ ç áíéïýóá ìå ôçí êáôéïýóá
ðëåõñÜ ðñÝðåé íá Ý÷ïõí ôï ßäéï ýøïò - ìÞêïò. Áí ç áíéïýóá õðåñóêåëßæåé,
ôüôå ç êáôéïýóá õðïóêåëßæåôáé êáé ìéá áíéóïññïðßá äéáöáßíåôáé óôï áíèñþðéíï
ïí. Áí üìùò ç øçëüôåñç ðëåõñÜ óôçñßæåôáé óôï áíÝâáóìÜ ôçò óå
åîéóïññïðçìÝíïõò óôáèìïýò, üðùò óôç ìïõóéêÞ êëßìáêá ôïõ Ðõèáãüñá, ôüôå
öüâïò áíéóïññïðßáò äåí õðÜñ÷åé.
Áíôßèåôá ç êáèïäéêÞ ðëåõñÜ, åêåßíç ôçò åîùóôñÝöåéáò, ç äåîéÜ ðëåõñÜ, ï
êýêëïò ýëçò - öýóçò - Íïõ, ç áéóèçóéáêÞ ëåéôïõñãßá ôçò óõíåßäçóçò -
åãñÞãïñóçò, ðñÝðåé íá åßíáé éó÷õñÞ ãéá íá óçêþóåé ôï âÜñïò ôçò áäåëöÞò
ôçò, ðïõ åíäå÷ïìÝíùò èá áêïõìðÞóåé ðÜíù óôçí åîùóôñåöéêÞ
ìïñöïåêäçëùôéêÞ ðñáãìáôéêüôçôá. Öéëïóïößåò êáé èåùñßåò âáóßóôçêáí ðÜíù
óôá äýï õðáñêôÜ, ìá áëëçëïáíôéêñïõüìåíá ñåýìáôá, ðïõ ìÝóá ìáò æïõí êáé
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
õðÜñ÷ïõí åßôå ôï èÝëïõìå åßôå äåí ôï èÝëïõìå. Åßìáóôå ëïéðüí äéóõðüóôáôá
üíôá. Ðíåõìáôïøõ÷éêÜ êáé ÖõóéêïíïçôéêÜ.
Íá ï ìåãÜëïò ñüëïò ôïõ ðåñéïäéêïý Ïìáêïåßïõ êáé ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò Ðáéäåßáò.
Ï áíáãíþóôçò ôïõ ðåñéïäéêïý ìáò Ýíôå÷íá ðëçñïöïñåßôáé ìå áíÜëïãåò
áíáëýóåéò ôùí Ìåôáöõóéêþí ðñïâëçìÜôùí, ôçí ýðáñîç ôïõ áôÝñìïíá
áïñÜôïõ êüóìïõ, ôçí äñáóôçñéüôçôá ôïõ ìåãÜëïõ
óêÝëïõò ôïõ Ðõèáãüñåéïõ ËÜìäá. Áõôü èá âïçèÞóåé ôïí
Üíèñùðï íá åîõøùèåß øõ÷ïðíåõìáôéêÜ, íá èÝóåé óå
ëåéôïõñãßá ôçí Íüçóç, ðïõ âñßóêåôáé ðéï ðÜíù áðü ôï
Íïõ, þóôå íá ëåéôïõñãÞóåé ìå ôçí øõ÷Þ, ðïõ ðåñéìÝíåé ôïí
ðñïóáíáôïëéóìü ôçò Íüçóçò.
Ôáõôü÷ñïíá, ï öõóéêüò ìáò Íïõò, Ýëêåôáé ðñïò ôçí
åðáöÞ Íüçóçò êáé Øõ÷Þò êáé äåí áðáó÷ïëåßôáé ìå
ôïõò ÷áìçëïýò åñåèéóìïýò ðïõ ïé áéóèÞóåéò êïõâáëïýí
óõíÝ÷åéá ìÝóá óôçí åðéèõìçôÞ ðåñéï÷Þ ôïõ. ÁõôÞ ç
åíäïóêüðçóç Íüçóçò êáé Íïõ, áðïôåëåß ôçí ðíåõìáôéêÞ
ôñïöÞ Þ ôçí ðíåõìáôéêÞ áíýøùóç êáé ðíåõìáôéêüôçôá
ôïõ óõíáíèñþðïõ. Áõôü ìðïñåß íá óõìâåß åßôå ìå ìéá
áíÜãíùóç åíüò óïöïý âéâëßïõ, åßôå ìå ôá ëüãéá åíüò
óïöïý áíèñþðïõ, åßôå áðü èñçóêåõôéêÞ ôåëåôÞ, åßôå áðü
áíÜãíùóç ìéáò ðåñéêïðÞò, ðïõ ëÝãåé ôçí áëÞèåéá ãéá ôçí
áéùíéüôçôá, ðïõ åßíáé ï Èåüò.
Ìðïñåß ëïéðüí ìå êáôÜëëçëá ÅóùôåñéêÜ ÌåôáöõóéêÜ
Üñèñá êáé ìå åóùöéëïóïößá, íá åñåèéóèåß ç Íüçóç ãéá íá
óôñáöåß ðñïò ôçí øõ÷Þ ðáñáóýñïíôáò ôïí Íïõ óå ìéá åóùóôñåöéêÞ óôñïöÞ,
óå ìéá åíäïóêüðçóç. Åßíáé åðßóçò äõíáôüí, ìéá öñÜóç ìå Ìåôáöõóéêü íüçìá,
íá ùèÞóåé ôïí ßäéï Íïõ íá äéáóêåöèåß ãéá ôï íüçìá êáé ãéá ôïí óôü÷ï ðïõ
ìðïñåß íá ðñïóöÝñåé ç öñÜóç, ç ðåñéêïðÞ, ç ðáñÜãñáöïò Þ ôï Üñèñï ðïõ
åéäéêÜ óõããñÜöåôáé ãéá íá åñåèßóåé ôïí åîùóôñåöÞ áíèñþðéíï Íïõ.
Ìéá ìåôáöõóéêÞ ðåñéãñáöÞ, êáôÜëëçëá äéáôõðùìÝíç, ìðïñåß íá áíïßîåé
ôïõò åóùôåñéêïýò êñïõíïýò ôùí ðíåõìáôéêþí ñåõóôþí ôçò äéêÞò ìáò ðçãÞò,
ôá ïðïßá óáí ðëçììõñßäá èá áñ÷ßóïõí íá åêâÜëëïíôáé ðñïò ôá Ýîù, ðñïò ôï
Íïõ, ìå áðïôÝëåóìá íá ôïí óõãêéíÞóïõí êáé íá ôïõ ðñïêáëÝóïõí ôï
åíäéáöÝñïí ôïõ, íá ðñïóÝîåé ôéò ðáñáóôÜóåéò ôçò ÍüçóÞò ôïõ, ðïõ äåí åßíáé
ôßðïôá Üëëï, ðáñÜ ôá êýìáôá õøçëüôåñùí óõ÷íïôÞôùí ðïõ ç øõ÷Þ åêâÜëëåé.
ÁõôÝò üìùò ïé óõëëáìâáíüìåíåò øõ÷éêÝò åêêñßóåéò, ïé áíþôåñåò äïíÞóåéò
ôïõ Ýóù åßíáé ìáò, ëåðôáßíïõí ôéò óêÝøåéò ìáò êáé ó÷çìáôßæïõí ìéá íÝá åðéèõìßá
ôïõ Íïõ, ðñïò áíåýñåóç ôïõ ôåëåéüôåñïõ. Áðïðíåõìáôþíåôáé óéãÜ óéãÜ ï
èíçôüò êáé âëÝðåé ôçí ðíåõìáôéêÞ ðëåõñÜ ôïõ êüóìïõ, ôï ßäéï ôï áüñáôï ãéá
ôïõò ðïëëïýò, ðïõ ãéá ôïí áíõøùèÝíôá ãßíåôáé ðëÝïí ïñáôü.
ÖõóéêÜ ðñïêýðôåé ôï åñþôçìá. Ðïéá ç ÷ñçóéìüôçôá óôçí êáèçìåñéíÞ æùÞ
ôïýôçò ôçò áíèñùðïàøùóçò; Ç áðÜíôçóç åßíáé üôé üôáí ï Üíèñùðïò
áíèñùðïûøþíåôáé ðÝñáí ôùí óõíçèéóìÝíùí óõíåéäçôþí ãíþóåþí ôïõ óôçí
õðåñâáôéêÞ ðçãÞ ôçò Èåßáò Óïößáò, ãßíåôáé ðéï Üíèñùðïò êáé ìÝóá ôïõ ãåííéÝôáé
ç áãÜðç ãéá üëá ôá äçìéïõñãÞìáôá Åêåßíïõ. Áêüìá Ýíáò åîõøùìÝíïò, âñßóêåé
íÝåò óêÝøåéò ìå ôéò ïðïßåò âïçèåß ôçí åîýøùóç ôùí ðëçóßïí ôïõ, ãíùóôþí êáé
áãíþóôùí. ÅðçñåÜæåé üëï ôï ãÝíïò ôùí áíèñþðùí, ãéá ôçí ôåëåéüôçôÜ ôïõò,
ôçí áãÜðç ôïõò, ôçí èõóßá ôïõò êáé ôï ó÷çìáôéóìü éäáíéêþí, ðïõ õøþíïõí ôçí
áíèñùðüôçôá ðñïò ôçí åõçìåñßá êáé åõôõ÷ßá, ðñïò ôïí áíáæçôïýìåíï ÷ñõóü
- ðíåõìáôéêü áéþíá, óôïí ïðïßï ï Éçóïýò åæÞôçóå íá ìáò ïäçãÞóåé.
Ôï ìéêñü áõôü ìåôáöõóéêü ðåñéïäéêü óáò áíáëýåé êáé óáò åîçãåß ìå ôïí äéêü
ôïõ ôñüðï ôá óõìâáßíïíôá ãåãïíüôá äßðëá óôï öõóéêü ìáò êüóìï, üðùò ôá
óõëëáìâÜíåé ï Íïõò ôùí Ìåôáöõóéêþí Öéëïóüöùí (ìõóôþí). Áðïôåßíåôáé êáé
óôéò åðôÜ êëÜóåéò ôùí áíèñþðéíùí üíôùí êáé óôéò åðôÜ äéáöïñåôéêÝò
óõ÷íüôçôåò ôïõ Íïõ ôïõò êáé ôïõò ðñïóöÝñåé êáé ðáñÝ÷åé êáôÜëëçëï
öéëïóïöéêü õëéêü, þóôå íá åñåèéóèåß ãéá ðíåõìáôéêÞ áíýøùóç ï Íïõò ôïõò.
Ìðïñåßò êáé óõ ößëå áíáãíþóôç íá Ýëèåéò êïíôÜ óôï Üäõôï êáé íá ãåõèåßò,
áí öõóéêÜ ôï Ý÷åéò åóùôåñéêÞ áíÜãêç, ôï ìÝëé - íÝêôáñ ôïõ ìåôáöõóéêïý
ðåñéïäéêïý Ïìáêïåßïõ ðïõ äçìéïýñãçóå ï ÄÜóêáëïò Íéêüëáïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò
êáé ðïõ ðåñéÝ÷åé âáèéÝò áíáëýóåéò ðÜñá ðïëëþí ðôõ÷þí ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý Þ
ôçò ÌåôáöõóéêÞò ìå áíÜëïãç èåùñçôéêÞ êáé ðñáêôéêÞ êáôÜñôéóç.
79 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
METAPHYSICAL OMAKOEIO JOURNAL
T
he role of the metaphysical Omakoio journal is very important. In
substantial articles, it reveals the Metaphysical Truth, populariz-
ing the Esoteric Mysteries of the Omnicreation.
The Omakoio journal began to be edited in the autumn of 1977, in a
bimonthly presentation, and reached unceasingly the issue no. 49, in Ju-
ly-August 1985.
From the first moment it traced its own route and a line absolutely
independent from the other types of the Metaphysics, without copying
anything. Master Nikolaos A. Margiori's, (1913-1993) theoretical and prac-
tical system follows. Margioris is a modern Pythagoras who describes in
detail all the strong folds of the Esoteric reality,
though his deep-perfect mysticist experiences, that
he changes into a conscious-intellectual knowledge,
so that they can be understood by every interested
man-searcher.
In these issues of the journal the most ancient Meta-
physical theories are analyzed, aiming to discern the
other side of our physical aspect. This enlightenment
by a series of initiates as, for example, Pythagoras, I-
raklitos, Platon, Ammonios Sakas, Plotinos, Apollonios
Tyaneas and hundreds of others, is continued with the
Omakoeio journal that has the ambition, in a popular-
ized way (the Esoterism for everybody) and by a sim-
ple terminology, to trasnmit the Eternal Truths.
A little necessary introduction in the substance of
the matter that the journal treats but also Margiori's
whole work in general, is as follows:
Behind our own matter, of this world that is dif-
fused in the vibration of this threedimensional area,
there is an inconceivable in ecstasy world that touches our own one.
Our Mind is constructed in such a way that functions by the irritations
of our etheric-physical world, that correspond absolutely to our - made
of the similar matter - Mind. A quite evident, normal and dependable
cooperation takes place between the human Mind and the Mother-na-
ture- matter.
However, at the same time, in the body and above our Mind, there is
our Intellect that accepts the esoteric irritations, which the soul rejects.
This is the man's real substance
The Mind and the matter around us constitute a harmony. Then, the
Intellect with the soul make another harmony, higher and more sensi-
tive that the first one. The one harmony, the lower one, of the Mind and
of the physic-matter, completes the other, the superior one of the psy-
chical semse. These two great harmonies, the physical and the psychi-
cal, direct and administer the human mind. Sometimes the one and some-
times the other administration-influence leave their irritating impres-
sions by which every man lives, thinks and gets activated.
The external world or the lower harmony is as much useful as the Es-
oteric or higher harmony, that one of the Intellect and of the soul. To-
gether the two harmonies compose Pythagora's Great Lamda, of which
the ascending and the descending side must have an equal height-length.
If the ascending side overrides, then the descending side is supplanted
and a lack of balance appears through the human being. But if the high-
er side relies on its ascension to well balanced stations, as in Pythagora's
musical scale, then there is no fear nor lack of well-balance.
On the contrary, the descending side, that one of the extroversy, the
right side, the circle of the matter- nature - Mind, the sensational func-
tion of the conscience-wakefulness, must be strong to lift the weight of
its sister, that will likely rely on the extroverting form-expressing reali-
ty. Philosophies and theories were based upon the two existent but mu-
tually opposing currents that live and exist within us, either we want it
or not. So, we are double-substantial beings. Spiritual and physical-in-
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
tellectual.
Here is the great role of the Omakoeio journal and of the Esoteric E-
ducation. The reader of our journal is informed ingeniously in the re-
spective analysises of the Metaphysical problems, of the existence of
the interminable invisible world, the activity of the great leg of the
Pythagorean Lamda. This will help man to be elevate phsically-spiritual-
ly, in order to put in function the Intellect that is above the Mind, and
to operate by the soul that waits the orientation of the Intellect.
At the same time, our physical Mind is attracted to the contact of the
Intellect and of the Soul and it is not occupied with the low irritations
that the sensations carry continually in its desirable
area. This introspection of the Intellect and of the
Mind constitutes the fellow-man's spiritual food or
the spiritual elevation and spirituality. This may hap-
pen either by reading a wise book, either by the words
of a wise man, or by a religious ceremony, or by read-
ing a passage that tells the truth about the eternity
that is God.
Therefore, the Intellect can, by the proper External
Metaphysical articles and by the esoteric philosophy,
be irritated and turn to the soul carrying the Mind to
an introvert turn, to an introspection. Also, it is pos-
sible for a phrase of a Metaphysical meaning to push
the same Mind to deliberate about the meaning and
the target that the written phrase, extract, passage
or article offer especially, to irritate the extrovert hu-
man Mind.
A metaphysical description, properly formulated,
can open the esoteric spouts of the spiritual fluids of
our own source, that as a high flood will start flowing outwards, to the
Mind, resulting to move it and to cause its interest, to watch the pre-
sentations of its Intelllect, that are nothing else than the waves of the
higher frequencies the soul puts out.
But these conceived psychical secretions, the superior vibrations of our
esoteric being, refine our thoughts and form a new desire of the Mind,
to the finding of the most perfect. The mortal being is gradually de-
spiritualized and sees the spiritual side of the world, equally invisible to
the many people that for the elevated, becomes visible now.
As a matter of fact, the following question arises: What is the useful-
ness of this human elevation in the daily life? The answer is that when
man is humanly elevated beyond his usual conscious knowledge in the
transgressive source of the Divine Wisdom, he becomes more human
and within him the love for all the creations of Him is born. Also, an el-
evated being finds new thoughts through which he helps in the eleva-
tion of his nearby persons, known and unknown. He affects the whole
race of the people, for their perfection, their love, their sacrifice and the
formation of ideals that elevate the humanity to the wellbeing and to
the happiness, to the searched gold-spiritual century, to which Jesus
Christ seeked to guide us.
This little metaphysical journal of yours analyzes and explaines to you
in its own way, the facts happening beside our physical world, as the Mind
of the Metaphysical Philosophers (initiates) conceives them. It applies to
all the seven classes of the human being and to the seven different fre-
quencies of their Mind and offers them the proper philosophical mate-
rial, so that their Mind may get irritated for the spiritual elevation.
Also you, my friend reader, can come near to the impenetrable sanc-
tuary and to taste, if you need it internally of course, the honey-nectar
of the metaphysical Omakoio journal that exists in the Esoteric Key which
Master Nikolaos A. Margioris created and that contains Specialized Branch-
es of Studies in the Esoterism by correspondence courses, by the anal-
ogous theoretical and practical formation.
80 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
ÄÉÌÇÍÉÁÉÏ ÌÅÔÁÖÕÓÉÊÏ ÐÅÑÉÏÄÉÊÏ "ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ"
ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÕ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇ (ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ ÁÈÇÍÙÍ)
ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 1ï, ÉÁÍÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ - ÖÅÂÑÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ 1977
"Íáé ìá ôïí áìåôÝñá øõ÷Ü ðáñáäüíôá Ôåôñáêôýí, ðáãÜí áåíÜïõ öýóåùò"
Ãéá ôïõò ößëïõò ôïõ Ïìáêïåßïõ, õðü ôïõ ê. Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ. Ï Ì Á Ê Ï Å É Ï, õðü ôïõ ê.
Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ. Ðþò îåêßíçóå ìéá éäÝá. ÐñïóðÜèåéá éäñýóåùò ÐáíåëëÞíéáò Óõíïìïóðïíäßáò
Ìåôáöõóéêþí Ïñãáíþóåùí. Ðõèáãüñåéá Áñéèìïóïößá, õðü ôïõ ê. Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ. ÍÝá
áðü ôá êáëïêáéñéíÜ ìáò ÓåìéíÜñéá. Ëåéôïõñãïýíôá ôìÞìáôá ôïõ Ïìáêïåßïõ. Ç ðíåõìáôéêÞ
ìáò êßíçóç. Âéâëßá êáé ïìéëßåò ôïõ óõããñáöÝá êáé ÄÜóêáëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ ÌáñãéùñÞ.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 2o, ÓÅÐÔÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ 1977
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. Ïé ÖéëéðéíÝæïé ÷åéñïèåñáðåõôÝò ôçò Ìáíßëá. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Èåñáðåõôéêç.
Ðõèáãüñáò. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá, ÍôÝâáò, ¢ããåëïé. ÅéóáãùãÞ óôçí ÅóùôåñéêÞ êáé
ÅîùôåñéêÞ ÁðïóõìâïëéêÞ.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 3o, ÍÏÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ 1977
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. Ôï Ìõóôéêü ôçò åðéôõ÷ßáò ôùí ÖéëéðéíÝæùí ÷åéñïèåñáðåõôþí ôçò
Ìáíßëá. Ï Åðéóôçìïíéêüò Ðíåõìáôéóìüò êáé ç áëÞèåéá ôïõ. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá, ïé
ðåðôùêüôåò ¢ããåëïé. Ôï öñÜãìá ôïõ Êáëïý. Ç Öéëïóïößá ôçò Ãéüãêá. Ãéüãêá, Èåñáðåßá
êáé ðáéäß. Áíáêïßíùóç. ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÁðïóõìâïëéêÞ. Ôï áñ÷áéüôáôï óýìâïëï ôïõ Óôáõñïý.
Äñáâßäåò ïé ðñïÝëëçíåò ôïõ Áéãáßïõ.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 4o, ÉÁÍÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ 1978
Áíáêïßíùóç. Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. Ôï Åóùôåñéêü Áßôéï ôçò áóèÝíåéáò, ðïõ ðñïóðáèïýí
íá êáôáðïëåìÞóïõí ïé ÖéëéðéíÝæïé ÷åéñïèåñáðåõôÝò. Ôï ¢óôñï ôçò ÂçèëåÝì. Ç ¢ãéá Íý÷ôá.
Ç ÃÝííçóç ôïõ ×ñéóôïý. Ôï Ýèéìï ôçò Âáóéëüðéôáò.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 5o, ÌÁÑÔÉÏÓ - ÁÐÑÉËÉÏÓ 1978
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. Äåí õðÜñ÷åé èÜíáôïò, ÷áñåßôå ôçí áèáíáóßá. Ï Åóùôåñéóìüò óôçí
ïéêïãÝíåéá. Ãéüãêá. Ï Èýìïò ÁäÝíáò êáé ôï ìõóôÞñéü ôïõ. ÊÝíôáõñïé, ôá ðéï ðåñßåñãá
ìõèïëïãéêÜ üíôá ôùí ÅëëÞíùí.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 6o, ÌÁÚÏÓ - ÉÏÕÍÉÏÓ 1978
Ðñüóêëçóç. Ôï ×ñéóôéêü Óôïé÷åßï. Ï Åóùôåñéóìüò êáé ç ïéêïãÝíåéá. Ôï áëçèéíü óõíáßóèçìá
õðü ôï ðñßóìá ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý. Ç ðéï ðáìðÜëáéá ãéïñôÞ ôçò áíèñùðüôçôáò åßíáé ôï
ÐÜó÷á. Ï Ìõóôéêüò Äåßðíïò. ×áëÜñùóç - Ãéüãêá Íßíôñá. Ôá êüêêéíá áõãÜ ôïõ ÐÜó÷á.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 7o, ÉÏÕËÉÏÓ - ÁÕÃÏÕÓÔÏÓ 1978
×áëÜñùóç - Ãéüãêá Íßíôñá. Âñõêüëáêåò êáé ÖáíôÜóìáôá. Áðü ôá ìõóôéêÜ ôïõ êüóìïõ
ìáò ¾ëç êáé Áíôéàëç. Ç ìýçóç óôá áñ÷áéüôáôá ìõóôÞñéá. ÇñáêëÞò. Ôé óõìâïëßæïõí ïé
äþäåêá Üèëïé ôïõ ÇñáêëÞ êáé éäéáßôåñá ï ËÝïíôáò ôçò ÍåìÝáò.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 8o, ÓÅÐÔÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ - ÏÊÔÙÂÑÉÏÓ 1978
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. Áóôñïëïãßá - Áóôñïóïößá: Ï Íüìïò ôùí Âïëö - Ôßôéóïò - Ìðüíôå
êáé ç áíõðáêïÞ ôïõ Ðëïýôùíá. ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ: ÁèçíÜ, ÐåñóÝáò êáé
ìéêñïïñãáíéóìïß. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá: Åíüñáóç êáé Äéüñáóç. Åðéóôçìïíéêüò
Ðíåõìáôéóìüò: Ç ÁëÞèåéá ðÜíù óôïí ðíåõìáôéóìü. Áóôñïíïìßá: Åßìáóôå ìüíïé ìÝóá óôï
Óýìðáí; Ôï ìõóôÞñéï ôïõ êüóìïõ ìáò. Ãéüãêá: Ôï ìõóôÞñéï ôçò áíáðíïÞò.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 9o, ÍÏÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ - ÄÅÊÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ 1978
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá: Ãéá ôïõò áñ÷Üñéïõò. ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ:
Ïé ÍåêñïöÜíåéåò. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá: Íüìéìåò êáé Üíïìåò óáñêþóåéò. Åðéóôçìïíéêüò
Ðíåõìáôéóìüò. ESP êáé PK. Ðáñ' áßóèçóç áíôßëçøç êáé øõ÷ïêéíçôéêüôçôá. Õðíùôéóìüò -
Ïñèïøõ÷éóìüò: Ôé åßíáé ç ãïçôåßá. Ãéüãêá: ÁíáðíïÞ, ðñáêôéêÞ åöáñìïãÞ. Õðíùôéóìüò -
Ïñèïøõ÷éóìüò. Õðíïâáóßá.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 10o, ÉÁÍÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ - ÖÅÂÑÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ 1979
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. Ãéá ôïõò áñ÷Üñéïõò. Ôï ×ñéóôïõãåííéÜôéêï äÝíôñï. Ðþò ãåííéÝôáé
Ýíáò Ìýóôçò. ÕðÜñ÷åé áëçèéíÞ áðïëýôñùóç; Ç ëïãéêÞ êáé ï... Åóùôåñéóìüò. Ï óðáóìÝíïò
êáèñÝðôçò. Ç áíõðáñîßá ôçò ýðáñîçò êáôÜ ôï Âïýääá.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 11o, ÌÁÑÔÉÏÓ - ÁÐÑÉËÉÏÓ 1979
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. Ãéá ôïõò áñ÷Üñéïõò: ÈÜíáôïò Þ áíá÷þñçóç; ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá:
Ï Åõáããåëéóìüò ôçò Èåïôüêïõ. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Ðáñáøõ÷ïëïãßá: ÐñïåêâïëÞ êáé ðñïÝêôáóç
óêÝøåùí êáé éäåþí áðü ôï óýìðáí ìáò Ýëëïãùí üíôùí. ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ: Óýöéëç
- ðñïúüí ôçò óðåéñï÷Ýôçò. Áðïóõìâïëéóìüò: ÐñïìçèÝáò Äåóìþôçò. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá:
ÕðÜñ÷åé öüâïò áöáíéóìïý ôïõ áíèñþðïõ. Ãéüãêá êáé Äéáëïãéóìüò. Ðáñáøõ÷ïëïãßá êáé
Åóùôåñéóìüò.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 12o, ÌÁÚÏÓ - ÉÏÕÍÉÏÓ 1979
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. Ôï ìÝãá Üããåëìá ôïõ Ðáýëïõ. Ãéá ôïõò áñ÷Üñéïõò. Ç ÅóùôåñéêÞ
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
BIMONTHLY METAPHYSICAL MAGAZINE "ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ"
NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS (ÏMAKOIO OF ATHENS)
CONTENTS
1ST ISSUE, JANUARY-FEBRUARY 1977
"Yes, for the Tetraktys delivered to our soul by the eternal nature"
1. For the friends of OMAKOEIO, by N. Margioris. 2. O M A K O E I O , by Mr. N. Mar-
gioris. 3. How idea started. 4. An effort to establish the Panhellenic Confederation
of Metaphysical Organizations. 5. Pythagorean Arithmosophy, by mr. N. Margioris. 6.
News from our summer Seminars. 7. Operating departments of OMAKOEIO. 8. Our spir-
itual movement. 9. Books and speeches by writer and master Nikolaos Margioris.
SEPTEMBER '77 - ISSUE NO. 2
1. Open Letter. 2. The secret of the Philipinese Chirotherapeutic's success of Mani-
la. 3. The Scientific Spiritualism and its truth. 4. Esoteric Philosophy, the fallen An-
gels. 5. The barrier of Good. 6. The Yoga philosophy. 7. Yoga, therapy and child. 8.
Announcement. 9. Esoteric desymbolism, the very ancient symbol of the Cross. 10.
Dravidians, the Pre-Greeks of the Aegean sea.
NOVEMBER '77 - ISSUE NO. 3
1. Open Letter. 2. The secret of the Philipinese Chirotherapeutic's success of Mani-
la. 3. The Scientific Spiritualism and its truth. 4. Esoteric Philosophy, the fallen An-
gels. 5. The barrier of Good. 6. The Yoga philosophy. 7. Yoga, therapy and child. 8.
Announcement. 9. Esoteric desymbolism, the very ancient symbol of the Cross. 10.
Dravidians, the Pre-Greeks of the Aegean sea.
JANUARY '78 - ISSUE NO. 4
1. Announcement. 2. Open Letter. 3. The internal cause of asthenia against which
the Philipinese chirotherapists try to fight. 4. The Star of Bethleem. 5. Christ's Birth.
7. The new year's cake custom.
MARCH - APRIL '78 - ISSUE NO. 5
1. Open letter page. 2. There is no death, enjoy immortality. 3. Esoterism in fam-
ily. 4. Yoga. 5. The thymus gland and its mystery. 6. Centavrians, the most curious
mythological beings of Greeks.
MAY - JUNE '78 - ISSUE NO. 6
1. Invitation. 2. The Christic Element. 3. Esoterism and family. 4. The real
sentiment under the prism of esoterism. 5. The most ancient holiday in hu-
manity is Easter. 6. The Lord's Supper. 7. Relaxation - YOGA NIDRA. 8. The red
eggs of Easter.
JULY - AUGUST '78 - ISSUE NO. 7
1. Relaxation YOGA - NIDRA. 2. Vampires and Ghosts. 3. From the secrets of our
world Matter and antimatter. 4. Initiation in the very ancient mysteries. 5. Hercules.
What Hercule's twelve exploits and mainly the Lion of Nemea symbolize.
SEPTEMBER - OCTOBER '78 - ISSUE NO. 8
Open letter. ASTROLOGY-ASTROSOPHY: Volf's Law - Titius Bonte and Pluto's dis-
obedience. ESOTERIC THERAPEUTICS: Minerva, Perseus and microorganisms. ESO-
TERIC PHILOSOPHY: Insight and farsight. SCIENTIFIC SPIRITUALISM: The Truth about
Spiritualism. ASTRONOM: Are we Alone in the Universe? Our world mystery. YOGA:
The Breath mystery.
NOVEMBER - DECEMBER '78 - ISSUE NO. 9
Open letter. ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY: For the beginners. ESOTERIC THERAPEUTICS:
Apparent deaths. ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY: Lawful and unlawful body formations. SCI-
ENTIFIC SPIRITUALISM: Conception and psycho cineticism by senses.HYPNOTISM - OR-
THOPSYCHISM: What is Charm. YOGA, Breath: Practical application. HYPNOTISM - OR-
THOPSYCHISM: Somnambulism.
JANUARY - FEBRUARY 1979 - ISSUE NO. 10
Open letter. For the beginners. The Christmas tree. How an Initiate is creted. Is there
real delivery? Logic and Esoterism. The broken mirror. The inexistence of the exis-
tence according to Buddha.
MARCH - APRIL 1979 - ISSUE NO. 11
Open letter. FOR THE BEGINNERS. Death or departure? ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY: The
Evangelism of the Virgin Mary. ESOTERIC PARAPSYCHOLOGY: Projection and pro-
longation of thought and ideas from our universe of reasonable beings. ESO-
TERIC THERAPEUTICS: Syphilis - Product of Spirochate. DESYMBOLISM: Prometheus
Prisoner. ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY: Is there any fear of man's vanishing? YOGA AND
MEDITATION. PARAPSYCHOLOGY AND ESOTERISM.
81 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ. ÉóôïñéêïèåïëïãéêÝò ìåëÝôåò. Ç ãéïñôÞ ôïõ ÐÜó÷á. ÅóùôåñéêÞ ×ñéóôéáíéêÞ:
Ç ÁíÜóôáóç ôïõ ×ñéóôïý. ÌõóôéêéóôéêÜ âéþìáôá. Ç äýíáìç ôçò Ðñïóåõ÷Þò. ÐÝñá áðü ôá
ÖõóéêÜ. Ç äýíáìç ôçò Èåßáò Åõ÷áñéóôßáò. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá: Áñ÷áßá êáé íÝá ÌõóôÞñéá.
Åëåýèåñåò óêÝøåéò. Ç Óôáýñùóç.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 13o, ÉÏÕÍÉÏÓ - ÉÏÕËÉÏÓ 1979
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. Ç áíáíÝùóç ôçò åôÞóéáò óõíäñïìÞò óáò. Ãéá ôïõò áñ÷Üñéïõò: Ç æùÞ
åäþ êáé óôïí áüñáôï êüóìï. Ìåôáøõ÷éêÞ: Åðéóôçìïíéêüò Ðíåõìáôéóìüò Þ Ìåôáøõ÷éêÞ
ÅðéóôÞìç. Ðñïêáôáêëõóìéáßïé êáé ìåôáêáôáêëõóìéáßïé ðïëéôéóìïß. ÊñÞôç: Ôï öõôþñéï ôïõ
åõñùðáúêïý ðïëéôéóìïý. Áðïóõìâïëéóìüò: Ôå÷íéêÜ êáé öõóéêÜ óýìâïëá ôçò äéÜóôáóÞò
ìáò. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá: Ôé åßíáé ïé ÄéäÜóêáëïé ôçò Óïößáò; ÌõóôéêéóôéêÜ Âéþìáôá. Ç
ðáëáéüôçôá ôçò øõ÷Þò. Ï Íüìïò ôçò ÁíôáðïäïôéêÞò Äéêáéïóýíçò. ÊõíçãåìÝíåò øõ÷Ýò.
Áðïêñõöéóìüò. Ïé äÝóìéïé ôçò ãçò.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 14o, ÓÅÐÔÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ - ÏÊÔÙÂÑÉÏÓ 1979
Ãéá ôïõò áñ÷Üñéïõò: ÄéáöïñÜ áíÜìåóá óôçí åóùôåñéêÞ êáé åîùôåñéêÞ ðáéäåßá êáé
ìüñöùóç. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá: Ôé åßíáé ï Åóùôåñéóìüò. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá: Ðßêñåò,
âÜóáíá, ðüíïé êáé êáçìïß áðïôåëïýí ôï ìÝóï ôïõ óêïðïý. Áðïóõìâïëéóìüò.
ÅóùôåñéêÞ ×ñéóôéáíéêÞ: Ôï ÌõóôÞñéï ôçò Èåßáò Åõ÷áñéóôßáò - Êïéíùíßáò. Ðñïêáôáêëõóìéáßïé
Ðïëéôéóìïß: Ëåìïýñéïé, ïé ðñüãïíïé ôùí Áôëáíôßíùí. Åðéóôçìïíéêüò Ðíåõìáôéóìüò Þ
Ðáñáøõ÷ïëïãßá; Åêóùìáôþóåéò Þ óùìáôïêáôáëçøßåò;
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 15o, ÍÏÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ - ÄÅÊÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ 1979
Ç ÓÜñêùóç ôïõ Èåßïõ Ëüãïõ. Ãéá ôïõò áñ÷Üñéïõò: Ãéáôß ðåèáßíïõìå. ÅóùôåñéêÞ
Öéëïóïößá: Ç óõíÜíôçóç ôùí ïìïßùí êáé ôùí áíïìïßùí øõ÷þí óôç öõóéêÞ äéÜóôáóÞ
ìáò. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Áóôñïëïãßá êáé Áóôñïóïößá: ÇëéïóôÜóéá êáé Éóçìåñßåò. ÌõóôéêéóôéêÜ
âéþìáôá: Ç ìåãÜëç ÓõíÜíôçóç. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá. ÁâáôÜñ êáé Ìá÷áâáôÜñ. Ïé
ÁðåóôáëìÝíïé ôïõ Èåïý ÄéäÜóêáëïé êáé Áñ÷éäéäÜóêáëïé.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 16o, ÉÁÍÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ - ÖÅÂÑÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ 1980
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. Áöýðíéóç. Ãéá ôïõò áñ÷Üñéïõò. Ï Åóùôåñéóìüò óôçí ïéêïãÝíåéá.
ÊáñìéêÝò óáñêþóåéò óôçí ßäéá ïéêïãÝíåéá. Ðñïêáôáêëõóìéáßïé Ðïëéôéóìïß. Ç Öéëïóïößá ôçò
Ãéüãêá. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá: ÐñïèáíÜôéåò êáé ìåôáèáíÜôéåò áíèñùðïøõ÷éêÝò ðåñéðÝôåéåò.
ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ. Øõ÷éêÝò öïâßåò. Ãéüãêá: ÓÜêñáò. Ïé åðôÜ ôñï÷ïß. Áóôñïëïãßá -
Áóôñïóïößá: Ç áíõðáñîßá - ýðáñîç ôïõ ðëáíÞôç ÅÑÁÔÙ Þ ÁÓÔÑÏÅÉÄÅÉÓ.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 17o, ÌÁÑÔÉÏÓ - ÁÐÑÉËÉÏÓ 1980
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. ÁíÝóðåñï êáé ÁíáóôÜóéìï Öùò. Ãéá ôïõò áñ÷Üñéïõò: ×ñéóôéáíéêÞ
ÅóùôåñéêÞ. Ç Äåýôåñç Ðáñïõóßá. Ìõóôéêéóìüò: ÁíáóôåíÜñéá êáé ÁíáóôåíÜñçäåò.
Ðõñïâáóßá êáé ÁêáÀá. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá: ¸ëåíá Ðåôñüâíá ÌðëáâÜôóêõ. Ç æùÞ êáé ôï
Ýñãï ôçò. Áðïêñõöéóìüò: ÐñïûðÜñîåéò - ðñïâéïôÝò - ðñïóáñêþóåéò - ìåôåíóáñêþóåéò
êáé ìåôáìøõ÷þóåéò. ÉíäéêÞ Öéëïóïößá: Samkhya - Áñßèìçóç - ÊáôÜôáîç.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 18o, ÌÁÚÏÓ - ÉÏÕÍÉÏÓ 1980
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. Ãéá ôïõò áñ÷Üñéïõò: Ôï áíþôåñï êáé ôï êáôþôåñï åãþ. ÅóùôåñéêÞ
Öéëïóïößá: Ìåèüäåõóç åêðáßäåõóçò ôùí áíèñùðïøõ÷þí. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá:
ÐñïâéïôÝò êáé ðñïóáñêþóåéò. ÉíäéêÞ Öéëïóïößá: Samkhya - Áñßèìçóç - ÊáôÜôáîç.
Áóôñïëïãßá - Áóôñïóïößá: Ç ÅëëçíéêÞ óõììåôï÷Þ óôéò áóôñïöõóéêÝò Ýñåõíåò óôçí
åîùôåñéêÞ ìïñöÞ ôïõò. Ôï Èñçóêåõôéêü Óõíáßóèçìá. Áñ÷áéïëïãéêÝò ÌåëÝôåò: Ï Ìéíùéêüò
Ðïëéôéóìüò. Áðßèáíåò íåïèåùñßåò.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 19o, ÉÏÕËÉÏÓ - ÁÕÃÏÕÓÔÏÓ 1980
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. Ãéá ôïõò áñ÷Üñéïõò: Ç Ýêôç áßóèçóç Þ ôï Ôñßôï ÌÜôé. Áðïêñõöéóìüò:
¢ãéïò Ãåñìáíüò Þ êüìçò Ñïêüôóêõ Þ Óáéí Æåñìáßí. Öáéíüìåíá ðáñáøõ÷ïëïãéêÜ Þ
ðíåõìáôéóôéêÜ; Ðáñ' áßóèçóç áíôßëçøç Þ ðíåõìáôïêáôáëçøßåò; Áñ÷áéïëïãéêÝò ìåëÝôåò:
Ï Ìéíùéêüò Ðïëéôéóìüò. Áðßèáíåò íåïèåùñßåò. Ãéüãêá: Ç Ãéüãêá ïäüò áðïðíåõìÜôùóçò.
Ðáñáøõ÷ïëïãßá: ÄéÜìåóá Þ ÌÝíôéïõì. Øõ÷éóìüò Þ Ðíåõìáôéóìüò. Ðïéá åßíáé ç áëÞèåéá
êáé ðïéï ôï øÝìá.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 20o, ÓÅÐÔÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ - ÏÊÔÙÂÑÉÏÓ 1980
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. Ï Íüìïò ôïõ ÊÜñìá. Ãéá ôïõò áñ÷Üñéïõò: ÁôïìéêÝò êáé ÏìáäéêÝò
øõ÷Ýò. Ðáñáøõ÷ïëïãßá: Ôçëåãíùóßá. Áðïêáëýøåéò, åìðíåýóåéò, åöåõñÝóåéò êáé
áíáêáëýøåéò. Åêóôáóéáêü Êýêëùìá. ÉíäéêÞ Öéëïóïößá: Ç èåùñßá ôïõ Áðüëõôïõ Êåíïý.
Madhyamika Sutra. Ãéüãêá: Ç Ãéüãêá ðçãÞ áõôÜñêåéáò. Áðïêñõöéóìüò: Ìåóáéùíéêïß Ìýóôåò.
ÁëÝîáíäñïò Êáëëéüóôñï. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá: Ç æùÞ ìáò óôïõò áóôñéêïýò êüóìïõò Þ
óôç äùäåêÜôç äéÜóôáóç. Ðõèáãïñéóìüò: Ôï ÌõóôÞñéï ôùí Ðõèáãïñåßùí ðñïññÞóåùí.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 21, ÍÏÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ - ÄÅÊÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ 1980
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. Ç ×ñéóôïõãåííéÜôéêç Áðïëýôñùóç. Ãéá ôïõò áñ÷Üñéïõò.
ÅóùôåñéêÞ ×ñéóôéáíéêÞ. Ç ÓÜñêùóç ôïõ Èåßïõ Ëüãïõ. Ï Áðïêñõöéóìüò êáé ôá ÌõóôÞñéÜ
ôïõ. Ôï áðáãïñåõìÝíï ôùí ðñïâéïôþí. Áñéèìïóïößá: Ïé áñéèìïß ôïõ Ðõèáãüñá. Ãéüãêá:
Åóùôåñéóìüò êáé Ãéüãêá. Ðïéá ç óùóôÞ ÷ñïíïëïãßá ôçò ãÝííçóçò ôïõ Êõñßïõ.
ÌõóôéêéóôéêÜ ×ñéóôïýãåííá: Ðñï÷ñéóôéáíéêÝò, ×ñéóôéáíéêÝò êáé Ìåôá÷ñéóôéáíéêÝò
Áðïêáëýøåéò. Ìõóôéêéóìüò.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 22, ÉÁÍÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ - ÖÅÂÑÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ 1981
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. ÁãÜðç êáé óõã÷þñåóç åíÜíôéá óôï ìßóïò êáé åêäßêçóç. Ãéá ôïõò
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
MAY - JUNE 1979 - ISSUE NO. 12
OPEN LETTER: The great message of Pavlos. FOR THE BEGINNERS: Esoteric Ther-
apeutics. HISTORICAL-THEOLOGICAL:. Easter Holiday. ESOTERIC CHRISTIANICS:
Christ's Resurrection. MYSTICISTIC EXPERIENCES: The Power of Prayer. BEYOND
THE NATURAL: The Power of the Divine Thanks. ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY: Ancient and
New Mysteries. FREE THOUGHTS: The Crucifixion.
JULY - AUGUST 1979 - ISSUE NO. 13
OPEN LETTER: The renewal of the annual subscription. FOR THE BEGINNERS: Life
here and in the invisible world. METAPSYCHICS: Scientific spiritualism or meta-
physical science. ANTEDILUVIAN AND POSTDILUVIAN CIVILIZATIONS. Crete: The nurs-
ery of the european civilization. DESYMBOLISM: Technical and physical symbols of
our dimension. ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY: What are the wisdom masters? MYSTICIST
EXPERIENCES: The soul oldness. THE LAW OF THE RETRIBUTIVE JUSTICE: Chased
souls. OCCULTISM: The prisoners of earth.
SEPTEMBER - OCTOBER 1979 - ISSUE NO. 14
FOR THE BEGINNERS: Difference between the interior and the exterior educa-
tion. ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY: What is Esoterism. ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY: Sorrows,
sufferings, pains and torments constitute the mean of the aim. DESYMBOLISM.
CHRISTIANIC ESOTERIC: The mystery of the Divine Thanks-Communion. ANTE-
DILUVIAN CIVILIZATIONS: Lemurians, the ancestors of Atlantines. SCIENTIFIC SPIR-
ITUALISM 0R PARAPSYCHOLOGY? Decorporations of body catalepsies.
NOVEMBER - DECEMBER 1979 - ISSUE NO. 15
THE INCARNATION OF THE DIVINE WORD. FOR THE BEGINNERS: Why we die. E-
SOTERIC PHILOSOPHY: The meeting of the similar and of the dissimilar souls in our
physical dimension. ESOTERIC ASTROLOGY AND ASTROSOPHY: Solstices and equa-
tions. MYSTICISTIC EXPERIENCES: The Great Meeting. ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY: A-
VATAR AND MAHAVATAR: The Godsent Masters and Chief Masters.
JANUARY - FEBRUARY 1980 - ISSUE NO. 16
OPEN LETTER: Awakening. FOR THE BEGINNERS. ESOTERISM IN FAMILY: Karmic
body formations in the same family. ANTEDILUVIAN CIVILIZATIONS: The Yoga Phi-
losophy. ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY: Prehumous and posthumous man soul adven-
tures. ESOTERIC THERAPEUTICS: Soul phobias. YOGA: Sakras. the seven wheels.
ASTROLOGY-ASTROSOPHY: The non-existence - existence of ERATO or ASTROIDIS
planet.
MARCH - APRIL 1980 - ISSUE NO. 17
Eternal and resurrectional light. FOR THE BEGINNERS. CHRISTIANIC ESOTERISM:
The Day of Judgement. MYSTICISM: Anastenaria and Anastenarides. Firing and
Not burning. ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY: Elena Petrovna Blavatsky. Her life and her
work. OCCULTISM: Pre-existences - prelivers - pre-incarnations - reincarnations and
metempsychosises. INDIAN PHILOSOPHY: SAMKHYA - Counting - Classification.
MAY - JUNE 1980 - ISSUE NO. 18
OPEN LETTER, FOR THE BEGINNERS. The superior and the inferior ego. ESO-
TERIC PHILOSOPHY. Handling and training of the human souls formations. ESO-
TERIC PHILOSOPHY. Prelivers and Pre-body formations. INDIAN PHILOSOPHY:
SAMKHYA - Counting - Classification. ASTROLOGY- ASTROSOPHY: The greek partic-
ipation in the astrophysic searches in their external form. The Religious Sentiment.
ARCHEOLOGICAL STUDIES: The Minoic Civilization. Improbable Neotheories.
JULY - AUGUST 1980 - ISSUE NO. 19
OPEN LETTER. FOR THE BEGINNERS. The sixth sense or the Third Eye. OC-
CULTISM: Saint Gernan or count Rokotsky or Saint-Zermain
PARAPSHYCOLOGICAL PHENOMENA HALLUCINATION, PERCEPTIO. N OR SPIRIT
CATALEPSIES? ARCHEOLOGICAL STUDIES: "The Minoic Civilization, Improbable
Neotheories. YOGA: Yoga as a despiritua - lization way. PARAPSYCHOLOGY IN-
TERMEDIATES OR MEDIUMS: PSYCHISM OR SPIRITUALISM: "What is truth and what
is lie?".
SEPTEMBER - OCTOBER 1980 - ISSUE NO. 20
OPEN LETTER: The Law of Karma. FOR THE BEGINNERS: Individual and collec-
tive souls. PARAPSYCHOLOGY: "TELEGNOSIA". Revelations, inspirations, inven-
tions and discoveries. Ecstatic RING. INDIAN PHILOSOPHY: The Theory of the ab-
solute void. Madhiamika Sutra. YOGA: Yoga, a sufficiency source. OCCULTISM:
Middle Age Mysts. Alexandros Kalliostro. ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY: Our life in the
stellar worlds or in the twelfth dimension. PYTHAGORISM: The mystery of the
Pythagorean predictions.
NOVEMBER - DECEMBER 1980 - ISSUE NO. 21
OPEN LETTER: The Christmas Deliverance. FOR THE BEGINNER: Esoteric Chris-
tianics. The incarnation of the Divine Word. OCCULTISM AND ITS MYSTERIES: The
forbidden of the Prelivers. ARITHMOSOPHY: Pythagora's numbers. YOGA: Eso-
terism and Yoga. WHAT IS THE RGHT CHRONOLOGY OF CHRIST'S BIRTH. MYSTICISTIC
82 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
áñ÷Üñéïõò: Ôï êáñìéêü äñÜìá ôïõ áíèñþðïõ óôï ðÝñáóìÜ ôïõ áðü ôç ãç. ÅóùôåñéêÞ
Öéëïóïößá: Ç Áóôñïóïößá ôùí Ìõóôþí. ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ: Ç èåñáðåßá ôùí
ðñïáéþíùí. Áóêëçðéåßá êáé ÁìöéáñÜåéá. Ãéüãêá: Ãéüãêá êáé Áõôïèåñáðåßá. Áñ÷áßá ÌõóôÞñéá.
ÌõÞóåéò.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 23, ÌÁÑÔÉÏÓ - ÁÐÑÉËÉÏÓ 1981
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. ÅóùôÝñá ×ñéóôéáíéêÞ: Ïé ìåôáóôÜóéìåò åìöáíßóåéò ôïõ Éçóïý ×ñéóôïý.
ÅóùôÝñá ×ñéóôéáíéêÞ: Ç êáôÜ Éçóïý ÁíÜóôáóç íåêñþí. Áðïêñõöéóìüò: Ïé Ëßððéêá.
Ðáñáøõ÷ïëïãßá: Ç óçìåñéíÞ ôïðïèÝôçóÞ ôçò ìÝóá óôï ìåôáöõóéêü êýêëùìá. Ãéüãêá: Ôï
çëéáêü ðëÝãìá. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá: ÅîáôïìéêïðïéçìÝíåò ðíåõìáôïøõ÷Ýò ðïõ
åíóáñêþíïíôáé óôç ãç.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 24, ÌÁÚÏÓ - ÉÏÕÍÉÏÓ 1981
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá: Ï Íüìïò ôçò ÁíôáðïäïôéêÞò Äéêáéïóýíçò.
Áðïêñõöéóìüò: Ï èñïíéóìüò ôçò 1çò ÌáÀïõ 1981 ôïõ êüìçôá Ñïêüôóêõ Þ Áãßïõ Ãåñìáíïý
Þ Óáéí Æåñìáßí. Ðáñáøõ÷ïëïãßá: Øõ÷ïêéíçôéêÜ Öáéíüìåíá Þ øõ÷ïåêêñßóåéò åêôïðëÜóìáôïò
ðÜíù óå ìïñöéêÝò ðáñáóôÜóåéò. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Ìýçóç: Êáâåßñéá ÌõóôÞñéá: ÅóùôåñéêÞ
ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ. Óõíåñãáóßá áéèåñéêïý êáé öõóéêïý öïñÝá. Ðñüôõðï êáé áíÜôõðï.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 25, ÉÏÕËÉÏÓ - ÁÕÃÏÕÓÔÏÓ 1981
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. ÅôÞóéá áíáíÝùóç óõíäñïìÞò. Ãéá ôïõò áñ÷Üñéïõò: ÕðÜñ÷åé èÜíáôïò;
Åóùôåñéóìüò: Ç Ýííïéá ïñéóìÝíùí ëÝîåùí óôç ìåôáöõóéêÞ. ÅóùôÝñá ×ñéóôéáíéêÞ: ÄåõôÝñá
Ðáñïõóßá. Ðüôå èá ãßíåé; ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá: ÐáñÜëëçëåò Åîåëßîåéò. Áðïêñõöéóìüò:
Óå ôé äéáöÝñåé ï èÜíáôïò áðü ôïí áäåëöü ôïõ áèÜíáôï. Ìõóôéêéóìüò: ÁíáóôåíÜñéá êáé
ÁíáóôåíÜñçäåò. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá: ÌåôåíóÜñêùóç. ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ:
Ìáãíçôïèåñáðåßåò óôá Áóêëçðéåßá.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 26, ÓÅÐÔÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ - ÏÊÔÙÂÑÉÏÓ 1981
ÅôÞóéá áíáíÝùóç óõíäñïìÞò. Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. Ç ßäñõóç ó÷ïëÞò ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá. Ãéá
ôïõò áñ÷Üñéïõò: Ãéáôß æçôïýìå ôçí åîÝëéîç. Ãéüãêá: Ôï Öéëïóïöéêü âÜèïò ôçò.
Áðïêñõöéóìüò: ¸÷ïõí ôá üíåéñá áîßá; Åóùôåñéóìüò: Ç Ýííïéá ïñéóìÝíùí ëÝîåùí. Ïé
áüñáôïé êüóìïé. Åäþ Ýñçìïò Ãêüìðõ.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 27, ÍÏÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ - ÄÅÊÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ 1981
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. Ç ÌåãÜëç Íý÷ôá ôçò ÃÝííçóçò ôïõ Èåßïõ Ëüãïõ. Ïé Ìýóôåò êáé
ÕëïìïñöéêÞ æùÞ ôïõò. Ï Ðõèáãüñáò êáé ç Èåáíþ. Ðáñáøõ÷ïëïãßá ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý. Ôá
Ýíóôéêôá. Åðéóôçìïíéêüò Ðíåõìáôéóìüò. ÁíáìíÞóåéò. Ðïßçìá ï Ðõèáãüñçò. Öéëïóïößá
ôçò Ãéüãêá: Áöïñéóìïß ôïõ ÐáôÜíôæáëé. Áðïêñõöéóìüò: Åäþ Ýñçìïò Ãêüìðõ. ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá:
ÓáìóêÜñáò.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 28, ÉÁÍÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ - ÖÅÂÑÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ 1982
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. ÐñÝðåé íá ãßíåôå êïéíùíïß ôïõ Öéëïóïöéêïý ìïõ Ýñãïõ. ÅóùôåñéêÞ
ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ: Ãéá ôïõò áñ÷Üñéïõò. ÁõôïèåñáðåõôéêÞ êáé åôåñïèåñáðåõôéêÞ. Åñìçôéóìüò:
Ç ÁéãõðôéáêÞ Ìýçóç. Áðüêñõöç ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ: Ïé ôÝóóåñéò áíåîåñåýíçôïé
åãêÝöáëïé êÜèå áíèñþðïõ. ÐíåõìáôéêÞ Ó÷ïëÞ ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá: Ãêïýíáò, ÓáìóêÜñá êáé
ÓáìãéÜìá. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá: Ï êáìâÜò êÜèå øõ÷Þò. Ðõèáãïñéóìüò: Ïé äÝêá
áíôéóôïé÷ßåò. Ðñüãñáììá äéäáóêáëéþí ìçíüò Ìáñôßïõ 1982.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 29, ÌÁÑÔÉÏÓ - ÁÐÑÉËÉÏÓ 1982
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. Ç Ýííïéá ôçò ÁíÜóôáóçò ôïõ ×ñéóôïý. ÅóùôÝñá ×ñéóôéáíéêÞ: ÌåãÜëç
ÐÝìðôç. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Èåïëïãßá: ÌåãÜëç Ôñßôç, ÊáóóéáíÞ Þ Åéêáóßá, ç ÂõæáíôéíÞ
ðïéÞôñéá. ×ñéóôéáíéêÞ ÐáñÜäïóç: Ìáñßá ç ÌáãäáëçíÞ. ÉíäïäñáâéäéêÞ áíèñùðïëïãßá: Ç
ÌïõëáíôÜñá ÓÜêñá. ÁíáìíÞóåéò. ÐåéñÜìáôá Åðéóôçìïíéêïý Ðíåõìáôéóìïý óôçí Áßãõðôï,
1948. Áðïêñõöéóìüò: Åäþ Ýñçìïò Ãêüìðõ. ÍÝá áðü ôçí áéèåñéêÞ ðåñéï÷Þ ôçò. ÅóùôÝñá
ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ: Áõôïèåñáðåßá äß÷ùò öÜñìáêá. Ç Âáóéëåßá ôùí óêÝøåùí. Óêåðôïêñáôßá.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 30, ÌÁÚÏÓ - ÉÏÕÍÉÏÓ 1982
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. ÓåìéíÜñéá ôïõ êáëïêáéñéïý 1982. ÐíåõìáôéêÞ Ó÷ïëÞ Ãéüãêá. Íïõò,
Íüçóç, Øõ÷Þ êáé Ðíåýìá. ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ: Ôï ðñùôïãåíÝò óýóôçìá
åôåñïèåñáðåßáò. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Ìýçóç: Ôá Åëåõóßíéá ÌõóôÞñéá. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Èåïëïãßá: Ôá
üíôá äéáêïíßáò óôá Åóùóýìðáíôá. Áðïêñõöéóìüò: Ç áíÜâáóç êáé ç êáôÜâáóç ôùí
áíèñùðïðíåõìáôïøõ÷þí. Áðïêñõöéóìüò ãéá áñ÷áñßïõò. ÁíáóôåíÜñéá êáé ÁíáóôåíÜñçäåò.
Ðõèáãïñéóìüò: Ç Ýííïéá ôçò óéùðÞò óôï Ïìáêïåßï ôïõ Êñüôùíá ãýñù óôá 500 ð.×.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 31, ÉÏÕËÉÏÓ - ÁÕÃÏÕÓÔÏÓ 1982
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. ÁíáíÝùóç ôùí åôÞóéùí óõíäñïìþí. ÅðéóôÞìç ôïõ Áðïêñõöéóìïý:
Ôé åßíáé ï áðïêñõöéóìüò. ÅóùôÝñá Èåïëïãßá: Ïé ðåñéðÝôåéåò ôùí øõ÷þí ìÝóá óôïõò
êüóìïõò ôçò ìïñöÞò. Ðáñáøõ÷ïëïãßá: Ïé êüóìïé ôùí ïíåßñùí ìáò. Øõ÷éóìüò: ÔçëåðÜèåéá
êáé ôçëåðáèçôéêÜ öáéíüìåíá. Áñ÷áßá ÌõóôÞñéá: Ïé ìõÞóåéò êáé ï óêïðüò ôïõò. ÌðÜêôé
Ãéüãêá: Óêïðüò êáé óýóôçìÜ ôçò. Åäþ Ýñçìïò Ãêüìðõ: Ç ðñïóùðéêÞ êáé ìüíéìç
óõíåñãÜôéóóá ôïõ êüìç Óáéí Æåñìáßí, ç èñõëéêÞ ÁíäñïìÝäá.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 32, ÓÅÐÔÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ - ÏÊÔÙÂÑÉÏÓ 1982
Áðïêñõöéóìüò: Ç æùÞ óå Üëëåò äéáóôÜóåéò êáé ó÷Ýóåéò áíÜìåóá óôá üíôá ôçò.
Áðïóõìâïëéóìüò: Ôï ÄùäåêÜèåï ôïõ Ïëýìðïõ. Ðñïêáôáêëõóìéáßïé Ðïëéôéóìïß: Äñáâßäåò
ïé Ðñüãïíïé ôùí ÅëëÞíùí. Ïìéëßá ôïõ Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ ðïõ äüèçêå óôçí Åóôßá ÍÝáò Óìýñíçò
óôéò 29-3-1982. ÌÝñïò ðñþôï (ðåñßëçøç). ÉíäéêÞ ÓêÝøç: ÐñÜíá êáé ÐñáíáãéÜìá óôçí
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
CHRISTMAS: Prechristianic, Christianic and Postchristianic Revelations. MYSTI-
CISM.
JANUARY - FEBRUARY 1981 - ISSUE NO. 22
OPEN LETTER: Love and forgiveness against hate and revenge. FOR THE BEGIN-
NERS: Man's Karmic drama during his passage from earth. ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY:
The Mysts' Astrosophy. ESOTERIC THERAPEUTICS: The Agelong Therapy. Asclepieia and
Amfiaraia. YOGA: Yoga and Self-therapy. ANCIENT MYSTERIES: Initiations.
MARCH - APRIL 1981 - ISSUE NO. 23
Open Letter. ESOTERIC CHRISTIANICS: Jesus Christ's metastasic appearances. ESO-
TERIC CHRISTIANICS: The deads' resurrection according to Jesus. OCCULTISM: Lippikas.
PARAPSYCHOLOGY. The present placement in the metaphysical ring. YOGA: The solar
plexus. ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY: Individualized spirit - souls incarnated on earth.
MAY - JUNE 1981 - ISSUE NO. 24
Open Letter. ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY: The Law of the retributive justice. OCCULTISM:
Count Rokotsky's or Saint German's enthroning of May 1st. PARAPSYCHOLOGY: Psh-
cocinetic phenomena or souls secretions of hectoplasm on forming representations.
ESOTERIC INITIATION: Kaviria Mysteries. ESOTERIC THERAPEUTICS: Cooperation of the
etheric and physical bearer - Original and offpring.
JULY - AUGUST 1981 - ISSUE NO. 25
OPEN LETTER: Annual renewal of subscription. FOR THE BEGINNERS: Is there death?
ESOTERISM: The meaning of certain words in metaphysics. ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY:
Parallel evolutions. OCCULTISM: What is the difference between death and his broth-
er immortal? MYSTICISM: Anastenaria and Anastenarides. ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY: Rein-
carnation. ESOTERIC THERAPEUTICS: Magnetotherapies in Asclepieia.
SEPTEMBER - OCTOBER 1981 - ISSUE NO. 26
Annual renewal of subscription. OPEN LETTER: The establishment of Raja Yoga
school. FOR THE BEGINNERS: Why we ask evolution. YOGA: Its philosophical depth. OC-
CULTISM: Have the dreams any value? ESOTERISM: The meaning of certain words.
THE INVISIBKE WORLDS: Here is the desert Goby!
NOVEMBER - DECEMBER 1981 - ISSUE NO. 27
OPEN LETTER: The Big Night of the Divine Word Birth. THE MYSTS AND THEIR MAT-
TERFORMING LIFE: Pythagoras and Theano. PARAPSYCHOLOGY OF ESOTERISM: The In-
stincts. SCIENTIFIC SPIRITUALISM: Memories. POEM, PYTHAGORIS. YOGA PHILOSOPHY:
Patantzali's Aphorisms. OCCULTISM: Here Goby desert. RAJA YOGA: Samskaras.
JANUARY - FEBRUARY 1982 - ISSUE NO. 28
OPEN LETTER: You must be participants of my philosophical work. ESOTERIC THER-
APEUTICS. FOR THE BEGINNERS: Self-therapeutics and Heterotherapeutics. HERMETISM:
The Egyptian Initiation. OCCULT EXTERNAL THERAPEUTICS: The four inexplored brains
of every man. SPIRITUAL SCHOOL OF RAJA YOGA: Gunas Samskara and Samyama. ES-
OTERIC PHILOSOPHY: The canvas of every soul. PYTHAGORISM: The ten correspon-
dences. TEACHING PROGRAM of March 1982.
MARCH - APRIL 1982 - ISSUE NO. 29
OPEN LETTER: The meaning of Christ's Resurrection. INNER CHRISTIANICS: Good
Thursday. INTERIOR THEOLOGY: Good Tuesday, Kassiani or Ikasia or the Byzantine
woman poet. CHRISTIANIC TRADITION: Maria Magdalene
HINDODRAVIDIAN ANTHROPOLOGY: Mulandara Sakra. MEMORIES: Experiments of
Scientific Experimentations in Egypt, 1948. OCCULTISM: Here Goby desert. News from
its etheric area. INNER THERAPEUTICS. THE KINGDOM OF THOUGHTS. Sceptocracy.
MAY - JUNE 1982 - ISSUE NO. 30
OPEN LETTER: Seminars of the summer 1982. SPIRITUAL SCHOOL - YOGA: Mind, In-
tellect, Soul and Spirit. ESOTERIC THERAPEUTICS: The Protogenic system of Het-
erotherapy. ESOTERIC INITIATION: The Elefsinian Mysteries. INNER THEOLOGY: The be-
ings of Deaconship in the Eso-universes. OCCULTISM: The Ascent and the Descent of
the Human spiritsouls. OCCULTISM FOR BEGINNERS: Anastenaria and Anastenarides.
PYTHAGORISM: The meaning of silence in Omakoeio of Croton in 500 b. C.
JULY - AUGUST 1982 - ISSUE NO. 31
OPEN LETTER: Renewal of the annual subscriptions. OCCULTISM SCIENCE: What Oc-
cultism is. INNER THEOLOGY: The adventures of the souls in the form worlds. PARA-
PSYCHOLOGY: The worlds of our dreams. PSYCHISM: Telepathy and Telepathetic phe-
nomena. ANCIENT MYSTERIES: The initiations and their aim. BHAKTI YOGA: Its Aim and
its System. HERE GOBY DESERT: Count Saint Germain's personal and permanent lady
cooperator, legendary Andromeda.
SEPTEMBER - OCTOBER 1982 - ISSUE NO. 32
OCCULTISM: Life in other dimensions and relations among their beings. DESYM-
BOLISM: The Twelve Gods of Olympus. ANTEDILUVIAN CIVILIZATIONS: Dravidians, the
Ancestors of Greeks, Speech by N. Margioris given in Neas Smirnis Home, on March
83 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
ðñáãìáôéêüôçôá. Áðïêñõöéóìüò: Ôï Ïõäüò, ôï êáôþöëé Þ ôï êåöáëüóêáëï åéóüäïõ êáé
ï ñüëïò ôïõ. Ãéüãêá: Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 33, ÍÏÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ - ÄÅÊÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ 1982
ÅóùôÝñá ×ñéóôéáíéêÞ: Ç ÃÝííçóÞ Óïõ ×ñéóôÝ ï Èåüò çìþí. Áóôñïëïãßá - Áóôñïóïößá:
Ôá çìåñïëüãéá óôï äéÜâá ôùí áéþíùí. Ðñïêáôáêëõóìéáßïé Ðïëéôéóìïß: Äñáâßäåò ïé ðñüãïíïé
ôùí ÅëëÞíùí. Ïìéëßá Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ ðïõ äüèçêå óôçí Åóôßá Í. Óìýñíçò óôéò 29-3-82.
Ðåñßëçøç äåýôåñïõ ìÝñïõò. ×ñéóôéáíéêÝò ÓêÝøåéò: Ôï ìõóôÞñéï ôçò áðïõóßáò ôïõ ×ñéóôïý
ìÝ÷ñé ôçò ðñþôçò äçìüóéáò äéäáóêáëéêÞò ôïõ ðáñïõóßáò. Ìõóôéêéóìüò: ÅóùóôñåöÞò êáé
åîùóôñåöÞò. ¸ñùôáò êáé ÁãÜðç: ÅðåîÞãçóç åíüò êáõôïý óçìåßïõ. ÐáéäéêÞ Øõ÷ïëïãéêÞ
Ãéüãêá: Ç áñ÷áéüôáôç øõ÷ïëïãßá óôç äéÜèåóç ôïõ ðáéäéïý. Íá ç ÐáéäéêÞ Øõ÷ïëïãéêÞ Ãéüãêá.
ÅóùôÝñá Èåïëïãßá: Ãéáôß ðñÝðåé ìÝóá ìáò íá ãåííéÝôáé ï ×ñéóôüò.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 34, ÉÁÍÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ - ÖÅÂÑÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ 1983
Ðñüóêëçóç óôá Åãêáßíéá ôïõ ðáñáñôÞìáôïò. Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá: Ôï ìåëëïíôéêü åêêïëáðôÞñéï
ôùí ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêé. ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ: Íá ðïõ âáóßæåôáé ç èåñáðåõôéêÞ äß÷ùò ôá
öÜñìáêá. Áóôñïëïãßá - Áóôñïóïößá: ÕðÜñ÷ïõí Ýëëïãá üíôá óôïí ßäéï áóôåñéóìü ìáò;
ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá: Ôï öáéíüìåíï ôïõ èáíÜôïõ. ÏëïêëçñùìÝíç Ãéüãêá: Ôï åýïóìï
ëïõëïýäé ôçò åßíáé ç ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá. Áðïêñõöéóìüò: Âñõêüëáêåò, öáíôÜóìáôá, óôïé÷åéáêÜ,
íåñÜúäåò, êáëëéêÜíôæáñïé. ºäñõóç äýï Ó÷ïëþí Ãéüãêá óôç ÍÝá Óìýñíç.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 35, ÌÁÑÔÉÏÓ - ÁÐÑÉËÉÏÓ 1983
ÅóùôÝñá ×ñéóôéáíéêÞ: ÈÜíáôïò êáé ÁíÜóôáóç ôïõ Éçóïý ×ñéóôïý. ÌåãÜëç ÐáñáóêåõÞ:
ÌÝóá óôç ìõóôçñéáêÞ íõ÷ôéÜ ôçò (ôçò ÌåãÜëçò ÐáñáóêåõÞò) áíÝâçêå óôá åðïõñÜíéá ç
èñõëéêÞ Ìáñßá ç ÌáãäáëçíÞ. Ðáó÷áëéíü äéÞãçìá: Ôá ðñþôá ÷ñéóôéáíéêÜ êüêêéíá Ðáó÷áëéíÜ
áõãÜ. Ìõóôéêüò Äåßðíïò: Óýóôáóç ôçò Èåßáò Åõ÷áñéóôßáò. Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá: Ìéá ðåñßåñãç
ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ ÅðéóôÞìç. Áðïóõìâïëéóìüò: Æåýò êáé ÔéôÜíåò.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 36, ÌÁÚÏÓ - ÉÏÕÍÉÏÓ 1983
ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ: Óýóôçìá Áäõíáôßóìáôïò (Áôìïûãñïðïßçóç) ôùí ëéðþí.
Áðü ôç èåñáðåßá ôùí ðñïáéþíùí: Ôï èáõìáôïõñãéêü áíôéêñÜôçìá ôçò èåñáðåõôéêÞò
Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá. Áðïêñõöéóìüò: Ï Áüñáôïò Êüóìïò. Ïìáêïåßï Áèçíþí. ÐñïóðÝêôïõò
ôïõ èåñéíïý óåìéíáñßïõ 1983. Ãéüãêá: ÌðÜíôáò (Bandhas). Áðïêñõöéóìüò: Ç ó÷Ýóç ðïõ
åðéêñáôåß áíÜìåóá óôá äçìéïõñãÞìáôá. ÊÜñìá: ÌåñéêÝò áðü ôéò Üðåéñåò åêäçëþóåéò
ôïõ. ÌåôåíóÜñêùóç: Ãéáôß ïé ðíåõìáôïøõ÷Ýò óáñêþíïíôáé êáé áðïóáñêþíïíôáé óôç
äéÜóôáóÞ ìáò. Áðïêñõöéóìüò: Ôá ôåñáôïõñãÞìáôá ôïõ Öåñåêýäç. Ç éäñõüìåíç äåêÜôç
ÔåôÜñôç äéÜóôáóç.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 37, ÉÏÕËÉÏÓ - ÁÕÃÏÕÓÔÏÓ 1983
ÁíáíÝùóç ôçò óõíäñïìÞò. Ãéá ôçí íÝá ðåñßïäï 1983-84 êáé ãéá ôá áíáëïãïýíôá ôåý÷ç
38-43. ºäñõóç Ó÷ïëÞò Áôìïûãñïðïßçóçò: Ôï áäõíÜôéóìá äß÷ùò ìç÷áíéêÜ êáé öáñìáêåõôéêÜ
ìÝóá ðåôõ÷áßíåôáé ìå Áôìïûãñïðïßçóç. Ôñïöþíéï ¢íôñï: Ç äñáóôçñéüôçôá ôùí
Áóêëçðéåßùí êáôÜ ôçí áñ÷áéüôçôá. Ôé åßíáé Ãéüãêá; Ïõóéþäåéò êáé áãåöýñùôåò äéáöïñÝò
áíÜìåóá óôéò áðåéñÜñéèìåò ãíùóôÝò Þ Üãíùóôåò Ãéüãêá. Ôé åßíáé Ïñèïëïãéóìüò; ÕðÜñ÷åé
ôáõôéóìüò ïñèïëïãéóìïý êáé ÅóùôåñéêÞò ÁëÞèåéáò; Ï Ðëáôùíéêüò ÓùêñÜôçò óôï
Óõìðüóéï: ÌÞðùò ç Äéïôßìá óõìâïëßæåé ôéò äõï áðü ôéò ôñåéò êáôáóôÜóåéò ôïõ Íïõ;
Áðïêñõöéóìüò: Ç ÅóùôåñéêÞ öùôéÜ ðïõ äåí ôçí îÝñïõìå êáé äåí ôç ÷ñçóéìïðïéïýìå
ðáñÜãåé ôï Áôìïûãñïðïéçôéêü óýóôçìá ðïõ äéáëýåé ôá ëßðç. ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ:
Ðïý âáóßæåôáé êáé ôé ðñïóöÝñåé. Åäþ Ýñçìïò Ãêüìðõ: Ç ìÝëëïõóá åîÝëéîç ôçò
áíèñùðüôçôáò.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 38, ÓÅÐÔÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ - ÏÊÔÙÂÑÉÏÓ 1983
Ç ãÝííçóç ôïõ Éçóïý ×ñéóôïý êáé ïé ìõñéÜäåò ôùí ÁóùìÜôùí. ×ñéóôïõãåííéÜôéêï
Ðáñáìýèé: Ç Üãéá Íý÷ôá ìåôáëëÜæåé ôéò áìáñôùëÝò øõ÷Ýò. ÐáñÜëëçëåò Åîåëßîåéò Üëëùí
¼íôùí: Ôá Üëëá Üãíùóôá óôïí Üíèñùðï üíôá, ãåííÞìáôá ðÜíôá ôïõ Èåïý, ðïõ
óõíåîåëßóóïíôáé ìáæß ôïõ. ¼ôáí ôï õðïóõíåßäçôï ôÝëåéá äéåõèýíåé ôï ìÝãá ÷çìéêü
åñãáóôÞñé ôïõ öõóéêïóþìáôüò ìáò. Ôï óõíåéäçôü ðñÝðåé íá âïçèåß ôï õðïóõíåßäçôï
ðáñÝ÷ïíôáò óôï óþìá "ÊáôÜëëçëç ÄéáôñïöÞ ìå áíÜëïãç Äßáéôá". Ï Åóùôåñéóìüò ìïõ:
ÌåôáöõóéêÝò ¸ñåõíåò. Ôï Ìáíôåßï ôùí Äåëöþí êáé ç ÌõóôéêÞ ëáôñåßá ôïõ Áðüëëùíá.
Ìõóôéêéóìüò: Ïé ÌÜãïé ìå ôá äþñá. ÅóùôÝñá Èåïëïãßá: Ç êÜèïäïò ôïõ Éçóïý ×ñéóôïý
óôïí êüóìï ôçò õëïìïñöÞò.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 39, ÍÏÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ - ÄÅÊÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ 1983
Åóùôåñéêïß Íüìïé: Ï Íüìïò ôçò ÁíôáðïäïôéêÞò Äéêáéïóýíçò. "Ìçí êÜíåéò üôé äåí èÝëåéò
íá óïõ êÜíïõí". ÊÜñìá. Áüñáôïé Êüóìïé: ¼ôáí ïé öõóéêÝò áéóèÞóåéò ìáò áäõíáôïýí íá
óõíôïíéóèïýí ìå Üëëïõ ôýðïõ äïíÞóåéò. ÓõíÜíôçóç ÅóùôåñéêÞò êáé ÅîùôåñéêÞò
ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò. ÄéáôñïöÞ êáé Üóêçóç ôùí áíèñþðùí. Åäþ Ýñçìïò Ãêüìðõ:Ç ìÝëëïõóá
åîÝëéîç ôçò áíèñùðüôçôáò. Ç ó÷Ýóç ôïõ èáíÜôïõ ìå ôçí æùÞ: Ï èÜíáôïò åßíáé ç æùÞ êáé
ç æùÞ åßíáé ï ìåãÜëïò èÜíáôïò. Áììþíéïò ÓáêêÜò: Ç ÍåïðëáôùíéêÞ Öéëïóïößá ôçò
ÁëåîÜíäñåéáò ðïõ ïíïìÜóôçêå åêëåêôéêü óýóôçìá, õðÞñîå Ýñãï ôïõ. Ï Åóùôåñéóìüò óôçí
êáèçìåñéíÞ æùÞ: Ðþò ëåéôïõñãåß ôï öéëïóïöéêü ôïõ óýóôçìá. Ï Åóùôåñéóìüò êáé ç
ÌåôáöõóéêÞ: Ôé áêñéâþò äéäÜóêïõí.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 40, ÉÁÍÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ - ÖÅÂÑÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ 1984
Ôï ¢ãéï ÐÜó÷á: Ðñï÷ñéóôéáíéêïß áðüç÷ïé. Ìáñßá ç ÌáãäáëçíÞ. Ôï ãõíáéêåßï ðáñþí
óôç ×ñéóôéáíéêÞ ìåôáññýèìéóç. Ç ÁíÜóôáóç ôùí Íåêñþí. Ôï áíáìöéóâÞôçôï Ðéóôåýù
ôïõ Èåßïõ Äþñïõ, ôïõ Áãßïõ Ðáýëïõ. Ôïýôï ðïéåßôå óôçí åìïß áíÜìíçóç: Ï Üîïíáò ôçò
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
29th, 1982. PART ONE (Summary). INDIAN THOUGHT: Prana and Pranayam in fact.
OCCULTISM: Udos, the Threshold or the entrance Laddertop and its role. YOGA: Kriya
Yoga.
NOVEMBER - DECEMBER 1982 - ISSUE NO. 33
INNER CHRISTIANICS: Your BirthChrist, our Lord. ASTROLOGY - ASTROSOPHY: The
calendars in the passage of the ages. ANTEDILUVIAN CIVILIZATIONS: DRAVIDIANS, THE
ANCESTORS OF GREEKS. N. Margiori's speech given in Nea Smirni Home on March
29th, 1982 (Summary. Part two). CHRISTIANIC THOUGHTS: The mystery of Christ's ab-
sence until his first teaching presence. MYSTICISM: Introvert and extrovert. EROS AND
LOVE: Explanation of a hot point. CHILDISH PSYCHOLOGICAL YOGA: The very ancient
psychology in childrens' mood. Here is the Childish Psychological Yoga. ESOTERIC
THEOLOGY: Why should Christ be born inside us?
JANUARY - FEBRUARY 1983 - ISSUE NO. 34
INVITATION TO THE INAUGURATION OF THE PRESENT. KRIYA YOGA: The future incu-
bator of Raja Yoga. ESOTERIC THERAPEUTICS: Here is where the therapeutics without
medicines relies on. ASTROLOGY - ASTROSOPHY: Are there any other beings in our
constellation? ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY: The Phenomenon of Death. COMPLETED YOGA:
Its fragrant flower is Raja Yoga. OCCULTISM: Vampires, Ghosts, Phantoms, Fairies,
Sprites. Establishment of two Yoga Schools in NEA SMIRNI.
MARCH - APRIL 1983 - ISSUE NO. 35
INNER CHRISTIANICS: Jesus Christ's Death and Resurrection. GOOD FRIDAY: In its
mysterious night (of Good Friday) legen-dary Maria Magdalene went up to the heav-
ens. EASTER NOVEL: The first christianic Red Easter Eggs. THE LORD'S SUPPER: For-
mation of the Holy Communion. KRIYA YOGA: A curious Therapeutical Science. DESYM-
BOLISM: Zeus and Titan.
MAY - JUNE 1983 - ISSUE NO. 36
INTERIOR THERAPEUTICS: Slimming system Atmoliquefaction of fats. FROM THE
AGELONG THERAPY: The miraculous anti-holding of therapeutical Kriya-Yoga. OC-
CULTISM: The Invisible World. OMAKOEIO OF ATHENS: Prospectus form of the Sum-
mer Seminar 1983. YOGA: BANDHAS. OCCULTISM: The relation prevailing among the
creations. KARMA: Some of its infinite expressions. REINCARNATION: Why are the spir-
itsouls incarnated and deincar-nated in our dimension. OCCULTISM: Ferekidi's mon-
strosities. The established thirteenth dimension.
JULY - AUGUST 1983 - ISSUE NO. 37
ESTABLISHMENT OF AN ATMOLIQUEFACTION SCHOOL: The slimming without any me-
chanical means is obtained only by ATMOLIQUEFACTION. TROFONIO ANTRE: Ascle-
pieans' activity in the ancient times. WHAT IS YOGA? Substantial and unbridged dif-
ferences among the innumerable known or unknown YOGAS. WHAT IS ORTHOLOGISM?
Is there any identification between the orthologism and the internal truth? PLA-
TONIC SOCRATES IN SYMPOSIUM: Does Diotima symbolize perhaps the two of the
three Mind situations? OCCULTISM: The Internal fire we do not know and we do not
use produces the atmoliquefacting substance that dissolve fats. INNER THERAPEU-
TICS: Where it relies on and what it offers. HERE GOBY DESERT: The future evolution
of humanity.
SEPTEMBER - OCTOBER 1983 - ISSUE NO. 38
JESUS CHRIST'S BIRTH: "and the myriads of the Incorporeal". CHRISTMAS TALE: "The
Holy Night Changes the Sinful Souls". PARALLEL EVOLUTIONS OF OTHER BEINGS: "The
other unknown to man beings, all creatures of God that are co-evoluted with him".
WHEN SUBCONSCIOUS DIRECTS PERFECTLY THE GREAT CHEMICAL LABORATORY OF OUR
PHYSICAL BODY. Conscious must help subconscious giving the body THE PROPER
FOOD BY THE ANALOGOUS DIET. MY ESOTERISM: "Metaphysical Searches". THE ORACLE
OF DELPHI: "And Apollo's secret worship".MYSTICISM: "The Magicians with the gifts".
INNER THEOLOGY: "Jesus Christ's.descent in the world of the whole form.
NOVEMBER - DECEMBER 1983 - ISSUE NO. 39
ESOTERIC LAWS. THE LAW OF THE RETRIBUTIVE JUSTICE. " Do not do what you don't
want others to do to you". "KARMA" MEETING BETWEEN THE ESOTERIC AND THE EXO-
TERIC THERAPEUTICS: "Nutrition and exercise of men". INVISIBLE WORLDS: "When our
physical senses cannot be coordinated with the vibrations of another type". "HERE
GOBY DESERT": "The future evolution of humanity". THE RELATION BETWEEN DEATH AND
LIFE: "Death is life and life is the great death". AMMONIOS SAKKAS: "The Neoplatonic
philosophy of Alexandria that was called "selected system was his work". ESOTERISM
IN THE DAILY LIFE: "How its philosophical system functions". ESOTERISM AND META-
PHYSICS: "What they teach exactly".
JANUARY - FEBRUARY 1984 - ISSUE NO. 40
HOLY EASTER: "Prechristianic echoes". MARIA MAGDALENE: "The Woman's Pres-
ence in the Christianic Reform". THE DEAD'S RESURRECTION: "The indisputable BELIEF
of the Divine Gift, by Saint Pavlos. YOU DO THIS IN MY MEMORY: "The axis of the In-
ner Christianic Theology". THE ETERNAL LIGHT: "The Holy Ghost everywhere in every-
thing for ever". THE CALVARY OF THE HUMAN SOULS: "Is the Calvary necessary for
84 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
ÅóùôÝñáò ×ñéóôéáíéêÞò Èåïëïãßáò. Ôï ÁíÝóðåñï Öùò: Ôï ¢ãéïí Ðíåýìá ðáíôïý óôá ðÜíôá
ãéá ðÜíôá. Ï ÃïëãïèÜò ôùí áíèñùðïøõ÷þí: Åßíáé áíáãêáßïò ï ÃïëãïèÜò ãéá ôéò øõ÷Ýò; Ï
Åóùôåñéóìüò êáé ç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ: Ôé áêñéâþò äéäÜóêïõí.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 41, ÌÁÑÔÉÏÓ - ÁÐÑÉËÉÏÓ 1984
ÅðåîçãçìáôéêÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. Ðïéï åßíáé ôï óçìåñéíü Ýñãï ôïõ Ïìáêïåßïõ Áèçíþí: Ï
ìåãÜëïò ñüëïò ôïõ ðåñéïäéêïý ìáò "Ïìáêïåßï". Ìå ïõóéþäç Üñèñá áðïêáëýðôåé ôç
ÌåôáöõóéêÞ ÁëÞèåéá, åêëáúêåýåé ôá ÅóùôåñéêÜ ÌõóôÞñéá ôçò Ðáíäçìéïõñãßáò. Ôï
Åóùôåñéêü Êëåéäß: Ïé åðß ìÝñïõò êëÜäïé ôïõ óðïõäÜæïõí ôïí áíáæçôçôÞ ðáñÝ÷ïíôáò
üëåò ôéò ãíþóåéò ðïõ ïé óïöïß óõãêÝíôñùóáí êáé êëçñïíüìçóáí óôïí Üíèñùðï. ÁëëÜ
åßíáé ïé åìðíåõóìÝíïé Óïöïß ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý. Ôá ìÝ÷ñé þñáò 17 âéâëßá ìïõ: ÌÝóá óôéò
ÌåôáöõóéêÝò óåëßäåò ôïõò âñßóêåé ï áíáãíþóôçò ôçí Üðåéñç ÁëÞèåéá ðïõ äüèçêå ìå
ïñáìáôéóìïýò êáé ëÞöèçêå áðü êáèÜñéï Íïõ. ÌåëÝôåò ðïëõãñáöçìÝíåò. Ôá ôÝóóåñá
ó÷ïëåßá ìáò ðçãÞ ðíåõìáôéêÞò æùÞò.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 42, ÌÁÚÏÓ - ÉÏÕÍÉÏÓ 1984
Åãêýêëéïò ãéá ôç Äßôïìç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ Åãêõêëïðáßäåéá. ÅðéóôçìïíéêÞ ¸ñåõíá: Ëýèçêå
ôï ÌõóôÞñéï ôùí Ðõñáìßäùí; Óçìáßá ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý. ¹ôáí áíÝêáèåí ï Ìõóôéêéóìüò.
Åêöõëéóìüò ôçò åðï÷Þò ìáò åßíáé ôï Üã÷ïò. Ìüíïí ï Åóùôåñéóìüò ôï äéáëýåé. Ôï ìåãÜëï
ðñüâëçìá ôùí Ýîåùí. Ðþò èá ôéò áðïâÜëëïõìå. Áãùíéæüìáóôå ãéá íá ôåëåéïðïéçèïýìå.
ÅëÜôå ìáæß ìáò ãéá íá åðùöåëçèåßôå ôçò Üãéáò ðñïóðÜèåéÜò ìáò. Ôá ôÝóóåñá ó÷ïëåßá
ìáò ðçãÞ ðíåõìáôéêÞò æùÞò.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 43, ÉÏÕËÉÏÓ - ÁÕÃÏÕÓÔÏÓ 1984
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. ÁíáíÝùóç óõíäñïìÞò ðåñéüäïõ 1984-85. Ç óÜñêùóç ôïõ
Éçóïý ×ñéóôïý êáé ôï ðñïóêýíçìá ôùí ÌÜãùí. Ç Üóðïñç óýëëçøç áðü ôçí ÐáñèÝíá
Ìáñßá. Ôé Ýãéíáí ïé ãõíáßêåò ðïõ âïÞèçóáí ôç ñßæùóç ôïõ ×ñéóôéáíéóìïý; Èùô Þ ÅñìÞò
ÔñéóìÝãéóôïò. ×ñéóôéáíéóìüò êáé Ìõóôéêéóìüò. Ðáñáäüóåéò áðü ôïõò Ãíùóôéêïýò. Ç ÂÜðôéóç
ôïõ Êõñßïõ óôïí ÉïñäÜíç ðïôáìü. Áãùíéæüìáóôå ãéá íá ôåëåéïðïéçèïýìå. ÅëÜôå ìáæß ìáò
ãéá íá åðùöåëçèåßôå ôçò Üãéáò ðñïóðÜèåéÜò ìáò. Åîáìçíéáßï óåìéíÜñéï Åóùôåñéóìïý
"ÅóùôåñéêÞò Öéëïóïößáò".
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 44, ÓÅÐÔÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ - ÏÊÔÙÂÑÉÏÓ 1984
Ï áëçèéíüò Ãíùóôéêéóìüò êáé ïé Áëåîáíäñéíïß Öéëüóïöïé éäñõôÝò ôïõ. Ìáñßá ç Áéãõðôßá,
ï Üíèñùðïò. ÍïçôéêÝò áóêÞóåéò åðáíáöïñÜò óôçí ôÝëåéá áñìïíßá óõíåßäçóçò
õðïóõíåßäçóçò. Ìõèïëïãéêïß áðüç÷ïé: Ïé åííéÜ ìïýóåò. Åõ÷åôÞñéï ãñÜììá ìå ôçí åõêáéñßá
ôùí åïñôþí ôïõ êáéíïýñãéïõ ÷ñüíïõ 1985. Ç Öéëïóïößá ôçò ÌåôáöõóéêÞò: Åíäïóêïðïýìå
Öéëïóïöïýíôåò.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 45, ÍÏÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ - ÄÅÊÅÌÂÑÉÏÓ 1984
Ðáó÷áëéíü ÄéÞãçìá: Ôá ðñþôá êüêêéíá áõãÜ ôïõ ×ñéóôéáíéóìïý. Ï ÐéëÜôïò óôï äñÜìá
ôçò Óôáýñùóçò ôïõ Éçóïý ×ñéóôïý "Óõ Åßðáò". ÊÜôù áðü ôïí ÅóôáõñùìÝíï Éçóïý ç ðñþôç
ôñéÜäá ôùí áãáðçìÝíùí. Ç ÁíÜóôáóç ôïõ Éçóïý ×ñéóôïý êáé ç óçìáóßá ôçò ãéá ôçí
ÁëÞèåéá ðïõ áíôéðñïóùðåýåé. Ìáñßá ç ÌáãäáëçíÞ. Ï ÌåãÜëïò ðñïäüôçò. Éïýäáò ï
Éóêáñéþôçò. Ï Áëçèéíüò Ãíùóôéêéóìüò êáé ôá áßôéá ðïõ ôïí ðñïêÜëåóáí. Õðïóõíåßäçóç -
Óõíåßäçóç óôéò áäéÜêïðåò áíôéìá÷ßåò ôïõò. ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá: Ôé íüçìá Ý÷åé ç æùÞ ìáò.
Óêïðüò ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý. Ç áíáâßùóç ôçò Ãíþóçò. Ç Öéëïóïößá ôçò ÌåôáöõóéêÞò:
Åíäïóêïðïýìå Öéëïóïöïýíôåò (óõíÝ÷åéá áðü ôï ðñïçãïýìåíï).
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 46, ÉÁÍÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ - ÖÅÂÑÏÕÁÑÉÏÓ 1985
Ç Èåßá Êïéíùíßá óáí øõ÷éêÞ ôñïöÞ. Áõôïß ðïõ áçäßáóáí ôïí êüóìï ìáò.
Ðíåõìáôïøõ÷éêÝò áíçóõ÷ßåò. Ôï Óõìðüóéï ôïõ ÐëÜôùíá. Ãíùóôéêïß. Ñïäüóôáõñïé.
Áë÷çìéóôÝò. Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá. Ç ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ. ÓùìáôéêÞ êáé øõ÷éêÞ áðïêÜèáñóç.
ÐíåõìáôïûðÜñîåéò êáé ÁäåëöéêÜ Ðíåýìáôá.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 47, ÌÁÑÔÉÏÓ - ÁÐÑÉËÉÏÓ 1985
Ôá áðïôåëÝóìáôá ôïõ Ãíùóôéêéóìïý. Áíá÷ùñçôÝò - ÁóêçôÝò - Ìïíá÷ïß - Êáëüãçñïé.
Ïé áñíçôÝò ôïõ êüóìïõ. Ç åëåã÷üìåíç óõíåßäçóç. Ï Üèëïò ôïõ ìõçìÝíïõ óõíáíèñþðïõ.
Ïé Áóôñïåéäåßò: Ôï äñÜìá åíüò ðëáíÞôç ìáò ðïõ Ýãéíå ÷éëéÜäåò âñÜ÷éá. Áããåëïêáôáëçøßåò
êáé Äáéìïíïêáôáëçøßåò. ÕðÜñ÷åé áëçèéíÜ óêïðüò óå ôïýôç ôç æùÞ; Ðåñßåñãåò åìðåéñßåò.
Ï öüâïò ôïõ èáíÜôïõ óôá áíèñùðüìïñöá üíôá. ÐíåõìáôïûðÜñîåéò êáé ÁäåëöÜ
Ðíåýìáôá. Áíáêïßíùóç.
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 48, ÌÁÚÏÓ - ÉÏÕÍÉÏÓ 1985
Ï Íïõò õðçñÝôçò ôïõ áíèñþðïõ êáé ü÷é ï Üíèñùðïò õðçñÝôçò ôïõ Íïõ. Ó÷Ýóåéò ôïõ
áíèñþðïõ ìå ôá Üëëá áíèñþðéíá üíôá. ÕðÜñ÷åé èÜíáôïò óôç Äçìéïõñãßá; Ç
áõôïèåñáðåõôéêÞ äß÷ùò öÜñìáêá. Ôï ÊÜñìá óôçí êáèçìåñéíÞ æùÞ. Ç ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ ìå
ïäçãü ôçí Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá. Ç Ãíþóç åßíáé ï óêïðüò ôçò óÜñêùóÞò ìáò. ÁóêÞóåéò ðïõ ðåñéÝ÷åé
ôï íÝï ìïõ âéâëßï "ÐñáêôéêÞ ÌÝèïäïò ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò äß÷ùò ÄÜóêáëï ôçò Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá".
ÔÅÕ×ÏÓ 49, ÉÏÕËÉÏÓ - ÁÕÃÏÕÓÔÏÓ 1985
Áíïé÷ôÞ ÅðéóôïëÞ. ÃíùóôéêéóôÝò: Ïé áóõíèçêïëüãçôïé áêñáßïé ïñáìáôéóôÝò. Èíçôüôçôá
êáé áéùíéüôçôá. Óôï÷áóìüò: Ï äñüìïò ôçò ÓùêñáôéêÞò õðÝñâáóçò. ÁíáãÝííçóç -
ÌåôåíóÜñêùóç. Ìéá áðü ôéò Åëåõóßíéåò áðïêáëýøåéò. Ôé åßíáé ï Üíèñùðïò. Ìðïñåß íá
áðïêôÞóåé ôï "ãíþèé óåáõôüí". ÌõóôÞñéá: Ãåãïíüôá ðïõ óôçñßæïíôáé óôïõò ãíþñéìïõò ôçò
Öýóçò Íüìïõò. Ìõóôéêéóìüò: Ç ïäüò ç Üãïõóá ðñïò ôçí ôåëåéüôçôá. Ç áëçèéíÞ çèéêÞ
êáé ç áðüêñõøÞ ôçò.
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
souls?". ESOTERISM AND METAPHYSICS: "What they teach exactly".
MARCH - APRIL 1984 - ISSUE NO. 41
EXPLANATORY LETTER: "What is the work of today of Athens Omakoeio". THE GREAT
ROLE OF OUR JOURNAL OMAKOEIO: "It reveals the Metaphysical truth by substantial
articles, popularizing the internal mysteries of Omnicreation". THE ESOTERIC KEY: "The
partial branches that instruct the searcher, affording all the knowledge that the wise
have concentrated and inherited to man. But they are the inspired WISE OF ESO-
TERISM. MY 17 BOOKS AT PRESENT: "In their Metaphysical pages the reader will find
the infinite truth that was given by vision and was received by a clear Mind". POLY-
GRAPHED ESSAYS OUR FOUR SCHOOLS AS A SOURCE OF SPIRITUAL LIFE.
MAY - JUNE 1984 - ISSUE NO. 42
CIRCULAR FOR THE TWO VOLUME METAPHYSICAL ENCYCLOPAEDIA. SCIENTIFIC
SEARCH: The mystery of Pyramides was solved. FLAG OF ESOTERISM: Was always Mys-
ticism. THE DEGENERATION OF OUR TIMES IS STRESS: Only esoterism dissolves it. THE
GREAT PROBLEM OF THE HABITS: How we will reject them. WE STRUGGLE TO GET PER-
FECT: Come with us to get profit of our holy effort. OUR FOUR SCHOOLS A SOURCE
OF SPIRITUAL LIFE.
JULY - AUGUST 1984 - ISSUE NO. 43
Open Letter. Renewal of subscription of period 84/85. Jesus Christ’s incarnation
and the Magicians’ worship. Virgin Mary’s seedless catch. What happened to the
women who helped in the rooting of Christainism? Thot or hermes the thrice-Great?
Christianism and Mysticism. Gnostics. Lord’s baptism in Jordan river. We struggle to
be perfect. Come with uw to get profit of our holy effort. Sixmonthly seminar of E-
soterism “Esoteric Philosophy”.
SEPTEMBER - OCTOBER 1984 - ISSUE NO. 44
The true Gnosticism and its Alexandrdian Philosopher founders. Maria, the Egypt-
ian the human being. Intellectual. Exercises of bringing back the perfect harmony
to conscience subconscience. Mythologic exhoes. The nine muses. A goodwishes
letter in the ocassion of the new year 1985 holiday. The Philosophy of the Meta-
physics. We introspect by philosophizing.
NOVEMBER - DECEMBER 1984 - ISSUE NO. 45
Easter novel. The first red eggs of Christianism. Platus during the drama of Jesus
Christ’s crucifixion “You Said”. Under crucifix Jesus the first triad of the beloved. Je-
sus Christ’s resurrection and its importance for truth it represents. Maria Magdalene.
Judas the Iscariotes, the creat traitor. The true Gnosticism and reasons that caused
it. Subconscinec - conscience in their uncreasing fights. Esoteric Philosophy. What
is the meaning of our life aim of Esoterism the revival of knowledge. The Philosophy
of the Metaphysics. We introspect by Philosophizing (continuation).
JANUARY - FEBRUARY 1985 - ISSUE NO. 46
The holy communion as. Pshychical food those who are disgusted of our world.
Spirit-Soul anxieties. Platon’s Symposium. Gnostics. Rose Crosses. Alchemists. Kriya
Yoga: The therapeutical bodily and phychical reinstation. Spirit beings and brother-
ly spirits.
MARCH - APRIL 1985 - ISSUE NO. 47
The results of the gnosticism. Ascetes - Monks - Friars, deniers of the world. The
controlled conscience. The initiated fellow-man's exploit. The Astroidis: The drama
of a planet of ours that was changed into thousands of rocks. Angels catalepsies and
Demoscatalepsies. Is there really any purpose in this life? Strange experiences. The
fear of death in the human form beings. Spirit beings and brotherly spirits. An-
nouncement.
MAY - JUNE 1985 - ISSUE NO. 48
Mind is the man's servant man is not the servant of mind. Man's relation with the
other human beings. Self therapeutics without medicines. Karma in daily life. Ther-
apeutics with Kriya Yoga as guide. Knowledge is the aim of our incarnation. Exercis-
es contained in my new book "Practical Method of the Therapeutics Without Teacher
of Criya Yoga".
JULY - AUGUST 1985 - ISSUE NO. 49
Open letter. "GNOSTICISTS". The uncapitulated extreme visionaries. Mortality and
eternity. THOUGHT: The way of the Socratic trangression. Renaissance - Reincarna-
tion. One of the Elefsinian revelations. What is man. He can exercise the "know y-
ourself". MYSTERIES: Facts do not rely on the familiar Laws of Nature. MYSTICISM: The
way driving to perfection. The true mortality anits concealment.
85 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 ÌÅËÅÔÅÓ ÔÏÕ Í. Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇ
ESSAYS BY NIKOLAOS. A. MARGIORIS
ÏÉ ÐÑÙÔÅÓ ÅÎÉ ÌÅËÅÔÅÓ
Ïé­áñ­÷é­êÝò­áõ­ôÝò­ìé­êñÝò­ìå­ëÝ­ôåò­ðå­ñé­Ý­÷ïõí­ðëç­ñï­öï­ñß­åò­ãéá­å­ðï­÷Ýò­ðïõ­ðÝ­ñá­óáí­êáé­á­ó÷ï­-
ëïý­íôáé­íá­ó÷ç­ìá­ôß­óïõí­ôéò­å­íôõ­ðþ­óåéò,­ðïõ­ðñïÝñ­÷ï­íôáé­á­ðü­ôçí­å­ìðåé­ñß­á­ôïõò.
Ðá­ñü­ëï­ðïõ­åß­íáé­ìé­êñÝò­êáé­ðå­ñéï­ñé­óìÝ­íçò­á­íÜ­ðôõ­îçò,­öÝñ­íïõí­ðï­ëý­ðá­ëéÜ­ìç­íý­ìá­ôá­êáé
äß­íïõí­ìéá­óù­óôÞ­åé­êü­íá­ãéá­èÝ­ìá­ôá­èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôé­êÞò.­Å­äþ­âñß­óêïõ­ìå­ôï­OD­Þ­ü­äéïí­ôïõ­ÑÜ­ú­÷å­ìðá÷
êáé­ôïõ­ÌÝ­óìåñ­ôçí­ìá­ãíç­ôï­èå­ñá­ðåß­á,­óõ­íï­äåõü­ìå­íç­á­ðü­ôïõ­Èå­ü­öñá­óôïõ­Ðá­ñÜ­êåë­óïõ­ôá­äé­-
äá­÷èÝ­íôá­öù­ôß­æïõí­ôï­óêï­ôÜ­äé.
¾óôå­ñá­á­êï­ëïõ­èïýí­ôá­Áì­öéá­ñÜ­åéá­êáé­ôá­Á­óêëç­ðéåß­á­ðïõ­êñÜ­ôç­óáí­æù­íôá­íÞ­ôçí­Á­ëÞ­èåéá
ðïõ­ðá­ñá­äß­äï­íôáí­óôá­Å­ëåõ­óß­íéá­Ìõ­óôÞ­ñéá.­ÌÝ­óá­óôá­Á­óêëç­ðéåß­á,­ï­áéþ­íéïò­äõ­íá­ìé­óìüò­-­ìá­-
ãíç­ôé­óìüò­Ý­äé­íå­ôçí­ëý­óç­ôùí­èå­ñá­ðåéþí­êáé­ôçò­á­íá­æù­ï­ãü­íç­óçò­ôùí­áí­èñþ­ðùí.
¸ôóé­Ý­öèá­óå­ùò­ôéò­äé­êÝò­ìáò­ìÝ­ñåò­ç­èå­ñá­ðåß­á­ôùí­ðñï­áéþ­íùí.­Ç­ðñï­á­óêëç­ðéá­êÞ­å­ðï­÷Þ
êáé­ç­ìå­ôá­óêëç­ðéá­êÞ­ìáò­äß­íïõí­ôéò­ãíþ­óåéò­ôïõò.­Ç­ðñï­á­óêëç­ðéá­êÞ­ìå­ôç­öõ­óéï­èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôé­êÞ
ôçò,­ìå­ôçí­å­öáñ­ìï­ãÞ­ôçò­öõ­óé­êï­å­íÝñ­ãåéáò,­ìå­ôïí­áí­èñþ­ðé­íï­äõ­íá­ìé­óìü­íá­ìå­ôá­äß­íåé­ôç­æù­Þ.
Óôï­îÝ­ðå­óìá­(ìå­ôá­óêëç­ðéá­êÞ)­Þë­èáí­ôá­å­îù­ôå­ñé­êÜ­óêåõÜ­óìá­ôá­-­öÜñ­ìá­êá.
Ïé­Ý­îé­ðñþ­ôåò­ìå­ëÝ­ôåò­åß­íáé­ïé­å­îÞò:­Ó÷ï­ëÞ­Á­óêëç­ðéþí­-­Õ­ðíï­èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôþí,­Óáñ­ë­Öïí­ÑÜ­ú­÷å­-
ìðá÷,­Ó÷ï­ëÞ­Á­óêëç­ðéþí­Ðíåõ­ìá­ôï­èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôþí­-­Èå­ü­öñá­óôïò­Ðá­ñÜ­êåë­óïò,­Ìá­ãíç­ôï­èå­ñá­ðåß­-
á,­Á­óêëç­ðéåß­á­êáé­Áì­öéá­ñÜ­åéá,­Ç­Èå­ñá­ðåß­á­ôùí­Ðñï­áéþ­íùí.
Ïé­Ý­îé­áõ­ôÝò­ìå­ëÝ­ôåò­ðñï­óöÝ­ñïõí­ôéò­õ­ðç­ñå­óß­åò­ôïõò­óôïí­á­êïý­ñá­óôï­ìå­ëå­ôç­ôÞ­êáé­åé­ëé­êñé­-
íÞ­á­íá­æç­ôç­ôÞ­óôçí­ï­äü­ôçò­áõ­ôï­ãíù­óß­áò­êáé­óôçí­äõ­íá­ôü­ôç­ôá­ãéá­Ý­ìðñá­êôç­èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôé­êÞ­ðñï­-
óöï­ñÜ­óôïí­óõ­íÜí­èñù­ðï.
ÔÏ ÌÕÓÔÇÑÉÏ ÔÏÕ ÊÕÔÔÁÑÏÕ ÊÁÉ ÔÇÓ ÆÙÇÓ
Åß­íáé­ç­Ý­âäï­ìç­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­ôïõ­Äá­óêÜ­ëïõ­Íé­êï­ëÜ­ïõ­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.­Ó'­áõ­ôÞí­ìáò­ðá­ñïõ­óéÜ­æåé­ôï­êýô­-
ôá­ñï,­ôçí­äï­ìÞ­êáé­ëåé­ôïõñ­ãß­á­ôïõ,­á­ðü­å­îù­ôå­ñé­êÞò­êáé­å­óù­ôå­ñé­êÞò­ðëåõ­ñÜò.
Ìáò­á­íá­ëý­åé­ðùò­ôï­êýô­ôá­ñï­á­ðï­ôå­ëåß­ôï­èå­ìÝ­ëéï­äï­ìé­êü­ëß­èï­ôïõ­óþ­ìá­ôüò­ìáò­êáé­ðùò­ç
áé­ôß­á­ðá­ñá­ãù­ãÞò­êáé­óõ­íôÞ­ñç­óÞò­ôïõ­âñß­óêå­ôáé­óôçí­áé­èå­ñé­êü­ôïõ­ðñü­ðëá­óìá.
Õ­ðï­ãñáì­ìß­æåé­ü­ôé­ç­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­ôïõ­êõô­ôÜ­ñïõ­åß­íáé­ôï­ðáí­êáé­ü­ôé­ï­ìá­èç­ôÞò­ðñÝ­ðåé­íá­Ý­÷åé­ðÜ­íôá
õð'­ü­øç­ôïõ,­ðþò­ï­óêï­ðüò­ôïõ­êõô­ôÜ­ñïõ­åß­íáé­ç­æù­Þ­ðïõ­äé­Ý­ðå­ôáé­á­ðü­áñ­ìï­íß­á­êáé­õ­ãåß­á.
Ðå­ñé­ãñÜ­öåé­ü­ôé­ó'­áõ­ôü­õ­ðÜñ­÷åé­ôï­ß­äéï­ôï­ìõ­óôÞ­ñéï­ôçò­æù­Þò­êáé­ü­ôé­ìå­ëå­ôþ­íôáò­êá­ôÜë­ëç­ëá
ôá­äéá­ôñÝ­÷ï­íôá­ìÝ­óá­ôïõ­á­ðü­ôéò­äõï­Ýë­ëï­ãåò­ï­ìÜ­äåò­DNA­êáé­RNA,­èá­âñïý­ìå­ìéá­ðå­ñß­åñ­ãç
áñ­ìï­íß­á­á­ðü­ôéò­å­íáë­ëá­ãÝò­áõ­ôÝò­,­ðïõ­êá­ôÜ­ôçí­ãíþ­ìç­ôïõ­á­ðï­ôå­ëïýí­ôçí­áé­ôß­á­Þ­ôçí­á­ðáñ­÷Þ
ôçò­ß­äéáò­ôçò­æù­Þò.
ÔÏ ÅÊÔÏÐËÁÓÌÁ ÊÁÉ ÕËÏÐÏÉÇÓÅÉÓ ÁÓÁÑÊÙÍ
Åß­íáé­ç­ü­ãäï­ç­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­ôïõ­Äá­óêÜ­ëïõ­Íé­êï­ëÜ­ïõ­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
Ðå­ñé­ãñÜ­öå­ôáé­á­ðü­öõ­óé­êÞ­êáé­é­äß­ùò­á­ðü­ìå­ôá­öõ­óé­êÞ­ðëåõ­ñÜ.­Áõ­ôü­ôï­ðå­ñé­âü­ç­ôï­å­êôü­ðëá­óìá
åê­÷ý­íå­ôáé­á­ðü­õ­ðíù­ôé­óìÝ­íá­äéÜ­ìå­óá,­á­ðü­áí­èñþ­ðïõò­ðïõ­Ý­÷ïõí­á­ðü­öý­óç­ôïõò­ôçí­é­êá­íü­ôç­ôá
óõ­íåé­äç­ôÜ­Þ­á­óõ­íåß­äç­ôá­íá­ôï­åê­âÜ­ëïõí,­áë­ëÜ­á­êü­ìá­êáé­á­ðü­ôá­âá­óß­ëåéá­ôçò­öý­óçò.
Ôï­å­êôü­ðëá­óìá­ëïé­ðüí­åß­íáé­ðíåõ­ìá­ôï­à­ëç­Þ­áé­èå­ñé­êï­à­ëç.­Ì'­áõ­ôü­õ­ëï­ðïéïý­íôáé­ôá­Ü­óáñ­êá
ü­íôá­êáé­ìå­ôá­âÜë­ëï­íôáé­óå­Ýí­óáñ­êá.­Ç­å­ðé­óôç­ìï­íé­êÞ­á­íÜ­ëõ­óç­ôïõ­å­êôï­ðëÜ­óìá­ôïò­ìáò­ðá­ñïõ­-
óéÜ­æåé­ìü­íï­ôçí­õ­ëé­êÞ­ôïõ­ðëåõ­ñÜ.­Ôï­áé­èå­ñé­êü­ôïõ­ìÝ­ñïò­Þ­ôï­óõ­íå­êôé­êü­ôïõ­Ýë­ëï­ãï­äåí­óõë­-
ëáì­âÜ­íå­ôáé­á­ðü­ôá­üñ­ãá­íá­ôçò­å­ðé­óôÞ­ìçò.­Åß­íáé­á­ü­ñá­ôï­êáé­äåí­å­íôï­ðß­æå­ôáé.­¼ìùò­äåí­ðáý­åé­íá
á­ðï­ôå­ëåß­ìéá­å­íéáß­á­äý­íá­ìç­ìå­ôá­óôïé­÷åß­á­ôçò­ý­ëçò,­ðïõ­óõí­èÝ­ôåé­ì'­áõ­ôÜ­ôï­öõ­óé­êü­öï­ñÝ­á,­ôï
óþ­ìá­ðïõ­äéá­èÝ­ôïõ­ìå.
Ðå­ñé­Ý­÷åé­ðÜ­ìðïë­ëåò­êáé­ðå­ñß­åñ­ãåò­é­äéü­ôç­ôåò.­Å­îÝñ­÷å­ôáé­á­ðü­ôéò­ï­ðÝò­ôïõ­óþ­ìá­ôïò,­á­ðü­ôï
êå­öÜ­ëé,­ôï­óôÞ­èïò,­ôá­ãåí­íç­ôé­êÜ­üñ­ãá­íá,­ôá­÷Ý­ñéá­êáé­ôá­ðü­äéá.­Åß­íáé­èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôé­êü­êáé­ü­ðïõ­á­-
êïõ­ìðÞ­óåé,­á­íá­íå­þ­íåé­ôá­êýô­ôá­ñá,­êëåß­íåé­ðëç­ãÝò­êáé­á­ðï­óôÞ­ìá­ôá,­á­íá­íå­þ­íåé­ôçí­å­ðé­äåñ­ìß­äá,
ãéá­ôñåý­åé­ðÜ­èç­êáé­å­ðá­íá­öÝ­ñåé­ôçí­õ­ãåß­á­êáé­áñ­ìï­íß­á.
Õ­ðÜñ­÷ïõí­ðïéü­ôç­ôåò­êáé­ðïéü­ôç­ôåò­áõ­ôïý­ôïõ­ðå­ñß­åñ­ãïõ­êïë­ëþ­äïõò­ñåõ­óôïý.­Å­îÝñ­÷å­ôáé­á­-
ðü­áí­èñþ­ðïõò,­ðïõ­ðü­ôå­ôï­êá­ôá­íï­ïýí­êáé­ôï­å­ëÝã­÷ïõí­êáé­ðü­ôå­ôï­á­ãíï­ïýí­ðá­íôå­ëþò.­Õ­ðÜñ­-
÷ïõí­êáé­Üë­ëïé­Üí­èñù­ðïé­ðïõ­ëÝ­ãï­íôáé­õ­ëï­ðïé­ç­ôé­êÜ­äéÜ­ìå­óá­Þ­å­êôï­ðëá­óìá­ôé­êÜ­äéÜ­ìå­óá,­ðïõ­õ­-
öß­óôá­íôáé­åé­äé­êÞ­ý­ðíù­óç­êáé­ý­óôå­ñá­åê­êñß­íïõí­ôï­å­êôü­ðëá­óìá.
Åß­íáé­ôÝ­ôïéáò­á­îß­áò,­ðïõ­êá­ôïñ­èþ­íåé­íá­ó÷ç­ìá­ôß­óåé­öõ­óé­êü­óþ­ìá­ìå­êýô­ôá­ñá,­ß­íåò,­üñ­ãá­íá,
ìý­åò,­íåý­ñá,­õ­ðï­íåõ­ñß­äéá­êáé­öëïéþ­äç­êýô­ôá­ñá,­äç­ìéïõñ­ãþ­íôáò­Ý­íáí­ïñ­ãá­íé­óìü­ôÝ­ëåéï­êáé­é­êá­-
íü­íá­å­êôå­ëÝ­óåé­êÜ­èå­áí­èñþ­ðé­íç­äñá­óôç­ñéü­ôç­ôá.
Ãéá­ðå­ñéó­óü­ôå­ñåò­ëå­ðôï­ìÝ­ñåéåò­äéá­âÜ­óôå­ôçí­åí­ëü­ãù­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­êá­èþò­êáé­Üë­ëåò­êáé­é­äß­ùò­ôï
âé­âëß­ï­ôïõ­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ­"Ìå­ôåí­óÜñ­êù­óç"­óôï­ï­ðïß­ï­á­íá­ëý­ï­íôáé­-å­êôüò­ôùí­Üë­ëùí-­ôá­å­ðß­ôñß­á­÷ñü­-
íéá­ðåé­ñÜ­ìá­ôá­ôïõ­Üã­ãëïõ­÷ç­ìé­êïý­Ïõ­ß­ëéáì­Êñïõî­ðïõ­ìá­æß­ìå­Ý­íá­å­ðé­ôå­ëåß­ï­33­å­ðé­óôç­ìü­íùí­Ý­-
êá­íå­äéáñ­êåßò­êáé­å­ìðå­ñé­óôá­ôù­ìÝ­íïõò­ðåé­ñá­ìá­ôé­óìïýò­óôéò­õ­ëï­ðïéÞ­óåéò­ôçò­Éí­äÞò­ðñé­ãêé­ðÝ­óáò
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
THE FIRST SIX ESSAYS
These­initial­small­essays­contain­information­about­the­old­times­and­are­occupied­in­the
formatting­of­the­impressions­that­come­from­their­experience.
Although­they­are­small­and­of­a­limited­development,­bear­very­old­messages­and­give­a
right­picture­of­the­therapeutics­matters.­Here­we­find­Reichebach's­OD­or­Odion­and­Mes-
mer's­magnetotherapy,­accompanied­by­Theofrastos­Parakelso's­teaching,­that­enlighten­the
darkness.
Then,­the­Amfiaraeas­and­the­Asclepeans­follow­that­kept­alive­the­Truth­delivered­in­the
Elefsinian­Mysteries.­In­the­Asclepeans,­the­eternal­dynamism-magnetism­gave­the­solution
of­the­therapies­and­of­the­men's­revival.
Thus,­the­therapy­of­the­preages­arrived­to­our­own­days.­The­preasclepean­and­the­postas-
clepean­eras­give­us­their­knowledge.­The­preasclepean­era­by­its­physiotherapeutics,­by­its
applying­the­physical­energy,­as­the­human­dynamism­transmits­life.­In­the­decline­(postas-
clepean),­the­exoteric­concoctions-medicines­appeared.
The­six­first­essays­are­the­following:­School­of­Asclepeans­-­Hypnotherapists,­Sharles­Forn
Reichebach,­School­of­Asclepeans-Spirittherapists­-­Theofrastos­Parakelsos,­Magnetothera-
py,­Asclepeia­and­Amfiaraea,­the­Therapy­of­the­Preages.
These­six­essays­offer­their­services­to­the­restless­student­and­frank­searcher­to­the­way
of­the­self-knowledge­and­to­the­ability­for­an­actual­therapeutical­offer­to­the­fellow-man.
THE MYSTERY OF THE CELL AND OF LIFE
This­is­Master­Nikolaos­Margiori's­seventh­essay.­In­it­he­presents­us­the­cell,­its­construction
and­its­function,­as­much­externally­as­internally.
It­analyzes­how­the­cell­constitutes­the­foundation­stone­of­our­body­and­how­the­cause
of­its­production­and­its­preservation­is­found­in­its­etheric­model.
It­underlines­that­the­study­of­the­cell­is­everything­and­that­the­student­must­have­always
in­mind­that­the­aim­of­the­cell­is­the­life­ruled­by­harmony­and­health.
It­describes­that­in­it­there­is­the­life­mystery­itself­and­that­by­studying­properly­what­goes
through­within­it­from­the­two­learned­groups­DNA­and­RNA,­we­shall­find­a­curious­harmo-
ny­through­these­alternations­that,­according­to­his­opinion,­constitute­the­cause­or­the­be-
ginning­of­the­life­itself.
THE HECTOPLASM AND THE
MATERIALIZATIONS OF THE FLESHLESS
This­is­Master­Nikolaos­Margiori's­eighth­essay.
It­is­described­by­the­physical­and­mainly­by­the­metaphysical­side.­This­famous­hecto-
plasm­is­poured­by­hypnotized­intermediates,­by­the­people­who­are­able­by­nature,­con-
sciously­or­unconsciously,­to­put­it­out,­but­also­from­the­kingdoms­of­the­nature.
Therefore,­the­hectoplasm­is­a­spirit-matter­or­an­etheric­matter.­By­it­the­fleshless­beings
are­materialized­and­are­changed­into­incarnate­beings.­The­scientific­analysis­of­the­hecto-
plasm­presents­us­only­its­material­side.­Its­etheric­part­or­its­cohesive­logic­is­not­conceived
by­the­organs­of­the­science.­It­is­invisible­and­it­is­not­localized.­However,­it­still­constitutes
a­unique­power­with­the­elements­of­the­matter,­that­composes­with­them­the­physical­bear-
er,­the­body­we­possess.
It­contains­numerous­and­curious­qualities.­It­gets­out­from­the­body­holes,­from­the­head,
the­breast,­the­genitals,­the­hands­and­the­feet.­It­is­therapeutical­and­wherever­it­leans,­it­re-
vives­the­cells,­it­closes­the­wounds,­it­cures­the­passions­and­it­brings­health­and­harmony
back.
There­are­various­qualitites­of­this­curious­sticking­fluid.­It­comes­out­of­people­who­some-
times­understand­and­control­it­and­sometimes­ignore­it­completely.­On­the­other­hand,­there
are­some­people­who­are­called­materializing­intermediates­or­hectoplasmatic­intermediates,
that­bear­a­special­hypnosis­and­then­secrete­the­hectoplasm.
It­has­such­a­value­that­it­manages­to­form­a­physical­body­with­cells,­fibres,­organs,­mus-
cles,­nerves,­subnerves­and­cortical­cells,­creating­thus­a­perfect­organism­that­is­able­to­per-
form­every­human­activity.
For­more­detail,­read­the­said­essay,­as­well­as­other­essays,­and­mainly­Margiori's­book
"Reincarnation"­in­which­-­besides­everything­else­-­the­three-year­experiments­of­English
chemist­William­Krux­are­analyzed.­Krux,­with­a­staff­of­23­scientists­made­continual­and­thor-
86 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
ÊÜ­ôéáò­Êéí­ãê­ìå­ôçí­âï­Þ­èåéá­ôïõ­äéá­ìÝ­óïõ­Öëþ­ñáí­ò­Êïõê.
¼ôáí­ìÜ­ëé­óôá­ñù­ôÞ­èç­êå­á­ðü­ôïõò­äç­ìï­óéï­ãñÜ­öïõò­áí­åß­íáé­á­ëÞ­èåéá­ôá­ü­óá­êá­ôá­ìáñ­ôõ­ñïý­-
íôáé­ü­ôé­óõì­âáß­íïõí­óôá­ðåé­ñÜ­ìá­ôá­ðïõ­óõ­íõ­ðÝ­ãñá­öáí­ü­ëïé­ïé­ðá­ñåõ­ñé­óêü­ìå­íïé­å­ðé­óôÞ­ìï­íåò­á­-
ðÜ­íôç­óå­"äåí­ëÝ­ù­ü­ôé­áõ­ôü­åß­íáé­äõ­íá­ôü,­ëÝ­ù­ü­ôé­áõ­ôü­åß­íáé".
Ï­Ïõ­ß­ëéáì­Êñïõî­åß­íáé­ï­å­ðé­óôÞ­ìï­íáò­ðïõ­åß­÷å­á­íá­êá­ëý­øåé­ôï­óôïé­÷åß­ï­ÈÜ­ëåéï­êáé­âñá­âåý­ôç­-
êå­ìå­ôï­Íü­ìðåë.
ÅÓÓÁÉÏÉ
Åß­íáé­ç­Ý­íá­ôç­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­ôïõ­Äá­óêÜ­ëïõ­Íé­êï­ëÜ­ïõ­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
Ó'­áõ­ôÞ­ðá­ñïõ­óéÜ­æå­ôáé­ç­ðéï­ðå­ñß­åñ­ãç­áß­ñå­óç­ôçò­å­ðï­÷Þò­ôïõ­É­ç­óïý­×ñé­óôïý.­Åß­íáé­ìéá­èñç­-
óêåõ­ôé­êÞ­êïé­íü­âéá­ïñ­ãÜ­íù­óç­ðïõ­êñá­ôïý­óå­ìéá­äé­êÞ­ôçò­ãñáì­ìÞ­ðÜ­íù­óôï­Ìù­óá­ú­êü­íü­ìï­êáé­ðÜ­-
íù­óôïí­Éå­÷ù­âÜ.
Ôá­ðÞ­ëé­íá­äï­÷åß­á­ôïõ­Êïõì­ñÜí­ìáò­äåß­÷íïõí­ìå­ôïõò­êõ­ëßí­äñïõò­ôùí­ðåñ­ãá­ìç­íþí­ôïõò,­ôçí
Å­óù­ôå­ñé­êÞ­á­ðü­êëé­óç­ðñïò­Ý­íá­Ìõ­óôé­êé­óìü­ðñï­áéþ­íéï.­Ôï­âÜ­ðôé­óìá­ìå­íå­ñü­êáé­ç­ç­èé­êÞ­ôïõò­âá­-
óß­æï­íôáé­óå­íü­ìïõò­Å­óù­ôå­ñé­êïýò,­ðïõ­äåß­÷íïõí­ìéá­áéþ­íéá­ôÜ­îç­óôïõò­äéá­ëåã­ìÝ­íïõò­ôïõ­Èå­ïý.
ÅÌÖÁÍÉÓÅÉÓ ÅÉÄÙËÙÍ ÆÙÍÔÙÍ ÁÍÈÑÙÐÙÍ
Åß­íáé­ç­äÝ­êá­ôç­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­ôïõ­Äá­óêÜ­ëïõ­Íé­êï­ëÜ­ïõ­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
Ó'­áõ­ôÞí­á­íá­ëý­å­ôáé­Ý­íá­ðå­ñß­åñ­ãï­öáé­íü­ìå­íï,­ôçò­ðá­ñïõ­óß­áò­åé­äþ­ëùí­æþ­íôùí­áí­èñþ­ðùí.
Ðñü­êåé­ôáé­ãéá­ìéá­äéå­îï­äé­êÞ­Ý­ñåõ­íá­ðñï­åê­âï­ëÞò­ôïõ­á­óôñé­êïý­öï­ñÝ­á­-­óþ­ìá­ôïò­óå­ôå­ñÜ­-
óôéåò­á­ðï­óôÜ­óåéò,­ðïõ­ùò­âá­óé­êÞ­ôçò­áé­ôß­á­èå­ù­ñåß­ôáé­ìéá­óõ­ãêé­íç­óéá­êÞ­êñß­óç,­óõ­íåé­äç­ôÞ­Þ­á­óõ­-
íåß­äç­ôç.
Áõ­ôÝò­ïé­åì­öá­íß­óåéò­óõí­äÝ­ï­íôáé­êáé­ìå­÷ñç­óé­ìï­ðïß­ç­óç­å­êôï­ðëÜ­óìá­ôïò.­¸÷ïõ­ìå­ëïé­ðüí­ðñï­-
åê­âï­ëÞ­Þ­ðñïÝ­êôá­óç­Þ­÷ñç­óé­ìï­ðïß­ç­óç­ôïõ­á­óôñé­êïý­öï­ñÝ­á­ìáò­êáé­âï­ç­èç­ôé­êÞ­óõì­ìå­ôï­÷Þ­ôïõ­å­-
êôï­ðëÜ­óìá­ôïò­áð'­Üë­ëç­ðç­ãÞ,­óõ­íåé­äç­ôÞ­Þ­á­óõ­íåß­äç­ôç.
Ç­ðá­ñïõ­óß­á­óç­áõ­ôÞ­æþ­íôùí­åé­äþ­ëùí,­Ý­÷åé­á­îß­á­á­íõ­ðï­ëü­ãé­óôç,­äéü­ôé­á­ðï­äåß­÷íåé­óêéñ­ôÞ­ìá­ôá
øõ­÷Þò­ìå­óý­ìðñá­îç­ôïõ­Íïõ­ìáò.
ÁÍÁÓÔÅÍÁÑÉÁ
Åß­íáé­ç­åí­äÝ­êá­ôç­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­ôïõ­Äá­óêÜ­ëïõ­Íé­êï­ëÜ­ïõ­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
Ó'­áõ­ôÞí­äåí­á­íá­ëý­å­ôáé­ìü­íïí­ôï­óõ­ãêëï­íé­óôé­êü­ìõ­óôÞ­ñéï­ôçò­á­êá­À­áò­ôùí­Á­íá­óôå­íÜ­ñç­äùí,
áë­ëÜ­äéåéó­äý­åé­ï­á­íá­ãíþ­óôçò­óôá­âá­èý­ôå­ñá­øõ­÷é­êÜ­äéá­ìå­ñß­óìá­ôá­ôïõ­áí­èñþ­ðïõ­ðïõ­ôïí­ìïñ­-
öþ­íïõí­á­íÜ­ëï­ãá.­Ìá­èáß­íåé­ãéá­ôï­ìå­ãá­ëåß­ï­ôçò­áí­èñù­ðï­ðá­ñÜ­óôá­óçò,­óáí­äéïé­êåß­ç­øõ­÷Þ,­ðá­-
ñá­ìå­ñß­æï­íôáò­ôï­Íïõ.
Ìéá­å­óù­ôå­ñé­êÞ­ðëçì­ìõ­ñß­äá­á­ðü­áé­èå­ñé­êÞ­ïõ­óß­á,­å­íé­ó÷ý­åé­ôçò­á­äý­íá­ìçò­óÜñ­êáò­ôçí­óõ­íï­÷Þ
êáé­âëÝ­ðïõ­ìå­ìå­ôá­ìÜ­ôéá­ìáò­ôï­öáé­íü­ìå­íï,­íá­óâÞ­íåé­ç­å­óù­ôå­ñé­êÞ­öù­ôéÜ­(áé­èå­ñé­êÞ­õ­ðü­óôá­óÞ
ìáò)­ôçí­å­îù­ôå­ñé­êÞ­öù­ôéÜ­ôïõ­öõ­óé­êïý­ìáò­êü­óìïõ.
Ç­Ýê­óôá­óç­ðïõ­óõ­íï­äåý­åé­ôïõò­¸ëëç­íåò­Á­íá­óôå­íÜ­ñç­äåò,­åß­íáé­ç­æù­ï­äü­ôñá­äý­íá­ìç­ðïõ­å­-
íþ­íåé­ôçí­å­îù­ôå­ñé­êÞ­õ­ðü­óôá­óç­ôïõ­áí­èñþ­ðïõ­ìå­ôçí­å­óþ­ôå­ñç­Íü­ç­óç­êáé­ìå­ôçí­øõ­÷ï­ðíåõ­ìá­-
ôé­êÞ­áéù­íéü­ôç­ôÜ­ìáò.
Ìéá­ðëÞ­ñç­á­ãá­èü­ôç­ôá­óõ­íï­äåý­åé­ôá­åõ­ëï­ãç­ìÝ­íá­áõ­ôÜ­ðáé­äéÜ­ôïõ­Èå­ïý­êáé­ìéá­ôïõò­ôÜ­óç­óôçí
á­ðá­ñáß­ôç­ôç­åê­óôá­óéá­êÞ­ðñï­óÞ­ëù­óç.
Åñ­ìç­íåý­å­ôáé­å­óù­ôå­ñé­êÜ­ìå­å­êôå­íåßò­ëå­ðôï­ìÝ­ñåéåò­ôï­ðùò­êáé­ãéá­ôß­ôçò­Á­êá­À­áò,­ðéá­äý­íá­ìç
ðá­ñåì­âáß­íåé­êáé­ðùò­ðá­ñïõ­óéÜ­æå­ôáé.
Å­ðé­ðëÝ­ïí­ëå­ðôï­ìÝ­ñåéåò­èá­âñåé­ï­åí­äéá­öå­ñü­ìå­íïò­óôï­âé­âëß­ï­ôïõ­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ­"Îõ­ðü­ëç­ôïé­÷ï­-
ñåý­ïõí­ðÜ­íù­óôç­öù­ôéÜ".
Ç ÄÇÌÉÏÕÑÃÉÁ ÔÙÍ ÊÏÓÌÙÍ
Åß­íáé­ç­äù­äÝ­êá­ôç­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­ôïõ­Äá­óêÜ­ëïõ­Íé­êï­ëÜ­ïõ­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
Åß­íáé­Ý­íáò­á­ðü­ç­÷ïò­ôïõ­ï­ìþ­íõ­ìïõ­âé­âëß­ïõ­ôïõ­é­äß­ïõ­"ÃÝ­íå­óç­êáé­ÈÜ­íá­ôïò­ôùí­Êü­óìùí­êáé
ôùí­¼íôùí,­ý­ëç­-­á­íôé­à­ëç­-­õ­ðå­ñý­ëç,­óý­ìðáí­-­á­íôé­óý­ìðáí­-­õ­ðåñ­óý­ìðáí".
¼ìùò­ìÝ­óá­ôïõ­ðå­ñé­Ý­÷åé­êÜ­ôé­ôï­äéá­öï­ñå­ôé­êü.­Åß­íáé­ç­ðý­êíù­óç­ôùí­åí­íïéþí­ôçò­ÐëÜ­óçò­êáé
ç­âá­èý­ôå­ñç­å­îÞ­ãç­óç­ãéá­ôçí­á­íÜ­ãêç­áõ­ôÞò­ôçò­ÐëÜ­óçò.­Ìéá­ï­ñá­ìá­ôé­óôé­êÞ­ðå­ñé­ãñá­öÞ­ôïõ­÷Ü­ïõò,
ðïõ­ðñï­û­ðÞñ­îå­ôçò­Äç­ìéïõñ­ãé­êÞò­åê­äÞ­ëù­óçò.­Óôéã­ìÝò­ìå­ãÜ­ëçò­åê­èÜì­âù­óçò­êÜ­èå­áí­èñþ­ðïõ,
ü­ôáí­óôçí­ôù­ñé­íÞ­ðá­ñÜ­óôá­óÞ­ôïõ­á­íá­ìé­ìíÞ­óêå­ôáé­ôùí­á­ëç­óìü­íç­ôùí­óôéã­ìþí­ôçò­Èå­ï­ãÝí­íç­óÞò
ôïõ.
Ç­ðëÜ­óç­êáé­ç­á­ðü­ðëá­óç.­Ç­ÃÝ­íå­óç­êáé­ï­á­ðá­ñáß­ôç­ôïò­èÜ­íá­ôïò­ôïõ­êÜ­èå­ãåí­íç­ìÝ­íïõ,­Ýñ­÷ï­-
íôáé­êá­ôÜë­ëç­ëá­óôç­óêÝ­øç­ôïõ­á­íá­ãíþ­óôç,­ôçí­þ­ñá­ðïõ­åé­óÝñ­÷å­ôáé­óôï­ìÝ­ãé­óôï­ìõ­óôÞ­ñéï­ôçò
Äç­ìéïõñ­ãé­êÞò­åê­äÞ­ëù­óçò­ôïõ­áéþ­íéïõ­Ðá­ôÝ­ñá.­¼ìùò­á­ìÝ­óùò­ìå­ôÜ­ôï­ðñþ­ôï­îÜö­íéá­óìá­åì­öá­-
íß­æå­ôáé­ç­å­óù­ôå­ñé­êÞ­åé­ñÞ­íç­ôïõ­áí­èñþ­ðïõ.­Áé­óèÜ­íå­ôáé­á­ðü­ôá­âÜ­èç­ôçò­øõ­÷Þò­ôïõ­ôï­ÊÜ­ëå­óìá
ðïõ­ðÜ­íôá­ãß­íå­ôáé­ãéá­ôçí­å­ðé­óôñï­öÞ­ôïõ.
×á­ñåß­ôå­ü­ëïé­ïé­Üí­èñù­ðïé­ãéá­ôß­ðß­óù­á­ðü­ôçí­ðñï­óù­ñé­íü­ôç­ôá,­êñý­âå­ôáé­êáé­å­íõ­ðÜñ­÷åé­ç­ü­ìïñ­-
öç­áéù­íéü­ôç­ôá.­Ôá­ü­íôá,­ôá­áí­èñþ­ðé­íá­êáé­ôá­á­íá­ñßè­ìç­ôá­óõ­íü­íôá,­èá­íéþ­óïõí­ôçí­áéþ­íéá­÷á­ñÜ
ü­ôáí­á­ðï­ëõ­ôñù­èïýí­á­ðü­ôçí­ðëÜ­íá­ôïý­ôç­ý­ëç­êáé­ìðïõí­óôçí­á­ëç­èé­íÞ­Áéù­íéü­ôç­ôá.
ÌÕ­ÓÔÉ­ÊÉ­ÓÌÏÓ
Åß­íáé­ç­äÝ­êá­ôç­ôñß­ôç­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­ôïõ­Äá­óêÜ­ëïõ­Íé­êï­ëÜ­ïõ­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
Ó'­áõ­ôÞí­ðå­ñé­ãñÜ­öå­ôáé­ç­åõ­èåß­á­ï­äüò.­Åß­íáé­ç­ëå­ù­öü­ñïò­ðïõ­ï­äç­ãåß­êá­ôåõ­èåß­áí­ãñáì­ìÞ­ðñïò
ôïí­äé­êü­ìáò­ôïí­Ðá­ôÝ­ñá.
¼ðùò­á­íá­öÝ­ñå­ôáé­ü­ôáí­ìé­ëïý­ìå­ãéá­Ìõ­óôé­êé­óìü,­ìé­ëïý­ìå­ãéá­å­ðé­êñÜ­ôç­óç­ìÝ­óá­óôï­åß­íáé­ìáò
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
ough­experimentations­in­­the­materializations­of­Indian­princesse­Katia­King,­with­intermedi-
ate­Florans­Kuk's­assistance.
And­when­the­journalists­asked­him­if­it­is­true­what­is­said­about­happening­in­the­exper-
iments­that­all­the­present­scientsts­signed,­he­answered:­"I­do­not­say­that­this­is­possible,­I
say­that­it­is".
William­Krux­is­the­scientist­who­had­discovered­the­element­Thalio­and­was­awarded­with
the­Nobel­prize.
ESSEANS
It­is­Master­Nikolaos­Margiori's­ninth­essay.
In­it,­the­most­curious­heresis­of­the­era­of­Jesus­Christ­is­presented.­It­is­a­religious­con-
vent­organization­that­held­its­own­line­on­the­Mosaic­law­and­on­Jehovah.
The­earthen­pots­of­Kumran­show­us­by­the­cylinders­of­their­parchments,­the­Esoteric­in-
clination­to­a­pre-eternal­Mysticism.­The­baptism­in­the­water­and­their­morality­are­based­on
Esoteric­laws­that­show­an­eternal­order­to­the­chosen­of­God.
APPEARANCES OF LIVING PEOPLE'S IDOLS
This­is­Master­Nikolaos­Margiori's­tenth­essay.
In­it,­a­curious­phenomenon­is­analyzed:­the­phenomenon­of­the­presence­of­living­peo-
ple's­idols.
It­is­about­an­extensive­search­of­projecting­the­stellar­bearer­-­body­in­immense­distances
the­basic­cause­of­which­is­considered­an­emotional­crisis,­conscious­or­unconscious
These­appearances­are­also­connected­with­the­use­of­the­hectoplasm.­So,­we­have­a­pro-
jection­or­a­prolongation­or­an­employment­of­our­stellar­bearer­and­an­auxiliary­participation
of­the­hectoplasm­from­another­source,­conscious­or­unconscious,
This­presentation­of­the­living­idols­has­an­incalculable­value,­because­it­proves­the­thrills
of­the­soul­by­the­cooperation­of­our­Mind.
ANASTENARIA
This­is­Master­Nikolaos­Margiori's­eleventh­essay.
In­it,­not­only­the­shaking­mystery­of­the­Anastenarides­non-flammability­is­analyzed,­but
the­reader­can­penetrate­the­man's­deeper­psychical­departments­that­educate­him­properly.
He­learns­about­the­grandeur­of­the­human­presentation,­when­the­soul­rules,­putting­aside
the­Mind.
An­internal­flood­tide­of­etheric­substance­strengthens­the­cohesion­of­the­weak­flesh­and
we­see­by­our­own­eyes­this­phenomenon:­the­internal­fire­(our­etheric­substance)­quench-
es­the­external­fire­of­our­physical­world.
The­ekstasy­that­accompanies­the­Greek­Anasternarides­is­the­life-giving­power­that­unites
the­man's­external­substance­with­the­inner­Intellect­and­with­our­psychopneumatic­eternity.
A­full­goodness­accompanies­these­blessed­children­of­God­and­a­tendency­of­them­to­the
necessary­ecstatic­attachment.
The­how­and­the­why­of­the­non-flammability,­which­power­interferes­and­how­it­is­pre-
sented,­is­interpreted­rightly­in­extensive­details.
The­reader­will­find­more­details­in­Margiori's­book­"They­dance­barefoot­on­the­fire".
THE CREATION OF THE WORLDS
This­is­Master­Nikolaos­Margiori's­twelfth­essay.
It­is­an­echo­of­the­homonymous­book­of­same­"Birth­and­Death­of­the­Worlds­and­of­the
Beings,­matter-antimatter-­hyper-matter,­universe-antiuniverse-hyperuniverse".
But­it­contains­within­it­something­different.­It­is­the­condensation­of­the­Creation­mean-
ings­and­the­deeper­explanation­for­the­necessity­of­this­Creation.­A­visionary­description­of
the­chaos­that­existed­before­the­Creative­expression.­Moments­of­a­great­dazzling­for­every
man,­when­at­his­present­presentation­he­remembers­the­unforgettable­moments­of­his­God-
brth.
The­creation­and­the­of-creation.­The­Birth­and­the­necessary­death­of­every­born­being,
come­properly­to­the­reader's­thought,­when­he­enters­the­greatest­mystery­of­the­eternal­Fa-
ther's­Creative­expression.­But­immediately­after­the­first­startle,­the­man's­esoteric­peace­ap-
pears.­He­feels­from­the­depth­of­his­soul­the­Call­that­always­happens­for­his­return.
Be­happy­all­of­you­because­behind­the­temporariness,­the­beautiful­eternity­is­hidden.­The
human­beings­and­the­innumerable­fellow-beings­will­feel­the­eternal­joy­when­they­will­be­re-
deemed­from­this­cheating­matter­and­theywill­enter­the­true­Eternity.
MYSTICISM
It­is­Master­Nikolaos­Margiori's­thirteen­essay.
In­it­the­straight­way­is­described.­It­is­the­avenue­that­guides­directly­to­our­own­Father.
When­we­talk­about­the­Mysticism,­we­mention­the­prevalence­of­the­soul-spiritual­pow-
ers­in­our­being.­Its­aim­is­to­unite­us­with­the­person­who­bore­us­in­the­forming­and­in­the
unforming­situation.
Mysticism­is­the­awakening­within­ourselves­of­those­ancient­thrillings,­at­the­moment­we
87 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
ôùí­øõ­÷ï­ðíåõ­ìá­ôé­êþí­äõ­íÜ­ìå­ùí.­Óêï­ðüò­ôïõ­åß­íáé­íá­ìáò­å­íþ­óåé­ì'­áõ­ôüí­ðïõ­ìáò­ãÝí­íç­óå­óôç
ìïñ­öé­êÞ­êáé­óôçí­Ü­ìïñ­öç­êá­ôÜ­óôá­óç.
Ìõ­óôé­êé­óìüò­åß­íáé­ôï­îý­ðíç­ìá­ìÝ­óá­óôïí­ß­äéï­å­áõ­ôü­ìáò­å­êåß­íùí­ôùí­áñ­÷áß­ùí­óêéñ­ôç­ìÜ­ôùí
ìáò,­ü­ôáí­êÜ­ðïéá­óôéã­ìÞ­âãÞ­êá­ìå­á­ðü­ôï­Èå­ú­êü­ôïõ­ÅÉ­ÍÁÉ.
Ìå­ôïí­Ìõ­óôé­êé­óìü­ãíù­ñß­æïõ­ìå­îá­íÜ­Å­êåß­íïí­êáé­íéþ­èïõ­ìå­ôçí­ß­äéá­ôçí­óõ­ãêß­íç­óç­ðïõ­íéþ­-
óá­ìå­ðñéí­á­ðü­á­íá­ñßè­ìç­ôá­÷ñï­íé­êÜ­äéá­óôÞ­ìá­ôá,­ü­ôáí­ìáò­ãÝí­íç­óå­á­ðü­ôïí­áéþ­íéï­Å­óù­êü­óìï­Ôïõ.
¼ðïõ­ìõ­óôé­êé­óôÞò­êáé­ìéá­øõ­÷ï­ðíåõ­ìá­ôé­êÞ­á­íÜ­âá­óç­óôá­ý­øé­óôá­äéá­ìå­ñß­óìá­ôá­Å­êåß­íïõ.­Ç­öõ­-
óé­êÞ­æù­Þ­ôïõ­ìõ­óôé­êé­óôÞ­åß­íáé­ðá­ñÜ­äåéã­ìá­ãéá­ìß­ìç­óç.­ÓôñÝ­öå­ôáé­óôá­õ­øç­ëÜ­êáé­óôá­ù­ñáß­á,­óôá
áñ­ìï­íé­êÜ­êáé­óôá­ôÝ­ëåéá.­¸÷åé­ìÝ­óá­ôïõ­ôçí­å­êëå­êôé­êü­ôç­ôá­êáé­åß­íáé­á­ðü­öý­óç­ôïõ­å­êëå­êôé­êüò.­Ç
äé­êáéï­óý­íç­ôïõ­åß­íáé­á­ðá­ñÜ­ìéë­ëç­êáé­ìÜ­ëé­óôá­ðñï­óâëÝ­ðåé­ðñïò­áõ­ôÞí­ìå­é­äéáß­ôå­ñç­ðñï­óÞ­ëù­óç
êáé­ìÝ­ãé­óôï­åí­äéá­öÝ­ñïí.­Å­íþ­íå­ôáé­ðï­ëý­óõ­÷íÜ­ìå­ôçí­áéþ­íéá­Ðç­ãÞ­ôçò­Ôå­ëåéü­ôç­ôáò.
ÄÑÁÂÉÄÅÓ ÏÉ ÐÑÏÅËËÇÍÅÓ ÔÏÕ ÁÉÃÁÉÏÕ
Åß­íáé­ç­äÝ­êá­ôç­ôÝ­ôáñ­ôç­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­ôïõ­Äá­óêÜ­ëïõ­Íé­êï­ëÜ­ïõ­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
Ó'­áõ­ôÞí­ðá­ñïõ­óéÜ­æï­íôáé­ïé­ìá­êñé­íïß­ðñü­ãï­íïé­ôùí­Åë­ëÞ­íùí,­ïé­Äñá­âß­äåò­(ðñï­êá­ôá­êëõ­óìéáß­-
ïò­ëá­üò),­ïé­ï­ðïß­ïé­ìå­ôïí­ðï­ëé­ôé­óìü­ôïõò­åß­÷áí­ðñï­÷ù­ñÞ­óåé­óå­õ­øç­ëü­ôá­ôá­óç­ìåß­á­ôå­÷íé­êïý­êáé
é­äß­ùò­ðíåõ­ìá­ôé­êïý­ìå­ãá­ëåß­ïõ.
¼ðùò­ðå­ñé­ãñÜ­öå­ôáé­Þ­ôáí­èá­íÜ­óé­ìïé­å­÷èñïß­ìå­ôïõò­óõã­ãå­íåßò­ôïõò­Á­ôëá­íôß­íïõò­êáé­ôå­ëé­êÜ
êá­ôüñ­èù­óáí­ìå­õ­ðáé­ôéü­ôç­ôá­ôùí­Á­ôëá­íôß­íùí­áì­öü­ôå­ñïé­ïé­ëá­ïß­áõ­ôïß­íá­áë­ëç­ëï­êá­ôá­óôñá­öïýí.
Áõ­ôü­óõ­íÝ­âç­êå­ðñéí­á­ðü­äÝ­êá­Ý­îé­÷é­ëéÜ­äåò­ðå­ñß­ðïõ­÷ñü­íéá­êáé­ìå­ôá­âëÞ­èç­êå­ç­ôñá­ãé­êÞ­÷þ­ñá
ôïõò,­ç­Åí­äï­÷þ­ñá,­óôç­óç­ìå­ñé­íÞ­Ìå­óü­ãåéï.­Ï­Äåõ­êá­ëß­ù­íïò­êáé­ç­ãõ­íáß­êá­ôïõ­Ðýñ­ñá­ðñï­Þë­èáí
áð'­å­êåß­ü­ôáí­ôï­îý­ëé­íï­ðëïéÜ­ñéü­ôïõò­êÜ­èé­óå­óôïí­Ðáñ­íáó­óü.
Áõ­ôïß­ðïõ­ãëý­ôù­óáí­óôéò­êï­ñõ­öÝò­ôùí­âïõ­íþí­ôçò­êá­ôá­ðï­íôé­óìÝ­íçò­Åí­äï­÷þ­ñáò­óõ­íÝ­÷é­óáí
ôçí­æù­Þ­ôïõò­ìå­ôï­êáé­íïýñ­ãéï­ü­íåé­ñü­ôïõò.­Íá­öý­ãïõí­ðñïò­ôçí­á­óÜ­ëåõ­ôç­Á­íá­ôï­ëÞ.­¸ôóé­ý­óôå­-
ñá­á­ðü­ëß­ãá­÷ñü­íéá­Ý­ãé­íå­ç­ìå­ãá­ëý­ôå­ñç­ìå­ôá­íÜ­óôåõ­óç­ëá­þí­óôçí­ðå­ñéï­÷Þ.
Ç­ðëåéï­íü­ôç­ôá­ü­ëùí­ü­óïé­á­ðÝ­ìåé­íáí­ìá­æß­ìå­ôïõò­á­ðï­ãü­íïõò­ôïõò­Ý­öõ­ãáí­ðñïò­ôçí­á­íá­ôï­-
ëÞ,­ü­ðïõ­êáé­Ý­÷ôé­óáí­óôï­äéÜ­âá­ôïõò­ôéò­îá­êïõ­óìÝ­íåò­ðï­ëé­ôåß­åò­Ìï­÷Ýí­æï­ÍôÜ­ñï­êáé­Åë­×áñ­ñÜ­-
ðá­êáé­ìå­ôÝ­äù­óáí­ôá­ðíåõ­ìá­ôé­êÜ­ôïõò­öþ­ôá­(ãéü­ãêá,­èñç­óêåß­á­ê.ë.ð.).­¾óôå­ñá­ôñÜ­âç­îáí­á­ðü
ôçí­ãíþ­ñé­ìç­êïé­ëÜ­äá­ôïõ­Éí­äïý­êáé­å­ãêá­ôá­óôÜ­èç­êáí­óôçí­ôù­ñé­íÞ­Éí­äß­á.­Ç­Éí­äß­á­åß­íáé­á­äåë­öé­êÞ­÷þ­-
ñá­ðñïò­ôçí­Åë­ëÜ­äá.­Å­êá­ôïì­ìý­ñéá­å­êá­ôïì­ìõ­ñß­ùí­Éí­äþí­ìé­ëïýí­á­êü­ìá­êáé­óÞ­ìå­ñá­ôéò­Äñá­âé­íéá­-
êÝò­ãëþó­óåò,­å­êåß­íåò­ôùí­ðñï­ãü­íùí­ìáò­Äñá­âß­äùí,­ðïõ­îå­êß­íç­óáí­êõ­ñß­ùò­á­ðü­ôï­íç­óß­ÊñÞ­ôç
ðñéí­á­ðü­10.000­Ý­ùò­12.000­÷ñü­íéá.
Ï ÅËÅÃ×ÏÓ ÔÙÍ ÄÏÍÇÓÅÙÍ
Åß­íáé­ç­äÝ­êá­ôç­ðÝ­ìðôç­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­ôïõ­Äá­óêÜ­ëïõ­Íé­êï­ëÜ­ïõ­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
Ó'­áõ­ôÞí­ðá­ñïõ­óéÜ­æå­ôáé­ï­êá­ôá­ëõ­ôé­êüò­ñü­ëïò­ôùí­êñá­äá­óìþí­Þ­ôùí­äï­íÞ­óå­ùí­ðïõ­åß­íáé­ôï
ðáí­óôçí­å­óù­ôå­ñé­êÞ­á­íá­ãíþ­ñé­óç­ôùí­êü­óìùí.­Ôá­ðÜ­íôá­ðÜë­ëï­íôáé­ìå­ñõè­ìé­êÞ­á­ðü­äï­óç.­Á­ðü­ôï
Ü­ôï­ìï­êáé­ðÜ­íù­Ý­ùò­ôá­óý­ìðá­íôá­êáé­á­ðü­ôï­Ü­ôï­ìï­Ý­ùò­ôï­êá­ôá­óêåý­á­óìá­ðïõ­ôï­á­ðï­êá­ëïý­ìå
Üí­èñù­ðï.
¼ôáí­áõ­ôïß­ïé­êñá­äá­óìïß­á­äõ­íá­ôß­óïõí­Þ­õ­ðå­ñå­íôá­èïýí­å­ðÝñ­÷å­ôáé­ìéá­äéá­öï­ñå­ôé­êÞ­êá­ôÜ­óôá­-
óç­óôïí­Üí­èñù­ðï­ðïõ­ôçí­÷á­ñá­êôç­ñß­æïõ­ìå­áñ­ñþ­óôéá.­Ç­èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôé­êÞ­ôùí­êñá­äá­óìþí­Þ­áë­ëéþò
ï­Ý­ëåã­÷ïò­ôùí­äï­íÞ­óå­ùí­á­ðï­óêï­ðåß­íá­äéá­ôç­ñÞ­óåé­ôá­áß­ôéá­ìå­ôáë­ëá­ãÞò­ôïõ­ãíþ­ñé­ìïõ­ñõè­ìïý
ôùí­öõ­óé­êþí­êñá­äá­óìþí.­Ç­äéá­öï­ñï­ðïß­ç­óç­áõ­ôþí­ôùí­êñá­äá­óìþí­ðñÝ­ðåé­íá­ãß­íå­ôáé­Ý­îù­á­ðü
ôïí­öõ­óé­êü­öï­ñÝ­á­ìáò.
ËÝ­ãå­ôáé­èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôé­êÞ­áõ­ôÞ­ç­å­íÝñ­ãåéÜ­ìáò­ãéá­ôß­ìå­ôçí­å­ðá­íá­öï­ñÜ­ôïõ­ñõè­ìïý­óôïí­áñ­÷é­êü
õ­ãéÞ­ðáë­ìü­ôïõ,­èå­ñá­ðåý­åé­êÜ­èå­á­íù­ìá­ëß­á­ðïõ­ðá­ñïõ­óéÜ­óôç­êå­óôï­öõ­óé­êü­öï­ñÝ­á.­Ôá­ðÜ­íôá­åß­-
íáé­êñá­äá­óìïß.­Ï­ñõè­ìüò­ôïõò­åß­íáé­ç­õ­ãåß­á,­ü­ôáí­êñá­ôåß­ôáé­óôá­óç­ìåß­á­ôçò­ôå­ëåéü­ôç­ôáò.­
Ìðï­ñïý­ìå­íá­ñõè­ìï­äï­íïý­ìå­ôï­óþ­ìá­ìáò;­Íáé­ìðï­ñïý­ìå.­Ôü­ôå­èá­êñá­ôïý­ìå­ôïõò­å­óù­ôå­ñé­-
êïýò­êáé­å­îù­ôå­ñé­êïýò­ìáò­êñá­äá­óìïýò­óå­ìéá­ôÝ­ëåéá­óõ­íåñ­ãá­óß­á,­óå­ìéá­á­ðß­èá­íç­áñ­ìï­íß­á.­Ôü­-
ôå­èá­Ý­÷ïõ­ìå­ôç­ìü­íé­ìç­õ­ãåß­á.­Ôü­ôå­ç­èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôé­êÞ­ôùí­êñá­äá­óìþí­èá­ìáò­å­ðá­íá­öÝñ­íåé­êï­íôÜ,
ðï­ëý­êï­íôÜ­óôçí­ôå­ëåéü­ôç­ôá.
Áõ­ôÜ­á­êñé­âþò­å­ðé­äéþ­êåé­íá­ìáò­á­ðï­óá­öç­íß­óåé­êáé­íá­ìáò­äé­äÜ­îåé­ç­åí­ëü­ãù­ìå­ëÝ­ôç.
ÔÉ ÅÉÍÁÉ Ï ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÓÌÏÓ
Åß­íáé­ç­äÝ­êá­ôç­Ý­êôç­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­ôïõ­Äá­óêÜ­ëïõ­Íé­êï­ëÜ­ïõ­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
Ó'­áõ­ôÞí­åé­óåñ­÷ü­ìá­óôå­óôá­Ü­äõ­ôá­ôùí­á­äý­ôùí.­Åñ­÷ü­ìá­óôå­ìå­ëü­ãéá­å­îù­ôå­ñé­êÜ,­íá­ðïý­ìå­êá­-
ôá­óôÜ­óåéò­ðïõ­äåí­åê­öñÜ­æï­íôáé­ìá­êáé­ðïõ­äåí­ëÝ­ãï­íôáé.­Á­íá­öÝ­ñï­íôáé­ü­óá­ìðï­ñïýí­íá­íï­ç­èïýí
á­ðü­ôïí­á­íá­ãíþ­óôç.­Áõ­ôü­å­ðé­óç­ìáß­íå­ôáé­ãéá­ôß­ðñü­êåé­ôáé­ãéá­õ­ðï­êåé­ìå­íé­êÜ­ìå­ëå­ôÞ­ìá­ôá­ðïõ­ãß­íï­-
íôáé­âéþ­ìá­ôá­á­ðü­å­êåß­íïõò­ðïõ­ìðáß­íïõí­óôçí­õ­ðï­êåé­ìå­íé­êÞ­êá­ôÜ­óôá­óç,­åß­ôå­óôçí­õ­ðï­óõ­íåß­äç­-
ôç­åß­ôå­óôçí­õ­ðåñ­óõ­íåß­äç­ôç­ðñáã­ìá­ôé­êü­ôç­ôá.
Äåí­åß­íáé­äõ­íá­ôüí­íá­äéá­ôõ­ðù­èïýí­ìå­ôçí­ãëùó­óé­êÞ­êáé­ìÜ­ëé­óôá­ãñá­ðôÞ­Ýí­íïéá­ôïõ­ëü­ãïõ.
Ôá­âéþ­ìá­ôá­áõ­ôÜ­åß­íáé­ðñï­óù­ðé­êÜ­êáé­åê­äç­ëþ­íï­íôáé­ìå­ôïí­Å­óù­ôå­ñé­êü­êõ­ñß­ùò­ëü­ãï.
Å­óù­ôå­ñé­óìüò­åß­íáé­ç­Üë­ëç­ü­øç­ôïõ­å­îù­ôå­ñé­óìïý.­Åß­íáé­ôï­á­íôß­èå­ôï­ôïõ­ï­ðïéïõ­äÞ­ðï­ôå­åê­äç­-
ëù­ìÝ­íïõ.­Å­óù­ôå­ñé­óìüò­åß­íáé­ï­÷þ­ñïò­ôïõ­á­ü­ñá­ôïõ.­Å­êåß­âá­óé­ëåý­åé­ç­ðíåõ­ìá­ôï­øõ­÷Þ­ôïõ­áí­èñþ­-
ðïõ.­Åß­íáé­ç­ðå­ñéï­÷Þ­ôçò­Ðáí­äç­ìéïõñ­ãß­áò,­ü­ðïõ­óõ­íá­ãå­ëÜ­æï­íôáé­ïé­ðíåõ­ìá­ôï­øõ­÷Ýò­êáé­ü­ðïõ­ï
áí­èñù­ðï­íïýò­ï­öõ­óé­êüò,­á­äõ­íá­ôåß­íá­åé­ó÷ù­ñÞ­óåé­êáé­íá­äå­÷èåß­ôïõò­õ­øç­ëïýò­êñá­äá­óìïýò
ôïõò.­¼ðïéïò­åé­óÝë­èåé­ìéá­öï­ñÜ­äåí­ëç­óìï­íåß­êáé­äåí­á­öÞ­íåé­ôçí­Ýê­ðëç­êôç­áí­èñù­ðï­óêÝ­øç­ôïõ
íá­á­ðï­ìá­êñõí­èåß­á­ðü­å­êåß.
Ï­Å­óù­ôå­ñé­óìüò­äé­äÜ­óêåé­êáé­äéá­öù­ôß­æåé­êá­ôÜ­äý­íá­ìç­óôçí­öõ­óé­êÞ­êá­ôÜ­óôá­óç­ôïõ­áí­èñù­ðï­-
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
went­out­His­Divine­BEING.
By­Mysticism,­we­know­Him­again,­and­we­feel­the­same­emotion­we­felt­innumerable­years
ago,­when­he­bore­us­from­His­eternal­Esocosm.
Where­there­is­a­mystic,­there­is­a­soul-spiritual­ascension­to­the­highest­apartments­of
Him.­The­mystic's­physical­life­is­an­example­for­an­imitation.­It­turns­to­the­high­and­fine­things,
to­the­harmonious­and­perfect­ones.­He­has­within­him­the­selectiveness­and­he­is­selective
by­nature.­His­justice­is­unrivaled­and­he­even­envisages­it­in­a­particular­concentration­and
in­a­greatest­interest.­He­often­gets­united­with­the­eternal­Source­of­the­Perfection.
DRAVIDIANS, THE FIRST GREEKS
OF THE AEGEAN SEA
This­is­Master­Nikolaos­Margiori's­fourteenth­essay.
In­it­the­far­ancestors­of­the­Greeks­are­presented,­the­Dravidians­(an­antediluvian­people)
who,­by­their­civilization­had­advanced­at­a­highest­extent­­of­­technical­and­mainly­of­spiritu-
al­grandeur.
As­described,­they­were­deadly­enemies­of­their­relatives­Atlantins­and­at­the­end,­these
peoples­managed­to­destroy­each­other­due­to­the­Atlantins'­culpability.­This­happened­about
sixteen­years­ago­and­their­tragical­country­was­changed­into­the­Hinterland,­the­modern
Mediterranean.­Defkalion­and­his­wife­Pyrra­came­thence­when­their­wooden­small­ship­sat
on­Parnassus.
Those­who­were­saved­on­the­tops­of­the­mountains­of­the­sunk­Hinterland­continued­their
life­with­their­new­dream:­to­go­to­the­immovable­East.­So,­after­a­few­years,­the­greatest­im-
migration­of­the­peoples­took­place­in­the­district.
The­majority­of­all­those­who­remained­together­with­their­descendants­left­to­the­east,­where
they­built­on­their­passage­the­renowned­cities­Mohenzo­Daro­and­El­Harrapa­and­transmit-
ted­their­spiritual­lights­(yoga,­religion­etc.).­Then,­they­crossed­the­intimate­valley­of­the­Hin-
dus­river­and­they­were­settled­in­the­modern­India.­India­is­a­fraternal­country­to­Greece­Mil-
lions­of­Indians­still­speak­the­Dravidian­languages,­those­of­our­ancestors­Dravidians,­who
started­mainly­from­Crete­island­10.000-12.000­years­ago.
THE VIBRATIONS CONTROL
This­Master­Nikolaos­Margiori's­fifteeenth­essay.
In­it­the­catalytic­role­of­the­vibrations­or­of­the­pulsations­that­is­everything­in­the­internal
recognition­of­the­worlds,­is­presented.­Everything­is­vibrated­in­a­rhythmical­yield:­from­the
individual­and­up­to­the­universes­and­from­the­individual­to­the­creature­we­call­man.
When­these­vibrations­become­weaker­or­when­they­get­overstrained,­a­different­situation
occurs­to­man­that­we­call­disease.­The­therapeutics­of­the­vibrations­or­otherwise,­the­vi-
brations­control­aims­to­keep­the­changing­causes­of­the­known­rhythm­of­the­physical­caus-
es.­The­differentiation­of­these­vibrations­must­be­done­out­of­our­physical­bearer.
This­energy­of­ours­is­called­therapeutics­because,­by­the­coming­of­the­rhythm­back­to
its­original,­healthy­pulse,­it­cures­every­abnormality­that­was­presented­in­the­physical­bear-
er,­Everything­is­vibrations.­Their­rhythm­is­the­health,­when­it­is­held­at­the­perfection­points.
Can­we­rhythm-vibrate­our­body?­Yes,­we­can.­Then,­we­will­keep­our­internal­and­exter-
nal­vibrations­at­a­perfect­cooperation,­at­an­unbelievable­harmony.­Then,­we­will­have­a­sta-
ble­health,­Then,­the­therapeutics­of­our­vibration­will­bring­us­back­near,­very­near­to­the­per-
fection.
The­mentioned­essay­aims­to­clarify­and­teach­us­exactly­the­above.
WHAT ESOTERISM IS
This­is­Master­Nikolaos­Margiori's­sixteenth­essay.
In­it­we­enter­the­impenetrable­sanctuaries.­We­come,­by­external­words,­to­talk­about
those­situations­that­are­not­expressed­nor­said.­Only­what­can­be­understood­by­the­reader,
is­mentioned.­This­is­pointed­out­because­it­is­about­certain­subjective­studies­that­become
experiences­by­those­who­enter­the­subjective­situation,­either­in­the­subconscious­or­in­the
hyperconscious­reality.
It­is­not­possible­for­them­to­be­expressed­by­the­glossical­nor­even­by­the­written­sense
of­the­word.­These­experiences­are­personal­and­are­expressed­mainly­in­the­Esoteric­wordy.
Esoterism­is­the­other­side­of­the­exoterism.­It­is­the­opposite­of­anything­expressed.­Es-
oterism­is­the­space­of­the­invisible,­There­the­man's­spirit-soul­rules.­It­is­the­district­of­the
Omnicreation­were­the­spirit-souls­consort­and­where­the­physical­human-mind­cannot­en-
ter­and­accept­their­high­vibrations,­He­who­enters­once­will­not­forget­and­will­not­let­his­sur-
prised­humanthought­to­get­away­of­there.
The­Esoterism­teaches­and­enlightens­as­much­as­possible­in­the­physical­situation­of­the
human-mind­the­facts­that­happen­at­the­area­of­the­Omnicreation­that­exists­beyond­the­vis-
ible.
Some­of­the­main­branches­of­the­Esoterism­that­are­described­in­the­Essay­are:­Medita-
tion,­Esoteric­Therapeutics,­Esoteric­Initiation,­Esoteric­Philosophy,­Hypnotism-Orhopsychism,
Scientific­Spiritualism,­Astrology-Astrosophy,­Desymbolism,­Ancient­Mysteries,­Antediluvian
88 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
íïý­ôá­ãå­ãï­íü­ôá­ðïõ­ëá­âáß­íïõí­÷þ­ñá­óôçí­ðå­ñéï­÷Þ­ôçò­Ðáí­äç­ìéïõñ­ãß­áò­ðïõ­âñß­óêå­ôáé­ðÝ­ñáí
ôïõ­ï­ñá­ôïý.
Ìå­ñé­êïß­á­ðü­ôïõò­êõ­ñéü­ôå­ñïõò­êëÜ­äïõò­ôïõ­Å­óù­ôå­ñé­óìïý­ðïõ­ðå­ñé­ãñÜ­öï­íôáé­óôçí­ìå­ëÝ­ôç
åß­íáé­ïé­å­îÞò:­Äéá­ëï­ãé­óìüò,­Å­óù­ôå­ñé­êÞ­Èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôé­êÞ,­Å­óù­ôå­ñé­êÞ­Ìý­ç­óç,­Å­óù­ôå­ñé­êÞ­Öé­ëï­óï­öß­á,
Õ­ðíù­ôé­óìüò­-­Ïñ­èï­øõ­÷é­óìüò,­Å­ðé­óôç­ìï­íé­êüò­Ðíåõ­ìá­ôé­óìüò,­Á­óôñï­ëï­ãß­á­-­Á­óôñï­óï­öß­á,­Á­ðï­-
óõì­âï­ëé­óìüò,­Áñ­÷áß­á­Ìõ­óôÞ­ñéá,­Ðñï­êá­ôá­êëõ­óìéáß­ïé­Ðï­ëé­ôé­óìïß,­Öé­ëï­óï­öß­á­ï­ëü­êëç­ñçò­ôçò­Ãéü­-
ãêá,­Á­ðï­êñõ­öé­óìüò­(Á­ðï­êñõ­öï­ëï­ãß­á),­Ìõ­óôé­êé­óìüò­ê.ë.ð.
Ï ÉÅÑÏÓ ÊÕËÉÍÄÑÏÓ
ÔÏÕ ÊÁÍÏÍÉÓÌÏÕ ÔÙÍ ÅÓÓÁÉÙÍ
Åß­íáé­ç­äÝ­êá­ôç­Ý­âäï­ìç­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­ôïõ­Äá­óêÜ­ëïõ­Íé­êï­ëÜ­ïõ­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
Ó'­áõ­ôÞí­ìá­èáß­íïõ­ìå­ðþò­æïý­óáí­êáé­ðþò­åñ­ãÜ­æï­íôáí­ïé­Ü­ãéïé­áõ­ôïß­Üí­èñù­ðïé­ôçò­å­ðï­÷Þò
ôïõ­×ñé­óôïý,­ðïõ­Þ­ôáí­óõ­ìðá­ôñéþ­ôåò­ôïõ­êáé­ß­óùò­óõ­íé­äå­ï­ëü­ãïé­ôïõ.­Ðï­ôÝ­ï­É­ç­óïýò­äåí­á­íÝ­öå­-
ñå­áõ­ôÞ­ôçí­óêëç­ñï­ôñÜ­÷ç­ëç­áß­ñå­óç­ôçò­öõ­ëÞò­ôïõ­êáé­ôçò­ðá­ôñß­äáò­ôïõ.­Ãéá­ôß­Ü­ñá­ãå­áõ­ôü;
ÌÞ­ðùò­ìÝ­óá­óôï­ôå­ñÜ­óôéï­óôñá­ôü­ðå­äï­ôïõ­Êïõì­ñÜí,­äß­ðëá­óôçí­Éå­ñé­÷þ­ðá­ñÝ­ìåé­íå­ôá­÷ñü­-
íéá­ôçò­á­ðïõ­óß­áò­ôïõ;­Ï­éå­ñüò­Êý­ëéí­äñïò­ôïõ­Êá­íï­íé­óìïý­ôùí­Åó­óáß­ùí­ìáò­âãÜ­æåé­á­ðü­ðïë­ëÝò
á­ðï­ñß­åò­êáé­ðÜ­ìðïë­ëåò­õ­ðï­èÝ­óåéò.­Ì'­áõ­ôüí­âëÝ­ðïõ­ìå­ôïí­Åó­óáß­ï­á­ðáë­ëáã­ìÝ­íï­á­ëç­èé­íÜ­á­ðü
ôá­å­ãêü­óìéá­êáé­á­öéå­ñù­ìÝ­íï­óôéò­ìõ­óôé­êé­óôé­êÝò­á­óêÞ­óåéò­ôïõ.
¸ôóé­ãíù­ñß­æïõ­ìå­ìéá­ðåé­èáñ­÷ß­á,­ðïõ­ôçí­äéá­ôç­ñåß­ìéá­Å­óù­ôå­ñé­êÞ­á­öý­ðíé­óç,­ðïõ­Ý­êá­íå­íá­ðá­-
ñïõ­óéá­óèïýí­å­êåß­íïé­ðïõ­âï­Þ­èç­óáí­ôïí­É­ç­óïý­íá­å­êôå­ëÝ­óåé­å­ðß­ãçò­ôï­Ü­ãéï­ôïõ­Ýñ­ãï.­Õ­ðï­èÝ­-
ôïõí­ðþò­á­ðü­ôçí­ðåé­èáñ­÷ß­á­ôïõ­Êá­íï­íé­óìïý,­á­ðü­ôïí­éå­ñü­áõ­ôüí­Êý­ëéí­äñï,­åê­ðÞ­ãá­óå­ç­á­íá­-
ãêáß­á­Á­öý­ðíé­óç­ôùí­âï­ç­èþí­ôïõ­Êõ­ñß­ïõ­É­ç­óïý­×ñé­óôïý.­Éù­Üí­íçò­ï­Ðñü­äñï­ìïò,­Éù­Üí­íçò­ï­Èå­ï­-
ëü­ãïò­êáé­Åõáã­ãå­ëé­óôÞò­êáé­ß­óùò­êáé­Üë­ëïé­ðïë­ëïß,­ìá­èÞ­ôåõ­óáí­äß­ðëá­óôïõò­Âé­âëé­êïýò­á­ãß­ïõò
ôùí­ðñï­å­óôþí­Åó­óáß­ùí­ðïõ­äé­Ý­èå­ôáí­ôïõ­Å­óù­ôå­ñé­óìïý­ôá­Ü­ãéá­ãíù­ñß­óìá­ôá.
Óôçí­Áñ­÷Þ­Þ­ôáí­ï­Ëü­ãïò.­Áõ­ôüí­ôïí­ëü­ãï­÷ñç­óé­ìï­ðïéåß­ï­Éù­Üí­íçò.­Áõ­ôü­ôï­ëü­ãï­÷ñç­óé­ìï­ðïéïý­-
óáí­ïé­Åó­óáß­ïé...
ÅÑÙÔÁÓ ÊÁÉ ÁÃÁÐÇ
Åß­íáé­ç­äÝ­êá­ôç­ü­ãäï­ç­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­ôïõ­Äá­óêÜ­ëïõ­Íé­êï­ëÜ­ïõ­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
Ó'­áõ­ôÞí­ðå­ñé­ãñÜ­öï­íôáé­ôü­óï­ï­¸ñù­ôáò­ü­óï­êáé­ç­Á­ãÜ­ðç.­Ç­é­óôï­ñß­á­îå­êé­íÜ­á­ðü­ôï­Óõ­ìðü­óéï
ôïõ­ÐëÜ­ôù­íá.
Ôé­åß­íáé­á­êñé­âþò­ï­Ý­ñù­ôáò­êáé­ôé­å­ðé­äéþ­êåé;­ÌÞ­ðùò­êñý­âï­íôáé­ðß­óù­ôïõ­Üë­ëåò­êá­ôá­óôÜ­óåéò
ðïõ­åê­äç­ëþ­íï­íôáé­óôéò­öõ­óé­êÝò­ðå­ñéï­÷Ýò­ôïõ­ðéï­êá­ôþ­ôá­ôïõ­á­íôé­êåé­ìå­íé­óìïý­÷ïí­äñÝò­êáé­õ­ëé­-
êï­÷á­ìç­ëÝò;­¸ôóé­ðñï­âÜ­ëåé­ôï­áéþ­íéï­áõ­ôü­ðñü­âëç­ìá.
Áí­ç­Ý­íù­óç­ç­óáñ­êé­êÞ­äý­ï­áí­èñþ­ðùí­êá­ôá­óêåõÜ­æåé­ôï­áí­èñù­ðï­á­ìÜ­îé­ãéá­íá­öé­ëï­îå­íç­èåß­ìéá
êá­ôåñ­÷ü­ìå­íç­áí­èñù­ðï­øõ­÷Þ,­ôïí­äé­êáéï­ëï­ãåß;
Ï­¸ñù­ôáò­åß­íáé­ç­öõ­óé­êÞ­ôÜ­óç­ôïõ­áí­èñþ­ðïõ­íá­å­ðá­íåý­ñåé­ôçí­áñ­÷é­êÞ­ôå­ëåéü­ôç­ôá­ôçò­õ­ðü­-
óôá­óÞò­ôïõ.­Ï­¸ñù­ôáò­ãéá­íá­á­íõ­øù­èåß­óå­ôïý­ôï­ôïí­Ü­ãéï­ðñï­ï­ñé­óìü­ôïõ,­ðñÝ­ðåé­íá­óõ­íï­äåõ­-
ôåß­ìå­ôçí­ï­ìïñ­öéÜ­ôçò­Á­ãÜ­ðçò.
Ôé­åß­íáé­ç­Á­ãÜ­ðç;­Á­ãÜ­ðç­åß­íáé­ç­ðñï­å­ôïé­ìá­óß­á­ãéá­ôçí­ôå­ëåéü­ôç­ôá­áõ­ôÞ.­¼ôáí­ï­¸ñù­ôáò­öôÜ­-
óåé­íá­óõ­ãêå­ñá­óôåß­ìå­ôçí­Á­ãÜ­ðç,­ôü­ôå­ç­ôå­ëåß­ù­óç­Ý­÷åé­êá­ëý­øåé­ðá­íôï­ôé­íÜ­ôçí­÷á­ìç­ëü­ôç­ôá­êáé
Ý­÷åé­öèÜ­óåé­ç­á­íý­øù­óç­ôïõ­áí­èñù­ðï­æþ­ïõ,­óôçí­ðå­ñéï­÷Þ­å­êåß­íç­ôïõ­ðíåý­ìá­ôïò,­ðïõ­äåí­÷ù­ñåß
ôçò­ý­ëçò­ç­êõ­ñéáñ­÷ß­á.
Ôü­ôå­ç­ìå­ôá­ôñï­ðÞ­ôïõ­¸ñù­ôá­óôçí­á­ëç­èé­íÞ­Á­ãÜ­ðç,­ï­äç­ãåß­ôïí­Üí­èñù­ðï­íá­á­íôé­ëç­öèåß­ôçí
áéþ­íéá­á­ëÞ­èåéá­ôçò­Èå­ú­êÞò­ÔÜ­îçò­ãéá­ü­ëç­ôçí­Ðáí­äç­ìéïõñ­ãß­á,­ãéá­ôçí­áéþ­íéá­ôå­ëåéü­ôç­ôá.­Ç­Á­ãÜ­-
ðç,­êÜ­ðï­ôå­êñý­âåé­êáé­óêå­ðÜ­æåé­ôïí­¸ñù­ôá.­Ôü­ôå­ï­Üí­èñù­ðïò­ãß­íå­ôáé­ôÝ­ëåéïò­êáé­ï­ìï­ïý­óéïò­ôïõ
ôÝ­ëåéïõ­êáé­ðëÞ­ñïõò­Á­ãÜ­ðçò­Ðá­ôÝ­ñá...
ÊÁÔÁËËÇËÇ ÄÉÁÔÑÏÖÇ ÌÅ ÁÍÁËÏÃÇ ÄÉÁÉÔÁ
Åß­íáé­ç­äÝ­êá­ôç­Ý­íá­ôç­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­ôïõ­Äá­óêÜ­ëïõ­Íé­êï­ëÜ­ïõ­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
Åß­íáé­ìéá­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­ìá­ìïýè.­Ðñï­ðá­ñá­óêåõÜ­æåé­ôïí­á­íá­ãíþ­óôç­íá­ìðåé­óôï­ìõ­óôÞ­ñéï­ôçò­èñÝ­-
øçò­ôïõ.­Ìá­èáß­íåé­êáé­ôéò­ôå­ëåõ­ôáß­åò­å­îå­ëß­îåéò­ðÜ­íù­óôï­èÝ­ìá­ôùí­ôñéþí­âá­óé­êþí­åé­äþí­ôçò­äéá­-
ôñï­öÞò­ôïõ:­Õ­äá­ôÜí­èñá­êåò,­Ðñù­ôå­À­íåò­êáé­Ëß­ðç.
Ïé­óõí­äõá­óìïß­áõ­ôþí­ôùí­ôñéþí­ðñù­ôáñ­÷é­êþí­ôñï­öß­ìùí­ìÝ­óá­óôïí­ïñ­ãá­íé­óìü­ôïõ­ìå­ôéò­âé­-
ôá­ìß­íåò­êáé­ôá­ìå­ôáë­ëé­êÜ­Ü­ëá­ôá­äß­íïõí­ìéá­åí­äéá­öÝ­ñïõ­óá­ôï­ðï­èÝ­ôç­óç­ôïõ­áí­èñþ­ðïõ,­á­ðÝ­íá­íôé
ôùí­åõ­èõ­íþí­ôïõ­ðñïò­ôçí­ß­äéá­ôçí­õ­ãåß­á­ôïõ­êáé­ôç­æù­Þ­ôïõ.
¸íáò­óõ­ãêå­ñá­óìüò­ôçò­áñ­÷áéü­ôá­ôçò­ãíù­óéï­ëï­ãß­áò­ãéá­ôçí­ôñï­öÞ­êáé­ôçí­æù­Þ­ôïõ­áí­èñþ­ðïõ,
ìå­ôéò­óç­ìå­ñé­íÝò­å­îå­ëß­îåéò­ôçò­å­ðé­óôÞ­ìçò,­öÝñ­íïõí­ôçí­ëý­óç­óå­ðïë­ëÝò­á­ðï­ñß­åò­êáé­á­ðï­äåé­-
êíý­ïõí,­ðþò­óôïí­ïñ­ãá­íé­óìü­ìáò­ëá­âáß­íïõí­÷þ­ñá­Ü­ðåé­ñá­ãå­ãï­íü­ôá­ðïõ­ìðï­ñïýí­íá­å­ëåã­÷èïýí.
Áõ­ôü­èá­ãß­íåé­ü­ôáí­ï­Üí­èñù­ðïò­ðëç­ñï­öï­ñç­èåß­ðïéåò­á­ðü­ôéò­ãíþ­ñé­ìåò­ôñï­öÝò­èá­ðñÝ­ðåé
íá­÷ñç­óé­ìï­ðïéåß,­óå­ôé­á­íá­ëï­ãß­á­êáé­óå­ðïéá­äéá­óôÞ­ìá­ôá.­Ôü­ôå­ïé­èåñ­ìß­äåò­èá­÷ñç­óé­ìï­ðïé­ç­èïýí
ãéá­íá­äéá­ôç­ñïýí­ôçí­öõ­óé­êÞ­õ­ãåß­á­óôá­ðëáß­óéá­ðïõ­ç­ìç­ôÝ­ñá­öý­óç­Ý­÷åé­ðñï­å­ôïé­ìÜ­óåé­ãéá­ôïí­Üí­-
èñù­ðï­êáé­åé­äé­êÜ­óå­ó÷Ý­óç­ìå­ìéá­å­óù­ôå­ñé­êÞ­ðï­ñåß­á­ç­ôñï­öÞ­ôïõ­áí­èñþ­ðïõ­ðñÝ­ðåé­íá­äé­Ý­ðå­-
ôáé­á­ðü­ôï­ìÝ­ôñï­êáé­åß­íáé­ü­óï­ãß­íå­ôáé­ðéï­é­óïñ­ñï­ðç­ìÝ­íç.
Ç ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ×ÙÑÉÓ ÖÁÑÌÁÊÁ
Åß­íáé­ç­åé­êï­óôÞ­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­ôïõ­Äá­óêÜ­ëïõ­Íé­êï­ëÜ­ïõ­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
Ó'­áõ­ôÞí­ôçí­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­á­íá­ëý­ï­íôáé­ïé­ìÝ­èï­äïé­ìå­ôÜ­âá­óçò­á­ðü­ôç­óõ­íåß­äç­óç­óôçí­õ­ðï­óõ­íåß­äç­-
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
Civilizations,­Philosophy­of­the­whole­Yoga,­Occultism­(Apocryphology),­Mysticism,­etc.
THE HOLY CYLINDER
OF THE ESSEANS' REGULATION
This­is­Master­Nikolaos­Margiori's­seventeenth­essay.
In­it­we­learn­how­these­saint­people­of­Christ's­times­who­were­His­compatriots­and­maybe
His­joint-ideologists,­lived­and­worked.­Jesus­never­mentioned­this­cruel­hereis­of­His­race
and­of­His­country.­I­wonder­why­this­happened.
Perhaps,­He­stayed­in­the­huge­Kumran­camp,­during­His­absence­years?­The­holy­Cylin-
der­of­the­Esseans'­Regulaton­puts­us­out­of­many­questions­and­very­many­suppositions.
By­it,­we­see­the­Essean­truly­released­from­the­wordly­things­and­consacred­in­his­mysticist
exercises.
Thus,­we­know­a­discipline­kept­by­an­Esoteric­wakening­that­caused­the­presentations­of
those­who­helped­Jesus­to­perform­His­holy­work­on­the­earth.­They­suppose­that­the­nec-
essary­Wakening­of­Master­Jesus­Christ's­assistants­derived­from­this­holy­Cylinder.­Those
assistants­were­St.­John­the­Baptis,­St.­John­the­Theologian­and­Evangelist­and­maybe­many
others­who­were­learners­beside­the­Biblic­saints­of­the­chief­Esseans­who­possessed­the­holy
marks­of­the­Esoterism.
In­the­beginning­the­Word­existed.­It­is­this­word­that­St.­John­uses.­It­is­this­word­that­Es-
seans­used...
EROS AND LOVE
This­is­Master­Nikolaos­Margiori's­eighteenth­essay.
In­it­Eros­is­described­and­Love­as­well.­The­story­starts­from­Platon's­Symposium.
What­is­Eros­exactly­and­what­does­it­pursue?­Perhaps­some­other­rude­and­matter-low
situations­are­hidden­behind­it­that­are­expressed­in­the­physical­areas­of­the­lowest­objec-
tivity?­Thus­this­eternal­covering­appears.
If­the­corporal­union­of­two­human­beings­constructs­the­human-car­to­hospitalize­a­pos-
sessed­man-soul,­does­it­justify­it?
Eros­is­the­man's­natural­tendency­to­find­his­substance­initial­perfection­again.­In­order
that­Eros­may­be­able­to­be­elevated­to­this­holy­destination,­it­must­be­accompanied­by­the
Love­beauty.
What­is­Love?­Love­is­the­preparation­for­this­perfection.­When­Eros­manages­to­get­mixed
with­Love,­then­the­completion­has­covered­the­lowness­for­ever.­And­the­elevation­of­the­man-
animal­has­reached­that­spiritual­area­­where­there­is­no­place­for­the­matter­rule.
Then,­the­conversion­of­Eros­to­the­true­Love­guides­man­to­realize­the­eternal­truth­of­the
Divine­Order,­for­the­whole­Omnicreation,­for­the­eternal­perfection.­Sometime­Love­hides­and
covers­Eros.­Then,­man­becomes­perfect­and­consubstanstial­with­the­perfect­and­full­of­Love
Father...
PROPER FEEDING BY THE ANALOGOUS DIET
It­is­Master­Nikolaos­Margiori's­nineteenth­essay.
It­is­a­mammoth-essay.­It­prepares­the­reader­to­enter­his­nutrition­mystery.­He­also­learns
the­last­evolutions­on­the­subject­of­the­three­basical­kinds­of­his­feeding.
Hydrocarbons,­Proteins­and­Fats.
The­combinations­of­these­three­original­foods­in­his­organism­with­the­vitamins­and­the
metallic­salts­give­an­interesting­placement­of­man­in­front­of­his­responsibilities­to­his­health
and­his­life­itself.
A­mixing­of­the­most­ancient­gnosilogy­about­the­man's­feeding­and­life,­with­the­modern
evolutions­of­the­science,­bring­the­solution­to­many­questions­and­prove­that­in­our­organ-
ism­numerous­facts­take­place­that­can­be­chequed.
This­will­take­place­when­man­knows­which­of­the­known­foods­must­use,­at­what­analo-
gy­and­at­which­intervals.­Then,­the­calories­will­be­used­to­keep­the­physical­health­at­the
limits­that­the­mother-nature­has­prepared­for­man­and­especially­in­relation­with­an­internal
course­the­man's­food­mus­be­ruled­by­the­measure­and­become­as­well-balanced­as­pos-
sible.
THE THERAPEUTICS WITHOUT MEDICINES
This­is­Master­Nikolaos­Margiori's­twentieth­essay.
In­tbis­essay­the­methods­of­the­ascension­from­the­conscience­to­the­hyperconscience,
from­the­wakefulness­to­the­artificial­sleep­or­ensleeping­or­hypnotism,,­for­the­production­of
therapeutical­results­in­different­diseases­that­harass­the­man­of­our­days,­are­analysed.­More-
over,­besides­the­hypnotism­other­methods­related­to­the­therapeutics,­as­eterotherapy­and
autotherapy,­the­therapeutics­from­near­or­far,­the­Static­Therapeutics,­the­Kinetic­Therapeu-
tics­and­the­Fingertapping,­are­delivered.
As­mentioned,­the­established­rule­of­the­conscience­must­cooperate­with­or­let­the­sub-
conscience­activity­free­to­act.­Instincts,­Muscular­System,­Firstenergy,­Rhytm-movement­of
the­Vibrations­and­other­systems­existing­within­us,­must­come­back­to­the­actuality.­Thus
89 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
óç,­á­ðü­ôçí­å­ãñÞ­ãïñ­óç­óôïí­ôå­÷íç­ôü­ý­ðíï­Þ­å­ãêïß­ìç­óç­Þ­õ­ðíù­ôé­óìü­ãéá­ôçí­ðá­ñá­ãù­ãÞ­èå­ñá­-
ðåõ­ôé­êþí­á­ðï­ôå­ëå­óìÜ­ôùí­óå­äéÜ­öï­ñåò­ðá­èÞ­óåéò­ðïõ­ôá­ëá­íß­æïõí­ôïí­Üí­èñù­ðï­ôçò­å­ðï­÷Þò­ìáò.
Å­ðé­ðëÝ­ïí­å­êôüò­ôïõ­õ­ðíù­ôé­óìïý­ðá­ñá­äß­äï­íôáé­ìå­ëå­ðôï­ìÝ­ñåéá­êáé­Üë­ëåò­óõ­íá­öåßò­ìÝ­èï­äïé­èå­-
ñá­ðåõ­ôé­êÞò­ü­ðùò­ç­å­ôå­ñï­èå­ñá­ðåß­á­êáé­áõ­ôï­èå­ñá­ðåß­á,­ç­èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôé­êÞ­á­ðü­êï­íôÜ­Þ­á­ðü­ìá­êñéÜ,
ç­Óôá­ôé­êÞ­Èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôé­êÞ,­ç­Êé­íç­ôé­êÞ­Èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôé­êÞ­êáé­ç­Äá­êôõ­ëï­êôý­ðç­óç.
¼ðùò­á­íá­öÝ­ñå­ôáé,­ç­êá­èéå­ñù­ìÝ­íç­âá­óé­ëåß­á­ôçò­óõ­íåß­äç­óçò­ðñÝ­ðåé­íá­óõ­íåñ­ãá­óèåß­Þ­í'­á­-
öÞ­óåé­ôçí­äñá­óôç­ñéü­ôç­ôá­ôçò­õ­ðï­óõ­íåß­äç­óçò­å­ëåý­èå­ñç­íá­äñÜ­óåé.­¸íóôé­êôá,­Ìõ­é­êü­Óý­óôç­ìá,
Ðñù­ôï­å­íÝñ­ãåéá,­Ñõè­ìï­êß­íç­óç­ôùí­Êñá­äá­óìþí­êáé­Üë­ëá­ðïõ­å­íõ­ðÜñ­÷ïõí­ìÝ­óá­ìáò,­ðñÝ­ðåé­íá
å­ðá­íÝë­èïõí­óôçí­å­ðé­êáé­ñü­ôç­ôá,­þ­óôå­íá­èáõ­ìá­ôïõñ­ãÞ­óåé­ç­õ­ðï­óõ­íåß­äç­óç,­ðïõ­åß­íáé­åê­ðñü­óù­-
ðïò­êáé­ï­äç­ãç­ôÞò­ôùí­ðá­ñá­ðÜ­íù­å­óù­äõ­íÜ­ìå­ùí,­êáé­íá­âï­ç­èÞ­óåé­ôïí­äéå­öèáñ­ìÝ­íï­Üí­èñù­ðï­(óõ­-
íåß­äç­óç)­íá­å­ðá­íÝë­èåé­óôçí­áñ­÷é­êÞ­ôïõ­ôå­ëåéü­ôç­ôá­(óù­ìá­ôé­êÞ­êáé­øõ­÷é­êÞ).
Ãéá­ôï­óêï­ðü­áõ­ôü­ç­Èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôé­êÞ­÷ù­ñßò­ÖÜñ­ìá­êá­Ýñ­÷å­ôáé­íá­äéá­íïß­îåé­íÝ­ïõò­ï­ñß­æï­íôåò­óôçí
Å­óù­ôå­ñé­êÞ­Èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôé­êÞ,­þ­óôå­ï­Üí­èñù­ðïò­íá­ãíù­ñß­óåé­ôéò­á­ðï­èç­óáõ­ñé­óìÝ­íåò­ìÝ­óá­ôïõ­äõ­íÜ­-
ìåéò­êáé­íá­ôéò­ìå­ôá­÷åé­ñé­óôåß,­å­ðá­íá­äß­äï­íôáò­óôï­öõ­óé­êü­óþ­ìá­ôéò­äõ­íÜ­ìåéò­-­å­íÝñ­ãåéåò­ðïõ­êÜ­-
ðï­ôå­êá­ôåß­÷å.
Áõ­ôü­ãéá­íá­ôï­ðå­ôý­÷åé­Ý­÷åé­á­íÜ­ãêç­óõ­ìðá­ñÜ­óôá­óçò­ôçò­õ­ðï­óõ­íåß­äç­óÞò­ôïõ­ðïõ­êá­ôÝ­÷åé­å­-
ìðåé­ñß­åò­öõ­ëáã­ìÝ­íåò­á­ðü­ôá­âÜ­èç­ôùí­÷é­ëéå­ôç­ñß­äùí,­êá­ôÜë­ëç­ëåò­íá­èå­ñá­ðåý­óïõí­êÜ­èå­á­óèÝ­-
íåéá­ôïõ­óþ­ìá­ôïò­êáé­ôïõ­ôá­ëáé­ðù­ñç­ìÝ­íïõ­Íïõ...
Ãéá­íá­ðñáã­ìá­ôï­ðïé­ç­èåß­áõ­ôÞ­ç­óõ­íåñ­ãá­óß­á,­ðñÝ­ðåé­-ìÝ­óù­êáé­ôçò­ðá­ñïý­óçò­ìå­ëÝ­ôçò-­ï­óõ­-
íÜí­èñù­ðïò­íá­ðëç­ñï­öï­ñç­èåß­ðïë­ëÜ­óç­ìåß­á­ôùí­Ü­ãíù­óôùí­ðá­ñá­ãü­íôùí­ðïõ­áë­ëç­ëï­ìÜ­÷ï­íôáé­ìÝ­-
óá­óôï­óþ­ìá­ôïõ­êáé­ðïõ­÷á­ñá­êôç­ñß­æï­íôáé­óáí­ìü­íé­ìïé­êñá­äá­óìïß.­Áõ­ôïß­ïé­êñá­äá­óìïß­åß­íáé­êé­-
íÞ­óåéò­ôùí­å­óù­äõ­íÜ­ìå­ùí­ðïõ­ðñÝ­ðåé­íá­êá­ôåõ­èõí­èïýí,­ï­äç­ãç­èïýí,­ñõè­ìé­óôïýí­á­íÜ­ëï­ãá­ìå­ôçí
ðå­ñß­ðôù­óç­êáé­íá­å­îé­óïñ­ñï­ðÞ­óïõí­ôá­äý­ï­ìå­ãÜ­ëá­óõ­óôÞ­ìá­ôá­ôïõ­ïñ­ãá­íé­óìïý,­ôï­Óõ­ìðá­èç­ôé­êü
êáé­ôï­Ðá­ñá­óõ­ìðá­èç­ôé­êü.
Ãé'­áõ­ôüí­á­êñé­âþò­ôï­ëü­ãï­óôçí­Èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôé­êÞ­÷ù­ñßò­ÖÜñ­ìá­êá­ðá­ñá­äß­äï­íôáé­èå­ù­ñç­ôé­êÜ­êáé­ðñá­-
êôé­êÜ­ïé­ôå­÷íé­êÝò­êáé­ïé­ìÝ­èï­äïé­ðïõ­èá­äþ­óïõí­ôçí­åõ­÷Ý­ñåéá,­á­ðü­êï­íôÜ­Þ­á­ðü­ìá­êñéÜ,­ôïõ­óõ­-
íôï­íé­óìïý­êáé­ôçò­å­íáñ­ìü­íé­óçò­ôçò­å­óù­ôå­ñé­êÞò­ìáò­å­íÝñ­ãåéáò­-­äý­íá­ìçò­æù­Þò,­ìå­á­ðï­ôÝ­ëå­óìá
ôçí­å­ðá­íá­öï­ñÜ­ôçò­äéá­óá­ëåõ­èåß­óáò­ôÜ­îçò­óôïí­ïñ­ãá­íé­óìü­ìáò­êáé­ôçí­å­äñáß­ù­óç­ìéáò­óôá­èå­-
ñÞò­ãñáì­ìÞò­õ­ãåß­áò.
Ç ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ ÌÅ ÅÃÊÏÉÌÇÓÇ
Åß­íáé­ç­åé­êï­óôÞ­ðñþ­ôç­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­ôïõ­Äá­óêÜ­ëïõ­Íé­êï­ëÜ­ïõ­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
Ó'­áõ­ôÞí­ôçí­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­á­íá­ëý­ï­íôáé­ïé­ìÝ­èï­äïé­ìå­ôÜ­âá­óçò­á­ðü­ôç­óõ­íåß­äç­óç­óôçí­õ­ðï­óõ­íåß­äç­-
óç,­á­ðü­ôçí­å­ãñÞ­ãïñ­óç­óôïí­ôå­÷íç­ôü­ý­ðíï­Þ­å­ãêïß­ìç­óç­Þ­õ­ðíù­ôé­óìü­ãéá­ôçí­ðá­ñá­ãù­ãÞ­èå­ñá­-
ðåõ­ôé­êþí­á­ðï­ôå­ëå­óìÜ­ôùí­óå­äéÜ­öï­ñåò­ðá­èÞ­óåéò­ðïõ­ôá­ëá­íß­æïõí­ôïí­Üí­èñù­ðï­ôçò­å­ðï­÷Þò­ìáò.
¼ðùò­å­îç­ãåß­ôáé­óôçí­ìå­ëÝ­ôç,­ðÝ­ñá­óáí­÷é­ëéÜ­äåò­÷ñü­íéá­á­ðü­ôü­ôå­ðïõ­ï­Üí­èñù­ðïò­ï­äç­ãïý­-
íôáí­á­ðü­ôï­õ­ðï­óõ­íåß­äç­ôü­ôïõ.­Ôü­ôå­ï­ïñ­ãá­íé­óìüò­ôïõ­Þ­ôáí­ðï­ëý­ðéï­ãå­ñüò­êáé­ðéï­áí­èå­êôé­êüò
óôá­ðÜ­óçò­öý­óçò­ìé­êñü­âéá­êáé­óôïõò­éïýò.­Ôïí­ñü­ëï­ôçò­ðå­ñé­öñïý­ñç­óçò­ôçò­õ­ãåß­áò,­ìå­ôá­îý­ôùí
Üë­ëùí,­ôïí­åß­÷å­á­íá­ëÜ­âåé­åî'­ï­ëï­êëÞ­ñïõ­ôï­õ­ðï­óõ­íåß­äç­ôï.
Áñ­ãü­ôå­ñá­å­ðÞë­èå­ç­áë­ëá­ãÞ­ôçò­äéïß­êç­óçò­ôïõ­Íïõ­á­ðü­ôçí­õ­ðï­óõ­íåß­äç­óç­óôçí­óõ­íåß­äç­óç.
¼ìùò­ç­íÝ­á­óõ­ìðå­ñé­öï­ñÜ­ôïõ­áí­èñþ­ðïõ,­ç­åë­ëé­ðÞò­å­ðá­öÞ­ôïõ­ìå­ôçí­öý­óç,­ìå­ôçí­êáé­íïýñ­ãéá
ôïõ­óõ­íåé­äç­ôÞ­íï­ï­ôñï­ðß­á,­äåí­å­ðáñ­êïý­óå­ãéá­íá­êá­ëý­øåé­ôï­èÝ­ìá­ôçò­õ­ãåß­áò­ôïõ.­¸ôóé­ï­Üí­èñù­-
ðïò­õ­ðï­÷ñå­þ­èç­êå­êáé­ðÜ­ëé­íá­÷ñç­óé­ìï­ðïéÞ­óåé­ôçí­õ­ðï­óõ­íåß­äç­óÞ­ôïõ­ãéá­íá­å­ðá­íá­öÝ­ñåé­îá­íÜ
ôçí­õ­ãåß­á­êáé­ôçí­êá­ôÜ­öý­óç­æù­Þ.
¼ðùò­ðå­ñé­ãñÜ­öå­ôáé­óôçí­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­ç­õ­ðï­óõ­íåß­äç­óç­ãíþ­ñé­æå­ü­÷é­ìü­íïí­íá­ãéá­ôñåý­åé,­áë­ëÜ­êáé
íá­á­íá­ðëÜ­èåé­êáé­åî'­áñ­÷Þò­íá­á­íá­êá­ôá­óêåõÜ­æåé­ìÝ­ëç­ôïõ­óþ­ìá­ôïò­ðïõ­ãéá­äéá­öï­ñå­ôé­êÝò­áé­ôß­-
åò­á­ðï­êü­ðôï­íôáí­á­ðü­ôïí­ïñ­ãá­íé­óìü­Þ­áñ­ñù­óôïý­óáí­ôü­óï­ðï­ëý­ðïõ­á­ðïñ­ñß­ðôï­íôáí­áð'­áõ­ôüí.
Ç­èå­ñá­ðåß­á­áõ­ôÞ­ðå­ôõ­÷áß­íï­íôáí­ìå­ìéá­íÜñ­êç­ðïõ­Ý­öåñ­íå­ç­õ­ðï­óõ­íåß­äç­óç­óôïí­ôü­ôå­Üí­èñù­-
ðï­êáé­ìå­ìéá­å­óù­ôå­ñé­êÞ­äñá­óôç­ñéü­ôç­ôá,­ðïõ­ôçí­å­êôå­ëïý­óáí­ïé­ìõþ­íåò­ôïõ­óþ­ìá­ôïò,­äéü­ôé­ì'
áõ­ôÞí­ôçí­äéá­äé­êá­óß­á­ôï­íåõ­ñé­êü­óý­óôç­ìá­á­ðï­ìá­êñý­íï­íôáí­á­ðü­êÜ­èå­äñá­óôç­ñéü­ôç­ôá­êáé­÷ñç­óé­-
ìï­ðïéïý­íôáí­ìü­íïí­ôï­ìõ­é­êü­óý­óôç­ìá­ãéá­ôçí­á­íÜ­ðëá­óç­óç­ìåß­ùí­ôïõ­óþ­ìá­ôïò,­ôçí­á­íá­æù­ï­ãü­-
íç­óÞ­ôïõ­êáé­ôçí­êá­ëÞ­ëåé­ôïõñ­ãß­á­ôïõ.
Å­äþ­Þë­èáí­ïé­óôï­÷á­óôÝò­ôçò­Á­ëÞ­èåéáò,­åí­äï­óêü­ðç­óáí­ôïí­å­áõ­ôü­ôïõò­êáé­âñÞ­êáí­ðþò­ìü­-
íï­ç­õ­ðï­óõ­íåß­äç­óç­èá­âï­ç­èïý­óå­ðÜ­ëé,­ü­ðùò­êáé­ðñþ­ôá,­ãéá­íá­å­ðá­íåý­ñåé­ï­Üí­èñù­ðïò­ôçí­á­-
ðá­ñáß­ôç­ôç­õ­ãåß­á­ðïõ­Ý­÷á­óå,­ìå­ôÜ­ôçí­ìå­ôÜ­âá­óÞ­ôïõ­á­ðü­ôçí­óõ­íåß­äç­óç­óôçí­õ­ðï­óõ­íåß­äç­óç,­ìå
ü,ôé­ìðï­ñåß­íá­óç­ìáß­íåé­áõ­ôü.
Ðþò­ü­ìùò­èá­ãé­íü­ôáí­ðñá­êôé­êÜ­áõ­ôü;­Ïé­á­íþ­ôå­ñïé­íü­åò,­ïé­ìå­ãÜ­ëïé­ìý­óôåò­âñÞ­êáí­ôïí­ôñü­-
ðï­ôçò­Å­ãêïß­ìç­óçò.­Ì'­áõ­ôÞí­èá­ìðï­ñïý­óå­ï­Üí­èñù­ðïò­íá­å­ðá­íåý­ñåé­êáé­íá­÷ñç­óé­ìï­ðïéÞ­óåé,
ü­ðùò­Üë­ëï­ôå,­ôçí­ðá­ñá­ôå­ôá­ìÝ­íç­êáé­äõ­íá­ìé­êü­ôá­ôç­õ­ðï­óõ­íåß­äç­óç­ãéá­íá­ôïõ­äþ­óåé­ôçí­ðï­ëõ­ðü­-
èç­ôç­õ­ãåß­á,­áõ­ôÞ­á­êñé­âþò­ðïõ­ç­óõ­íåß­äç­óÞ­ôïõ­äåí­Þ­ôáí­ðëÝ­ïí­é­êá­íÞ­íá­ôïõ­ðá­ñÜ­ó÷åé.
Áõ­ôÞí­ç­Å­ðé­óôÞ­ìç,­ç­Å­ãêïß­ìç­óç,­á­íá­ðôýó­óå­ôáé­êáé­á­íá­ëý­å­ôáé­ìå­êÜ­èå­ëå­ðôï­ìÝ­ñåéá,­èå­ù­ñç­-
ôé­êÜ­êáé­ðñá­êôé­êÜ,­ùò­ìéá­ðëÞ­ñç­ìÝ­èï­äï­ìå­ôÜ­âá­óçò­á­ðü­ôçí­óõ­íåß­äç­óç­óôçí­õ­ðï­óõ­íåß­äç­óç­ðïõ
äß­äåé­óôïí­êÜ­èå­Üí­èñù­ðï­ôçí­öõ­óé­êÞ­å­ðá­íá­öï­ñÜ­ôçò­õ­ãåß­áò­êáé­ôçò­êá­ôÜ­öý­óç­æù­Þò­ôïõ.
ÈÅÑÁÐÅÉÁ ØÕ×ÁÓÈÅÍÅÉÁÓ
ÊÁÉ ØÕ×ÏÐÁÈÅÉÁÓ ÌÅ ÕÐÏÂÏËÇ
Åß­íáé­ç­åé­êï­óôÞ­äåý­ôå­ñç­ìå­ëÝ­ôç­ôïõ­Äá­óêÜ­ëïõ­Íé­êï­ëÜ­ïõ­Ìáñ­ãéù­ñÞ.
Ó'­áõ­ôÞí­å­îå­ôÜ­æï­íôáé­ïé­âá­ñé­Ýò­øõ­÷é­êÝò­(íï­ç­ôé­êÝò)­ðá­èÞ­óåéò­ôïõ­Íïõ­ôïõ­áí­èñþ­ðïõ.­Ç­øõ­-
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
the­subconscience,­being­a­representative­and­a­guide­of­the­above­esopowers­will­be­able
to­work­miracles,­and­to­help­the­corrupted­man­(conscience)­to­come­back­to­his­initial­per-
fection­(bodily­and­psychical).
For­this­purpose,­the­Therapeutics­without­Medicines­comes­to­open­new­horizons­in­the
Esoteric­Therapeutics,­so­that­man­may­be­able­to­know­the­treasured­powers­within­him­and
to­treat­them,­giving­back­the­body­the­powers-energies­which­it­possessed­once.­
In­order­that­man­may­be­able­to­achieve­this,­man­needs­the­assistance­of­his­subcon-
science­that­possesse­some­experiences­kept­from­the­depths­of­milleniums,­proper­to­cure
every­disease­of­the­body­and­of­the­wretched­Mind.­
In­order­that­this­cooperation­may­be­able­to­be­realized,­the­fellow-man­must­know­many
points­of­the­unknown­factors­that­fight­one­against­the­other­in­his­body­and­that­are­char-
acterized­as­permanent­vibrations.­These­vibrations­are­the­movements­of­the­esopowers­that
should­be­directed,­guided,­regulated­according­to­the­case,­and­to­well-balance­the­two­great
systems­of­the­organism,­the­Sympathetic­and­the­Parasympathetic.
Exactly­for­this­reason,­in­the­Therapeutics­without­Medicines,­the­techniques­and­the­meth-
ods­that­will­give­the­ease,­from­near­or­from­far,­of­the­coordination­and­of­the­harmoniza-
tion­of­our­internal­energy-life­power,­resulting­the­restoration­of­the­disturbed­order­in­our­or-
ganism­and­the­strengthening­of­a­stable­health­line,­are­delivered.
THE THERAPEUTICS BY HYPNOTISM
This­is­Master­Nikolaos­Margioris­twenty-first­essay.
In­this­essay,­the­methods­of­the­ascension­from­the­conscience­to­the­subconscience,
from­the­wakefulness­to­the­artificial­sleep­-­or­to­the­ensleeping­or­to­the­hypnotism­-­for­the
production­of­therapeutical­results­in­different­diseases­that­harass­the­man­of­our­times,­are
analyzed.
As­explained­in­the­essay,­thousands­of­years­have­passed­since­the­times­that­man­was
guided­by­his­subconscious.­Then,­his­organism­was­much­stronger­and­endurable­against
any­microbe­and­virus,­The­subconscious­among­others,­had­undertaken­the­role­of­the­health
protection
Later,­the­change­of­the­Mind­administration­from­the­subconscience­to­the­conscience­took
place.­But­the­man's­new­behavior,­his­deficient­contact­with­nature,­with­his­new­conscious
mentality­was­not­enough­to­cover­his­health­matter.­Thus,­man­was­obliged­to­use­his­con-
science­again­in­order­to­bring­health­and­natural­life­back.
As­described­in­the­essay,­the­subconscience­knew­not­only­how­to­cure­but­also­how­to
reform­and­to­reconstruct­the­members­of­the­body­that,­for­different­causes,­were­cut­off­from
the­organism­or­were­so­sick­that­were­rejected­by­it
This­therapy­was­achieved­by­a­torpor­that­the­subconscience­brought­to­the­man­of­those
times­and­by­an­internal­activity­that­the­muscles­of­the­body­executed,­because­by­this­pro-
cedure­the­nervous­system­was­removing­from­every­activity­and­only­the­muscular­system
was­used­for­the­reformation­of­the­body­parts,­for­its­revival­and­its­good­function.
Here­the­thinkers­of­Truth­came,­introspected­themselves­and­found­out­that­only­the­sub-
conscience­would­help­man­again,­as­in­the­past,­to­find­and­use­again­the­necessary­health
he­lost,­after­his­departure­from­the­conscience­to­the­subconscience,­with­whatever­this­may
mean.
But­how­could­it­be­realized­practically?­The­superior­minds,­the­great­mystics­found­the
way­of­the­Ensleeping.­Through­it,­man­could­find­and­use­again­the­prolonged­and­most
powerful­subconscience,­that­would­give­him­the­most­desired­health,­exactly­this­health­that
the­conscience­could­not­afforde­him­any­more.
This­Science,­the­Ensleeping­(Hypnotism)­is­developed­and­analyzed­in­every­detail,­the-
oretically­and­practically,­as­a­full­method­of­transgression­from­the­conscience­to­the­sub-
conscience­that­gives­every­man­the­physical­restoration­of­his­health­and­of­his­natural­life.
PSYCHASTENIA AND PSYCHOPATHY
THERAPY BY SUGGESTION
It­is­Master­Nikolaos­Margiori's­twenty-second­essay.
In­it­the­heavy­psychical­(mental)­diseases­of­the­man's­Mind­are­examined.­The­psy-
chasthenia­(mind­disease)­and­the­psychopathy­(mind­affliction).­In­these­two­diseases­all­the
respective­names­of­the­Mind­that­we­have­heard­at­times,­are­comprised
As­described,­the­psychasthenias­are­the­acquired­diseases­of­the­conscience,­while­the
psychopathies­are­the­hereditary­diseases­of­the­subconsience.
The­curer's­value­lies­in­moving,­by­his­own­perfect­and­harmonious­thought,­the­ill's­stag-
gering­thought­and­to­harmonize­the­two­thoughts­in­one­sole­thought,­that­vibrates­harmo-
niously­and­normally­the­two­human­brains­together.
In­the­Ancient­Greece,­during­the­times­of­the­Esoterism­glory,­this­kind­of­remedies­was
achieved­in­the­Asclepeans­and­in­the­Amfiareas.­Also,­in­the­Trofonion-Antron-initiatory-
Sanatorium­and­in­the­Delphi­Oracle.
These­mental­maladies­that­torture­and­rule­the­majority­of­the­modern­humanity,­can­be
cured­by­a­clearly­internal­system,­without­medicines,­by­the­nervous­and­muscular­system
90 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
÷á­óèÝ­íåéá­(íï­ï­á­óèÝ­íåéá)­êáé­ç­øõ­÷ï­ðÜ­èåéá­(íï­ï­ðÜ­èç­óç).­ÌÝ­óá­ó'­áõ­ôÝò­ôéò­äý­ï­á­óèÝ­íåéåò­ðå­-
ñé­ëáì­âÜ­íï­íôáé­ü­ëåò­ïé­ó÷å­ôé­êÝò­ï­íï­ìá­óß­åò­ôùí­ðá­èÞ­óå­ùí­ôïõ­Íïõ­ðïõ­Ý­÷ïõ­ìå­êá­ôÜ­êáé­ñïýò­á­-
êïý­óåé.
¼ðùò­ðå­ñé­ãñÜ­öå­ôáé­ïé­øõ­÷á­óèÝ­íåéåò­åß­íáé­áñ­ñþ­óôéåò­ôçò­óõ­íåß­äç­óçò,­å­ðß­êôç­ôåò,­å­íþ­ïé
øõ­÷ï­ðÜ­èåéåò­åß­íáé­áñ­ñþ­óôéåò­ôçò­õ­ðï­óõ­íåß­äç­óçò,­êëç­ñï­íï­ìé­êÝò.
Ç­á­îß­á­ôïõ­èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôÞ­Ý­ãêåé­ôáé­óôï­íá­êé­íÞ­óåé­ìå­ôçí­äé­êÞ­ôïõ­ôÝ­ëåéá­êáé­áñ­ìï­íé­êÞ­óêÝ­øç,­ôçí
ðá­ñá­ðáß­ïõ­óá­óêÝ­øç­ôïõ­áñ­ñþ­óôïõ­êáé­íá­å­íáñ­ìï­íß­óåé­ôéò­äõï­óêÝ­øåéò,­óå­ìéá­ìï­íÜ­÷á­óêÝ­øç,
ðïõ­íá­äï­íåß­áñ­ìï­íé­êÜ­êáé­öõ­óéï­ëï­ãé­êÜ­êáé­ôïõò­äõï­ìá­æß­áí­èñù­ðï­å­ãêå­öÜ­ëïõò.
Áõ­ôïý­ôïõ­åß­äïõò­ôéò­èå­ñá­ðåß­åò­êá­ôüñ­èù­íáí­óôçí­Áñ­÷áß­á­Åë­ëÜ­äá,­óôá­Á­óêëç­ðéåß­á­êáé­óôá
Áì­öéá­ñÜ­åéá­óôïõò­÷ñü­íïõò­ôçò­äü­îáò­ôïõ­Å­óù­ôå­ñé­óìïý.­Å­ðß­óçò­óôï­Ôñï­öþ­íéï­¢íôñï­-­ìõ­ç­ôÞ­-
ñéï­-­Èå­ñá­ðåõ­ôÞ­ñéï­êáé­óôï­Ìá­íôåß­ï­ôùí­Äåë­öþí.
Áõ­ôÝò­ïé­íï­ç­ôé­êÝò­ðá­èÞ­óåéò­ðïõ­êá­ôá­ôõ­ñáí­íïýí­êáé­êõ­ñéáñ­÷ïýí­óÞ­ìå­ñá­ôçí­ðëåéï­íü­ôç­ôá­ôçò
áí­èñù­ðü­ôç­ôáò­åß­íáé­äõ­íá­ôüí­íá­èå­ñá­ðåõ­èïýí­ìå­óý­óôç­ìá­êá­èá­ñÜ­å­óù­ôå­ñé­êü,­÷ù­ñßò­öÜñ­ìá­êá,
ìå­ôçí­÷á­ëÜ­ñù­óç­ôïõ­íåõ­ñé­êïý­êáé­ìõ­é­êïý­óõ­óôÞ­ìá­ôïò,­ìå­åé­äé­êÝò­á­íá­ðíïÝò,­ìå­å­ãêïß­ìç­óç­êáé
ôÝ­ëïò­ìå­ôçí­á­óõ­íá­ãþ­íé­óôç­Õ­ÐÏ­ÂÏ­ËÇ.­Áõ­ôÝò­ïé­ìÝ­èï­äïé­á­ðï­ôå­ëïýí­êáé­ôï­á­íôé­êåß­ìå­íï­ôçò­åí
ëü­ãù­ìå­ëÝ­ôçò.
ÐÜ­íù­áð'­ü­ëá­âÝ­âáéá­êá­èß­óôá­ôáé­á­íá­ãêáß­á­ç­Å­óù­ôå­ñé­êÞ­Ðáé­äåß­á­ðïõ­ìá­ëá­êþ­íåé­ôïí­Üí­èñù­-
ðï­êáé­êá­ôá­óé­ãÜ­æåé­ôá­ðÜ­èç­êáé­ôá­Ýí­óôé­êôÜ­ôïõ­ðïõ­åß­íáé­áõ­ôÜ­á­êñé­âþò­ðïõ­ôïõ­äç­ìéïõñ­ãïýí­ìéá
íÝ­á­øõ­÷á­óèÝ­íåéá­Þ­ôïõ­öÝñ­íïõí­óôçí­å­ðé­öÜ­íåéá­ìéá­ðá­ëéÜ­-­êëç­ñï­íï­ìç­ìÝ­íç­øõ­÷á­óèÝ­íåéá­ðïõ
ðáßñ­íåé­óÞ­ìå­ñá­ôçí­ìïñ­öÞ­ôçò­øõ­÷ï­ðÜ­èåéáò.
ÏÉ ÔÅËÅÕÔÁÉÅÓ 11 ÌÅËÅÔÅÓ (23ç - 33ç)
Ïé­11­ôåëåõôáßåò­ìåëÝôåò­ôçò­ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò­Ìåèüäïõ­ÓéÜôóïõ­áñ÷ßæïõí­áðü­ôçí­ìåëÝôç­23
êáé­êëåßíïõí­ìå­ôçí­ìåëÝôç­íïýìåñï­33.­Ïé­åí­ëüãù­ìåëÝôåò­åßíáé­áðïôÝëåóìá­ìéáò­óåéñÜò­11
ôñéÞìåñùí­Óåìéíáñßùí­ÁöÜñìáêçò­(ÅóùôåñéêÞò)­ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò­ðïõ­äßäáîå­ï­ÄÜóêáëïò­Íéêüëáïò
Á.­ÌáñãéùñÞò­óôçí­Ýäñá­ôïõ­óôï­Ïìáêïåßï­Áèçíþí.
Ó'­áõôÜ­Ýãéíå­åêôåíÞò­-­åîáíôëçôéêÞ,­èåùñçôéêÞ­êáé­ðñáêôéêÞ,­áíÜëõóç­ôùí­âáóéêüôåñùí
èåñáðåõôéêþí­ ìåèüäùí­ êáé­ ðñùôßóôùò­ ôçò­ ÓéÜôóïõ.­ Ôçí­ ÷þñéóå­ óå­ 23­ ïìÜäåò­ ðïõ
áíôéðñïóùðåýïõí­ôéò­186­ðéï­äéáäåäïìÝíåò­áóèÝíåéåò­êáé­ì'­áõôü­ôïí­ôñüðï­ï­üðïéïò
åíäéáöåñüìåíïò­Ý÷åé­ôçí­äõíáôüôçôá­âÜóåé­ôçò­ðÜèçóçò­ðïõ­Ý÷åé­Þ­ðïõ­èÝëåé­íá­èåñáðåýóåé
íá­áíáôñÝ÷åé­óôï­ôñßôïìï­áõôü­Ýñãï,­íá­âëÝðåé­óå­ðïéá­ïìÜäá­Þ­êáé­ïìÜäåò­õðÜãåôáé­ôï­ðñüâëçìÜ
ôïõ­êáé­óôç­óõíÝ÷åéá­íá­êïéôÜåé­ôá­áíÜëïãá­óêßôóá­ìå­ôá­óçìåßá­ðïõ­õðïäåéêíýïíôáé­ãéá­ôçí
åîÜóêçóç­ôçò­èåñáðåõôéêÞò­ôå÷íéêÞò,­þóôå­íá­åßíáé­ðëÞñùò­êáôáôïðéóìÝíïò­ùò­ðñïò­ôï­ðþò
èá­ëåéôïõñãÞóåé.­ÐáñÜëëçëá­ðáñÝ÷åôáé­üëç­ç­áðáñáßôçôç­èåùñçôéêÞ­êáôÜñôéóç­ðïõ­óõìðëçñþíåé
ôçí­ìüñöùóç­ôïõ­åîáóêïýìåíïõ,­ç­ïðïßá­ìáæß­ìå­ôçí­ðñáêôéêÞ­ìåèïäïëïãßá­ôïõ­äßíåé­ôçí­åõ÷Ýñåéá
íá­áñ÷ßóåé­íá­ðáßñíåé­ðñùôïâïõëßá­ãéá­âïÞèåéá­ôïõ­åáõôïý­ôïõ­êáé­ôïõ­óõíáíèñþðïõ­ôïõ.
Ïé­11­áõôÝò­ìåëÝôåò­åêäüèçêáí­óôçí­óõíÝ÷åéá­óå­Ýíá­ôñßôïìï­Ýñãï­ðïõ­ïíïìÜóôçêå
"×åéñïðëáóôéêÞ­ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ­÷ùñßò­ÖÜñìáêá".­ÌÝóá­ó'­üëï­áõôü­ôï­Ýñãï­ôùí­11­ìåëåôþí­Þ­ôçò
âåëôéùìÝíçò­ôñßôïìçò­Ýêäïóçò­ðáñïõóéÜæåôáé­ç­èåñáðåßá­ìüíïí­ìå­öõóéêÜ­ìÝóá­êáé­äç­ìå­ìéá
ðëåéÜäá­èåñáðåõôéêþí­óõóôçìÜôùí,­åßôå­áõôüíïìá­åßôå­óå­ìßîç­ìåôáîý­ôïõò,­ðïõ­õðÜãïíôáé­óôçí
ÅóùôåñéêÞ­ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ,­üðùò­åßíáé:­ç­ÓéÜôóïõ­(ÉáðùíéêÞ­ôå÷íéêÞ­ðïõ­óçìáßíåé­äáêôõëïðßåóç),
ç­Áñ÷áßá­ÅëëçíéêÞ­ÁóêëçðéáêÞ­ÌÜëáîç­(Áóêëçðéåßá­-­ÁìöéáñÜåéá),­ç­Äáêôõëïêôýðçóç­(ìÝèïäïò
ÍéêïëÜïõ­ÌáñãéùñÞ),­ç­õðïâïëÞ,­ç­Åãêïßìçóç­(óÞìåñá­ïíïìÜæåôáé­õðíùôéóìüò),­ç­Ñåöëåîïëïãßá,
ç­åðßäñáóç­åðß­ôùí­ôñéáíôáôñéþí­óðïíäýëùí,­ç­ÓôáôéêÞ­ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ­êáé­ðÜñá­ðïëëþí­Üëëùí
ìåèüäùí­öõóéêÞò­-­áöÜñìáêçò­èåñáðåõôéêÞò­ðïõ­åîáóêïýíôáé­ìå­ãõìíÜ­÷Ýñéá,­ìå­ãíþóç,
åìðåéñßá­êáé­ðÜíù­áð'­üëá­ìå­ÓõãêÝíôñùóç.
Óêïðüò­ôïõ­üëïõ­Ýñãïõ­åßíáé­íá­äéäÜîåé­ðñáêôéêÜ­êáé­èåùñçôéêÜ,­ôé­åßíáé­ç­áññþóôéá­êáé­ðþò
ìðïñåß­êáé­ãßíåôáé­íá­èåñáðåõèåß­óùóôÜ­êáé­ñéæéêÜ,­ìå­ìéá­áíþôåñç­åðÝìâáóç,­äéÜöïñç­åêåßíçò
ðïõ­ãíùñßæïõìå­êáé­ðïõ­áíôß­ãéá­öÜñìáêá­êáé­íõóôÝñéá,­÷ñçóéìïðïéåß­ôçí­åóùôåñéêÞ
åíåñãçôéêüôçôá,­ôïí­áðïèçóáõñéóìÝíï­ìá­êáé­á÷ñçóéìïðïßçôï­ðëïýóéï­äõíáìéóìü­êÜèå­áíèñþðïõ.
Óôï­åí­ëüãù­Ýñãï­áíáëýåôáé­áðü­êÜèå­Üðïøç,­åîùôåñéêÞ­êáé­åóùôåñéêÞ,­ç­áññþóôéá­êáé­ôá
áßôéÜ­ôçò,­êáèþò­åðßóçò­êáé­ôá­âáóéêüôåñá­óõóôÞìáôá­ôçò­ÅóùôåñéêÞò­ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò­ãéá­ôçí
áðïêáôÜóôáóÞ­ôçò­êáé­ôçí­åðáíáöïñÜ­ôçò­õãåßáò­êáé­áñìïíßáò­óôïí­ðÜó÷ïíôá­óõíÜíèñùðï.
ÅìðåñéóôáôùìÝíá­ðáñïõóéÜæïíôáé­ôüóï­èåùñçôéêÜ­üóï­êáé­ðñáêôéêÜ,­ïé­ôå÷íéêÝò­êáé­ïé­ìÝèïäåò
ðïõ­èá­ðñÝðåé­íá­áêïëïõèçèïýí­ãéá­íá­åðéöÝñïõí­ôï­ðïèçôü­áðïôÝëåóìá­ôçò­èåñáðåßáò.
Ï­óõããñáöÝáò­õðïãñáììßæåé­êÜðïõ­üôé­"äéá­ôïõ­èåïý­êáé­ôçò­êáëÞò­ôý÷çò,­ðåôõ÷áßíïíôáé­ôá
èåñáðåõôéêÜ­áðïôåëÝóìáôá.­ÊÜèå­åñãÜôçò­ôïõ­êáëïý­åßíáé­üñãáíï­ôçò­áðáñÜâáôçò­áãáèÞò
ôý÷çò­(ôïõ­Èåïý),­äçëáäÞ­ôïõ­Íüìïõ­ôçò­ÁíôáðïäïôéêÞò­Äéêáéïóýíçò­(ÊÜñìá)".
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
relaxation,­by­special­breathings,­by­the­ensleeping,­and­finally,­by­the­unrivalled­SUGGESTION.
These­methods­constitute­the­object­of­the­said­essay­as­well.
Definitely,­above­all,­the­Esoteric­Education­becomes­necessary­that­softens­man­and­qui-
ets­his­passions­and­his­instincts.­For­exactly­these­passions­and­instincts­create­a­new­psy-
chasthenia­to­him­or­bring­him­on­the­surface­an­old-inherited­psychasthenia­that­gets­the­psy-
chopathy­form,­today.
THE LAST 11 ESSAYS (23rd-33rd)
The­last­11­essays­of­the­Therapeutical­Method­Siatsu­begin­from­the­essay­no.23­and­close
with­the­essay­no.33.­The­said­essays­iw­the­result­of­a­series­of­11­three-days­Seminars,­on
the­Therapeutics­Without­Medicines­(Esoteric)­that­Master­Nikolaos­A.­Margioris­at­his­seat,
in­Athens­Omakoio.
Is­these­Seminars­an­extensive­-­exhausting,­theoretical­and­practical­analysis­of­the­most
basical­terapeutical­methods­and­mainly­Siatsu,­took­place.­He­divided­it­in­23­groups­that­rep-
resent­the­186­more­spread­diseases­and­this­way,­any­interested­in­it­is­able,­on­the­basis
of­the­disease­he­suffers­of­or­that­he­wants­to­cure,­to­run­to­this­work­of­three­volumes,­to
see­in­which­group­or­groups­his­problem­belongs­and­them,­to­see­the­analogous­sketsches
with­the­points­indicated­for­the­exercise­of­the­therapeutical­techniques,­so­that­he­can­be
fully­informed­of­the­way­it­will­function.­At­the­same­time,­all­the­theoretical­formation­that
completes­the­trainee's­formation­is­afforded,­that­together­with­the­practical­methodology,
gives­him­the­ease­to­start­taking­the­initiative­to­help­himself­and­his­fellowman.
These­11­essays­were­then­published­in­a­work­of­three­volumes­that­was­called­"Chiro-
plastic­Therapeutics­Without­Medicines".­In­all­this­work­of­the­11­essays­or­of­the­improved
three-volumes­edition,­the­therapy­only­by­physical­means­is­presented,­and­even­with­very
many­therapeutical­systems,­either­autonomous­or­mixed,­that­belong­to­the­Esoteric­Thera-
peutics,­as:­Siatsu­(Japanese­techniques­that­means­fingerpressing),­the­Ancient­Greek­As-
clepean­Massage­(Asclepean­-­Amfiaraeam),­the­Fingertapping­(Nikolaos­Margiori's­method),
the­suggestion,­the­Ensleeping­(today­it­is­called­hypnotism),­the­Reflexology,­the­influence
on­the­thirty-three­vertebras,­the­Static­Therapeutics,­and­many­other­methods­of­physical­ther-
apeutics­without­medicines­that­are­exercised­by­bare­hands,­bay­knowledge,­experience­and
above­all,­by­Concentration.
The­aim­of­the­whole­work­is­to­teach­practically­and­theoretically,­what­disease­is­and­how
it­can­be­cured­rightly­and­radically,­by­a­superior­operation,­different­that­the­one­we­know
and­that,­instead­of­the­medicines­and­lancests,­uses­the­esoteric­activity,­the­treasured­but
also­unused­rich­dynamism­of­every­man.
In­the­mentioned­work,­the­disease­and­its­causes­are­analyzed.­Also,­the­most­basical­sys-
tems­of­the­Esoteric­Therapeutics­for­its­restoration­and­for­the­bringing­health­and­harmony
back­to­the­suffering­fellow-man.­The­techniques­and­the­methods­that­must­be­followed­to
bring­the­desired­therapy­results,­are­thoroughly­presented,­as­much­theoretically­as­practi-
cally.
The­writer­underlines­somewhere­that­"by­God­an­by­the­good­luck­the­therapeutical­re-
sults­are­achieved.­Every­worker­of­the­good­is­an­organ­of­the­inviolable­good­luck­(God),
that­is­of­the­Retributive­Justice­Law­(Karma)".
91 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 Ó×ÏËÅÓ ÓÅ ËÅÉÔÏÕÑÃÉÁ ÔÙÍ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÙÍ SCHOOLS IN FUNCTION OF THE OMAKOIOS
ÁÈÇÍÙÍ, ËÁÌÉÁÓ & ÔÑÉÊÁËÙÍ OF ATHENS, LAMIA & TRIKALA

Áðü áñéóôåñÜ ðñïò ôá äåîéÜ: Ïé õðåýèõíïé ôùí Ïìáêïåßùí Ëáìßáò, ÔñéêÜëùí êáé Áèçíþí, ÄçìÞôñçò ÔóáðÜñáò, Çëßáò ÊáôóéÜìðáò (ï
ÄÜóêáëïò Íéêüëáïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò ðïõ åí æùÞ ßäñõóå êáé åãêáéíßáóå ôá ôñßá ðñïáíáöåñèÝíôá Ïìáêïåßá) êáé ÓìÜñù ÊïóìÜïãëïõ áíôßóôïé÷á.

From the left to the right. The responsible of the Omakoios of Lamia, Trikala and Athens, Dimitris Tsaparas, Ilias Katsiampas (Master Nikolaos A.
Margioris who in life founded and inaugurated the three above - mentioned Omakoios) and Smaro Kosmaoglou correspondingly.

Á F
êïëïýèùò ðáñáèÝôïõìå ðñïò åíçìÝñùóç ôùí áíáãíùóôþí ôçí
ýðáñîç êáé ëåéôïõñãßá óôïí Åëëáäéêü ÷þñï ôñéþí Áìéãþí êáé
Áõôïäýíáìùí Ìåôáöõóéêþí Ó÷ïëþí (ìå ðëÞñç áðüäïóç ôçò
äéäáóêáëßáò ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý) ðïõ äçìéïõñãÞèçêáí êáé åãêáéíéÜóôçêáí
áðü ôïí ßäéï ôïí ÄÜóêáëï, Þôïé, ôïõ Ïìáêïåßïõ Áèçíþí, ôïõ Ïìáêïåßïõ
Ëáìßáò êáé ôïõ Ïìáêïåßïõ ÔñéêÜëùí.
Ç êáôáãñáöÞ ôïõò ãßíåôáé äéüôé êáé ïé ôñåéò áíÞêïõí óå ìáèçôÝò -
åêðáéäåõôÝò ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ, éäñýèçêáí ìå ôçí
ðëÞñç óõãêáôÜèåóç êáé ðáñüôñõíóÞ Ôïõ åíüóù Þôáí áêüìç ï ßäéïò åí
æùÞ êáé áêïëïõèïýí ôéò äéêÝò ôïõ ÐíåõìáôéêÝò ÐáñáêáôáèÞêåò êáé
Äéäáóêáëßåò.
Âåâáßùò ôï êÜèå Ïìáêïåßï äåí ðáýåé íá áðïôåëåß ìéá Îå÷ùñéóôÞ êáé
Áõôüíïìç Ïíôüôçôá - Ðíåõìáôéêü Ó÷ïëåßï ìå äéêÞ ôïõ Ôáõôüôçôá - Éóôïñßá
êáé ¸ñãï êáé ìå äéêÞ ôïõ Ðñïóùðéêüôçôá êáé ÅêðáéäåõôÞ.
ÐáñÜëëçëá üëá åßíáé êÜôù áðü ôçí ÓêÝðç ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ áëëÜ êáé óå
Ðõèáãüñåéá ¸íùóç (Ðõèáãüñåéï Äåóìü) ìåôáîý ôïõò, åíþ ìåñéìíïýí
êáé õðçñåôïýí ôï åîáôïìéêåõìÝíï öéëåëåýèåñï öéëïóïöéêü Ýñãï ðïõ
áíÝëáâáí õðü ôçí åíôïëÞ Ôïõ.
or the acknowledgement of the readers we quote below the
existence and the function in the Greek area of three Pure
and Selfpowered Metaphysical Schools (with the full render-
ing of the teaching of the Esoterism) that were created and inaugu-
rated by Master himself, that is the Omakoio of Athens, the Omakoeio
of Lamia and the Omakoeio of Trikala.
Their recording takes place because all the three belong to Mas-
ter Nikolaos A. Margiori's students-instructors, they were founded af-
ter his full consent and instigation while he was still living, and they
follow his own Spiritual Deposits and Teachings.
Certainly, every Omakoio always constitutes a Separate and Self-
powered Entity-Spiritual School with its own Identity-History and
Work and with its own Personality and Instructor.
At the same time, All is under the Protection of the Master but al-
so in a Pytagorean Union (Pythagorean Link) among them, while all
cares and serves the individualized liberal phlosophical work that it
has undertaken under His order.

Ïìáêïåßï Áèçíþí Omakoio of Athens

ÓìÜñù É. ÊïóìÜïãëïõ Smaro I. Kosmaoglou
ÌåôáöõóéêÝò ¸ñåõíåò, Ãéüãêá, ÓéÜôóïõ Metaphysical Searches in Yoga and Siatsou
ÁíéÜíïò 6, 10434 (Ðëáôåßá Âéêôùñßáò) ÁèÞíá Enianos 6, 10434 Athens, Greece
Ôçë: 01 - 8210051 êáé Öáî: 01 - 8211090 Tel: 01 - 8210051 and Fax: 01 - 8211090

Ïìáêïåßï Ëáìßáò (êáé ÊáëëéèÝáò) Omakoio of Lamia (and Kallithea of Athens)

ÄçìÞôñçò êáé Êïýëá ÔóáðÜñá Dimitris and Koula Tsapara
ÌåôáöõóéêÝò ¸ñåõíåò, Ãéüãêá, ÓéÜôóïõ Metaphysical Searches in Yoga and Siatsou
ÌéëôéÜäïõ 31, 35100 Ëáìßá 31 Miltiadou Street, 35100 Lamia, Greece
Ôçë.: 0231 - 32888 Tel: 0231 - 32888

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 92 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001

 Ïìáêïåßï ÔñéêÜëùí (êáé Èåóóáëïíßêçò)
Çëßáò Ë. ÊáôóéÜìðáò
ÌåôáöõóéêÝò ¸ñåõíåò, Ãéüãêá, ÓéÜôóïõ
Êåöáëëçíßáò 21, 42100 Ôñßêáëá
Ôçë.: 0431 - 75505 Þ 031 - 410497 Þ 093 - 2418994
Web Site:http://www.omakoio.gr
E-mail: omakoio@omakoio.gr Þ omakoio@aias.gr
Ôåëåõôáßá Ýãéíáí ðñïóðÜèåéåò äéåýñõíóçò ôïõ ¸ñãïõ Ôïõ ìå ôçí
ëåéôïõñãßá -ðÝñáí ôùí Üëëùí- êáé ðáñáñôçìÜôùí óå äéÜöïñá óçìåßá ôçò
ÅëëÜäáò.
Ôï Ïìáêïåßï Áèçíþí åðÝêôåéíå ôçí äñáóôçñéüôçôÜ ôïõ êáé óôïí ÐåéñáéÜ
ìå ðáñÜñôçìá ðïõ åßíáé õðü ôçí åðïðôåßá ôïõ Êùíóôáíôßíïõ ÄéìåëÞ êáé
ôï ïðïßï îåêßíçóå áðü ôïí ÖåâñïõÜñéï ôïõ 1999 ìå ôçí äéäáóêáëßá ôçò
ÅóùôåñéêÞò Öéëïóïößáò ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ êáé ôçò Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá.
Åðßóçò óôçí ÊÝñêõñá Ýíá äåýôåñï ðáñÜñôçìá åßíáé Þäç óå ëåéôïõñãßá
õðü ôçí äéåýèõíóç ôùí ÉùÜííç Óãïýñïõ êáé Óïýëáò ÐïõëéÜóç, ôï ïðïßï
äéäÜóêåé ôçí ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá, ôçí ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ êáé ôçí
Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá.
Ôï Ïìáêïåßï Ëáìßáò áðü ôïí ÖåâñïõÜñéï ôïõ 1999 äñáóôçñéïðïéåßôáé
äéäáêôéêÜ óå üëá ôá áíôéêåßìåíá ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý êáé óôçí ÊáëëéèÝá ôçò
ÁèÞíáò.
ÔÝëïò ôï Ïìáêïåßï ÔñéêÜëùí, ðÝñáí ôçò õöéóôÜìåíçò äñáóôçñéüôçôÜò
ôïõ (ìå 9 ÷ñüíéá óõíå÷ïýò êáé áðñüóêïðôçò ëåéôïõñãßáò), áðü ôïí
ÉáíïõÜñéï ôïõ 1999 îåêßíçóå êé áõôü ãéá äåýôåñç öïñÜ óôçí éóôïñßá ôïõ
ôçí ÐëÞñç äéäáóêáëßá -èåùñçôéêÞ êáé ðñáêôéêÞ- ôïõ ðïëõó÷éäïýò Ýñãïõ
ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ êáé óôçí Èåóóáëïíßêç ìå áðþôåñï óôü÷ï ôçí åêðñïóþðçóç
ôçò öùíÞò Ôïõ êáé óôçí óõìðñùôåýïõóá êáé ôçí ßäñõóç Ïìáêïåßïõ
Èåóóáëïíßêçò.
Áêüìç ìáèçôÝò ôïõ Ïìáêïåßïõ ÔñéêÜëùí ëåéôïõñãïýí áðü ôïí
Ïêôþâñéï ôïõ 1999 óå äýï óçìåßá óôçí ðåñéï÷Þ ôçò Êáñäßôóáò
ÐáñáñôÞìáôá - Ó÷ïëÝò ìå ÅóùôåñéêÝò äéäáóêáëßåò õðü ôçí êáèïäÞãçóç
ôïõ õðåýèõíïõ ôïõ Ïìáêïåßïõ ÔñéêÜëùí.
ÌåìïíùìÝíåò äñáóôçñéüôçôåò áíáðôýóóïíôáé åðßóçò áðü ìáèÞôñéåò
êáé ìáèçôÝò ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ óå äéÜöïñá óçìåßá ôçò ÅëëÜäáò üðùò óôçí
ÊïìïôçíÞ êáé óôï ËïõôñÜêé Êïñéíèßáò üðïõ ðáñïõóéÜæåôáé êõñßùò ç
ÅóùôåñéêÞ Öéëïóïößá, ç Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá êáé ïñéóìÝíåò ðôõ÷Ýò ôçò
ÅóùôåñéêÞò ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò.
ÔÁ ÍÅÏÔÅÑÁ ÉÄÑÕÈÅÍÔÁ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÁ
Ïìáêïåßï Èåóóáëïíßêçò
ÌåôáöõóéêÝò ¸ñåõíåò, Ãéüãêá, ÓéÜôóïõ
Çëßáò Ë. ÊáôóéÜìðáò
Ôçë. & Öáî: 031 - 410497 Þ 0431 - 75505
ÊáëáìáñéÜ, Èåóóáëïíßêç
Web Site:http://www.omakoio.gr
E-mail: omakoio@omakoio.gr Þ omakoio@aias.gr
Ïìáêïåßï ÊáëëéèÝáò Áèçíþí
ÄçìÞôñçò ÔóáðÜñáò
ÌåôáöõóéêÝò ¸ñåõíåò, Ãéüãêá, ÓéÜôóïõ
Áôèéäþí 83 êáé ÃñõðÜñç, ÊáëëéèÝá, ÁèÞíá
Ôçë.: 01 - 4206206 & 097 - 2288167
Ïìáêïåßï ÊÝñêõñáò
ÌåôáöõóéêÝò ¸ñåõíåò, Ãéüãêá, ÓéÜôóïõ
Õðåýèõíïé: ÃéÜííçò Óãïýñïò êáé Óïýëá ÐïõëéÜóç
Âåëéóóáñßïõ 23, 49100 ÊÝñêõñá
Ôçë.: 0661 - 38364
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
Omakoio of Trikala (and Thessaloniki)
Ilias L. Katsiampas
Metaphysical Searches in Yoga and Siatsou
21 Kefallinias Street, 42100 Trikala, Greece
Tel & Fax: 0431 - 75505 or 031 - 410497 or 093 - 2418994
Web Site:http://www.omakoio.gr
E-mail: omakoio@omakoio.gr or omakoio@aias.gr
Recently some efforts were made for the clarification of His Work
with the function - except everythng else - of departments in vari-
ous parts of Greece.
Omakoio of Athens has extended its activity also in Piraeus with
a branch that is under the supervision of Konstantinos Dimelis and
which started from February 1999 by the teaching of the Esoteric Phi-
losophy of the Master and of Kriya Yoga.
Also, a second branch is already in function in Kerkira, under the
direction of Ioannis Sgouros and Soula Pouliassi, where the Eso-
teric Philosophy, the Esoteric Therapeutics and Kriya Yoga are be-
ing taught.
Omakoio of Lamia from February 1999 is oriented to be activat-
ed instructively in all subjects of Esoterism also in Kallithea of A-
thens.
Finally, Omakoio of Trikala, except of its existing activity (with 8
years of continual and unhindered function), also starts for the sec-
ond time in its history, the Full Teaching -theoretical and practical-
of the multifarious work of the Master also in Thessaloniki, with the
furthest target the representation of His voice also in the co-capital
and the foundation of an Omakoio of Thessaloniki.
Also students from Omakoio of Trikala function from October
1999 in two places in the area of Karditsa Branches - Schools with
Esoteric teachings under the instruction of the responsible from O-
makoio of Trikala.
Some isolated activities are also being developed by students and
girl-students of the Master in different points of Greece, as in Ko-
motini and in Lutraki of Korinthia etc., where the Esoteric Philoso-
phy, Kriya Yoga and certain folds of the Esoteric Therapeutics are
mainly presented.
THE MOST RECENTLY FOUNDED OMAKOIA TO GREECE
Omakoio of Thessaloniki
Ilias L. Katsiampas
Metaphysical Searches in Yoga and Siatsou
Kalamaria, Thessaloniki
Tel: 031 - 410497 or 0431 - 75505
Web Site:http://www.omakoio.gr
E-mail: omakoio@omakoio.gr Þ omakoio@aias.gr
Omakoio of Kallithea
Dimitris Tsaparas
Metaphysical Searches in Yoga and Siatsou
Athtidon 83 and Grypari, Kallithea Athens
Tel.: 01 - 4206206 and 0972 - 288167
Omakoio of Kerkyra
Giannis Sgouros & Soula Pouliasi
Metaphysical Searches in Yoga and Siatsou
23 Velissariou Street, 49100 Kerkyra, Greece
0661 - 38364
93 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 Ïìáêïåßï ÐåéñáéÜ
Êþóôáò êáé Ìáñßá ÄéìåëÞ
ÊáñáÀóêïõ 122, 18535 ÐåéñáéÜò
Ôçë.: 01 - 4296494
Ïìáêïåßï Ñüäïõ
Õðåýèõíç: Ðçíåëüðç ÊáêëÝá
ÌåôáöõóéêÝò ¸ñåõíåò, Ãéüãêá, ÓéÜôóïõ
ÐáðáíéêïëÜïõ 12, 85100 Ñüäïò
Ôçë.: 0241 - 28631
ÓÔÁ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÁ ÁÈÇÍÙÍ, ËÁÌÉÁÓ, ÔÑÉÊÁËÙÍ
ÊÁÉ ÔÁ ÍÅÏÚÄÑÕÈÅÍÔÁ
ËÅÉÔÏÕÑÃÏÕÍ ÔÁ ÅÎÇÓ ÔÌÇÌÁÔÁ:
Á) ÅÊÄÏÓÇ - ÐÙËÇÓÇ ÂÉÂËÉÙÍ ×ÏÍÄÑÉÊÇ - ËÉÁÍÉÊÇ
Áðü ôá Ïìáêïåßá äéáôßèåíôáé üëá ôá âéâëßá ðïõ óõíÝãñáøå êáé
åîÝäùóå ï Ìåôáöõóéêüò ÄÜóêáëïò Íéêüëáïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò (75
óõíïëéêÜ Ýñãá). ÆçôÞóôå ó÷åôéêü ôéìïêáôÜëïãï. Åðßóçò ôá âéâëßá ôïõ
Çëßá Ë. ÊáôóéÜìðá (ìáèçôÞ ôïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ) "Áðü ôï óôüìá
ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ óôï áõôß ôïõ ìáèçôÞ, ìå åìðåñéóôáôùìÝíï ãëùóóÜñéï
ÓáíóêñéôéêÞò (öéëïóïöéêü ëåîéêü, 400 ëÝîåéò) ãéá ôïõò óðïõäáóôÝò
ôçò Ãéüãêá êáé ãéá êÜèå åíäéáöåñüìåíï", "Ç ÁðïêÜëõøç ôïõ ÉùÜííç
ÅîçãçìÝíç áðü ôïí ÄÜóêáëï Íéêüëáï Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ, õðü ôçí åðéìÝëåéá
êáé ôïõò åêôåíåßò áíáëõôéêïýò ó÷ïëéáóìïýò ôïõ ìáèçôÞ ôïõ Çëßá Ë.
ÊáôóéÜìðá". Óå ìïñöÞ èåñìïêïëëçìÝíùí ìåëåôþí äéáôßèåíôáé ôá
Åãêáßíéá ôùí Ïìáêïåßùí ÔñéêÜëùí êáé Ëáìßáò êáé ç ÅïñôÞ ôùí 10
Åôþí áðü ôçí ºäñõóç ôïõ Ïìáêïåßïõ Áèçíþí, üëá õðü ôçí ðáñïõóßá
ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ, åíþ åôïéìÜæåôáé "Åã÷åéñßäéï - Ïäçãüò ãéá õðïøÞöéïõò
ÅêðáéäåõôÝò ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý âÜóåé ôùí Ðáñáêáôáèçêþí ôïõ ¸ñãïõ
ôïõ Í. Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ". Õðü Ýêäïóç âéâëßá ôïõ éäßïõ: á) ÐëçñÝóôáôï êáé
áíáëõôéêü Ëåîéêü - Ïäçãüò Ìåôáöõóéêþí Åííïéþí, â) Ôá ÓõóôÞìáôá
ôçò ÅóùôåñéêÞò ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò, ã) Äéáëïãéóìüò êáé Ìõóôéêéóìüò, ÑÜôæá
êáé Êïõíôáëßíç Ãéüãêá (Èåùñßá êáé ÐñÜîç).
ÆçôÞóôå ìáò íá óáò óôåßëïõìå ôéìïêáôÜëïãï üëùí ôùí âéâëßùí.
Â) Ó×ÏËÇ ÊÑÉÃÉÁ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ ÓÙÌÁÔÏØÕ×ÉÊÇ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ
Ï ÄÜóêáëïò ôçò ÌåôáöõóéêÞò, Ãéüãêá êáé Óéáôóïý Í. ÌáñãéùñÞò
åðáíáâßùóå êáé êáèéÝñùóå ôçí áõèåíôéêÞ Êñßãéá Ãéüãêá. ÁíÝóõñå áðü
ôçí áöÜíåéá ôçí ãíÞóéá Êñßãéá êáé ôçí åðáíÝöåñå óôç Äçìïóéüôçôá.
Ôçí ðñùôïäßäáîå óôçí ÅëëÜäá ôï 1981 óôï Ïìáêïåßï Áèçíþí êáé
Ýãñáøå ôï ðñþôï âéâëßï Üíåõ ÄéäáóêÜëïõ "ÐñáêôéêÞ ÌÝèïäïò
Óùìáôïøõ÷éêÞò ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò ÊÑÉÃÉÁ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ". Óôç Ó÷ïëÞ
äéäÜóêïíôáé óùìáôéêÝò áóêÞóåéò óå óõíäõáóìü ìå ñõèìéêÝò áíáðíïÝò
(ÐñáíáãéÜìá), þóôå íá åíäõíáìùèåß ôï Íåõñéêü êáé Ìõéêü óýóôçìá
ìå áðïôÝëåóìá ôçí õãåßá êáé ôçí çñåìßá üðùò êáé ôçí áðáëëáãÞ ôïõ
áóêïýìåíïõ áðü ôï Üã÷ïò êáé ôéò øõ÷ïëïãéêÝò åóùôåñéêÝò ôïõ
áíáóôáôþóåéò. Ç Êñßãéá åßíáé ôï ìüíï ìïíïðÜôé ðïõ ïñèÜ ðñïåôïéìÜæåé
ôïí áóêïýìåíï ãéá ôçí åéóáãùãÞ ôïõ óôçí ÓõãêÝíôñùóç - Äéáëïãéóìü
(ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá). ÆçôÞóôå ìáò åíçìåñùôéêÜ Ýíôõðá.
Ã) Ó×ÏËÇ ÑÁÔÆÁ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ ÁÍÕØÙÓÇ ÔÏÕ ÍÏÕ ÁÐÏ ÔÇÍ
ÓÕÍÅÉÄÇÓÇ ÓÔÇÍ ÕÐÅÑÓÕÍÅÉÄÇÓÇ
Ç äéäáóêáëßá ôçò óõíïäåýåôáé êáé áðü ôï âéâëßï ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ
ÍéêïëÜïõ ÌáñãéùñÞ "ÑÁÔÆÁ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ, áíýøùóç ôïõ Íïõ áðü ôçí
óõíåßäçóç óôçí õðåñóõíåßäçóç". Óôç ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá åêðáéäåýïíôáé ïé
ðñï÷ùñçìÝíïé ìáèçôÝò ìüíï óå íïçôéêÝò áóêÞóåéò, ìå óêïðü ôçí
ôåëåéïðïßçóç êáé åîéóïññüðçóç ôïõ Íïõ. Ï áóêïýìåíïò éó÷õñïðïéåß
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
Omakoio of Peirea
Kostas & Maria Dimelis
Metaphysical Searches in Yoga and Siatsou
122 Karaiskou, 18535 Peireas, Greece, Tel: 01 - 4296494
Omakoio of Rodos
Pinelopi Kaklea
Metaphysical Searches in Yoga and Siatsou
12 Papanikolaou, 85100 Rodos, Greece
Tel: 0241 - 28631
IN OMAKOIOS OF ATHENS, LAMIA, TRIKALA
AND NEW-RECENTLY
THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS FUNCTIION:
A) EDITION - SALES OF BOOKS
WHOLESALE - RETAIL
From the Omakoios all the books that Nikolaos A. Margioris, the
Metaphyscial Master, wrote and published (75 works in total), are dis-
posed. Also Ilias L Katsiampa's book (Nikolaos A. Margiori's stu-
dent) "From the Master's Mouth to the Student's Ear, with a
thourough Glossary of the Sanscrit Language (a philoshopical dic-
tionary, 400 words) for the students of Yoga and for every interest-
ed one", "Ioannis Apocalypse explained be Master Nikolaos A. Mar-
gioris, under the attendance and the extensive analytical commen-
dations of his student Ilias L. Katsiampas", and in the mean - time a
"Manuel - Guide for the candidate instructors of the Esoterism, in the
basis of the Deposits of Master Nikolaos A. Margioris is under prepa-
ration.
Under the form of a thermo-soldered essay circulated the Inau-
guration of Omakoio of Trikala and of Omakoio of Lamia as well as
the text from the feast that took place for the 10 years from the foun-
dation of the Omakoio of Athens in 1987 in the hotel Grand Bre-
tagne in Athens. The above were accomplished by Master N. A. Mar-
gioris. Under publication are the books of same: a) A full and ana-
lytical Dictionary - Guide of Metaphysical Meanings, b) The Systems
of the Esoteric Therapeutics, c) Meditation and Mysticism, Raja and
Kundalini Yoga (Theory and Practice).
B) SCHOOL OF KRIYA YOGA
SOMATOPSYCHICAL THERAPEUTICS
N. Margioris, the Master of the Metaphysics, Yoga and Siatsu, re-
vived the authentical Kriya Yoga. He drew up from the darkness the
genuine Kriya and he brought it back to the Publicity. He taught it
for the first time in Greece, in 1981 at the Omakoio of Athens and
he wrote the first book without Teacher "Practical Method of the So-
matophsychic Therapeutics KRIYA YOGA". In the School some bod-
ily exercises combined with rythmical breathings (Pranayama) are
taught, for the Nervous and Muscular System to be strengthened, re-
sulting the health and the calmness, as well as the release of the
trainee from the stress and his psychological internal disturbances.
Kriya is the only path that prepares correctly the trainee for his ind-
toduction in the Concentration (Raja Yoga).
C) SCHOOL OF RAJA YOGA
ELEVATION OF THE MIND FROM THE CONSCIENCE
TO THE HYPERCONSCIENCE
It was founded and has been functioning at Trikala, from De-
94 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
ôç èÝëçóÞ ôïõ êáé áðïêôÜ ðéï åõñýôåñç êáé äéáõãÞ áíôßëçøç ãéá êÜèå
èÝìá ðïõ ôïí áðáó÷ïëåß êáé éäéáßôåñá ãéá ôá ÌåôáöõóéêÜ. Åêôåëïýíôáé
åéäéêÝò áóêÞóåéò óõãêÝíôñùóçò êáé õðåñóõãêÝíôñùóçò ðïõ ìüíï ç
ÑÜôæá Ãéüãêá äéáèÝôåé, ìå ôåëéêü áíôéêåéìåíéêü óêïðü ôçí ðñïïäåõôéêÞ
åðáíáäñáóôçñéïðïßçóç ôçò ôñßôçò êáé õøçëüôåñçò ëåéôïõñãßáò ôïõ
Íïõ, ôçò õðåñóõíåßäçôçò. ÄéäÜóêïíôáé åðßóçò üëá ôá óõóôÞìáôá ôçò
Ãéüãêá üðùò ÊÜñìá, ÌðÜêôé, ÌÜíôñá, ÃêíÜíé, Êïõíôáëßíç (ÔÜíôñá)
ê.ëð. ÆçôÞóôå ìáò åíçìåñùôéêÜ ðñïóðÝêôïõò.
Ä) ÓÅÌÉÍÁÑÉÁ ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ - ÕÐÏÂÏËÇÓ - ÅÃÊÏÉÌÇÓÇÓ
Ãßíïíôáé êÜèå ÷ñüíï ÓåìéíÜñéá áöÜñìáêçò öõóéïèåñáðåõôéêÞò ðïõ
âáóßæïíôáé óôçí ÉáðùíéêÞ ôå÷íéêÞ ôçò Óéáôóïý (Íáìéêüóé), åíþ
ðáñÜëëçëá äéäÜóêïíôáé ç Áñ÷áßá ÅëëçíéêÞ ìÝèïäïò ôçò ÌÜëáîçò
(Áóêëçðéåßá - ÁìöéáñÜåéá), ôçò Äáêôõëïêôýðçóçò (ìÝèïäïò ÍéêïëÜïõ
Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ), ôçò Åãêïßìçóçò (õðïâïëÞò, õðíùôéóìïý) êáé ðïëëÝò
Üëëåò. ÆçôÞóôå ìáò íá óáò åíçìåñþíïõìå ãéá êÜèå ÓåìéíÜñéï ðïõ
ðñïãñáììáôßæïõìå áðïóôÝëëïíôÜò óáò ó÷åôéêü ðñïóðÝêôïõò.
Å) ÓÅÌÉÍÁÑÉÁ ÊÁÉ ÏÌÉËÉÅÓ ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇÓ ÖÉËÏÓÏÖÉÁÓ
Ó' áõôÜ áíáðôýóóïíôáé èÝìáôá ðïõ áöïñïýí üëï ôï êýêëùìá ôçò
ÅóùôåñéêÞò Öéëïóïößáò, äçëáäÞ ôïõ Áðïêñõöéóìïý êáé Ìõóôéêéóìïý,
üðùò ïé Üëëåò ÄéáóôÜóåéò, ï Íüìïò ôçò Åëåýèåñçò Âïýëçóçò, ôïõ
ÊÜñìá êáé ôçò ÌåôåíóÜñêùóçò, ç æùÞ êáé ôï Ýñãï ìåãÜëùí
ÄéäáóêÜëùí ôçò Óïößáò, Óþìá - Íïõò - Íüçóç - Øõ÷Þ - Ðíåýìá, ôï
Èåßï Ó÷Ýäéï êáé ç ÅîÝëéîç ôçò Äçìéïõñãßáò ê.ë.ð. ÆçôÞóôå ìáò ó÷åôéêü
ðñüãñáììá ïìéëéþí.
ÓÔ) Ó×ÏËÇ ÁÔÌÏÛÃÑÏÐÏÉÇÓÇÓ ÁÄÕÍÁÔÉÓÌÁ ÌÏÍÏ ÃÉÁ
ÃÕÍÁÉÊÅÓ
Ôï ôìÞìá áõôü ëåéôïõñãåß ìßá Þ äýï öïñÝò ôï ÷ñüíï êáé ç äéÜñêåéÜ
ôïõ åßíáé ðåñßðïõ 2 & ½ ìÞíåò. Ó' áõôü ãßíïíôáé åéäéêÝò áóêÞóåéò óå
óõíäõáóìü ìå êáôÜëëçëåò áíáðíïÝò (ÐñáíáãéÜìá - óýóôçìá Í.
ÌáñãéùñÞ), ðïõ áíáðôýóóïõí óå öïâåñü âáèìü ôéò êáýóåéò ôïõ
ïñãáíéóìïý ìå áðïôÝëåóìá ôçí åößäñùóç êáé ôï ëéþóéìï ôùí ëéðþí
ôïõ ïñãáíéóìïý. Ôáõôü÷ñïíá ãßíåôáé ÓÕÓÖÉÃÎÇ ôùí ìõþí ÷ùñßò
ìç÷áíéêÜ ìÝóá êáé öÜñìáêá.
Æ) ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÏ ÊËÅÉÄÉ: ÓÐÏÕÄÅÓ ÌÅ ÁËËÇËÏÃÑÁÖÉÁ ÓÔÏÕÓ
ÐÁÑÁÊÁÔÙ ÊËÁÄÏÕÓ ÔÏÕ ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÓÌÏÕ
1) ÁÓÔÑÏËÏÃÉÁ - ÁÓÔÑÏÓÏÖÉÁ (óåë. 565)
2) ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÖÉËÏÓÏÖÉÁ (óåë. 388)
3) ÅÐÉÓÔÇÌÏÍÉÊÏÓ ÐÍÅÕÌÁÔÉÓÌÏÓ (óåë. 400)
4) ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ - ÏÑÈÏØÕ×ÉÓÌÏÓ (óåë. 400)
5) ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ (óåë. 478)
6) ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ (óåë. 385)
7) ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ (óåë. 418)
8) ÁÐÏÓÕÌÂÏËÉÓÌÏÓ
ÆçôÞóôå ìáò íá óáò óôåßëïõìå áíáëõôéêü ðñïóðÝêôïõò êáé áßôçóç
åããñáöÞò ãéá ôéò óðïõäÝò äé' áëëçëïãñáößáò. Ïé åíäéáöåñüìåíïé ãéá
ðåñéóóüôåñåò ðëçñïöïñßåò êáé áíáëõôéêÜ ðñïóðÝêôïõò ãéá ôï êÜèå
ôìÞìá, ìðïñïýí íá áðïôáíèïýí óôï ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ ÔÑÉÊÁËÙÍ,
Êåöáëëçíßáò 21, 42100 Ôñßêáëá êáé óôá ôçëÝöùíá.: 0431 - 75505 Þ
031 - 410497 Þ 093 - 2418994, ê. Çëßá ÊáôóéÜìðá. Åðßóçò óôá êáôÜ
ôüðïõò Ïìáêïåßá ôçò ðåñéï÷Þò ôïõò. Óôá Ïìáêïåßá ÔñéêÜëùí êáé
Èåóóáëïíßêçò äéáôßèåíôáé üëá ôá âéâëßá, ìåëÝôåò, ðåñéïäéêÜ êáé
ìáèÞìáôá ìå áëëçëïãñáößá, ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ,
éäñõôÞ ôïõ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏÕ ÁÈÇÍÙÍ êáèþò êáé ôá âéâëßá êáé ìåëÝôåò
ôïõ ìáèçôÞ ôïõ Çëßá Ë. ÊáôóéÜìðá.
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
cember 5tth 1991. Its teaching is also accompanied by Master Niko-
laos Margiori's book "RAJA YOGA". In Raja Yoga the advanced s-
tudents are trained only in intellectual exercises, aiming to the per-
fectioning and to the well-balancing of the Mind. The trainee strength-
ens his will and gets a larger and clearer understandig about every
subject that occupies him and especially about the Metaphysics. Spe-
cial exercises of concentration and of hyperconcentration are exe-
cuted that only Raja Yoga disposes, having as their final objective
purpose the progressive reactivation of the third and higher function
of the Mind, of the hyperconscient. Also all the systems of Yoga are
taught, as Karma, Bhakti, Mantra, Gnani, Kundalini (Tantra) etc.
D) SEMINARS OF SIATSU - SUGGESTION - ENSLEEPING
Every year seminars of the physiotherapeutics without medicines
take place, that are based on the Japanese techinque of Siatsu
(Namikosi), while at the same time the Ancient Greek method of the
Massaging (Asclepia-Amfiaraia), of the Fingertapping (Nikolaos A.
Margiori's method), of the Ensleeping (suggestion, hypnotism) and
many others are taught.
E) SEMINARS AND SPEECHES
OF ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY
In these some matters that concern the whole web of the Esoteric
Philosophy are developed, that is of the Occultism and of the Mys-
ticism, as the other Dimensions, the Law of the Free Will, of Karma
and of the Reincarnation, the life and the work of the great Masters
of the Wisdom, Body-Mind-Intellect-Soul-Spirit, the Divine Plan and
the Evolution of the Creation etc.
F) SCHOOL OF ATMOLIQUIFICATION
SLIMMING ONLY FOR WOMEN
This department of Omakoios functions only once or twice per year and
its duration is about 2 & ½ months. In this some special exercices take place
in combination with the proper breathings (Pranayama - N. Margiori's sys-
tem), that develop at an awful extent the combustions of the organism, re-
sulting the perspiration and the melting of the fats of the organism. At the
same time, the TIGHTENING of the muscles is obtained without any me-
chanical means and medicine.
G) ESOTERIC KEY
CORRESPONDENCE COURSES IN THE FOLLOWING BRANCHES
OF THE ESOTERISM
1) ASTROLOGY - ASTROSOPHY (p. 565)
2) ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY (p. 388)
3) SCIENTIFIC SPIRITUALISM (p. 400)
4) HYPNOTISM - ORTHOPSYCHISM (p. 400)
5) ESOTERIC THERAPEUTICS (p. 478)
6) ESOTERIC INITIATION (p. 385)
7) MEDITATION (p. 418)
8) DESYMBOLISM
Those who are interested in more details and analytical prospectus for
every section, may address to the OMAKOEIO OF TRIKALA, 21, Kefallinias
street, 42100, Trikala, Greece and to the tel. No.: 0431-75505 or 093 -
2418994, mr. Ilias Katsiampas. Also, at the topical Omakoia of their area.
In the Omakoio of Trikala and of Thessaloniki all the books, essays, mag-
azines and correspondence courses by Master Nikolaos A. Margioris, founder
of OMAKOIO OF ATHENS, and his student Ilias L. Katsiampas, books and
essays, are disposed.
95 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 ÂÉÏÃÑÁÖÉÊÏ ÓÇÌÅÉÙÌÁ
ÍÉÊÏËÁÏÕ Á. ÌÁÑÃÉÙÑÇ
Ï Íéêüëáïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò (15/12/1913 - 6/5/1993) á-
ðïôåëåß ìéá áðü ôéò ìåãáëýôåñåò êáé åîÝ÷ïõóåò öõ-
óéïãíùìßåò óôïí ÷þñï ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý (Áðïêñõöïëïãß-
áò êáé Ìõóôéêéóìïý). Ðñüêåéôáé ü÷é ìüíï ãéá êáôáîéùìÝíï
áëëÜ êáé ÐëÞñùò Âéùìáôéêü Ìåôáöõóéêü ÐáíåðéóôÞìïíá
- ÄÜóêáëï, ðïõ ÷áñáêôçñßóôçêå ùò "ÐáôñéÜñ÷çò ôïõ Åëëç-
íéêïý Áðïêñõöéóìïý", áðü ôï ìåôáöõóéêü ðåñéïäéêü "Ôñß-
ôï ÌÜôé" óå ó÷åôéêÞ óõíÝíôåõîç óôï ôåý÷ïò ôïõ Äåêåìâñß-
ïõ 1992, óôçí ðñþôç êáé ôåëåõôáßá äçìüóéá ðáñïõóßá ôïõ.
Óôç ìíÞìç ëïéðüí ôïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ, áõôïý
ôïõ ìåãÜëïõ ×ñéóôïêåíôñéêïý êáé ×ñéóôïêñáôéêïý Ìõóôé-
êéóôÞ êáé óýã÷ñïíïõ Ìýóôç, ç ïìÜäá ôùí óôåíþí ìáèçôþí
ðïõ ôïí áêïëïõèïýóå ôá ôåëåõôáßá ÷ñüíéá êáé ðïõ åß÷å
ôçí ôý÷ç íá äéäá÷èåß âáèéÝò ôïìÝò êáé ðôõ÷Ýò ôçò Ðáãêü-
óìéáò ÁëÞèåéáò, íá ðëïõôßóåé ôéò ÁðïêñõöéóôéêÝò êáé Ìõ-
óôéêéóôéêÝò Ãíþóåéò ôçò êáé íá äå÷ôåß Ýíá ìÝñïò áðü ôï ´Á-
Ï ÄÜóêáëïò Íéêüëáïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò
ðëåôï ÖÙÓ ðïõ Åêåßíïò óêüñðéæå ãýñù ôïõ, áéóèáíüìåíç Master Nikolaos A. Margioris
Åõãíùìïóýíç êáé ÅéëéêñéíÞ, ÁöáíÜôéóôç ÁãÜðç ðñïò ôï
ðñüóùðü ôïõ, èá Þèåëå íá êÜíåé ãíùóôÜ óôïí êÜèå áíá-
æçôçôÞ ôçò ÁëÞèåéáò, ôïí âßï, ôçí ðñïóùðéêüôçôá êáé ôï Ýñãï ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ.
Ï Íéêüëáïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò ãåííÞèçêå óôç íÞóï ÓÜìï, óôï ÷ùñéü Âïõñëéþôåò,
óôéò 15 Äåêåìâñßïõ 1913. Óå çëéêßá 13 åôþí ðÝñáóå ãéá ðñþôç öïñÜ óå ÓáìÜ-
íôé - Öþôéóç.
Åêðáéäåýôçêå óôçí Éíäßá êáé óôï ÈéâÝô ãéá ðïëëÜ ÷ñüíéá (ó÷åäüí 13 ÷ñüíéá).
Ìå ôïõò óõããåíåßò ôïõ Ýìåéíå ðïëëÜ ÷ñüíéá óôçí ÁëåîÜíäñåéá ôçò Áéãýðôïõ
üðïõ óðïýäáóå êáé óôáäéïäñüìçóå. Íõìöåýôçêå ôç ËáÀôóá ÐáðáíäñÝïõ ìå ôçí
ïðïßá áðÝêôçóå äýï ðáéäéÜ, ôïí ÁíäñÝá êáé ôçí ÊÜëëéá. ¸ëáâå ìÝñïò óôïí ´
Ðáãêüóìéï Ðüëåìï ùò Ýöåäñïò áîéùìáôéêüò óôçí Ýñçìï Óá÷Üñá, üðïõ ôñáõ-
ìáôßóôçêå óôï Åë ÁëáìÝéí êáé ìåôÜ ðÞãå óôï Ñßìéíé. Ãéá ôéò õðçñåóßåò ôïõ ðñïò
ôçí ðáôñßäá ôéìÞèçêå ìå ðïëëÜ ðáñÜóçìá (ìåôáîý ôùí ïðïßùí ìå ôïí Ìåãá-
ëüóôáõñï) êáé ìå ôç óýíôáîç ôïõ áíÜðçñïõ áîéùìáôéêïý. ÔéìÞèçêå åðßóçò äýï
öïñÝò ìå ôï óôáõñü ôïõ Áãßïõ ÌÜñêïõ ãéá ôçí ðñïóöïñÜ ôïõ óôçí Åêêëçóßá
áðü ôïõò ÐáôñéÜñ÷åò Áëåîáíäñåßáò, ×ñéóôüöïñï êáé Íéêüëáï ôïí 6ï.
Åêôüò áðü ôçí Áßãõðôï, äßäáîå êáé óôçí ÅëëÜäá, áðü ôçí ðñþôç ìÝñá ôçò Ü-
öéîÞò ôïõ ôï 1958 Ýùò êáé ôï 1993 ïðüôå êáé ìåôÝóôç. ¸ãñáøå âéâëßá, ìåëÝ-
ôåò, êõêëïöüñçóå ðåñéïäéêü, äçìéïýñãçóå êýêëï óðïõäþí äé' áëëçëïãñáöß-
áò.
Èåùñïýóå ôç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ óáí ôç ìïíáäéêÞ ÁëÞèåéá êáé ðßóôåõå ðùò åßíáé
äõíáôüí ï Üíèñùðïò íá ðñáãìáôþóåé ôçí ÁëÞèåéá, üðùò ôçí ðñáãìÜôùíå ï Óù-
êñÜôçò ìå ôïí ðåñßöçìï ÓÔÏ×ÁÓÌÏ ôïõ (ÍÔÁÑÁÍÁ - ÓÕÃÊÅÍÔÑÙÓÇ) Þ ìÝóù ôïõ
ÈñçóêåõôéêïÕ ÌõóôéêéóìïÕ (×ñéóôïêåíôñéêïý êáé ×ñéóôïêñáôéêïý Ìõóôéêéóìïý).
¼ëåò ôïõ ïé äéäáóêáëßåò, ôá âéâëßá ôïõ, ïé ìåëÝôåò ôïõ, ïé êëÜäïé óðïõäþí
ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý ðñïÝñ÷ïíôáé êáé áðïññÝïõí áðü ôá ÂáèéÜ ÌõóôéêéóôéêÜ ôïõ
Âéþìáôá (Íéñãêïýíá ÓáìÜíôé - ÈÝùóç).
Áðü íåáñüôáôç çëéêßá Þôáí êïéíùíüò ôùí õðåñâáôéêþí áõôþí êáôáóôÜóåùí,
ôéò ïðïßåò êáôüñèùíå ìå ôñüðï áðáñÜìéëëï íá ìåôáó÷çìáôßæåé êáé íá ðáñÝ÷åé
óôïõò ìáèçôÝò ôïõ êáé óôïí êüóìï, ãéá Ãíþóç, óõìâïõëÞ, êáèïäÞãçóç, ÷ñÞ-
óç, ìåôá÷åßñéóç, åêðáßäåõóç, èåñáðåßá êáé ðñïóùðéêÞ åìðåéñßá ôïõ ïðïéïõäÞ-
ðïôå áíôáðïêñéíüìåíïõ.
Ïé ÖéëïóïöéêÝò ôïõ ðñïóåããßóåéò ðÜíù óôç Äçìéïõñãßá, óôçí ÁëÞèåéá (Èå-
ü), óôïõò ïñáôïýò áíôéëçðôïýò êáé áüñáôïõò ìç áíôéëçðôïýò Íüìïõò, ðïõ äé-
Ýðïõí ôï Óýìðáí êáé ôç ÆùÞ ãåíéêÜ, ðáñÝ÷ïíôáé ìå ìïíáäéêÞ åõ÷Ýñåéá, ëåðôï-
ìÝñåéá, áíÜëõóç êáé äéåéóäõôéêüôçôá êáé áêüìç ìå íÝåò ÅóùôåñéêÝò Áðïêáëý-
øåéò (ãéá Ðñþôç ÖïñÜ ðáñÝäùóå ìéá ÏëïêëçñùìÝíç êáé ¢ñôéá Áðïêñõöïëïãé-
êÞ êáé ÌõóôéêéóôéêÞ Èåþñçóç ôçò Ðáíäçìéïõñãßáò), ìÝóù åíüò ÷åéìáññþäïõò
êáé êáôáëõôéêïý ðñïöïñéêïý êáé ãñáðôïý ëüãïõ, åíüò ýøïõò, ÷ùñßò õðåñâï-
ëÞ, åöÜìéëëïõ -ãéá üóïõò ãíùñßæïõí- ôïõ Áðïóôüëïõ Ðáýëïõ, ôïõ ÂéâåêáíÜ-
íôá êáé ôïõ Ðõèáãüñá, ðïõ ïýôå åìðüäéá, ïýôå áññþóôéåò, ïýôå ôßðïôå äåí ôïí
óôáìáôïýóå (ôïõëÜ÷éóôïí ôñåéò öïñÝò åß÷å ðåñÜóåé áðü ôï èÜíáôï).
Áíôßèåôá ðáñï÷Þ ôùí ÐÜíôùí ìå ðëçñüôçôá, óõíå÷Þò êáèïäÞãçóç, åêðáß-
äåõóç êáé óõíå÷Þò Èõóßá êáé Ðáñáäåéãìáôéóìüò, åíüò ðñïôýðïõ ðïõ óõìðõ-
êíïýôáé óå äýï ëÝîåéò "ÔÅËÅÉÏÓ ÁÍÈÑÙÐÏÓ ÊÁÉ ÔÅËÅÉÏÓ ÈÅÏÓ", ÷ùñßò äéáöçìß-
óåéò, ðñïðáãÜíäåò êáé ðñïóçëõôéóìïýò Þôáí ôï ðéóôåýù ôïõ. Êáé âÝâáéá, ìå á-
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
BIOGRAPHICAL NOTE
OF NIKOLAOS A. MARGIORIS
Í ikolaos A. Marioris (15/12/1913 - 6/5/1993) con-
stitutes one of the greatest and most prominent
well-known personalities in the area of the Esoterism
(Occultism and Mysticism). It is about a not only
recoginzed but a Completely Experiencing Metaphysi-
cal Omniscientist-Master, who was characterized as the
"Patriarch of the Greek Occultism", by the metaphysical
journal "Third Eye" at a relevant interview in the issue of
December 1992, on his first and last public presence.
So, in the memory of Nikolaos A. Margioris, of this
great Christocentral and Christocratical Mystic and mod-
ern Initiate, the group of his close students who were
following him in the last years and who were luck e-
nough to be taught in deep sections and folds of the U-
niversal Truth, to enrich its Occultistic and Mystic Knowl-
edge and to receive a part of the Abundant LIGHT that
He was scattering around him, feeling a deep Gratitude
and a Sincere, not Fanatic Love for his person, they
would like to make known to every searcher of the
Truth, the life, the personality and the work of the Master.
Nikolaos A. Margioris was born in the island of Samos, at the village
Vourliotes, in December 15th, 1913. When he was 13 years old, he passed
in Samadhi-Enlifhtenment, for the first time.
He was educated in India and in Thibet for many yeats (almost 13 years).
With his relatives he lived for many years in Alexandria of Egypt where he s-
tudied and made his carreer. He married Laitsa Papandreou with whom he
got two children, Andreas and Kallia. He participated in the B' World War as
a reservist officer in Sahara desert, where he was wounded at El Alamein,
and then he went to Rimini. For his servises to the country, he was honoured
with many medals (among which the Big Cross) and with the pension of the
disabled officer. Also, he was honoured twice with the cross of St. Markos
for his offer to the Church by Christoforos and Nikolaos the 6th, , the Patri-
archs of Alexandria.
Except Egypt, he taught in Greece, from the first day of his arrival in 1958
until 1993, when he departured. He wrote books, essays, he circulated a
journal, he created a circle of studies by correspondence courses.
He used to consider the Metahysics as the unique Truth and he believed
that man can is able to accomplish the Truth, as Socrates accomplished it by
his famous THOUGHT (DARANA-CONCENTRATION) or throught the Religious
Mysticism (Christocentral and Christocratical Mysticism).
All his teachings, his books, his essays, the branches of studies of the Es-
oterism come and derive from his Deep Mystic Experiences (Nirguna Samad-
hi-Theosis).
Since he was very young, he was a communicant of these transcebdebltan
situations, that he managed in an incomparable way to reform and to afford
to his students and to the world, for the Knowledge, advice, guidance, use,
treatment, education, therapy and personal experience of any correspond-
ing.
His philosophical approaches in the Creation, the Truth (God), the visible
sensible and invisible insensible Laws that rule the Universe and Life gener-
ally, are given in a unique facility, detail, analysis and penetrating and also in
new Esoteric Revelations (for the First Time he delivered a Complete and Per-
fect Occultistic and Mysticist Theoresis of the Omnicreation), through a tor-
rential and catalytical oral and written word, a height without exaggeration,
comparable -for those who know- of Apostle Pavlos, Vivekananda and
Pythagoras whom neither obstacles, nor diseases, nor anythinge else stopped
(at least thrice he had passed by the death).
On the contrary, his belief was the supply of Everything in full, the con-
tinual guidence, instruction and unceasing Sacrifice and the Exemplification
of a model that is condensed in two words "PERFECT MAN AND PERFECT
GOD" without advertisements, propagandas and proselytisms. And certain-
ly with an absolute respect to the freedom of everyone coming-searcher.
He was a faithful soldier of our Lord Jesus Christ, of the "TRUE RAVVI-
96 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
ðüëõôï óåâáóìü óôçí åëåõèåñßá ôïõ êáèåíüò ðñïóåñ÷ïìÝíïõ - áíáæçôçôÞ.
ÕðÞñîå ðéóôüò óôñáôéþôçò ôïõ Êõñßïõ Çìþí Éçóïý ×ñéóôïý, ôïõ "ÁËÇÈÉÍÏÕ ÑÁÂ-
ÂÉ - ×ÑÉÓÔÏÕ" êáé ìéìçôÞò Ôïõ ðïõ ðÜíôá áêïëïõèïýóå ôï ¸ñãï Ôïõ êáé ôç Äéäá-
óêáëßá Ôïõ, æùíôáíåýïíôÜò ôçí ãéá Üëëç ìéá öïñÜ óôç óçìåñéíÞ ìáò êïéíùíßá.
n ÌÅÑÉÊÁ ËÏÃÉÁ ÃÉÁ ÔÏ ÐÏËÕÄÉÁÓÔÁÔÏ ÅÑÃÏ ÔÏÕ
ÌÝóá óå 23 ÷ñüíéá åêäïôéêÞò ìåôáöõóéêÞò äñáóôçñéüôçôáò (1970 - 1993),
Üããéîå ôá 33 âéâëßá êáèáñÜ Åóùôåñéêïý ðåñéå÷ïìÝíïõ. Áêüìç åîÝäùóå 33 åé-
äéêÝò ìåëÝôåò ðÜíù óå äéÜöïñá åóùôåñéêÜ èÝìáôá, êõêëïöüñçóå ôï ðñþôï á-
ìéãÝò ìåôáöõóéêü ðåñéïäéêü "Ïìáêïåßï" óôïí ôüðï ìáò ìå áðßóôåõôç êáé ðñù-
ôüãíùñç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ áíÜëõóç êáé åêëáÀêåõóç ãéá ôïõò êáôÝ÷ïíôåò ôï èÝìá.
Äçìéïýñãçóå ÊëÜäï Óðïõäþí äé' áëëçëïãñáößáò ìå ôçí ïíïìáóßá "Åóùôå-
ñéêü Êëåéäß". Ó' áõôüí, ïé ìáèçôÝò äéäÜóêïíôáí ìå Âáèýôáôç ÅóùôåñéêÞ ÁíÜëõ-
óç, èåùñçôéêÞ êáé ðñáêôéêÞ, ôá åîÞò ìáèÞìáôá: ÄÉÁËÏÃÉÓÌÏÓ, ÕÐÍÙÔÉÓÌÏÓ - ÏÑ-
ÈÏØÕ×ÉÓÌÏÓ, ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÖÉËÏÓÏÖÉÁ, ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ, ÁÓÔÑÏËÏÃÉÁ - Á-
ÓÔÑÏÓÏÖÉÁ, ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÌÕÇÓÇ, ÅÐÉÓÔÇÌÏÍÉÊÏÓ ÐÍÅÕÌÁÔÉÓÌÏÓ, ÁÐÏÓÕ-ÌÂÏ-
ËÉÓÌÏÓ.
ÁíÜ ôñßìçíï ðñáãìáôïðïéïýóå ðïëõÞìåñá óåìéíÜñéá ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ, óôá ïðïßá äß-
äáóêå ï ßäéïò, ü÷é ìüíï ÓéÜôóïõ, áëëÜ êáé ðëÞèïò Üëëùí Åóùôåñéêþí Èåñáðåõ-
ôéêþí ÓõóôçìÜôùí, ìåôáîý ôùí ïðïßùí êáé äéêÝò ôïõ áíáêáëýøåéò ìå öïâåñÝò
äõíáôüôçôåò èåñáðåéþí ðïõ ïé åðéôõ÷ßåò îåðåñíïýí ôï 80%.
ÌåñéêÝò áðü ôéò Þðéåò ÖõóéïèåñáðåõôéêÝò Áíáêáëýøåéò ôïõ, ìÝóá áðü ôçí
Åìðåéñßá ôïõ êáé ôç ÂáèéÜ ÅóùôåñéêÞ Ãíþóç, ðïõ ôéò áíáöÝñåé áíáëõôéêÜ óôá
âéâëßá ôïõ êáé åêðáßäåõå ôïõò ìáèçôÝò ôïõ åßíáé:
1. Áðü ôçí ÁÑÉÓÔÅÑÇ ÐÁËÁÌÇ ôïõ ÷åñéïý, Ýäùóå ôéò êýñéåò áðïëÞ-
îåéò ðïõ áíôéóôïé÷ïýí óå óõãêåêñéìÝíá åóùôåñéêÜ üñãáíá ôïõ áí-
èñþðéíïõ óþìáôïò. ÁíáêÜëõøç Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ.
2. ÄÁ×ÔÕËÏ×ÔÕÐÇÓÇ. Ôá÷ýôáôç èåñáðåõôéêÞ ìÝèïäïò åñåèéóìïý ü-
ëïõ ôïõ ïñãáíéóìïý, ôùí êõôôÜñùí êáé ôùí åíäïêñéíþí áäÝíùí, ãéá
ðáñï÷Þ íÝùí åêêñßóåùí ïñìïíþí êáé èåñáðåßá ôïõ áóèåíÞ. ÁíáêÜ-
ëõøç Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ.
3. ÃËÙÓÓÏÈÅÑÁÐÅÉÁ. Ìå åéäéêÝò ìáëÜîåéò - ìáóÜæ, êáôÜëëçëá ôñáâÞã-
ìáôá ôçò ãëþóóáò, ðïõ Ý÷ïõí Üìåóç åðßäñáóç åðß ôïõ ìõéêïý êáé
íåõñéêïý óõóôÞìáôïò êáé ó' üëïí ôïí ïñãáíéóìü ãéá áðïêáôÜóôáóç
êáé èåñáðåßá. ÁíáêÜëõøç Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ.
4. ÁÍÁÂÉÙÓÅ êáé ìåôá÷åéñéæüôáí ôçí Áñ÷áéïåëëçíéêÞ ÁóêëçðéáêÞ ÌÜ-
ëáîç, ðïõ åöåýñå êáé åöÜñìïæå óôçí áñ÷áéüôçôá ï ðáôÝñáò ôçò Éá-
ôñéêÞò Áóêëçðéüò óôá ÉåñïèåñáðåõôÞñéá ôçò Áñ÷áßáò ÅëëÜäáò (Áóêëç-
ðéåßá - ÁìöéáñÜåéá).
5. ÕÐÏÂÏËÉÌÉÁÉÁ èåñáðåõôéêÞ. Ìå åôåñïûðïâïëÞ Þ áõèõðïâïëÞ. Á-
íáâßùóç êáé ðáñïõóßáóç áðü ôïí Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ.
6. ÅÃÊÏÉÌÇÓÇ Þ áëëéþò Õðíùôéóìüò - Ïñèïøõ÷éóìüò Þ Ôå÷íéêüò ¾ðíïò,
ôñåéò åðéóôçìïíéêÝò - ïëïêëçñùìÝíåò ìÝèïäïé. Ðáñïõóßáóç Í. Á.
ÌáñãéùñÞ.
7. ÈÑÇÓÊÅÕÔÉÊÇ ÓÕÃÊÉÍÇÓÉÁÊÇ ÐÁÑÁÊËÇÓÇ äßðëá óôïí áóèåíÞ. Ðá-
ñïõóßáóç Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ.
8. ÉÁÐÙÍÉÊÇ ÓÉÁÔÓÏÕ - Äáêôõëïðßåóç (ïìáäïðïßçóç üëçò ôçò Óéáôóïý
áðü ôïí ÄÜóêáëï Íéêüëáï Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ. Óå 23 ïìÜäåò óõìðåñéëáì-
âÜíïíôáé 186 áóèÝíåéåò, ìå ôéò ãåíéêÝò áëëÜ êáé åîáôïìéêåõìÝíåò ìå-
èüäïõò èåñáðåßáò ôïõò). Ôáîéíüìçóç êáé Ðáñïõóßáóç Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ.
9. ÌÅÈÏÄÉÊÏÓ ÅÑÅÈÉÓÌÏÓ üëùí ôùí Åíäïêñéíþí ÁäÝíùí (ôóÜêñáò)
ãéá èåñáðåßá. ÌÝèïäïò ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ.
10. ÂÉÏÅÍÅÑÃÅÉÁÊÇ ÅÐÉÄÑÁÓÇ åðß ôùí 33 óðïíäýëùí ôçò óðïíäõëé-
êÞò óôÞëçò ãéá èåñáðåßá 193 ðáèÞóåùí ôïõ áíèñùðßíïõ óþìáôïò. ÌÝ-
èïäïò Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ.
11. ÓÔÁÔÉÊÇ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ ìå ôá ÷Ýñéá - ðáëÜìåò. Ðáñïõóßáóç Í. Ìáñ-
ãéùñÞ.
12. ÊÉÍÇÔÉÊÇ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ ìå ôá ÷Ýñéá - ðáëÜìåò. Ðáñïõóßáóç Í.
ÌáñãéùñÞ.
13. ÑÅÖËÅÎÏËÏÃÉÁ Þ áíáêëáóôéêÞ æùíïèåñáðåßá. Ðáñïõóßáóç Í.
ÌáñãéùñÞ
14. ÅÉÊÏÍÏÐËÁÓÔÉÊÇ èåñáðåßá áðü êïíôÜ Þ áðü ìáêñéÜ. ÌÝèïäïò Í.
ÌáñãéùñÞ.
15. ÅÊÔÏÐËÁÓÌÁÔÉÊÅÓ åê÷ýóåéò - ÷ïõ÷ïõëéÜóìáôá. ÌÝèïäïò Í. Ìáñ-
ãéùñÞ.
16. ÌÁÍÔÑÁÌÏÈÅÑÁÐÅÕÔÉÊÇ. Èåñáðåßá ìå ëÝîåéò Äýíáìçò. Ðáñïõ-
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
CHRIST" and His imitator who always followed His Work and His Teaching, re-
viving it for once more in our society of today.
n SOME WORDS ABOUT HIS MULTIDIMENSIONAL WORK
In 23 years of publishing metaphysical activity (1970-1993), he touched
the 33 books of a clearly Esoteric content. He also publishjed 33 special
essays on different esoteric matters, he circulated the first pure meta-
physical journal "Omakoio" in our country, in an incredible and unprece-
dented Metaphysical analysis and popularization for those who know the
subject.
He created a Branch of Studies by Correspondece courses, under the
name "Esoteric Key". In it, the students were taught in a Deepest Esoteric
Analysis, theoretical and practical, in the following lessons: MEDITATION,
HYPNOTISM-ORTHOPSYCHISM, ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY, ESOTERIC THERA-
PEUTICS, ASTROLOGY-ASTROSOPHY, ESOTERIC INITIATION, SCIENTIFIC SPIR-
ITUALISM, DESYMBOLISM.
Every trimester, he effected seminars of many days of SIATSU, during
which he himself taught not only Siatsu but also a lot of other Esoteric
Therapeutical Systems, among which, his own discoveries with awful pos-
sibilities of therapies the success of which overpass the 80%.
Some of his mild Physiotherapeutical Discoveries, through his Experi-
ence and his Deep Esoteric Knowledge which he mentions analytically in
his books and in which he instructed his students, are:
1. From the LEFT PALM of the hand, he gave the main endings
that correspond to concrete internal organs of the human body.
N. Margiori's Discovery.
2. FINGERTAPPING. A most rapid therapeutical method of irrita-
tion in all the organism, in the cells and in the endocrine glands,
for the supply of new secretions of hormones and the remedy
of the patient. N. Margiori's Discovery.
3. GLOSSOTHERAPY. By special massaging-rubbings down, the
proper drawings of the tongue that have a direct influence on
the muscular and the nervous system and in all the organism for
the restitution and its therapy. N. Margiori's Discovery.
4. HE REVIVED and used the Ancient Greek Asclepean Massaging,
that Asclepios, the father of the medicine invented and applied
in the ancient years, in the Holy Sanatoriums of the Ancient
Greece (Asclepeia - Amfiaraeia).
5. SUBSTITUTED THERAPEUTICS. By the heterosuggestion or au-
tosuggestion. Revival and presentation by N. Margioris.
6. ENSLEEPING or otherwise Hypnotism-Orthopsychism or Tech-
nical Sleep, three scientific - complete methods. Presentation by
N.A. Margioris.
7. RELIGIOUS EMOTIONAL REQUEST beside the patient. Presenta-
tion by N. Margioris.
8. JAPANESE SIATSU - Fingertapping (collectiveness of all the Siat-
su by Master Nikolaos N. Margioris. In 23 groups 186 diseases are
comprised, with the general but also the individualized methods
of their therapy). Classification and Presentation by N. Margioris.
9. METHODICAL IRRITATION of all the Endocrine Glands (tsakras)
for remedy. Nikolaos A. Margiori's method.
10. BIOENERGICAL INFLUENCE on the 33 vertebras of the vert-
eral column for the therapy of 193 diseases of the human body.
N. Margiori's method.
11. STATIC Therapeutics with the hands-palms. N. Margiori's p-
resentation.
12. CINETICS Therapeutics with the hands-palms. N. Margiori's p-
resentation.
13. REFLEXOLOGY or reflexive zonotherapy. N. Margiori's pre-
sentation.
14. ICONOPLASTIC therapy from near or far. N. Margiori's method.
15. HECTOPLASMATIC pourings out-puffings N. Margiori's method.
16. MANTRAMOTHERAPEUTICS. Remedy with words of Power. P-
resentation by N. Margioris.
17. TRANSFUSION OF ENERGY, of healthy vibrations. Presentation
by Master N.A. Margioris.
97 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 óßáóç Í. ÌáñãéùñÞ.
17. ÌÅÔÁÃÃÉÓÇ ÅÍÅÑÃÅÉÁÓ, õãéþí äïíÞóåùí. Ðáñïõóßáóç áðü ôïí ÄÜ-
óêáëï Í. Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ.
18. ÐÁÑÁÊÏËÏÕÈÇÓÇ Ëéôáíåéþí Þ Ëåéôïõñãéþí.
19. ÉÅÑÏÓ ÅÍÈÏÕÓÉÁÓÌÏÓ. Åíßó÷õóç ôçò áêëüíçôçò Ðßóôçò ðñïò üðïéï
Éäáíéêü Þ Ðéóôåýù ðïõ ðÜëëåé ôïí Üíèñùðï åóùôåñéêÜ êáé äçìéïõñ-
ãåß ðñïûðïèÝóåéò áíáâßâáóçò ôùí äïíÞóåþí ôïõ ãéá áðïêáôÜóôáóç
ôçò õãåßáò ôïõ.
20. ÊÑÉÃÉÁ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ, ÌÝèïäïò Óùìáôïøõ÷éêÞò ÈåñáðåõôéêÞò. Ðåñéëáì-
âÜíåé óùìáôéêÝò áóêÞóåéò - óôÜóåéò óå óõíäõáóìü ìå åéäéêÝò áíá-
ðíïÝò ãéá áíáæùïãüíçóç - èåñáðåßá ôïõ óþìáôïò êáé íïçôéêÝò áóêÞ-
óåéò óýãêñéóçò ãéá áðáëëáãÞ ôïõ áíèñþðïõ áðü êÜèå åßäïõò áðùèç-
ìÝíá, öïâßåò, ðÜèç ê.ë.ð. Áíáâßùóç êáé Ðáñïõóßáóç óå ðáãêüóìéï å-
ðßðåäï áðü ôïí ÄÜóêáëï Í. Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ.
21. ÊÏÕÍÔÁËÉÍÏÈÅÑÁÐÅÉÁ. Ìå áíáèõìéÜóåéò ôçò Êïõíôáëßíç Þ êáé
ìå áöýðíéóÞ ôçò.
22. ÑÁÔÆÁ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ, 8 óôÜäéá - áíáâáèìßäåò èåñáðåßáò óþìáôïò êáé
Íïõ (åðéóôçìïíéêÞ - øõ÷ïëïãéêÞ ìÝèïäïò).
Çèéêïðëáóìüò ôïõ áíèñþðïõ, èåñáðåõôéêÝò óôÜóåéò áíÜëïãá ìå ôï
ðñüâëçìá, ìåôá÷åßñéóç ôçò ðáãêüóìéáò åíÝñãåéáò (ðñÜíá) êáé ôñïöï-
äüôçóç ôïõ ïñãáíéóìïý ìÝóù êáôÜëëçëùí ñõèìéêþí áíáðíïþí ãéá
ðñüëçøç Þ èåñáðåßá, óõãêñÜôçóç ôçò äýíáìçò ôçò æùÞò ðïõ Ý÷ïõ-
ìå ìÝóá ìáò áðü ôçí áóýóôïëç óðáôÜëç ðïõ Üóêïðá ðñÜôôïõìå êáé
ìåôá÷åßñéóÞ ôçò ãéá õøçëüôåñïõò óêïðïýò, óôáèåñÞ óõãêÝíôñùóç
óå ìßá ìüíï óêÝøç - óôü÷ï - éäáíéêü ãéá 12´´, åðéìÞêõíóÞ ôçò ãéá 144´´
(äéáëïãéóìüò, åóùôåñéêÞ ôáýôéóç ìå ôïí óôü÷ï) êáé ôÝëïò ìå ôçí ðá-
ñÜôáóç ôçò ìïíïóêÝøçò ãéá 1728´´ åñ÷üìáóôå óôçí áðüëõôç èåñáðåß-
á óþìáôïò êáé Íïõ, ôçí ´Åíùóç - Öþôéóç - Áñìïíßá, ÐëÞñç Óõíåéäç-
ôüôçôá ôïõ áíèñþðïõ.
23. ÌÉÎÇ - ÓÕÍÄÕÁÓÌÏÓ ðïëëþí áðü ôá ðáñáðÜíù ÓõóôÞìáôá.
ÁõôÜ åßíáé ìåñéêÜ áðü ôá óçìáíôéêüôåñá êáé ðéï áðïôåëåóìáôéêÜ áâëáâÞ Å-
óùôåñéêÜ - ÖõóéïèåñáðåõôéêÜ ÓõóôÞìáôá, åê ôùí ïðïßùí ïñéóìÝíá åßíáé åðéâå-
âáéùìÝíá åðéóôçìïíéêÜ êáé äéäÜóêïíôáé óå ðáíåðéóôÞìéá ôïõ åîùôåñéêïý, åíþ
ðïëëÜ áðü ôá õðüëïéðá ìåëåôïýíôáé ãéá ôá èåôéêÜ áðïôåëÝóìáôá ðïõ åðéöÝ-
ñïõí óôïí áíèñþðéíï ïñãáíéóìü.
Åêôüò áðü ôéò äéäáóêáëßåò ôùí Èåñáðåõôéêþí ÓõóôçìÜôùí, ðñáãìáôïðïéïý-
óå êáé ï ßäéïò èåñáðåßåò, üðùò êáé üóïé áðü ôïõò ìáèçôÝò ôïõ åß÷áí åêðáéäåõ-
ôåß. ÐáñÜëëçëá ëåéôïõñãïýóå ó÷ïëÞ ÊÑÉÃÉÁ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ, üðïõ äßäáóêå ç ðñþôç äá-
óêÜëá ôçò Êñßãéá óôçí ÅëëÜäá, ðïõ åêðáéäåýôçêå áðü ôïí ßäéï, ç ê. ÓìÜñù Êï-
óìÜïãëïõ, üðùò åðßóçò êáé ó÷ïëÞ Áäõíáôßóìáôïò ìå ôï óýóôçìá ôçò Áôìïû-
ãñïðïßçóçò (äéêÞò ôïõ åðéíüçóçò).
Ï ßäéïò äßäáóêå ÁìéãÞ êáé ÏëïêëçñùìÝíç ÑÁÔÆÁ ÃÉÏÃÊÁ, üðùò êáé üëá ôá óõ-
óôÞìáôá ôçò ÃÉÏÃÊÁ: ×Üèá, Êñßãéá, ÌÜíôñáì, ÊÜñìá, ÌðÜêôé, ÃêíÜíé, ÔÜíôñá
(Êïõíôáëßíç), üðùò åðßóçò ÅÓÙÔÅÑÉÊÇ ÖÉËÏÓÏÖÉÁ - ÈÅÏËÏÃÉÁ, ÊÁÌÐÁËÁ êáé Å-
ÓÙÔÅÑÉÓÌÏ (ÁÐÏÊÑÕÖÏËÏÃÉÁ ÊÁÉ ÌÕÓÔÉÊÉÓÌÏ).
¼ëåò ôïõ ïé ðáñáðÜíù äéäáóêáëßåò êáé äñáóôçñéüôçôåò ãßíïíôáí óôçí Ýäñá
ôïõ, óôï Ðíåõìáôéêü Öéëïóïöéêü ÅñãáóôÞñé, ôï ïðïßï áðü ôçí ßäñõóÞ ôïõ, ôï
1976, ïíüìáóå "ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ ÁÈÇÍÙÍ", åéò áíÜìíçóç ôïõ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏÕ ðïõ ðñù-
ôïäçìéïýñãçóå óôïí Êñüôùíá ôçò íüôéáò Éôáëßáò ï Ðõèáãüñáò.
Áðü ôï 1972 ßäñõóå ôï Óýëëïãï "ÏÉ ÅÕÓÅÂÅÉÓ ÐÑÏÓÊÕÍÇÔÅÓ ÔÏÕ ÁÊÔÉÓÔÏÕ ÖÙ-
ÔÏÓ, Ï ÁÃÉÏÓ ÐÁÔÁÐÉÏÓ", óôïí ïðïßï Ýêáíå áíåëëéðþò åëåýèåñåò ïìéëßåò óå
ðïéêßëá ÅóùôåñéêÜ èÝìáôá.
ÕðÞñîå Ýíáò Ìüíéìïò êáé Áêïýñáóôïò ÅñãÜôçò êáé Ïäçãüò ôïõ Êáëïý êáé
ôïõ ÔÝëåéïõ, ìéá ÁäéÜêïðç êáé Áóôåßñåõôç ÐçãÞ Èåßáò Ãíþóçò.
Ôá áíùôÝñù áíáãñÜöïíôáé ùò ï åëÜ÷éóôïò öüñïò ôéìÞò ðïõ èá ìðïñïýóá-
ìå íá áðïäþóïõìå åìåßò ïé ìáèçôÝò ôïõ, ìå ôçí õðüó÷åóç ôçò óõíÝ÷éóçò êáé
äéÜäïóçò üëùí ôùí ðáñáêáôáèçêþí ðïõ ìáò Üöçóå.
ÓÇÌÅÉÙÓÇ: Ç ðáñáðÜíù ðáñïõóßáóç ôçò Ðñïóùðéêüôçôáò, ôïõ Âßïõ êáé ôïõ
´Åñãïõ ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ ãñÜöôçêå áðü ôïí ìáèçôÞ ôïõ
Çëßá Ë. ÊáôóéÜìðá (åê ìÝñïõò ôïõ óõíüëïõ ôùí ìáèçôþí ôçò ôåëåõôáßáò äå-
êáåôßáò).
Áñ÷éêÜ ôï âéïãñáöéêü ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ áðïóôÜëèçêå ìå ðñùôïâïõëßá ôïõ óõã-
ãñáöÝá óå îÝíïõò ïäçãïýò ìåôáöõóéêþí ïñãáíþóåùí êáé óå äéÜöïñåò Üëëåò
ìåôáöõóéêÝò êéíÞóåéò ôïõ åîùôåñéêïý. Óôç óõíÝ÷åéá ìåôÜ ôïí èÜíáôï ôïõ Äá-
óêÜëïõ äéáìïñöþèçêå êáé óõìðëçñþèçêå êáôÜëëçëá áðü ôï ìáèçôÞ ôïõ êáé
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
18. ATTENDANCE of Litanies or Liturgies.
19. HOLY ENTHUSIASM. Strengthening of the unshakeable Faith
to any ideal or Belief that vibrates man internally and creates the
presuppositions for the ascension of his vibrations for a restora-
tion of his health.
20. KRIYA YOGA, Method of Somatopsychichal Therapeutics. It
contains bodily exercises-postures in combination with special
breathings for the revival - remedy of the body and intellectual
exercises of comparison for the discharge of man from every
kind of repressed emotions, phobias, passions, etc. Revival and
Presentation at a universal level by Master N.A.Margioris.
21. KUNDALINOTHERAPY. By exhalations of Kundalini or and by
its awakening.
22. RAJA YOGA, 8 stages- upscalings of therapy of the body and
of the Mind (scientific-psychological method).
Ethicoplasm of man, therapeutical positions according to the
problem, a treatment of the universal energy (prana) and sup-
plying of the organism through the proper rythmical breaths for
prevention or therapy, restraining of the life power that we have
within us due to the impudent waste that we do aimlessly and
its treatment for higher purposes, a stable concentration to one
and sole thought-target-ideal for 12", its elongation for 144"
(meditation, internal identification with the target) and finally
by the extension of the uniquethought for 1728" we come to
the absolute therapy of the body and of the Mind, the Union-En-
lightement-Harmony, Full Conscience of man.
Mixing-Combination of many of the above Systems.
23. MIXING - COMBINATION of many of the above Systems.
These are some of the most important and the most effective harm-
less Esoteric - Physiotherapeutical Systems, some of which are scientfi-
cally confirmed and are taught in the universities of abroad, while many
of the remaining are studied for the positive results that bring about to
the human organism.
Except the teachings of the Therapeutical Systems, he himself used to
effect therapies, as well as those of his students who had been instruct-
ed, did. At the same time, he operated a school of KRIYA YOGA, where the
first lady teacher of Kriya in Greece, mrs. Smaro Kosmaoglou who was in-
structed by same, taught, as well as a school of Slimming under the sys-
tem of the Atmoliquefaction (his own invention).
The same instructed the Pure and Complete RAJA YOGA, as well as all
the systems of YOGA: Hatha, Kriya, Mantram, Karma, Bhakti, Gnani, Tantra
(Kundalini), as well as ESOTERIC PHILOSOPHY - THEOLOGY, KAMPALA and E-
SOTERISM (OCCULTISM AND MYSTICISM).
All his above teachings and activities were effected at his seat, in the
Spiritual Philosophic Laboratory which since its foundation, in 1976, he had
been calling "OMAKOIO OF ATHENS", in the memory of the OMAKOIO that
Pythagoras created for the first time in Krotonas of the South Italy.
In 1972, he founded the Association "THE PIOUS PILGRIMS OF THE UN-
BUILT LIGHT, ST. PATAPIOS", where he made unfailingly free speeches in
various Esoteric matters.
He was a Permanent and Indefatigable Worker and Guide of the Good
and of the Perfect, an Uninterrupted and Inexhaustible Source of Divine
Knowledge.
The above are written as the least honour tax that we, his students
could render him, promising the continuity and the spreading of all the
heritages he left us.
NOTE: The above presentation of the Personality, the Life and the Work
of Master Nikolaos A. Margioris was wrtiten by his student Ilias L. Katsi-
ampas (on the part of the total of his students in the last decade).
At the beginning, the Master's biographical note was sent after the ini-
tiative of the writer, to foreign guides of metaphysical organisations and
to different other metaphysical movements of abroad. Then, after the
death of the Master it was formed and completed in the proper way, by
his student and was published in the journal Third Eye, in the issue 28, in
September 1993, four months after his metastasis.
98 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
äçìïóéåýèçêå óôï ðåñéïäéêü Ôñßôï ÌÜôé, óôï ôåý÷ïò 28, ôïí ÓåðôÝìâñéï ôïõ
1993, ôÝóóåñéò ìÞíåò ìåôÜ ôç ìåôÜóôáóÞ ôïõ.
ÓõìðåñéëÞöèçêå, êáôüðéí óôïí ô ôüìï ôïõ Ýñãïõ ôçò ÌõóôéêÞò Äéäáóêáëß-
áò ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ, ðïõ åêäüèçêå ôï 1994, êáèþò êáé óôçí åðáíÝêäïóç ôùí âé-
âëßùí "Ç Üëëç üøç ôïõ Äüãìáôïò ôïõ ¸ñé÷ Öïí Íôáßíéêåí", "Äñáâßäåò ïé Ðñü-
ãïíïé ôùí ÅëëÞíùí", "Ôï Ìõóôéêü ôçò ×Üèá Ãéüãêá", "Óôéò ìÝñåò ôïõ ìåãÜëïõ Âá-
óéëéÜ ôçò ÊñÞôçò Ìßíùá" êáé "×åéñïðëáóôéêÞ ÈåñáðåõôéêÞ ÓéÜôóïõ ô Ôüìïò".
n ÓÕÍÏØÇ ÔÏÕ ÓÐÁÍÉÏÕ ÕØÏÕÓ ÔÏÕ ÄÁÓÊÁËÏÕ
Ï ÄÜóêáëïò Íéêüëáïò Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò õðÞñîå ÁðïêñõöéóôÞò (Áðïêñõöïëü-
ãïò), ×ñéóôïêåíôñéêüò êáé ×ñéóôïêñáôéêüò ÌõóôéêéóôÞò. Óýã÷ñïíïò, ãíÞóéïò Ìý-
óôçò êáé Ìõóôáãùãüò.
Åßíáé ï ÄÜóêáëïò ôùí ÄáóêÜëùí ï ïðïßïò ðÜíôá ìå óéãÞ, óýíåóç êáé áíåðá-
íÜëçðôç Óýãêëéóç - Åíüôçôá - ÏìïéïãÝíåéá ¸ñãïõ, áëëÜ êáé ÁõôïãåíÞ Ôåëåéü-
ôçôá êáé Ìïíáäéêüôçôá ÁðïêÜëõøçò êáé Áðüäïóçò, ðáñÝäùóå óôïõò ìáèçôÝò
ôïõ áëëÜ êáé óôïí êüóìï üëï (Ï Åóùôåñéóìüò ãéá ¼ëïõò), ìÝóá áðü ôá âéâëßá
ôïõ êáé ôéò äéäáóêáëßåò ôïõ, ôá ÕðåñäéáíïçôéêÜ (ÐíåõìáôéêÜ) ÏËÏÊËÇÑÙÌÅÍÁ
êáé ÔÝëåéá ÌõóôéêéóôéêÜ Âéþìáôá - ÁããÝëìáôá ôçò Øõ÷Þò ôïõ, ôïõ Ðíåýìáôüò
ôïõ, ôçò ßäéáò ôçò ÐçãÞò - ÁëÞèåéáò - Èåïý, óôá ìÜôéá êáé óôçí êïéíÞ åìðåéñßá
ôïõ êÜèå áíáæçôçôÞ.
Ç ðåñßðôùóç ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ èá ìðïñïýóáìå íá ðïý-
ìå üôé "óõíïøßæåôáé" ìå äýï ëüãéá óôïí åîÞò ïñéóìü:
Ðñüêåéôáé ãéá ìéá ÌÝãéóôç (åîáéñåôéêÜ ÓðÜíéá) ÅóùôåñéêÞ êáé Åëëçíïïñèüäï-
îç Áêôéíïâüëá Ðñïóùðéêüôçôá ôÝôïéïõ ¾øïõò, ÅìâÝëåéáò, ÄéáìåôñÞìáôïò êáé
ÕðåñðáñáãùãÞò Óõìðáãïýò êáé Áìéãïýò ÃåéùìÝíïõ Õãéïýò Ðíåõìáôéêïý ¸ñãïõ,
ôï ïðïßï óôéò ìÝñåò ìáò ìïéÜæåé ùò ÁíåðáíÜëçðôï, êáé Áóýãêñéôï ü÷é ìüíïí ãéá
ôá ÅëëçíéêÜ äåäïìÝíá, áëëÜ êáé ãéá ôá Ðáãêüóìéá.
Ìüíï ïé äéáóùèåßóåò ðñïöïñéêÝò ôïõ ðáñáäüóåéò êáé ïé åêôåíåßò "áíåîÜ-
íôëçôïé" äéÜëïãïé ðïõ ìåñéêïß åê ôùí ìáèçôþí ôïõ ôçò ôåëåõôáßáò äåêáåôßáò
êáôÝ÷ïõìå, áí èá Þèåëå êáíåßò íá ôïõò "áé÷ìáëùôßóåé" óå ãñáðôü ëüãï, êáôÜ
ôïõò åðéåéêÝóôåñïõò õðïëïãéóìïýò, èá õðåñÝâáéíáí ìå éäéáßôåñç Üíåóç ôá 1000
ÏõóéáóôéêÜ ÅóùôåñéêÜ ¸ñãá (ðñùôüãíùñá êáé áðïêáëõðôéêÜ óôï óýíïëü ôïõò).
Áí âÝâáéá õðïëïãßæáìå êáé üëá üóá äåí äéáóþèçêáí Þ äåí ìðïñÝóáìå íá á-
íé÷íåýóïõìå Þ Üëëá ãéá ôá ïðïßá ãíùñßæïõìå ôçí ýðáñîÞ ôïõò áëëÜ áãíïïý-
ìå ãéá ôçí ôý÷ç ôïõò (óôçí ÅëëÜäá Þ óôçí ÁëåîÜíäñåéá üðïõ Ýæçóå ðïëëÜ ÷ñü-
íéá), ôüôå áóöáëþò ïõê Ýóôé áñéèìüò (ßóùò íá îåðåñíïýóáí êáé ôá 5000 ðíåõ-
ìáôéêÜ Ýñãá ðïõ ëÝãåôáé üôé Ýãñáøå êáé ï ÙñéãÝíçò).
Èåùñïýìå âÝâáéïí üôé ïé ìÝëëïõóåò ãåíåÝò ìå éäéáßôåñç èÝñìç, åðéìÝëåéá,
öñïíôßäá êáé áãþíá èá øÜ÷íïõí íá âñïõí óôïé÷åßá, êïììÜôéá, ðôõ÷Ýò êáé ëå-
ðôïìÝñåéåò ôïõ ðñïóþðïõ êáé ôïõ Ýñãïõ åíüò Áëçèéíïý Óýã÷ñïíïõ Ìýóôç ðïõ
âÜäéóå áíÜìåóÜ ìáò êáé ðïõ ðáñÝäùóå ÔÏÓÁ ðïëëÜ, ôá ïðïßá ìïéñáßá ïé Üíèñù-
ðïé ôïõ ìÝëëïíôïò, üíôáò ðéï þñéìïé ðíåõìáôéêÜ, èá áíáãíùñßóïõí, èá "ðñï-
óêõíÞóïõí" êáé èá áðïæçôÞóïõí ìå õøçëü æÞëï êáé áßóèçìá áëçèéíïý óåâá-
óìïý êáé åõèýíçò.
ÌåñéêÜ óôïé÷åßá ãéá ôïí ßäéï ìðïñåß ï áíáãíþóôçò íá âñåé óôçí ìïíáäéêÞ äç-
ìüóéá óõíÝíôåõîÞ ôïõ ðïõ ðáñá÷þñçóå ðÝíôå ìÞíåò ðñéí ôçí ìåôÜóôáóÞ ôïõ,
óôï ìåôáöõóéêü ðåñéïäéêü "Ôñßôï ÌÜôé" óôï ôåý÷ïò 20 ôïõ Äåêåìâñßïõ 1992, óôçí
ïðïßá ãéá ðñþôç öïñÜ (ðñï ôïõ ôÝëïõò) áõôïáðïêáëýðôåôáé äçìüóéá.
Äýï áêüìá ðáñïõóéÜóåéò - áíáöïñÝò ôïõ âßïõ êáé ôïõ Ýñãïõ ôïõ èá âñåé ï
åíäéáöåñüìåíïò óå êáôá÷ùñÞóåéò ðïõ Ýãéíáí áðü ôïí óôåíü êýêëï ôùí ìáèç-
ôþí ôïõ óôï "Ôñßôï ÌÜôé" ôïí ÓåðôÝìâñéï ôïõ 1993 óôï ôåý÷ïò 28 (äçìïóéåýå-
ôáé ðáñáðÜíù) êáé ôïí ÌÜúï ôïõ 1994 óôï ôåý÷ïò 35. ÌåñéêÝò áð' áõôÝò áíá-
äçìïóéåýïíôáé êáé óå âéâëßá ôïõ ðïõ åðáíåêäüèçêáí.
Óôï âéâëßï ôïõ õðåýèõíïõ ôïõ Ïìáêïåßïõ ÔñéêÜëùí ìå ôßôëï "Áðü ôï óôüìá
ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ óôï áõôß ôïõ ìáèçôÞ ìå åìðåñéóôáôùìÝíï ãëùóóÜñéï Óáíóêñé-
ôéêÞò (öéëïóïöéêü ëåîéêü 400 ëÝîåùí) ãéá ôïõò óðïõäáóôÝò ôçò Ãéüãêá êáé ôïõ
Åóùôåñéóìïý" âñßóêïíôáé óõãêåíôñùìÝíåò üëåò ïé ðáñáðÜíù ðáñïõóéÜóåéò êá-
èþò åðßóçò êáé ìßá êáéíïýñãéá åðéðëÝïí.
ÔÝëïò óôïí ô Ôüìï ôçò Áðïêñõöïëïãßáò åìðåñéÝ÷åôáé ìéá áêüìç íÝá óçìá-
íôéêÞ ðáñïõóßáóç ãéá ôïí ÄÜóêáëï.
Ï ìáèçôÞò ôïõ Çëßáò Ë. ÊáôóéÜìðáò åðåîåñãÜæåôáé ìßá áêüìç ðëçñÝóôåñç
êáé óõíïëéêüôåñç ðáñïõóßáóç ôïõ âßïõ, ôïõ ðñïóþðïõ êáé ôïõ Ýñãïõ ôïõ Äá-
óêÜëïõ ðïõ èá óõìðåñéëáìâÜíåé áêüìá ðåñéóóüôåñåò ðôõ÷Ýò ôçò äéáäñïìÞò
ôïõ áðü ôïí êüóìï ìáò êáé ôïõ Åóùôåñéêïý Ôïõ ¸ñãïõ, ôï ïðïßï Üöçóå ùò Ðá-
ñáêáôáèÞêç ãéá Ãíþóç êáé Åêðáßäåõóç ôùí ìåëëïõóþí ãåíåþí ðïõ áíáðôýó-
óïíôáé óôïí Ìõóôéêéóìü (Öéëïóïöéêü, Ãíùóôéêéóôéêü êáé Èñçóêåõôéêü).
ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ
Afterwards, it was comprised in the C' volume of the Master's work of
the Secret Teaching that was published in 1994, as well as in the re-edi-
tion of the books "The other side of Erich Von Dainiken's Dogma", "Dra-
vidians, the Ancestors of the Greeks", "The Secret of Hatha Yoga", "In the
days of Minos, the great King of Crete" and "Chiroplastic Therapeutics Siat-
su, C' Volume".
n SYNOPSIS OF THE RARE HEIGHT OF THE MASTER
Master Nikolaos A. Margioris was an Occultist (Occultician), Christocen-
tral and Christocratical Mystic, a Modern, Genuine Initiate and Mystagogue.
He is the Master of the Masters who always in silence, prudence and un-
precedented Convergence - Unity - Homogeneity of Work, but also in a
Selfborn Perfection and a Uniqueness of Revelation and Rendering, deiliv-
ered to his students but also to the whole world (The Esoterism for Every-
body), through his books and his teachings, the Hyperintellectual (Spiritu-
al) COMPLETE and Perfect Mysticist Experiences - Messages of his Soul, his
Spirit, of the Source-Truth-God itself, to the eyes and to the common ex-
perience of every searcher.
We could say that the case of Master Nikolaos A. Margioris is "summa-
rized" in few words in the following definition:
It is about a Greatest (extremely Rare) Esoteric and Greekorthodox Ra-
diating Personality of such a Height, Range, Caliber and Hyperproduction of
a Massive and Pure Healthy Spiritual Work, that nowadays appears as U-
nique and Incomparable, not only for the Greek facts but also for the Uni-
versal facts.
In case that someone wanted to "emprison" in the written word only his
preserved oral traditions and the extensive "inexhaustible" dialogues that us,
some of his students of the last decade know, according to the most in-
dulgent calculations, would surpass at particular ease, the 1000 Substantial
Esoteric Works (unheard and revelationary at their total).
Certainly, if we also calculated what is not preserved or what we could
not trace or others of which the existence we know but we ignore their luck
(in Greece or in Alexandria where he lived for many years), then of course
there is no number (maybe they overpass the 5000 spiritual works that al-
so Orighenis is said to have written).
We consider as certain that the future generations in particular fervour,
attendance, care and struggle will look for elements, pieces, folds and de-
tails of the person and the work of a True Modern Initiate who walked a-
mong us and who delivered SO many things that fatally the people of the
future, being more mature spiritually, will recognize, will "worship" and will
seek for with a high zeal and a feeling of a real respect and responsibility.
The reader can find some elements for same in his unique public inter-
view that he conceded five months before his metastasis, in the meta-
physical journal "Third Eye", in the issue no. 28, December 1992, where he
revealed himself in public.
He who is interested in will find two more presentations-reports of his
life and his work in some recordings made by the narrow circle of his stu-
dents in the "Third Eye", in September of 1993 in the issue 28 (it is publised
above) and in May 1994 in the issue 35. Some of them are also re-published
in his books that were re-edited.
In the book of the responsible for the Omakoio of Trikala under the titre
"From the Master's Mouth to the Student's Ear, with a thorough glossary
of Sanscrit (philosophical dictionary of 400 words) for the students of Yo-
ga and of the Esoterism" all the above presentations as well as a new one
are found concentrated.
Finally, in the C' Volume of the Occultism, also a new important presen-
tation is contained about the Master.
His student Ilias L. Katsiampas is elaborating one ampler and more total
presentation of the life, the personality and the work of the Master that will
comprise even more folds of his passage from our world and his Esoteric
Work that he left as a deposit for the Knowledge and the Instruction of the
future generations that are developed in the Mysticism (Philosophical, G-
nosticistic and Religious).
99 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001
 ÐÅÑÉÅ×ÏÌÅÍÁ ÔÏÕ ÐÅÑÉÏÄÉÊÏÕ «ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ»
CONTENTS OF THE MAGAZINE «NEW OMAKOIO»

Óçìåßùìá ôïõ Åêäüôç -­Note­of­the­Publisher­­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­. 1­&­2

ÐáñÜêëçóç -­Request,­Åõ÷áñéóôßåò -­Thanks,­Óçìåßùóç­-­Note ­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­. 3

Ç Ýííïéá ôçò ëÝîçò Ïìáêïåßï -­The­meaning­of­the­word­Omakoio­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.4­&­5

Ç åöáñìïãÞ ôùí Ðíåõìáôéêþí Áîéþí óôçí óýã÷ñïíç êïéíùíßá (Çëßáò ÊáôóéÜìðáò)­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.6

The application of the Spiritual Values in the modern society (Ilias Katsiampas)

Ç ÌåôáöõóéêÞ ÁíáæÞôçóç ùò âáóéêü áíèñþðéíï äéêáßùìá (ÓìÜñù ÊïóìÜïãëïõ)­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.9

The Metaphysical Search as a basic human right (Smaro Kosmaoglou)

ÌÞíõìá: Åíüôçôá ãéá ôï 2001 (ÄçìÞôñçò ÔóáðÜñáò) ­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­. 11

Message: Unity for the 2001 (Dimitris Tsaparas)

Ç ÅðéóôçìïíéêÞ ÌÝèïäïò ôçò Ãéüãêá êáé ïé åöáñìïãÝò ôçò óôïí óýã÷ñïíï Üíèñùðï (Çëßáò ÊáôóéÜìðáò)­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.13
The Scientific Method of Yoga and its Applications to the modern man (Ilias Katsiampas)

Ðñþôç ÓõíïëéêÞ Ðáñïõóßáóç ôïõ ¸ñãïõ ôïõ ÍéêïëÜïõ Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ áðü ôïí ìáèçôÞ ôïõ Çëßá Ë. ÊáôóéÜìðá ­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.24
First Total Presentation of Nikolaos A. Margiori's work by his student Ilias L. Katsiampas

Ãåíéêüò ÔéìïêáôÜëïãïò ôùí 34 Âéâëßùí, 34 Ìåëåôþí, ôïõ ðåñéïäéêïý Ïìáêïåßïõ ­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.25 & 26
êáé ôùí äé' áëëçëïãñáößáò ÊëÜäùí Óðïõäþí ôïõ Åóùôåñéóìïý ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ Í. Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ
êáèþò êáé ôùí 2 âéâëßùí ôïõ ìáèçôÞ ôïõ Çëßá Ë. ÊáôóéÜìðá
General Price-list of the 34 Books, of the 34 Essays, of the Magazin Omakoio
and of the Correspondence Courses Branches of the Esoterism by Master N. A. Margioris,
as well as of the 2 Books of his student Ilias L. Katsiampasx

ÁíáëõôéêÞ Ðáñïõóßáóç ôùí 34 Âéâëßùí ôïõ Í. Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ (öùôü, ðåñéëÞøåéò êáé ðåñéå÷üìåíá ãéá ôï êáèÝíá) ­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.29
Analytical Presentation of the 34 Books of N. A. Margioris (photographs, summaries and contents for everybody)

ÁíáëõôéêÞ Ðáñïõóßáóç ôùí 2 Âéâëßùí ôïõ Çëßá Ë. ÊáôóéÜìðá (ìáèçôÞ ôïõ Í. Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ)­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.62
Analytical­Presentation­of­the­2­Books­of­Ilias­L.­Katsiampas­(student­of­N.­A.­Margioris)

Õðü ¸êäïóç Âéâëßá êáé ÌåëÝôåò ôïõ Çëßá Ë. ÊáôóéÜìðá­­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­. 64

Under­Edition­of­the­Books­end­Essays­of­Ilias­L.­Katsiampas

ÁíáëõôéêÞ Ðáñïõóßáóç ôùí 8 ÊëÜäùí Óðïõäþí äé' áëëçëïãñáößáò ôïõ Í. Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ ­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.65
Analytical Presentation of the 8 Studies by correspondence Course

ÁíáëõôéêÞ Ðáñïõóßáóç ôïõ ðåñéïäéêïý Ïìáêïåßïõ (49 ôåý÷ç) ðïõ åîÝäéäå ï Í. Á. ÌáñãéùñÞò­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.79
Analytical Presentation of the Magazine Omakoio (49 issues) that N. A. Margioris published

ÁíáëõôéêÞ Ðáñïõóßáóç ôùí 34 Ìåëåôþí ôïõ Í. Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.86

Analytical Presentation of the 34 Essays of N. A. Margioris

ÖéëïóïöéêÝò - ÅóùôåñéêÝò Ó÷ïëÝò óå ëåéôïõñãßá óôçí ÅëëÜäá êáé Äñáóôçñéüôçôåò ðïõ áíáðôýóóïõí ­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.92
Philosophical - Esoteric Schools in function in Greece and Activities that they develop

Âéïãñáöéêü Óçìåßùìá ôïõ ÄáóêÜëïõ Í. Á. ÌáñãéùñÞ ­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­.­. 96

Biographical Note of Master N. A. Margioris

ÍÅÏ ÏÌÁÊÏÅÉÏ 98 ÊÁËÏÊÁÉÑÉ 2001